1KHA000835-UEN en RE.316 4 Numerical Protection and Control Unit - Operating Instructions (Edition Oct 2004)

RE.
316*4
Numerical Protection and Control Devices
p Operating Instructions
1KHA000835-UEN
Edition October 2004
2004 ABB Switzerland Ltd Baden 1st Edition Applies for software version V6.4 and higher
All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and registration of other industrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorized use, in particular reproduction or making available to third parties without our explicit consent in writing is prohibited. The use is only allowed for the purpose laid down in the contract. This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of this the reader find an error, he is requested to inform us at his earliest convenience. The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a warranty of performance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our customers in mind that we constantly strive to improve our products and keep them abreast of advances in technology. This may, however, lead to discrepancies between a product and its 'Technical Description' or 'Operating Instructions'.
Version 6.4 and higher
1. Introduction 2. Description of hardware
3. Setting the functions
4. Description of function and application
5. Operation (CAP2/316)
6. Self-testing and diagnostics
7. Installation and maintenance
8. Technical data
9. Interbay bus (IBB) interface
10. Supplementary information
12. Appendices
How to use the Operating Instructions for the RE.316*4 V6.4 and higher
What do you wish to know about the device ...
* General theoretical familiarisation
What precisely?
Brief introduction General overview Technical data Hardware Software
Look in the following Chapter (C) / Sections (S):

C 1 (Introduction) C 1, S 2.1. to S 7.1. (all Section summaries) C 8 (Data Sheet, CT requirements) C 2 (Description of hardware) C 3 (Setting the functions) C 4 (Description of function and application) C 6 (Self-testing and diagnostics) C 10 (Software changes) S 7.2.1. S 7.3.1. C 12 (Wiring diagram), S 7.3., S 7.4. to S 7.5.5. C 9 (IBB) S 9.6. (IBB address list) S 5.2.2. S 5.2.3. to S 5.2.4.2., S 7.5.1. S 3.2. to S 3.4., S 5.3., S 5.4., S 5.9. S 3.5. to S 3.8., S 5.3., S 5.4., S 5.9. S 5.2.4.3. S 7.4.6. to S 7.4.10. S 5.5.3. S 7.5.6. S 5.5.4., S 7.6.1. S 7.7. S 7.8. S 5.5.1. S 3.7.4., S 5.5.5. S 5.5.2. S 5.10.
How to install and connect it
Checks upon receipt Location Process connections Control system connections
How to set and configure it
Installing the HMI Starting the HMI Configuration Setting functions Quitting the HMI Checking the connections Functional test Commissioning checks Fault-finding Updating software Adding hardware Sequential recorder Disturbance recorder Measurements Local Display Unit
How to check, test and commission it
How to maintain it
How to view and transfer data
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 2004
1.
1.1. 1.2. 1.2.1. 1.2.2. 1.2.3. 1.3. 1.3.1. 1.3.2. 1.4. 1.4.1. 1.4.2. 1.5. 1.5.1. 1.5.2. 1.6. 1.6.1. 1.6.2.
INTRODUCTION
General ..............................................................................................1-2 Safety instructions..............................................................................1-3 Safety instruction indications .............................................................1-3 General rules .....................................................................................1-3 General safety instructions ................................................................1-4 Line Protection REL316*4..................................................................1-5 Application .........................................................................................1-5 Main features .....................................................................................1-5 Transformer Protection RET316*4.....................................................1-8 Application .........................................................................................1-8 Main features .....................................................................................1-8 Generator Protection REG316*4 .....................................................1-10 Application .......................................................................................1-10 Main features ...................................................................................1-10 Control Device REC316*4 ...............................................................1-12 Application .......................................................................................1-12 Main features ...................................................................................1-12
1-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
1.
1.1.
INTRODUCTION
General The following device types, the Line Protection REL316*4, the Transformer Protection RET316*4, the Generator Protection REG316*4 and the Control Device REC316*4 comprise the new generation of fully digital protection systems, i.e. the analog- process inputs are converted to digital values immediately after the input transformers and the resulting digital signals are processed exclusively by micro-processors. This Operating Instructions is valid for all four device types. The designation 'RE.316*4' is used as the identification for the device family in the following sections. Because of its compact design, the use of only a few different hardware units, modular software and continuous self-monitoring and diagnostic functions, the RE.316*4 family optimally fulfils all the demands and expectations of a modern protection scheme with respect to efficient economic plant management and technical performance. The AVAILABILITY, which is the ratio between fault-free operating time and total operational life, is certainly the most important requirement a protection device has to fulfil. As a result of continuous monitoring, this ratio in the case of RE.316*4 is almost unity. SIMPLICITY of operation, control and commissioning of the device are achieved by the compact design and the interactive, PC based configuration program CAP2/316. Absolute FLEXIBILITY of the RE.316*4 scheme, i.e. adaptability to a specific primary system or existing protection (retrofitting), is assured by the supplementary functions incorporated in the software and by the ability to assign inputs and outputs with the CAP2/316. Decades of experience in the protection and control have gone into the development of the RE.316*4 to provide the highest degree of RELIABILITY, DISCRIMINATION and STABILITY. Digital processing of all the signals endows the scheme with ACCURACY and constant SENSITIVITY throughout its useful life.
1-2
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1.2. 1.2.1.
Safety instructions Safety instruction indications The following symbols are utilised for safety instructions in this Operating Instructions. These apply to person and personal working with the devices as well as the environment. This could involve more than one device of this family.
DANGER: This symbol indicates immediate danger due to high electrical voltage, or a mechanical or other cause. Non-observance can lead to serious injury or even death.
WARNING: This symbol draws attention to a dangerous situation. Non-observance can lead to serious injury to persons or damage to property.
CAUTION ESD: This symbol indicates specific information for the avoidance of equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge. The constructional elements and modules may only be touched by persons who are earthed. CAUTION LASER/LED: This symbol indicates the use of a laser of Class Laser/LED in the product. You should therefore avoid any direct eye contact with the laser.
NOTICE: An important instruction that must be observed.
IMPORTANT: It must be ensured that no possibly damaging situation can arise for the product or for its surroundings.
1.2.2.
General rules The RE.316*4 devices incorporates the latest practices and guidelines and complies with the recognized safety rules. Nevertheless, care must always be taken to avoid danger.
1-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Only use the RE.316*4 devices when it is in perfect working order and in strict accordance with these Operating Instructions. Dangerous situations can arise if the equipment is used improperly, especially if the user changes the configuration. 1.2.3. General safety instructions DANGER: Live electrical equipment is in the immediate vicinity of RE.316*4. Before working on the system, always ensure that contact with, or proximity to live voltage parts are avoided. The device RE.316*4 can initiate operation of other electrical equipment (circuit-breakers and isolators). Before working on the device, always ensure that unwanted operations are inhibited or have no effect on personnel or equipment. Strictly observe all safety precautions (interlocks, locks and blocking devices), especially those issued for the specific station. WARNING: Only properly authorized, professionally qualified and correspondingly trained personnel, who have also read and understood the operating instructions, may work on the RE.316*4 device.
1-4
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1.3. 1.3.1.
Line Protection REL316*4 Application The REL316*4 numerical line protection scheme is designed for the high-speed discriminative protection of lines and cables in distribution and transmission systems. The rated voltage of the line being protected is not a restriction and the protection is applicable to solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, systems with Petersen coils or to ungrounded systems. REL316*4 is suitable for the protection of long or short overhead lines or cables, double-circuit lines, heavily loaded lines, lines with weak infeeds and what are referred to as 'short-zone' lines. All kinds of faults are detected including close-in three-phase faults, cross-country faults, evolving faults and high-resistance earth faults. REL316*4 takes power swings and reversal of fault energy into account. Switching onto an existing fault results in instantaneous tripping of the circuit-breaker. REL316*4 places relatively low requirements on the performance of CTs and VTs and is not dependent on their characteristics (CVTs are permissible). REL316*4 can operate with any kind of communications channel (PLC, optical fibers etc.) between the terminal stations.
1.3.2.
Main features REL316*4s library of protection functions includes the following: Distance protection with overcurrent or underimpedance starters (polygon characteristic) 5 distance stages (independently set polygon characteristics for forwards and reverse measurement) definite time overcurrent back-up protection (including "shortzone" protection) VT supervision power-swing blocking system logic for switch-onto-fault protection overreaching permissive underreaching transfer tripping (also for weak infeed and communications channel failure) permissive overreaching transfer tripping (also for weak infeed, communications channel failure and reversal of fault energy direction)
1-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
blocking scheme (also for reversal of fault energy direction)
sensitive E/F protection for ungrounded systems E/F protection for grounded systems inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection overtemperature protection definite time over and undercurrent protection provision for inrush blocking inverse-time over/undercurrent protection (Current-Inv) directional definite time overcurrent protection directional inverse time overcurrent protection definite time over and undervoltage protection power protection synchrocheck. breaker failure protection longitudinal differential protection binary signal transmission. auto-reclosure supplementary logic functions such as logic timer delay contact bounce filter supplementary user logic programmed using CAP2/316 (function plan programming language FUPLA). This requires systems engineering.
REL316*4 includes the following communication channel functions:
REL316*4 includes the following logic functions:
The following measurement and monitoring functions are also provided: single-phase measuring function UIfPQ three-phase measurement module three-phase current plausibility three-phase voltage plausibility.
An event and disturbance recorder is integrated in the device (with information of fault distance converted to reference length).
1-6
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The allocation of the opto-coupler inputs, the LED signals and the auxiliary relay signal outputs, the setting of the various parameters, the configuration of the scheme and the display of the events and system variables are all performed interactively by means of the HMI. REL316*4 is equipped with serial interfaces for the connection of a local control PC and for remote communication with the station control system. REL316*4 is also equipped with continuous self-monitoring and selfdiagnostic functions. Suitable testing devices (e.g. the MODURES test set XS92b) are available for quantitative testing. REL316*4 can be semi-flush or surface mounted or can be installed in an equipment rack.
1-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
1.4. 1.4.1.
Transformer Protection RET316*4 Application The digital transformer protection RET316*4 is designed for fast selective protection of two and three-winding power transformers. It can also be applied to the protection of autotransformers and generator/transformer units. The unit detects the following faults on power transformers: all phase faults earth faults where the power transformer star-point is solidly or low-impedance grounded inter-turn faults
The RET316*4 places only low requirements on main CT performance. 1.4.2. Main features RET316*4 can be supplied with a desired combination of the following protection functions. The functions are selected from the RE.216 / RE.316*4 library of function modules: The transformer differential protection function (Diff-Transf) is one of the most important and provides fast selective protection of all transformers with ratings above a few MVA. The thermal overload function (Overtemp) protects the insulation against damage due to excessively high temperatures. It is normally equipped with two independently set operating stages and is used especially where oil temperature monitors are not installed. definite time over and undercurrent protection (Current-DT) provision for inrush restraint peak value overcurrent protection (Current-Inst) inverse time-overcurrent protection (Current-Inv) directional definite time overcurrent protection (DirCurrentDT) directional inverse time overcurrent protection (DirCurrentInv) inverse definite minimum time overcurrent function (I0-Invers) definite time over and undervoltage protection (Voltage-DT)
1-8
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
peak value overvoltage protection (Voltage-Inst) power function (Power) frequency function (Frequency) rate-of-change frequency protection (df/dt) definite time overfluxing (Overexcitat) inverse time overexcitation (U/F-Inv) distance protection (Distance) as backup protection for the power transformer and neighbouring lines breaker failure protection (BreakerFailure) supplementary logic functions such as supplementary user logic programmed with the aid of CAP2/316 (function plan programming language FUPLA). This requires systems engineering. logic delay counter (Count) contact bounce filter
The following measurement and monitoring functions are also provided: single-phase measuring function UIfPQ three-phase measurement module three-phase current plausibility three-phase voltage plausibility disturbance recorder
The device has an integrated event logger. The allocation of the opto-coupler inputs, the LED signals and the auxiliary relay signal outputs, the setting of the various parameters, the configuration of the scheme and the display of the events and system variables are all performed interactively by means of the HMI. RET316*4 is equipped with serial interfaces for the connection of a local HMI (PC) and for remote communication with the station control system. RET316*4 is also equipped with continuous self-monitoring and selfdiagnostic functions. Suitable testing devices (e.g. test set XS92b) are available for quantitative testing. RET316*4 can be semi-flush or surface mounted or can be installed in an equipment rack.
1-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
1.5. 1.5.1.
Generator Protection REG316*4 Application The REG316*4 numerical generator protection has been designed for the high-speed discriminative protection of small and medium size generators. It can be applied to units with or without step-up transformer in power utility or industrial power plants. REG316*4 places relatively low requirements on the performance of CTs and VTs and is independent of their characteristics.
1.5.2.
Main features REG316*4s library of protection functions includes the following: generator differential transformer differential definite time over and undercurrent provision for inrush blocking (Current-Inst) (Imax-Umin) (Current-Inv) (DirCurrentDT) (DirCurrentInv) (NPS-DT) (NPS-Inv) (Voltage-DT) (Voltage-Inst) (Underimped) (MinReactance) (Power) (OLoad-Stator) (OLoad-Rotor) (Frequency) (df/dt) peak value overcurrent voltage-controlled overcurrent inverse time overcurrent directional definite time overcurrent protection directional inverse time overcurrent protection definite time NPS inverse time NPS definite time over and undervoltage peak value overvoltage underimpedance underreactance power protection stator overload rotor overload frequency rate-of-change frequency protection (Diff-Gen) (Diff-Transf) (Current-DT)
1-10
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
overexcitation inverse time overexcitation voltage comparison overtemperature 100 % stator ground fault 100 % rotor ground fault pole slipping inverse time ground fault overcurrent breaker failure protection supplementary logic functions such as
(Overexcitat) (U/f-Inv) (Voltage-Bal) (Overtemp) (Stator-EFP) (Rotor-EFP) (Pole-Slip) (I0-Invers) (BreakerFailure)
supplementary user logic programmed using CAP2/316 (function plan programming language FUPLA). This requires systems engineering. logic timers metering debounce.
The following measuring and monitoring functions are also available: single-phase measuring function UIfPQ three-phase measurement module three-phase current plausibility three-phase voltage plausibility disturbance recorder
The device has an integrated event logger. The allocation of the opto-coupler inputs, the LED signals and the auxiliary relay signal outputs, the setting of the various parameters, the configuration of the scheme and the display of the events and system variables are all performed interactively by means of the HMI. REG316*4 is equipped with serial interfaces for the connection of a local control PC and for remote communication with the station control system. REG316*4 is also equipped with continuous self-monitoring and selfdiagnostic functions. Suitable testing devices (e.g. test set XS92b) are available for quantitative testing. REG316*4 can be semi-flush or surface mounted or can be installed in an equipment rack.
1-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
1.6. 1.6.1.
Control Device REC316*4 Application The numerical control unit REC316*4 is designed to perform data acquisition, monitoring, and control functions in MV and HV substations. It is installed in the individual switchgear bays. The switchgear bay control unit can be configured for SF6 gasinsulated switchgear (GIS), for indoor and outdoor switchgear and for single, double or multiple busbar stations. REC316*4 registers and processes the switchgear position signals, the measured variables and the alarms occurring in a switchgear bay. The corresponding data are then made available to the station control level at the communication interface (IBB). REC316*4 receives control instructions from the station control level or from the local mimic, processes them in relation to the bay control logic and executes them. The interlocks included in the REC316*4 control device prevent inadmissible switching operations, which could cause damage to plant or endanger personnel. REC316*4 checks the synchronisation on both sides of the circuitbreaker before enabling the close command. A frequency protection function is integrated in REC316*4, which enables intelligent load shedding. REC316*4 also provides facility for adding feeder protection functions. REC316*4 measures the currents and voltages at the main CTs and VTs, calculates the corresponding real power, reactive power and frequency and transfers the data to the station control level. REC316*4 is equipped with a communication interface (IBB) for twoway communication via an optical fiber link with the station control level.
1.6.2.
Main features The library of function blocks for the REC316*4 control device includes the following control, protection, measurement and logic functions: Control function: This depends on the particular application for which it is specifically created using CAP2/316 (FUPLA function plan programming language). detection and plausibility check of switchgear position signals switchgear control interlocks generation and monitoring of switchgear commands run-time monitoring detection of alarms and alarm logic
1-12
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
integration of the local mimic. definite time overcurrent peak value overcurrent inverse time overcurrent directional definite time overcurrent directional inverse time overcurrent inverse time overcurrent ground fault protection definite time overvoltage peak value overvoltage power function overtemperature frequency function rate-of-change frequency function auto-reclosure synchrocheck function Breaker failure function logic delay counter flatter detection Contact bounce filter. single-phase measuring function for U, I, f, P and Q three-phase measuring function for U, I, f, P, Q and cos three-phase current plausibility three-phase voltage plausibility.
Protection functions:
Logic functions:
Measurement and monitoring functions:
The device has an integrated disturbance recorder and event recorder. The allocation of the opto-coupler inputs, the LED signals and the auxiliary relay signal outputs, the setting of the various parameters, the configuration of the scheme and the display of the events and system variables are all performed interactively by means of the menucontrolled HMI.
1-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
REC316*4 is equipped with serial interfaces for the connection of a local HMI (PC) and for remote communication with the station control system. REC316*4 is also equipped with continuous self-monitoring and selfdiagnostic functions. Suitable testing devices (e.g. test set XS92b) are available for quantitative testing of measurement and protection functions. REC316*4 can be semi-flush or surface mounted or can be installed in an equipment rack.
1-14
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 04
2.
2.1. 2.2. 2.2.1. 2.2.2. 2.2.3. 2.2.4. 2.2.5. 2.2.6. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 2.7. 2.8. 2.9. 2.9.1. 2.9.2. 2.9.3. 2.10.
DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE
Summary............................................................................................2-2 Mechanical design .............................................................................2-4 Hardware versions .............................................................................2-4 Construction.......................................................................................2-4 Casing and methods of mounting ......................................................2-4 Front of the protection unit .................................................................2-4 PC connection....................................................................................2-5 Test facilities ......................................................................................2-5 Auxiliary supply unit ...........................................................................2-6 Input transformer unit.........................................................................2-6 Main processor unit............................................................................2-7 Binary I/O unit ....................................................................................2-8 Interconnection unit............................................................................2-8 Injection unit REX010 ........................................................................2-9 Injection transformer block REX011 ................................................2-13 REX011............................................................................................2-13 REX011-1, -2 ...................................................................................2-14 Figures .............................................................................................2-18 Testing without the generator ..........................................................2-27
2-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
2.
2.1.
DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE
Summary The hardware of the digital protection scheme RE.316*4 comprises 4 to 8 plug-in units, a connection unit and the casing: Input transformer unit A/D converter unit Main processor unit 1 up to 4 binary I/O units or or or Type 316GW61 Type 316EA63 Type 316VC61a Type 316VC61b Type 316DB61 Type 316DB62 Type 316DB63 Type 316NG65 or Type 316ML61a Type 316ML62a
Auxiliary supply unit Connection unit
Casing and terminals for analog signals and connectors for binary signals
The A/D converter Type 316EA63 is only used in conjunction with the longitudinal differential protection and includes the optical modems for transferring the measurements to the remote station. Binary process signals are detected by the binary I/O unit and transferred to the main processor which processes them in relation to the control and protection functions for the specific project and then activates the output relays and LEDs accordingly. The analog input variables are electrically insulated from the electronic circuits by the screened windings of the transformers in the input transformer unit. The transformers also reduce the signals to a suitable level for processing by the electronic circuits. The input transformer unit provides accommodation for nine transformers. Essentially the main processor unit 316VC61a or 316VC61b comprises the main processor (80486-based), the A/D converter unit, the communication interface control system and 2 PCMCIA slots. Binary process signals, signals pre-processed by the control logic, events, analog variables, disturbance recorder files and device control settings can be transferred via the communication interface to the station control room. In the reverse direction, signals to the control logic and for switching sets of parameter settings are transferred by the station control system to the protection. RE.316*4 can be equipped with one up to four binary I/O units.
2-2
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
There are two tripping relays on the units 316DB61 and 316DB62, each with two contacts and according to version either: 8 optocoupler inputs and 6 signaling relays or 4 optocoupler inputs and 10 signaling relays.
The I/O unit 316DB63 is equipped with 14 optocoupler inputs and 8 signaling relays. The 16 LEDs on the front are controlled by the 316DB6x units located in slots 1 and 2.
2-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
2.2. 2.2.1.
Mechanical design Hardware versions RE.316*4 is available in a number of different versions, which are listed in the data sheet under 'Ordering information'.
2.2.2.
Construction The RE.316*4 is 6 U standard units high (U = 44.45 mm) and either 225 mm (Order code N1) or 271 mm wide (Order code N2). The various units are inserted into the casing from the rear (see Fig. 12.3) and then screwed to the cover plate.
2.2.3.
Casing and methods of mounting The casing is suitable for three methods of mounting. Semi-flush mounting The casing can be mounted semi-flush in a switch panel with the aid of four fixing brackets. The dimensions of the panel cut-out can be seen from the data sheet. The terminals are located at the rear. Installation in a 19" rack A mounting plate with all the appropriate cut-outs is available for fitting the protection into a 19" rack (see data sheet). The terminals are located at the rear. Surface mounting A hinged frame (see data sheet) is available for surface mounting. The terminals are located at the rear.
2.2.4.
Front of the protection unit A front view of the protection and the functions of the frontplate elements can be seen from Fig. 12.2. A reset button is located behind the frontplate which serves three purposes: resetting the tripping relays and where the are configured to latch, also the signaling relays and LEDs and deleting the distance protection display when running the control program resetting of error messages resulting from defects detected by the self-monitoring or diagnostic functions (short press) resetting the entire protection (warm start, press for at least ten seconds) following the detection of a serious defect by the selfmonitoring or diagnostic functions.
These control operations can also be executed using the local control unit on the front of the device. Should the latter fail, the reset button can be pressed using a suitable implement through the hole in the frontplate.
2-4
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
2.2.5.
PC connection In order to set the various parameters, read events and measurements of system voltages and currents and also for diagnostic and maintenance purposes, a personal computer (PC) must be connected to the optical serial interface (Fig. 12.2).
2.2.6.
Test facilities A RE.316*4 protection can be tested using a test set Type XS92b.
2-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
2.3.
Auxiliary supply unit The auxiliary supply unit 316NG65 derives all the supply voltages the protection requires from the station battery. Capacitors are provided which are capable of bridging short interruptions (max. 50 ms) of the input voltage. The auxiliary supply unit is protected against changes of polarity. In the event of loss of auxiliary supply, the auxiliary supply unit also generates all the control signals such as re-initialization and blocking signals needed by all the other units. The technical data of the auxiliary supply unit are to be found in the data sheet.
2.4.
Input transformer unit The input transformer unit 316GW61 serves as input interface between the analog primary system variables such as currents and voltages and the protection. The mounting plate of the unit can accommodate up to nine CTs and VTs. The shunts across the secondaries of the CTs are also mounted in the input transformer unit. The input transformers provide DC isolation between the primary system and the electronic circuits and also reduce (in the case of the CTs, with the aid of a shunt) the voltage and current signals to a suitable level for processing by the A/D converters. Thus the input transformer unit produces voltage signals at its outputs for both current and voltage channels. The CTs and VTs actually fitted in the input transformer unit vary according to version. Further information can be obtained from the data sheet.
2-6
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
2.5.
Main processor unit The main processor runs the control and protection algorithms as determined by the particular settings. It receives its data from the A/D converter unit and the I/O unit. The results computed by the algorithms are transferred either directly or after further logical processing to the binary I/O unit. A 80486-based microprocessor is used in the main processor unit 316VC61a or 316VC61b. The samples taken by the A/D converter are pre-processed by a digital signal processor (DSP). The interfaces for connecting an HMI PC and for communication with the station control system (SPA, IEC60870-5-103) are included. A PCMCIA interface with two slots facilitates connection to other bus systems such as LON and MVB. The flash EPROMs used as program memory enable the software to be downloaded from the PC via the port on the front. A self-monitoring routine runs in the background on the main processor. The main processor itself (respectively the correct operation of the program) is monitored by a watchdog.
2-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
2.6.
Binary I/O unit The binary I/O unit 316DB6x enables binary signals received via optocouplers from station plant to be read and tripping and other signals to be issued externally. All the input and output units provide electrical insulation between the external signaling circuits and the internal electronic circuits. The I/O units in slots 1 and 2 also control the statuses of 8 LEDs each on the frontplate via a corresponding buffer memory. The numbers of inputs and outputs required for the particular version are achieved by fitting from one to four binary I/O units. The relationship between the versions and the number of I/O units is given in the data sheet. The optocoupler inputs are adapted to suit the available input voltage range by choice of resistor soldered to soldering posts. This work is normally carried at the works as specified in the order. The technical data of the optocoupler inputs and the tripping and signaling outputs can be seen from the data sheet.
2.7.
Interconnection unit The wiring between the various units is established by the interconnecting unit 316ML62a (width 271 mm) or 316ML61a (width 225 mm). It is located inside the housing behind the frontplate and carries the connectors and wiring needed by the individual units. In addition, the interconnection unit includes the connections to the local control unit, the reset button and 16 LEDs for status signals.
2-8
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
2.8.
Injection unit REX010 The injection unit Type REX010 provides the power supply for the injection transformer block Type REX011. The injection transformer block generates the signals needed for the 100% stator and rotor ground fault protection schemes. The signals all have the same waveform (see Fig. 2.3). The injection unit is installed in an REG316*4 casing and therefore the mechanical and general data are the same as specified for the REG316*4. Three versions of the injection unit with the designations U1, U2 and U3 are available for the following station battery voltages:
Battery voltage U1: 110 or 125 V DC U3: 48; 60; 110 V DC
Tolerance +10 % / -20 % 36...140 V DC
Output 110 V or 125 V, 1.1 A 96 V, 1 A 96 V, 1 A
U2: 110; 125; 220; 250 V DC 88...312 V DC
Versions U2 and U3 operate with a DC/DC converter. Newer injection units with the auxiliary supply unit 316NE62 are marked with the code U0 and have only one variant with an voltage range from 36 to 312 V. The frequency of the injection voltage, which corresponds precisely to 14 of the rated frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz, can be selected by positioning a plug-in jumper on PCB 316AI61. The frequency is then 12.5 Hz in position X12 and 15.0 Hz in position X11. Controls and signals: Green LED READY: Auxiliary supply switched on Red LED OVERLOAD: The internal protection circuit has picked up and injection is interrupted. Yellow LED DISABLED: Injection is disabled on the switch on the frontplate or via the optocoupler input. Toggle switch ENABLE, DISABLE: Position 0: Injection enabled. Position 1: Injection disabled. Reset button RESET: The protection circuit latches when it operates and is reset by this button upon which the red LED extinguishes.
Only the green LED is lit during normal operation.
2-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The protection circuit guards against excessive feedback from the generator and interrupts the injection for zero-crossing currents 5 A. The protection circuit will not reset, if the fault that caused it to pick up is still present. In such a case, switch off the supply and check the external wiring for short-circuits and open-circuits. Optocoupler input: This has the same function as the reset button and can also be used to disable injection. The latter occurs when the input is at logical '1'. Injection is resumed as soon as the input returns to logical '0'.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the injection voltage is switched off before carrying out any work at the star-point. The toggle switch on the front of the injection unit REX010 must be set to 'disable' and the yellow LED 'disabled' must lit.
The input voltage, the injection frequency and the optocoupler voltage must be specified in the customers order and are then set in the works prior to delivery. There are no controls inside the unit, which have to be set by the user. Supply failure If the green LED READY is not lit in the case of version U1 although the correct auxiliary supply voltage is applied, check and if necessary replace the fuse on the supply unit 316NE61. The fuse holder is located at the rear next to the auxiliary supply terminals. Fuse type: cartridge 2 A slow 5 x 20 mm
Faulty U2, U3 and U0 units must be returned to the nearest ABB agent or directly to ABB Switzerland Ltd, Baden, Switzerland.
2-10
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 2.1
Injection unit REX010 (front view) (corresponds to HESG 448 574)
2-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 2.2
PCB 316AI61 in the injection unit (derived from HESG 324 366) showing locations of X11 and X12
2-12
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
2.9.
Injection transformer block REX011 In conjunction with the injection unit Type REX010, the injection transformer block Type REX011 supplies the injection and reference signals for testing the 100% stator and rotor ground fault protection schemes. The injection transformer block used must correspond to the method of grounding the stator circuit: primary injection at the star-point: secondary injection at the star-point: secondary injection at the terminals: REX011 REX011-1 REX011-2
Each injection transformer type has three secondary windings for the following voltages: Uis: Uir: Ui: stator injection voltage rotor injection voltage reference voltage connected to analog input channel 8 of REG316*4.
The same injection transformer is used for stator and rotor protection schemes. The rated values of the injection voltages Uis, Uir and Ui apply for the version REX010 U1 and a station battery voltage of UBat = 110 V DC. All the voltages are less by a factor of 96/110 = 0.8727 in the case of versions U2 and U3. Thus the primary injection voltage for the stator circuit is 96 V. 2.9.1. REX011 This version is designed for primary injection at the star-point and is available with the following rated voltages:
Uis Uir Ui 110 V 50 V 25 V
*)
Table 2.1
REX011
*) The winding for voltage Uir has a tapping at 30 V. This enables Uir to be stepped down to 30 V or 20 V where an injection voltage less than 50 V is necessary.
2-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
2.9.2.
REX011-1, -2 The injection transformers have the following IDs (see Table 2.2 and Table 2.3): HESG 323 888 M11, M12 or M13 for REX011-1 HESG 323 888 M21, M22 or M23 for REX011-2
The injection transformers used for secondary injection of the stator circuit have four injection voltage windings connected in parallel or series to adjust the power to suit the particular grounding resistor. The value of the parallel resistor R'Ps, respectively the maximum injection voltage determine the permissible injection voltage.
R'Ps [m] >8 > 32 > 128
Uis [V] 0.85 1.7 3.4
Version M11 M12 M13
Table 2.2
REX011-1
R'Ps [] > 0.45 > 1.8 > 7.2
Uis [V] 6.4 12.8 25.6
Version M21 M22 M23
Table 2.3
REX011-2
Always select the maximum possible injection voltage. For example, for a grounding resistor R'Ps = 35 m, Uis = 1.7 V is used. In the case of versions M11, M12 and M13, the impedance of the connection between the injection transformer and the grounding resistor R'Ps should be as low as possible. The resistance of both connecting cables should not exceed 5% of R'Ps, e.g. for a grounding resistor of R'Ps = 35 m and a length of the connecting cables of 2 2 m = 4 m, the cables must have a gauge of 40 mm2. Voltages Uir and Ui are the same as for REX011.
2-14
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The connections to the primary system are made via the two UHV heavy-duty terminals 10 and 15, which are designed for spade terminals. There are four universal terminals 11 to 14 type UK35 between the two heavy-duty terminals that are used for the internal wiring. Depending on the version, the four windings must be connected to the corresponding universal or heavy current terminals. Should the version as supplied be unsuitable for the application, the connections of the windings can be modified as required according to the following diagrams. In the case of versions M12, M22, M13 and M23, shorting links KB-15 must be placed on the universal terminals. How this is done can be seen from the diagram 'Shorting links' at the end of this section. Shorting links and 3 rating plates are supplied with every transformer. The corresponding rating plate must be affixed over the old one following conversion.
Versions M11 and M21

S3
10 11 12
S4
13 14
S5
15
S6
16 17
10
11
12 13
14
15
heavy-duty terminals (UHV) universal terminals (UK)
In the case of versions M11 (REX011-1) and M21 (REX011-2), the two windings S3 and S4 are connected in parallel across the heavy-duty terminals (10, 15). The other two windings are not used and are wired to the universal terminals. The shorting links KB-15 are not needed and must be removed.
2-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

S3
10 11
S4
12 13
S5
14 15
S6
16 17
10
11
12
13
14
15
heavy-duty terminals (UHV) universal terminals (UK) shorting links KB-15
In the case of versions M12 (REX011-1) and M22 (REX011-2), two pairs of parallel windings are connected in series. All the universal terminals are connected together using the shorting links KB-15.

S3
10 11 12
S4
13
S5
14 15
S6
16 17
10
11
12
13
14
15
heavy-duty terminals (UHV) universal terminals (UK) shorting links KB-15
In the case of versions M13 (REX011-1) and M23 (REX011-2), all the windings S3...S6 are connected in series. Terminals M12 and M13 are bridged by a shorting link KB-15.
2-16
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
In the following figure the shorting links of the versions M12 and M22 are shown:
Shorting links Terminal screws
Shorting links
Universal terminals Teminals 11 to 14
4 terminal screws, 3 shorting links with offset and 1 flat shorting link are supplied with every transformer. The shorting links are placed in the recesses provided on the universal terminals. Versions M12 and M22: First place the broken off shorting link with the opening downwards on terminal 11 and then fit 3 links one after the other. Each one must be secured using one of the screws supplied. Versions M13 and M23: First place the broken off shorting link with the opening downwards on terminal 12 and then fit 2 links one after the other. Each one must be secured using one of the screws supplied.
2-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
2.9.3.
Figures Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4 Fig. 2.5 Fig. 2.6 Fig. 2.7 Fig. 2.8 Fig. 2.9 Fig. 2.10 Fig. 2.11 Injection signal Uis Wiring diagram for primary injection at the stator using REX011 Wiring diagram for secondary injection of the stator at the star-point using REX011-1 Wiring diagram for secondary injection of the stator at the terminals using REX011-2 Wiring diagram for rotor ground fault protection using REX011 Wiring diagram for rotor ground fault protection using REX011-1, -2 Wiring diagram for testing without the generator using REX011 Wiring diagram for testing without the generator using REX011-1, -2 Dimensioned drawing of the injection transformer block Type REX011
[V]
110
-110
Injection
Test
320
640
[ms]
Fig. 2.3
Injection signal Uis
2-18
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Generator
REG316*4
T18
REX010
T. T.
X1
Ui1
REX011
X1 6
REs
N12
N11 Us
rest+ rest-
7 6 8 3
Voltage transformer
T17
7
Ui2
RPs
3 10 Ui T15
UBat+ 3 UBat- 2
Ui3 Up8+ Up8-
4 1 2 P8nax
11
T16
1 2
Fig. 2.4
Wiring diagram for primary injection at the stator using REX011 (see Fig. 2.11)
2-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd

R S T
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Generator Voltage transformer N1 Grounding transformator N2 N'12 N'11 Us
REG316*4
T18
R'Es R'Ps
T17
REX010
T. T.
X1
Ui1
REX011-1
T15 X2
10
rest+ rest-
7 6 8 3
Uis
15
Ui2
T16
X1
8
4
Ui3 Up8+ Up8-
4 1 2 P8nax
Ui
UBat+ 3 UBat2
1 2
Fig. 2.5
Wiring diagram for secondary injection of the stator at the star-point using REX011-1 (see Fig. 2.11)
2-20
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Grounding transformator
N1
N2
Voltage transformer N'12 N'11 Us
REG316*4
T18
R'Es R'Ps
Generator
T17
REX010
T. T.
X1
Ui1
REX011-2
T15
X2 10
rest+ rest-
7 6 8 3
Uis
15
Ui2
T16
X1
8
4
Ui3 Up8+ Up8-
4 1 2 P8nax
Ui
UBat+ 3 UBat2
1 2
Fig. 2.6
Wiring diagram for secondary injection of the stator at the terminals using REX011-2 (see Fig. 2.11)
2-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
+ Rotor
2x2 uF
8 kV
2x2 uF 2) 1)
8 kV
REG316*4
T14
REX010
T. T.
X1
Ui1
REX011
REr
X1 8
T13
rest+ rest-
7 6 8 3
RPr
9
Ui2
316 GW61
3 10 Ui
T15
UBat+ 3 UBat- 2
Ui3 Up8+ Up8-
4 1 2 P8nax
11
T16
1 2
1) 2)
Injection at both poles Injection at one pole for brushless excitation
Fig. 2.7
Wiring diagram for rotor ground fault protection using REX011 (see Fig. 2.11)
2-22
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
+ Rotor
2x2 uF
8 kV
2x2 uF 2) 1)
8 kV
REG316*4
T14
REX010
T. T.
5
REX011-1, -2
X1
Ui1
REr
6
X1
T13
rest+ rest-
7 6 8 3
RPr
7
Ui2
316 GW61
3 8 Ui
T15
UBat+ 3 UBat- 2
Ui3 Up8+ Up8-
4 1 2 P8nax
T16
1 2
1) Injection at both poles 2) Injection at one pole for brushless excitation
Fig. 2.8
Wiring diagram for rotor ground fault protection using REX011-1, -2 (see Fig. 2.11)
2-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
S1
Ck = 4 uF S2 Rf CE = 1 uF
1k 2,5 W
REG316*4
T18
REX010
T. T.
X1
Ui1
REX011
X1 8
22
Us
5 7 6 8 3
T17
150
50 V
9
Ui2
>10 W
T14
Ur
10
4
T13 T15
Ui
Ui3 Up8+ Up8-
4 1 2 P8nax
UBat+ 3 UBat- 2
11
1 2
T16
Fig. 2.9
Wiring diagram for testing without the generator using REX011
S1: Ck: Rf: S2:
Bridging of the rotor coupling capacitor Rotor coupling capacitor Variable ground fault resistor Ground fault resistor = 0
CE: Rotor/stator ground capacitance
2-24
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
S1
Ck = 4 uF S2
Rf
CE = 1 uF
REG316*4
1 k 2,5 W
REX010
T. T.
REX011-1, -2
X1 Ui1
X1
T18
22
Us
T17
5 7 6 8 3
50 V
7
Ui2
150
>10 W
316 GW61
T13
Ur
8
T14 T15
Ui
UBat+ UBat-
3 2
Ui3
Up8+ Up8-
4 1 2
1 2
P8nax
T16
Fig. 2.10
Wiring diagram for testing without the generator using REX011-1, -2
S1: Ck: Rf: S2:
Bridging of the rotor coupling capacitor Rotor coupling capacitor Variable ground fault resistor Ground fault resistor = 0 .
CE: Rotor/stator ground capacitance
2-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 2.11
Dimensioned drawing of the injection transformer block Type REX011 (corresponds to HESG 324 388)
2-26
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
2.10.
Testing without the generator
In order to test the operation of the injection unit Type REX010 plus injection transformer block Type REX011 or REX011-1/-2 and the Stator-EFP and Rotor-EFP protection functions without them being connected to the protected unit, set up the test circuit shown in Fig. 2.9 or Fig. 2.10.The two grounding resistors RE and RP are used for both stator and rotor protection schemes to simplify the circuit. The injection voltage of 50 V is also common to both. The ground fault resistance is simulated by the variable resistor Rf.
Stator ground fault protection:
To test the stator ground fault protection, switch S1 must be kept closed all the time. The grounding resistor RE comprises two resistors of 1 k and 22 . This is a simple method of simulating the ratio of the VT. Settings for MTR and REs: The theoretical value of MTR is determined as follows:
MTR =
110 V 22 + 1000 x = 102 50 V 22
The low injection voltage of 50 V increases the value of MTR by a factor 110 V/50 V. REs = 1022 The settings can also be determined using the setting functions 'MTR-Adjust' and 'REs-Adjust' according to Section 3.5.32. which is to be preferred to the above calculation.
Rotor ground fault protection:
To test the rotor ground fault protection, the switch S1 must be kept open all the time with the exception of when the coupling capacitor is bridged for setting mode 'AdjRErInp'. Settings: The theoretical settings are: REr = 1022 Ck = 4 F The settings can also be determined using the setting functions 'REsAdjust' and 'CoupC-Adjust' according to Section 3.5.33. which is to be preferred to the above calculation.
2-27
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 2004
3.
3.1. 3.1.1. 3.1.2. 3.1.2.1. 3.1.2.2. 3.1.2.3. 3.2. 3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4. 3.2.5. 3.3. 3.4. 3.4.1. 3.4.2. 3.4.3. 3.4.4. 3.4.5. 3.5. 3.5.1. 3.5.2. 3.5.2.1. 3.5.2.2. 3.5.2.2.1. 3.5.2.2.2. 3.5.2.2.3. 3.5.2.2.4. 3.5.2.2.5. 3.5.2.2.6. 3.5.2.3. 3.5.2.3.1. 3.5.2.3.2. 3.5.2.3.3. 3.5.2.3.4. 3.5.2.3.5. 3.5.2.4. 3.5.2.5. 3.5.2.6. 3.5.2.7. 3.5.2.8.
SETTING THE FUNCTION PARAMETERS

General ..............................................................................................3-5 Library and settings............................................................................3-5 Control and protection function sequence .........................................3-5 Repetition rate....................................................................................3-5 Computation requirement of protection functions ..............................3-6 Computing requirement of the control functions ..............................3-10 Control and protection function inputs and outputs..........................3-10 Analog / Digital Converter ................................................................3-10 Binary inputs ....................................................................................3-11 Signalling outputs.............................................................................3-11 Tripping relay outputs ......................................................................3-12 Measured variables..........................................................................3-12 Frequency range..............................................................................3-13 System parameter settings ..............................................................3-13 Relay configuration ..........................................................................3-13 Configuration of the A / D Converter................................................3-16 Entering comments for binary inputs and outputs............................3-18 Masking binary inputs, entering latching parameters and definition of 'double indications' .......................................................3-18 System I / O .....................................................................................3-19 Protection functions .........................................................................3-23 HV distance protection function .......................... (HV-Distance)......3-23 Distance protection ................................................... (Distance)......3-25 General ............................................................................................3-47 Starters ............................................................................................3-48 Overcurrent starters .........................................................................3-48 Underimpedance starters.................................................................3-48 Current enable .................................................................................3-50 E/F detector .....................................................................................3-51 Phase preference logic ....................................................................3-51 Undervoltage starters.......................................................................3-52 Measuring units................................................................................3-52 Determining the distance zones.......................................................3-52 Directional element ..........................................................................3-58 Overreaching zone...........................................................................3-59 Reverse zone...................................................................................3-59 Time steps .......................................................................................3-59 Definitive zone .................................................................................3-60 Back-up overcurrent protection........................................................3-61 VT supervision .................................................................................3-62 Tripping logic....................................................................................3-63 Power-swing blocking ......................................................................3-65
3-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.5.2.9. 3.5.2.10. 3.5.2.11. 3.5.2.12. 3.5.3. 3.5.4. 3.5.4.1. 3.5.4.2. 3.5.4.3. 3.5.4.4. 3.5.4.5. 3.5.4.6. 3.5.4.7. 3.5.4.8. 3.5.4.9. 3.5.4.10. 3.5.4.11. 3.5.5. 3.5.5.1. 3.5.5.2. 3.5.5.3. 3.5.5.4. 3.5.5.5. 3.5.5.6. 3.5.5.7. 3.5.5.8. 3.5.5.9. 3.5.5.10. 3.5.5.11. 3.5.5.12. 3.5.5.13. 3.5.6. 3.5.7. 3.5.8. 3.5.9. 3.5.10. 3.5.11. 3.5.12. 3.5.13. 3.5.14. 3.5.15.
Allocation of CT and VT inputs ........................................................3-65 Allocation of binary inputs ................................................................3-65 Allocation of tripping commands ......................................................3-67 Signals .............................................................................................3-67 Sensitive earth fault protection for ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils......... (EarthFaultIsol)......3-69 Auto-reclosure................................................... (Autoreclosure)......3-75 General ............................................................................................3-90 Connections between auto-reclosure and distance functions ............................................................................3-90 Connections between auto-reclosure and overcurrent or differential functions..................................................3-92 Redundant schemes ........................................................................3-94 Master/follower logic ........................................................................3-96 Duplex logic .....................................................................................3-98 Timers ............................................................................................3-100 External binary inputs ....................................................................3-103 Close CB and signalling outputs ....................................................3-105 Timing diagrams ............................................................................3-107 Checking the dead times ...............................................................3-117 Sensitive earth fault protection for grounded systems..............................................(EarthFltGnd2)....3-119 Coordination with the distance protection ......................................3-125 Choice of operating mode..............................................................3-126 Choice of transfer tripping scheme ................................................3-126 Setting the enabling pick-up levels ................................................3-130 Setting the characteristic angle 'Angle' ..........................................3-131 Setting the basic time 't Basic' .......................................................3-131 Circuit-breaker delay......................................................................3-132 The comparison time 't comp' ........................................................3-132 Setting the waiting time 't Wait' ......................................................3-132 Setting the transient blocking time 't TransBlk' ..............................3-132 CT/VT inputs of the function ..........................................................3-133 Binary inputs of the function...........................................................3-133 Outputs ..........................................................................................3-134 Inverse definite minimum time earth fault overcurrent function .................................................. (I0-Invers)....3-135 Definite time over and undercurrent...................... (Current-DT)....3-141 Peak value overcurrent ........................................ (Current-Inst)....3-147 Inverse time overcurrent ....................................... (Current-Inv)....3-153 Directional definite time overcurrent protection ...........................................................(DirCurrentDT)....3-159 Directional inverse time overcurrent protection ...........................................................(DirCurrentInv)....3-167 Definite time NPS.......................................................(NPS-DT)....3-179 Inverse time NPS .......................................................(NPS-Inv)....3-183 Voltage-controlled overcurrent...............................(Imax-Umin)....3-187 Definite time over and undervoltage protection .............................................................. (Voltage-DT)....3-195
3-2
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.15.1. 3.5.15.2. 3.5.15.3. 3.5.16. 3.5.17. 3.5.18. 3.5.19. 3.5.19.1. 3.5.19.2. 3.5.19.3. 3.5.20. 3.5.21. 3.5.22. 3.5.23. 3.5.24. 3.5.25. 3.5.26. 3.5.27. 3.5.28. 3.5.29. 3.5.30. 3.5.31. 3.5.32. 3.5.33. 3.5.34. 3.6. 3.6.1. 3.6.1.1. 3.6.1.1.1. 3.6.1.1.2. 3.6.1.1.3. 3.6.1.1.4. 3.6.1.1.5. 3.6.1.1.6. 3.6.1.1.7. 3.6.1.2. 3.6.2. 3.6.3. 3.6.4. 3.6.5. 3.6.6. 3.6.7. 3.7. 3.7.1. 3.7.2. 3.7.3. 3.7.4. 3.7.5.
Definite time stator earth fault (95 %) ............................................3-200 Rotor E/F protection.......................................................................3-210 Interturn protection.........................................................................3-212 Peak value overvoltage........................................ (Voltage-Inst)....3-213 Power............................................................................(Power)....3-217 Overtemperature protection ................................... (Overtemp.)....3-231 Synchrocheck function.......................................(SynchroChck)....3-239 General ..........................................................................................3-247 Settings ..........................................................................................3-249 Binary inputs of the function...........................................................3-255 Breaker failure protection................................ (BreakerFailure)....3-259 Transformer differential protection function ........... (Diff-Transf)....3-273 Generator differential .................................................(Diff-Gen)....3-297 Frequency protection ............................................. (Frequency)....3-303 Rate-of-change of frequency protection........................... (df/dt)....3-307 Overfluxing............................................................ (Overexcitat)....3-311 Inverse time overfluxing ............................................... (U/f-Inv)....3-315 Balanced voltage ................................................. (Voltage-Bal)....3-323 Underimpedance................................................. (Underimped)....3-329 Loss Of Excitation ............................................ (MinReactance)....3-337 Stator overload.................................................. (OLoad-Stator)....3-349 Rotor overload ................................................... (OLoad-Rotor)....3-355 Stator ground fault ................................................ (Stator-EFP)....3-361 Rotor Ground Fault (Injection Principle) protection ............................................................... (Rotor-EFP)....3-383 Pole slipping..............................................................(Pole-Slip)....3-393 Control functions ............................................................................3-405 Control function........................................................... (FUPLA)....3-405 Control function settings - FUPLA..................................................3-407 General ..........................................................................................3-408 Timers ............................................................................................3-409 Binary inputs ..................................................................................3-409 Binary signals.................................................................................3-409 Measurement inputs ......................................................................3-410 Measurement outputs ....................................................................3-410 Flow chart for measurement inputs and outputs............................3-410 Loading FUPLA..............................................................................3-410 Logic .............................................................................. (Logic)....3-411 Delay / integrator............................................................(Delay)....3-415 Counter ...................................................................... (Counter)....3-419 Contact bounce filter ...............................................(Debounce)....3-421 Signal flutter detector ............................................(Defluttering)....3-423 LDU events ........................................................... (LDUevents)....3-427 Measurement functions..................................................................3-429 Measurement function .................................................. (UIfPQ)....3-429 Three-phase current plausibility............................(Check-I3ph)....3-433 Three-phase voltage plausibility ......................... (Check-U3ph)....3-437 Disturbance recorder ................................... (Disturbance Rec)....3-441 Measurement module .......................... (Measurement Module)....3-455
3-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.7.5.1. 3.7.5.2. 3.7.5.3. 3.7.5.4. 3.8. 3.8.1. 3.8.1.1. 3.8.1.2. 3.8.1.3. 3.8.1.4. 3.8.2. 3.8.2.1. 3.8.2.2. 3.8.3.
Impulse counter inputs...................................................................3-461 Impulse counter operation .............................................................3-462 Impulse counter operating principle ...............................................3-462 Interval processing.........................................................................3-463 Data transmission ..........................................................................3-465 Principle of operation of the A/D converter 316EA63 ....................3-465 Introduction ....................................................................................3-465 Synchronisation principle ...............................................................3-465 Data transmission principle............................................................3-465 Consequences of transmission errors ...........................................3-465 Longitudinal differential protection .............................(Diff-Line)....3-467 Setting instructions for lines with a power transformer in the protected zone ....................................3-473 Setting instructions for lines without a power transformer in the protected zone ....................................3-483 Binary data transmission....................................... (RemoteBin)....3-489
3-4
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.
3.1. 3.1.1.
SETTING THE FUNCTION PARAMETERS

General Library and settings RE.316*4 provides a comprehensive library of protection and control functions for the complete protection of lines, feeders, transformers, and generators. The setting procedure is carried out with the aid of a personal computer and is extremely user-friendly. The number of protection and control functions active in a RE.316*4 system is limited by the available computing capacity of the processing unit. In each case, the control program checks whether sufficient computing capacity is available otherwise an error message is displayed. The maximum number of protection functions is 48. The settings and the software key determine which functions are active. This facilitates configuration of different protection scheme: Only functions that are actually needed should be activated. Every active function entails computing effort, which can influence the operating time. Many of the functions can be used for multiple purposes, e.g.: to achieve several stages of operation (with the same or different settings and time delays) for use with different input channels.
Other functions can only be configured for one specific purpose in each set of parameter settings: binary signal transmission disturbance recorder contact bounce filter (Debounce) IEC 60870-5-103.
Functions active in the same set of settings can be logically interconnected, e.g. for interlocking purposes.
3.1.2. 3.1.2.1.
Control and protection function sequence Repetition rate The protection system software controls the operating sequence of the individual functions. The latter are divided into routines, which are processed cyclically by the microprocessor. The frequency of the processing cycle (repetition rate) is determined by the technical requirements of the application.
3-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
For many functions, this depends on the permissible or desired tripping delay. From this follows that the faster tripping should take place, the higher will be the repetition rate. Typical relationships between tripping delay and repetition rate can be seen from Table 3.1.
Repetition rate 4 2 1
1) for 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Explanation 4 times every 20 ms 1) 2 times every 20 ms 1 time every 20 ms
Delay time < 40 ms 40 ... 199 ms 200 ms
Table 3.1
Typical protection function repetition rates
The repetition rates of some of the functions do not depend on their settings, e.g. the distance protection always has a repetition rate of 4 and the auto-reclosure 1. The scanning of the binary inputs and the setting of the signalling and tripping outputs takes place at the sampling rate of the analog inputs. While the operating speed of the various protection functions is more than adequate for their purpose, they do operate in sequence so that the effective operating times of output signals such as 'Start' and 'Trip' are subject to some variation. This variation is determined by the repetition rate controlling the operation of the function. Typical values are given in Table 3.2.
Repetition rate 4 2 1 Variation -2...+5 ms -2...+10 ms -2...+20 ms
Table 3.2
Variation in the operating time of output signals of protection functions in relation to their repetition rates
3.1.2.2.
Computation requirement of protection functions The amount of computation a function entails is determined by the following factors: complexity of the algorithms used. This is characteristic for each protection function. Repetition rate: The faster the operating time of a protection function, the higher its repetition rate according to Table 3.1. The computation requirement increases approximately in proportion to the repetition rate.
3-6
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Already active protection functions: The protection system is able to use certain intermediate results (measured variables) determined by a protection function several times. In consequence, additional stages of the same protection function with the same inputs generally only involve a little more computation for the comparison with the pick-up value, but not for conditioning the input signal.
The computation requirement of the RE.316*4 protection functions can be seen from Table 3.3. The values given are typical percentages in relation to the computing capacity of a fictitious main processing unit. According to Table 3.1, the computation requirement of some of the functions increases for low settings of the time delay t and therefore a factor of 2 or 4 has to be used in some instances. When entering the settings for a function with several stages, the one with the shortest time delay is assumed to be the first stage. The computing performance of a RE.316*4 is 250 %, providing a 316VC61a or 316VC61b central processor is fitted. This applies to all devices equipped with the local control unit on the front. The computing performance of older devices with a 316VC61 central processing unit is limited to 200 %. The computing load can be viewed by selecting 'List Procedure List' from the 'List Edit Parameters' menu and is given for the four sets of parameters in per thousand.
3-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Function 1ph Distance (min.) starters Z< Meas Bward VTSupNPS Power Swing HV distance (min) Meas Bward VTSupNPS Power Swing EarthFltIsol Autoreclosure EarthFltGnd2 I0-Inverse Current-DT with Inrush Blocking Current-Inst Current-Inv DirCurrentDT DirCurrentInv NPS-DT NPS-Inv Imax-Umin Voltage-DT Voltage-Inst Voltage-Bal Underimped MinReactance Oload-Stator Oload-Rotor Power Overtemp. Frequency df/dt Overexcitat U/f-inv Stator-EFP Rotor-EFP Pole-Slip Diff-Gen Diff-Transf SynchroCheck Diff-Line RemoteBin SS-Umschalt BreakerFailure FUPLA 34 ----5 2 3 4 6 6 4 -5 12 15 50 15 25,5 3 4 2
1st stage 3ph 50 20 5 3 15 70 5 3 15 5 1 10 4 3 5 4 7 19 21 6 8 8 3 4 9 17 17 7 6 14 15 --
2nd and higher stages 1ph 3ph
Factor t < 40 ms
(**) t < 200 ms
ditto ditto ditto 3 1 5 2 3 ditto ditto 1 3 2 1 2 ditto 4 4 3 3 3 ditto 3 5 --ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto 40 50 ditto ditto ditto ditto (*) ditto 46 ditto ditto 8 11 11
4 4 4
2 2 2
4 4 4 4
2 2 2 2
40 40 20
16 50 8 30
1/2/4 (***)
3-8
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Function 1ph IEC60870-5-103 Logic Delay Counter Debounce Defluttering Analog RIO Trig LDU events UifPQ MeasureModule Voltage/CurrentInp Cnt Check-I3ph Check-U3ph DisturbanceRec without binary I/P with binary I/P (*) can only be set once
1st stage 3ph 1 4 8 8 0.1 4 2 4 5
2nd and higher stages 1ph (*) ditto ditto ditto (*) ditto ditto ditto ditto 3ph
Factor t < 40 ms
(**) t < 200 ms
10 8 5 5
ditto ditto ditto ditto
20 40
(*) (*)
(**) always 1 for delays 200 ms
(***) depends on repetition rate (low / medium / high)
Table 3.3
Computation requirement of protection functions (in percent)
Example: Table 3.4 shows the computation requirement according to Table 3.3 of a simple protection scheme with four active functions. Since functions 1 and 2 use the same analog inputs, the amount of computing capacity required for function 2 is reduced to that of a second stage.
Function No. 1 2 3 4 Total Type Current-DT Current-DT Current-DT Voltage-DT
Input channel 1 (,2,3) 1 (,2,3) 4 7 Phases three three single single
Settings Pick-up 10.0 IN 2.5 IN 3.5 IN 2.0 UN Time 30 ms 100 ms 300 ms 50 ms
Percentage incl. factor 3% 4 = 12% 1% 2 = 2% 2% 1 = 2% 2% 2 = 4% 20%
Table 3.4
Example for calculating the computation requirement
3-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.1.2.3.
Computing requirement of the control functions The computing requirement of the control functions cannot be directly represented as a percent of the total computing capacity. The size of the code, the type of control logic also determines the computing requirement. The protection and control function load on the main processor can be checked after loading the program by selecting 'Display AD Channels' from the 'Monitor' menu and checking the value of the 'Loop time'.
Fig. 3.1
Display of the computing time
The 'Loop time' is a measure of the computing requirement. When all the functions are active, i.e. none are disabled, this number must not exceed 20000. The value must be read when the device is in the normal operating state and not during a trip. Set the cycling time of the high-priority task to 20 ms (default, see Section 3.6.1.1. 'Control function settings - FUPLA'). This ensures the correct processing of the protection and control functions.
3.2. 3.2.1.
Control and protection function inputs and outputs Analog / Digital Converter
(see Section 5.4.2.6.)
The protection scheme can include three types of input transformers, which can also have different ratings: protection CTs metering CTs (core-balance) VTs.
The number and arrangement of the input transformers are defined either by sub-code K.. in the ordering code or by transformer type entered for K=0. Before being processed by the protection functions, the currents and voltages coming from the input transformers are digitised in the analog section of the main processor unit. Every analog input channel is designated either single or three-phase: CTs: three-phase protection single-phase protection single-phase metering (core-balance)
3-10
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
VTs: three-phase Y connected 3-phase, delta connection single-phase
A protection function can only be used in a three-phase mode, if a corresponding three-phase group of CT/VT input channels is available. All protection function settings are based on the input values (secondary ratings) of the RE.316*4. The fine adjustment to suit the effective primary system quantities is accomplished by varying the reference settings of the analog inputs.
3.2.2.
Binary inputs
RE.316*4 recognises one of the following values: logical '0' (fixed value) or FALSE logical '1' (fixed value) or TRUE binary input value (316DB6.) binary control and protection values as defined by the function number and the corresponding signalling output binary values from the station control level binary values from the distributed input units (500RIO11) binary values with interlocking data.
All the above can also be set as binary inputs of control and protection functions. All the binary addresses set may be used either directly or inverted.
3.2.3.
Signalling outputs
All the control and protection signalling outputs provide the following facilities: external signalling via LEDs external signalling via relays event recording control of tripping relays external signalling via the communications interface external signalling via distributed output units (500RIO11) output of interlocking data.
The following applies to external signals via a signalling relay or a LED: A signalling relay or LED can only be activated by a one signal. Every signalling relay and LED can be individually set to latch.
3-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
A signal can activate up to two output channels, e.g.: 2 signalling relays 1 signalling relay and 1 LED 1 signalling relay and 1 tripping relay
An output each can also be configured for the communication interface, the distributed output units, interlocking data and event recording. Important signals are duplicated, e.g. 'General Trip' and 'General Trip Aux'. 3.2.4. Tripping relay outputs
All protection functions can directly actuate the tripping relays. A tripping logic matrix is provided for this purpose, which enables any function to be connected to any tripping channel. A tripping channel can be activated by any number of protection functions. Only the binary I/O units 316DB61 and 316DB62 are equipped with tripping relays. Each unit has two relays each with two contacts for a total of four contacts. 3.2.5. Measured variables
(see Section 5.5.2.)
Apart from being processed internally, the analog variables measured by the RE.316*4 protection functions can also be viewed externally as: a value: The input variables measured by the protection functions are available to the station control system via the communication interface. They can also be viewed locally on a PC (personal computer) running the operator program or on the local display unit (LDU) on the frontplate. Their values are referred to the secondary voltages and currents at the input of the RE.316*4. a recorded event: The instant a protection function trips, the value of the corresponding measured variable is recorded as an event.
3-12
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.3.
Frequency range The protection functions can be set to operate at a power system frequency fN of either 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The algorithms, which execute the protection functions, have been optimised to produce the best results at the rated frequency fN. Discrepancies from the rated frequency cause an additional error.
3.4. 3.4.1.
System parameter settings Relay configuration Summary of parameters:

Unit Nominal Frequency A/D Converter Slot Nr. 1 Slot Nr. 2 Slot Nr. 3 Slot Nr. 4 AD Config K SWVers SX... SWVers S.XXX Hz Default 50 on VC61 not used not used not used not used 0 X 100 Min. 50 (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) 0 (Select) 1 999 1 999 1 Max. 60 Step 10
Significance of the parameters: Nominal Frequency Determination of the rated frequency: 50 Hz or 60 Hz. A/D Converter defines the type of A/D converter: on VC61: A/D converter on 316VC61a resp. 316VC61b EA62 : Line differential protection with the older A/D converter 316EA62 EA63 : Line differential protection with the newer A/D converter 316EA63 EA6. Master .: Master device EA6. Slave .: Slave device EA6. Master Fox .: Master device for data transmission via FOX EA6. Slave Fox .: Slave device for data transmission via FOX EA6. ..... S: Short data transmission distance EA6. ..... L: Long data transmission distance
3-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The setting of the data transmission distance is normally determined by the attenuation of the optical fibre cable between the two units. However, when using FOX optical fibre equipment, the setting is determined by the connection between the RE.316*4 and the FOX equipment. The data transmission distance setting influences the output power of the transmission diode. It must therefore be selected such that the receiver diode at the remote end is not overloaded. To make sure that the setting is correct, measure the optical signal strength while commissioning the system. The output power must be in the respective range given in the following table (MM = Multi-mode optical cable 50/125m, SM = Single-mode optical cable 9/125 m):
Setting OFL Type MM SM EA6..S -26 -20 dBm -32 -22 dBm EA6..L -16 -13 dBm -20 -17 dBm
Select the setting such that taking the attenuation to be expected due to the optical cable into account, the power at the receiving end is between 34dBm to 22dBm. Measure the signal strength at the receiving end to make sure that it is within this range. Instead of measuring the optical power at the receiving end one can check the value of the received power in the diagnosis menu ( see Section 6.6). The value should be between 400 ... 15000. The transmission functions reliably outside this range, as long as no modem errors are reported. In spite of this in order to have a reserve against aging of the components (Optical cable, Transmit and Receive diodes), after the commissioning the received power should be in the range of 400 ... 15000
NOTICE: Take care when measuring the output power to set the level for the correct type of optical cable in use. One device must be configured as master (or 'EA6. Master Fox .') and the other as slave (or ' EA6. Slave Fox .'). If an A/D converter Type 316EA62 is installed, the 'A/D Converter' parameter must be set to 'EA62' even if the optical fibre link is not in operation yet.
3-14
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
AD Config K: Version and type of input transformer unit: 0 ... 999: K0: A/D converter freely selectable K1 ... K9: Standard variant for REL316*4 without longitudinal distance protection K15 ... K17: Standard variant for REL316*4 with longitudinal distance protection K21 ... K24: Standard variant for RET316*4 K41 ... K47: Standard variant for REC316*4 K61 ... K67: Standard variant for REG316*4 K80 ... K999: Project specific A/D converter unit, A/D converter freely selectable A list of input transformer unit codes is to be found in the data sheet (Section 8).
NOTICE: This parameter must be set before configuring the protection functions and cannot be changed subsequently. The setting must agree with the type of the I/P transformer actually installed in the device. The hardware is not checked.
Slot Nr. 1: Defines the type of I/O board in slot 1: not used, 316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63. Slot Nr. 2: Defines the type of I/O board in slot 2: not used, 316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63. Slot Nr. 3: Defines the type of I/O board in slot 3: not used, 316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63. Slot Nr. 4: Defines the type of I/O board in slot 4: not used, 316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63. SWVers SX...: First part (letter) of the software code. SWVers S.XXX: Second part (figures) of the software code. A summary of the protection functions according to software codes is given in the data sheet (Section 8).
3-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.4.2.
Configuration of the A / D Converter

Channel type If for the hardware configuration K is set to 0 or 80999, CT and VT channels can be entered in any order, providing a corresponding input transformer unit is fitted. The codes K80 upto K999 are project specific, and are documented in the respective project schematics. In the following tables the configuration possibilities and their significance are explained. Some types of A/D converters are only utilized for specific devices.
Channel Type Not used UT 1ph 0.57 IT 1ph ITM 1ph UT 1ph 1.00 UT 1ph 0.15 Description of the A/D converter channels To be selected, in case no A/D converter is used in this channel. VT 1-phase. Range 0 ... 1.3 UN Protection CT 1-phase Metering CT 1-phase VT 1-phase. Range 0 ... 2.2 UN VT 1-phase with UN = 15 V. Used for the Stator- and Rotor-ESS (for REX010/011) (Ui, Ustator). VT 3-phase in Star connection. Measurement of the phase earth voltage. Range 0 ... 1.3 UN VT 3 phase in Star connection. Measurement of the phase earth voltage. Range 0 ... 2.2 UN Protection CT 3-phase Metering CT 3-phase VT 3-phase in Delta connection. Measurement of the phase-to-phase voltage. Range 0 ... 1.3 UN VT 3-phase in Delta connection. Measurement of the phase-to-phase voltage. Range 0 ... 2.2 UN Device type ALL REL316*4 REC316*4 ALL ALL RET316*4 REG316*4 REG316*4
UTS 3ph 0.57
REL316*4 REC316*4 RET316*4 REG316*4 ALL ALL REL316*4 REC316*4 RET316*4 REG316*4
UTS 3ph 1.00
IT 3ph ITM 3ph UTD 3ph 0.57
UTD 3ph 1.00
Table 3.5
Configuration options and significance for channel type, device type and description of the A/D converters
3-16
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Nominal value Enter the rated values for the CTs and VTs in the input transformer unit (1 A, 2 A, 5 A, 100 V or 200 V). S and T phases of three-phase channels assume the same value as R phase. In order that the resolution of the impedance setting for a rated current of 5 A is meaningful, the impedance setting range for 5 A is automatically reduced by a factor of 10.
NOTICE: The ratings must be set at the beginning and not changed afterwards. This applies especially in the case of the distance function.
Setting instructions for the longitudinal differential protection: The rated current settings of the channels in the remote station (channels 7, 8 and 9) must agree with the effective rated currents of the CTs in the remote station. Edit A/D prim/sec ratio This setting is utilised to correctly display the primary value in the measurands display of the HMI and LDU, for the evaluation of the disturbance records, and for the IEC60870-5-103-Protocol. S and T phases of three-phase CT and VT channels assume the same value as R phase. Edit A/D channel ref. value The reference values of the CT and VT channels enable the device ratings to by matched to those of the protected unit. They are a factor that can be set in the range 0.5 to 2. S and T phases of three-phase channels assume the same value as R phase. Example: Rated voltage = 110 V Reference value of the voltage channel =
110 V = 1.100 100 V
Effects of changing the reference values: With the exception of the impedance settings for the distance function, the protection function settings (parameters expressed in relation to 'IN' and 'UN') are automatically adjusted to the new reference values. In the case of the distance function, however, adjusting just the currents and not the voltages will change the impedance pick-up values. For this reason the reference values for the current inputs should not be changed.
Edit A/D channel comment
Facility is provided for the user to enter a comment for each analog channel, which is displayed together with the channel type when the corresponding CT or VT input parameter of a protection function is selected.
3-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.4.3.
Entering comments for binary inputs and outputs
By clicking on the 'Edit' button for the resp. slot card in the window 'Relay Configuration' the user can enter comments for each of the binary inputs (see Section 5.4.2.1), LED (see Section 5.4.2.5), signalling outputs (see Section 5.4.2.3) or tripping output (see Section 5.4.2.4.).
3.4.4. Masking binary inputs, entering latching parameters and definition of 'double indications'
Binary channels can be 'masked' by clicking on the 'Edit' button for the resp. slot card in the window 'Relay Configuration' (see Section 5.4.2.1), so that they do not appear in the event list. Every LED (see Section 5.4.2.5), every signalling relay (see Section 5.4.2.3)and tripping relay (see Section 5.4.2.4) can be set to latch. LEDs will only latch, however, providing the 'LED Sig Mode' parameter is also set for latching beforehand. Note that the green LED1 ('Activ') cannot be set to a latching mode. Two consecutive binary inputs can be combined to form a 'Double Indication' (see Section 5.4.2.2). Up to 30 double signals can be defined and a runtime supervision can be activated for each pair.
3-18
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.4.5.
System I / O
The system parameters apply to all the protection and control functions of the device: Summary of parameters:
Text LED Sig Mode TimeSynchronisation By PC Relay Ready General Trip General TripAux General Start General StartAux Inj. Test Output Test active MMI is ON InjTest Enable Ext. Reset Enable Test Remote Setting ParSet2 IN ParSet3 IN ParSet4 IN ParSet1 OUT ParSet2 OUT ParSet3 OUT ParSet4 OUT Modem Error Quit Status MVB PB Warning MVB PB Crash Process Bus BA1 Ready Process Bus BA2 Ready Process Bus BA3 Ready Process Bus BA4 Ready Process Bus LA Faulty Process Bus LB Faulty SignalAddr SignalAddr ER SignalAddr SignalAddr ER SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr ER BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr T BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER Unit Default Min. Max. Step
AccumSigAll (Select) on (Select)
3-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Explanation of parameters:
LED Sig Mode Select the display mode for LED signaling: 'AccumSigAll' Signals will not be reset, but accumulated. It should be noted that signals from different events could be superimposed. 'ResetSigAll' Reset with 'General Start'. The signaling LEDs will be reset by a 'General Start' pick-up. All subsequent signals will be displayed and maintained i.e. the signals correspond to the last fault. 'ResetSigTrip' Reset with 'General Start'. All signaling LEDs are reset by a start. New signaling will only be dispayed and maintained if tripping takes place. 'NoLatch' The LED signals are not latched.
In all three latching modes, the LEDs can be reset either by selecting the menu item 'Latch Reset' in the 'RESET menu' on the LDU or by briefly activating the 'Ext. reset' binary input. Only those LEDs will latch in the on state if they are configured according to Section 3.4.4. Time Synchronisarion By PC switches on / off the synchronisation of the RE.316*4 clock by PC clock when the HMI is started. Relay Ready Signal that the relay is ready to operate. General Trip, General Trip Aux General tripping signal generated via an OR function of all tripping signals assigned to the tripping logic. General Start, General Start Aux Signal for 'General Start'. This signal is the OR of all start signals configured as events. Inj Test Output (see Section 7.9.1.3.) Tripping signal for the test set. When the device is set to the test mode, the output signal 'Inj. Test Output' is assigned to the distance protection signal 'Trip CB'. Although it is possible to allocate this signal to two outputs, only one should be assigned. This signal is normally assigned to the auxiliary relay S102.
3-20
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Test active (see Section 5.5.3.) Signal indicating that the device is in the test mode. This signal remains set as long as the HMI menu 'Test functions' is open. MMI is on Signal indicating that the control PC is connected and serviceable. Inj Test Enable (see Section 7.9.1.3.) Input for switching to and from the test mode. It is normally used in conjunction with the test adapter Type XX93 or 316 TSS 01 and assigned to the binary input OC 101. This input has to be inverted when using the test plug casing Type XX93. F: operating mode T: test mode xx: all binary inputs
Caution:
An active input does not influence the LED 'Activ' (green LED). When the input is active, the Baud rate of the HMI interface is switched to 9600 bps.
Ext. Reset Input for remote resetting the signalling LEDs and relays: F: no external reset xx: all binary inputs Enable Test Input for enabling the test functions controlled by the MMI: F: test functions blocked T: test functions enabled xx: all binary inputs Remote Setting (see Section 5.9.1.) Input for switching between sets of parameters. F: Sets of parameters can only be switched by applying signals to the inputs 'ParSet 2 IN... ParSet 4 IN'. T: Sets of parameters can only be switched by signals from the station control system. xx: all binary inputs ParSet 2 IN...ParSet 4 IN (see Section 5.9.1.) Inputs for switching between different sets of parameters. ParSet 1 OUT...ParSet 4 OUT (see Section 5.9.1.) Signal indicating the active set of parameters.
3-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Modem Error Signals errors in the optical data transmission link between two line differential relays. This signal is output without any delays in the event of an error (see Section 3.8. Data transmission). The diagnostic function reports this error after a delay of 80 ms, i.e. only when it is certain that the communications channel is permanently disturbed. Quit Status signals the operation of the reset button on the front of the device. MVB PB Warning, MVB PB Crash, Process Bus BA1 Ready... Process Bus BA4 Ready, Process Bus LA faulty, Process Bus LB faulty These messages are only generated when using an MVB process bus (see Operating Instructions for the remote I/O system RIO580, 1MRB520192-Uen).
3-22
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5. 3.5.1.
Protection functions HV distance protection function (HV-Distance)
The HV distance protection is optimised for applications in EHV power systems. The main difference compared with the standard distance protection function is improved phase selection to achieve a better response to evolving faults on parallel circuits. Refer to the standard distance relay function in Section 3.5.2. for the setting procedure. However, note must be taken of the following differences (the parameters in Section 3.5.2. that do not apply to the HV distance protection or have a different significance are marked): The HV distance function is only equipped with underimpedance starters, i.e. the overcurrent starters have been omitted. As a consequence, the parameters 'Start Mode' and 'I start', the binary input 'Ext UZ Blk' and the signals 'Start OC' and 'Start UZ' do not exist. The function is only applicable to solidly grounded systems. Also the 'Phase Sel Mode' parameter has different settings. In addition to the non-directional starter mode available up to the present, the 'Phase Sel Mode' parameter also permits the direction and reach of the overreach zone to be selected. This is only effective, however, for phase selection in the first time step and has no influence on (non-directional) signals. The 'Phase Sel Mode' parameter can be set to one of the following: non-directional (default) forwards overreach An earth fault detector with negative phase sequence restraint I2 is now included in addition to the existing restraint using the largest phase current Imax. The settings 'Blocked' and 'I0 AND U0' are no longer available for the parameter 'Gnd Fault Mode'. The settings are therefore (the corresponding earth fault criteria are given on the right, IE = 3 I0 being referred to as the neutral current): I0: I0 OR U0: I0(I2): I0(I2) OR U0: (IE > '3I0min') AND (IE > 0.25 Imax) (IE > '3I0min') AND (IE > 0.25 Imax) OR (UE > '3U0min') (IE > '3I0min') AND (IE > 0.23 I2) (IE > '3I0min') AND (IE > 0.23 I2) OR (UE > '3U0min')
The slope of the measurement characteristic for the first zone is changed from 7 to 14 if the load current exceeds the setting of the new parameter 'I Load' and power is flowing from the relay location towards the remote end of the line (overreaching due to the semaphore effect). The setting range for 'I Load' is 0...2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN (default setting = 0.5 IN), where:
3-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
'I Load' = 0.01...1.99 IN: 'I Load' = 0 IN: 'I Load' = 2 IN:
Characteristic switches as described above. Fixed slope of 14 Fixed slope of 7
The setting 'BlockZ1' in the 'Measurement' sub-menu has been dropped and a binary input 'Ext. Block Z1' provided instead. In the case of short lines and a large line-to-source impedance ratio, a better response for phase-to-phase faults can be obtained by correcting the phase-angles of US and UT. Calibration is performed during commissioning as follows: Inject the same voltage (0.5 UN) into all three phases in parallel. Read the phase error of S and T phases (in relation to R phase) in the 'List AD channels'. Enter the values of the readings for the parameters 'SR Error' and 'TR Error' in the sub-menu 'Analog inputs'.
3-24
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.2.
Distance protection (Distance) A. Application
Distance protection for the high-speed discriminative protection of long or short overhead lines or cables, double-circuit lines, heavily loaded lines, lines with weak infeeds and what are referred to as 'short-zone' lines. The protection is applicable to solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, systems with Petersen coils or to ungrounded systems. All kinds of faults are detected including close-in three-phase faults, cross-country faults, evolving faults and high-resistance earth faults. The protection remains stable in the presence of power swings and reversal of energy direction. Switching onto an existing fault results in instantaneous tripping of the circuit breaker. The distance function can also act as back-up protection for the power transformer and neighbouring lines. Most of the logic described in this Section (e.g. the transmission of signals) is not used for these applications.
B. Features
Overcurrent or underimpedance starters (polygon characteristic) 5 distance stages (independently set polygon characteristics) Definite time overcurrent back-up protection also applicable for protecting short zones (teed section in 1 breaker schemes (see Section 4.2.1.5.4.)) VT supervision Power-swing blocking Tripping logics for: switch-onto-fault protection overreaching zone permissive underreaching transfer tripping (also for weak infeed and communications channel failure) permissive overreaching transfer tripping (also for weak infeed, communications channel failure and reversal of energy direction) blocking scheme (also for reversal of energy direction)
3-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
C. Inputs and outputs I. CT/VT inputs:
Three-phase currents Three-phase voltages Neutral current Neutral current of the parallel circuit
II. Binary inputs:
Reversal of measuring direction Distance function blocking Underimpedance starter blocking Power-swing blocking Overcurrent back-up blocking (I O/C) Dead line Manual CB close Zone extension Isolator open Communication receive Communication channel failure Single-phase auto-reclosure ready Tripping condition blocking for the switch-onto-fault protection Incoming PLC blocking signal First zone blocking
III. Binary outputs:

3-26
R+S+T starters RST starter R starter S starter T starter E starter I0 starter U0 starter Starter Z< starter Overcurrent back-up starter (I O/C) Switch-onto-fault starter Single-phase starter CB trip RST trip R trip S trip T trip Three-phase trip Single-phase trip Overcurrent back-up trip (I O/C) Switch-onto-fault trip Trip with transfer trip signal
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
'short-zone' protection trip Time 2nd step Zone 1 time Zone 2 time Zone 3 time Zone 4 time Final zone time Measurement Overreaching measurement Forwards measurement Reverse measurement 'weak infeed' trip Distance protection blocked Delayed distance protection blocked Power-swing blocking VT supervision Delayed VT supervision Communication send PLC boost Memory frequency deviation
IV. Measurements:
Impedance loop RE Impedance loop SE Impedance loop TE Impedance loop RS Impedance loop ST Impedance loop TR
3-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Distance protection function settings - Distance
Summary of parameters:
Text GENERAL Reference Length CT Neutral Reset Events Fupla Directory CT/VT INPUTS U input I input I0 input I0P input CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr 0 0 0 0 ohms/phase 01.000 Line side all DISTSTD 0.01 (Select) (Select) 30.000 0.001 Units Default Min. Max. Step
STARTING (see 'Measurement' for final zone settings)

1) Start Mode 2) Phase Sel Mode 2) Gnd Fault Mode 1) I start
OC Solid Ground I0 IN IN IN UN 004.00 000.20 000.20 000.00
(Select) (Select) (Select) 0.5 0.1 0.1 0 0 -999 0 -999 0 0 0 10 2 2 2 999 0 999 0 999 90 2 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.01
I min 3I0 min 3U0 min XA XB RA RB RLoad Angle Load Uweak MEASUREMENT X R RR RRE k0 K0 Angle Delay (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
ohms/phase 000.0 ohms/phase 000.0 ohms/phase 000.0 ohms/phase 000.0 ohms/phase 000.0 deg UN 45 000.00
ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 1 deg s 001.00 000.00 000.000
-300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0
300 300 300 300 8 90 10
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001
1) Not
available on HV distance function. settings for the HV distance function.
2) Different
3-28
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text
Units
Default
Min.
Max.
Step
X R RR RRE RRE k0 K0 Angle Delay X R RR RRE k0 K0 Angle Delay X R RR RRE k0 K0 Angle Delay X R RR RRE
*) Delay
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (4/OR) (4/OR) (4/OR) (4/OR) (4/OR) (4/OR) (4/OR) (BACK) (BACK) (BACK) (BACK) (Def)
ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 1 deg s 001.00 000.00 000.00
-300 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 0 -90 0.01 (Select) (Select) (Select)
300 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 0 0 0 0 10 8 90 2
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 ohms/phase 000.00 s 1 deg UN 002.00 000.00 000.00 000.05 Trip non-dir off
k0m k0 Angle(m) UminFault Mem Dir Mode

*) Def Dir Mode 1) Block Z1
*) These parameters belong to the final zone.
The starting and measurement values the settings (in columns Min., Max. and Step) the parameters with unit 'Ohm/Phase' have to be divided by 10 for relays with a rated current of 5 A. They do not change for rated currents of 1 A and 2 A.
1)
Not available on HV distance function. 3-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Text
Units
Default
Min.
Max.
Step
O/C BACK-UP PROTECTION I O/C Delay O/C VT SUPERVISION VT Sup Mode VT Sup Blk Del VT Sup Deb Del U0min VTSup I0min VTSup U2min VTSup I2min VTSup TRIP SCHEMES ComMode TripMode SOTF Mode SOTF10sec Weak Unblock Echo Trans Block t1 Block t1 Trans Block t2 Trans Block t1 Evol Faults s s s s off 1Ph trip off off off off off off 000.04 000.05 003.00 003.00 (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) 0 0 0 0 0.25 0.25 10 10 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 UN IN UN IN off off off 000.20 000.07 000.20 000.07 (Select) (Select) (Select) 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 IN s 000.00 005.00 0 0 10 10 0.01 0.1
POWER SWING BLOCKING Time PS block BINARY INPUTS Change Meas. Dir. Ext. Block Dist 1) Ext UZ Block Ext Block PSB Ext Block O/C DeadLine Manual Close ZExtension Isolator open Com Rec BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr F F F T F F F F F F s 000.00 0 10 0.01
1)
Not available on HV distance function.
3-30
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text
Units
Default
Com Fail 1 Pol AR Ext Block SOTF Ext Block HF Zextension AR Ext. Block Z1 CB COMMANDS Trip CB R Trip CB S Trip CB T SIGNAL OUTPUTS Start R+S+T Start RST Start RST Aux Start R Start R Aux Start S Start S Aux Start T Start T Aux Start E Start E Aux Start I0 Start U0 Start O/C Start SOTF Start 1ph Trip CB Trip RST Trip RST Aux Trip CB R Trip CB S Trip CB T Trip CB 3P Trip CB 1P
BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr
F T F F F F
Trip Chan Trip Chan. Trip Chan
00000000 00000000 00000000
SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr
ER ER ER ER ER
ER
ER
3-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Text
Units
Default
Min.
Max.
Step
Trip O/C Trip SOTF Trip Com Trip Stub Delay >=2 Delay 1 Delay 2 Delay 3 Delay 4 Delay Def Meas Main Meas Oreach Meas Fward Meas Bward Weak Infeed Dist Blocked Del Dist Blocked Power Swing VT Sup VT Sup Delay Com Send Com Boost Freq Dev
1) Start OC 1) Start UZ
SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr
ER
ER ER ER ER
ER ER
ER
ER
ADDITIONAL LOGIC BOOL_IN1 : BOOL_IN8 TIMER_1 : TIMER_8 BOOL_OUT1 : BOOL_OUT8 ms : ms SignalAddr : SignalAddr BinaryAddr : BinaryAddr F : F 0 : 0 0 : 0 30000 : 30000 1 : 1
1)
3-32
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Explanation of parameters: GENERAL
Reference Length (see Section 3.5.2.1.) Reactance (secondary value) to be used as reference length of the line. CT neutral (see Section 3.5.2.1.) Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current direction): busbar side (old BBC diagram) line side (standard today, see wiring diagram in the Chapter 12) This parameter only influences the distance function and only the display of the system variables. It does not influence the values of the A/D channels. Reset Events (see Page 3-45) Determination of whether all the distance function events in the event list which have been reset should be displayed: All Partly Fupla directory The sub directory for the distance protection logic is selectable. The default directory name 'DISTSTD' is valid in case the standard distance protection logic is utilised, which is situated in the HMI sub directory. A different configuration is necessary only if instead of the standard distance logic a special distance protection logic is utilised. The procedure in this case has to be obtained from the associated logic description.
CT/VT INPUTS (see wiring diagram in the Chapter 12)
U input indicates the first of the VT inputs assigned to the three phase voltages. I input indicates the first of the CT inputs assigned to the three phase currents. I0 input indicates the CT input assigned to the neutral current (if fitted and activated). This is used for the external acquisition of the neutral current of the line. If the I0 input is not used, the neutral current is derived from the phase currents.
3-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
I0P input indicates the CT input assigned to the neutral current of the parallel circuit (if fitted and activated). This is used for the neutral current of the parallel circuit of a double-circuit line.
Note:
The CT input (I0P) should be wired in the same sense as the neutral current input (I0) (e.g. terminals 9 and 10 correspond to terminals 7 and 8 respectively).
STARTING (see Section 3.5.2.2./ 4.2.1.1.)
Start Mode 1) Definition of the starters used: OC - overcurrent UZ - underimpedance PhaseSelMode 2) Phase preference for cross-country faults in systems with Petersen coils and ungrounded systems: solidly grounded (no phase preference) RTS(R) cyclic TRS(T) cyclic RTS acyclic RST acyclic TSR acyclic TRS acyclic SRT acyclic STR acyclic Gnd Fault Mode 2) Method of detecting ground faults: I0 I0 OR U0 I0 AND U0. Blocked (only phase-to-phase loop measured, e.g. with only two CTs and V connected VTs) I Start 1) Pick-up value of the overcurrent starters. I Min Current level for enabling the protection. 3I0 Min Current level of the neutral current (3I0) for enabling the protection (ground fault detector).
1) 2)
Not available on HV distance function. Different settings for the HV distance function.
3-34
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3U0 Min Voltage level of the neutral voltage (3U0) at which the E/F measurement is enabled (ground fault detector). XA Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the tripping direction. XB Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the restraint direction. RA Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the tripping direction. RB Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the restraint direction. RLoad Resistive reach for avoiding load encroachment. Angle Load Limit phase-angle for avoiding load encroachment. Uweak (Phase) Voltage pick-up value for determining the 'weak infeed' or 'dead line' conditions for enabling manually energisation of the line. A setting of zero disables the function.
MEASUREMENT (see Section 3.5.2.3. / 4.2.1.2.)
X (n) Pick-up line reactance for Zone (n): X < 0 for the restraint direction X = 0 disables the zone (Zone 1 cannot be disabled) R (n) Pick-up line resistance for Zone (n); the sign must be the same as for X (n). RR (n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for phase faults; the sign must be the same as for X (n). RRE (n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for E/Fs; the sign must be the same as for X (n). k0 (n) Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for E/Fs in Zone (n); (Z 0 Z1) / (3 x Z1) .
3-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
k0 Angle (n) Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for E/Fs in Zone (n); Arg [(Z0 Z1) / (3 Z1)] .
Delay (n) Operating time for Zone (n). X (BACK) Pick-up line reactance for the reverse zone: X = 0 zone disabled. R (BACK) Pick-up line resistance for the reverse zone. RR (BACK) Resistive reach for phase faults in the reverse zone. RRE (BACK) Resistive reach for E/Fs in the reverse zone. Delay (Def) (see Section 3.5.2.4.) Operating time for the final zone (starter reach). k0m Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a parallel circuit (ratio of the mutual impedance to three times the positivesequence impedance); Zm0 / (3 Z1) . The mutual impedance is not taken into account for a setting of zero. k0 Angle(m) Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a parallel circuit Arg Zm0 / (3 x Z1) . Umin Fault (see Section 3.5.2.3.2.) Minimum voltage at which the fault voltage is used for determining fault direction. Mem Dir Mode Procedure to be followed after decay of the memory voltage and no voltage is available for measurement: Protection blocks Protection trips Conditional trip: Only trips, if the directions during the present and the preceding times steps are in opposition. Def Dir Mode (see Section 3.5.2.4.) Response at the end of the final time step (definitive time): Non-directional: Trips for faults in both directions. Forwards: Trips only for faults in the forwards direction.
3-36
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Block Z1 1) Zone 1 measurement blocking: off on
O/C BACK-UP PROTECTION (see Section 3.5.2.5. / 4.2.1.4.)
I O/C Pick-up value of the definite time back-up overcurrent function. Delay O/C Time delay for the definite time back-up overcurrent function.
VT SUPERVISION
(see Section 3.5.2.6. / 4.2.1.3.)
VT Sup Mode 0 off 1 ZeroSeq 2 3 4 NegSeq Zero*NegSeq Special
[U0 I0] [U2 I2] [(U0 I0) + (U2 I2)] [U2 (I0 + I2)]
VT Sup Blk Del Delayed blocking of the distance function (12 s) for operation of the VT supervision. off immediate blocking on delayed blocking VT Sup Deb Del Delay (1 s) for resetting blocking by the VT supervision. off immediate reset on delayed reset U0 min VT Sup Pick-up setting of the neutral voltage (U0) for VT supervision referred to the rated VT voltage 100/ 3 or 200/ 3 .
I0 min VT Sup Pick-up setting of the neutral current (I0) for VT supervision.
1)
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
U2 min VT Sup Pick-up setting of the negative sequence voltage (U2) for VT supervision referred to the rated VT voltage 100/ 3 or 200/ 3 . I2 min VT Sup Pick-up setting of the NPS current (I2) for VT supervision.
TRIP SCHEMES (see Section 3.5.2.7. / 4.2.1.5.)
Com Mode Type of transfer tripping scheme: off PUTT NONDIR PUTT FWD PUTT OR2 POTT BLOCK OR Trip Mode Type of tripping (single or three-phase): 1PhTrip - single-phase tripping (for single-phase autoreclosure) 3PhTrip - three-phase tripping in all cases
3PhTripDel3 - single-phase tripping (for single-phase autoreclosure) up to the end of 'Delay (3)' then three-phase tripping SOTF Mode Operating mode of the switch-onto-fault function: off non-dir. non-directional underimpedance starting (recommended setting) forward UR2 directional with overreaching (Zone 2, if overreaching disabled) and non-directional after decay of any memory voltage
SOTF 10sec Enables the 10 s delay for the switch-onto-fault function: off (t = 200 ms) on (t = 10 s) Weak Enables 'Weak infeed' logic for the PUTT or POTT transfer tripping modes (Uweak must also be set): off on
3-38
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Unblock Deblocking logic enable: off on (only suitable for PLC) Echo 'Echo' logic enable for the POTT transfer tripping mode: off on Trans Block Enables 'Transient blocking' logic (stabilisation for reversal of power direction on double-circuit lines) for the POTT and BLOCK OR (overreaching blocking scheme) transfer tripping modes: off on t1 Block Time allowed for receiving a blocking signal in the BLOCK OR (overreaching blocking scheme) mode. t1 Trans Block Time 1 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. Delay for faults after a fault was detected in the reverse direction. t2 Trans Block Time 2 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. The logic remains enabled for the time t2 after a fault was detected in the reverse direction. t1 Evol Faults Time for discriminating evolving faults (three-phase trip for evolving faults during this time setting).
POWER-SWING BLOCKING (see Section 3.5.2.8. and 4.2.1.6.)
Time PS Block Maximum time during which the power-swing blocking function is effective. The function is disabled when set to zero.
BINARY INPUTS (see Section 3.5.2.10.)
Change Meas. Dir Input for changing the direction of measurement. Ext. Block Dist. Input for blocking the distance protection function: F: not blocked xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
3-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Ext. UZ Block 1) Input for blocking the underimpedance starters: F: underimpedance starters enabled T: underimpedance starters disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Ext. Block PSB External disable for the power-swing blocking function: F: power-switch blocking enabled T: power-switch blocking disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Ext. Block O/C External disable of the back-up overcurrent function F: enabled T: disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Deadline Line de-energised signal (auxiliary contact on the circuit-breaker when the VTs are on the busbar): F: input not used xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Manual Close Circuit-breaker manual close signal: F: input not used xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) ZExtension External zone extension control signal: F: external zone extension disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Isolator Open Isolator open signal for activating the 'short-zone' logic and protection (T section in 1 breaker schemes): F: disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Com Rec Input for PLC signal from the remote station: F: input not used xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
1)
3-40
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Com Fail Input for PLC failure signal: F: input not used xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
1 Pol AR Single-phase trip enable (used in conjunction with the autoreclosure function): F: three-phase trip only T: single and three-phase trip (depending on type of fault) xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
Ext Block SOTF Input for blocking the tripping condition for the switch-onto-fault logic: F: enabled T: disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Note: The input does not disable the switch-onto-fault starting signal.
Ext Block HF Input for blocking a received PLC signal (controlled, for example, by a sensitive E/F scheme using the same PLC channel): F: input not used xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
Zextension AR Input for enabling the overreaching zone by the auto-reclosure function: F: zone extension by the auto-reclosure function disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
ExtBlock Z1 Input for blocking measurement in the first zone: F: enabled T: disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
3-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
CB COMMANDS
Trip CB R Tripping logic for the R phase pole of the circuit-breaker. This signal is not generated while a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection. Trip CB S Tripping relay for the S phase pole of the circuit-breaker. This signal is not generated while a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection. Trip CB T Tripping relay for the T phase pole of the circuit-breaker. This signal is not generated while a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection.
SIGNALLING
Start R+S+T General distance protection starting signal (OR logic for all starting signals excluding 'weak infeed'). Start RST (StartRSTAux) General distance protection starting signal (OR logic for all starting signals including 'weak infeed'). Start R (Start R Aux) Distance protection R phase starting signal (including 'weak infeed'). Start S (Start S Aux) Distance protection S phase starting signal (including 'weak infeed'). Start T (Start T Aux) Distance protection T phase starting signal (including 'weak infeed'). Start E (Start E Aux) Distance protection E/F starting signal (U0 or I0). Only generated together with a phase starter. Start I0 Neutral current starting signal (I0). Start U0 Neutral voltage starting signal (U0). Start O/C Back-up overcurrent pick-up signal. Start SOTF Enabling signal for the switch-onto-fault protection. Start 1ph Indicates that the distance protection was started by a single phase.
3-42
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Trip CB General circuit-breaker tripping signal. This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection. Trip RST (trip RST Aux) General tripping signal. This signal is not disabled while a blocking signal is being applied. Trip CB R Circuit-breaker R phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection. Trip CB S Circuit-breaker S phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection. Trip CB T Circuit-breaker T phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection. Trip CB 3P Three-phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection. Trip CB 1P Single-phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection. Trip O/C Back-up overcurrent trip signal. Trip SOTF Switch-onto-fault trip signal. Trip Com Signal for tripping either enabled by the receipt of a permissive signal or the non-receipt of a blocking signal. (This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being applied.) Trip Stub 'Short-zone' protection trip signal. Delay >= 2 Signal for starting in Zone 2 or higher. Delay 1 Signal for starting in Zone 1.
3-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Delay 2 Signal for starting in Zone 2. Delay 3 Signal for starting in Zone 3. Delay 4 Signal for starting in Zone 4 (excepting when Zone 4 is being used as an overreaching zone). Delay Def Signal for starting in the final zone. Meas Main Measurement by the distance function (Zones 1, 2, 3, 4 or the final zone). Meas Oreach Measurement in the distance protection overreach zone. Meas Fward Measurement by the distance protection in the forwards direction. Meas Bward Measurement by the distance protection in the reverse direction (reverse zone). Weak Infeed Tripping by the 'weak infeed' function. Dist Blocked Signal indicating that the distance protection is blocked. DelDistBlk Signal delayed by 12 s indicating that the distance protection is blocked. Power Swing Power-swing blocking function picked up. VT Sup VT supervision picked up. VT Sup Delay Delayed operation of the VT supervision after 12 s. Com Send Signal generated when a transfer trip signal is transmitted. Com Boost Signal for boosting PLC transmitting power. Freq dev Signal indicating a deviation of the memory voltage frequency.
3-44
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Start OC 1) Overcurrent starting signal. Start UZ 1) Underimpedance starting signal.
ADDITIONAL LOGIC
The following settings are only of consequence when a special logic is loaded instead of the standard distance protection logic. Refer to the description of the corresponding logic for their significance. BOOL_IN1, BOOL_IN2...BOOL_IN8 Additional binary inputs for the special distance protection logic. TIMER_1, TIMER_2...TIMER_8 Additional timer settings for the special distance protection logic. BOOL_OUT1, BOOL_OUT2...BOOL_OUT8 Additional signals for the special distance protection logic.
Behaviour of the signals at the signalling relay outputs and in the event list
Some of the signalling relay outputs remain excited until the entire distance protection function has reset (i.e. until 'Start R+S+T' resets) and others reset as soon as the particular condition disappears. The parameter 'EventRecFull' (event recorder full) enables a choice to be made, whether all operation and reset events have to be recorded in the event list (essential when the protection is integrated in a station control system) or whether the less important reset events may be omitted. The behaviour of the signals can be seen from the following list.
Output:
H NH
signal latches signal does not latch Pick-up (COMES) and reset (GOES) are recorded. Only pick-up (COMES) is recorded pro viding 'some' is set for 'EventRecFull'.
Event list
Event list:
AR A
Signal
Output
Start R+S+T Start RST Start RSTAux Start R Start R Aux
NH NH NH H H
AR A A A A
1)
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Signal
Output
Event list
Start S Start S Aux Start T Start T Aux Start E Start E Aux Start I0 Start U0 Start OC Start UZ Start O/C Start SOTF Start 1ph Trip CB Trip RST Trip RST Aux Trip CB R Trip CB S Trip CB T Trip CB 3P Trip CB 1P Trip O/C Trip SOTF Trip Com Trip Stub Delay >= 2 Delay 1 Delay 2 Delay 3 Delay 4 Delay Def Meas Main Meas Oreach Meas Fward Meas Bward Weak Infeed Dist Blocked Del Dist Blocked Power Swing VTSup VTSup delay Com Send Com Boost Freq Dev
H H H H H H NH NH NH H NH H NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH H NH H NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH NH
A A A A A A AR AR AR AR AR AR AR A A A AR AR AR A A AR A A A A A A A A A A AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR A AR
3-46
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
E. Setting instructions 3.5.2.1. General
The first parameter in the sub-menu 'General' is 'Ref length' which is needed to indicate the distance to a fault in the event of a trip, but otherwise bears no influence in the protection function. The parameter gives the reactance of the reference length (in secondary /ph per unit length) and may be defined in km, miles, percent line length etc., i.e. distance = e.g.: a) In km Secondary reactance per km Ref. length Xmeas. ref. length
0.2 /ph
= 0.2 /ph
b) In percent line length Secondary reactance of the line length (1 % Ref. length = 0.25 /ph
25 /ph 0.25 /ph)
The setting of the parameter 'CT neutral' depends on whether the star-point of the main CTs is on the line side or the busbar side. There are thus two possible settings 'Bus side' or 'Line side'. The 'Line side' option is the one to choose, providing the protection is connected according to the wiring diagram in the appendix. This setting only applies to the distance protection function. It does not influence the power direction in all the other functions or the displays of the A/D channels.
3-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.5.2.2.
Starters
The distance function provides for two methods of starting, i.e. overcurrent or underimpedance. The desired method is selected by appropriately setting the parameter 'Start Mode' in the 'Starting' submenu. Depending on the setting of the parameter 'Def Dir Mode', a starter can also trip on its own after the time 'Delay (Def)'. (see Section 3.5.2.4.)
3.5.2.2.1. Overcurrent starters
(see Section 4.2.1.1.2.)
Selecting OC for the parameter Start Mode enables the overcurrent starters. The pick-up level of the overcurrent starters is determined by the setting of the parameter 'Istart'. The corresponding setting range is from 0.5 to 10 IN, in steps of 0.01 IN. The setting of 'Istart' must be sufficiently above the maximum load current to avoid any risk of maloperation under normal load conditions. Note that all currents greater than 80% of the highest phase current (and also the enabling current 'Imin') are taken into account by the phase selection function. When determining the maximum load current it must be considered that
in the case of a double-circuit line, the load current IB can briefly reach double its normal value when one circuit is tripped. E/Fs can cause additional balancing currents IA in the healthy phases.
It is equally important for an overcurrent starter, which has picked up, to reliably reset at the maximum load current IBmax, if for example the fault is tripped by a downstream protection. Taking due account of the reset ratio of 0.95, the lowest permissible setting is given by: (Istart ) min > 1.25 IB max + IA 0.95 IN
The maximum setting (Istart)max is derived from the minimum fault current IK for a fault at the end of the next section of line: (Istart ) max < IK min / IN Should the above relationships result in (Istart)max being lower than (Istart)min, the underimpedance starters must be used instead.
3.5.2.2.2. Underimpedance starters
Selecting UZ as the Start Mode parameter enables the underimpedance starters. The following parameters then have to be set:
3-48
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
XA XB RA RB RLoad AngleLoad The characteristic of the underimpedance starters and the corresponding setting parameters can be seen from Fig. 3.2. The parameters 'RLoad' and 'AngleLoad' define the permissible load area.
X
XA UNDERIMPEDANCE CHARACTERISTIC
RB
-RLoad
AngleLoad
RLoad
RA
XB
HEST 935 049 C
Fig. 3.2
Underimpedance starting characteristic
Because of the method used to represent impedances by the processor program, the impedance settings should not be set higher than absolutely necessary, otherwise the resolution for low impedances will be reduced.
Minimum permissible reach of the starters
The starting units must reliably pick-up for a fault towards the end of the next section of line (back-up zone). Should back-up protection of the adjacent section of line not be necessary, the starters must be set to at least 1.3 times the impedance of the protected line. In the case of short lines, fault resistance becomes a factor to be taken into account.
3-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Maximum permissible reach of the starters
The setting must take account of the considerable increase in the load current of the healthy circuit of a double-circuit line, when a fault on one circuit is tripped. To ensure that the phase selection is correct for single-phase autoreclosure, the starters in the healthy phases must not pick up for an E/F on one of the phases (in spite of any balancing currents which may occur).
The corresponding limits can be expressed mathematically as follows: Solidly grounded systems
Z set
U 2 (IB max + IA )
/ph
Ungrounded systems or system with Petersen coils
Z set where: Zset
2 IB max 1.25
Uv
/ph
maximum value of the impedance, i.e. the maximum value of the expression:
XA 2 + RA 2 or XB2 + RB 2
lowest phase voltage of the healthy phases for an E/F on one phase (U = 0.85 x min. system voltage). The factor 0.85 takes account of a negligibly small zero sequence source impedance. lowest phase-to-phase system voltage safety factor
Uv 1.25
2 factor, which takes account of the fact that phase currents and not phase-to-phase currents, are used. These requirements are generally fulfilled without difficulty for most applications. Should, however, the first inequality not be satisfied, the right-hand side must be expressed vectorially and compared with the underimpedance starting characteristic in relation to the setting 'RLoad' etc. The healthy phases must be checked for the case of a single-phaseto-ground fault.
3.5.2.2.3. Current enable
Before a phase can take part in phase selection, it must be conducting a current higher than 'Imin'. The recommended setting is 0.2 IN.
3-50
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.2.2.4.
E/F detector
There are three alternative operating modes for the E/F detector, the desired one being chosen by the setting of the parameter 'Gnd Fault Mode'. E/F detection can be based on measurement of the neutral current alone or in combination with the neutral voltage. The fourth possibility is not to measure the ground loop at all, i.e. only the phase-tophase loop is measured. The following alternatives are available for selection: blocked I0 I0 AND U0 I0 OR U0 (only measures the phase-to-phase loops)
The criterion for the highest '3I0min' setting is: the E/F detector must pick-up for all E/Fs in solidly grounded systems and for all cross-country faults on ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils, providing they lie within the reach of the underimpedance starters.
The criteria for the lowest '3I0min' setting are: the E/F detector must not pick up for an E/F on ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils, the E/F detector must not pick up for phase faults, although CT errors can cause false neutral currents.
The recommended setting is '3I0min' = 0.5 IN. Should it not be possible to find a setting, which satisfies both these conditions, the neutral voltage (3U0min) must be used for measurement in addition to the neutral current.
3.5.2.2.5. Phase preference logic
The desired phase preference logic for cross-country faults is chosen with the aid of the parameter 'PhaseSelMode'. In solidly grounded systems, the 'PhaseSelMode' parameter is disabled by setting it to 'solid ground'. It is essential for all the relays in ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils to be set to the same phase preference logic. The logic in use in a system must therefore be known before one of the 8 alternative schemes can be selected: RTS(R) cyclic TRS(T) cyclic RTS acyclic RST acyclic TSR acyclic TRS acyclic SRT acyclic STR acyclic
3-51
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.5.2.2.6.
Undervoltage starters
(Uweak)
The undervoltage starters are used in conjunction with the switch-ontofault function and the transfer tripping schemes POTT and PUTT NONDIR (see Section 3.5.2.7.). The corresponding pick-up value is set in relation to the rated voltage with the aid of the parameter 'Uweak', which has a setting range of 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01.
3.5.2.3. Measuring units
All the settings for the impedance measuring zones are to be found in the 'MEASUREMENT' sub-menu.
3.5.2.3.1. Determining the distance zones
Before it is possible to determine the reaches of the distance zones, the impedances and phase-angles of the line sections during faults must be known. Typical settings for the various zone reaches along the line are given below:
Z3 = 0.85 (a + k b2) Z2 = 0.85 (a + k b1) Z1 = 0.85 a ZAZ = 1.2 a b2 b1
HEST 935 050 C
Fig. 3.3
Typical settings for the reaches of distance relay zones (grading table)
where: Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 ZOR k1 impedance reach of the various zones [/ph] impedance reach of the overreaching zone [/ph] factor to take into account the apparent increase of line impedance 'seen' by a relay due to an intermediate infeed impedance of the corresponding section of line []
a, b
3-52
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
A
1 2 3
B
4
I A' + I
B'
C D
~
Fig. 3.4
I A'
~
HEST 935 051 C
Example for calculating k. The overreach must be checked for k > 1 when the infeed B is not in operation.
k=
where: IA' IB' 1...5
IA ' + IB ' 1 IA
maximum fault current possible minimum fault current possible distance relays
Calculating the secondary line impedances
The primary values calculated from the grading table for the line impedances have to be converted to secondary values. These are obtained by applying the following relationship:
ZLs = ZLp ZLP = KZ KU K I
where: ZLp ZLs KU KI KZ primary positive-sequence line impedance secondary positive-sequence line impedance main VT ratio main CT ratio impedance ratio
The same applies to the conversion of the resistances and reactances. The impedance characteristic is defined independently for each of the four distance zones (Zone 4 is used alternatively for the overreaching zone) by the following parameters (i = 1 to 4): X R RR RRE k0 k0Ang Delay (i) (i) (i) (i) (i) (i) (i)
3-53
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The reactance and resistance of the line or cable are set in the proper units using the parameters 'R' and 'X' (see Fig. 3.5).
X
X 7
Zone 1 (2, 3, 4, OR, BWD)
27
-X/8
R 27 -RR/2 -RRE/2
RR
RRE
HEST 915 019 C
Fig. 3.5
Distance measurement characteristic
At a rated current of 1 or 2 A, the impedance parameters 'X', 'R', 'RR' and 'RRE' have setting ranges of -300 to +300 /ph in steps of 0.01 (-30 to +30 /ph in steps of 0.001 for a rated current of 5 A). A zone is disabled when 'X' is set to zero regardless of the settings of the other parameters. In this case, the other zones are also blocked with the exception of the last one. Zone 1 can only be disabled by the parameter 'Block Z1' or the binary input 'ExtBlock Z1'. The direction of measurement is reversed for negative values of 'X', 'R', 'RR' and 'RRE'.
Allowing for fault resistance
Provision is made with parameters 'RRE' and 'RR' for allowing for the fault resistance in an E/F loop and in a phase-to-phase loop. The setting takes the E/F resistance comprising the resistance of the arc and the pylon footing resistance in relation to the line resistance into account. Typical settings lie in the range RR(E)/X = 0.5...3. The arc resistance RB can be calculated according to A.R. van C. Warrington as follows:
RB =
28700 d I1.4
where:
3-54
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
d I RB
length of arc in m current in A arc resistance in
Since the unit is /ph, the fault resistance appears differently in the impedance plane according to the type of fault. Where the value of the fault resistance RF is known in (see Fig. 3.6), it has to be entered in the R/X diagram as follows: E/F: phase-to-phase fault: three-phase fault: R=RF/(1+k0) R=RF/2 R=RF/ 3
It is for this reason that fault resistance is compensated separately for E/F and phase-to-phase loops using the parameters 'RRE' and 'RR'. The parameter 'RR' will generally be set lower than 'RRE', because the phase-to-phase fault resistance is normally very low.
RF
RF
RF RF
RF
HEST 915 029 C
E/F
Phase-to-phase fault
Three-phase fault
Fig. 3.6
Fault resistance
Load current (area)
The load area defined by the underimpedance parameters 'RLoad' and 'AngleLoad' is taken into account be starting and measuring characteristics. It follows from this that the relay can only trip, if the fault impedance measured lies within the underimpedance starting characteristic.
3-55
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Underimpedance characteristic
Zone 3
OV ERRE ACH ZO NE
Zone 2
Zone 1
RLoad
AngleLoad
REVERSE ZONE
HEST 935 053 C
Fig. 3.7
Relay characteristics
Note that the load impedance area is only formed when the underimpedance starter (UZ) is in operation. It does not exist when starting is provided by the overcurrent starter (OC).
3-56
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Zero-sequence compensation of the protected line
The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor are set individually for each zone using parameters 'k0' and k0Ang'. The latter are calculated from the positive-sequence impedance ZL and the zero-sequence impedance Z0L of the line: k 0 =1/ 3 x ( Z0L ZL ) ZL
k 0 = 1 / 3 x (Z 0L ZL ) / ZL )
Range: 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01
k 0Ang = arctan (X 0L XL ) / (R0L RL ) arctan(XL / RL )

Range: -180 to +90 in steps of 0.01
Zero-sequence compensation for cables
Depending on the type of cable and the application, k0 is set between 10 and 130. If a complex setting is made for k0, the polygon characteristic is rotated in the R-jX diagram. At k0 angles higher than 20, a slight setting error causes severe under or overreaching. The setting is often incorrect because the cable data are not known exactly measured data are only accurate for through faults, but scarcely ever accurate for internal faults
A setting of 0 or 180 (corresponds to negative values) is therefore recommended for k0: k0 = 1/3 (X0L XL) / XL k0Ang = 0 for X0L > XL k0Ang = -180for X0L < XL Note that the value of R must be set at least to (2 RL + R0L) / 3 and the desired RRE is increased by (2 RL + R0L) / 3.
3-57
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
jX
(2 RL + R0L) / 3
k0 XL XL - k0 XL ZL 2 ZL + Z0) / 3 k0 ZL
Ph-Ph Ph-E
RR
RRE
Fig. 3.8
Relay characteristics
Zero-sequence compensation of double-circuit lines The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a double-circuit line are set using parameters 'k0m' and 'k0 Angle(m)'. This compensation only applies to Zones 1 and 2, the overreaching zone and the reverse zone.
3.5.2.3.2. Directional element
Each distance zone has its own directional measuring element. The voltage used for measurement depends on the amplitude of the fault voltage in relation to the parameter 'UminFault'. The fault voltage is used, providing it is higher than the setting of 'UminFault', and a voltage derived from the healthy voltage and the memory voltage is used when it falls below. The recommended settings are 0.1 UN for conventional VTs. Should correct determination of direction not be possible (reference voltage too low or memory voltage decayed), the setting of the parameter 'MemDirMode' determines whether the protection blocks or trips: Block Trip Cond. trip protection blocks all zones (definitive zone only if directional) protection trips Protection blocks unless the instantaneous and preceding zones are in opposite directions, in which case the protection trips.
3-58
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.2.3.3.
Overreaching zone
(OR)
The settings including the designation '4/OR' ('X (4/OR)' ... 'Delay (4/OR)') can be used either for a fourth measuring zone or a completely independent overreaching zone (but not for both at the same time) by appropriately setting the parameter 'Delay (4/OR)' (see Section 3.5.2.3.5). In applications requiring a fourth zone, the measuring unit of the second zone is used for overreaching. An overreaching zone is necessary for the switch-onto-fault and zone extension logics and for overreaching transfer tripping schemes.
3.5.2.3.4.
Reverse zone
(BACK)
A reverse measuring zone is used in a blocking scheme and also the logic for detecting a reversal of fault energy direction. It is set using the parameters 'X (BACK)', 'R (BACK)', 'RR (BACK)' and 'RRE (BACK)' which have setting ranges from 0 to -300 /ph. Note that: for underimpedance starting ('UZ'): With the exception of the load discrimination defined by the parameters 'RLoad' and 'AngleLoad', the reverse zone operates independently of the starters. for overcurrent starting ('OC'): The reverse zone is only in operation when an overcurrent starter ('Istart') has picked up. the binary input ('Ext. UZ Block') blocks operation regardless of the starter mode for the reverse zone. Signal output: Meas Bward. Measurement of the reverse zone only takes place while the first zone is active, i.e. the 'Meas Bward' signal resets, when 'Delay (2)' has elapsed.
3.5.2.3.5.
Time steps
(Delay)
The operating time of every activated distance zone (parameter 'X' <> 0) is determined by the parameter 'Delay', which has a setting range of 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01. The parameter 'Delay (4/OR)' is also associated with a logic, which determines whether it applies to Zone 4 or to the overreaching zone, i.e. if 'Delay (4/OR)' < 'Delay (2)', it applies to the overreaching zone, otherwise to Zone 4.
3-59
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The set times must satisfy the following relationships: Delay (1) < Delay (2) < Delay (3) < Delay (4) < Delay(Def), Delay (OR) < Delay (2).
When grading the operating times of several distance relays, the minimum grading time should not be less than the sum of the circuitbreaker operating time plus 150 ms (reset time + operating time of the measuring system + safety margin). Recommended timer settings: Zone 1: normally instantaneous. Zone 2: 'Delay (2)' is normally set to the sum of relay and circuitbreaker operating times, arc extinction time, signal transmission time and a tolerance margin, which amounts to about 0.25 to 0.5 s. The tolerance includes an allowance for sequential tripping. Zone 3: 'Delay (3)' is set to about 2 'Delay (2)'. Zone 4: 'Delay (4)' or Delay (Def) is normally set to at least 4 'Delay (2)'.
Special cases may require settings, which deviate considerably from the above recommendations. The time steps of zones 1 to 4 must have settings less than 'Delay(Def)'.
3.5.2.4. Definitive zone
(Def)
The definitive (or fifth) zone is subject to the same parameters as the underimpedance starters (i.e. XA, XB, RA, RB, RLoad and AngleLoad). The corresponding time step is defined by the parameter 'Delay (Def)'.
3-60
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
X
XA Definitive Zone
27
RB
-RLoad
AngleLoad
RLoad
RA
R
27
Directional (in tripping direction)
XB
HEST 935 054 C
Fig. 3.9
Definitive zone characteristic
The parameter 'Def Dir Mode' determines the response at the end of the definitive time. It can be set to be either directional (in tripping direction) or non-directional (see Fig. 3.9).
NOTICE: There is still a definitive zone even using the overcurrent starter (OC), but only with respect to the parameters 'Delay (Def)' and 'Def Dir Mode'.
3.5.2.5.
Back-up overcurrent protection

(O/C Back-up Protection) (see Section 4.2.1.4.)
The settings for the back-up overcurrent protection are made via the sub-menu 'O/C BACK-UP PROTECTION'. The setting of the parameter 'I O/C' determines the pick-up level, which can be chosen in steps of 0.1 IN between 0 and 10 IN. The associated time delay is set in steps of 0.1 s between 0 and 10 s by means of the parameter 'Delay O/C'.
3-61
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The pick-up signal of the overcurrent unit is also used by the STUB protection. If the function is being used for this purpose, i.e. the binary I/P 'Isol open' is at logical '1', the tripping time is fixed at 25 ms. The back-up overcurrent is always active. In case the STUB protection is not utilized, and; the 'O/C BACK-UP PROTECTION' should only be active when the distance protection is blocked, then connect the inverted signaling output 'Dist Blocked' from the distance protection to the blocking input 'Ext Blk OC' of the O/C backup protection.
3.5.2.6. VT supervision
The parameters for setting the VT supervision function are located in the sub-menu 'VT SUPERVISON'. One of four different operating modes can be chosen using 'VTSupMode'. The function processes zero and negative-sequence components, which are either used on their own ('ZeroSeq' and 'NegSeq') or combined ('Zero*NegSeq' and 'Spec'). ZeroSeq NegSeq Zero*NegSeq Spec
[U0 I0] [U2 I2] [(U0 I0) + (U2 I2)] [U2 (I0 + I2)]
The four pick-up values are the settings of the parameters 'U0min VTSup', 'U2min VTSup', 'I0min VTSup' and 'I2min VTSup'. They can be set between 0 and 2 UN (or IN) in steps of 0.01. The basic settings are 0.2 UN for the voltage and 0.07 IN for the current. Only the 'NegSeq' or 'Spec' options are available in ungrounded systems.
Upon operating, the VT supervision function is normally required to immediately block the distance protection function (see Section 4.2.1.5.2.). Provision is made, however, for blocking the distance function after a delay of 12 s by setting the parameter 'VTSupBlkDel'. This parameter is normally set in cases where only the overcurrent starters are in use.
If the VT supervision function remains picked up for longer than 12 s, it resets only after a delay (1 s). Should a fault give rise to zero or negative-sequence current components, it resets immediately. The parameter 'VTSupDebDel' (deblocking) enables the reset delay to be continuously enabled regardless of current.
3-62
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Recommended setting:
Parameter VTSupDebDel Grounded system enabled Ungrounded system disabled
The signal 'VTSup' indicates that the distance function is being blocked by the VT supervision and 'VTSupDel' that the 12 s delay is running.
3.5.2.7.
Tripping logic
(see Section 4.2.1.5.12)
The parameters for determining the tripping logic are grouped in the sub-menu 'Trip Schemes'. The various transfer tripping schemes are selected by setting the parameter 'ComMode' (3 PUTT, POTT and OVERREACHING BLOCKING schemes). The possible settings are given below. The settings for the different schemes only appear after has scheme has been selected.
PUTT NONDIR
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (non-directional) 'Weak' - enables the weak infeed logic.
PUTT FWD
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (in line direction) No other parameters.

PUTT OR2
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (overreaching zone/Zone 2) 'Unblock' - selects the enabling logic for communications channel failure.
POTT
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping 'Weak' 'Unblock' 'Echo' 'Trans Block' - enables the weak infeed logic. - selects the enabling logic for communications channel failure. - enables the echo logic. - enables the logic for reversal of fault energy
't1 Trans Block' - min. holding time for the wrong energy direction signal. This has to be set at least 50 ms longer than the maximum reset time required by the communication channel.
3-63
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
't2TransBl'
- max. holding time for the wrong energy direction signal. This has to be set at least 0.4 s longer than the dead time setting to make sure that blocking is still effective should an attempt be made to reclose the faulted line.
BLOCK OR
Blocking scheme 'TransBlock' 't1 Block' - enables the logic for reversal of fault energy - time allowed for the receipt of a PLC signal
't1 Trans Block' - min. holding time for the wrong energy direction signal. This has to be set at least 50 ms longer than the maximum signal transmission time. 't2 Trans Block' - max. holding time for the wrong energy direction signal. This has to be set at least 0.4 s longer than the dead time setting to make sure that blocking is still effective should an attempt be made to reclose the faulted line.
TripMode
Depending on the setting of the parameter 'TripMode', tripping is either phase-selective, controlled by the binary input '1PolAR' (for '1phTrip'), always three-phase (for '3phTrip') or three-phase after the time 'Delay (3)' (for '3phTripDel3').
SOTF Mode
Access is gained to the switch-onto-fault logic settings by selecting the parameter 'SOTF Mode'. The alternatives presented are whether the switch-onto-fault logic should trip on the basis of the non-directional underimpedance starters or the overreaching zone. This logic is enabled either by the undervoltage function delayed by 10 s or 200 ms (see Section 3.5.2.2.6.) or the binary inputs 'Deadline' and 'Manual close'. Two signalling outputs 'Start SOTF' and 'Trip SOTF' are associated with the switch-onto-fault logic. 'Start SOTF' is intended for blocking the auto-reclosure function and 'Trip SOTF' signals that tripping took place as a result of the switch-onto-fault logic.
SOTF 10 sec
The parameter 'SOTF 10sec' determines whether the undervoltage function and the binary input 'Deadline' are enabled after 10 s ('on') or after just 200 ms ('off'). 'off' indicates switching onto a fault after fast auto-reclosure (Fast OR). Tripping in this case is thus based on the decisions of the starters alone.
3-64
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
t1EvolFaults
The setting of the parameter 't1 Evol Faults' determines the time during which an evolving fault once detected results in a three-phase trip.
3.5.2.8. Power-swing blocking
Only the parameter 'Time PS block' for the time during which the power-swing blocking signal is maintained has to be set in the 'POWER-SWING BLOCKING' sub-menu. The setting range is 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01. Tripping is enabled again at the latest at the end of this time. The power-swing blocking function is disabled when 'tPSblock' is set to zero or a logical '1' is applied to the binary input 'Ext Blk PSB'.
3.5.2.9. Allocation of CT and VT inputs
The parameters for allocating CT and VT input channels are grouped in the 'ANALOGUE (CT/VT) CHANNELS' sub-menu.
3.5.2.10. Allocation of binary inputs
The parameters for allocating binary inputs are grouped in the 'BINARY INPUTS' sub-menu. All binary inputs can be allocated to external signals or the outputs of other functions.
Change Meas Dir
Applying a signal to this input reverses the direction of measurement for the entire distance protection function (all zones).
Ext Block Dist
This input blocks the entire distance protection function. Blocking is signalled by 'Dist Blocked' and after 12 s by 'Del Dist Blocked'. Only the back-up overcurrent protection (I O/C) then remains active.
Ext UZ Block
This input blocks the underimpedance starters, the neutral voltage starter (U0), the measurement for 'Weak' and the reverse measurement. The overcurrent starters (OC) remain in operation.
Ext Block PSB
This input blocks the power-swing blocking function.

Ext Block O/C back-up
This input blocks the back-up overcurrent protection (O/C Back-up Protection).
3-65
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Deadline
The signal applied to this input is needed by the switch-onto-fault logic to indicate to the distance function that the line is without voltage before the circuit-breaker is closed. It is used for the switch-onto-fault logic providing the VTs are on the busbars.
Manual Close
Prior to manually closing the circuit-breaker, this signal enables the switch-onto-fault logic and blocks the VT supervision function.
Zextension, ZExtension AR
The overreaching logic permits instantaneous tripping within the overreaching zone. It is enabled via the binary input 'Zextension' or 'ZExtension AR'. For this purpose, the output 'Zextension' of the auto-reclosure function is connected to the input 'ZExtension AR'.
Isolator open
This input is required by the STUB protection to ascertain whether an isolator is open or not (see Section 4.2.1.5.4.).
Com Rec
This input is needed for the external signal 'Com Rec' (signal received by PLC, optical fibre link or point-to-point radio).
Com Fail
This input signals to the protection that the PLC channel has failed.
1 Pol AR
This input permits single-phase tripping to take place and is used in conjunction with single or three-phase auto-reclosure schemes. Refer to the Section 'Auto reclosure' for the connection to the auto-reclosure function.
Ext. Block SOTF
This input is needed in cases where the switch-onto-fault logic is not enabled after an auto-reclosure. Refer to the Section 'Auto reclosure' for the connection to the autoreclosure function.
3-66
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Ext. Block HF
This input blocks the reception of an intertripping signal. It is used for coordinating communication channel signals when in a solidly grounded system, the distance protection and the E/F protection use the same channel. It must be connected to the 'RecBlk' signal of the E/F function.
Ext Block Z1
This input blocks measurement in zone 1.

3.5.2.11. Allocation of tripping commands
The parameters for allocating tripping commands are grouped in the 'CB COMMANDS' sub-menu. The allocation of the output signals depends on whether single or three-phase tripping has been set (parameter 'TripMode'). In the case of three-phase tripping, the three tripping outputs are allocated to the same auxiliary tripping relay. Single-phase tripping ('TripMode' set to '1PhTrip' or '3PhTripDel3') requires three separate auxiliary tripping relays, i.e. the protection has to be equipped with at least two binary I/O units Type 316DB61/62.
3.5.2.12. Signals
(see Section 5.4.5.2)
The parameters for allocating binary outputs to auxiliary signalling relays are grouped in the 'SIGNALLING' sub-menu. Some signalling outputs latch until the entire distance protection function resets (i.e. until 'Start R+S+T' resets, see Section 3.5.2.).
3-67
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-68
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.3.
Sensitive earth fault protection for ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils (EarthFaultIsol) A. Application
The sensitive E/F protection detects E/Fs on overhead lines in radial systems. It is suitable for application in ungrounded systems, systems with Petersen coils and in resistance grounded MV and HV systems. The scheme monitors the neutral voltage and current of the protected line. Depending on the characteristic angle chosen, it responds to either the real or apparent value of the neutral power.
B. Features
Adjustable characteristic angle Compensation of CT phase errors Suppression of DC component in voltage and current signals Suppression of harmonics in voltage and current signals
Neutral current Neutral voltage
II. Binary inputs:
Blocking signal
Tripping signal Starting signal
IV. Measured variable:
Zero-sequence power
3-69
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Sensitive earth fault protection settings - EarthFaultIsol
Text Trip P Setting Angle Drop-Ratio Delay PN Phi-Comp Current Inp Chan Voltage Inp Chan BlockInp Trip Start Units Tripping chan. PN degrees % s UN*IN degrees CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Default 00000000 0.050 0.00 60 0.50 1.000 0.00 0 0 F ER ER Min. 0.005 -180.00 30 00.05 0.500 -5.00 Max. 0.100 180.00 95 60.00 2.500 5.00 Step 0.001 0.01 1 0.01 0.001 0.01
Explanation of the parameters:
Trip Tripping logic (matrix). P Setting Pick-up power setting. Angle Characteristic angle for the power measurement. 0 = real power forwards 180 = real power backwards -90 = apparent power forwards 90 = apparent power backwards All angles between -180 and 180 can be set. Drop-Ratio Reset ratio of the measuring trigger. Delay Delay between the protection picking up and the protection tripping. The delay setting also influences the reset time of the function. For t > 100 ms, the protection resets after 50 ms. Resetting is not otherwise intentionally delayed. PN Rated power given by UN*IN. Phi-Comp Compensation of CT and VT phase errors. The setting concerns only the difference between the two errors.
3-70
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Current Inp Chan Defines the CT input channel used for the neutral current. Only single-phase CT inputs can be set. Voltage Inp Chan Defines the VT input channel used for the neutral voltage. Only single-phase VT inputs can be set. Block Inp Input for blocking the sensitive E/F function. F: protection enabled T: protection disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Trip Tripping signal. Start Out Starting signal.
3-71
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
E. Setting instructions Settings:
Pick-up power Characteristic angle Reset ratio Delay Phase error compensation Rated power
P Setting Angle Drop-Ratio Delay Phi-Comp PN
The value entered for 'P Setting' is the power at which the function picks up referred to rated power 'PN'. The parameter 'P Setting' has a setting range of 0.005 to 0.100 in steps of 0.001. The setting of the parameter 'Angle' determines the characteristic angle of the measurement. Its implications are explained below under 'Real power' and 'Apparent power'. The desired reset ratio is set as a percentage of the pick-up value using the parameter 'Drop-Ratio'. To ensure that the reset ratio is adequate for low values of 'P Setting', the following condition is checked: ' Drop - Ratio' < 100 50 100 ' P Setting' + 1
An angle to compensate the relative phase errors of CTs and VTs can be entered using parameter 'Phi-Comp'. The effective characteristic angle is the sum of the parameters 'Angle' and 'Phi-Comp'. The setting for the rated power is left at PN = 1.000. The corresponding reference value in the 'ANALOGUE CT/VT CHANNELS-AD CHANNEL REF VAL' menu must be adjusted for rated voltages other than 100 V.
Real power
The real power component (real power component = proportion of real power current x displacement voltage) of the zero-sequence power is monitored to detect E/Fs in systems with Petersen coils and highresistance grounded systems. The neutral component of the current in the healthy phases resulting from their capacitances to ground and the inductive Petersen coil current unite at the fault location and return to the source via the faulted phase. A power relay is installed at both ends of every line with the exception of stub lines, which only require a relay at the source end. If the E/F current is too low and has to be artificially increased, an overvoltage relay is fitted to detect the displacement voltage and connect a grounding resistor temporarily to the star-point. To avoid any incorrect response of the power relays while this is being done, they are enabled after a short delay. The section of the line with the fault is determined by comparison of the relay directions.
3-72
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The real power component of the E/F current is determined by the resistive losses of the lines, the Petersen coils and the grounding resistors. A typical value for the charging current of overhead lines is around 2.5 A / 10 kV and 100 km. In the case of cable systems, it can be determined from the cable data. The minimum real power component of the current at the minimum voltage at which the power relay has to operate can be determined according to the above procedure. The power at which it must pick up must be set somewhat lower to allow for phase and ratio errors of the CTs. The parameter 'Angle' must be set to 0 to measure real power in the forwards direction, respectively 180 to measure real power in the reverse direction.
Note:
The connections are made in strict accordance with the ABB wiring diagram.
Example of how to determine the setting
Assuming an overhead line system with an E/F current (sum of the three phase currents) of 30 A and a real power current component of 5 A. The core-balance CT has a ratio of 125:1. The star-point VT has a secondary voltage of 100 V for a solid E/F at the generator/power transformer terminals. Therefore: PN = 1 A 100 V = 100 VA It is required to detect E/Fs down to 50 % of the displacement voltage. The E/F current flows only from one side, so that no division of the current takes place. The real power component of the current of 5 A results in a secondary current of: IW = 5 A 1/125 = 0.04 A IW = 0.04 A 0.5 = 0.02 A P = 0.02 A 50 V = 1 VA This corresponds to 1 % referred to the rated power PN of 100 VA. A setting of 0.5 % PN is possible, but the accuracy of the CTs must be checked before deciding whether such a sensitive setting is permissible. The real power can be increased by adding a grounding resistor. at maximum displacement voltage at 50 % displacement voltage
The required pick-up power is thus:
3-73
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Apparent power
The apparent power component of the neutral power is monitored to detect E/Fs in ungrounded systems. Every feeder is equipped with a relay. During an E/F, the capacitive E/F current of the entire system less that of the faulted line flows into the faulted line. Only the E/F relay of the faulted line indicates power flowing into its line. The minimum capacitive E/F current available to operate the relays is the total capacitive E/F current of the whole system for the smallest configuration to be expected less that of the faulted line. Of this capacitive current, only the percentage corresponding to the assumed minimum displacement voltage at which the protection is still required to operate may be considered. If there are any double-circuit lines, the division of current between the circuits must also be taken into account. To allow for the CT errors at such low current levels, the pick-up value set on the relay must be less than the product of the minimum current determined above and the minimum voltage. The parameter 'Angle' must be set to -90 pick up for E/Fs in the forwards direction and 90 for the reverse direction.
Note:
The connections are made in strict accordance with the ABB wiring diagram.
Time delay
The delay required between the picking up of the relay ('start') and tripping ('Trip') is set by means of parameter 'Delay'. The setting range provided is 0.05 to 60 s in steps of 0.01.
CT/VT inputs
The two CT and VT input channels 'CurrentInp' (current) and 'VoltageInp' (voltage) have to be configured for the purpose. The current input channel may only be allocated to a single-phase metering (corebalance) CT and the voltage channel to a single-phase VT.
Binary inputs and outputs
The tripping output may be allocated to either a tripping relay or a signalling relay (different parameters) and the starting signal to a signalling relay. Operation of the sensitive E/F protection can be inhibited by applying a signal to the 'BlockInp' input.
3-74
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.4.
Auto-reclosure (Autoreclosure) A. Application
The function can be configured for single or three-phase auto-reclosure. The unit can operate in conjunction with any of the three protection functions (distance, longitudinal differential and overcurrent protection) and either an internal or external synchrocheck function. However, an additional standard FUPLA logic T142 as detailed in the document 1KHF600220 is necessary for single-phase reclosing in 1 breaker applications.
B. Features
Up to 4 fast or slow reclosure attempts First cycle with up to 4 individually configurable single and/or three-phase reclosure attempts Independent operating indicators for each reclosure cycle Wide dead time setting range Provision to control bypassing of the synchrocheck unit and extending the dead time for the first zone by external signals Clearly defined response to changing fault conditions during the dead time (evolving faults) Logic for 1st and 2nd main protection (redundant), duplex and master/follower schemes
None
II. Binary inputs:

*)
Start Redundant start Redundant start Three-phase trip Redundant three-phase trip Redundant three-phase trip General trip Redundant general trip Redundant general trip CB ready for open/close/open cycle CB2 ready for open/close/open cycle
(Start) (Start 2) (Start 3) (Trip CB 3P) (Trip CB2 3P) (Trip CB3 3P) (Trip CB ) (Trip CB2) (Trip CB3) (CB ready) (CB2 ready)
*) *) *) *) *) *) **)
2 and 3 denote the I/Ps of protection functions 2 and 3 or relays 2 and 3 in a redundant protection scheme (see Fig. 3.13). 2 denotes the I/Os for CB2 in a duplex scheme (see Fig. 3.16). 3-75
**)
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
CB ready for close/open cycle CB2 ready for close/open cycle CB open CB2 open CB2 preferred circuit-breaker Synchrocheck Synchrocheck 2 Dead line Dead line 2 External blocking input Conditional blocking input Manual close blocking input External synchrocheck bypass External extension of dead time (1st attempt) Delay from master CB Block from master CB Block reclosure by follower (redundant scheme) External 1P-1P selector for 1st AR External 1P-3P selector for 1st AR External 1P3P-3P selector for 1st AR External 1P3P-1P3P selector for 1st AR
(CO Ready) (CO Ready 2) (CB open) (CB2 open) (CB2 Priority) (SynchroChck) (SynchroChck2) (Dead Line) (Dead Line2) (Ext. Block AR) (Cond. Block AR) (Manual Close) (Ext.SCBypas) (Extend t1) (MasterDel) (MasterUnsucc) (Inhibit Inp)
**) **) **) **) **)
(MD1_EXT_1P_1P) (MD1_EXT_1P_3P) (MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P) (MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P)
CB close signal CB2 close signal Overreach switching signal Definitive trip Prepare trip of all three phases Block Follower CB Delay Follower CB Block for Follower. recloser Reclosure function ready Reclosure function blocked Reclosure cycle running 1st single-phase reclosure in progress 1st three-phase reclosure in progress 2nd Reclosure in progress 3rd reclosure in progress 4th reclosure in progress
(Close CB) (Close CB2) (ZExtension) (Def. Trip) (Trip 3-Pol) (BlkFlwr) (DelFlwr) (Inhibit Outp) (AR Ready) (AR Blocked) (AR in prog.) (First AR 1P) (First AR 3P) (Second AR) (Third AR) (Fourth AR)
**)
IV. Measurements:
None
**)
2 denotes the I/Os for CB2 in a duplex scheme (see Fig. 3.16).
3-76
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
D. Autoreclosuresettings - Autoreclosure
Text Units GENERAL PARAMETER 1. AR Mode 1P3P-1P3P 2..4. AR Mode off Command Close CB Tripping chan. 00000000 FUPLA Directory AURESTD TIMERS t Dead1 1P t Dead1 3P t Dead1 Ext. t Dead2 t Dead3 t Dead4 t Oper t Inhibit t Close t Discrim. 1P t Discrim. 3P t Timeout t AR Block s s s s s s s s s s s s s 1.20 0.60 1.00 1.20 5.00 60.00 0.50 5.00 0.25 0.60 0.30 1.00 5.00 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0.10 0.10 0,05 0,05 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 (Select) (Select) Default Min. Max. Step
BINARY INPUTS Start Trip CB 3P Trip CB Start 2 Trip CB2 3P Trip CB2 Start 3 Trip CB3 3P Trip CB3 CB Ready CO Ready CB Open Dead line Ext. Block AR Cond.Block AR Manual Close Inhibit Inp. Extend t1 MD1_EXT_1P_1P BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F) off (F)
3-77
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Text
MD1_EXT_1P_3P MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P
MD1_EXT_1P3P_1P3P
Units
Default
Min.
Max.
Step
BinaryAddr off (F) BinaryAddr off (F) BinaryAddr off (F)
SIGNAL OUTPUTS Close CB Trip 3-Pol Def. Trip Inhibit Output AR Ready AR Blocked AR in Progress
First AR 1P in Prog. First AR 3P in Prog. Second AR in Prog. Third AR in Progress Fourth AR in Prog. First AR completed 2...4. AR completed
SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr
SYNCHROCHECK SCBypas 1P first AR SCBypas 1P3P first AR Ext. SC Bypas Synchro Check Blocked off off BinaryAddr off (F) BinaryAddr off (F) (Select) (Select)
ZONE EXTENSION ZE Prefault ZE 1. AR ZE 2. AR ZE 3. AR ZE 4. AR ZExtension SignalAddr on off off off off (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select)
MASTER-FOLLOWER LOGIC Master mode MasterDelay Mast.noSucc DelayFlwr. Block to Flwr. off BinaryAddr off (F) BinaryAddr off (F) SignalAddr SignalAddr (Select)
3-78
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text DUPLEX LOGIC CB2 Ready CO Ready 2 CB2 open SynchroChck2 Dead line 2 Close CB2 Close CB2 CB2 Priority
Units
Default
Min.
Max.
Step
BinaryAddr off (F) BinaryAddr off (F) BinaryAddr on (T) BinaryAddr off (F) BinaryAddr off (F) Trip Chan SignalAddr BinaryAddr off (F) 00000000
ADDITIONAL LOGIC P INPUT1 : P INPUT16 TMSEC Timer1 : TMSEC Timer8 P OUTPUT1 : P OUTPUT8 ms SignalAddr SignalAddr 0 0 30000 1 BinaryAddr off (F) BinaryAddr off (F) ms 0 0 30000 1
Remarks on the signal designations: The I/O signals specifically for redundant or duplex schemes include the figure '2', respectively '3' in their designations. The signals belonging to the basic configuration (1 protection function and 1 auto-reclosure function) do not necessarily include the figure '1' in their designations.
Explanations of parameters: GENERAL PARAMETER
1. AR Mode Type of first reclosure 1. 1P-1P single-phase trip and reclosure for earth faults (single-phase dead time), no reclosure for phase faults 1. 1P-3P single-phase trip followed by three phase trip after approx. 20 ms, three-phase reclosure for earth faults (three-phase dead time initiated by single-phase trip), no reclosure for -phase faults
3-79
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
1. 1P3P-3P 1. 1P3P-1P3P
Ext. Selection
three-phase trip and reclosure for earth and phase faults (three-phase dead time) single-phase trip and reclosure for earth faults (single-phase dead time), three-phase trip and reclosure for phase faults (threephase dead time) External selection by the binary inputs MD1_EXT_1P_1P, MD1_EXT_1P_3P, MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P and MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P.
2..4. AR Mode Maximum number of reclosure attempts (all three-phase) off no 2nd, 3rd or 4th reclosure 2 AR 2 reclosures 3 AR 3 reclosures 4 AR 4 reclosures Close CB Signal relay output for the command to close the circuit breaker. FUPLA Directory The sub directory for the auto reclose logic is selectable. The default directory name 'AURESTD' is valid in case the standard auto recluse protection logic is utilised, which is situated in the HMI sub directory. A different configuration is necessary only if instead of the standard autoreclose logic a special autoreclose logic is utilised. The procedure in this case has to be obtained from the associated logic description.
TIMERS
t Dead1 1P Dead time for first single-phase reclosure. t Dead1 3P Dead time for first three-phase reclosure. t Dead1 Ext. Extension of 1st dead time for single or three-phase reclosure (effective as long as a logical '1' (pulse or continous) is applied to the 'Extend t1' I/P before the dead time finishes (falling edge.) t Dead2 2nd dead time. t Dead3 3rd dead time. t Dead4 4th dead time.
3-80
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
t Oper Maximum duration of a fault for which a reclosure attempt is made. t Inhibit Period (CB recovery time) from the falling edge of the last reclosure attempt during which the autoreclosure function is blocked and after which the function is reset. In the event of an evolving fault between discrimination and dead times, the period commences at the instant of another trip occurring between the two times. The inhibit timer is also started if the protection trips after the fault duration time 't Oper' has elapsed. t Close Duration of CB close signal. t Discrim. 1P Evolving fault discrimination time for single-phase reclosure. t Discrim. 3P Evolving fault discrimination time for three-phase reclosure. t Timeout Period following the dead time during which the CB close signal has to occur. If it does not, the 'Def. Trip' signal is generated. t AR Block Time during which reclosure is blocked. 't AR Block' is started by every blocking signal ('Ext.Blk AR', 'Cond.Blk. AR', 'Manual Close', 'Inhibit Inp' and 'MasternoSucc').
BINARY INPUTS
Start *) I/P for signalling the start of a reclosure cycle. This I/P is connected to the 'General start' signal of a protection function. Trip CB 3P *) I/P for the three-phase trip signal. The three-phase trip from a protection function is connected to this I/P. Trip CB I/P for the general trip signal The general trip from a protection function is connected to this I/P. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed.
*)
For the auto-reclosure function to operate correctly, at least the Start and Trip CB 3P inputs must be connected to a protection function or via a binary system I/P to an external protection relay. 3-81
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Start 2 I/P for the AR start signal. In redundant protection schemes, the general start signal from the 2nd protection is connected to this I/P. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. Trip CB2 3P I/P for the three-phase trip signal. In redundant protection schemes, the three-phase tripping signal from the 2nd protection is connected to this I/P. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. Trip CB2 I/P for the general trip signal. In redundant protection schemes, the general start signal from the 2nd protection is connected to this I/P. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. Start 3 I/P for the AR start signal. The general start signal from the 3rd protection can be connected to this I/P. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. Trip CB3 3P I/P for the three-phase trip signal. The three-phase tripping signal from the 3rd protection can be connected to this I/P. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. Trip CB3 I/P for the general trip signal. The general start signal from the 3rd protection can be connected to this I/P. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. CB Ready I/P excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready (open/close/open). Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed or not fitted. I/P logic: 'CB ready' OR 'CB2 ready' In a duplex scheme, either an active 'CB ready' or 'CB2 ready' I/P enables an auto-reclosure cycle. Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
3-82
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
CO Ready I/P excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready for a close/open cycle. Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True') if not needed, not fitted and 'Dead line' or 'ExtSCBypas' not used. I/P logic for enabling the closing command: [('synchrocheck' AND 'CO Ready') OR 'Dead line' OR 'ExtSCBypas']. CB Open I/P excited by a signal from the CB when it is open. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. To avoid the operation of fast circuit-breakers from being blocked unintentionally, the effect of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms. Dead line I/P indicating that the line is de-energised ('CB open' input if the VTs are on the busbar side). Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. An active I/P overrides the following logical relationship of the I/Ps: 'synchrocheck' AND 'CO Ready'. Ext. Blk. AR I/P for blocking the internal auto-reclosure function. Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is immediately blocked by a signal applied to this input. The output signals 'Trip 3 Pol' and 'Def Trip' are generated and a three-phase definitive trip takes place. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. Cond. Blk. AR I/P for a conditional blocking signal. Blocking only takes place providing an AR cycle is not in progress. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. When tripping is by the distance protection SOTF logic or a directional E/F PLC signal, the corresponding signals can be connected to this I/P to prevent auto-reclosure. Manual Close Blocking I/P excited by the manual CB close signal. Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is immediately blocked by a signal applied to this input. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed.
3-83
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Inhibit Inp. I/P for blocking the follower reclosure function in a redundant scheme. The follower is blocked from the end of the master closing signal until the end of the reclaim time. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. Extend t1 Input for conditionally extending the dead time (single and threephase) for the first (fast) reclosure. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. MD1_EXT_1P_1P, MD1_EXT_1P_3P, MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P and MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P Inputs for externally selecting the mode for the first reclosure. They are only effective when the parameter '1. AR Mode' is set to 'Ext. select'. Unused inputs must be set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'). If a signal is applied to more than one input, the next mode in the list is the one that is active. The auto-reclosure function is blocked if none of the inputs is used.
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
Close CB Indication 'Close command CB'. Trip 3-Pol Signal to the distance function so that it can only carry out a threephase trip. This signal is inverted and connected to the distance protection I/P '1P AR'. This signal is active in many situations, but particularly when the AR function is blocked, the CB is not ready for AR, the CB is open, the single-phase discrimination time 't 1P Discrim' finishes or the output signal 'First AR 3P' is active. It resets at the end of reclaim time. Def. Trip Signal initiating lock-out tripping of the CB. This signal is normally active when the protection trips again after the last programmed reclosing shot or trips while the AR function is blocked. The signal resets after a fixed time of 500 ms. Inhibit Output Signal for blocking the follower AR function in a redundant scheme. This signal is active from the end of the close command from the master AR function to the end of the reclaim time.
3-84
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
AR Ready Signal indicating that the AR function is ready for a reclosure cycle. This signal is active when the AR function is ON and standing by and also during the closing command. AR Blocked Signal indicating that the auto-reclosure relay is blocked. AR in Progress Signal indicating that a reclosure cycle is in progress. This signal is active from the beginning of the dead time until the end of the last reclosure attempt. First AR 1P in Prog. Signal indicating that the 1st single-phase reclosure attempt is in progress. First AR 3P in Prog. Signal indicating that the 1st three-phase reclosure attempt is in progress. Second AR in Prog. Signal indicating that the 2nd reclosure attempt is in progress (always three-phase). Third AR in Progress Signal indicating that the 3rd reclosure attempt is in progress (always three-phase). Fourth AR in Prog. Signal indicating that the 4th reclosure attempt is in progress (always three-phase). First AR completed Signal indicating that the 1st reclosure is completed. 2...4. AR completed Signal indicating that the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reclosure is completed.
SYNCHROCHECK
SCBypas 1P first AR Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready signals for the first single-phase reclosure: 'on' First single-phase reclosure not enabled by synchrocheck and close/open ready signals (bypass always active). 'off' First single-phase reclosure enabled by the synchrocheck and close/open ready signals (bypass inactive).
3-85
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
SCBypas 1P3P first AR Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready signals for the first single or three-phase reclosure: 'on' First reclosure not enabled by synchrocheck and close/open ready signals (bypass always active). 'off' First reclosure enabled by synchrocheck and close/open ready signals (bypass inactive). Ext.SCBypas Bypasses the 'synchroChck' and 'CO Ready' signals. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. I/P logic for enabling the close command: [('synchrocheck' AND 'CO Ready') OR 'Dead line' OR 'Ext.SCBypas']. I/P logic for enabling the close command: [('synchroChk2' AND 'CO Ready 2') OR 'Dead line' OR 'Ext.SCBypas']. SynchroCheck I/P for a signal from a synchrocheck relay. Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed, not fitted and 'Dead line' or 'ExtSCBypas' not used. I/P logic: [('synchrocheck' AND 'CO Ready') OR 'Dead line' OR 'Ext.SCBypas'].
ZONE EXTENSION
To achieve the functions described below, the 'ZExtension' signal must be connected to the distance protection function (see Section 3.5.4.2.). This signal can be used to initiate fast tripping in schemes including overcurrent functions (see Section 3.5.4.3.). ZE Prefault Distance relay reach setting before the first fault: 'on' overreaching ('ZExtension' signal active) 'off' underreaching ('ZExtension' signal inactive) ZE 1. AR Distance relay reach after the 1st reclosure attempt: 'on' overreaching ('ZExtension' signal active) 'off' underreaching ('ZExtension' signal inactive) ZE 2. AR Distance relays reach after the 2nd reclosure attempt: 'on' overreaching ('ZExtension' signal active) 'off' underreaching ('ZExtension' signal inactive)
3-86
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
ZE 3. AR Distance relays reach after the 3rd reclosure attempt: 'on' overreaching ('ZExtension' signal active) 'off' underreaching ('ZExtension' signal inactive) ZE 4. AR Distance relays reach after the 4th reclosure attempt: 'on' overreaching ('ZExtension' signal active) 'off' underreaching ('ZExtension' signal inactive) ZExtension Signal to the distance function to switch it to overreach or enable an overcurrent function with a short delay.
MASTER-FOLLOWER LOGIC
Master Mode (for 1 breaker and redundant schemes) Selection of an auto-reclosure function to be 'Master': 'on' Master O/P signals transmitted 'off' Master O/Ps blocked MasterDelay I/P for a signal delaying the closing command from the follower reclosure function. This signal picks up when the dead time of the master reclosure function starts and is reset either by a new trip after the last reclosure of the cycle or at the end of the wait time following successful reclosure by the master. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. Mast.noSucc I/P for a blocking signal from the master CB. This signal is triggered by the rising edge of the 'Def.Trip' output from the master reclosure function and resets after a fixed time of 500 ms. Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. DelayFlwr. Signal to delay the follower CB for as long as the master circuitbreaker has not completed its auto-reclosure cycle. The signal picks up at the start of master AR dead time and is reset either by the rising edge of the 'Def.Trip' output or the falling edge of the 'Close CB' output after the time 'tClose'. Block to Flwr. Signal to block the follower CB as long as reclosure of the master CB is unsuccessful. The excursion of this signal is the same as for the 'Def.Trip' output.
3-87
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
DUPLEX LOGIC
CB2 Ready I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready (open/close/open). Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed or not fitted. I/P logic: 'CB ready' OR 'CB2 ready' In a duplex scheme, the auto-reclosure cycle is enabled either by an active 'CB ready' or 'CB2 ready' I/P. Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms. CO Ready 2 I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready for a close/open operation. Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed, not fitted and 'Dead line 2' is not used. I/P logic for enabling the close command: [('synchrocheck2' AND 'CO Ready 2') OR 'Dead line 2' OR 'ExtSCBypas']. CB2 open I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is open. Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed. Observe the information given for the duplex logic in a duplex scheme (see Section 3.5.4.5.). SynchroChck2 I/P for a signal from a synchrocheck function belonging to CB2. Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed, not fitted and 'Dead line 2' or ExtSCBypas not used. I/P logic for enabling the close command: [('synchrocheck2' AND 'CO Ready 2') OR 'Dead line 2' OR 'ExtSCBypas']. Dead line 2 I/P indicating that line 2 is de-energised (CB2 open and VTs 2 on the busbar side). Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed. An active I/P overrides the following logical relationship of the I/Ps: 'synchrocheck 2' AND 'CO Ready 2'. Close CB2 Tripping relay O/P for the CB2 close command. Close CB2 Auxiliary relay O/P for the CB2 close signal.
3-88
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
CB2 Priority Input for determining the preferred circuit-breaker: 'off' ('F' or 'False') CB1 is preferred circuit-breaker 'on' ('T' or 'True') CB2 is preferred circuit-breaker If both circuit-breakers are closed before a fault, only the preferred circuit-breaker performs the entire auto-reclosure cycle. The other circuit-breaker closes either after successful auto-reclosure or when the close command to the preferred circuit-breaker is not enabled (missing 'CO Ready' or 'Synchrocheck').
ADDITIONAL LOGIC
The following settings are only of consequence if a special auto-reclosure logic is installed. In this case, consult the associated description for the significance of the various settings. P_INPUT1, P_INPUT2P_INPUT16 Additional binary input for a special auto-reclosure logic. TMSEC_Timer1, TMSEC_Timer2TMSEC_Timer8 Additional timer settings for a special auto-reclosure logic. P_OUTPUT1, P_OUTPUT2P_OUTPUT8 Additional signals for a special auto-reclosure logic.
3-89
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
E. Setting instructions 3.5.4.1. General
The auto-reclosure function can perform from 1 to 4 auto-reclosure attempts. The first attempt can be either single or three-phase while the subsequent attempts are always three-phase. The type and number are determined by the parameters '1. AR Mode' (4 different modes for the 1st reclosure cycle) and '2..4 AR Mode'. The function can operate in conjunction with either an external distance protection relay or other internal protection functions. It can also operate in a scheme comprising two or more protection functions (see Sections 3.5.4.2. to 3.5.4.5.).
3.5.4.2. Connections between auto-reclosure and distance functions
The auto-reclosure function determines from the states of the input signals 'start', 'Trip CB' and 'Trip CB 3P', whether the distance protection has picked up and whether it has performed a single or a threephase trip. Only the 'Trip CB' signal is generated for a single-phase trip, whereas both the 'Trip CB' and 'Trip CB 3P' signals are generated for a three-phase trip. The external distance relay or internal distance function decides whether single or three-phase tripping should take place. The auto-reclosure function can send two signals to the distance protection. The 'Trip 3-Pol' signal informs the distance protection whether it should perform a single or a three-phase trip. The 'ZExtension' signal switches the distance protections overreaching zone on and off. When setting the parameters, attention should be paid to the order of the functions. For runtime reasons, the distance function should be configured before the auto-reclosure function. Where the SOTF logic is not required to operate during auto-reclosure, connect the 'AR in progress' Signal to the 'Ext. Block SOTF' binary I/P of the distance function. The 'SOTF 10 s' timer in the distance functions SOTF logic is normally activated for dead times <10 s and in this case the above connection is not necessary. If the SOTF logic initiates tripping, an auto-reclosure cycle can be inhibited by connecting the 'start SOTF' from the distance function to the 'Cond. Block AR' I/P of the auto-reclosure function. The exchange of signals in the various schemes (one distance and one auto-reclosure function, and several protection functions and one reclosure function) can be seen from Fig. 3.10, Fig. 3.11 and Fig. 3.14.
3-90
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.216 / RE.316*4
<Z
Start RST Trip CB Trip CB 3Ph Start SOTF 1 Pol AR Z Extension AR Start Trip CB
Auto-reclosure function
CO Ready CB Ready Close CB
HEST 045019 C
Trip CB 3P Trip 3-Pol Z Extension
Fig. 3.10
Distance and auto-reclosure functions in the same unit
RE.216 / RE.316*4
<Z
Start Trip CB
HEST 045020 C
Trip CB 3P Trip 3-Pol

Z Extension
Fig. 3.11
Distance protection and auto-reclosure functions in different units
CB Open
Cond. Block AR
CB Open
Cond. Block AR
3-91
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.5.4.3.
Connections between auto-reclosure and overcurrent or differential functions
a) When setting the parameters, attention should be paid to the order of the functions. For run-time reasons, the overcurrent function should be configured before the auto-reclosure function. To prevent the discrimination timer from operating, connect the overcurrent 'Trip' signal to the two inputs 'Start' and 'Trip CB 3P' of the auto-reclosure function. The time 't Close' must be set longer than the maximum operating time of the activated (graded) overcurrent functions to prevent the reclaim time from blocking the AR function in the event of a permanent fault: tClose from AR function > tmax. overcurrent time delay In cases where the zone extension signal is used in conjunction with overcurrent functions (see zone extension settings), the terms 'overreach' and 'underreach' have the following meanings: 'overreach': 'underreach' : enabling of an overcurrent function having a short (non-graded) time delay. enabling of an overcurrent function having a long (graded) time delay.
The exchange of signals in conjunction with O/C functions is shown in Fig. 3.12. b) If only three-phase trip and reclosure operation is required in conjunction with a differential current function, connect the differential function trip output to the 'Start' and 'Trip CB 3P' inputs of the reclosure function. The additional FUPLA logic T129 is required for single-phase trip and reclosure.
3-92
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.216 / RE.316*4
O/C
(I 1>, t 1)
Trip
1 *) Logic
Start Auto-reclosure Trip CB 3P function

HEST045021 C
Z Extension O/C
(I 2>, t 2)
Trip
Block
Fig. 3.12
Overcurrent and auto-reclosure functions in the same unit
where: t1 t2 I1>, I2> standard delay (0.5 ... 1.5 s) short delay (0.02 ... 0.2 s) pick-up value 'I set' for 'Trip'
CB Open
3-93
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.5.4.4.
Redundant schemes
Provision is made for coordinating the operation of two protection functions and one or two auto-reclosure functions per line terminal (see Fig. 3.13 and Fig. 3.14). A master/follower logic has to be used to avoid any time-race problems due to differing timer tolerances. A redundant scheme assumes first and second main protection schemes each with its own reclosure function. The operation of the reclosure functions therefore has to be coordinated by configuring one as 'master' and the other as 'follower'. If the master AR starts first, it delays the operation of the follower AR until it has either achieved successful reclosure or otherwise. If the follower AR is enabled first, its dead time starts to run, but should the master start during the follows dead time, operation of the follower reclosure function is suspended and the master takes over and performs its reclosure cycle. The follower is on 'hot standby' and only takes over, if the master AR or its protection function fails to operate. The signal from a faulty contact like 'CO Ready' to the master recloser, however, would result in a 'Def.Trip' output after the time 't Timeout' and this would also block the Follower AR. In the circuit of Fig. 3.13, the master and follower functions can also be the other way round by appropriately configuring the system software.
3-94
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.216 / RE.316*4
Z Extension AR
<Z
Trip CB 3Ph Start SOTF Start RST 1 Pol AR Trip CB
<Z
Trip CB 3P Cond. Block AR
Cond. Block AR
Trip CB2 3P CB Open CB Ready CO Ready Close CB Inhibit Close Inhibit Output Delay Flwr. CB Open CB Ready CO Ready Close CB Inhibit Output Inhibit Close Master Delay
Master mode = 'ON'
Master mode = 'OFF
HEST 045022 C
Fig. 3.13
Redundant scheme (first and second main < Z and auto-reclosure functions) with master/follower logic
3-95
Z Extension
Z Extension
Trip CB
Start Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Trip 3-Pol
Trip 3-Pol
Start
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
RE.216 / RE.316*4 < Z (1)

Start RST Trip CB Trip CB 3Ph Start SOTF 1 Pol AR Z Extension AR Start Trip CB Trip CB 3P Cond. Block AR Trip 3-Pol Z Extension
Z Extension Trip 3-Pol Start 2
Trip CB2 CO Ready CB Ready Close CB
HEST 045025 C
Start Trip CB 3P
Backup
Fig. 3.14
Several protection functions and a common autoreclosure unit
3.5.4.5.
Master/follower logic
Provision is made for a master/follower logic in 1 breaker schemes with two line protections per line and an auto-reclosure function per circuit-breaker. One of the reclosure functions is assigned the role of master by appropriately setting the parameter 'Master mode'. After a successful reclosure, the master AR then enables the follower AR, respectively its CB (the connections are as given in Fig. 3.15 for a three-phase trip and reclosure for all types of faults).
3-96
CB Open
< Z (2)
Trip CB2 3P
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
MAIN 1
Trip CB R Trip CB R Trip CB S Trip CB T
MAIN 2
Trip CB S Trip CB T
<Z
Start RSTAux Trip CB 3P Start RST
<Z
Start RSTAux Start SOTF Cond. Block AR Trip CB 3P
Start SOTF
Start RST
1 Pol AR
Start 2 Trip CB 2 Trip CB2 3P
Cond. Block AR
Trip CB 3P
Trip 3-Pol
Trip CB2 3P
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
RE.316*4
Master AR
CO Ready CB Ready CB Open
Delay Flwr. Block to Flwr. Close CB
Master Delay Mast. no Succ. CO Ready CB Ready CB Open
RE.316*4
Follower AR
Close CB
"Master CB
"Follower CB
LINE
HEST 045 023 C
Fig. 3.15
Earth and phase fault master/follower scheme for AR mode 1P3P-3P
Note:
A second line on the diameter (1 breaker scheme) requires additional connections and logic.
Trip 3-Pol
Trip CB
Start 2
Trip CB 2
Start
1 Pol AR
Trip CB
Trip CB
3-97
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Follower CB delay 'DelayFlwr'
The master reclosure function sends an active 'DelFlwr' signal to the 'MasterDelay' I/P of the follower to delay its 'Close CB' command to the follower CB until the master reclosure function issues the 'Close CB' command, which is followed by a wait time of 300 ms as a precaution to allow time for a successful reclosure. If the reclosure is unsuccessful, the output remains high until the signal 'Def.Trip' is activated (the 'DelayFlwr' signal resets and 'Blk to Flwr' signal is generated). Should this signal reset before the end of the follower dead time, the close command to the follower CB is issued at the end of the dead time.
Blocking reclosure by the follower 'Block to Flwr.'
The master reclosure function sends an active 'Block to Flwr.' signal to the follower 'Mast.noSucc' I/P to block reclosure by the follower, if the reclosure attempt by the master was unsuccessful as indicated by the generation of its 'Def.Trip' output.
3.5.4.6. Duplex logic
A duplex logic for a line with two circuit-breakers is also included (see Fig. 3.16). Observe the following in connection with a duplex scheme: For the scheme to operate correctly, the corresponding CB signals must be connected to the 'CB open' and 'CB2 open' inputs for the duplex logic (setting to 'off' disables the duplex logic). Follow the procedure below, if separate 'CB ready' and 'CB open' signals are not available from the circuit-breakers: Connect the two circuit-breaker signalling contacts 'CB ready' (air-pressure or spring charging) and 'CB closed' in series. For this, 't Close' must be set longer than the maximum spring charging time to suppress the definitive trip signal in the case of a successful reclosure. Assign the combined signals to the corresponding 'CB ready' inputs. Assign the same signals but inverted to the corresponding 'CB open' inputs. The priority CB is selected with the input 'CB2 Priority'. If both CBs are closed when a fault occurs, then the Autoreclose cycle is executed only for the priority CB. In a normal case the second CB is closed only after a successful autoreclosure of the priority CB. It is also closed if the priority CB is prevented from closing on a Close command because of missing release signals ('CO Ready' resp. Synchrocheck).
3-98
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 3.16
CB Open Start Trip CB Trip CB 3P Cond. Block AR Trip 3-Pol
Start RST Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start SOTF 1 Pol AR Z Extension AR
< Z (1)
RE.216 & RE.316*4
CB1
CB Ready CO Ready Close CB
CB2 Open CB2 Ready CO Ready2 Close CB2
HEST 045 026 C
Z Extension
Z Extension Trip 3-Pol Start 2 Trip CB 2 Trip CB2 3P
CB2
Duplex scheme (< Z can be redundant)
< Z (2)
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-99
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.5.4.7.
Timers
The timers have setting ranges extending up to 300 s in steps of 10 ms. The purpose of each of the timers is described below.
Dead times 't Dead1 1P' to 't Dead 4'
Provided the trip signal is issued before 't Oper' elapses, the dead time is the period between the tripping signal ('Trip CB') and the close signal ('Close CB'). The required dead time must be entered separately for each reclosure cycle. This necessitates setting the following parameters: 't Dead1 1P', 't Dead1 3P', 't Dead 2', 't Dead 3' and 't Dead 4'. Provision is made for externally switching the dead times 't Dead1 1P' and 't Dead1 3P' for the first (fast) reclosure attempt to a second setting. The corresponding additional time period can be set with the aid of the parameter 't Dead 1 Ext' and activated via the binary I/P 'Extend t1'. The 2nd, 3rd and 4th reclosure attempts are always three-phase.
Extended dead time 't Dead 1 Ext'
This time provides facility for extending the dead time (e.g. should the communications channel be defective or for a redundant scheme with 2 auto-reclosure functions). The extended dead time is enabled by the binary input 'Extend t1'.
Maximum fault duration for a reclosure attempt 't Oper'
If a fault has persisted for some time, the probability of a successful reclosure reduces. The likelihood of the power system becoming unstable is also greater for an unsuccessful auto-reclosure attempt following a fault that has persisted for a long period. It is for these reasons that the time after the inception of a fault during which reclosure can be initiated is limited. The fault duration is set using parameter 't Oper'. The timer for the fault duration is started by the pick-up signal from the protection function (Start). Faults resulting in tripping after 't Oper' are locked out ('Def. Trip') and reclosure does not take place. Should the fault duration time expire before the protection trips, autoreclosure is blocked and the reclaim time is started.
Example:
Time 'T Oper' < 'Delay(2)' of the distance function means that autoreclosure only takes place for faults in the first distance zone ('Delay(1)'). This function is not required for schemes that only use current functions. The binary inputs 'Start' and 'Trip CB 3P' are connected together (see Section 3.5.4.3.).
3-100
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Reclaim time 't inhibit'
The purpose of the inhibit time is among other things to permit the circuit-breaker to recover its full voltage withstand. To this end, it disables the auto-reclosure function for the time set for parameter 't inhibit' after one of the following events: the last reclosing attempt a definitive trip resulting from a protection trip after the fault duration time 't Oper' a recurring trip between discrimination time and dead time (evolving fault, see O/P signal 'Def. Trip').
Close signal duration 't Close'
The maximum duration of the circuit-breaker close signal (command O/P 'Close CB') is determined by the parameter 't Close'. Any tripping signal that occurs during this time overrides the close signal. A second, third or fourth reclosure attempt can only take place, if the next trip occurs within the time 't Close'.
Discrimination times 't 1P discrim.' and 't 3P discrim.'
The discrimination time determines the procedure in the event of a different kind of fault occurring during the dead time (evolving fault), i.e. one of the other two phases also picks up or the tripping signal resets and picks up again. The discrimination time is started together with the dead time. Should a tripping signal recur due to an evolving fault between the expiry of the discrimination time and before the end of the dead time, the reclaim timer is started and a definitive trip ('Def. Trip') initiated. The dead time is also discontinued and the signal 'AR in prog.' reset. If the first fault was initially an earth fault and evolves during the time 't Dead1 1P', but before the end of the discrimination time 't Discrim 1P', the dead time 't Dead1 3P' is started and three-phase reclosure takes place. The discrimination time 't Discrim 3P' is also needed for 2 or 1 breaker schemes, where each circuit-breaker has its own auto-reclosure function. A typical setting for the parameters 't Discrim 1P' or 't Discrim 3P' for single and three-phase reclosure is 50 % of the shortest dead time. The minimum permissible setting for the discrimination time is: 100 ms + CB time
NOTICE: The time 't1EvolFaults' during which a subsequent fault has to be detected (evolving or unsuccessful reclosure) must be set in the distance function.
3-101
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The distance protection parameter 't1EvolFaults' enables the time to be set during which a subsequent fault (evolving or unsuccessful reclosure) results in a three-phase trip, i.e. every second trip by the distance protection function trips all three phases. The auto-reclosure function also signals the switchover to three-phase tripping by exciting the signal 'Trip 3-Pol' at the end of the fault discrimination time 't Discrim. 1P'. It is advisable to set the time 't1EvolFaults' longer than the auto-reclosure dead time 't Dead1 1P'.
't Timeout'
The parameter 't Timeout' determines the period after the dead time within which the close signal must be issued, otherwise a 'Def.Trip' is generated and no further reclosure attempt is made. Before a close command is issued at the end of every dead time, the logic [('synchroChck' AND 'CO ready') OR 'Dead Line' OR 'ExtSCBypas')] is checked and the command only enabled providing all the criteria are correct within the setting of 't Timeout'.
Blocking time 't AR Block'
The auto-reclosure function can be enabled or disabled by the following binary I/P signals: Ext. Block AR Manual close Inhibit Inp CB Ready CB2 Ready CO Ready CO Ready 2 Mast.noSucc - also blocks during the reclosure cycle - also blocks during the reclosure cycle - also blocks during the reclosure cycle - blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle - blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle *) - blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after expiry of the time 't time-out' - blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after expiry of the time 't time-out' *) - blocks the follower CB after an unsuccessful reclosure attempt by the master
Cond. Block AR - blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle.
Should a 'Cond. Block AR' signal occur during a reclosure cycle (i.e. the 'AR in prog.' signal is active), it only becomes effective from the end of the current reclosure cycle and providing it is still active.
*)
2 denotes the I/Os for CB2 in a duplex scheme (see Fig. 3.16.).
3-102
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
A reclosure cycle remains blocked for the duration of the set blocking time 't AR Block' after the last binary I/P has been enabled. Blocking also takes place during initialisation of the protection relay when its auxiliary supply is switched on or the parameter settings are being loaded.
3.5.4.8. External binary inputs Starting and tripping signals from the protection function: 'Start' ('Start 2', 'Start 3'), 'Trip CB' and 'Trip CB 3P' ('Trip CB2', 'Trip CB3', 'Trip CB2 3P', 'Trip CB3 3P')
In order to control the auto-reclosure function, it is necessary to configure the three I/P signals 'Trip CB' (general trip), 'Trip CB 3P' (three-phase trip) and 'Start'. The normal procedure to achieve this is to select the protection signals via the sub-menu 'OUTPUT FROM FUNCTION'. Since the auto-reclosure function is completely independent, signals from other functions may also be selected. In a 1st and 2nd main (redundant) protection scheme with one autoreclosure relay (see Section 3.5.4.4.), the I/P signals 'Trip CB2', 'Trip CB2 3P' and 'Start 2' must also be connected to the second protection function.
Circuit-breaker ready signals: 'CB ready' and 'CO Ready' ('CB2 ready' and 'CO Ready 2')
The I/Ps for the parameters 'CO Ready' and 'CB ready' (or 'CO Ready 2' and 'CB2 ready' in a duplex scheme) must be connected to the circuit-breakers in order to signal that they are ready to perform a complete reclosure cycle. In cases where one of the I/Ps is not used, it must be set to 'TRUE'. An active 'CB ready' signal informs the auto-reclosure function that reclosure is permissible (i.e. sufficient energy is available for a full open/close/open cycle). Once a reclosure cycle has started, this signal is ignored (because the pressure varies during a reclosure cycle of an air-blast breaker). Resetting of this signal is internally delayed by 100 ms. The 'CO Ready' signal (close-open cycle can be carried out) is only effective during a reclosure cycle, i.e. during the dead time. Should there be insufficient energy to open the circuit-breaker again following closure, the close signal is disabled and a 'Def. Trip' (definitive trip) is generated. This I/P is only used in conjunction with circuit-breakers, which provide the corresponding information (C-O query), e.g. spring-charged and air-blast circuit-breakers with two switching energy levels.
3-103
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Circuit-breaker open 'CB open' ('CB2 open')
It is also necessary to include the initial status of the circuit-breakers to prevent one from receiving a close signal, which was already open before the fault occurred. The binary I/P 'CB open' (and 'CB2 open' in a duplex scheme) is thus provided to determine the initial status of a circuit-breaker. The pick-up of these signals is delayed by 100 ms to prevent any unwanted blocking of fast circuit-breakers. A circuit-breaker that was already open before the 'Start' signal was received ('CB open' at logical '1') is not closed by the auto-reclosure function. Where a circuit-breaker does not provide the necessary information ('CB open' signal), the I/P must be permanently set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'). Providing the scheme is also not a duplex scheme (i.e. only one CB), the binary I/P 'CB2 open' must also be permanently set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'). Accordingly, these are the default settings for 'CB open' and 'CB2 open'. The auto-reclosure function can then operate with a single circuitbreaker without a 'CB open' signal and no superfluous close signal is generated for the non-existing CB2.
De-energised line 'Dead Line' ('Dead Line 2') with checking of synchronism 'synchroChck' ('synchroChck2')
Before the 'Close CB' (or 'Close CB2') instruction can be issued, either the 'Dead line' or the 'synchroChck' I/P (or 'Dead line 2' or 'synchroChck2' in a duplex scheme) must be at logical '1'. Logic: [('synchroChck' AND 'CO ready') OR 'Dead Line' OR 'ExtSCBypas'] Logic: [('synchroChck2' AND 'CO ready 2') OR 'Dead Line 2' OR 'ExtSCBypas']
External blocking 'Ext. Block AR' and 'Cond. Block AR'
The reclosure function is always blocked by an active 'Ext. Block AR' I/P. An active 'Cond. Block AR' I/P will only block the function, providing a reclosure cycle is not running (i.e. the 'AR in prog.' signal is at logical '0'). The 'Cond.Blk AR' signal is needed to prevent a reclosure cycle, when no reclosure is wanted for a first trip that occurs during 't Oper'. This is the case, for example, for trips by the switch-onto-fault (SOTF) protection or by a directional E/F protection via PLC. To prevent the SOFT from initiating auto-reclosure, the distance protection 'SOFT start' signal must be connected to the 'Cond. Block AR' input.
3-104
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
'Manual close'
The reclosure function is immediately blocked (for the blocking time 't AR Block') by a 'Manual close' signal. This signal is also needed for the overreaching logic to switch the 'ZExtension' signal to 'on'.
External synchrocheck bypass signal 'ExtSCBypas'
This I/P provides facility for bypassing the 'synchroChck' and 'CO Ready' (or 'SynchroChck2' and 'CO Ready 2' for CB2) enabling I/Ps. It is only active for the first fast three-phase or single-phase reclosure attempt.
External extension of the dead time Extend t1'
A logical '1' at the 'Extend t1' I/P extends the dead times 't Dead1 1P' and 't Dead1 3P' by the setting 't Dead1 Ext' for the first (fast) reclosure attempt. This could be necessary, for example, in the event of a communication channel failure or in a redundant scheme.
3.5.4.9. Close CB and signalling outputs
The most important auto-reclosure output is the 'Close CB' command, which must be assigned to a heavy-duty auxiliary O/P relay. This and 14 other heavy-duty and signalling O/Ps are provided. This signal picks up when the closing command is issued and resets at the end of the time 't Close' or earlier if there is a tripping occurs upon reclosing.
Status of the auto-reclosure function 'AR Ready' and 'AR Blocked'
The signal 'AR Ready' is generated when the auto-reclosure function is ready to perform a reclosure cycle and the signal 'AR Blocked' when it is blocked. The 'AR Ready' signal is active providing a reclosure cycle is not blocked (no 'AR Blocked' signal) and a dead time is not running. The 'AR Ready' signal is active during a reclose command for purposes of enabling the synchrocheck function (see Fig. 3.63 in the synchrocheck function section).
Auto-reclosure cycle in progress
There are six signals, which show that a reclosure cycle is running and what stage has been reached: 'AR in prog.' reclosure cycle in progress 'First AR 1P' first single-phase reclosure attempt 'First AR 3P' first three-phase reclosure attempt 'second AR' second reclosure attempt 'Third AR' third reclosure attempt 'Fourth AR' fourth reclosure attempt The signal 'AR in prog' picks up at the start of the dead time and is reset by the falling edge of the last reclose command.
3-105
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Circuit-breaker closing signals 'Close CB' and 'Close CB2'
The CB closing command is normally assigned to a heavy-duty auxiliary O/P relay by correspondingly configuring the parameter 'Close CB' (also 'Close CB2' in a duplex scheme). It is also possible to assign the same signal to a signalling O/P under the same parameter name. A trip subsequent to a close command during the time 't Close' + 300 ms switches the dead time step (second, third and fourth AR) or initiates a lock-out trip (depending on the setting). A close command is reset immediately after a trip.
Definitive trip 'Def. Trip'
The 'Def. Trip' signal indicates that the circuit-breaker will remain tripped and no further reclosure attempts will be made. The following conditions can cause a definitive trip: All reclosure attempts were unsuccessful. A starting or tripping signal was generated after the discrimination time and before dead time. Tripping takes place while a reclosure cycle is blocked (either via the blocking I/P or by the reclaim time). The 'synchroChck' (or 'Dead line') and/or 'CO Ready' I/Ps were not enabled during 't Timeout' due to lack of synchronism. The 'CB open' signal is still active 300 ms after the close signal has reset (i.e. the CB has not responded to the close signal). The trip signal that followed the start signal occurred after the fault duration time 't Oper'. Tripping occurred for a phase fault and the mode selected for the first reclosure cycle is 1P-1P or 1P-3P.
Perform three-phase trip 'Trip 3-Pol'
The 'Trip 3-Pol' O/P instructs the line protection to trip all three phases. The signal can be externally or internally connected. This signal is generated automatically, if reclosure is blocked, 'CB Ready' is inactive, the CB is open, the single-phase discrimination time 't1P Discrim' has elapsed or the signal 'First AR 3P' is active.
Zone extension 'ZExtension'
The setting of the auto-reclosure parameter 'ZE Prefault' determines the pre-fault reach of the distance protection when the auto-reclosure function is inactive (before the first fault), i.e. setting 'ZE Prefault' to 'on' activates the output signal 'ZExtension' which then switches the distance function to overreach. The parameters 'ZE 1. AR reach' to 'ZE 4. AR reach' provide facility for individually switching the reach for each reclosure attempt. Setting one of these parameters to 'on' means that the 'ZExtension' O/P is at
3-106
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
logical '1' and the distance relay is switched to overreach either before fault occurrence or for the following reclosure attempt, otherwise the distance relay is set to underreach. With the exception of its first change of state when providing 'ZEPrefault' is set to 'ON' it resets together with the signal 'Trip CB' or 'Trip CB 3P', this signal picks up and resets together with the 'Close CB' signal. The distance relay is switched to overreaching for a 'Manual close'. It is switched to underreaching when the auto-reclosure function is blocked. Note also that the 'ZExtension' signal is connected to the binary input 'ZEMode AR' of the zone extension logic in the distance protection function.
3.5.4.10.
Timing diagrams
The time relationship between the various signals during operation of the auto-reclosure function can be seen from Fig. 3.17 to Fig. 3.25.
3-107
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Successful AR
time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip t Close Close CB Z Extension 300 ms First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P t Inhibit
t Discrim. 1P
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip
Close CB Z Extension
First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked
t Discrim. 1P
t Dead1 1P
Fig. 3.17
Timing diagram for a single or double busbar arrangement with 1 distance and 1 AR function. Response for an earth fault.
Settings: '1. AR Mode' = '1P-1P' or '1P3P-1P3P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on', 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-108
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Successful AR (evolving fault during t Discrim1P)

time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip t Close Close CB Z Extension First AR 1P in Progress First AR 3P in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P t Inhibit
t Discrim. 1P 300 ms
Unsuccessful AR (evolving fault within t Dead1 1P,

but after t Discrim1P)
time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip
Close CB Z Extension
First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked
t Discrim. 1P
t Dead1 1P
Fig. 3.18
Timing diagram for a single or double busbar arrangement with 1 distance and 1 AR function. Response for an earth fault that evolves.
Settings: '1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on', 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-109
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Successful AR
time < t Operation Trip CB 3P Trip CB Start Def. Trip Close CB Z Extension First AR 3P in Progress Second AR in Progress Third AR in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3 t Inhibit 300 ms t Close
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Operation Trip CB 3P Trip CB Start Def. Trip Close CB Z Extension First AR 3P in Progress Second AR in Progress Third AR in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3
Fig. 3.19
Timing diagram for a single or double busbar arrangement with 1 distance and 1 AR function. Response for multiple phase faults.
Settings: '1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 3, 'ZE Prefault' = 'on', 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off', 'ZE 2. AR' = 'on' and 'ZE 3. AR' = 'off'.
3-110
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Master AR (Master Mode = "ON")

time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip Close CB Z Extension 300 ms First AR 1P In Progress Trip 3-Pol Delay Flwr Inhibit Output AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P t Inhibit t Discrim. 1P t Close
Follower AR (Master Mode = "OFF", AR on "hot standby")

time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip Close CB Z Extension First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol Master Delay Inhibit Close AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P t Inhibit
t Discrim. 1P
Fig. 3.20
Timing diagram for redundant scheme with 2 ARs. Response for 1 successful reclosure.
Settings: '1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on' and 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-111
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Master AR (Master Mode = "ON")

time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip Close CB Z Extension First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol Delay Flwr Inhibit Output AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P t Inhibit
t Discrim. 1P
Follower AR (Master Mode = "OFF", AR on "hot standby")

time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip Close CB Z Extension First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol Master Delay Inhibit Close AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P t Inhibit
t Discrim. 1P
Fig. 3.21
Timing diagram for redundant scheme with 2 ARs. Response for 1 unsuccessful reclosure.
Settings: '1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on' and 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-112
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip Close CB Close CB2 Z Extension First AR 3P in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 3P
Successful AR
Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Def. Trip
time < t Operation
t Close Close CB Close CB2 Z Extension 300 ms First AR 3P in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 3P t Inhibit 300 ms
Fig. 3.22
Timing diagram for duplex scheme. Response for a multiple phase fault.
Settings: '1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on', 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off' and 'CB2 Priority = 'Always FALSE'.
3-113
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Master AR (Master Mode = "ON", CB on bus side)

time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Close CB Z Extension Def. Trip First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol Delay Flwr Block to Flwr AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Follower AR (Master Mode = "OFF", Centre CB)

time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Close CB Z Extension Def. Trip First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol Master Delay Mast.no Succ AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Fig. 3.23
Timing diagram for a 1 breaker scheme. Response for an unsuccessful reclosure.

Settings: '1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P' or '1P-1P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on' and 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-114
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd

time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Close CB Z Extension Def. Trip 300 ms First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol Delay Flwr Block to Flwr AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P t Inhibit t Discrim. 1P t Close

time < t Operation Trip CB Trip CB 3P Start Close CB Z Extension Def. Trip 300 ms First AR 1P in Progress Trip 3-Pol Master Delay Mast.no Succ AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 1P t Inhibit t Discrim. 1P t Close
Fig. 3.24
Timing diagram for a 1 breaker scheme. Response for a successful reclosure.

Settings: '1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P' or '1P-1P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on' und 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-115
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

time < t Operation Trip CB 3P Trip CB Start Def. Trip Block to Flwr Delay Flwr Close CB Z Extension First AR 3P in Progress Second AR in Progress Third AR in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3

time < t Operation Trip CB 3P Trip CB Start Def. Trip Close CB Mast.no Succ Master Delay Z Extension First AR 3P in Progress Trip 3-Pol AR in Progress AR Ready AR Blocked
Fig. 3.25
Timing diagram for 1 breaker scheme. Response for an unsuccessful multiple reclosure.
Settings: '1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on', 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off', 'ZE 2. AR' = 'on' and 'ZE 3. AR' = 'off'.
3-116
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.4.11.
Checking the dead times
When commissioning the auto-reclosure function, it is not sufficient to check the combined operation of protection function, auto-reclosure function and circuit-breaker, the resulting dead times must also be determined. Since the dead time settings do not correspond to the effective total dead times, especially in a scheme with two circuit-breakers (see Fig. 3.26), the period during which the circuit-breaker is actually open must be measured. This entails adjusting the dead time until the measured breaker time minus arcing and pre-ignition times and the inevitable CB tolerances result in an adequate composite dead time. Providing the circuit-breakers at both ends of the line are of the same type and thus permit the same tolerances to be assumed at both ends, the same dead time tp can be set in the two terminal stations. Where this is not the case, the tripping and closing times of the two circuitbreakers must also be measured in addition to the dead times. The dead times set for the two auto-reclosure functions must then ensure that a sufficiently long 'overlapping' dead time exists to enable the circuit-breakers to deionise.
3-117
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
tw tp
ts
1 2 6 5 3
A
O
t1 t3 t4 t6 t7 1 2 3 4 t2
t5
6 5 4
B
O
(t)
HEST 925 035 C
A: circuit-breaker 1 C: 'closed' position 0: start 2: contacts part 4: 'close' signal 6: contacts make t1: tripping time t4: dead time t7: resulting dead time tp: dead time
B: circuit-breaker 2 O: 'open' position 1: 'trip' signal 3: current interrupted 5: current flows again
t2: reclosing time t5: pre-ignition time
t3: arc extinction time t6: duration of interruption
ts: inhibit time
tw: fault duration
Fig. 3.26
Resulting composite dead time (Source: 'Guidelines for auto-reclosure in electrical power systems' published by the German Association of Power Utilities VDEW)
3-118
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.5.
Sensitive earth fault protection for grounded systems (EarthFltGnd2)
A. Application
High-resistance earth faults, which cannot be detected by the distance protection, can still cause appreciable problems in spite of the relatively low fault currents involved. The sensitive E/F protection function has been included to complement the main line protection function and cover the low E/F current range. The protection processes the zero-sequence components 3I0 and 3U0.
B. Features
DC component filter Harmonic filter Directional measurement of zero-sequence components (derived either internally or externally) Current pick-up enabling level Reference voltage enabling level Adjustable characteristic angle Permissive and blocking transfer tripping schemes Echo logic for weak infeed and open circuit-breaker Transient blocking logic for reversal of energy direction

Voltage Current
II. Binary inputs:

External blocking Receive CB closed VT supervision Starting and tripping by the distance function

Pick-up Trip Fault forwards Fault backwards Transmit Block distance protection receive
IV. Measurements:
Neutral voltage (3U0) Neutral current (3I0) Real power component of neutral power (3U0 3I0)
3-119
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Apparent power component of neutral power Fault direction (1 = forwards, -1 = backwards; this measured variable only applies when the binary input 'CB closed' is active)
This function does not transfer any tripping measurements via the IBB. The measurements in the event list are not generated at the instant of tripping, but when the enabling levels 'U-Setting' and 'I-Dir are exceeded'.
3-120
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
D. Sensitive E/F protection settings - EarthFltGnd2

Text Trip Voltage Inp Chan Current Inp Chan V-Setting I-Setting Angle t Basic t Wait t Trans Block CT Neutral Communication Mode Send Mode 1 Channel Echo Mode Extern block Input Receive CB closed VT Superv Extern Start R Extern Start S Extern Start T Extern Trip 3P Extern Trip Trip Start Meas Forward Meas Backward Send Receive Inh. Units Default 00000000
CT/VT-Addr 0 CT/VT-Addr 0
Min.
Max.
Step
UN IN deg s s s
0.200 0.100 60.0 0.050 0.050 0.100 Line side Permissive MeasBwd off off F F T F F F F F F ER ER
0.003 0.100 -90.0 0.000 0.000 0.000 (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select)
0.100 1.000 90.0 1.000 0.500 0.500
0.001 0.01 5 0.001 0.001 0.001
BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr
Trip Tripping logic (matrix). VoltageInp defines the VT input channel. All the VT input channels are available for selection. If the neutral voltage is derived from the three phase voltages, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected.
3-121
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Current Inp Chan defines the CT input channel. All the CT input channels are available for selection. If the neutral current is derived from the three phase currents, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected. U-Setting Reference voltage pick-up setting. I-Setting Current pick-up setting. Angle Characteristic angle setting. t Basic Basic time setting. t Wait Time allowed for a blocking signal to be transferred and for the directional comparison to be made. tTransBlk Blocking time after a reversal of fault energy direction (transient blocking). CT neutral Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current direction): line (in accordance with the diagram in Fig. 12.4) busbar (reversed connection) ComMode Kind of transfer tripping scheme: permissive blocking SendMode For what system condition a signal is transmitted in an intertripping scheme: forwards measurement (only permissive scheme) non-directional (only blocking scheme) backwards measurement (only blocking scheme) 1 Channel Supplementary logic needed for coordinating E/F and distance protections when using the same communications channel for a permissive scheme. off on
3-122
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Echo Echo logic for weak infeed and open CB: off echo logic disabled Weak echo only for weak infeed Bkr echo only when CB open Weak & Bkr echo for weak infeed or CB open Ext block I/P for an external blocking signal. F: enabled T: disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Receive PLC receive I/P. F: no PLC receive signal xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) CB closed CB position indicator I/P. F: function disabled T: function enabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) VT Superv VT supervision I/P. F: tripping enabled T: tripping disabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Ext Start R / S / T, Ext Trip 3P, Ext Trip I/Ps for the distance function signals 'Start R', 'Start S', 'Start T', 'Trip CB 3P' and 'Trip CB' for coordinating operation. F: not connected xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Trip Tripping signal O/P. Start O/P for signalling that the protection has picked up, i.e. the current has exceeded the enabling setting ('I-Setting'). MeasFwd O/P for signalling a fault in the forwards direction.
3-123
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
MeasBwd O/P for signalling a fault in the backwards direction. Send PLC transmit signal. RecveInh. O/P for preventing the distance function from receiving a PLC signal. (This is only effective when E/F and distance protections use a common PLC channel, i.e. the parameter '1 Channel' is set to 'on'.)
3-124
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
E. Setting instructions
3.5.5.1. Coordination with the distance protection
Directional E/F function as ancillary to the distance function

Compared with integrated E/F and distance functions, the logic in an independent E/F function needs certain starting and tripping signals generated by the distance function and, providing the connections are made as in Section 3.5.5.12., the E/F protection is blocked in the following situations: starting of more than one distance phase three-phase tripping any trip (single and three-phase), if '1 Channel' is set to 'on'
Scheme with independent communication channels

Apart from the added security of redundancy, independent communication channels enable different transfer tripping schemes to be used for E/F and distance protections. Providing the distance protection can detect a fault, it should trip before the E/F protection picks up. For this reason, the basic operating time 't Basic' for the E/F protection must be set longer than the longest response time to be expected of the distance protection.
Scheme with a common communication channel

Where E/F and distance protections use the same communication channel, the transfer tripping schemes must be either both permissive or both blocking. In the case of permissive schemes, in which the distance protection operates with non-directional criteria at one end for a weak infeed, a supplementary logic must be enabled by appropriately setting the parameter '1 Channel'. This supplementary logic interlocks the distance relays receive signal at the end of the E/F functions basic time or when it picks up in the backwards direction. To this end, the signal 'RecveInh' is connected to the distance protection input 'ExtBlkHF'. Thus the communication channel is initially available for use by the distance protection and only made available to the E/F protection at the end of the basic time. The basic time setting must allow adequate time for the distance protection to detect and clear a fault if it can. Independent directional E/F protection The E/F function can also be applied as a completely independent protection, but only in MV and HV systems. The coordination of E/F and distance protections in this case is achieved by appropriately setting the parameter 't Basic' .
3-125
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
If this time is too short, there is a likelihood that the E/F protection will issue a three-phase trip before the circuit-breaker has opened for faults that have been correctly detected by the distance protection. The basic time of the E/F protection must therefore be long enough to ensure that the distance protection can trip phase-selectively. No facility is provided for using the distance relay starters to achieve phase-selective tripping by the directional E/F function. An independent directional E/F function requires its own communication channel, which must be entirely independent of the distance protection.
3.5.5.2. Choice of operating mode
It is assumed that the E/F protection settings at both ends of the protected line are the same. This applies especially to the basic time, the blocking time, the transfer tripping scheme in use and options.
3.5.5.3. Choice of transfer tripping scheme
In the case of a permissive directional comparison scheme, the amount of fault resistance, which can be detected reduces towards the remote end of the line, because the enabling current must be exceeded at both ends. Without additional precautions, the use of a permissive scheme would be limited on lines with a weak infeed at one end. It was possible to eliminate this disadvantage by providing the directional E/F protection with its own echo logic for weak infeeds that can be switched in and out as required.
NOTICE: Note that the protection only operates in a comparison mode during the comparison time (1 s) and is blocked at the end of this time. The comparison time starts at the end of the basic time.
On the other hand, a directional comparison scheme using a blocking signal is able to detect high-resistance E/Fs along the whole length of the line, because the protection at the strong infeed end is always able to trip although the current at the weak infeed end does not reach the enabling level.
3-126
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Permissive directional comparison scheme

In this scheme, each of the protection functions has to receive a signal from the opposite end of line in order to be able to trip. A protection function sends a permissive signal when its current exceeds the enabling level 'I setting', the basic time 't Basic' has expired and the fault detected is in the forwards direction. Options: Echo 'Bkr': Providing this parameter is active, a permissive signal (echo) is sent to the opposite end of the line, if the local circuit-breaker is open and a signal is received. Tripping is thus possible at the infeed end. The duration of the echo signal is limited to 150 ms. Non-directional echo 'Weak infeed': If the directional E/F function at the weak infeed end of a line cannot measure, because the reference voltage is too low or the current does not reach the enabling level, a signal is returned to the opposite end of the line if one is received. This enables tripping to take place at the end with the stronger infeed.
Start
I-Setting
tBasic
tBasic
Start
I-Setting
MeasFwd
&
Send Receive
Send Receive
&
MeasFwd
&
Rel. 1 Rel. 2
&
A1
A2
HEST 925 020 C
Fig. 3.27 where:
Principle of a permissive directional comparison scheme
Start : current higher than the enabling level 'I setting' t Basic : basic time MeasFwd : fault in forwards direction
3-127
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
I0
I set
Tx: I-setting * MeasFwd * t Basic T: I-setting * MeasFwd * t Basic * Rx TB: MeasBwd' + t TransBlk
<Tx: MeasBwd * Rx> TB: MeasBwd' + t TransBlk

I dir Iasymm
<Tx: MeasBwd * Rx>
U set
U0
Basic operation mode
Non-directional echo and "Transient Blocking"
Non-directional echo
HEST 925 022 C
Fig. 3.28
Operation of a permissive directional comparison scheme
where: <...> Rx MeasFwd MeasBwd MeasBwd' I dir I-Setting Iasymm Tx T TB t TransBlk t Basic t Wait U-Setting : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : optional function receive fault in forwards direction fault in backwards direction including 'Transient blocking' fault in backwards direction current enable for directional measurement (= 0.7 I-Setting) current enabling level asymmetrical currents under normal load conditions send trip transient blocking blocking time basic time waiting time reference voltage
3-128
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Blocking directional comparison scheme

Providing the conditions for directional measurement are fulfilled i.e. the current higher than 'I dir' and the voltage higher than its enabling level 'U-Setting', a protection function transmits a blocking signal to the remote station immediately it detects a fault in the backwards direction. Note:
I dir = 0.7 I-Setting
A protection function measuring a fault in the direction of the protected line trips at the end of the adjustable waiting time 't Wait', providing a blocking signal is not received beforehand. Options: SendMode: 'non-directional' A blocking signal is transmitted in this mode, if the current is higher than 'I dir', the basic time has expired and no fault is detected in the forwards direction (including situations when a direction measurement is impossible, because 3U0 < U- Setting).
tBasic I-dir tBasic
I-Setting
tBasic I-dir
&
Send Send
&
tBasic
I-Setting
MeasBwd MeasFwd Receive Receive
MeasBwd MeasFwd
&
tWait
&
tWait
Rel. 1
Rel. 2
A1
A2
HEST 925 021 C
Fig. 3.29 where: I-Setting I-dir
Principle of a blocking directional comparison scheme
: current enabling level : current enable for directional measurement (= 0,7 I-Setting) t Basic : basic time t Wait : waiting time MeasFwd : fault in forwards direction MeasBwd : fault in backwards direction
3-129
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
I0
I set
<Tx: I dir * MeasFwd * t
Tx: I dir * MeasBwd * t Basic <+I dir * MeasFwd * t Basic> T: I set * MeasFwd * t Basic * Rx * t Wait TB: MeasBwd' + t TransBlk Tx: I dir * MeasBwd * t Basic <+I dir * MeasFwd * t Basic> TB: MeasBwd' + t TransBlk
I dir Iasymm
U set Basic operation mode
U0
HEST 925 023 C
Non-directional transmission
Fig. 3.30
Operation of a directional comparison blocking scheme (for the legend, see after Fig. 3.28)
3.5.5.4.
Setting the enabling pick-up levels
The setting of the current enabling 'I dir' must take account of the zerosequence component in normal operation arising from system asymmetries. The pick-up setting for the voltage enabling signal 'U-Setting' is determined by the level of asymmetries on the secondary side (VT tolerances, asymmetrical burdens etc.). The ability to read voltage and current values on the relay is a useful aid for determining these settings. For example, if the enabling current setting 'I-Setting' is too low, the pick-up signal lights continuously (current circuit enabled). Since an E/F causes asymmetrical voltages in the vicinity of the fault, the current flowing via the system capacitances also has a zerosequence component. A capacitive current of this kind on a long line lies within the setting range of the sensitive E/F protection function. The pick-up level 'I dir' of the current circuit for the directional measurement has a fixed setting of 0.7 'I set' to take account of influences such as CT errors and the capacitive charging currents of the line. The following procedure is recommended for setting the pick-up levels:
3-130
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The enabling current for the directional measurement must be set to at least twice the maximum possible asymmetrical current, which can occur in normal operation. I - Setting = 2.0 Iasymm IN
The voltage pick-up must be set to 1.6 times the level of the spurious voltages, which can occur due to asymmetries in the VT secondary circuit. U - Setting = 1.6 Usec.asymm UN
where: U-Setting Usec.asymm UN I-Setting Iasymm IN

3.5.5.5.
: setting of the enabling voltage for the directional measurement : voltage component 3 U0 caused by asymmetries in the VT secondary circuit (e.g. VT errors) : 100 V or 200 V according to VT unit in use : setting of the enabling current : current component 3I0 caused by asymmetrical load currents : primary CT rated current.
Setting the characteristic angle 'Angle'
The line marking the reversal of direction lies at +90 in relation to the reference voltage. In order to achieve symmetrical operation of the directional element in spite of this, the characteristic angle should equal that of the zerosequence impedance of the source.
3.5.5.6. Setting the basic time 't Basic'
The basic time is the period between pick-up of the protection and the earliest possible trip. The operation of the protection function can be coordinated with others on the same line by judiciously setting the basic time. The basic time is also used to achieve coordination between the E/F function (three-phase tripping) and the distance function (phaseselective tripping).The E/F protection is delayed to allow time for the distance protection to respond to a fault if it can.
3-131
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The basic time is normally set to: t Basic > max. tripping time of the phase-selective distance protection (taking account of signal transmission time and sequential tripping) + CB operating time + aux. contact time (I/P 'CB closed') + safety margin
The sum of these times is usually about 100 to 200 ms.

3.5.5.7. Circuit-breaker delay
To avoid operation of the enabling current detector during the transient oscillations, which occur following the closing of the circuit-breaker, it is blocked for 50 ms upon receiving the corresponding signal from the CB.
3.5.5.8. The comparison time 't comp'
The comparison time is the time allowed for the directional comparison to be made and is therefore dependent on the type of transfer tripping scheme. The comparison time has a fixed setting of 1 s.
3.5.5.9. Setting the waiting time 't Wait'
The waiting time is also started at the end of the basic time, but is only effective in a blocking scheme. In a blocking scheme, tripping is delayed by the setting of 't Wait' to allow time for the protection in the opposite station to decide on the direction of the fault and to transmit a corresponding blocking signal if necessary. 't Wait' should be set at least as long as the measuring time (about 30 ms) plus the longest possible signal transmission time.
3.5.5.10. Setting the transient blocking time 't TransBlk'
The protection function includes a 'transient blocking logic' to prevent any mal-operation during the course of tripping a fault or auto-reclosure on double-circuit lines, when there is a likelihood of the flow of energy reversing direction. The time setting can be selected in a wide range to suit the prevailing conditions. For example, after a fault has been detected in the backwards direction, a second directional decision in the forwards direction is inhibited for the setting of 't TransBlk' . The time chosen is determined largely by the time required for the measurement to reset and the transfer tripping scheme in use. The recommended setting is 60 ms plus the reset time of the communication channel.
3-132
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.5.11.
CT/VT inputs of the function
Where the zero-sequence components of the voltages and the currents are derived internally, the CT and VT inputs must be connected precisely as shown in the wiring diagram. The neutral of the CTs in this case is formed on the line side and the parameter 'CT neutral' must be set to 'line side' .
3.5.5.12. Binary inputs of the function
Ext. block
Exciting the 'Ext. block' I/P disables the entire protection function.
Receive
The signal transmitted by the protection in the opposite station is connected to this I/P.
CB closed
The 'CB closed' I/P is intended for the position indicator signal from the circuit-breaker and has a fixed pick-up delay of 50 ms. The protection function is only enabled when this signal is received to confirm that the CB is closed. The corresponding auxiliary contacts for the three phases must be connected in series to ensure that the protection does not operate during single-phase reclosure. The echo logic is enabled 100 ms after the circuit-breaker is opened.
VT Supervision
The 'VT Superv' I/P is needed to block the echo logic. It can be excited either by the 'VTSup' signal from the internal distance protection function or an auxiliary contact on the m.c.b. via a binary I/P. If this I/P is not needed, it must be set to 'F'.
Ext Start R / S / T, Ext Trip 3P, Ext Trip

These I/Ps are for coordinating operation with the distance protection function. To them are connected the distance function signals 'Start R', 'Start S', 'Start T', 'Trip CB 3P' and 'Trip CB'. They must be set to 'F' if an independent directional E/F scheme is in use.
3-133
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.5.5.13.
Outputs
Trip
There are two 'Trip' signals, one for energising the tripping relay via the tripping logic and the other for controlling LEDs and signalling contacts.
Start
An active 'Start' O/P signals that the zero-sequence current has exceeded the pick-up setting 'I-Setting'. This signal is only generated providing the function is not blocked.
MeasFwd
'MeasFwd' is active when the measuring element detects a fault in the forwards direction, i.e. the settings of 'I dir' and 'U setting' have been exceeded.
MeasBwd
'MeasBwd' is active when the measuring element detects a fault in the backwards direction, i.e. the settings of 'I dir' and 'U setting' have been exceeded.
Send
The 'Send' O/P is the signal sent to the other end of the line.
Receive Inhibit
The 'Recve Inh' signal prevents the distance function from receiving a PLC signal (see Section 3.5.5.1.). It is only generated when the parameter '1 Channel' is set, the basic time has expired or the E/F protection picks up for a reverse fault. The signal 'Recve Inh' must be connected to the distance function I/P 'ExtBlkHF'.
3-134
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.6.
Inverse definite minimum time earth fault overcurrent function (I0-Invers)
A. Application
Overcurrent function with IDMT characteristic. A typical application is as back-up for the E/F protection function, in which case it measures 3 I0 either supplied from an external source or internally derived.
B. Features
Tripping characteristic according to British Standard 142 (see Fig. 3.31): c = 0.02 : normal inverse c=1 : very inverse and long time earth fault c=2 : extremely inverse DC component filter Harmonic filter External 3 I0 signal or 3 I0 internally derived from the three phase currents Wider setting range than specified in BS 142

Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Starting Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Neutral current
3-135
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. IDMT function settings - I0-Invers

Text Trip c-Setting k1-Setting I-Start Min. Tripping Time IB-Setting Number Of Phases Current Inp. Chan. Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal CT/VT-Addr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr s IB s IN Units Default 00000000 Very Inv. 13.50 1.10 0.0 1.00 1 Ph 0 F ER ER (Select) 0.01 1.00 0.0 0.04 (Select) 200.0 4.00 10.0 2.50 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.01 Min. Max. Step
Trip Tripping logic (matrix). c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the shape of the operating characteristic according to BS 142 or for selecting the RXIDG characteristic. k1-Setting Constant determining the tripping characteristic. I-Start Pick-up setting (initiates the tripping characteristic). t-min Definite minimum time of the tripping characteristic. IB-Setting Reference current to take account of discrepancies with respect to IN. NrOfPhases Number of phases evaluated for measurement: 1 : neutral current direct from an CT input 3 : neutral current derived internally from the three phases Current Inp Chan defines the CT input channel. All the current channels are available for selection. In the case of a three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected.
3-136
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
BlockInp I/P for the external blocking signal. F: unused T: function always blocked xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Trip Tripping signal. Start Pick-up signal.
3-137
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
E. Setting instructions Protection function enable 'I-Start'

The IDMT function starts to run when the current applied to the function exceeds the setting 'I-Start'. 'I-Start' is normally set to 1.1 IB.
Choice of tripping characteristic 'c'

The shape of the IDMT characteristic is determined by the constant 'c'. The standard IDMT characteristics according to BS 142 are: 'normal inverse' 'very inverse' and 'long time earth fault' 'extremely inverse' : : : c = 0.02 c = 1.00 c = 2.00
Fig. 3.31
IDMT tripping characteristic for 'I0-Invers' (I = 3 I0)
'c-Setting' can also be set to 'RXIDG', in which case the functions inverse characteristic corresponds to that of the relay Type RXIDG: t [s] = 5.8 1.35 In (I/IB) The parameter 'k1-Setting' has no influence in this case.
3-138
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Time multiplier 'k1-Setting'

Discriminative operation of the relays along a line is achieved by timegrading. Assuming all the relays to be set to the same IB, this involves setting the time multiplier in equal steps (grading time), increasing from the load towards the source. For example, in the case of the 'very inverse' characteristic, the constant c = 1 and the factor k1 13.5. The operating time t is then given by
t= k1 3I0 1 IB
Assuming the grading time of the protection functions to be 0.5 s at 6 IB, the settings of k1 according to the formula k1 = 5 t for operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s become:
t [s] 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
k1 [s] 2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5
The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows: 'normal inverse' 'very inverse' 'extremely inverse' 'long time earth fault' : k1 = 0.14 s : k1 = 13.5 s : k1 = 80 s : k1 = 120 s
Definite minimum time 't-min'

Where the IDMT function is being applied as back-up protection for a directional E/F protection, the definite minimum time 't-min' must be set as follows t-min = t Basic + t comp
t Basic = basic time of the E/F function t comp = comparison time of the E/F function (1 s)
3-139
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Interconnections between IDMT and directional E/F functions

The IDMT protection is non-directional. Directional operation can, however, be achieved by linking the directional signal ('MeasFwd', i.e. fault in forwards direction) from the E/F protection to the blocking I/P of the IDMT function. The I/P must be inverted so that blocking of the IDMT function is cancelled by an active forwards signal. When using this arrangement, it must be noted that, when 'MeasFwd' does not pick up, the IDMT function cannot trip when the reference voltage of the E/F function is too low. If tripping is required for this case, the directional E/F signal 'MeasBwd' must be applied to the blocking input.
Applications with single-phase reclosure

In schemes involving single-phase reclosure, the 'I0-Invers' function has to be blocked for the time that one pole of a circuit-breakers is open if the minimum tripping time 'tmin' is set less than the singlephase dead time. This avoids false three-phase tripping due to the load currents in the healthy phases.
Typical settings:
IB I-Start c-Setting k1-Setting t-min to be calculated 1.1 IB depends on the protected unit to be calculated 0.00
3-140
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.7.
Definite time over and undercurrent (Current-DT)
A. Application
General purpose current function (over and under) for phase fault protection back-up protection ground fault protection
or for monitoring a current minimum.
B. Features
Insensitive to DC component Insensitive to harmonics Single or three-phase measurement Maximum respectively minimum value detection in the three-phase mode Detection of inrush currents

Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
3-141
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Definite time current function settings - Current-DT

Text Trip Delay I Setting Max / Min Number Of Phases Current Inp. Chan Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal Unit s IN Default 00000000 01.00 02.00 Max (1ph) 1 Ph Min. 0.02 0.02 (Select) (Select) Max. 60.00 20.00 Step 0.01 0.01
CT/VT-Addr 0 BinaryAddr F SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping O/P of the function (matrix tripping logic). Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. I Setting Pick-up current setting. Forbidden settings: > 1.6 IN when supplied from metering cores < 0.2 IN when supplied from protection cores Max / Min defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent or with inrush blocking. Settings: Min (3ph): Undercurrent. Three-phase functions detect the highest phase current. Not permitted for single-phase functions. Min (1ph): Undercurrent. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phase current. Overcurrent. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phase current. Not permitted for single-phase functions. Overcurrent. Three-phase functions detect the highest phase current. Blocks during inrush currents if one phase exceeds setting.
Max (3ph):
Max (1ph):
Max-Inrush:
3-142
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Number Of Phases defines whether single or three-phase measurement. Current Inp. Chan defines the CT input channel. All current I/Ps may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. Block Input I/P for blocking the function. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Trip Signal Tripping signal. Start Signal Pick-up signal.
3-143
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Setting Delay Over or undercurrent Number of phases I Setting Delay Max / Min Number Of Phases
The definite time current function protects transformers, primary equipment of a captive network, and generators, which can cause an overcurrent, such as an overload, short circuit and ground fault. The filters at the measurement input damp the DC component of the harmonics, thereby the protection reacts only on the fundamental harmonics. The protection can be used for sensitive current measurements e.g. when the earth fault current is small. Together with an external high impedance protection circuit, this function can be used as a 'restricted earthfault protection (REF)'.
Setting I-Setting
The current setting 'I-Setting' must be sufficiently high on the one hand to avoid any risk of false tripping or false signals under normal load conditions, but should be low enough on the other to detect the lowest fault current that can occur. The margin that has to be allowed between the maximum short-time load current and the setting must take account of: the tolerance on the current setting the reset ratio
The maximum short-time load current has to be determined according to the power system conditions and must take switching operations and load surges into account.
I I-Setting
I IN Delay
HEST 905 010 C
Fig. 3.32
Operating characteristic of the definite time overcurrent function Compensating any difference between the rated currents of CT IN1 and protected unit IGN is recommended. This is achieved with the aid
3-144
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
of the reference value of the A/D channel or by correcting the overcurrent setting. For example, for IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting for a pickup current of 1.5 IGN = 1200 A would have to be I 800 A = 1.2 1.5 GN = 1.5 IN1 1000 A
Current Inp. Chan.

An interposing CT in the input is essential for current settings lower than < 0.2 IN.
Delay
The delay is used to achieve discrimination of the overcurrent function. It is set according to the grading table for all the overcurrent units on the power system. The zone of protection of our overcurrent function extends to the location of the next downstream overcurrent relay. Should the downstream relay fail to clear a fault, the overcurrent function trips slightly later as a back-up protection.
Setting Max / Min

This parameter enables the following operating modes to be selected: Min (3ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current also falls below the setting. This setting is not permitted for single-phase measurement. Pick-up when the lowest phase current falls below the setting. Pick-up when the lowest phase current also exceeds the setting. This setting is not permitted for single-phase measurement. Pick-up when the highest phase current exceeds the setting. Blocking of inrush currents when a phase current exceeds the setting.
Min (1ph): Max (3ph):
Max (1ph): Max-Inrush:
Operation of the inrush blocking feature (parameter MaxMin set to 'Max-Inrush')

The inrush detector picks up and blocks operation of the function when the amplitude of the fundamental component of the current exceeds the setting of the current function.
3-145
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The inrush detector is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic component of the current I2h in relation to the fundamental frequency component I1h (evaluation of the amplitudes). The output of the function is disabled when the ratio I2h/I1h exceeds 10 % and enabled again when it falls below 8 %. There is no setting for the peak value of I2h/I1h. The function can operate with inrush blocking in both the single and three-phase mode (parameter 'Number Of Phases'). In the three-phase mode, the phase used for evaluation is the one with the highest amplitude at rated frequency (pick-up and inrush detection).
3-146
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.8.
Peak value overcurrent (Current-Inst)
A. Application
General current monitoring with instantaneous response (over and undercurrent) Current monitoring where insensitivity to frequency is required (over and undercurrent).
B. Features
Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and largely independent of frequency Stores the peak value following pick-up No suppression of DC component No suppression of harmonics Single or three-phase measurement Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin

Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude (only available if function trips)
3-147
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Peak value current function settings - Current-Inst

Text Trip Delay I Setting Min. Frequency Number Of Phases Current Inp. Chan. Block Input Max / Min Trip Signal Start Signal SignalAddr SignalAddr CT/VT-Addr BinaryAddr s IN Hz Unit Default 00000000 0.01 4.0 40 1 Ph 0 F Max ER ER (Select) 0.00 0.1 2 (Select) 60.00 0.01 20 50 0.1 1 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (matrix). Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. I Setting Pick-up current setting. Setting restrictions: > 1.6 IN when supplied from metering cores < 0.2 IN when supplied from protection cores Min. Frequency defines the minimum frequency for which measurement is required. Setting restriction: < 40 Hz when supplied from metering cores Number Of Phases defines whether single or three-phase measurement. Current Inp. Chan. defines the CT input channel. All current inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-148
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Max / Min defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent. Settings: Max: overcurrent Min: undercurrent Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.
3-149
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Current pick-up Delay Minimum frequency Over or undercurrent I Setting Delay Min. Frequency Max / Min
The instantaneous overcurrent function is a high-speed protection, which operates in a wide frequency range. It is intended primarily for two applications. A protection measuring peak value is necessary for protecting units, for which the influence of DC component and harmonics may not be neglected. This is especially the case where rectifiers with semiconductors are involved. The measuring principle of the function is relatively insensitive to frequency and operates in a range extending from 4 to 120 % of rated frequency. It is therefore able to protect units with synchronous starting equipment during the starting sequence before reaching system frequency (e.g. gas turbine sets with solid-state starters). The function detects when the instantaneous value of the input current exceeds the peak value corresponding to the setting. For example, for a setting of 10 IN, it will pick up when the input current exceeds 10 2 IN = 14.14 IN (see Fig. 3.33). A fault current of 6 1.8 2 IN = 15.27 IN could reach this level as a consequence of a DC component. The minimum frequency must be entered for every application, because it determines the reset time. A low minimum frequency means a long reset delay and since a good protection is expected to have a quick response, the reset time should be as short as possible, i.e. the minimum frequency setting should not be lower than absolutely necessary.
3-150
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
i IN
15
14.14
10
Setting current 10 I N
Output signal
t
HEST 905 028 C
Fig. 3.33
Operation of the peak value overcurrent function
Typical settings:
a) Peak value phase fault protection I-Setting Delay f-min according to application 0.01 s 40 Hz
b) Phase fault protection of a machine with synchronous starter during start-up I-Setting Delay f-min 1.5 IN 5s 2 Hz
3-151
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-152
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.9.
Inverse time overcurrent (Current-Inv)
A. Application
Overcurrent function with time delay inversely proportional to the current and definite minimum tripping time (IDMT).
B. Features
Operating characteristics (see Fig. 3.34) according to British Standard 142: c = 0.02 : normal inverse c=1 : very inverse and long time earth fault c=2 : extremely inverse Insensitive to DC component Insensitive to harmonics Single or three-phase measurement Detection of the highest phase value in the three-phase mode Wider setting range than specified in BS 142

Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
3-153
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Inverse time overcurrent settings - Current-Inv

Text Trip c-Setting k1-Setting I-Start t-min Number Of Phases Current Inp. Chan. IB-Setting Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal CT/VT-Addr IN BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr s IB s Unit Default 00000000 1.00 013.5 1.10 0 1 Ph 0 1.00 F ER ER 0.04 2.50 0.01 (Select) 0.01 1.00 0.0 (Select) 200.0 4.00 10.0 0.01 0.01 0.1 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping O/P of the function (matrix tripping logic). c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the shape of the operating characteristic according to BS 142 or for selecting the RXIDG characteristic. k1-Setting Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic (time grading). I-Start Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes effective. t-min Definite minimum tripping time. Number Of Phases defines the number of phases measured. Current Inp. Chan. defines the CT input channel. All current I/Ps may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. IB-Setting Base current for taking account of differences of rated current IN.
3-154
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Block Input defines the input for an external blocking signal. F: not used T: function always blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Trip Signal Tripping signal. Start Signal Pick-up signal.
3-155
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Base current Characteristic enabling current Type of characteristic Multiplier IB-Setting I-Start c-Setting k1-Setting
The IDMT overcurrent function is used to protect transformers, feeders and loads of the auxiliaries supply system against phase and earth faults. The function responds largely only to the fundamental component of the fault current.
Base current 'IB-Setting'

An IDMT relay does not have a fixed current setting above which it operates and below which it does not, as does a definite time-overcurrent relay. Instead, its operating characteristic is chosen such that it is always above the load current. To this end, the relay has a reference current IB that is set the same as the load current of the protected unit IB1. The reference current IB determines the relative position of the relay characteristic, which is enabled when the current exceeds the reference current by a given amount ('I-Start'). By setting the reference current IB to equal the load current of the protected unit IB1 instead of its rated current, for IB1 < IN of the protected unit IB1 > IN of the protected unit : : the protection is more sensitive the protection permits maxi mum utilisation of the thermal capability of the protected unit
Example:
Load current of protected unit CT rated current IB1 = IN2 = Relay rated current Relay reference current 'IB-Setting': 5A I =4A IB = IB1 N2 = 800 A 1000 A IN1 Setting: IB 4 A = = 0 .8 IN 5 A An alternative is to adjust the position of the IDMT characteristic to match the rated load of the protected unit and set the reference current to its rated current instead of its load current. IN = 800 A
IN1 = 1000 A 5A 5A
3-156
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Enabling the characteristic 'I-Start'

The IDMT characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds the setting 'I-Start'. A typical setting for 'I-Start' is 1.1 IB.
Choice of characteristic 'c-Setting'

The constant 'c-Setting' determines the shape of the IDMT characteristic. The settings for the standard characteristics according to BS 142 are: 'normal inverse' 'very inverse' and 'long time earth fault' 'extremely inverse' : c = 0.02 : c = 1.00 : c = 2.00
Fig. 3.34
Operating characteristic of the IDMT overcurrent function
'c-Setting' can also be set to 'RXIDG', in which case the functions inverse characteristic corresponds to that of the relay Type RXIDG: t [s] = 5.8 1.35 In (I / IB) The parameter 'k1-Setting' has no influence in this case.
Multiplier 'k1-Setting'
The multiplier 'k1-Setting' enables the IDMT characteristic chosen by the setting of parameter c to be shifted without changing its shape.
3-157
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
This is used for grading the operating times of a series of IDMT relays along a line to achieve discrimination. For example, in the case of the 'very inverse' characteristic, the constant c = 1 and the factor k1 13.5. The operating time t is given by the equation t= k1 I IB 1
Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is required, the factor k1 for each of the relays is given by k1 = 5 t This produces for operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s the following settings for k1:
t [s] 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 k1 [s] 2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5
The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows: 'normal inverse' 'very inverse' 'extremely inverse' 'long time earth fault' : : : : k1 = 0.14 s k1 = 13.5 s k1 = 80 s k1 = 120 s
Typical settings:
IB-Setting I-Start c-Setting k1-Setting t-min corresponding to load current of the protected unit 1.1 IB according to desired characteristic for the protected unit according to the time grading calculation 0.00
3-158
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.10.
Directional definite time overcurrent protection (DirCurrentDT)
A. Application
Directional overcurrent function for detecting phase faults on ring lines detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at one end backup protection for a distance protection scheme
B. Features
Directionally sensitive three-phase phase fault protection Insensitive to DC component Insensitive to harmonics Voltage memory feature for close faults

Current Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking PLC receive

Start Start R Start S Start T Forwards measurement Backwards measurement Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude of the three phase currents (IR, IS, IT) Active power A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction (IR * UST, IS * UTR, IT * URS) Voltage amplitude Amplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages (UST, UTR, URS)
3-159
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Directional overcurrent settings - DirCurrentDT

Text Trip CurrentInp VoltageInp I-Setting Angle Delay tWait MemDirMode MemDuration Receive Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal Start R Start S Start T MeasFwd MeasBwd Unit CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr IN Deg s s s BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Default 00000000 0 0 2.00 45 1.00 0.20 Trip 2.00 T F ER ER ER ER ER ER ER 0.2 -180 0.02 0.02 (Select) 0.20 20.0 +180 60.00 20.00 60.00 0.01 15 0.01 0.01 0.01 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping output (matrix tripping logic). CurrentInp defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set and the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. VoltageInp defines the VT input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be set and the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. I-Setting Pick-up setting for tripping. Setting restrictions: > 1.6 IN when supplied from metering cores < 0.2 IN when supplied from protection cores
3-160
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Angle Characteristic angle. Delay Delay between pick-up and tripping. tWait Time allowed for the directional decision to be received from the opposite end in a blocking scheme. MemDirMode determines the response of the protection after the time set for memorising power direction: trip block MemDuration Time during which the power direction last determined remains valid. Receive Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line: T: not used xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Ext Block F: not blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Trip Signal Tripping signal. Start Signal Pick-up signal. Start R R phase pick-up signal. Start S S phase pick-up signal. Start T T phase pick-up signal. MeasFwd signals measurement in the forwards direction. MeasBwd signals measurement in the backwards direction.
3-161
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Pick-up current Characteristic angle Delay Time allowed for receipt of signal Response at the end of the memorised power direction time Time during which the memorised direction is valid I-Setting Angle Delay tWait MemDirMode MemDuration
Pick-up value I-Setting

'I-Setting' must be chosen high enough to prevent false tripping or alarms from taking place and low enough to reliably detect the minimum fault current. The setting must be sufficiently above the maximum transient load current and allow for: CT and relay inaccuracies the reset ratio
The maximum transient load current has to be determined according to the power system operating conditions and take account of switching operations and load surges.
I I-Setting
I IN Delay
HEST 905 010 C
Fig. 3.35
Operating characteristic of the definite time overcurrent detector
3-162
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Where the rated CT current IN1 differs from the rated current IGN of the protected unit, compensating the measurement to achieve a match is recommended. This is done by correcting either the reference value of the A/D input or the setting. For example, assuming IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting to pick up at 1.5 IGN = 1200 A would be 1.5 IGN 800 A = 1.5 = 1 .2 IN1 1000 A
Characteristic angle
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an additional criterion for preserving discrimination compared with non-directional overcurrent protection. The directional sensitivity is 180 in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in the following diagrams. The angles given apply for connection according to the connections in Chapter 12.
IR UTR UT UR URS US Restraint: cos (- ) = neg. U ST L IR
. ax M iti ns se y vit
= 45 U ST Operation: cos ( - ) = pos.
a)
b)
L
HEST 005 001 C
' = phase-angle between current and voltage (positive angle) = Characteristic angle L = Border line between operating and restraint areas a) Definition of current and voltage b) Operating characteristic
Fig. 3.36
Vector diagram for a fault in the forwards direction on R phase
3-163
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The function determines the power direction by measuring the phaseangle of the current in relation to the opposite phase-to-phase voltage. Which current is compared with which voltage can be seen from the following table.
Current input IR IS IT Phase-to-neutral voltage US, UT UT, UR UR, US Calculated voltage UST = US - UT UTR = UT - UR URS = UR - US
The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group of connection of the VTs. For example, the phase-to-phase values are calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), while the input voltages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT type UTD).
Delay
The delay enables the protection to be graded with other timeovercurrent relays to achieve discrimination. Its setting is thus chosen in relation to the timer settings of upstream and downstream protective devices. The zone of protection covered by this overcurrent protection extends to the next overcurrent protection device. Should in the event of a fault in the next downstream zone, the protection for that zone fail, this protection function takes over after the time set for 'Delay' and clears the fault as backup.
3-164
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
I>
Forwards meas. R
Start R Meas Fwd
ST
&
1
Backwards meas. R
&
Trip
Receive I S
&
td I>
Forwards meas. S Start S
TR
&
Backwards meas. S
&
Meas Bwd
I>
Forwards meas. T U RS
Start T
&
Backwards meas. T
Start
&
Fig. 3.37
Block diagram td = 'Delay' t = 'tWait'
Time allowed for a signal to be received

Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals, each can send a signal from its 'MeasBwd' output to the 'Receive' input of the function at the opposite end of the line (e.g. via a PLC channel) when it is measuring a fault in the reverse direction. This signal prevents the respective directional overcurrent function from tripping, because the fault cannot be in the zone between them. The functions therefore have to allow time, i.e. the 'wait time', for the signal from the opposite line terminal to be received. If none is received within 'tWait', the circuit-breakers are tripped at both ends. The time set for 'Delay' acts in this kind of scheme as a backup, which does not rely on the communication channel. Thus when the 'Receive' input is being used, the setting for 'Delay' must be longer than the setting for 'tWait': 'Delay' > 'tWait'
Response after decay of the memorised voltage

The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to almost zero for a close fault and make determining direction unreliable. For
3-165
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
this reason, the function includes a voltage memory feature and for the first 200 milliseconds after the incidence of an overcurrent, the voltage measured immediately before the fault is used as reference to determine fault direction. After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustable period (see next paragraph). 'MemDirMode' provides facility for setting how the protection must respond after this time or in the event that the circuit-breaker is closed onto a fault and no voltage could be memorised beforehand. The two possible settings are the protection can trip or it can block.
Time during which the memorised direction is valid

The 'MemDuration' setting determines how long the last valid direction measurement shall be used. The setting should be as short as possible (200 ms) when the function is being used as backup for a distance function in an HV power system, because an actually measured voltage is only available during this time and therefore it is only possible to detect a reversal of direction during this time. For longer settings, the last valid power direction is used instead of the actually memorised voltage.
3-166
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.11.
Directional inverse time overcurrent protection (DirCurrentInv)
A. Application
Directional overcurrent function for detecting phase faults on ring lines detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at one end backup protection for a distance protection scheme
B. Features
Directionally sensitive three-phase phase fault protection Operating characteristics (see Fig. 3.38) according to British Standard BS142: c = 0.02: normal inverse c = 1: very inverse und long time earth fault c = 2: extremely inverse Insensitive to DC component Insensitive to harmonics Voltage memory feature for close faults

Current Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking PLC receive

Start Start R Start S Start T Forwards measurement Backwards measurement Tripping
3-167
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude of the three phase currents (IR, IS, IT) Active power A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction (IR * UST, IS * UTR, IT * URS) Voltage amplitude Amplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages (UST, UTR, URS)
3-168
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
D. Directional overcurrent settings - DirCurrentInv

Text Trip CurrentInp VoltageInp I-Start Angle c-Setting k1-Setting t-min IB-Setting tWait MemDirMode MemDuration Receive Ext Block Trip Signal Start Signal Start R Start S Start T MeasFwd MeasBwd s BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr s s IN s Unit CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr IN Deg Default 00000000 0 0 1.10 45 1.00 13.50 0.0 1.00 0.20 Trip 2.00 T F ER ER ER ER ER ER ER 1.00 -180 (Select) 0.01 0.0 0.04 0.02 (Select) 0.20 60.00 0.01 200.00 10.00 2.50 20.00 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 4.00 +180 0.01 15 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping output (matrix tripping logic). CurrentInp defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set and the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. VoltageInp defines the VT voltage input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be set and the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified.
3-169
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
I-Start Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes effective. Angle Characteristic angle. c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the operating characteristic according to BS 142. k1-Setting Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic. t-min Definite minimum operating time, operating characteristic constant. IB-Setting Base current for taking account of differences of rated current IN. tWait Time allowed for the directional decision to be received. MemDirMode determines the response of the protection after the time set for memorising power direction: trip block MemDuration Time during which the power direction last determined remains valid. Receive Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line: T: not used xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Ext Block F: not blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Trip Signal Tripping signal. Start Signal Pick-up signal. Start R R phase pick-up signal. Start S S phase pick-up signal. Start T T phase pick-up signal.
3-170
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
MeasFwd signals measurement in the forwards direction. MeasBwd signals measurement in the backwards direction.
3-171
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Base current Characteristic enabling current Type of characteristic Multiplier Characteristic angle Delay Time allowed for receipt of signal Response at the end of the memorised power direction time Time during which the memorised direction is valid IB-Setting I-Start c-Setting k1-Setting Angle Delay tWait MemDirMode MemDuration
Base current 'IB-Setting'

A tripping current is not set on an IDMT overcurrent function as it is on a definite time overcurrent function. Instead the position of the characteristic is chosen such that it is above the load current. The function, however, has a 'base current' setting which is set to the full load current IB1 of the protected unit. The base current setting determines the position of the basic characteristic. The characteristic is enabled when the base current is exceeded by a preset amount (I-Start). The adjustment of the base current IB to the load current IB1 of the protected unit instead of its rated current enables for IB1 < rated current of prot. unit IB1 > rated current of prot. unit : : more sensitive protection maximum utilisation of the thermal capability of the protected unit
Example:
Load current of the protected unit C.t rated current Protection rated current Protection base current IB = IB1 Setting IB 4 A = = 0 .8 A IN 5 A An alternative is to adjust the position of the IDMT characteristic to match the rated load of the protected unit and set the base current to its rated current instead of its load current. IN2 5A = 800 A = 4A IN1 1000 A IB1 IN1 IN2 IN = 800 A = 1000 A = 5A = 5A
3-172
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Enabling the characteristic 'I-Start'

The IDMT characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds the setting 'I-Start'. A typical setting for 'I-Start' is 1.1 IB.
Choice of characteristic 'c-Setting'

The constant 'c-Setting' determines the shape of the IDMT characteristic. The settings for the standard characteristics according to BS 142 are: 'normal inverse' 'very inverse' and 'long time earth fault' 'extremely inverse' : c = 0.02 : c = 1.00 : c = 2.00
Fig. 3.38
Operating characteristic of the directional IDMT overcurrent function
Multiplier 'k1-Setting'
The multiplier 'k1-Setting' enables the IDMT characteristic chosen by the setting of parameter c to be shifted without changing its shape. This is used for grading the operating times of a series of IDMT relays along a line to achieve discrimination. For example, in the case of the 'very inverse' characteristic, the constant c = 1 and the factor k1 13.5. The operating time t is given by the equation t= k1 I 1 IB
3-173
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is required, the factor k1 for each of the relays is given by k1 = 5 t This produces for operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s the following settings for k1:
t [s] 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
k1 [s] 2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5
The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows: 'normal inverse' 'very inverse' 'extremely inverse' 'long time earth fault' : k1 = 0.14 s : k1 = 13.5 s : k1 = 80 s : k1 = 120 s
3-174
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an additional criterion for preserving discrimination compared with non-directional overcurrent protection. The directional sensitivity is 180 in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in the following diagrams. The angles given apply for connection according to the connections in Chapter 12.
IR UTR UT UR URS US Restraint: cos (- ) = neg. U ST L IR
i sit en .s ax M
y vit
= 45 U ST Operation: cos ( - ) = pos.
a)
b)
L
HEST 005 001 C
' = phase-angle between current and voltage (positive angle) = Characteristic angle L = Border line between operating and restraint areas a) Definition of current and voltage b) Operating characteristic
Fig. 3.39
Vector diagram for a fault in the forwards direction on R phase
The function determines the power direction by measuring the phaseangle of the current in relation to the opposite phase-to-phase voltage. Which current is compared with which voltage can be seen from the following table.
Current input IR IS IT Phase-to-neutral voltage US, UT UT, UR UR, US Calculated voltage UST = US - UT UTR = UT - UR URS = UR - US
The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group of connection of the VTs. For example, the phase-to-phase values are
3-175
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), while the input voltages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT type UTD).
Time allowed for a signal to be received

I R
I>
Forwards meas. R
Start R Meas. Fwd
ST
&
1
Backwards meas. R
&
Trip
Receive I S
&
td I>
Forwards meas. S Start S
TR
&
Backwards meas. S
&
Meas. Bwd
I>
Forwards meas. T U RS
Start T
&
Backwards meas. T
Start
&
Fig. 3.40
Block diagram td = Inverse time Delay t = 'tWait'
Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals, each can send a signal from its 'MeasBwd' output to the 'Receive' input of the function at the opposite end of the line (e.g. via a PLC channel) when it is measuring a fault in the reverse direction. This signal prevents the respective directional overcurrent function from tripping, because the fault cannot be in the zone between them. The functions therefore have to allow time, i.e. the 'wait time', for the signal from the opposite line terminal to be received. If none is received within 'tWait', the circuit-breakers are tripped at both ends. The time set for inverse time delay acts in this kind of scheme as a backup, which does not rely on the communication channel. Thus when the 'Receive' input is being used, the setting for 't-Min' must be longer than the setting for 'tWait': 't-Min' > 'tWait'
3-176
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Response after decay of the memorised voltage

The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to almost zero for a close fault and make determining direction unreliable. For this reason, the function includes a voltage memory feature and for the first 200 milliseconds after the incidence of an overcurrent, the voltage measured immediately before the fault is used as reference to determine fault direction. After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustable period (see next paragraph). 'MemDirMode' provides facility for setting how the protection must respond after this time or in the event that the circuit-breaker is closed onto a fault and no voltage could be memorised beforehand. The two possible settings are the protection can trip or it can block.
Time during which the memorised direction is valid

The 'MemDuration' setting determines how long the last valid direction measurement shall be used. The setting should be as short as possible (200 ms) when the function is being used as backup for a distance function in an HV power system, because an actually measured voltage is only available during this time and therefore it is only possible to detect a reversal of direction during this time. For longer settings, the last valid power direction is used instead of the actually memorised voltage.
3-177
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-178
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.12.
Definite time NPS (NPS-DT)
A. Application
Protection of generators against excessive heating of the rotor due to asymmetrical load.
B. Features
Definite time delay Insensitive to DC component Insensitive to harmonics Three-phase measurement
C. Inputs and outputs I. Analog inputs:

Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Proportion of negative-sequence current component I2 = 1/3 (IR + a2 IS + a IT)
3-179
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Definite time NPS function settings - NPS-DT

Text Trip Delay I2-Setting CurrentInp. Chan BlockInput Trip Signal Start Signal s IN AnalogAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Unit Default 00000000 1.00 0.20 0 F ER ER 0.50 0.02 60.0 0.50 0.01 0.01 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). Delay time delay between pick-up and tripping. I2-Setting NPS current setting for tripping. Setting restriction: < 0.05 IN when supplied from protection cores Current Inp. Chan. defines the A/D current input channel. All three-phase current inputs may be selected. The first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: Not blocked T: Blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.
3-180
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Negative-sequence component of stator current I2-Setting Delay Delay
An NPS current is usually caused by asymmetrical loading of the three phases, but may also be the result of an open-circuit phase (singlephasing). An asymmetrical load on a generator produces a magnetic field, which rotates in the opposite direction to the positive-sequence field. The negative-phase sequence flux induces currents in the rotor and these result in additional rotor losses and increased rotor temperature. The latter can represent a hazard for the rotor and this is the reason for applying NPS protection. The asymmetry of the load on a generator is defined in terms of the negative-sequence stator current I2, which is therefore the quantity, monitored. The definite time NPS function is intended for systems where asymmetries are of longer duration and do not change frequently. This generally applies in the case of small to medium generators. Two NPS stages are used, one for alarm and one for tripping. The maximum continuous NPS current rating I2 is stated by the generator manufacturer, usually as a percentage of the generator rated current IGN. The alarm stage is normally set to I2 or somewhat lower, e.g. for I2 = 10 % IGN, 'I2-Setting' is set to 8 % IGN. The tripping stage is set 50 to 100 % higher than the alarm stage, e.g. I2-Setting = 15 % IGN The NPS protection is always delayed to avoid false tripping during transient phenomena and especially during phase-to-phase and earth faults on the power system. The delay may be relatively long, because the rate at which the temperature of the endangered parts of the rotor rises is relatively low.
3-181
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
I2
Tripping stage
I2
Alarm stage
HEST 905 015 C
In cases where both stages are used for tripping, the one with the higher setting must be faster. Compensating the frequently differing rated currents of generator and CTs is also recommended for the NPS protection. The corresponding compensated setting is given by Setting = calculated setting IGN IN1
Typical settings:
1st stage (alarm) I2-Setting Delay 2nd stage (tripping) I2-Setting Delay 0.1 IN 5s 0.15 IN 10 s
3-182
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.13.
Inverse time NPS (NPS-Inv)
A. Application
Negative phase sequence protection especially of large generators subject to high thermal utilisation against excessive heating of the rotor due to an asymmetric load.
B. Features
Inverse time delay according to level of NPS (see Fig. 3.41) Wide setting ranges for the parameters determining the operating characteristic Adjustable rate of counting backwards when the overload disappears (cooling rate of thermal image) Insensitive to DC components Insensitive to harmonics Three-phase measurement

Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Proportion of negative-sequence current component I2 = 1/3 (IR + a2 IS + a IT)
3-183
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Inverse time NPS function settings - NPS-Inv

Text Trip K1 - Setting K2 - Setting Min. Operating Time Max. Delay Time Reset Time Current Inp. Chan. IB-Setting Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal s I2/IB s s s AnalogAddr IN BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Unit Default 00000000 10.0 0.05 10.0 1000 30 0 1.00 F ER ER 0.50 2.50 0.01 5.0 0.02 1.0 500 5 60.0 0.20 120.0 2000 2000 0.1 0.01 0.1 1 1 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). k1-Setting Multiplier. Operating characteristic constant. k2-Setting Continuously permissible NPS (I2/IB) and operating characteristic constant. Setting restrictions: < 0.05 IN/IB when supplied from protection cores. Min. Operating Time Definite minimum operating time. Max Delay TIme Maximum delay after being enabled regardless of inverse characteristic. Reset Time Time taken to reset (from the operating limit). This corresponds to the time taken for the generator to cool. Current Inp. Chan. defines the A/D input channel. All three-phase current inputs may be selected. The first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified.
3-184
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
IB-Setting Reference (base) current for compensating a difference in relation to IN. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: Not blocked T: Blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.
Fig. 3.41
Operating characteristic of the inverse time NPS function
3-185
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Reference current Multiplier Continuously permissible NPS Minimum operating time Maximum operating time Resetting time IB-Setting k1-Setting k2-Setting Min. Operating Time Max. Delay TIme Reset Time
This protection is intended for large generators. It is especially recommended where the level of NPS varies frequently, because in such cases, higher levels of NPS are permissible for short periods. Providing compensation using the reference value of the A/D channel has not been made, the reference current IB for the protection is calculated from the rated currents of the generator IGN and the CTs IN1 and IN2 as follows: I IB = IGN N2 IN1 The setting is the ratio IB/IN, where IN is the rated current of the protection, otherwise 'IB-Setting' would be 1.0 IN. The following two parameters are required from the manufacturer of the generator in order to set k1 and k2: the continuously permissible NPS component i2 the permissible energy of the NPS component i22 t [p.u.] [p.u.]
Factor k1 equals the permissible energy: k1 = i22 t Factor k2 equals the continuously permissible component i2: k2 = i2
Typical settings:
IB-Setting k1-Setting k2-Setting Min. Operating Time Max. Delay Time Reset Time according to protected unit 10.0 s according to protected unit 10.0 s 1000.0 s 10.0 s
3-186
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.14.
Voltage-controlled overcurrent (Imax-Umin)
A. Application
Phase fault protection of generators with rapidly decaying fault current such that a normal time overcurrent function could reset before its delay had expired.
B. Features
Stores the maximum current value after pick-up Resets either after recovery of the system voltage or after tripping Processes the positive-sequence component of the voltage Insensitive to DC component and harmonics Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest phase value in the three-phase mode

Current Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude Positive-sequence voltage
3-187
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Voltage controlled overcurrent settings - Imax-Umin

Text Trip Delay Current Hold-Voltage Hold-Time Nr Of Phases Current Input Chan. VoltageInput Chan. Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal AnalogAddr AnalogAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr s IN UN s Unit Default 00000000 1.00 2.00 0.70 1.00 1 Ph 0 0 F ER ER 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.1 (Select) 60.00 20 1.1 10 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.02 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. Current Pick-up current setting. Setting restrictions: > 1.6 IN when supplied from metering cores Hold-Voltage Voltage below which the pick-up status latches, even if the current falls below the pick-up setting. Hold-Time defines how long the tripping signal latches when the voltage condition is fulfilled. Nr Of Phases defines whether single or three-phase measurement. Current Input Chan. defines the analog current input channel. All current inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified.
3-188
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
VoltageInput Chan. Defines the analog voltage input channel. All three-phase voltage inputs may be selected. A phase-to-phase voltage must be used for measurement. This is derived from the set phase and the lagging phase. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.
3-189
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Current pick-up Delay Undervoltage Reset delay Current Delay Hold-Voltage Hold-Time
The voltage controlled overcurrent function comprises a definite time overcurrent unit which latches when the undervoltage unit responds. The protection is intended for generators and generator/transformer units, for which a fault current can fall below the pick-up of the overcurrent protection before it has an opportunity to trip. Apart from the influence of a DC component, a decaying AC component can only occur on a generator, the steady-state fault current of which is very low because of the large synchronous reactance Xd typical of modern generators (see Fig. 3.42). This function is largely insensitive to DC component and harmonics.
i 6 5 4 3 in 2 1 t -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6
HEST 905 012 C
Fig. 3.42
Generator fault current
3-190
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Overcurrent setting 'Current'

The current setting is chosen such that neither false tripping nor false signals can occur during normal operation and yet the minimum fault current is detected. The setting must therefore be between the maximum short-time load current and the minimum fault current and allow for the tolerance on the protection setting and also its reset ratio. The maximum short-time load current is a parameter of the power system concerned and must take account of switching operations, load surges and fast response excitation (Fig. 3.43).
Minimum fault current
C urrent"
Maximum short-time load current
IN "Delay"
HEST 905 013 C
Fig. 3.43
Operating characteristic of a definite time overcurrent function IN = rated current of the protection
Delay
The delay is used to achieve discrimination of the overcurrent function. It is set according to the grading table for all the overcurrent units on the power system. The zone of protection of the voltage-controlled overcurrent function extends from the CTs supplying it in the generator star-point to the location of the next downstream overcurrent relay.
Undervoltage setting 'Hold-Voltage'

Providing the overcurrent unit has picked up and the undervoltage unit picks up as well, the undervoltage unit 'Hold-Voltage' latches it in the pick-up state should the fault current fall below its pick-up setting. The setting of the undervoltage unit must be such that it can clearly distinguish between a normal load and a fault condition. Because of the different conditions prevailing during symmetrical and asymmetrical faults, the positive-sequence component of the three-phase system is evaluated. A setting well below the lowest voltage that can occur during normal load conditions is chosen (Fig. 3.44).
3-191
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
UN
Minimum short-time load voltage
"Hold-Voltage" setting for latching
HEST 905 014 C
Fig. 3.44
Operating characteristic of the undervoltage control unit UN = rated voltage of the undervoltage unit
Reset time 'Hold-Time'

The reset time defined by the parameter 'Hold-Time' determines how long the overcurrent unit remains latched to ensure a tripping signal of sufficient duration. The delay starts at the instant of tripping.
Block diagram
I> &
tH
1
tV S
Start Trip
U<
HEST 045 009 V
Fig. 3.45
Block diagram of the Imax-Umin function tV = Time delay tH = Hold-Time
3-192
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Typical settings:
Current Delay Hold-Voltage Hold-Time 1.5 IN 3s 0.7 UN 0.5 s
Should the rated currents of generator and CTs differ appreciably, compensation of the overcurrent setting is recommended, if this has not already been done with the aid of the reference value of the A/D channel.
Example:
Generator rated current CT rated current Typical value (referred to the rated current of the protection) Compensated setting: 1.5 IGN 4000 = 1.5 = 1 .2 IN1 5000 IGN = 4 000 A IN1 = 5 000 A 1.5
since the rated voltages of generator and VTs are generally the same, compensation of the undervoltage setting is seldom necessary. Should they differ, the compensated setting would be: 0.7 UGN UN1
3-193
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-194
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.15.
Definite time over and undervoltage protection (Voltage-DT)
A. Application
Standard voltage applications (overvoltage and undervoltage function).
B. Features
DC component filter Harmonic filter Single or three-phase voltage measurement Maximum value, respectively minimum value, detection for threephase measurement

Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Voltage amplitude
3-195
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Over/undervoltage protection settings - Voltage-DT

Text Trip Delay V-Setting Max / Min
Number Of Phases Voltage Inp. Chan.
Units
Default 00000000
Min.
Max.
Step
s UN
2.00 1.200 Max (1) 1 Ph
0.02 0.010 (Select) (Select)
60.00 2.000
0.01 0.002
AnalogAddr
0 F ER ER
Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal
BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr
Trip Tripping circuit to which the O/P of the over/undervoltage function is connected (matrix tripping logic). Delay Time delay between the function picking up and tripping. V-Setting Voltage setting for tripping. Max / Min Over or undervoltage mode selection: Min (3ph): Undervoltage. Three-phase functions detect the highest phase voltage. Not permitted for single-phase functions. Min (1ph): Undervoltage. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phase voltage. Overvoltage. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phase voltage. Not permitted for single-phase functions. Max (1ph): Overvoltage. Three-phase functions detect the highest phase voltage.
Max (3ph):
3-196
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Number Of Phases Number of phases included in the measurement. Voltage Inp. Chan Analog I/P channel. All the voltage channels are available for selection. In the case of a three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected. Block Input I/P for blocking the function. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Trip Signal Tripping signal. Start Signal Pick-up signal.
3-197
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Setting Delay Over or undervoltage Number of phases measured V-Setting Delay Max / Min Number Of Phases
The overvoltage protection protects the stator coils of the generator as well s transformers from dangerous overvoltages. Simultaneously the magnetic core is protected from overheating resulting from increased iron losses. Long duration overvoltage are especially to be expected on the failure of the voltage regulators. A definite delay prevents spurious tripping by transient conditions. Often the protection is executed in two steps, which affects the tripping.
Pick-up voltage (U-Setting)

VT single phase or three phase delta connection: A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V at the input of the VT. Note that although a setting of 2.0 UN is possible, the range of the analog inputs of the input transformer units K01...K17 (REL316*4) and K41...K47 (REC316*4) is only 1.3 UN (i.e. max. 130 V or 260 V). Y connected three-phase VTs: A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V/ 3 at the input of the VT (phase-to-neutral voltage). The first step is intended for protection against small however long duration over voltage. The second step is intended for protection against higher over voltage, which has to set at a value of 70 % of the stator test voltage. Compensating any difference between the rated voltages of VTs UN1 and protected unit UGN is recommended. This is achieved with the aid of the reference value of the A/D channel or by correcting the voltage setting. For example, for UGN = 12 kV and UN1 = 15 kV, the setting for a pickup voltage of 1.4 UGN would have to be U 12 kV = 1.12 1.4 GN = 1.4 15 kV UN1
3-198
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Max / Min setting

This parameter provides a choice of the following settings: Min (3ph): Protection picks up when all three phase voltages have fallen below setting. Protection picks up when the lowest of the phase voltages falls below setting. Protection picks up when all three phase voltages have exceeded setting. Protection picks up when the highest of the phase voltages exceeds setting.
Min (1ph): Max (3ph): Max (1ph):
U
V - setting V - setting Stage 2 Stage 1
UN
Delay
Delay
t
HEST 905 055 C
Fig. 3.46
Operating characteristic of a two-stage overvoltage protection UN = rated relay voltage
Typical settings:
1st stage V - setting Delay Max / Min 2nd stage V - setting Delay Max / Min 1.15 UN 2s Max (1ph) 1.4 UN 0.1 s Max (1ph)
3-199
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.5.15.1.
Definite time stator earth fault (95 %)
Settings:
Voltage Delay V-Setting Delay
The definite time stator E/F scheme (95%) is designed for the protection of generators or generator/transformer units.
Description
The standard zone of protection in the case of generator/transformer units is 95 % of the length of the stator winding (see Fig. 3.47). It is normal to limit the zone to 95 % to avoid any risk of false tripping. The stator E/F function is connected either to the VT at the stator star-point or to the VTs at the generator terminals. In either case, the function monitors the displacement of the star-point caused by a stator E/F. The corresponding off-set voltage becomes a maximum for an E/F at a generator terminal and zero for an E/F at the star-point (see Fig. 3.47).
A
Generator
5%
95 %
ma
Voltage Transformer
U>
5% U max
HEST 905 029 C
Fig. 3.47
Stator E/F protection for a generator/transformer unit
3-200
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
As can be seen from Fig. 3.47, the relay setting for a zone of protection of 95 % is 5 % of Umax. The scheme detects E/Fs on the generator stator winding, the cables to the step-up transformer and the delta-connected windings of the step-up transformer. The capacitances between primary and secondary of the step-up transformer conduct currents emanating from E/Fs on the HV side to the LV side and can cause false tripping of the stator E/F protection. The capacitive coupling of E/F currents on the HV side takes place regardless of whether the HV star-point is grounded or not. The capacitance C12 between HV and LV windings of the step-up transformer and the capacitance C of the generator circuit form a potential divider that determines the potential of the generator star-point (see Fig. 3.48a). The value of the capacitance C is usually too low to reliably hold the star-point below the pick-up setting of the protection. For this reason, the generator star-point is grounded via a resistor RE (see Fig. 3.49) which ensures that the potential of the star-point remains below the setting of the protection for an E/F on the HV power system. Correspondingly, the value of the resistor RE is chosen such that for a given C12 and an E/F at the HV terminals of the step-up transformer, the offset of the generator star-point does not reach the pick-up setting of the 95 % E/F protection.
3 C 12 Star-point 3C U IE
U HV 3
3 C 12
U HV 3
RE
U IE
HEST 905 030 FL
a) without grounding resistor
b) simplified circuit with grounding resistor
Fig. 3.48
Generator star-point off-set for an E/F on the HV side of the step-up transformer
3-201
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
where: C12 C capacitance between primary and secondary of the step-up transformer capacitance to ground of the stator windings, the cables with protection capacitors and the LV step-up transformer winding star-point offset rated voltage of the step-up transformer HV windings E/F current grounding resistor
U UHV IE RE
The value of the grounding resistor RE determines the E/F current. In view of the damage an E/F current can cause especially to the laminations of the stator core the maximum E/F current should be limited to 20 A for 10 s, i.e. the grounding resistor RE must not be too small. Tripping by the E/F protection is delayed by 0.5 s to avoid any risk of false tripping during transient phenomena.
Designing a scheme for connection to the generator star-point

Alternative 1 with grounding resistor and VT (see Fig. 3.49):
Generator Step-up transformer 1 2
LV
HV
U GN
IE I Emax IE
U HV 3 C 12
U1n /U 2n
3C IE
RE
U>
HEST 905 031 C
Fig. 3.49
Stator E/F protection with a grounding resistor at the star-point
The value of the grounding resistor RE should be chosen such that: the maximum E/F current IE 20 A the offset of the generator star-point for an E/F on the HV side of the step-up transformer does not exceed half the relay setting.
3-202
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The star-point VT is designed in relation to the maximum continuous voltage resulting from an E/F, i.e. the phase-to-neutral voltage of the generator. Arcing faults can cause higher transient voltages and consequentially saturation of the VT The specification of a relatively high overvoltage factor such as 1.9 is therefore recommended. VT rated voltages U1n = UGN 3 (UGN = generator rated voltage) (should nothing else be specified)
U2n = 100 V
The minimum value of the resistor REmin: RE min UGN 3 IE max
where IEmax 20 A The equation for determining the maximum value of the grounding resistor REmax (95 % scheme) can be derived from the simplified circuit diagram of Fig. 3.48b: RE max 0.05 UGN 6 C12 UOS
where: 0.05 6 - protection sensitivity 5 % (95 % scheme) - factor corresponding to 3 phases times 2 for half the pickup setting
The value of the effective grounding resistor RE is chosen between REmax and REmin and rated for 10 s.
Example 1
UGN = 12 kV; IEmax 20 A a) HV system ungrounded RE min RE max 12000 = 346 3 20 0.05 12 6 314 3 10 9 110 = 965 UHV = 110 kV; C12 = 3 x 10-9 F; = 314 1/s
3-203
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Chosen RE = 750 IE max = UGN 12000 = = 9.24 A 3 RE 3 750
Specification: 1 grounding resistor 1 VT 750 ; 10 A; 10 s single-phase insulation
12000 / 100 V; 3
b) HV system solidly grounded Only 1/6 of the voltage UHV is effective. RE min
RE max
12000 = 346 3 20
0.05 12 6 314 3 10 9 110 6 = 5790
Chosen RE = 3000 IE max = UGN 3 RE = 12000 = 2.3 A 3 3000
Specification: 1 grounding resistor 1 VT 3000 ; 2.3 A; 10 s single-phase insulation 12000 / 100 V; 3
Alternative 2 with grounding transformer (see Fig. 3.50): This arrangement is widespread in North America. The maximum current for the grounding transformer is chosen to approximately equal the capacitive component of the E/F current. IEmax IC IC = 3 C UGN 3
3-204
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Rated data of the grounding transformer: U1n = UGN 3 200; 400 V or 115; 230; 460 V
U2n = 100; I1n = IEmax I2n = Ie where Ie = IE max
U1n U2n
The grounding resistor Re connected to the secondary is give by Re = U2n 3 IE max U1n UGN U1n = UGN 3
2
or for
Re =
U2n U1n IE max
Rated power of the grounding transformer: Sn = U1n I1n

Generator Step-up transformer 1 2
LV
HV
U GN
IE
I Em ax
U HV 3 C 12
IE
U 1n /U 2n
U3n /U 4n
3C IE Ie
Re
U>
HEST 905 032 C
Fig. 3.50
Stator E/F protection with a grounding transformer at the star-point
3-205
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Example 2
UGN = 12 kV; IC = 10 A IEmax = IC = 10 A U1n = 12000 = 6930 V 3
I1n = 10 A U2n = 200 V I2n = Ie = 10
6930 = 346 A 200
Re =
200 2 = 0.577 6930 10
Sn = U1n I1n = 6930 10 70 kVA Specification: 1 grounding transformer 70 kVA; 6930/200 V; 1 resistor 0.577 ; 1 interposing VT 346 A; 10 VA; 10 s; 10 s 50 Hz; 200/100 V 50 Hz 10/346 A
(only necessary if U2n > 100 V)
Example 3
UGN = 12 kV; IC = 10 A; grounding transformer specified according to the rated voltage of the generator. U1n = UGN = 12 kV U2n = 230 V I1n = IEmax = IC = 10 A I2n = Ie = IEmax U1n 12000 = 10 = 522 A U2n 230
2
Re =
12000 3 10
230 = 0.254 12000
Sn = 12000 10 120 kVA Specification: 1 grounding transformer 1 resistor 1 interposing VT

3-206
120 kVA; 10 s; 12000/230 V; 10/522 A 0.254 ; 10 VA; 522 A; 50 Hz;
50 Hz 10 s 230/100 V
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Designing a scheme for connection to the generator terminals

If the generator star-point is inaccessible, the stator E/F protection is connected to three VTs at the generator terminals (see Fig. 3.51). In this case, the E/F current is fed by the three VT primary windings. Assuming a permissible short-time current of the primary windings of 5 A, the E/F current must be limited to a maximum of 15 A. The secondary rated voltage must be chosen such that it does not exceed 300 V and, wherever possible, the secondary current does not exceed 250 A.
Generator Step-up transformer
LV 1 IE
HV 2
U GN 3 C 12
U HV
I1 I E
I1
I1 IE = 3 I 1
U 1n /U 2n 3C Ie Re
U 3n /U 4n Ie U>
HEST 905 033 C
Fig. 3.51
Stator E/F protection with grounding transformer at the generator terminals
For an E/F at a generator terminal, the voltage of the phase concerned becomes zero and the healthy phases are at phase-to-phase potential with respect to ground. The vectorial addition of the two phase-tophase voltages produces three times the rated voltage across the broken delta connection of the VT secondary windings: U = 3 U2n where U2n is the rated secondary voltage. If U is greater than 100 V, the E/F protection must be connected via an interposing VT When designing the scheme, the maximum current flowing through the primaries of the VTs during an E/F is determined first. Assuming that the permissible short-time primary current of the VTs is 5 A, then IEmax = 15 A
3-207
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The corresponding minimum value for the grounding resistor is UGN 3U2n K R e min 3Imax U1n where K is the influence of the VT reactance. A mean value of 0.7 may be assumed for VTs. To ensure that the E/F protection remains stable for an E/F on the HV side of the step-up transformer, the resistor may not be less than
R e max 0.05 UGN 6 C12 UHV 3 U2n U 1n
2
The secondary current Ie is then chosen and the secondary rated voltage calculated: I U2n = U1n E 3 Ie The maximum voltage across Re becomes UR
e
= Re Ie
and the voltage across the broken delta windings 3U2n. This voltage must be approximately 30 % higher than the voltage Re Ie across the resistor so that the design current IE can flow.
Example 4
UGN = 12 kV; IEmax = 15 A U1n = UGN 3 = 12000 3 = 6930 V
2
UHV = 110 kV;
C12 = 3 x 10-9 F;
= 314 1/s
HV system ungrounded.
R e min
12000 3 15
3U2n 2 4 0.7 = 0.60 10 U2n 6930 0.05 12

2
3U2n 2 4 R e max = 1.81 10 U2n 9 6 314 3 10 110 6930 Since from this calculation Remax is greater than Remin, the protection is stable at the chosen current IEmax and the value of the resistor Re can be determined in relation to Remin. Ie = 200 A U2n = 6930 15 = 173 V 3 200
3-208
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
It then follows that Remin 0.60 10-4 1732 = 1.80 Remax 1.81 10-4 1732 = 5.42 Re = 1.80 At Ie = 200 A, the voltage drop across the resistor Re is UR
e
= Re Ie = 1.8 200 = 360 V
Neglecting load current, the maximum voltage across the broken delta windings is: U = 3 U2n = 3 173 520 V Specification: 1 resistor 1.80 ; 3 VTs 1 interposing VT 200 A; 12000 3 10 VA; 10 s / 173 V; 50 Hz; single-phase insulated 520 / 100 V
Note:
Because of the voltage drop of the VTs, the voltage does not reach 520 V at the full E/F current, but only 360 V. The setting of the protection must therefore be modified as follows: Overvoltage setting 0.05 360 = 0.034 520 (3.4 % UN instead of 5 % UN)
Example 5
UGN = 27 kV; IE = 15 A U1n = UGN 27000 = = 15600 V 3 3 27000 3U2n 6 2 = 27 10 U2n 3 15 15600
0.05 27
2
UHV = 400 kV;
C12 = 3 x 10-9 F;
x = 314 1/s
HV system solidly grounded
R e min
3 U2n 6 Re max = 132 10 U2n2 9 400 15600 6 314 3 10 6 Ie = 250 A (chosen) U2n = 15600 15 = 260 V 3 300
3-209
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The resistor Re is chosen according to Remin: Re = 27 10-6 2602 = 1.825 Re Ie = 1.825 300 = 547 V 3 U2n = 3 260 = 780 V S=
3 260 300 = 135 103 VA
The specification and the modification of the protection setting is similar to Example 4.
Typical settings:
V-Setting Delay 0.05 UN 0.5 s
Note:
If a generator circuit-breaker is installed between the generator and the step-up transformer, a second E/F protection scheme is required for the zone between the step-up transformer and the unit transformer. The second scheme is connected to the broken delta secondary windings of three VTs. This scheme must also remain stable for E/Fs on the HV system and during ferroresonance phenomena and for this reason there is a resistor across the broken delta as well. Frequently, the E/F protection is only required to protect the cables and bar conductors, because the transformers are protected by differential schemes and Buchholz relays. In this case, the E/F protection setting is determined by the voltage offset for an E/F at the lowest load voltage. A typical setting for reliable E/F detection in an ungrounded system is 60 % UN, i.e. V - setting = 0.6 UN The delay can remain the same at 0.5 s. The second E/F scheme usually gives only an alarm. Since the plant remains in operation for an E/F on the cables, the resistor across the broken delta must be continuously rated.
3.5.15.2. Rotor E/F protection
Settings:
Overvoltage Delay Over/undervoltage V-Setting Delay MaxMin
The rotor E/F function in conjunction with the ancillary unit Type YWX 111 and 2 coupling capacitors is suitable for protecting synchronous generators regardless of the method of excitation. The scheme operates according to the Wheatstone bridge principle and is uninfluenced by frequency. The harmonics of the excitation system do not therefore effect the rotor E/F protection.
3-210
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The bridge is connected to the rotor circuit by one or two high-voltage capacitors. The first leg of the bridge consists of the coupling capacitors and the capacitance of the rotor winding in series. The second capacitive leg, the resistive legs and a supply transformer for stepping down the VT voltage (e.g. 100 V) to the 50 V needed for the measuring circuit are in the ancillary unit Type YWX 111. A second transformer isolates the bridge from the input of the E/F protection function. An E/F short-circuits the capacitance of the rotor winding and the bridge is no longer balanced. There is thus a voltage across the bridge that is detected by the overvoltage function. Depending on the design of the scheme, the pick-up setting is between 0.5 and 3 V to detect an insulation leakage of 1 k which is considered as being a rotor E/F. Since all the components influence the setting, it is determined during commissioning.
Typical settings:
V-Setting (for 1 k) Delay MaxMin 1 to 3 V 1s Max
Fig. 3.52
Rotor E/F protection function C1, C2 = external coupling capacitances
3-211
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.5.15.3.
Interturn protection
(voltage principle)
Settings:
Overvoltage Delay V-Setting Delay
The purpose of the interturn protection is to detect short-circuits between the turns of the generator stator windings. The scheme should be as sensitive as possible to detect the majority of interturn faults. However, because of various residual voltages caused by asymmetries, the setting may not be lower than 5 % UN. A slight delay will prevent false tripping due to transients. Both ends of the primaries of VTs must be designed for the full HV potential! Since the star-points of the generator and the VTs are connected, the high short-circuit power of the generator would cause severe damage in the event of an interturn fault on a VT primary. HV fuses should therefore be inserted in the VT primaries.
Typical settings:
V-Setting Delay
R S T Voltage transformer
0.05 UN 0.5 s
Generator U>
HEST 905 017 C
Fig. 3.53
Interturn protection according to the voltage principle
3-212
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.16.
Peak value overvoltage (Voltage-Inst)
A. Application
General voltage monitoring with instantaneous response (over and undervoltage) Voltage monitoring where insensitive to frequency is required (over and undervoltage)
B. Features
Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and largely independent of frequency Stores the peak value following pick-up No suppression of DC component No suppression of harmonics Single and three-phase measurement Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin

Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Voltage amplitude (only available if function trips)
3-213
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Peak value voltage function settings - Voltage-Inst

Text Trip Delay V-Setting Min. Frequency Max / Min Number Of Phases Voltage Inp. Chan Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal CT/VT-Addr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr s UN Hz Unit Default 00000000 0.01 1.40 40 Max 1 Ph 0 F ER ER 0.00 0.01 25 (Select) (Select) 60.00 0.01 2.00 50 0.01 1 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping O/P of the function (matrix). Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. V-Setting Pick-up voltage setting. Min. Frequency defines the minimum frequency for which measurement is required. Max / Min defines operation as overvoltage or undervoltage. Settings: Max: overvoltage Min: undervoltage Number Of Phases defines whether single or three-phase measurement. Voltage Inp. Chan. defines the VT input channel. All voltage inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-214
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.

Overvoltage Delay Minimum frequency Over or undervoltage V-Setting Delay Min. Frequency Max / Min
The instantaneous overvoltage function is a high-speed protection, which operates in a wide frequency range. It is intended primarily for the following applications: where an overvoltage protection is required, which is largely insensitive to frequency especially for f > fN. The limited capacity of the VTs to transform low frequencies must be taken into account for f < fN: Input transformer units K01...K17 (REL316*4) and K41...K47 (REC316*4): 1.3UN f fN
Input transformer units K21...K24 (RET316*4) and K61...K68 (REG316*4): 2.25UN f fN
where high-speed protection is required. The high speed is achieved by measuring the instantaneous value of the voltage and since DC components and harmonics are not suppressed, by eliminating the inertia of the digital input filter.
Compared with the normal voltage function, the instantaneous function has a larger tolerance on the pick-up setting. It should therefore only be used in the above two cases. The measuring principle is the same as that of the peak value current function and therefore reference should be made to that Section for a description of the principle and the significance of the minimum frequency setting f-min.
3-215
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Pick-up voltage (U-Setting)

Single-phase VT: A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V at the input of the VT Note that although a setting of 2.0 UN is possible, the range of the analog inputs of the input transformer units K01...K17 (REL316*4) and K41...K47 (REC316*4) is only 1.3 UN (i.e. max. 130 V or 260 V). Y connected three-phase VTs: A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V/ 3 at the input of the VT(phase-to-neutral voltage).
Typical settings:
V-Setting Delay Min. Frequency according to application according to application 40 Hz
3-216
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.17.
Power (Power)
A. Application
Power function for monitoring reverse power active power reactive power power direction
B. Features
Definite time delay Over or underpower Adjustable characteristic angle Provision for correction of phase errors caused by the input circuit One, two or three-phase measurement (two-phase only with delta connected VTs) Wide range of applications (see Fig. 3.55 and Fig. 3.56) Correction of CT and VT phase errors Insensitive to DC components in voltage and current Insensitive to harmonics in voltage and current

Current Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Power
3-217
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Power function settings - Power

Text Trip P - Setting Angle Drop-Ratio Delay Max / Min Phi-Compensation Number Of Phases Current Inp. Chan. VoltageInp. Chan. PN Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr UN*IN BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr deg PN deg % s Unit Default 00000000 -0.050 0.0 60 0.50 Min 0.0 1 Ph 0 0 1.000 F ER 0.500 2.500 0.001 -0.100 -180.0 30 0.05 (Select) -5.0 (Select) 5.0 0.1 1.200 180.0 170 60.00 0.005 5.0 1 0.01 Min. Max. Step
Trip channel of the tripping logic (matrix) activated by the functions tripping O/P. P - Setting Power setting for tripping. Forbidden settings: < 0.005 PN connected to metering cores < 0.020 PN connected to protection cores In view of the required accuracy, the use of metering cores is recommended for settings 0.2 PN. Angle Characteristic angle between voltage and current for maximum sensitivity. 0 = active power measurement 90 = reactive power measurement (inductive), Settings between these limits are possible, e.g. for directional measurements at locations on the power system. The correction of phase errors caused by the input circuit is also possible.
3-218
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Drop-Ratio Reset value in relation to the pick-up value. Thus depending on the sign of the pick-up value, the setting of the reset ratio must be greater or less than 100 %. Forbidden settings: Reset ratios >100 % for Max and P Setting >0 Reset ratios <100 % for Max and P Setting <0 Reset ratios <100 % for Min and P Setting >0 Reset ratios >100 % for Min and P Setting <0 A large hysteresis must be selected for low pick-up settings and a small one for high pick-up settings (see Fig. 3.54). Forbidden settings for hysteresis (= 100% reset ratio) settings: 0.5 % ( P - Setting PN + 0.01)
10 % P - Setting PN These conditions are fulfilled by setting, for example, for 0.2 and for 0.005
P - Setting 0.2 : PN
P - Setting 1: PN
95 %
60 %
Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. The time the function takes to reset is also influenced by the delay set for operation, i.e.: for t > 100 ms, the function resets after 50 ms, otherwise resetting is instantaneous. Max / Min Defines the operating mode as: Max: overpower Min: underpower
Caution: The number and its sign are relevant and not just the value, i.e. 'Min' must be set for reverse power, because tripping takes place for a power less than zero (P Setting < 0).
Phi-Compensation Input of an angle to compensate CT and VT errors in the case of highly accurate power measurements. The setting is determined by the difference between CT and VT errors.
3-219
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Number Of Phases Number of phases measured: 1: single-phase 2: two-phase, i.e. for a three-phase measurement with V connected VTs P = URS IR cos UST IT cos A two-phase power measurement is only possible when connected to delta connected VTs. 3: three-phase P = UR IR cos + US IS cos + UT IT cos (The measurement is only correct with delta connected VTs if the three phase voltages are symmetrical.) Current Inp. Chan. defines the CT input channel. All current I/Ps may be selected. In the case of multi-phase measurement, the first channel of the group of three (R phase) must be selected. Voltage Inp. Chan. defines the VT input channel. All voltage I/Ps may be selected. In the case of multi-phase measurement, the first channel of the group of three (R phase) must be selected. PN Rated power as given by UN x IN. This enables the amplitude of the power being measured to be compensated, e.g. to the rated power factor of a generator. Block Input I/P for blocking the function. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Trip Signal Tripping signal. Start Signal Pick-up signal.
3-220
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1 Reset ratio
95%
Reset ratio
60%
0.5
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.75
1 P Setting P N
HEST 935 022 C
Fig. 3.54
Permissible reset ratio settings
3-221
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
(function with two additional timers)
Settings:
Reference power Setting Reset ratio Over/underpower Characteristic angle Phase error compensation tripping delay PN P - Setting Drop-Ratio Max / Min Angle Phi-Compensation Delay
The power function can be used for many applications. Some examples are given in Fig. 3.55 and Fig. 3.56. The angles given apply for connection according to the connections in Fig. 12.4.
Q
Restrains Operates
Q
Operates Restrains
Active overpower settings: - P-Setting - Max/Min - Drop-Ratio - Angle >0 MAX <100% 0 (30 ) *)
Active underpower settings: - P-Setting - Max/Min - Drop-Ratio - Angle >0 MIN >100% 0 (30 ) *)
HEST 965 017 C
Fig. 3.55
Power function settings for different applications
*)
The values in brackets apply for a single-phase measurement with the VT connected phase-to-phase (e.g. IR current and URS voltage) or for a threephase measurement with delta connected VTs.
3-222
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Q
Operates Restrains
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Q
Operates
Restrains
Reserve power settings: - P-Setting - Max/Min - Drop-Ratio - Angle <0 MIN <100% 0 (30 ) *)
Reactive overpower settings: - P-Setting - Max/Min - Drop-Ratio - Angle >0 MAX <100% 90 (120 ) *)
Q
Restrains
60 P
Operates
Directional power settings: - P-Setting - Max/Min - Drop-Ratio - Angle <0 MIN <100% 60 (90 ) *)
HEST 965 018 C
Fig. 3.56
Power function settings for different applications
*)
The values in brackets apply for a single-phase measurement with the VT connected phase-to-phase (e.g. IR current and URS voltage) or for a threephase measurement with delta connected VTs. 3-223
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Determining the settings

Where the rated currents and possibly also rated voltages of CTs, VTs and the protected unit differ, it is of advantage to refer the setting to the rated power of the protected unit. This necessitates modifying the sensitivity using the setting for PN. Setting the reference power PN:
PN = U N IN S GN 3 UN1 IN1 SGN = 3 UGN IGN PGN = SGN cosGN
where: SGN, PGN, UGN, IGN, cos GN: UN1, IN1: PN, UN, IN: ratings of the protected unit primary VT and CT ratings protection ratings
Example 1
Generator: VTs / CTs: 96 MVA, 14.4 3 kV / 13.8 kV, 100 3 V; 4 kA, 5 kA / 5 A cos = 0.8
Protection: Reverse power:
100 V; 5 A 0.5 % PGN
Alternative 1: No modification of PN
Settings: Reference power Reverse power: P U I 13.8 4 = 0.005 GN GN cos GN = 0.005 0.8 = 0.003 PN UN1 IN1 14.4 5 PN = 1 .0 UN IN
3-224
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Alternative 2: Modification for cosGN

Settings: Reference power PN P = GN = cos GN = 0.8 UN IN SGN
Reverse power: P U IGN 13.8 4 = 0.005 GN = 0,005 = 0.004 PN UN1 IN1 14.4 5
Alternative 3: Modification for GN and CT/VT. data

Settings: Rated power PN U I 13.8 4 = GN GN cos GN = 0.8 = 0.614 UN IN UN1 IN1 14.4 5 P = 0.005 PN
Reverse power
The power function is connected to the phase currents and a phase-toneutral or phase-to-phase voltage. The purpose of the phase compensation is twofold: to compensate the phase difference between the phase voltage and the any measured phase-to-phase voltage to determine whether the function responds to active or reactive power
The following table summarises the most important operating modes to simplify setting the corresponding parameters correctly. The angles given apply for connection according to the connections in Fig. 12.4. The phase compensation also provides facility for changing the direction of measurement or to compensate incorrect VT or CT polarity.
3-225
Function "MaxMin" max < 100%

0
"Drop-Ratio"
U RS IR
P P
"P-Setting" "Angle" *)
3-226
MAX Active power min MIN > 100%
0 P 0
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 3.57
max MIN < 100% Reverse power min MAX > 100%
IR
P 0
>0
+30
Phase compensation
U RS
<0
+30
max MAX < 100% Inductive reactive power min MIN > 100%
U RS
>0
IR
0 Q
+120
max Capazitive reactive power min
MIN
< 100%
U RS
<0 MAX > 100%

I
R 0 Q
+120
Settings different applications when measuring phase R current in relation to the phase-to-phase voltage URS
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
This setting is for correcting the phase error between the VTs and CTs, which have a considerable adverse influence on the measurement of active power at low power factors.
*) Applicable for a single or three-phase measurement using phase-to-phase voltages (the setting is 30 less for a three-phase measurement with Y connected v.t's or a two-phase measurement with V connected v.t's).
HEST 965 019 C
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Example 2
The active power error at rated current and a power factor of cos = 0 for a total phase error of 10' is P = 0.03 = 0.03 10 = 0.3 % [%; 1; min]
This is an error which is not negligible at a setting of 0.5 %. The total error corresponds to the difference between the VT and CT errors. The case considered in this example of full reactive current (100%) would scarcely occur in practice, but currents from about 80% are possible.
Application as reverse power protection

The reverse power function is used primarily to protect the prime mover. It is necessary for the following kinds of prime mover: steam turbines Francis and Kaplan hydro units gas turbines diesel motors
Two reverse power functions are used for prime movers with ratings higher than 30 MW, because of their importance and value. The reverse power function has two stages. The setting is half the slip power of the generator/prime mover unit and is the same for both stages. The first stage has a short time delay and is intended to protect against overspeeding during the normal shutdown procedure. By tripping the main circuit-breaker via the reverse power function, the possibility of overspeeding due to a regulator failure or leaking steam valves is avoided. To prevent false tripping in the case of steam turbines, the reverse power function is enabled by auxiliary contacts on the main steam valves of the prime mover. The purpose of the second stage is to guard against excessively high temperature and possible mechanical damage to the prime mover. The time delay can be longer in this case, because the temperature only increases slowly. Should power swings occur at low load due to the speed regulator or system instability, the second stage will not be able to trip, because the function repeatedly picks up and resets before the time delay can expire. It is for just such cases that the integrator ('Delay' function) is needed to ensure reliable tripping.
3-227
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Block
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
U P> I
t 1>
Trip Trip Start Trip
t 2>
t 3>
Integrator
t1 t2 t3
fast stage interlocked with the main turbine steam valve slow stage slow stage with an integrator where power swings are to be expected
Fig. 3.58
Reverse power protection for steam turbines
Typical settings:
PN P Setting Max / Min Drop-Ratio Angle connection to IR and UR connection to IR and URS connection to IR and UST connection to IR and UTR determined by the generator cosGN (steam turbines of medium power) - 0.005 Min 60 % 0 +30 -90 +150 0.0 0.5 s 20 s
Phi Compensation Stage 1: Delay Stage 2: Delay or Integrator ('Delay' function) for delay on operation and reset Trip time Reset time Integration
20 s 3s 1
3-228
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Note:
The following must be set for a 'Minimum forward power' scheme according to Anglo-Saxon practice: P Setting MaxMin Drop-Ratio >0 Min 150 %
3-229
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-230
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.18.
Overtemperature protection (Overtemp.)
A. Application
Overtemperature protection with accurate thermal image of the protected unit.
B. Features
1st order thermal model Alarm and tripping stages Adjustable initial temperature DC component filter Harmonic filter Single or three-phase current measurement Maximum value detection for three-phase measurement Temperature rise calculated 40 times for each thermal time constant setting

Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Alarm Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Temperature rise Power dissipation Current
3-231
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Overtemperature protection settings - Overtemp.

Text Trip Theta-Begin Theta-Warning Theta-Trip IB-Setting TimeConstant Number Of Phases Current Input Chan. Block Input Warning Signal Trip Signal
CT/VT-Addr
Units
Default 00000000
Min.
Max.
Step
% % % IN min
100 105 110 1.00 5.0 1 Ph 0 ER ER
000 050 050 0.50 1.0 (Select)
100 200 200 2.50 500.0
001 001 001 0.01 0.1
BinaryAddr F SignalAddr SignalAddr
Trip Tripping logic (matrix) for this function. Theta Begin Initial temperature rise. This temperature rise is set every time the function is initiated, e.g. when the protection is switched on or settings are changed. Theta Warning Temperature rise at which alarm is given. Theta Trip Temperature rise at which tripping takes place. IB-Setting Reference current: Normal operating current of the protected unit referred to the rated current of the protection. Time Constant Thermal time constant for calculating the temperature rise. Settings < 2 minutes are not permitted. Number Of Phases No. of phase currents measured. Current Input Chan. defines CT input channel. All the current channels are available for selection. In the case of a three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected.
3-232
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Block Input I/P for blocking the function F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions) Warning Signal Alarm signal. Trip Signal Tripping signal.
3-233
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Initial temperature rise Temperature rise for alarm Temperature rise for tripping No. of phase currents measured Reference current Thermal time constant Theta Begin Theta Warn Theta Trip Number Of Phases IB-Setting Time Constant
The overtemperature function guards against inadmissible temperature rise caused by overcurrents. The temperature rise is modeled on the basis of the influence of the current flowing through the protected unit on a thermal image of the protected unit. In contrast to the overload protection, this function can protect units of any power rating and thermal capacity. It monitors the temperature rise and not the absolute temperature. It takes account therefore neither of the ambient temperature nor the effectiveness of a cooling system. The protection operates with a thermal image of the temperature rise. A current change causes the temperature of the protected unit to rise from an initial value to a final value according to one or several exponential functions. The various influences on the temperature rise are the thermal response of, for example in the case of a power transformer, the cooling water, the oil, the windings etc. One exponential function such as that of the transformer oil is always more dominant than the others. The thermal image used in the protection for modeling the transient temperature rise operates according to an exponential function. The excursion of the temperature rise modeled by the protection is determined by the following: the final steady-state temperature corresponding to the current the increased temperature rise due to the transfer functions.
The protection assumes that at the rated current IGN of the protected unit, the temperature rise represents 100 %. Neglecting any compensation of the A/D channel or the base current IB, the protection measures a current IR determined by the rated current of the CTs: IR = IGN where IGN IN1, IN2 : rated current of the protected unit : rated primary and secondary CT currents. IN2 IN1
The current referred to the rated current IN of the protection is: IR = IR IGN IN2 = IN IN IN1
3-234
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The steady-state temperature rise becomes: W I I = GN N2 100 % I N IN1

2
At a constant current, the tripping time is:

2 [%] 100 I 0 I B t = ln 2 I [%] 100 IB
where 0 : : : initial temperature rise pick-up temperature rise thermal time constant
The effective tripping time can be higher than the calculation period (= / 40). The variables in the submenu 'DISPLAY OPERATING VALUES' are the calculated temperature rise, the power dissipation and the current. The first two are mean values over the period of calculation (= / 40). The values shown in the event list is the power dissipation at the instant of tripping.
Example:
Rated current of the protected unit CT ratings IGN = 8000 A IN1 = IN2 = Rated relay current IN = 10000 A 5A 5A
The temperature rise measured by the protection at a rated current of IGN is: 5 8000 W = 100% = 64 % 10000 5 The settings for overtemperatures of 5 % and 10 % respectively are: Theta-Warn Theta-Trip = 67 % = 70 %
2
Normally the protection is configured such that the initial temperature rise is 100 % ('Theta-Begin' = 100 %). With IB adjusted, the settings become: Base current: IB IGN IN2 8000 5 = = = 0 .8 IN IN IN1 5 10000
3-235
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The settings for alarm and tripping are then: Theta-Warn Theta-Trip = 105 % = 110 %
Transformers have two distinct exponential functions, one for the oil and one for the winding. The corresponding mean values are: Oil Winding : oil = 50 K : W oil = 10 K oil W = 120 min = 10 min
The total temperature rise of the winding is thus W = 60 K. Since however the model operates with just a single exponential function, its temperature rise has to follow the best possible equivalent exponential function as shown in Fig. 3.59. The steady-state temperature rise of this equivalent function is identical to the total temperature rise of the winding, i.e. W = 60 K in the example above. Its time constant, however, is typically 60 to 80% of the temperature rise of the oil (see Fig. 3.60).
3-236
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1,5
1,0
nw Oil
= 100C = 90C
nw Oil
= =
60C 50C
i = in
= 10 min
tOil = 120 min
[C]
w ( t = )
160
140
l ( t = )
w Oil
120
nw
100
Oil
80
Oil
60
40
w w
0 20 40 60 80
Oil Oil
100 120 140 t [min]
20
HEST 905 035 C
Fig. 3.59
Temperature rise of a transformer winding
3-237
ABB Switzerland Ltd

=126.4C
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
140 Winding temperature Thermal image temperature 120 130

[C] [%]
120 110 Overload 110 i = 1.2

nw n oil = 10C
Temperature rise at rated current Thermal time constant setting
w = 10 min oil = 120 min = 90 min
n oil
= 50C
100 0
100 100 200 300 t [min] 400 500 HEST 905 036 C
Fig. 3.60
Actual temperature rise of the winding compared to the temperature rise of the thermal image
Typical settings:
IB-Setting Theta Begin Theta Warn Theta Trip to be calculated 100 % 105 % 110 %
3-238
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.19.
Synchrocheck function (SynchroChck)
A. Application
Checking the synchronisation criteria (amplitudes, phase-shift and frequency difference) of two electrical systems and, providing the corresponding limits are satisfied, enabling them to be connected in parallel.
B. Features
Monitoring synchronism: Single-phase voltage measurement. Comparison of the voltages (dU), phase-shift (dPh) and frequencies (df) of two voltage vectors. Calculation of the corresponding differences between the voltage vectors in the complex plane. Evaluation of the fundamental frequency components of the voltage signals (after filtering of harmonic and DC components). Monitoring voltage: Single or three-phase voltage measurement. Evaluation of instantaneous values (non-digitally filtered analog signals) resulting in a large permissible frequency range. Detection of the largest and smallest of the three phase voltages in the case of three-phase measurement. No filtering of harmonics or DC component. Choice of phase for the voltage I/Ps on busbar and line sides (for amplitude and phase-angle adjustment). Additional voltage I/P (for use in double busbar stations) with provision for remote switchover. Provision for remote selecting the operating mode.

Voltages (2 or 3 single or three-phase I/Ps for 'Voltage Busbar Input 1', ' Voltage Busbar Input 2' and ' Voltage Line Input')
II. Binary inputs:

2 I/Ps for enabling the synchrocheck function ('Release Input 1' and 'Release Input 2') 3 I/Ps for interlocking the synchrocheck O/Ps ('Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1', ' Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2' and ' Interlock Synchrocheck Line') 1 I/P for bypassing the synchrocheck function ('Override Synchrocheck') 2 I/Ps for remotely selecting operating mode ('Operation Mode Input 1' and ' Operation Mode Input 2')
3-239
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
2 I/Ps for remotely switching voltage channels in double busbar stations ('Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active').
III. Signal Outputs:

Function pick-up ('Start Signal') Circuit-breaker closing enable signal ('Permit To Close Signal') Function disabled signal ('Sync. Blocked Signal') Enable O/P blocked signal ('Trig. Blocked Signal') Synchrocheck bypassed signal ('Sync. Override Signal') Amplitude difference in permissible range ('Ampl Diff. OK Signal') Phase-shift in permissible range ('Phase Diff. OK Signal') Frequency difference in permissible range ('Freq Diff. OK Signal') Busbars energised ('Live Bus OK Signal') Busbars de-energised ('Dead Bus OK Signal') Line energised ('Live Line OK Signal') Line de-energised ('Dead Line OK Signal')
IV. Measurements:
Synchronism check (single-phase) 'Voltage amplitude difference' (dU) = U bus - U line 'Maximum Phase Difference' (dPh) = PhBusbar - PhLine 'Frequency Difference' (df) = f bus - f line Voltage check (single or three-phase) Max. busbar voltage 'Maximum Busbar Voltage' Min. busbar voltage 'Mininimum Busbar Voltage' Max. line voltage 'Maximum Line Voltage' Min. line voltage 'Mininimum Line Voltage' [Single-phase: Three-phase: max. voltage max. voltage min. voltage = min. voltage = max. phase-to-phase voltage = min. phase-to-phase voltage]
3-240
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
D. Synchrocheck function settings - SynchroCheck

Text
GENERAL PARAMETERS
Units Trip Chan UN deg Hz UN UN s s
Default 00000000 0.20 10.0 0.20 0.70 0.30 SynChck only 0.20 0.05 1ph R-S 0 0 3ph Y 0 ER
Min.
Max.
Step
PermitToClose Max. Voltage Diff. Max. Phase Diff. Max. Frequency Diff. Minimum Voltage Maximum Voltage Operation Mode SupervisingTime t-Reset
ANALOG INPUT
0.05 05.0 0.05 0.60 0.10 (Select) 0.05 0.00 (Select)
0.40 80.0 0.40 1.00 1.00 5.00 1.00
0.05 05.0 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
Voltage Busbar Input Phase Voltage Busbar Input 1 Voltage Busbar Input 2 Voltage Line Input Phase Voltage Line Input
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
AnalogAddr AnalogAddr AnalogAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr
(Select)
PermitToClose Signal Start Signal Sync. Blocked Signal Trig. Blocked Signal Sync. Override Signal Ampl.Diff. OK Signal Phase Diff. OK Signal Freq. Diff. OK Signal Live Bus OK Signal Dead Bus OK Signal Live Line OK Signal Dead Line OK Signal
BINARY INPUTS
Bus 1 Active Bus 2 Active Release Input 1 Release Input 2 Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1 Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2 Interlock Synchrocheck Line Override Synchrocheck Operation Mode Input 1 Operation Mode Input 2
T F T F F F F F F F
3-241
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Explanation of parameters: GENERAL PARAMETERS

Permit To Close Logic (matrix) O/P channel at which the CB close signal is available. Max. Voltage Diff. Max. permissible voltage difference dU between the phases used for checking synchronism. Max. Phase Diff. Max. permissible phase-shift dPh between the voltages of the phases used for checking synchronism. Max. Frequency Diff. Max. permissible difference of frequency df between the phases used for checking synchronism. Minimum Voltage Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and line being live (lowest phase voltage in the case of three-phase measurement). Maximum Voltage Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and line being dead (highest phase voltage in the case of three-phase measurement). Operation Mode Possible synchrocheck function operating modes: 'SynChk only': Synchrocheck [Synchrocheck conditions fulfilled AND (bus live AND line live)] 'dBus & lLine': 'lBus & dLine': 'dBus dLine': Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live) Synchrocheck OR (bus live AND line dead) Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live) OR (bus live AND line dead) Synchrocheck OR (bus live AND line dead)
'dBus & dLine':
Supervising Time Period between the function picking up and it issuing the CB close enable ('PermitToClos'). All the conditions for synchronism must remain fulfilled during this time, otherwise the function is reset. t-Reset Reset time following the non-fulfilment of one or more synchronism conditions.
3-242
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
ANALOG INPUT
Voltage Busbar Input Phase Choice of phase I/P on the busbar side. Possible settings: 1 ph RS, ST or TR; 1 ph RE, SE or TE; 3 ph Y; 3 ph The phase chosen must agree with the voltage I/P channel selected (i.e. ' Voltage Busbar Input 1' and, if selected, ' Voltage Busbar Input 2'). Voltage Busbar Input 1 1st voltage I/P channel on the busbar side. This must agree with the phase chosen (' Voltage Busbar Input Phase'). In the case of a three-phase connection (' Voltage Busbar Input Phase' = '3 ph Y' or '3 ph '), the first channel (R phase) of a three-phase group must be chosen. Voltage Busbar Input 2 2nd voltage I/P channel (if applicable) on the busbar side. This must agree with the chosen phase (' Voltage Busbar Input Phase'). In the case of a three-phase connection (' Voltage Busbar Input Phase' = '3 ph Y' or '3 ph '), the first channel (R phase) of a threephase group must be chosen. If a second I/P is not configured, the function only takes account of the 1st voltage I/P channel (' Voltage Busbar Input 1'). Voltage Line Input Phase Choice of phase I/P on the line side. Possible settings: 1 ph RS, ST or TR; 1 ph RE, SE or TE; 3 ph Y; 3 ph The phase chosen must agree with the voltage I/P channel selected (i.e. ' Voltage Line Input'). Voltage Line Input Voltage I/P channel on the line side. This must agree with the chosen phase (' Voltage Line Input Phase'). In the case of a threephase connection (' Voltage Line Input Phase' = '3 ph Y' or '3 ph '), the first channel (R phase) of a three-phase group must be chosen.
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
Permit To Close Signal Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is enabling closure of the circuit-breaker. It is generated at the end of the measuring period ('Supervising Time') and remains active for as long as the synchronism conditions are fulfilled, or until a blocking signal is received, or the synchrocheck function resets. Start Signal Signal generated at the instant the conditions for synchronism are fulfilled for the first time.
3-243
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Sync. Blocked Signal Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is disabled, i.e. both the I/Ps 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1' and ' Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2' are set to 'FALSE' (F), and that the synchrocheck algorithm has been discontinued. Trig. Blocked Signal The CB close enabling O/Ps are blocked (one or more blocking I/Ps are at logical '1'), but the synchrocheck algorithm continues to run. Sync. Override Signal Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is bypassed and a CB close enabling signal is being generated ('PermitToClos') regardless of whether the synchronism conditions are fulfilled or not. Ampl. Diff. OK Signal Signal indicating that the voltage difference dU between the phases used for checking synchronism has fallen below the value of the parameter 'Max Voltage Diff.'. Phase Diff. OK Signal Signal indicating that the phase-shift dPh between the phases used for checking synchronism has fallen below the value of the setting of 'Max. Phase Diff.'. Freq. Diff. OK Signal Signal indicating that the difference of frequency df between the phases used for checking synchronism has fallen below the value of the setting of 'Max. Frequency Diff.'. Live Bus OK Signal Signal indicating that the busbar is energised. (U > 'Minimum Voltage') Dead Bus OK Signal Signal indicating that the busbar is de-energised. (U < 'Maximum Voltage') Live Line OK Signal Signal indicating that the line is energised. (U > ' Minimum Voltage') Dead Line OK Signal Signal indicating that the line is de-energised. (U < ' Maximum Voltage')
3-244
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
BINARY INPUTS
Bus 1 Active, Bus 2 Active Binary I/Ps for switching between voltage I/P channels by an remote signal in the case of double busbars (mimic busbar). This I/Ps are only active providing the second busbar I/P channel has been configured ('Voltage Busbar Input 2'). F: T: xx: I/P disabled I/P enabled all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
'Bus 2 Active' (F) FALSE (T) TRUE Selected voltage I/P 'Voltage Busbar Input 1' active 'Voltage Busbar Input 2' active The previous voltage I/P remains active
'Bus 1 Active' (T) TRUE (F) FALSE Other conditions
Release Input 1, Release Input 2 Binary I/Ps for enabling the synchrocheck function. (The I/Ps are connected internally to an OR gate so that at least one must be set to 'TRUE' (T) or appropriately controlled by an remote signal.) If both I/Ps are set to 'FALSE' (F), the functions routine (synchronism algorithm) does not run. These I/Ps are used where the synchrocheck function is only needed at certain times (e.g. in auto-reclosure schemes). F: T: xx: synchrocheck function disabled synchrocheck function enabled all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1, Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2, Interlock Synchrocheck Line Binary I/Ps for interlocking the enabling signals at the O/P of the synchrocheck function. These would be typically controlled by fuse failure equipment (m.c.bs) monitoring the VT circuits. F: T: xx: blocking I/P disabled blocking I/P continuously enabled all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
Parts of the function effected by the blocking I/Ps: Assuming that both busbar I/P channels have been configured, the active blocking I/P depends on the statuses of the binary I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active':
3-245
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
'Bus 1 Active' (T) TRUE (F) FALSE Other conditions
'Bus 2 Active' (F) FALSE (T) TRUE
Selected voltage I/P 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1' and 'Interlock Synchrocheck Line' 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2' and 'Interlock Synchrocheck Line' The previous blocking I/Ps remain active
Assuming that only the first busbar I/P channel has been configured, all the blocking I/Ps are active regardless of the statuses of the binary I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active'.
The active blocking I/Ps are connected internally to an OR gate and the CB close enabling O/Ps are blocked, if one of them is set to 'TRUE' (T). Override Synchrocheck Binary I/P for bypassing the synchrocheck function. This causes an enabling signal to be issued regardless of whether the synchronism conditions are fulfilled or not. It overrides the functions blocking and other enabling I/Ps. F: T: xx: I/P disabled I/P enabled (The synchrocheck O/P 'Permit To Close' is continuously active.) all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
Operation Mode Input 1, Operation Mode Input 2 I/Ps for remotely selecting the operating mode: F: I/P disabled T: I/P continuously enabled xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
'Operation Mode Input 1' (F) FALSE (F) FALSE (T) TRUE (T) TRUE 'Operation Mode Input 2' (F) FALSE (T) TRUE (F) FALSE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck mode Mode specified in the control program ('Operation Mode') Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live) Synchrocheck OR (bus live AND line dead) Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live) OR (bus live AND line dead)
3-246
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.19.1. General
It is only permissible to connect two energised parts of a power system, if the difference between the amplitudes of their voltages and the phase-shift between them are within acceptable limits. The purpose of the synchrocheck function is to determine these parameters and decide whether it is permissible to connect the systems in parallel. The function thus issues an enable signal ('Permit To Close'), providing the voltages of the two systems are higher than the set minimum voltage ('Minimum Voltage') and the difference between the voltage amplitudes dU the phase-shift dPh the difference between the frequencies df
do not exceed the limits set for the parameters 'Max. Voltage Diff.', 'Max. Phase Diff.' and 'Max. Freq Diff' for the adjustable time 'Supervising Time'. According to the operating mode ('Operation Mode') selected, the function also permits de-energised parts of a power system to be coupled. Provision is also made for switching between voltage I/Ps belonging to the busbars of a double busbar station by appropriately controlling two binary I/Ps ('Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active'). Note that the function can only check the synchronism of two voltages at any one time, that of one of the busbars and that of the line. The synchrocheck function is therefore used mainly to connect infeeds in parallel and to connect outgoing feeders to the system to interconnect two synchronous or asynchronous parts of a power system in auto-reclosure schemes as a safety check when carrying out manual switching operations
Note: The expressions in brackets are the names of the corresponding setting parameters. Refer also to Section D.
3-247
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Application example: Feeder connected to double busbars

SS1 SS2 T1
CB Line VT Line T2 Closing command
Switching unit
Permit to Close
Bus 2 Active Bus 1 Active VT SS2 Voltage Busbar Input 2 Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2 VT SS1 Voltage Busbar Input 1 Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1 Synchrocheck
Voltage Line Input
Interlock Synchrocheck Line
HEST 045 018 C
Fig. 3.61
Principle of synchrocheck scheme for determining the instant when it is permissible to connect a feeder to the power system (the voltages of busbar 'SS2' and the line are monitored).
where: SS1, SS2 : busbar 1, busbar 2 VTs on busbar 1, busbar 2 and line isolators on busbars 1 and 2 circuit-breaker voltage I/P channels on the busbar side voltage I/P channel on the line side
VT SS1, VT SS2, VT Line : T1, T2 CB Voltage Busbar Input 1, Voltage Busbar Input 2 Voltage Line Input : : : :
Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1, Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2, Interlock Synchrocheck Line: I/Ps for blocking the synchro-check function by the VT fuse failure equipment
3-248
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bus 1 Active, Bus 2 Active :
Binary I/Ps for switching between the analog busbar voltage I/Ps in accordance with the configuration of the isolators (mimic busbar)
3.5.19.2.
Settings
Max. voltage difference dU Max. Voltage Diff. Max. phase-shift dPh Max. Phase Diff. Max. frequency difference df Max. Frequency Diff. Minimum voltage level for monitoring Minimum Voltage (determination of whether plant is energised) Maximum voltage level for monitoring Maximum Voltage (determination of whether plant is de-energised) Choice of operating mode Operation Mode Measuring period (delay before issuing Supervising Time enable) Reset delay t-Reset Choice of phase for monitoring on the Voltage Busbar Input Phase busbar side Choice of phase for monitoring on the Voltage Line Input Phase line side Monitoring the conditions for synchronism ('Max. Voltage Diff.', 'Max. Phase Diff.' and 'Max. Frequency Diff.') The determination of voltage difference, phase-shift and frequency difference is performed for just one of the phases of the three-phase system. For this purpose, the analog values are first filtered by a digital Fourier bandpass filter (to obtain the fundamentals) and then the orthogonal components 'U bus' and 'U line' are derived. The phase-shift dPh between the voltages and the difference between their amplitudes dU are calculated from the corresponding vector diagram in the complex plane.
Apparent
bus,
B bus
L line dPhi PhiL PhiB
: complex vectors for line U bus and U line : angular velocities for bus and line = bus line = PhiB PhiL
B, L d dPhi
Real
HEST 925 018 C
Fig. 3.62
Monitoring the conditions for synchronism
3-249
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The frequency difference df is obtained by determining the rate at which the phase-shift between the voltage vectors varies: df d (dPhi) (B L ) df
The conditions for synchronism are fulfilled, providing the values of the resulting variables are within the limits set for 'Max.Voltage Diff.', 'Max Phase Diff.' and 'Max. Frequency Diff.'.
Typical values:
Max.Voltage Diff.: 0.2 UN Max Phase Diff.: 10 Max. Frequency Diff.: 50 mHz - for connecting largely synchronous parts of a stable closely meshed system or where high demands with regard to synchronism have to be fulfilled. - in auto-reclosure schemes with long dead times (e.g. three-phase slow reclosure) or for autoreclosure of short transmission lines. - in auto-reclosure schemes with short dead times, but where high slip frequencies are to be expected.
100 mHz
200 mHz
3-250
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Note:
The setting of the synchronism measuring period ('Supervising Time') must be chosen to correspond to the settings for the maximum phase-shift and maximum frequency difference.
Monitoring the voltage in two power systems ('Minimum Voltage', 'Maximum Voltage')
The determination of voltage amplitude can be either based on monitoring a single phase or all three phases depending on how the particular AnalogAddr is configured. If the three phases are included, then the highest voltage of the three is detected for the maximum limit, respectively the lowest of the three for the minimum limit. In order to be able to monitor the voltages in a wide frequency range, instantaneous values are measured (instead of digitally filtered analog voltages). The voltage detectors may be used to determine whether a system is de-energised or whether it is energised: A system is considered to be 'de-energised', if its voltage (highest of the three phases in the case of three-phase measurement) falls below the setting of the parameter 'Maximum Voltage'. A system is considered to be 'energised', if its voltage (lowest of the three phases in the case of three-phase measurement) exceeds the setting of the parameter 'Minimum Voltage'.
On no account will an enable signal permitting closure of the circuitbreaker be issued, should the voltage lie between the limits of 'Maximum Voltage' and 'Minimum Voltage'.
Typical values:
Minimum Voltage Maximum Voltage 0.70 UN 0.30 UN
Choosing the operating mode of the synchrocheck function ('Operation Mode')

Basically, an enable signal will always be issued, if the conditions for synchronism ('dU', 'dPh' and 'df') are fulfilled for the prescribed period and both systems, i.e. busbar and line, are energised (voltage > Minimum Voltage'). In cases where closure of the circuit-breaker should also be enabled when one system is de-energised, e.g. connection of a radial feeder, this can be achieved by appropriately setting the parameter 'Operation Mode':
3-251
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
'Operation Mode' 'SynChk only'
Closure enabled when: Synchronism conditions fulfilled AND (busbar > 'Mininum Voltage' AND line > 'Minimum Voltage') 'SyncChk only' OR (busbar < 'Maximum Voltage' AND line > 'Minimum Voltage') 'SyncChck only' OR (busbar > 'Minimum Voltage' AND line < 'Maximum Voltage') 'SyncChk only' OR (busbar < 'Maximum Voltage' AND line > 'minVoltage') OR (busbar > 'Minimum Voltage' AND line < 'Maximum Voltage') 'SyncChk only' OR (busbar < 'Maximum Voltage' AND line < 'Maximum Voltage')
'dBus & lLine'
'lBus & dLine'
'dBus | dLine'
'dBus & dLine'
Remote mode selection:
Four of the five operating modes can be selected by external signals applied to two of the functions binary I/Ps ('Operation Mode Input 1' and 'Operation Mode Input 2').
Binary I/P signals 'Operation Mode Input 1' 'Operation Mode Input 2' (F) FALSE (F) FALSE (T) TRUE (T) TRUE (F) FALSE (T) TRUE (F) FALSE (T) TRUE 'Mode set in the control program' ('Operation Mode') 'dBus & lLine' 'lBus & dLine' 'dBus | lLine' Mode (see above)
Choice of phase for the voltage I/P on the busbar and line sides ('Voltage Busbar Input Phase', 'Voltage Line Input Phase')
The phase voltage ('Voltage Busbar Input Phase', 'Voltage Line Input Phase') to be used for determining synchronism can be entered separately for busbar and line I/Ps (to facilitate individual adjustment of phase-angle and amplitude). All single and three-phase voltages are available for setting (1ph RS, ST or TR; 1ph RE, SE or TE; 3ph Y; 3ph ), but the ones chosen must agree with the setting for the corresponding I/P channels (see Section D. 'Synchrocheck function settings').
3-252
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Where both busbar I/Ps are in use, the definition of the phase ('Voltage Busbar Input Phase') applies to both busbars.
Notes:
A phase-to-phase measurement is to be preferred for a singlephase voltage measurement. If a single-phase I/P has to be chosen on both sides, the same phase should be used wherever possible. If a three-phase 'Y' connection is selected, phase-to-phase voltages are formed internally. This reduces the harmonic content and enables the function to continue to be used in ungrounded systems, which are required to remain in service with a single earth fault. According to the setting for 'Voltage Busbar Input Phase' and 'Voltage Line Input Phase', either a just one phase or all three phases are monitored. Whether or not the conditions for synchronism ('dU', 'dPh' and 'df') are fulfilled is determined on the basis of a single phase, whereby the following apply: Where three phases are monitored on busbar and line sides, the phase-to-phase potential URS is the one extracted for further processing. Should a three-phase measurement be defined on one side and a single-phase on the other, Then the single-phase voltage set for the single-phase I/P is used on both sides.
The measuring period ('Supervising Time'), reset time ('t-Reset') and the operating time of the function and also the dead time of any auto-reclosure function
Measuring period ('Supervising Time'):
This adjustable delay time, which is initiated at the end of the pick-up time, is the period during which all the conditions for synchronism must be continuously fulfilled to permit closure of the circuit-breaker. The timer is reset should one of the parameters move out of the permissible range. Providing they all remain within their preset ranges, the enable signal ('Permit To Close') is issued at the end of the measuring period. Especially in auto-reclosure applications, it is of advantage to set the measuring period ('Supervising Time') in relation to the settings for 'Max. Phase Diff.' and 'Max. Frequency Diff.'. It also provides facility for allowing for the operating time of the circuit-breaker:
' Supervising Time' [s ] 2 (' Max. Phase Diff .' ) [] (tv + ts ) [s ] (' Max Frequency Diff .' ) [Hz ] 360
3-253
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
where: ts: circuit-breaker operating time Typical range: 0 ... 100 ms tv: time required by the function to pick up (response by the function to transient phenomena in the input voltage and timer tolerances): typically 60... 80 ms for values of 'Supervising Time' < 200 ms typically 80... 100 ms for values of 'Supervising Time' 200 ms
The above setting for the measuring period ensures that for a constant frequency difference df within the setting of 'Max. Frequency Diff.', the phase-shift dPh will still be inside the set permissible angular range ('Max. Phase Diff.' to + 'Max. Phase Diff.') at the end of the time 'Supervising Time'.
Typical values:
For a phase-shift setting ('Max. Phase Diff.') of 10:
'Max Frequency Diff.' 200 mHz 100 mHz 50 mHz 'Supervising Time' 100... 200 ms 250... 450 ms 600...1000 ms
Minimum operating time of the function:
The minimum operating time achieved by the function, i.e. the shortest possible time between the instant the synchronism conditions are fulfilled for the first time and the generation of the signal enabling the circuit-breaker to be closed 'Permit To Close', is given by the sum of the measuring time setting 'Supervising Time' and the pick-up response time 'tv' of the function. Min. operating time = ('Supervising Time') + tv
Auto-reclosure dead time:
In an auto-reclosure scheme, the dead time set for the auto-reclosure function must be at least as long as the minimum operating time of the synchrocheck function given above in order to permit the synchrocheck function to issue an enable signal ('Permit To Close') within the dead time: dead time min. operating time = ('Supervising Time') + tv
Reset time ('t-Reset'):
From the instant that one or more of the synchronism conditions are no longer fulfilled, the enabling signal O/P ('Permit To Close') and the pick-up signal reset after the time set for 't-Reset'. This ensures the a CB closing signal can be maintained for a certain minimum time.
3-254
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Typical value:
t-Reset 50 ms
Note:
Where high slip frequencies df are to be expected, 't-Reset' must be short enough to prevent the phase-shift from exceeding the set permissible range of phase-angles (-'Max. Phase Diff.' to + 'Max. Phase Diff.') during the reset time.
3.5.19.3.
Binary inputs of the function
Inputs for switching between analog busbar inputs ('Bus 1 Active', 'Bus 2 Active') Where the two busbar I/Ps ('Voltage Busbar Input 1' and 'Voltage Busbar Input 1') have been configured for a double busbar installation, the measurement can be switched from one busbar to the other by signals corresponding to the isolator positions applied to the I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active':
'uBus1Activ' 'uBus2Activ' Analog I/Ps for synchronisation (T) TRUE (F) FALSE (F) FALSE (T) TRUE 'Voltage Busbar Input 1' and 'Voltage Line Input' 'Voltage Busbar Input 2' and 'Voltage Line Input'
Other combinations of the states of these two I/Ps do not result in any switching of the AnalogAddr channels and the prevailing situation is maintained.
Notes:
The function (timer, all measuring elements and the associated O/Ps) is automatically reinitialised when busbar I/Ps are switched. This procedure takes about 60 ms (internal response times). The function then begins to evaluate the new busbar voltage and from this instant onwards the generation of an enable signal ('PermitToClos') relating to the new system configuration is possible. The two binary I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active' are inactivated in configurations in which only one busbar I/P ('Voltage Busbar Input 1') is defined.
Blocking inputs for preventing the synchrocheck function from issuing an enable signal (' Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1', ' Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2', ' Interlock Synchrocheck Line') These are assigned to the corresponding voltage I/Ps and used mainly when the VT circuit can be interrupted by fuse-failure equipment (miniature circuit-breakers). In such cases, the blocking I/Ps are connected to auxiliary contacts on the fuse-failure equipment. This
3-255
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
precaution eliminates any risk of the synchrocheck function permitting the closure of a circuit-breaker onto a line it considers to be de-energised, which in reality is under voltage. Functionality of the blocking I/Ps: Both busbar voltage I/Ps have been configured: Which of the blocking I/Ps is enabled depends on which of the busbar I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active' is active, i.e. on which voltage I/P is active:
'uBus1Activ' (T) TRUE (F) FALSE 'uBus2Activ' (F) FALSE (T) TRUE Active blocking I/Ps 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1' and 'Interlock Synchrocheck Line' 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2' and 'Interlock Synchrocheck Line'
Other combinations of the states of these two I/Ps do not influence the blocking I/Ps and the prevailing situation is maintained. If only one busbar voltage I/P is configured, all the blocking I/Ps ('Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1', 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2' and 'Interlock Synchrocheck Line') are enabled regardless of the states of the binary I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active'.
The active blocking I/Ps are connected to an OR function so that a logical '1' from any one of them causes all the measuring elements and the associated O/Ps ('Start Signal', 'Ampl. Diff. OK Signal', 'Phase Diff. OK Signal', 'Freq. Diff. OK Signal', 'Live Bus OK Signal', 'Live Line OK Signal', 'Dead Bus OK Signal' and 'Dead Line OK Signal') and also the enabling O/P ('Permit To Close Signal') to reset. The algorithm of the synchrocheck function, however, continues to run.
Inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function ('ReleaseInp1', 'ReleaseInp2')

Since the synchrocheck function is only required during the relevant switching operations and auto-reclosure cycles, it may be blocked at all other times to save processor time. The binary I/Ps 'Release Input 1' and 'Release Input 2' are used for this purpose. Internally they are the I/Ps of an OR gate, so that at least one must be active before the synchrocheck program will run. If neither of the two enabling signals is at logical '1', processing of the algorithm ceases. All the functions measuring element O/Ps also reset immediately and any circuit-breaker close enabling signal ('Permit To Close Signal') resets after the time set for 't-Reset'. Conditional enabling of the synchrocheck function is especially recommended, where it has to operate in conjunction with other functions in the same unit such as distance protection, which are critical from the operating time point of view, so as not to adversely influence their tripping times.
3-256
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Application example:
The scheme below shows a synchrocheck function in the same unit as the distance protection and autoreclosure functions. The synchrocheck function is only required during the dead times of the autoreclosure function. This is achieved by connecting the inverted O/P signal 'AR Ready' generated by the autoreclosure function to the binary I/P 'Release Input 1' (or 'Release Input 2') of the synchrocheck unit.
Start Distance function Trip CB Trip CB 3P Autoreclosure function AR ready Release Input 1 Close CB Synchrocheck
Synchro Check
Permit to Close Signal
HEST 045024 C
Fig. 3.63
Block diagram showing the interconnections between the functions for a scheme with conditional enabling of the synchrocheck function
Input for bypassing the synchrocheck function ('OverridSync')

A signal applied to this binary I/P causes a 'Permit To Close Signal' to be generated immediately regardless of whether the conditions for synchronism are fulfilled or not. This I/P overrides all other blocking or enabling I/Ps.
Inputs for remotely selecting the operating mode ('OpModeInp1', 'OpModeInp2')

Refer to 'Choosing the operating mode of the synchrocheck function' in Section 3.5.19.2. 'Choosing the operating mode of the synchrocheck function'.
3-257
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-258
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.20.
Breaker failure protection (BreakerFailure)
A. Application
Redundant tripping schemes (RED 1)) Repeated tripping attempts (BFP 2)) Backup tripping (BFP) End fault protection (EFP 3)) Unconditional tripping (UT 4)) External trip initiation
B. Features
Insensitive to DC component Insensitive to harmonics Single or three-phase operation Blocking Two independent timers (t1, t2) Transfer tripping Provision for disabling features (RED, BFP, EFP, UT) Unique ID for each binary input and output
C. Inputs and outputs I. CT/VT inputs

Current
II. Binary inputs

13205 Block BFP 13710 Start L1 13720 Start L2 13730 Start L3 13740 Start L1L2L3 13705 External Start 13770 CB Off 13775 CB On 13780 Ext. Trip t2 13785 Ext. Trip EFP
III. Binary outputs

1) 2)
23305 Trip t1 23315 Trip t1 L1 23320 Trip t1 L2 23325 Trip t1 L3 23310 Trip t2 23340 Remote Trip
Redundant Breaker failure protection 3) End fault protection 4) Unconditional trip 3-259
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
23345 Red. Trip L1 23350 Red. Trip L2 23355 Red. Trip L3 23375 EFP Rem Trip 23370 EFP Bus Trip 23330 Retrip t1 23360 Uncon Trip t1 23380 Ext Trip t1 23335 Backup Trip t2 23365 Uncon Trip t2
IV. Measurements
Current amplitude L1 Current amplitude L2 Current amplitude L3
3-260
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
D. Breaker failure protection settings BreakerFailure

Text Unit Default Min. Max. Step
General Parameters Number Of Phases Current Input I Setting Delay t1 Delay t2 Delay tEFP t Drop Retrip t Drop Butrip t Pulse RemTrip t1 active t2 active RemTrip active EFP active Red active Start Ext act. RemTrip after CB Commands TRIP t1 TRIP t1 L1 TRIP t1 L2 TRIP t1 L3 TRIP t2 Remote Trip Red Trip L1 Red Trip L2 Red Trip L3 EFP Rem Trip EFP Bus Trip 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 IN s s s s s s 3 Ph
CT/VT-Addr 0
(Select) 0.20 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) (Select) 5.00 60.00 60.00 60.00 60.00 60.00 60.00 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
1.20 0.15 0.15 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05 on on on on on on t1
3-261
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Text Binary Inputs Block BFP Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Start L1L2L3 External Start CB Off CB On Ext Trip t2 Ext Trip EFP Signal Outputs Trip t1 Trip t1 L1 Trip t1 L2 Trip t1 L3 Trip t2 Remote Trip Red Trip L1 Red Trip L2 Red Trip L3 EFP Rem Trip EFP Bus Trip Retrip t1 Uncon Trip t1 Ext Trip t1 Backup Trip t2 Uncon Trip t2
Unit
Default
Min.
Max.
Step
BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F
SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER
Explanation of parameters: General Parameters

NrOfPhases defines the number of phases supervised. '1' single-phase operation '3' three-phase operation
3-262
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Current Input defines the CT input channel. Single and three-phase CTs can be set. The first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified for three-phase CTs. I Setting Pick-up of the current criterion for the breaker failure protection (BFP), end fault protection (EFP) and the redundant tripping logic (RED). Delay t1 'Retrip' tripping delay Delay t2 Backup tripping delay. Delay tEFP End fault protection delay. t Drop Retrip Reset delay for 'Retrip', 'Redundant Trip' and 'External Trip Initiate'. t Drop Butrip Reset delay for backup tripping attempt. t Puls RemTrip Transfer tripping impulse width. t1 active defines whether timer t1 is enabled or disabled. 'on' Timer t1 enabled 'off' Timer t1 disabled t2 active defines whether timer t2 is enabled or disabled. 'on' Timer t2 enabled 'off' Timer t2 disabled RemTrip active defines whether transfer tripping is enabled or disabled. 'on' Transfer tripping enabled 'off' Transfer tripping disabled EFP active defines whether the end fault protection is enabled or disabled. 'on' End fault protection enabled 'off' End fault protection disabled Red active defines whether the redundant logic is enabled or disabled. 'on' Redundant tripping logic enabled 'off' Redundant tripping logic disabled
3-263
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Start Ext active defines whether the unconditional tripping logic is enabled or disabled. 'on' Unconditional tripping logic enabled 'off' Unconditional tripping logic disabled RemTrip after defines the delay for transfer tripping. 't1' after BFP time t1 't2' after BFP time t2
CB Commands
TRIP t1 defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping output TRIP t1 (matrix tripping logic). This output is activated for a 'Retrip', 'External Trip Initiate' or 'Unconditional Trip'. TRIP t1 L1, L2 or L3 defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping outputs TRIP t1 L1, L2 or L3 (matrix tripping logic). This output is activated for a phase segregated 'Retrip'. TRIP t2 defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping output TRIP t2 (matrix tripping logic). This output is activated for a 'Backup Trip' or 'Unconditional Trip' the after second time step t2. REMOTE TRIP defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping output REMOTE TRIP (matrix tripping logic). RED TRIP L1, L2 or L3 defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping outputs RED TRIP L1, L2 or L3 (matrix tripping logic). EFP REM TRIP defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping output EFP REM TRIP (matrix tripping logic). EFP BUS TRIP defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping output EFP BUS TRIP (matrix tripping logic).
Binary Inputs
Block BFP Input for blocking the function. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-264
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Start L1, L2 or L3 BFP or RED Start in phase L1, L2 or L3 F: disabled T: enabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Start L1,L2 or L3 BFP or RED Start in all three phases F: disabled T: enabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) External Start starts the unconditional trip. F: disabled T: enabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) CB-Off signals that the circuit-breaker is fully open and also used to start the end zone fault protection. F: CB not fully open T: CB fully open xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) CB-On signals that the circuit-breaker is fully closed. F: CB not fully closed T: CB fully closed xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Ext Trip t2 Input for signals from the other BFP units in the station. F: No external trip after t2 T: External trip after t2 xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Ext Trip EFP Input for signals from the end zone fault outputs of the other BFP units in the station. F: No trip for end zone fault T: Trip for end zone fault xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-265
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Signal Outputs
Trip t1 signals a trip which is activated by one of the following logics: Repeat trip (see 'Retrip t1') External trip (see 'Ext Trip t1') Unconditional trip (see 'UnconTrip t1') Trip t1 L1, L2 or L3 signals a repeat trip of phase L1, L2 or L3. Trip t2 signals a backup trip. This signal is activated by the following logics: Backup trip after t2 (see 'Backup Trip t2') Unconditional trip after t2 (see 'UnconTrip t2') Remote Trip signals a transfer trip. Red Trip L1, L2 or L3 signals a redundant trip of phase L1, L2 or L3. EFP Rem Trip signals an end zone trip. This signal is an impulse of length 't Puls Rem Trip' generated when the EFP timer has timed out. EFP Bus Trip signals an end zone trip. This signal is generated when the EFP timer has timed out and resets 'tDrop Bu Trip' after the initiating signal has reset. Retrip t1 signals a repeat trip after t1. This signal is generated when the BFP timer t1 in one of the phases has timed out. Uncon Trip t1 signals an unconditional trip after t1. This signal is generated when the UT timer t1 has timed out. Ext Trip t1 signals an external trip. This signal is generated when either the input 'Ext Trip t2' or 'Ext Trip EFP' is enabled. Backup Trip t2 signals a backup trip after t2. This signal is generated when the BFP timer t2 has timed out. Uncon Trip t2 signals an unconditional trip after t2. This signal is generated when the UT timer t2 has timed out.
3-266
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Pick-up current setting: Tripping delay: I Setting Delay t1 Delay t2 Delay tEFP
Rest delay: Impulse:
t Drop Retrip t Drop BuTrip t Puls RemTrip
Enabled signals:
t1 active t2 active RemTrip active EFP active Red active Start Ext active
Pick-up current setting 'I Setting'

If the BFP current detector pick-up setting is too low, there is a possibility that the detectors may reset too late after it has successfully tripped the circuit-breaker. This can be caused by damped oscillations on the secondary side of the CT. On the other hand, if the setting is too high, the BFP may fail to operate at all should, for example, the current fall below pick-up again due to severe CT saturation. A typical setting for the pick-up current is just below the minimum fault current that can occur on the respective line.
3-267
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Tripping delays t1 and t2

The tripping delay settings enable the BFP to be adapted to its particular operating environment (e.g. circuit-breaker characteristics etc.). Fig. 3.64 shows a typical timing diagram for clearing a fault.
Fault incidence (1) CB open (3) Repeat trip (4)
Start (2)
CB open (5)
Backup trip (6)
Tripping time
tCB open
tReset + tMargin
tCB open Delay t1 Delay t2
tReset + tMargin
Fig. 3.64
Operation of the BFP/UT timers t1 and t2
Timing in the case of breaker failure: (1) (2) A fault has occurred and been detected by a protective device. A tripping command is transmitted to the circuit-breaker after the unit protection operating time which also starts the BFP. The tripping command can be either single (Start Lx) or three-phase (Start L1L2L3). The redundant signals are also activated at the same time. The circuit-breaker ruptures the fault current. After the reset delay tReset plus a safety margin tMargin , the BFP either detects that the fault current has been interrupted and the protection function resets, or the fault current continues to flow and a second attempt is made by the BFP to trip the circuitbreaker. The second attempt to trip the circuit-breaker is successful and the fault current is interrupted.
(3) (4)
(5)
3-268
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
(6)
After a further reset delay tReset plus a safety margin tMargin , the BFP either detects that the fault current has been interrupted and the protection function resets, or the fault current continues to flow and the BFP initiates backup tripping.
If the BFP is only required to carry out a single breaker failure step, timer t1 can be disabled (see 't1 active'). The response of the BFP corresponds once again to Fig. 3.64, but with timer t1 set to zero. Timing in the case of an unconditional trip: (1) (2) (3) (4) A fault has occurred and been detected by a protective device. A signal at input 'External Start' starts the UT function. The circuit-breaker ruptures the fault current. If after the reset delay tReset plus a safety margin tMargin , the CB auxiliary contact 'CB-On' still signals to the UT that the CB is closed, a second attempt is made by the UT function to trip the circuit-breaker. The second attempt to trip the circuit-breaker is successful and the fault current is interrupted. If after a further reset delay tReset plus a safety margin tMargin the CB auxiliary contact 'CB-On' still signals to the UT that the CB is closed, backup tripping is initiated by the UT function.
(5) (6)
Delay t1 t CB open + tReset + t Margin Delay t 2 t CB open + tReset + tMargin tCB open tReset tMargin CB opening time including arc extinction time Reset time of the current criterion 1) Allowance for variations in normal fault clearing times 2)
1) 2)
see reset time of the current detector tReset see safety margin tMargin 3-269
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Tripping delay tEFP

The setting for tEFP can be seen from Fig. 3.65 which shows a typical timing diagram for tripping a fault.
CB tripping signal (1) CB open (3) EFP tripping signal (4)
tCB open tReset + tMargin
tCB Off
tEFP
CB tripped (2)
Fig. 3.65 (1) (2) (3) (4)
Timing diagram for an end zone fault
Tripping command applied to the CB. CB auxiliary contact sends a signal that the CB is open to the 'CB-Off' input of the function which is used to start the EFP. The circuit-breaker ruptures the fault current. After a reset delay plus a safety margin, the current unit either detects that the fault current has been interrupted and the EFP function resets, or the fault current continues to flow and an EFP signal is issued.
tEFP t CB open t CB Off + tReset + tMargin tCB open tCB Off tReset tMargin CB opening time including arc extinction time CB opening time of the CB auxiliary contact (Signal 'CB open') Reset time of the current detector 3) Allowance for variations in normal fault clearing time 4)
3) 4)
see reset time of the current detector tReset see Margin time tMargin
3-270
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Reset time of the current detector tReset

The current detector reset time is determine by the power system configuration as follows: Power system time constant up to 300 ms Fault current up to 40 IN tReset = 28 ms (ISetting 0.2 IN) tReset = 28 ms (ISetting 1.2 IN) tReset = 38 ms (ISetting 0.4 IN)
Primary CTs TPX: Primary CTs TPY:
Safety margin tMargin

A safety margin of 20 ms is recommended.
Reset times 't Drop Retrip' and 't Drop Butrip'

The function includes two independently adjustable signal reset delays. 't Drop Retrip' determines the reset delay for the following signals: 23305 Trip t1 23315 Trip t1 L1 23320 Trip t1 L2 23325 Trip t1 L3 23345 Red Trip L1 23350 Red Trip L2 23355 Red Trip L3 23330 Retrip t1 23360 Uncon Trip t1 23380 Ext Trip t1 't Drop BuTrip' determines the reset delay for the following signals: 23310 Trip t2 23370 EFP Bus Trip 23335 Backup Trip t2 23365 Uncon Trip t2
3-271
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Impulse 't Pulse RemTrip'

't Puls RemTrip' determines the width of the transfer tripping impulse for the following signals: 23340 Remote Trip 23375 EFP Rem Trip
Enabling and disabling the various features

A number of the functions features can be enabled and disabled.
t1 active
This setting provides facility for disabling the timer t1. When it is disabled, none of the 'repeat trip' group of signals is generated.
t2 active
This setting provides facility for disabling the timer t2. When it is disabled, none of the 'backup trip' group of signals is generated.
RemTrip active
This setting provides facility for disabling transfer tripping. When it is disabled, none of the 'remote trip' group of signals is generated.
EFP active
This setting provides facility for disabling the end fault protection. When it is disabled, none of the 'end fault' group of signals is generated.
Red active
This setting provides facility for disabling the redundant protection. When it is disabled, none of the 'redundant' group of signals is generated.
Start Ext active

This setting provides facility for disabling the unconditional trip feature. When it is disabled, none of the 'unconditional trip' group of signals is generated.
3-272
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.21.
Transformer differential protection function (Diff-Transf)
A. Application
Differential protection of two and three-winding power transformers generator/transformer units.
B. Features
Non-linear, current-dependent operating characteristic (see Fig. 3.66) High stability during through-faults and in the presence of CT saturation Short tripping times Three-phase measurement Inrush current restraint using the second harmonic detection of the highest phase current detection of the load current to determine whether the transformer is energised or not Compensation of phase group Compensation of CT ratio Scheme for three-winding transformers phase-by-phase comparison of the highest winding current with the sum of the currents of the other two windings DC current component filter harmonic filter

Current (2 or 3 sets of 3 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

tripping R phase trip S phase trip T phase trip
IV. Measurements:
R phase summation current S phase summation current T phase summation current R phase restraining current S phase restraining current T phase restraining current
3-273
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Transformer differential protection settings - Diff-Transf

Text Trip g - Setting v Setting b Setting g - High I - Inst Inrush Ratio Inrush Time a1 s1 Current Inp.Chan. 1 a2 s2 CurrentInp.Chan. 2 a3 s3 Current Inp.Chan. 3 Block Input Inrush Input High Set Input Trip Signal Trip-R Signal Trip-S Signal Trip-T Signal Inrush Signal Stabilizing Signal CT/VT-Addr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr IN IN IN % s Unit IN Default 00000000 0.2 0.50 1.50 2.00 10 10 5 1.00 Y 0 1.00 y0 0 1.00 y0 0 F F F ER 0.05 (Select) 2.20 0.01 0.05 (Select) 2.20 0.01 Min. 0.1 0.25 1.25 0.50 3 6 0 0.05 (Select) Max. 0.5 0.50 5.00 2.50 15 20 90 2.20 Step 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 1 1 1 0.01
Explanation of Parameters:
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (matrix). g - Setting defines the basic setting g of the operating characteristic. v - Setting defines the pick-up ratio v of the operating characteristic. b - Setting defines the value b of the operating characteristic. This should be set to approx. 1.5 times rated current.
3-274
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
g - High High-set Basic setting which replaces the normal basic setting when activated by the HighSetInp input. It is used to prevent false tripping due, for example, to excessive flux (overfluxing). I - Inst Differential current, above which tripping takes place regardless of whether the protected unit has just been energised or not. This enables the time required to trip to be shortened for high internal fault currents. Inrush Ratio Ratio of 2nd harmonic current content to fundamental current above which an inrush condition is detected. Inrush Time Time during which the inrush detection function is active following initial energisation or an external fault. a1 Amplitude compensation factor for winding 1. s1 Connection of winding 1 (primary) Settings provided: Y: star-connected D: delta-connected Current Inp.Chan. 1 defines the CT input channel for winding 1. The first channel (R phase) of the two groups of three phases must be specified. a2 Amplitude compensation factor for winding 2. s2 Vector group for winding 2. Settings provided: All usual groups of connection with designation of the circuit (y = star, d = delta, z = zigzag) phase-angle adjustment of the winding 2 voltage in relation to the winding 1 voltage in multiples of 30. Current Inp.Chan.2 defines the CT input channel for winding 2. The first channel (R phase) of the two groups of three phases must be specified. a3 Amplitude compensation factor for winding 3.
3-275
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
s3 Vector group for winding 3. Settings provided: All usual groups of connection with designation of the circuit (y = star, d = delta, z = zigzag) phase-angle adjustment of the winding 3 voltage in relation to the winding 1 voltage in multiples of 30. Current Inp.Chan. 3 defines the CT input channel for winding 3. The first channel (R phase) of the two groups of three phases must be specified. The protection operates in a two-winding mode, if a third input is not selected. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Inrush Input activates the inrush restraint, even though the transformer is already energised. This enables, for example, the inrush current resulting from energising a parallel transformer to be detected and compensated. F: not used xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) High Set Input determines whether the normal or high-set Basic setting g is used. F: not used xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Trip Signal Output for the signalling tripping. Trip-R Signal Output for signalling tripping by R phase. Trip-S Signal Output for signalling tripping by S phase. Trip-T Signal Output for signalling tripping by T phase.
3-276
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Inrush Signal Output for signalling inrush current. Stabilizing Signal Output for signalling IH > b during through-faults.
I IN
3 Operation for I'1 <b IN or I'2 <b IN
Operation 2
1 v g 1 b 2 Restraint 3 IH IN
I1
Protected unit
I2 I3
HEST 965 007 C
I = I1 + I2 + I3
Operating (differential) current
I' I' cos IH = 1 2 0
for cos 0 for cos < 0
Restrain current
whereI'1 = greatest of I1,I2 ,I3 I' 2 = I1 + I2 + I3 I'1 = (I'1; I' 2 )
Fig. 3.66
Operating characteristic: Diff-Transf
3-277
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Basic setting Pick-up ratio Operating characteristic switching point Increased basic setting Pick-up differential current (uninfluenced by inrush detection) Pick-up ratio of the inrush detector Inrush detection time Amplitude compensation factors Connection of winding 1 Vector groups of windings 2 and 3 g v b g - High I - Inst Inrush Ratio Inrush Time a1 a2 a3 s1 s2 s3
The purpose of the transformer differential protection is to detect phase faults in the protected zone. It may also detect earth faults and interturn faults. The protection is sensitive, fast and absolutely discriminative.
Basic setting g
The basic setting 'g' defines the pick-up setting of the differential protection for internal faults. The lowest possible value should be chosen for 'g' (high sensitivity) to enable it to detect transformer earth faults and interturn faults in addition to phase faults. The setting of 'g' must not be too low, however, to avoid the danger of false tripping due to: CT errors the maximum off-load transformer current at the maximum shorttime system voltage tap-changer range
The off-load current (magnetising current) of a modern power transformer is very low, usually between 0.3 and 0.5 % of rated current at rated voltage. During short-time voltage peaks, e.g. following load shedding, the off-load current can reach as much as 10 % or more. The tap-changer voltage range is usually between 5 % and 10 %, but ranges of 20 % and more occur. Its influence has to be taken into account regardless of whether the tap-changer is manually operated or controlled by a voltage regulator. All three of these influences cause a differential current, which flows during normal system conditions. The setting for 'g' must be chosen above the level of this differential current. A typical setting is g = 0.3 IN (i.e. 30 % IN).
3-278
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Pick-up ratio v
The pick-up ratio 'v' is decisive for the stability of the protection during external phase and earth faults, i.e. in the presence of high throughfault currents. The value of 'v' defines the ratio of the operating current to restraint current. The setting should be such that when operating under load conditions, weak faults causing only a low differential current can still be detected, but at the same time there is no risk of false tripping during through-faults. A typical setting is v = 0.5.
Restraint current b
The restraint current b defines the point at which the characteristic is switched. The sloped section of the characteristic ensures that the relay remains stable during through-faults with CT saturation. The ability to switch between two different slopes enables the characteristic to adapt to different conditions. The recommended setting for 'b' is 1.5. This provides high stability during high through-fault currents and sufficient sensitivity to detect fault currents in the region of the operating current.
Factors a2 and a3
The full setting range for the factors a2 and a3 for compensating current amplitude only applies, if the reference value for the CT input channels is set to 1.000. At all other settings, the permissible upper limit reduces in proportion to the ratio of the CT input channel reference values (transformer winding 1/winding 2, respectively winding 3/winding 1).
Operating characteristic
The restraint current in the case of a three-winding power transformer is derived from the currents of two windings and not three. In the interest of the best possible through-fault stability, the two largest currents of the three windings are used for this purpose. The restrain current is either defined by the equation
IH = I1 I2 cos
or is zero IH = 0 The angle
for -90 < < 90
for 90 < < 270
= (I1, I2 )
3-279
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The following vector diagram of the current on primary and secondary sides and of the differential current measured for a transformer on load was assumed.
I2
I1
I2
HEST 905 003a C
The following vector diagrams then result for a through-fault
I2 I I2
I1
= 0
HEST 905 003b C
and an internal fault

I2
I1
I2
= 180
HEST 905003c C
According to the equation for the restrain current, IH becomes: for ( = 0) :
IH = I1 x I2
: IH = 0 : IH = 0
and for internal faults a) fed from on side (I2 = 0) b) fed from both sides ( = 180)
High through-fault currents can cause CT saturation and for this reason, the gradient of the characteristic is switched to infinity for IH/IN > b. When measuring the operating characteristic, it should be noted that the gradient of the characteristic is only switched to infinity, if apart from IH, I1 and I2 are also higher than b.
3-280
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
I IN
0,75 0,5 0,25 g b

IH IN
HEST 905 003d C
0,5
1,5
Fig. 3.67
Operating characteristic of the transformer differential protection for high through-fault currents
This characteristic, however, would scarcely be able to detect faults in the protected zone at through currents as low as the load current. Therefore if one of the windings is conducting a current which is less than the setting of 'b', i.e. I I1 or 2 < b IN IN the characteristic is switched back to the gradient according to 'v'.
I IN
1 0,75 0,5 0,25 g b
IH IN
HEST 905 003e C
Fig. 3.68
Operating characteristic of the transformer differential protection for low through-fault currents
This characteristic provides higher sensitivity for the detection of faults in the protection zone.
3-281
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Example:
Internal fault and rated current flowing through the transformer:
I1 I = 4 2 =1 = 0 IN IN
-I 2 I I2
I1
HEST 905 003f C
I = I1 + I2 = 4 IN IN = 3 IN IH = I1 I2 cos = 4 IN 1IN 1 = 2 IN
Internal faults will thus be reliably detected when a through-current is flowing even at the highest setting for 'v'. Increased basic setting g-High The increased basic setting g-High has been provided as a means of preventing false tripping under particular operating conditions. It is activated by an external signal. Situations occur during normal system operation which cause a higher differential current, e.g. increased magnetising current as a consequence of a higher system voltage (switching operations, following load shedding, generator regulator faults etc.) large variation of current ratio (tap-changer at the end of its range)
Providing special conditions of this kind are detected by a voltage relay or a saturation relay, the corresponding signal can be used to switch the differential function from 'g' to 'g high'. The recommended setting is 'g high' = 0.75 IN. The reset ratio following a trip remains unchanged at 0.8 g.
Differential current I-Inst

The differential current setting 'I Inst' facilitates fast tripping of high internal fault currents (inhibits the detection of an inrush current). The setting must be higher than any normal inrush current to be expected. A typical value for power transformers of low to medium power is: I - Inst. = 12 IN.
3-282
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Pick-up ratio for detecting inrush

The setting of this ratio determines the sensitivity of the function for detecting inrush. Generally the ratio of 2nd harmonic to fundamental is greater than 15 %. Allowing a margin to ensure that an inrush condition is detected, a setting of 10 % is recommended.
Duration of active inrush detection

The setting for how long the inrush detection function should be active depends on how long the danger of false tripping due to an inrush current, which only flows through one winding, exists. A typical setting is 5 s. The inrush detection is active if: the binary input 'Inrush Input' is set, the Transformer is shut off during the period 'Inrush Time' after it is recognized that the transformer has been switched on.
The transformer will be recognized as switched on, when the highest phase current in all the windings exceeds 4 % IN (in case the 'a' factor and the reference value is one).
Amplitude compensation factors a1, a2, a3

Factors a1, a2 and a3 facilitate compensating differences between the rated currents of the protected unit and the CTs. The 'a' factors are defined by the ratio of the CT rated current to the reference current. In the case of a two-winding transformer, both windings have the same rated power and the rated current of the transformer is taken as the reference current. Providing the factor 'a' is correctly set, all the settings of g, v, b, g-High and I-Inst. are referred to the rated current of the transformer and not to the rated primary current of the CT
3-283
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
250/5 A
1 25 MVA 2
110 kV 20 kV
131 A 722 A
1000/5 A
HEST 905 004a C
IB1 = ITN1 = 131 A IB2 = ITN2 = 722 A
a1 = a1 =
ICT1 250 = = 1.91 ITN1 131 ICT 2 1000 = = 1.38 ITN2 722
The reference current is only chosen to be different from the transformer rated current, if this should be necessary because of the setting range of factors a1 and a2. Differences between the rated currents of the CTs and a two-winding transformer may also be compensated by adjusting the reference values of the A/D channels. In this case and assuming the power ratings of the two windings to be the same, the factors are set to a1 = a2 = 1. The reference values in the case of the above example are: ITN1 131 = = 0.524 ICT1 250 ITN2 722 = = 0.722 ICT 2 1000
A further difference lies in the fact that the 'a' factors only effect the differential protection, whilst changing the reference values of the A/D channels effects the currents for the entire protection system (all functions and measured variables). The windings of a three-winding transformer normally have different power ratings and a reference power has to be chosen, which is used for all three windings. All the settings of the protection are then referred to the reference currents calculated from the reference power.
3-284
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
250/5 A 25 MVA 110 kV 131 A
1 3 2
500/5 A
5 MVA 600/5 A 20 MVA
6,3 kV 20 kV
458 A 577 A
HEST 905 004b C
Assuming the reference power SB to be 25 MVA, the reference currents IB and the 'a' factors become: IB1 SB 3 UTN1 SB 3 UTN2
SB 3 UTN3
25 3 110 25 3 20
25 3 6.3
= 131 A
a1 =
ICT1 250 = = 1.91 IB1 131 ICT 2 600 = = 0.83 IB 2 722

ICT 3 500 = = 0.22 IB3 2291
IB 2
= 722 A
a2 =
IB3
= 2291 A
a3 =
The same results are obtained by applying the formulas with the reference power SB: a1 = UTN1 ICT1 SB UTN2 ICT 2 SB UTN3 ICT 3 SB 3 3 3 = 110 250 25000 20 600 25000 6.3 500 25000 3 = 1.905
a2 =
= 0.83
a3 =
= 0.218
A further possibility of compensating different rated powers in the case of three-winding transformers is to use the reference values of the A/D channels to match the protection to the different rated currents of CTs and transformer factors a1, a2 and a3 to compensate the different powers of the windings.
3-285
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The 'a' factors compensate the signals at the inputs of the differential protection. If the reference values of the A/D channels are changed, the changes apply to the entire protection system (i.e. all functions and measured variables). This can be seen from the following example. Reference values: Winding 1: Reference value = Reference value = Reference value = ITN1 131 = = 0.524 ICT1 250 ITN2 577 = = 0.962 ICT 2 600 ITN3 458 = = 0.916 ICT 3 500
Winding 2:
Winding 3:
Factors a1, a2 and a3: a1 = a2 = a3 = ITN1 131 = =1 IB1 131 ITN2 577 = = 0.799 IB 2 722 ITN3 458 = = 0.200 IB3 2291
CTs in the unit transformer feeder

When designing the overall differential protection for a generator/transformer unit, there are the following alternative methods of taking account of the CTs or lack of CTs in the unit transformer feeder (Fig. 3.69).
Alternative No.1: No CTs in the unit transformer feeder.

This alternative is mainly needed for hydroelectric power plants, which have a relatively low auxiliaries requirement. The disadvantage is that the zone of protection is unlimited in the direction of the unit transformer feeder with the possible hazard of false tripping for a fault on the unit auxiliaries supply system. This hazard can be avoided by correspondingly setting 'g'.
3-286
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
F2
Unit transformer
S aux. sys.
S GN
HEST 905 009 C
A fault on the unit auxiliaries supply system causes a current iF (in p.u.) to flow to the generator star-point. iF = iF2 Saux.sys. SGN
Example:
iF2 = 10; Saux.sys. SGN = 0.03
iF = 10 0.03 = 0.3 It follows from this that 'g' must be set higher than 0.3 to avoid the possibility of a false trip.
Alternative No. 2: CTs installed in the unit transformer feeder on the generator side of the unit transformer (Fig. 3.69). These CTs usually have the same ratio as the generator CTs although the rating of the unit transformer is much less. The reason is the high fault level on the generator side of the unit transformer and the consequentially high thermal and dynamic stress on the CTs.
The reference value of the CT channel of the protection is determined by the rated current of the generator and not of the unit transformer.
Alternative No. 3: CTs installed in the unit transformer feeder on the auxiliaries side of the unit transformer (Fig. 3.69). In this case, the CTs are specified according to the rated current of the unit transformer.
Advantages: clearly defined zone of protection reduced performance required of the CTs, which are therefore cheaper
3-287
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Disadvantages: Interposing CTs may be necessary reduced sensitivity of the protection for faults in the protected zone, but on the auxiliaries side of the unit transformer
800/5 A
3000/5 A
GT
300 MVA 220/18 kV 0.8/10 kA
UT
30 MVA 18/6 kV 1/3 kA
10/1 A
10000/5 A
I>
300 MVA 18 kV 10 kA
10000/5 A
HEST 905 054 C
Fig. 3.69
The overall differential protection of a generator/transformer unit
Group of connection of a three-phase transformer s1, s2, s3 Factor s1 defines the connection of the three phase windings 1. Factors s2 and s3 define the group of connection of windings 2 and windings 3 respectively, i.e. they define firstly how the windings are connected and secondly their phase-angle referred to windings 1. The following arrangement is an example for two generators with a common step-up transformer:
3-288
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Y 1
d11
d11
HEST 905 004c C
The factors are correspondingly: s1 = Y s2 = d11 s3 = d11 Factors s2 and s3 are defined according to their phase shift in relation to the HV side, i.e. to windings 1.
Note:
This setting for the vector group (s2 = d11, s3 = d11) assumes that in relation to the protected unit, the star-point is symmetrically formed and grounded on the secondary side of the main CTs. Should this not be possible for some reason (e.g. plant requirements), the group of connection has to be compensated.
3-289
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Compensation for group of connection

Phase-to-phase currents are measured in order to compare primary and secondary currents without regard to the circuit of the transformer. The combination of these currents internally in the protection takes account, however, of their phase relationships. The relationships between the current vectors for different groups of connection can be seen from the following illustrations. For example, for a Yd5 connected transformer
I R S T I 1R I
1R 1S
I 2R I 2S I 2T
R S T
Star-connected primary Delta-connected secondary Phase-angle between the currents of the same phase on both sides 5 x 30 = 150
I 1T
150
HEST 905 005 C
I1r (compensated) = 1 / 3 ( I1R + I1S ) I2r (compensated) = I2R
Yy0
1 R S T 2 R S T I1R I2R
Yy6
1 R S S T T 2 R I 1R
I 2R
Yd1
1 R S T 2 R S T I 1R I 2R
Yd5
1 R R S S T T I 2R 2 I 1R
Yd7
1 R S S T T I 2R 2 R I 1R
Yd11
1 R S T 2 R S T HEST 905 006 C I 2R I 1R
3-290
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Yz1
1 R S T 2 R S T I1R I 2R
Yz5
1 R R S S T T 2 I1R
I 2R
Yz7
Yz11
Dy1
Dy5
1 R S T 2 R S T
1R
2R
Dy7
Dy11
I 2R
Dd0
Dd6
1 R S T 2 R S T I1R
I2R HEST 905 007 C
Dz0
Dz2
Dz4
1 R S T R S T I 2R 2 I 1R
Dz6
1 R S T S T 2 R I1R
I2R
Dz8
1 R S S T T I 2R 2 R I1R
Dz10
1 R S T 2 R I2R S T I 1R
HEST 905 008 C
3-291
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
List of all the compensation matrices for R phase (S and T phases cyclically rotated):
Compensation matrices (R phase) A = ( 1 0 0) B = (-1 0 0) C = ( 1 -1 0) D = (-1 1 0) E = ( 1 0 -1) F = (-1 0 1) G = ( 2 -1 -1) H = (-2 1 1) J = (-1 2 -1) K = ( 1 -2 1) L = (-1 -1 2) M = ( 1 1 -2) N = ( 0 1 0) O = ( 0 -1 0) 1 1
1/ 3 1/ 3 1/ 3 1/ 3 1/3
Amplitude factor
1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1 1
Table 3.6
Compensation matrices and associated amplitude factors
a) Star connection on winding 1

Two-winding transformer: Group Yy0 Yy6 Yd1 Yd5 Yd7 Yd11 Yz1 Yz5 Yz7 Yz11 Comp. matrix Winding 1 E E E C E C E C E C Comp. matrix Winding 2 E F A B B A G H H G
3-292
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Three-winding transformer:
Compensation matrix winding 1
X X X
Compensation matrix winding 2

s3 s2
Compensation matrix winding 3 d5 d7 d11 z1 z5 z7 z11
y0
y6
d1
y0 y6 d1 d5 d7 d11 z1 z5 z7 z11
EEE EFE EAE CBC EBE CAC EGE CHC EHE CGC
EEF EFF EAF CBD EBF CAD EGF HD EHF CGD
EEA EFA EAA CBO EBA CAO EGA CHO EHA CGO
CCB CDB COB CBB CNB CAB CKB CHB CJB CGB
EEB EFB EAB CBN EBB CAN EGB CHN EHB CGN
CCA CDA COA CBA CNA CAA CKA CHA CJA CGA
EEG EFG EAG CBK EBG CAK EGG CHK EHG CGK
CCH CDH COH CBH CNH CAH CKH CHH CJH CGH
EEH EFH EAH CBJ EBH CAJ EGH CHJ EHH CGJ
CCG CDG COG CBG CNG CAG CKG CHG CJG CGG
Table 3.7
Summary of the compensation matrices for a threewinding transformer with a star connection on winding 1
b) Delta connection on winding 1

Applies for two and three-winding transformers: Group Dy1 Dy5 Dy7 Dy11 Dd0 Dd6 Dz0 Dz2 Dz4 Dz6 Dz8 Dz10 Comp. matrix Winding 1 A A A A A A A A A A A A Comp. matrix Winding 2 (and 3) C F D E A B G K L H J M
3-293
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Example:
The compensation for the currents of a three-winding transformer Yd5y0 is as follows: s1 = Y s2 = d5 s3 = y0
CBC results from Table 3.7, i.e. the
compensation matrix for winding 1
= C = (1 -1 0) (see Table 3.6) with an amplitude factor of 1 / 3 = B = (-1 0 0) (see Table 3.6) with an amplitude factor of 1 = C = (1 -1 0) (see Table 3.6) with an amplitude factor of 1/ 3
compensation matrix for winding 2 compensation matrix for winding 3
The function currents then become: Function currents (calculated) Currents measured at the CTs Ir1 1 Is1 = 3 I t1 Ir 2 Is2 = 1 I t2 Ir 3 1 Is3 = 3 I t3 1 1 0 IR1 1 1 IS1 0 1 0 1 IT1 1 0 0 IR2 0 1 0 IS2 0 0 1 I T 2 1 1 0 IR3 1 1 IS3 0 1 0 1 IT3
Winding 1:
Winding 2:
Winding 3:
3-294
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Typical values:
g v b g high I - Inst Inrush Ratio Inrush Time a1, a2, a3 s1, s2, s3 0.3 IN 0.5 1.5 0.75 IN 12 IN 10 % 5s have to be calculated depend on plant
3-295
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-296
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.22.
Generator differential (Diff-Gen)
A. Application
Differential protection of generators.
B. Features
Non-linear current-dependent tripping characteristic (see Fig. 3.70) High stability during through-faults and CT saturation Short operating times Three-phase measurement Optimised for the differential protection of generators, i.e. no inrush restraint no compensation of group of connection only two measuring inputs
Suppression of DC off-set Suppression of harmonics

Current (2 sets of 3 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Tripping R phase trip S phase trip T phase trip
IV. Measurements:
R phase summation current S phase summation current T phase summation current
3-297
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Generator differential function settings - Diff-Gen

Text Trip g - Setting v - Setting Current Inp. Chan 12 BlockInp Trip Trip-R Trip-S Trip-T AnalogAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr IN Unit Default 00000000 0.10 0.25 0 F ER 0.10 0.50 0.25 0.50 0.05 0.25 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the Tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). g - Setting Basic setting (sensitivity) g of the operating characteristic. v - Setting Pick-up ratio (slope) of the operating characteristic. Current Inp. Chan. defines the A/D input channels. The first channel (R phase) of the two groups of three phases must be specified. Block Inp Chan Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Signaling Trip Output for signalling tripping
Note:
The differential protection function does not have a pick-up signal. Every time it trips, the signal 'GenStart' is set together with 'Trip', providing the tripping command is configured to be recorded as an event. The tripping measurands will be stored in the event list only if the trip command is configured in the event list.
3-298
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Signaling Trip-R signals that tripping was initiated by R phase. Signaling Trip-S signals that tripping was initiated by S phase. Signaling Trip-T signals that tripping was initiated by T phase.
Fig. 3.70
Operating characteristic of the generator differential protection (Diff-Gen)
3-299
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Basic setting Pick-up ratio g - Setting v - Setting
The purpose of the generator differential protection is to detect phase faults in the stator zone. The protection is sensitive, fast and absolutely discriminative. Basic setting g The basic setting g defines the pick-up of the differential protection for internal faults. It is the section of the operating characteristic with a low restraint current IH. The lowest possible value should be chosen for 'g' (high sensitivity) to enable it to detect the worst case faults, e.g. when excitation is low. The protection cannot detect interturn faults on the same winding, because they do not produce a differential current. Since, however, a small differential current flows during normal operation, false tripping could result if 'g' is set too low. The spurious differential current is usually due to imbalances of CT errors and CT burdens. Allowing for an unwanted differential current, a typical setting is 0.1 IN. Higher values have to be set for 'g' should, for example, the CTs on opposite sides of the protected unit have different accuracy classes or their burdens be too high. The level of primary current at which the protection picks up depends on the relay settings and the ratio of the CTs. Assuming that there is no compensation of the A/D channels by reference value settings, it is calculated as follows: Relay setting (where IN is the relay rated current) Generator rated current CT rated current Calculated primary pick-up current (referred to the generator rated current): i= 5000 g IN1 = 0.1 = 0.125 4000 IN IGN g = 0.1 IN IGN = 4000 A IN1 = 5000 A
3-300
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Pick-up ratio v
The pick-up ratio 'v' is decisive for the stability of the protection during through-faults. This is the section of the operating characteristic with restraint currents higher than 1.5 IN. The value of 'v' defines the pick-up current ID for a restrain current IH in the moderately sloped region of the operating characteristic. In the case of generator differential protection, 'b' has a fixed setting of 1.5 (compare this with Fig. 3.67 and Fig. 3.68 for transformer differential protection). The 'v' setting should be low enough to make the protection sensitive to faults when load current is flowing, but high enough to avoid false tripping during through-faults. A typical setting is v = 0.25. A higher setting (v = 0.5) is chosen in cases where the transient behaviour of the CTs during through-faults can cause large differential currents. This is normally the result of under-sized CTs or widely differing CT burdens.
Typical settings:
g-Setting v-Setting 0.1 IN 0.25
3-301
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-302
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.23.
Frequency protection (Frequency)
A. Application
Under and overfrequency Load-shedding
B. Features
Measurement of one voltage Frequency calculation based on the complex voltage vector Insensitive to DC component Insensitive to harmonics Undervoltage blocking

Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Undervoltage blocking Start Trip
IV. Measurements:
Frequency Voltage
3-303
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Frequency function settings - Frequency

Text Trip Frequency BlockVoltage Delay MaxMin VoltageInp BlockInp Blocked (U<) Trip Start BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr ER Hz UN s Unit Default 00000000 48.00 0.20 01.00 Min CT/VT-Addr 0 F 40.00 0.20 0.10 (Select) 65.00 0.80 60.00 0.01 0.10 0.01 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping relay activated by the tripping output of the function (matrix). Frequency Operating value. Setting restrictions: underfrequency not fN overfrequency not fN Block Voltage Peak value of the voltage for blocking. (reset ratio approx. 1.05) Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. Max / Min defines operation as overfrequency or underfrequency. Settings: Max: Overfrequency Min: Underfrequency Voltage Inp. Chan. defines the voltage input channel. All voltage inputs may be selected. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-304
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Blocked (U<) Signal defines the output for signalling blocking by undervoltage (signal address). Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.
There are often several stages of frequency protection using several single-stage relays.
Settings:
Frequency Delay Undervoltage blocking Under or over frequency Frequency Delay Block Voltage Max / Min
Frequency protection is used either to protect synchronous machines and prime-movers against the effects of operating at under or overfrequency or for load-shedding in the event of an overload. The adverse effects in the former case prevented by the frequency protection are: excessive temperature rise and additional iron losses in the generator damage to the generator and the prime-mover by vibration
Some synchronous machines are subject to severe vibration if they are operated at speeds other than their rated speed. Vibration occurs more usual at speeds below rated frequency, but can occur both above and below. A complete scheme often comprises therefore 4 stages, two for alarm and tripping for overfrequency and two for alarm and tripping for underfrequency. Tripping is delayed to avoid the risk of maloperation during transients.
3-305
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Typical settings:
1. Protection of machines
1st stage Alarm Frequency (Hz) Delay (s) Block Voltage Max / Min 51.0 1.5 0.6 Max 2nd stage Tripping 52.0 3 0.6 Max 3rd stage Alarm 49.0 1.5 0.6 Min 4th stage Tripping 48.0 3 0.6 Min
Table 3.8
Typical settings for alarm and tripping stages
2. Load-shedding
1st stage Alarm Frequency (Hz) 49.8 Delay (s) Block Voltage Max / Min 0.5 0.6 Min 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage
Load-shed. Alarm 49.0 0.0 0.6 Min 48.7 0.0 0.6 Min
Load-shed. Load-shed. 48.8 0.0 0.6 Min 47.5 0.0 0.6 Min
Table 3.9
Typical settings for alarm and tripping stages
3-306
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.24.
Rate-of-change of frequency protection (df/dt)
A. Application
Static, dynamic and adaptive load shedding in power utility and industrial distribution systems Generator protection
B. Features
One phase voltage as input variable Supervises the rate-of-change df/dt of the frequency Provision for enabling by absolute frequency Insensitive to DC component Insensitive to harmonics and other high-frequency signals Undervoltage blocking

Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Blocked by undervoltage Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Rate-of-change of frequency Absolute frequency Voltage amplitude
3-307
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Rate-of-change frequency settings df/dt

Text Trip df/dt Frequency Block Voltage Delay Voltage Inp. Chan. Block Input Blocked (U<) Signal Trip Signal Hz/s Hz UN s
CT/VT-Addr.
Unit
Default 00000000 -1.0 48.00 0.2 0.10 0 F ER
Min.
Max.
Step
-10.0 40.00 0.2 0.10
+10.0 65.00 0.8 60.00
0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01
BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping O/P of the function (matrix tripping logic). df/dt Rate-of-change of frequency pick-up setting. Inadmissible settings: df/dt = 0 df/dt > 0 for absolute frequency settings < fN df/dt < 0 for absolute frequency settings > fN Frequency Setting of the absolute frequency enabling criterion. Operation for overfrequency or underfrequency is determined by the absolute frequency setting: Underfrequency for frequency settings < fN Overfrequency for frequency settings > fN The absolute frequency criterion is disabled for a setting of 'Frequency' = 0. In this case, tripping is dependent solely on the rate-of-change setting df/dt. Inadmissible settings: Frequency = fN Frequency < fN 10 Hz Frequency > fN + 5 Hz Block Voltage Pick-up setting for undervoltage blocking (reset ratio approx. 1.05, reset time approx. 0.1 s).
3-308
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Delay Delay from the instant the function picks up to the generation of a tripping command. Voltage Inp. Chan. defines the voltage input channel. All voltage inputs may be selected with the exception of the special voltage inputs for the 100% ground stator fault protection. Block Input defines the input for an external blocking signal. F: enabled T: disabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Blocked (U<) Signal signals when the function is blocked by the undervoltage criterion. Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping.
3-309
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Several rate-of-change of frequency stages are often needed and the additional stages are achieved by configuring the function as many times as is necessary.
Settings:
Rate-of-change of frequency Absolute frequency Undervoltage Delay df/dt Frequency Block Voltage Delay
The rate-of-change of frequency function only trips when the rate-ofchange is higher than setting, the absolute frequency criterion picks up and the voltage is not lower than the undervoltage setting. The additional absolute frequency criterion prevents unwanted operation of the rate-of-change function during power system transients. Where it is desired that the rate-of-change function should operate without regard to the absolute frequency, this is achieved by setting the absolute frequency criterion to '0'.
3-310
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.25.
Overfluxing (Overexcitat)
A. Application
Protection of generators and power transformers against excessive flux.
B. Features
Evaluation of the voltage/frequency ratio Single-phase measurement Definite time delay Determination of frequency from the complex voltage vector Insensitive to DC components Insensitive to harmonics Over or underexcitation mode

Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Voltage / frequency Frequency
3-311
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Overfluxing function settings - Overexcitat

Text Trip Delay V/f - Setting Max / Min Voltage Inp. Chan. BlockInp Trip Start CT/VT-Addr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr s UN/fN Unit Default 00000000 1.00 1.20 MAX 0 F ER 0.10 0.20 (Select) 60.00 2.00 0.01 0.01 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). Delay time delay between pick-up and tripping. V/f - Setting Setting of the voltage/frequency ratio for tripping. Max / Min defines operation as overfluxing or underfluxing. Settings: Max: overfluxing Min: underfluxing Voltage Inp. Chan. defines the VT input channel. All voltage inputs may be selected. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: Not blocked T: Blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.
3-312
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Magnetic flux Delay Over/underfluxing V/f - Setting Delay Max / Min
The overfluxing function is primarily intended to protect the iron cores of power transformers. Tripping by the function is delayed to avoid false operation during system transients such as load shedding. The magnetic flux is not measured directly. Instead the voltage/frequency ratio which is proportional to the flux and easier to measure is monitored. Overfluxing can result from either an increase of system voltage or a reduction of system frequency. For example, 10 % overfluxing at constant frequency is equivalent to increasing the value of the U/f ratio to 1.1 UN/fN.
Typical settings:
V/f - Setting Delay Max / Min 1.1 UN/fN 5s Max
3-313
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-314
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.26.
Inverse time overfluxing (U/f-Inv)
A. Application
Protection of generators and power transformers against excessive flux, especially in heavily loaded non-laminated metal parts, and the associated excessive heating of the unit.
B. Features
Evaluation of the voltage/frequency ratio Single-phase measurement Inverse time delay according to U/f ratio Determination of frequency from the complex voltage vector Insensitive to DC components Insensitive to harmonics Delay determined by integrating function response Input of delay table facilitates matching the operating characteristic to a specific machine according to IEEE Guideline C 37.91-1985 Adjustable rate of counting backwards when the overfluxing disappears

Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Voltage/frequency Frequency
3-315
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Inverse time overfluxing function settings - U/f-Inv

Text Trip UB-Setting U/f-Setting t-min t-max t-Reset t [U/f=1.05] t [U/f=1.10] t [U/f=1.15] t [U/f=1.20] t [U/f=1.25] t [V/f=1.30] t [u/f=1.35] t [U/f=1.40] t [U/f=1.45] t [U/f=1.50] VoltageInput Chan. Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal UN UB/fN min min min min min min min min min min min min min BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Unit Default 00000000 1.00 1.10 0.20 60.0 60.0 70.00 70.00 06.00 01.00 00.480 00.300 00.220 00.170 00.140 00.140 F ER 0.80 1.05 0.01 5.0 0.2 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1.20 0.01 1.20 0.01 2.00 0.01 100 100 100 100 100 100 30 30 30 30 30 30 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Min. Max Step .
CT/VT-Addr 0
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (matrix). UB - Setting Reference (base) voltage for compensating a difference between the VT rating and the rating of the generator or transformer. U/f - Setting Voltage/frequency ratio setting referred to UB / fN.
3-316
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
t - min Minimum operating time after being enabled regardless of inverse characteristic. Operating characteristic constant. t - max Maximum operating time after being enabled regardless of inverse characteristic. Operating characteristic constant. t - Reset Time taken to reset (from the operating point). This corresponds to the time taken by the generator to cool. t[U/f = 1.05] ... t[U/f = 1.50] Table of 10 values (data input) for defining a specific inverse operating characteristic. Voltage Input Chan. defines the VT input channel. All voltage inputs may be selected. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: Not blocked T: Blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.
3-317
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Magnetic flux for enabling char. Reference value Minimum operating time Maximum operating time 10 values defining the inverse time operating characteristic Reset time U/f - Setting UB-Setting t - Min t - Max t[U/f = 1.05] ... t[U/f = 1.50] t - Reset
The overfluxing function protects the iron cores of generators and power transformers against excessive flux. The magnetic flux is not measured directly. Instead the voltage/frequency ratio which is proportional to the flux and easier to measure is monitored. Overfluxing can result from either an increase of system voltage or a reduction of system frequency. For example, 10 % overfluxing at constant frequency is equivalent to increasing the value of the U/f ratio to 1.1 UB /fN. The limit curve for the maximum magnetic flux (U/f) permissible for electrical machines is defined in standards data supplied by manufacturers
The limit curve for Westinghouse machines is given in Fig. 3.71. The operating characteristic of the U/f-Inv protection function should be selected to be just below the short-time limit curve for overfluxing. The time limits t-min and t-max must also be set (see Fig. 3.72). It must also be noted that depending on the standard or specification, the units are also designed for a continuous level of overfluxing apart from the short-time level. Typical values for generators would be 100, 105, 107.5 and 110%. The choice of characteristic must also take the continuous level of overfluxing into consideration.
3-318
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Providing compensation using the reference value of the A/D channel has not been made, the reference voltage UB for the protection is calculated from transformer rated voltage UTN and the VT rated voltages UN1 and UN2 as follows:
UB = U TN
U N2 U N1
The setting is the ratio UB/UN, where UN is the rated voltage of the protection, otherwise 'UB-Setting' would be 1.0 UN. The overfluxing curve of the generator must be known in order to set the times t-min and t-max and enter the table of 10 values t [U/f = 1.05] ... t [U/f = 1.50].
Typical settings:
U/f-Setting UB-Setting t-min t-max t [U/f = 1.05...1.50] t-Reset 1.1 UB/fN according to protected unit 0.2 min 60 min according to protected unit1) according to protected unit
A-Westinghouse-transformers B-Westinghouse-generators
140
135
Permissible overfluxing [%]
130
125
120
B
115
110
110%
105
105% continuous 200
100 .1 .2 .5 1.0 2 5 10 20 50 100
t [min]
HEST 935 004 FL
Fig. 3.71
Permissible overfluxing when off-load
1)
Refer to Fig. 3.73 for typical settings for a Westinghouse unit. 3-319
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
300
50 60
100
t-max
t-min
125
120
105
Fig. 3.72
Operating characteristic for a generator with a permissible continuous voltage in the range 100 5 % UN
3-320
100
130
115
110
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 0.6
10
20
30
40
t [min]
HEST 935 023 FL
200
Overfluxing [%]
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
% [VB/fN]
150
ABB Switzerland Ltd
145
140
135
130
125
120
Permissible short-time overfluxing Approximation according to table
115
V/f-Setting
110
105 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 1.0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60
t-min
Time in minutes
t-max
HEST 935 024 C
Fig. 3.73
Example of an overfluxing curve
Applications for Power Transformers (IEEE C37.91-1985)

150 3 140 1 2 130
% V O L T S / H z
120
110
100 Data on overfluxing limits must be requested from the various suppliers 90 0.01 0.1 1.0 Minutes HEST 935 025 C 10 100 1000
Fig. 3.74
Transformer overfluxing limits of three manufacturers
3-321
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-322
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.27.
Balanced voltage (Voltage-Bal)
A. Application
Monitoring/comparison of two groups of single or three-phase voltage inputs to detect voltage measurement errors.
B. Features
Comparison of the amplitudes of two groups of voltage inputs (e.g. line 1and line 2) Single or three-phase voltage measurement Indication of group with the lower voltage Evaluation of voltage balance per phase in the three-phase mode with selection by OR gate for tripping Adjustable delays for operation and reset Insensitive to DC components Insensitive to harmonics

Voltage (2 sets of 1 or 3 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping Line 1 trip (voltage input U1) Line 2 trip (voltage input U2)
IV. Measurements:
Single-phase mode Difference between voltage amplitudes (U1 - U2) Three-phase mode Voltage amplitude difference for R phase (U1R - U2R) Voltage amplitude difference for S phase (U1S - U2S) Voltage amplitude difference for T phase (U1T - U2T)
3-323
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Balanced voltage function settings - Voltage-Bal

Text Trip V - Unbalance Delay t-Reset Number Of Phases Voltage Input Line1 Voltage Input Line 2 Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal Trip Line1 Signal Trip Line Signal 2 UN s s s AnalogAddr AnalogAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Unit Default 00000000 0.20 0.04 1.50 3 Ph 0 0 F ER ER 0.10 0.00 0.10 (Select) 0.50 1.00 2.00 0.05 0.01 0.01 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). V - Unbalance Voltage difference setting for tripping. Difference between the amplitudes of the two voltage input channels which results in tripping. The setting applies to all three phases in the three-phase mode. Delay time delay between pick-up and tripping. t-Reset Time required for the measurement to reset after the tripping condition has disappeared (reset ratio: 0.90). Number Of Phases defines whether single or three-phase measurement. Voltage Input Line1 defines the 1st analog voltage input channel U1 (line 1). In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. Voltage Input Line 2 defines the 2nd analog voltage input channel U2 (line 2). In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified.
3-324
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: Not blocked T: Blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up. Trip Line 1 Signal Same as Trip, but only if the amplitude of the voltage at input U1 is less than that at input U2 (determination of the voltage difference per phase in the three-phase mode). Trip Line 2 Signal Same as Trip, but only if the amplitude of the voltage at input U2 is less than that at input U1 (determination of the voltage difference per phase in the three-phase mode).
U 2R
1 x UN
Operates Line 1 (U 1 < U 2 ) Restrains
U1R: R phase voltage amplitude of voltage channel 1 (line 1) U2R: R phase voltage amplitude of voltage channel 2 (line 2) Three-phase mode: The characteristic applies accordingly to S and T phases
U 1R
0,8
0,2
Operates Line 2 (U 2 < U 1 ) 0,2 0,8 1 x UN
HEST 915 009 C
Fig. 3.75
Operating characteristic of the balanced voltage function (show for R phase and the setting V - Unbalance = 0.2 UN)
3-325
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Max. voltage difference Delay Reset delay V - Unbalance Delay t-Reset
The balanced voltage function is intended mainly for detecting voltage measurement errors by other devices. It compares the voltages (amplitudes) of two generally identical voltage sources connected to the same busbar phase-by-phase. The function picks up when the difference between voltages of the same phase exceeds a set pick-up value (V - Unbalance). A tripping signal is emitted for the source with the lower voltage (Trip Line 1 Signal or Trip Line 2 Signal) and a general tripping signal (Trip) generated after a set time delay (Delay), providing the tripping condition remains fulfilled throughout the delay time. These signals are available for blocking protection and instrumentation connected to the faulty source and thus prevent false tripping or measurements. The tripping signals are maintained for the setting of the reset time (t-Reset) after the tripping condition is no longer fulfilled. The function is thus suitable for detecting VT circuit faults (fuse failure) and faults on the protection and metering circuits connected to them.
3-326
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Notes:
Only the voltages of similar sources that have coincident amplitudes and phase-angles and are connected to the same busbar should be compared.
To prevent false tripping during extreme variations of frequency, either the pick-up setting can be increased or the balanced voltage function can be blocked by a frequency function. Differing primary rated voltages of the VTs can be compensated by appropriately setting the reference values of the corresponding A/D channels. The adjusted reference values then apply for all the protection functions connected to the same channels.
Application example:
R S T V.t. 1
Line 1
U 1R U 1S U 1T
Protection/ instrumentation equipment 1
Voltage input channel (U1 )
Blocking input TRIP-Line 1
Blocking input
Voltage comparsion function (three-phase) TRIP-Line 2

Voltage input channel (U2 )
TRIP
Blocking input
V.t. 2
U 2R U 2S U 2T Line 2
Protection/ instrumentation equipment 2
HEST 915 010 C
Fig. 3.76
Three-phase balanced voltage scheme (one measured voltage failed)
3-327
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The protection monitors the voltages of the two VTs 1 and 2: In the event of a fault (in this example an open-circuit lead in the circuit of VT 1), the protection function detects an unbalance and after the set delay time generates the tripping signals 'Trip' and 'Trip-Line1'. These then initiate blocking of the metering and protection devices (such as underimpedance, voltage-controlled overcurrent and distance protections etc.) connected to VT 1.
Typical settings:
Max. voltage difference (V - Unbalance) Delay Reset time (t-Reset) 0.20 UN 0.04 s 0.50 s
3-328
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.28.
Underimpedance (Underimped)
A. Application
Back-up phase fault protection for the generator feeder.
B. Features
Circular operating characteristic (see Fig. 3.77) Adjustable time delay Insensitive to DC component in voltage and current Insensitive to harmonics in voltage and current Single or three-phase measurement Detection of the lowest impedance in the three-phase mode Underimpedance measurement enabled by undercurrent unit (0.1 IN)

Current Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Impedance (value)
3-329
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Underimpedance function settings - Underimped

Text Trip Delay Z Setting Number Of Phases Current Inp. Chan. Voltage Inp. Chan. Block Input Start Out AnalogAddr AnalogAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr s UN/IN Unit Default 00000000 00.50 0.250 001 0 0 F ER ER 0.20 0.025 1 60.00 2.500 3 0.01 0.001 1 Min. Max. Step
SignalingTrip SignalAddr
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. Z Setting Pick-up impedance setting. Number Of Phases defines whether single or three-phase measurement. Current Inp. Chan. defines the analog current input channel. All current inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. Voltage Inp. Chan. defines the analog voltage input channel. All voltage inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (e.g. the phase-to-phase voltage R-S) of the group of three selected must be specified. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function)
3-330
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Signaling Trip Output for signalling tripping. Start Out Output for signalling pick-up.
Fig. 3.77
Operating characteristic of the underimpedance function
3-331
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Impedance Delay Z Setting Delay
The underimpedance function serves as back-up protection for phase faults on the generator/transformer unit. It is faster and more sensitive than the overcurrent protection. Its disadvantage is that the zone of protection is shorter than the differential protection, which serves as the main protection. The underimpedance scheme is connected to the CTs at the generator star-point and to the VTs at the generator terminals. The underimpedance operating characteristic is a circle in the R/X plane, whereby the origin represents the location of the VTs. The zone of protection covers the generator windings the cables and the step-up transformer. The setting of the underimpedance function is determined by the shortcircuit reactance of the step-up transformer. Otherwise, the distance between the step-up transformer and the HV circuit-breaker is mostly too short to be able to discriminate reliably with the impedance setting between faults in the generator/transformer unit zone and faults on the other side of the HV circuit-breaker. The impedance is thus set to 70 % of the transformer impedance which at least includes the transformer winding on the generator side in the zone of protection. The setting of the underimpedance function is referred to rated voltage and current. The impedance of the protected zone is determined by the short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer and is given by: z1 = 0.7 xT [p.u.]
The impedance seen by the underimpedance function depends on the CT and VT ratios Ki and Ku and the rated data of step-up transformer and protection: I K i = N1 IN2 Ku = UN1 UN2
3-332
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Step-up transformer GT
Protection zone I>
Z<
HEST 905 019 C
Fig. 3.78
Underimpedance protection
3-333
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The impedance to be set on the protection in p.u. is: Z-Setting = 0.7 xT or Z-Setting = 0.7 xT UTN IN1 UN2 I N ITN IN2 UN1 UN ITN = IN1, [1; 1; V; A] UTN K i I N ITN K u UN [1; 1; V; A]
For simple cases where UTN = UN1, and IN2 = IN: Z-Setting = 0.7 xT [1; 1] where: z1 xT Ki, Ku IN1, IN2 UN1, UN2 UTN, ITN UN, IN
UN2 = UN
impedance of the protected zone short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer ratios of CTs and VTs CT rated currents VT rated voltages rated voltage and current of the step-up transformer rated voltage and current of the underimpedance function
The factor of 0.7 avoids any risk of false tripping for a fault on the HV system at the cost of a zone of protection that is shorter than differential protection zone.
Example:
Transformer: CTs and VTs: Protection: 100 MVA; 12 kV; 12000/100 V; 100 V; 5A 4.8 kA; xT = 0.1
5000/5 A
I 5000 = 1000 K i = N1 = IN2 5 Ku = UN1 12000 = = 120 UN2 100
3-334
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Settings:
Z Setting = 0.7 x T
U TN K I i N I TN Ku U N
Z Setting = 0.7 0.1
12 1000 5 = 0.073 4.8 120 100
It must not be forgotten that a current of at least 0.1 IN must flow before the underimpedance function is enabled. Typical settings: Z Setting Delay 0.07 0.5 s
x +0.07
0 r
Z-Setting -0.07
HEST 935 003 C
Fig. 3.79
Operating characteristic of the underimpedance function Setting: Z Setting = 0.07
3-335
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-336
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.29.
Loss Of Excitation (MinReactance)
A. Application
Detection of inadmissible operating conditions due to underexcitation of a synchronous generator.
B. Features
Circular operating characteristic (see Fig. 3.80) Selectable to operate inside or outside the circle Adjustable size and position of the operating characteristic Correction of phase errors caused by input circuit Adjustable time delay Insensitive to DC component in voltage and current Insensitive to harmonics in voltage and current Single or three-phase measurement Detection of the lowest impedance (distance from the centre of the circle) Underreactance measurement enabled by undercurrent unit (0.1 IN)

Current Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Impedance (distance from the centre of the circle)
3-337
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Underreactance function settings - MinReactance

Text Trip Delay XA-Setting XB-Setting Angle Max / Min Number Of Phases Current Inp. Chan. Voltage Inp. Chan. Block Input Signaling Trip Start Out AnalogAddr AnalogAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr s UN/IN UN/IN deg Unit Default 00000000 0.50 -2.00 -0.50 0 Min 1 Ph 0 0 F ER 0.20 -5.00 -2.50 -180 (Select) (Select) 60.00 00.00 +2.50 180 0.01 0.01 0.01 5 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. XA-Setting defines the first intersection of the impedance circle with the reactance axis (assuming a phase correction setting of 0). Setting restriction: |XA| < |XB|. XB-Setting defines the second intersection of the impedance circle with the reactance axis (assuming a phase correction setting of 0). Angle For compensating phase errors of the analog input signals caused by the input circuit. The setting can also be used to move the position of the impedance circle. Max / Min defines whether over or underreactance function. Settings: Min: underreactance function with tripping inside the circle Max: overreactance function with tripping outside the circle Number Of Phases defines whether single or three-phase measurement.
3-338
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Current Inp. Chan. defines the A/D input channel. All current inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. Voltage Inp. Chan. defines the A/D input channel. All voltage inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (e.g. the phase-to-phase voltage R-S) of the group of three selected must be specified. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Signaling Trip Output for signalling tripping. Start Out Output for signalling pick-up.
Fig. 3.80
Operating characteristic of the underreactance function with MaxMin = Min (default)
3-339
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Reactance XA Reactance XB Phase correction Delay Integrator (separate 'Delay' function) XA-Setting XB-Setting Angle Delay Trip-Delay Reset-Delay
Operating principle of the underreactance function

The underreactance or underexcitation function protects the generator in potentially dangerous operating conditions which can arise in the event of loss of, or reduced excitation. There is a danger in such situations of the unit becoming unstable and running out of synchronism. This causes thermal stress due to induced currents on the one hand, and mechanical stress due to surges of torque on the other. It is general knowledge that a synchronous machine may not be loaded as much capacitively as inductively, because excessive capacitive load causes it to drop out-of-step. The reason is the steadystate stability limit as defined by the load angle = 90, which can only be reached when the unit is underexcited, i.e. for a capacitive power factor . When the voltage is measured at the generator terminals, the locus of the stability limit of a generator/transformer set is a circle as shown in Fig. 3.82. The circle encloses the operating points of an underexcited generator down to the extreme point XA which represents total loss of excitation. The protection has a circular characteristic that does not normally coincide with the stability limit at the top to avoid false tripping during voltage dips caused by power system faults. Operation of the function is delayed to allow for possible recovery of synchronism following dynamic phenomena with brief load angles of > 90. A typical setting for the time delay is 2 s. The scheme includes an integrator (separate 'Delay' function) to maintain the underexcitation signal in the event of power swings. This is necessary because the normal 'Delay' setting repeatedly resets during power swings and prevents tripping from taking place.
3-340
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Determining the characteristic

The circular operating characteristic of the protection is defined by the two points A and B. Point A is given in the case of turboalternators by the unsaturated synchronous reactance xd and in the case of generators with salient poles by the synchronous reactance xq. As can be seen from Fig. 3.81, the stability of a generator with salient poles is given by xq, because the load angle is also determined by this reactance. The steady-state stability limit is reach at this point when excitation is lost. Point B is defined as half the transient reactance xd' and determined by the voltage and current measured at the generator terminals when the unit is out-of-step and the generator is in phase opposition to the power system. a) Turboalternator
xd e i
- phase-angle - load angle

u
< u, I < u, e
i
HEST 905 018 C
b) Salient pole generator

e xq xd i u i
HEST 905 018 C
Fig. 3.81
Vector diagram of an overexcited generator. Voltages, currents and reactances are in p.u.
3-341
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The reactances XA and XB, are defined according to the phase-tophase voltages and calculated for turboalternators as follows: XA = xd UGN 3IGN Ki Ku 3 3
x ' U K XB = d GN i 2 3IGN K u
In the above equation, xq is replaced by xd for salient pole units. I K i = N1 IN2 UN1 I K u = 3 = N1 UN2 IN2 3
where: xd, xd' xq UGN, IGN Ki Ku UN1, UN2 IN1, IN2 unsaturated synchronous reactance and saturated transient reactance of the generator in p.u. synchronous reactance in p.u. rated generator voltage and current CT ratio VT ratio VT rated voltages CT rated currents
3-342
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Example:
Turboalternator 100 MVA; 12 kV; xd = 2.0; UN1 12000 Ku = 3 = = 120 UN2 100 3 Ki = 5000 =5000 1 12000 3 4800 5000 120 3 = 208.3 4.8 kA xd' = 0.25
VTs
CTs
XA = xd
UGN 3 IGN
Ki Ku
3 = 2.0
XB =
xd ' UGN K i 2 3 IGN K u
3=
0.25 2
12000 3 4800
5000 120
3 = 13.02
The reactance settings referred to the protection ratings UN and IN become: 208.3 XA 1 = 2.08 IN = 100 UN 13.02 XB 1 = 0.130 = 0.13 IN = 100 UN
XA Wert =
XB Wert =
3-343
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Phase correction
The scheme can include one to three independent measuring systems, each of which is connected to a phase-to-phase voltage and a phase current. For example, there are three possible reference voltages for the R phase measuring system, i.e. URS, UST and UTR. Since, however, all the measuring systems need the angle of their own phase, i.e. for R phase the angle of the voltage UR, the angle of the voltage signal has to be corrected in any event.
Reference voltage
Vector diagram R U RS
Phase compensation "Angle"
RS T R ST *) T U ST S S
+30
-90
TR
*)
U TR
R +150
S
HEST 905023 C
*) single-phase measurement only
The phase compensation can also be used when the characteristic needs to be shifted by a given angle or flipped over into the inductive region, e.g. for test purposes. The phase angle compensation have to be considered as per the connection diagrams illustrated in Fig. 12.4. If the star-point of the CT secondaries on the generator star-point side is grounded, an angle of 180 must be added.
3-344
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Typical settings:
XA-Setting according to application e.g. -2.0 XB-Setting according to application e.g. -0.13 Phase-angle Tripping delay timer: Delay or separate integrator ('Delay' function): Trip-Delay Reset-Delay
Step-up transformer US xd xT
(delta-connected VTs) +30 2s 6s 3s
x d - generator synchronous reactance [p.u.] x T - transformater short-circuit reactance [p.u.]
Steady-state stability limit curve
xT x' d 2
0
XB-Setting r
xd
Characteristic of the underexcitation function
XA-Setting
XA set XB set
settings [UN / IN ]
HEST 905 021 C
Fig. 3.82
Setting the characteristic of the underexcitation function according to the steady-state stability limit curve of the generator/transformer set All reactances in p.u.
3-345
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
tR
tR
tR
tR
Pick-up 0
"TRIP-Delay" setting t int
Integration 0
Trip 0
HEST 935 017 C
tint tR
integrated time reset time
Fig. 3.83
Underreactance protection Effect of the integrator during power swings
3-346
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Display of measured variable:

The display of the measured variable in the case of the underreactance protection is an impedance vector which starts at the centre of the circular characteristic. This vector and the vector of the impedance measured at the generator terminals form a triangle as shown in Fig. 3.84. The protection picks up, if the displayed impedance equals or is less than the radius of the circle: z 1 X ' xd d 2 2
Example:
xd = 2; Xd' = 0,2 1 z (2 0.1) = 0.95 2
x U I z
X d'
xd
HEST 905 034 C
Fig. 3.84
Display of the impedance measured by the underreactance function
3-347
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-348
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.30.
Stator overload (OLoad-Stator)
A. Application
Overload protection for the stators of large generators.
B. Features
Delay inversely proportional to overload (see Fig. 3.85) Operating characteristic according to ASA-C50.13 (American Standard Requirements for Cylindrical-Rotor Synchronous Generators) with extended setting range Adjustable rate of counting backwards when the overload disappears (cooling rate of thermal image) Insensitive to DC components Insensitive to harmonics Single or three-phase measurement Detection of highest phase in the three-phase mode

Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
3-349
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Overload function settings - OLoad-Stator

Text Trip K1 Setting I - Start t - min tg t - max t - Reset Number Of Phases Current Input Channel AnalogAddr IB - Setting Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal IN BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr s IB s s s s Unit Default 00000000 41.4 1.10 10.0 120.0 300.0 120.0 3 Ph 0 1.00 F ER ER 0.50 2.50 0.01 1.0 1.00 1.0 10.0 100.0 10.0 (Select) 120.0 1.60 120.0 2000.0 2000.0 2000.0 0.1 0.01 0.1 10.0 10.0 10.0 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). K1 Setting Multiplier. Operating characteristic constant. I - Start Enabling current for operating characteristic. t - min Minimum operating time. Operating characteristic constant. tg Time during which the inverse characteristic is active. Operating characteristic constant. This must not exceed the maximum delay time. t - max Maximum delay after being enabled regardless of inverse characteristic. Operating characteristic constant. t - Reset Time taken to reset (from the operating limit). This corresponds to the time taken by the generator to cool.
3-350
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Number Of Phases defines whether single or three-phase measurement. Current Input Channel defines the analog current input channel. All current inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel of the group of three selected must be specified. IB-Setting Reference (base) current for compensating a difference in relation to IN. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.
Fig. 3.85
Operating characteristic of the stator overload function
3-351
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Reference current Enabling current Multiplier Minimum operating time Time inverse characteristic effective Maximum delay Resetting time IB - Setting I - Start K1 Setting t - min tg t - max t - Reset
The stator overload function protects stator windings against excessive temperature rise as a result of overcurrents. The function is applicable to turbo-alternators designed according to the American standard ASA-C50.13 or a similar standard defining overload capability. Providing compensation using the reference value of the A/D channel has not been made, the reference current IB for the protection is calculated from the generator load current IB1, which is usually the same as the generator rated current, and the CT rated currents IN1 and IN2 as follows:
IB = IB1
IN2 IN1
The setting is the ratio IB/IN, where IN is the rated current of the protection, otherwise 'IB - Setting' would be 1.0 IN. The multiplier k1 is 41.4 s for units designed according to ASA. For units with a similar overload capacity: k1 = m n n [s; s; K]
where: m n : thermal time constant of the stator : maximum permissible temperature rise of the stator winding : rated temperature rise of the stator winding
3-352
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Example:
m n k1 = = = = 5 min or 300 s 70 K 60 K 300 7060 = 50 s 60
Typical settings:
IB-Setting I-Start K1 - Setting t - min tg t - max t - Reset according to protected unit 1.1 IB 41.4 s 10.0 s 120.0 s 300.0 s 120.0 s
3-353
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-354
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.31.
Rotor overload (OLoad-Rotor)
A. Application
Overload protection for the rotors of large generators.
B. Features
Delay inversely proportional to overload (see Fig. 3.86) Operating characteristic according to ASA-C50.13 (American Standard Requirements for Cylindrical-Rotor Synchronous Generators) with extended setting range Adjustable rate of counting backwards when the overload disappears (cooling rate of thermal image) Three-phase measurement Current measurement three-phases of AC excitation supply evaluation of the sum of the three phases (instantaneous values without digital filtering)

Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
3-355
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Overload function settings - OLoad-Rotor

Text Trip K1 Setting I - Start t - min Tg t - max t - Reset Current Input Channel IB - Setting Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal s IB s s s s AnalogAddr IN BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Unit Default 00000000 33.8 1.10 10.0 120.0 300.0 120.0 0 1.00 F ER ER 0.50 2.50 0.01 1.0 1.00 1.0 10.0 100.0 10.0 50.0 1.60 120.0 2000.0 2000.0 2000.0 0.1 0.01 0.1 10.0 10.0 10.0 Min. Max. Step
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). K1 Setting Multiplier. Operating characteristic constant. I - Start Enabling current for operating characteristic. t - min Minimum operating time. Operating characteristic constant. tg Time during which the inverse characteristic is active. Operating characteristic constant. This must not exceed the maximum delay time. t - max Maximum delay after being enabled regardless of inverse characteristic. Operating characteristic constant. t - Reset Time taken to reset (from the operating limit). This corresponds to the time taken by the machine to cool.
3-356
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Current Input Channel defines the analog current input channel. All current inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel of the group of three selected must be specified. IB - Setting Reference (base) current for compensating a difference in relation to IN. Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not blocked T: blocked xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling pick-up.
Fig. 3.86
Operating characteristic of the rotor overload function
3-357
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Reference current Enabling current Multiplier Minimum operating time Time inverse characteristic effective Maximum delay Resetting time IB - Setting I - Start K1 Setting t - min tg t - max t - Reset
The rotor overload function protects the rotor winding of generators against excessive temperature rise as a result of overcurrents. The function is applicable to turbo-alternators designed according to the American standard ASA-C50.13 or a similar standard defining overload capability. It is connected to CTs in the AC excitation supply. It may nor be used for brushless excitation systems. Providing compensation using the reference value of the A/D channel has not been made, the reference current IB for the protection is calculated from the AC load current IB1 of the excitation supply which is usually the same as the full load excitation current and the CT rated currents IN1 and IN2 as follows:
IB = IB1
IN2 IN1
The setting is the ratio IB/IN, IN being the rated current of the protection. The multiplier k1 is 33.8 s for units designed according to ASA. For units with a similar overload capacity: k1 = m n n [s; s; K]
where: m n : thermal time constant of the rotor : maximum permissible temperature rise of the rotor winding : rated temperature rise of the rotor winding
3-358
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Typical settings:
IB - Setting I - Start K1 Setting t - min tg t - max t - Reset according to protected unit 1.1 IB 33.8 s 10.0 s 120.0 s 300.0 s 120.0 s
3-359
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-360
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.32.
Stator ground fault (Stator-EFP)
A. Application
Ground fault protection function for detecting ground faults close to the star-point of a generator. The scheme is based on the principle of biasing the potential of the generator star-point by injecting a coded low-frequency signal. The injection signal is generated by the injection unit REX 010 and fed into the stator circuit by the injection transformer block REX 011. In conjunction with the voltage function 'Voltage' that covers 95 % of the winding, this protection completes detection of ground faults over 100 % of the winding. Compensation is provided for the influence of a second high-resistance grounded star-point in the zone of protection. Stator ground faults producing a current at the star-point > 5 A cause the P8 contactor to reset which separates the injection unit Type REX 010 from the injection transformer block REX 011 and interrupts injection in both stator and rotor circuits. The 95 % stator ground fault protection then clears the fault on its own.
B. Features
Protects the star-point and a part of the stator winding depending on the ground fault current. The entire winding is protected when the generator is stationary. Biases the star-point in relation to ground by injecting a signal generated in the REX 010 unit Computes the ground fault resistance Monitors the amplitude and frequency of the injection signal Monitors the measuring circuit with respect to open-circuit and correct connection of the grounding resistor

Voltage (2 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking 2nd parallel star-point MTR adjustment REs adjustment
3-361
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

Alarm stage pick-up Alarm Trip stage pick-up Trip 2nd parallel star-point MTR adjustment active REs adjustment active Injection open-circuit internally Injection open-circuit externally
IV. Measurements:
Ground fault resistance Rfs Measurement transformer ratio MTR Grounding resistor REs
Explanation of measurements:
Rfs: Ground fault resistances between 0 and 29.8 k can be determined and displayed. A display of 29.9 k or 30 k indicates a ground fault resistance >29.8 k. A value of 29.9 k or 30 k is displayed when there is no ground fault. A whole number fault code between 100 and 111 is displayed in cases when it is not possible to compute the ground fault resistance. 100.0 means no injection for more than 5 s. 101.0 means incorrect frequency. Either the injection frequency on the REX 010 or the rated frequency on the REG316*4 is incorrectly set. 102.0 means external open-circuit. 109.0 means that both the binary inputs 'Adjust REs Input' and 'AdjMTRInp' are enabled. No other codes will normally be generated, but if they are, they are a diagnostic aid for service people. MTR: The value measured for MTR is displayed when the input 'Adjust MTR Input' is enabled. During normal operation, the value entered for MTR via the HMI is displayed.
3-362
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
REs: When the input 'Adjust REs Input' is enabled, the error code 123.0 is displayed initially until the resistance has been calculated. It can take up to 10 s before the value measured for REs is displayed. During normal operation, the value entered for REs via the HMI is displayed. Normal operation: Neither of the two inputs 'Adjust MTR Input' and 'Adjust REs Input' is enabled and injection is taking place.
NOTICE: Only one of the binary inputs may be enabled at any one time, otherwise an error code is generated for the measurements Rfs, MTR and REs (see table below).
Adjust MTR Input

0
1
0
1
Adjust REs Input

0
0
1
1
Protection active and Rfs is computed

Determination of MTR and Rfs
Determination of REs and Rfs
Error codes: MTR = 1090.0, REs = 109.0, Rfs = 109.0
0: binary input disabled 1: binary input enabled Table 3.10 Configuration possibilities and their significance.
3-363
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Stator ground fault settings - Stator-EFP

Text Trip Alarm Delay Trip Delay Rfs Alarm Value Rfs Trip Value REs REs 2. Star point Rfs Adjust Meas. Transf. Ratio Nr. Of Star Points Voltage Input Ui Voltage Input Us 2. Star Point Input Adjust MTR Input Adjust REs Input Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal Alarm Signal Start Alarm Signal Inj. Interrupt Signal Ext. Interrupt Signal 2. Star point Signal Adjust MTR Signal Adjust REs Signal Extern Block Signal
CT/VT-Addr. CT/VT-Addr.
Unit
Default 00000000
Min.
Max.
Step
s s k k k k k
0.50 0.50 10.0 1.0 1.00 1.00 10.0 100.0 1 0 0 F F F F ER ER

*) *)
0.20 0.20 0.1 0.1 0.80 0.90 8.000 10.0 1
60.00 60.00 20.0 20.0 5.00 5.00 12.00 200.0 2
0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 1
BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic).
*)
REG316*4 requires an input transformer unit Type 316GW61 K67 assigned to the following voltage input channels: VoltageInpUi: Channel 8 VoltageInpUs: Channel 9
3-364
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Alarm Delay Time between pick-up of the alarm stage and an alarm. Trip Delay Time between pick-up of the tripping stage and a trip. RFs AlarmValue Ground fault resistance setting for alarm. RFs for alarm must be higher than RFs for tripping. RFs-Trip Value Ground fault resistance setting for tripping. REs Grounding resistor REs for primary system grounding. Where the grounding resistor is connected to the secondary of a VT, its value related to the primary system R'Es has to be calculated and entered. REs 2. Star Point The total grounding resistance of a 2nd star-point in the zone of protection. Rfs-Adjust Simulated ground fault resistance used as a reference value for calculating REs in the 'REs-Adjust' mode. Meas. Transf. Ratio VT ratio for a directly grounded primary system. Nr. Of Star Points Number of star-points in the zone of protection. Voltage Input Ui defines the voltage input channel for the reference voltage. Channel 8 must be used. Voltage Input Us defines the voltage input channel for the measured voltage. Channel 9 must be used. 2. Star Point Input Binary address used as status input. It determines whether the second star-point is connected in parallel to the first. (F FALSE, T TRUE, binary input or output of a protection function). Adjust MTR Input switches the protection function to the MTR determination mode. (F FALSE, T TRUE, binary input or output of a protection function).
3-365
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Adjust REs Input switches the protection function to the REs determination mode. (F FALSE, T TRUE, binary input or output of a protection function). Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. (F FALSE, T TRUE, binary input or output of a protection function). Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. (signal address) Start Signal Output for signalling the pick-up of the tripping stage. (signal address) Alarm Signal Output for signalling an alarm. (signal address) Start Alarm Signal Output for signalling the pick-up of the alarm stage. (signal address) Inj. Interrupt Signal Output for signalling an open-circuit injection circuit. (signal address) Ext. Interrupt Signal Output for signalling an open-circuit measuring circuit. (signal address) 2. Star Point Signal Output for signalling a second star-point in parallel. (signal address) Adjust MTR Signal Output for signalling the binary status of 'AdjMTRInp'. (signal address) Adjust REs Signal Output for signalling the binary status of 'AdjREsInp'. (signal address) Extern Block Signal Output for signalling that the function is disabled by an external signal. (signal address)
3-366
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The value of 'Rfs Alarm Value' for alarm must always be higher than that of 'Rfs Trip Value' for tripping. Both alarm and tripping stages have their own timers. Typical delays used for the 100 % ground fault protection are in the range of seconds.
Settings:
'Rfs Trip Value' for tripping 'Rfs Alarm Value' for alarm Delay for tripping Delay for alarm Grounding resistor REs Measuring transformer ratio (MTR).
Typical settings:
Alarm stage: RFs-Setting Delay Tripping stage: RFs-Setting Delay 5 k 5s 500 2s
Setting procedure:
The accuracy of the Rfs calculation depends on the values entered for REs and MTR. Therefore check the settings and correct them if necessary by connecting resistors between 100 and 10 k between the star-point and ground while the generator is not running. The protection function provides a convenient way of setting these two parameters in the software by switching its mode using the input 'Adjust MTR Input' or 'Adjust REs Input'. This is the recommended procedure. In this mode, the settings of the parameters 'MTR' and 'REs' are calculated with the aid of simulated ground fault resistances. The two parameters are displayed continuously in the measured values window. Should the values of REs and MTR determined by the adjustment modes differ from their nominal values, the calculated values are the preferred values.
3-367
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Determination of 'MTR': Ground the star-point (Rf = 0 ). Set the input 'Adjust MTR Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a logical '1' to the binary input. Select menu 'Monitor', 'Measurement', 'Display Function Measurements', '100% Stator Ground Fault' and click on 'Open Function'. Note the value for 'Meas. Transf. Ratio'. Return to the 'Configuration' menu, then the submenu 'Protection Functions'. In the window 'Select Protection Function' select the function '100% Stator Ground Fault (Injection Principle)', now enter the value noted for the 'Meas. Transf. Ratio' and download the set file into the relay. Remove the connection between the star-point and ground. Reset the binary input Adjust MTR Input. Determination of REs. The selection of the menus and items is the same as for the determination of 'MTR' above: Simulate a ground fault Rf by connecting a resistor between the star-point and ground: 8 k < Rf < 12 k In the window 'Select Protection Function', window '100% Stator Ground Fault (Stator EFP)': Enter the value for the setting 'Rfs Adjust'. Set the input 'Adjust REs Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a logical '1' to the binary input. Enter the approximate value for 'REs'. If the grounding resistor is on the secondary system side, the value entered must be referred to the primary side (Refer also to the Sections concerning REs and MTR in the case of secondary injection at the star-point, respectively at the terminals.) and download the set file into the relay. Open the submenu 'Display Function Measurements' in the 'Monitor', 'Measurement', and note the value of 'Grounding Resistor' (or 'REs' on the LDU). Enter the value noted for the setting of 'REs' in the 'Configuration' menu, then the submenu 'Protection Functions' and download the set file into the relay. Remove the simulated ground fault. Reset the input 'Adjust REs Input'.
The protection function will only switch back from the determination mode to the normal protection mode when both binary Inputs have been reset. Check the settings by connecting resistors of 100 to 20 k (P 5 W) between the star-point and ground and compare their values with the readings of the measured values on the screen.
NOTICE: The tripping and alarm outputs are disabled as long as one of the two binary Inputs 'Adjust MTR Input' or 'Adjust REs Input' is enabled, i.e. the protection will not trip if the stator circuit is grounded. The two signals 'Inj. Interrupt Signal' and 'Ext. Interrupt Signal', however, are not disabled.
3-368
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
REs and MTR in the case of primary injection at the generator star-point
An injection transformer block Type REX 011 is needed for this circuit. Fig. 3.87 shows the wiring diagram for primary injection (peak value of Uis 110 or 96 V DC) at the generator star-point. The star-point is grounded via the resistor REs and the parallel resistor RPs. The current at the star-point must not exceed 20 A. It is recommended, however, to select the resistors such that the star-point current is 5 A to protect as much of the winding as possible. The total resistance is thus: Condition 1: REs + RPs where: UGen IEmax UGen 3 IEmax
phase-to-phase voltage at the generator terminals max. star-point current = 20 A
The following conditions must also be fulfilled: Condition 2a: Injection in Stator- und Rotor circuit: R + REs RPs 87 and RPs Ps 5 .5 Condition 2b: Injection only in Stator circuit: R + REs RPs 77 and RPs Ps 5 .5 Condition 3: REs 4,5 RPs and REs 5 k The VT must be designed such that for a solid ground fault at the generator terminals, the rated frequency component voltage Us = 100 20 %, i.e. the ratio MTR = N12/ N11 must lie within the following range: Condition 4: 1.2 n N12 0.8 n , where n = N11 UGen 3 100 V UGen 3 100 V REs REs + RPs
A VT
N12 = N11
will fulfill condition 4 in most cases.
3-369
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Design example:
UGen = 8 kV Assumed: IEmax 5 A Injection in Stator- und Rotor circuit Determination of the grounding resistors: Condition 1: REs + RPs 8 kV 3 5 A 924 924 = 168 5 .5
Condition 2: RPs 87 and RPs
Assumed: RPs = 100

Condition 3: REs 4.5 100 = 450 and REs 5 k In order to fulfill conditions 1, 3 and 4: REs = 1'000 Determination of the VT: Assumed: N12 = N11 8 kV 3 100 V = 46.188
Condition 4 is fulfilled because: 1,2 n n= N12 0,8 n = 50.4 33.6 where N11 1'000 = 42 1'000 + 100
8 kV 3 100 V
The following values are permissible:

RPs = 100 REs = 1'000 N12 N11 = 8 kV 3 100 V
Design instructions:
The injection unit REX010 is equipped with a converter to accommodate battery voltages between 48 V and 250 V. The peak injection voltage is 96 V. Giving due account to the available power, typical resistance values for most applications are REs = 1000 and RPs = 150 . Both RPs and REs must be able to conduct the maximum star-point current for 10 s. The resistor RPs must also be continuously rated for the injection voltage (injected power < 150 W).
3-370
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The maximum generator star-point current is determined by the resistors REs and RPs. Using the above resistors, this current would be, for example, 5.3 A for UGen = 10.5 kV or 13.5 A for UGen = 27 kV.
REs and MTR in the case of secondary injection at the star-point

An injection transformer block Type REX011-1 is needed for this circuit. The bias voltage can also be injected across part of the grounding resistor connected to the secondary of a grounding VT (see Fig. 3.88). The two resistors R'Es and R'Ps limit the maximum current at the starpoint which must not exceed 20 A. The total resistance is thus: Condition 1: R'Es +R'Ps where: UGen IEmax N1/N2 Uis UGen 3 IEmax N 2 N 1
2
phase-to-phase voltage at the generator terminals max. star-point current = 20 A ratio of the grounding transformer Injection voltage, depending on the configuration is 0,85 V, 1,7 V or 3,4 V.
The following conditions must also be fulfilled: Condition 2a: for injection in Stator and Rotor circuit: 2 Uis R' + R'Es and R'Ps Ps R'Ps 1.2 130 W 5.5 Condition 2b: Injection only in Stator circuit: 2 Uis R' + R'Es and R'Ps Ps R'Ps 1.2 150 W 5.5 N Condition 3: R'Es 4.5 R'Ps and R'Es 5.0k 2 N 1
2
The VT must be designed such that for a solid ground fault at the generator terminals, the rated frequency component voltage Us = 100 V 20 %, i.e. the ratio MTR' = N'12/ N'11 must lie within the following range: Condition 4: 1.2 n N'12 0.8 n , where n = N'11 UGen 3 100 V N2 R'Es N1 R'Es + R'Ps
3-371
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
A VT
N'12 = N'11
N 2 will fulfill condition 4 in most cases. 3 100V N1
UGen
NOTICE: In many cases it is better to avoid using an additional VT and connect the A/D converter directly to R'ES, if Us is within the limits: 80 V Us 150 V. In this case the reference value of the corresponding voltage channel should be adapted for 100 % ESS und 95 % ESS
The settings for REs and MTR must be entered via the HMI, i.e. the values of R'Es and MTR' reflected to the primary of the grounding transformer:
REs = R'Es N 1 0.25 k N 2
110 V N'12 110 V = Uis N'11 Uis
2
MTR = MTR'
The injection voltage Uis depends on the value of the parallel resistance R'Ps and can be either 0.85 V, 1.7 V or 3.4 V. The minimum value of the resistor R'Ps in relation to the corresponding injection voltage Uis can be seen from the following table. The maximum possible injection voltage should be chosen in each case.
R'Ps [m]
> 5.5
> 22
> 88
Uis [V]
0.85
1.7
3.4
Table 3.11
REX011-1
The two determination modes 'REs Adjust' and 'MTR Adjust' determine and display the values for REs and MTR, i.e. they present the secondary circuit reflected on the primary system side. Inaccuracies due to contact resistance, grounding resistor tolerances etc., are thus automatically compensated. Determining the values for REs and MTR by means of the determination modes 'REs Adjust' and 'MTR Adjust' during commissioning is recommended in preference to calculating their values. As a check, calculate the values of R'Es and MTR' from the values given for RE and MTR in the measured value window as follows:
3-372
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
N R'Es = REs 2 N MTR' = MTR
Uis 110 V
In most cases, the calculated and determined values will not agree. Discrepancies of 20 % are acceptable. Where the discrepancies especially in the case of REs are large, check the actual values of the grounding resistors and the grounding transformer.
Design example:
UGen = 16 kV
N1 14.4 kV = = 60 N2 240 V Assumed: IEmax 5 A Injection only in Stator circuit Determination of the grounding resistors: Condition 1: R'Es + R'Ps 16 kV 1 = 513 m 3 5 A 60
2
Condition 2:
3. 4 V 2 513 m R'Ps resp.. 77 m R'Ps 93.3 m 150 W 5 .5
Assumed: R'Ps = 80 m
Condition 3: R'Es 4.5 80 m = 360 m In order to fulfill Conditions 1, 3 and 4: R'Es = 400 m Determination of the VT: Assumed: N'12 = N'11 16 kV 3 100 V 1 = 1.54 60
Condition 4 is fulfilled because: 1.2 n N'12 0.8 n = 2.35 1.54 1.254 N'11 16 kV 3 100 V 1 400 m = 1.39 60 400 m + 42 m
where n =
3-373
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

R'Ps = 80 mS R'Es = 400 mS N12 N11 = 154 V 100 V In this example the VT can be avoided, because the maximum output voltage amounts to 139 V, In this case the reference value of the voltage channel for 100 % ESS und 95 % ESS must be changed to 1.39. Calculation of the settings REs and MTR: REs = 400 m (60 ) = 1.44k
2
MTR =
N'12 110 V = 112 N'11 1.7 V
for an injection voltage of Uis = 6.8 V.
Installations with a second star-point in the zone of protection

The following parameters settings have to be made: 'Nr. Of Star Points' = 2 '2. Star Point Input' = ON In cases in which the second star-point is always connected in parallel to the first. '2. Star Point Input' = binary system input in cases where the second star-point is connected to the first by a switch, the closed position of the switch being signalled a logical '1' applied to a binary input. 'REs 2.Star Point' = value of the grounding resistor connected to the second star-point.
NOTICE: The stator ground fault protection scheme sees the grounding resistor of the second star-point as a ground fault with the value 'REs 2.Star Point'.
Assuming a ground fault of resistance Rfs occurs, the total resistance of the parallel resistors Rfs and 'REs 2. Star Point' is calculated first. The value of Rfs can be simply determined from this, providing the value of 'REs 2. Star Point' is known. This procedure is subject, however, to certain restrictions. The maximum ground fault resistance that can be detected is approximately ten times the value of 'REs 2. Star Point'. Assuming the grounding resistor of the second star-point to be 1 k, ground faults with a resistance less than 10 k can be detected. For this reason, choosing a grounding resistor 'REs 2. Star Point' 2 k is recommended wherever possible.
3-374
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
In a star - open delta connected transformer with a burden, is similar to a second star-point and must be compensated accordingly. A resistor R has the same effect as a earth fault resistor Rf as per the formula: N R f = R' 1 3 N 2 R' = 4 N1 13.8 kV/ 3 = N2 120 V 13.8 kV / 3 = 1'959 Rf = 4 3 120 V The system is loaded with a permanent earth fault resistance of 1959 , which has to be compensated as a second star-point.
2
2
Design example:
REs and MTR in the case of secondary injection at the generator terminals
An injection transformer block Type REX011-2 is needed for this circuit. The bias voltage can also be injected across part of the grounding resistor connected to the broken-delta secondaries of a grounding VTs at the generator terminals (see Fig. 3.89). The two resistors R'Es and R'Ps limit the maximum current at the starpoint which must not exceed 20 A. The total resistance is thus : Condition 1: where: R'Es + R'Ps UGen IEmax N1/N2 3 N2 3 IEmax N1 UGen
2
phase-to-phase voltage at the generator terminals max. star-point current = 20 A ratio of the grounding transformer
3-375
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The grounding resistors R'Es and R'Ps must fulfill the following conditions: Condition 2a Injection in Stator and Rotor circuit: 2 Uis R' + R'Es and R'Ps Ps R'Ps 1.2 5.5 130 W Condition 2b Injection only in Stator circuit: 2 Uis R' + R'Es and R'Ps Ps R'Ps 1.2 150 W 5.5 Condition 3: R'Es 4.5 R'Ps
The VT must be designed such that for a solid ground fault at the generator terminals, the rated frequency component voltage Us = 100 V 20 %, i.e. the ratio MTR' = N'12/ N'11 must lie within the following range: Condition 4:
1.2 n N' 12 0.8 n , where N' 11
n=
UGen 3 100 V
3 N2 R'Es N1 R'Es + R'Ps
A VT
N'12 = N'11
UGen 3 100 V
3 N2 will fulfill condition 4 in most cases. N1
The settings for REs and MTR must be entered via the HMI, i.e. the values of R'Es and MTR' reflected to the primary of the grounding transformer: N1 REs = R'Es 3 N 0.725 k 2 MTR = MTR' 110 V N'12 110 V = Uis N'11 Uis
2
The injection voltage Uis depends on the value of the parallel resistor R'Ps and can be either 6.4 V, 12.8 V or 25.6 V. The minimum value of the resistor R'Ps in relation to the corresponding injection voltage Uis can be seen from the following table. The maximum possible injection voltage should be chosen in each case.
R'Ps [] > 0.32 > 1.3 > 5.0 Uis [V] 6.4 12.8 25.6
Table 3.12
REX011-2
3-376
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Design example:
UGen = 12 kV
12 kV N1 3 = 600 V N2 3
Assumed: IEmax 5 A Injection for Stator and Rotor earthing protection Determination of the grounding resistors: Condition 1: 3 600 V 12 kV 3 = R'Es + R'Ps 12 kV 3 5 A 3 Condition 2:
2
3 (600 V )
3 5 A 12 kV
= 10.4
12.82 10.4 R'Ps resp. 1.26 R'Ps 1.89 130 W 5 .5
Assumed: R'Ps = 1.5

Condition 3: R'Es 4.5 1.5 = 6.75 In order to fulfill conditions 1, 3 and 4: R'Es = 10.0 Determining the VT:
N'12 Assumed: = N'11 12 kV 3 100 V 3 600 V 3 = 12 kV 3 Condition 4 is fulfilled because: 3 600 V = 6 .0 100 V
1.2 n
N'12 0.8 n = 6.6 6.0 4.4 where N'11

3 600 V 3 10 = 6 0.91 = 5.5 12kV 10 + 1 3
n=
12kV 3 100 V
R'Ps = 1 R'Es = 10
N'12 N'11 = 3 600 V 100 V
3-377
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Calculation of the settings REs and MTR:
REs
12kV 3 = 1.33k = 10 3 600 V 3 N'12 110 V = 103.1 N'11 6.4 V
MTR =
for an injection voltage Uis = 12.8 V.
Generator
N12
N11
REs
Voltage transformer
Us
Uis
RPs
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.87
Stator ground fault protection with primary injection
3-378
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Generator
Voltage transformer N1 N2
N'12 N'11
R'Es
Us
R'Ps
Uis
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.88
Stator ground fault protection with secondary injection at the generator star-point
Voltage transformer
N1
N2
R'Es
N'12
N'11
Us
R'Ps
Uis
Injection voltage
Generator
Fig. 3.89
Wiring diagram for secondary injection of the stator (grounding transformer at the generator terminals)
3-379
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
S1
REs-2.Starpt
Generator Switch position to binary input
N12
N11
REs
Us Voltage transformer
Uis
RPs
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.90
Stator ground fault protection for installations with two star-points
3-380
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
N1 N2
R'
S1
Generator
Switch position to binary I/P
N12
N11 Us
REs
Uis
RPs
Voltage transformer
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.91
Stator earthfault protection for installations with 2 star-points, second star-point as transformer in 'Star open Delta - connection' with burden R'.
3-381
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-382
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.33.
Rotor Ground Fault (Injection Principle) protection (Rotor-EFP)
A. Application
For the detection of ground faults on the rotor windings of generators. Because of its low sensitivity to spurious signals, this scheme can be used for all kinds of excitation systems.
B. Features

Detection of ground faults on rotor windings Injection voltage applied via resistors and coupling capacitors to both poles of the rotor Computes the resistance of the ground fault Monitors the amplitude and frequency of the injection signal Monitors the measuring circuit with respect to open-circuit and correct connection of the grounding resistor
Voltage (2 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking Coupling capacitor adjustment REr adjustment

Alarm stage pick-up Alarm Trip stage pick-up Trip Coupling capacitor adjustment active REr adjustment active Injection open-circuit internally Injection open-circuit externally External blocking
IV. Measurements:

Ground fault resistance RFr Coupling capacitor Ck" Grounding resistor REr"
3-383
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Explanation of measurements:
Rfr: Ground fault resistances between 0 and 29.8 k can be determined and displayed. A display of 29.9 k or 30 k indicates a ground fault resistance >29.8 k. A value of 29.9 k or 30 k is displayed when there is no ground fault. A whole number fault code between 100 and 111 is displayed in cases when it is not possible to compute the ground fault resistance. 100.0 means no injection for more than 5 s. 101.0 means incorrect frequency. Either the injection frequency on the REX 010 or the rated frequency on the REG316*4 is incorrectly set. 102.0 means external open-circuit. 109.0 means that both the binary inputs 'Adjust REr Input' and 'Adjust Capacitor Input' are enabled. 111.0 means that the binary input 'Adjust REr Input' is enabled. No other codes will normally be generated, but if they are, they are a diagnostic aid for the service people. Ck": When the input 'Adjust Capacitor Input' is enabled, 133.00 is displayed initially until the coupling capacitor has been computed. This can take a maximum of 10 s after which the value measured for C is displayed. During normal operation, the value entered for the coupling capacitor C via the HMI is displayed. REr": When the input 'Adjust REr Input' is enabled, the error code 133.00 is displayed initially until the resistance has been calculated. It can take up to 10 s before the value measured for REr is displayed. The value measured for Rf is 97.0. During normal operation, the value entered for REr on the HMI is displayed.
3-384
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Normal operation:
Neither of the two inputs 'Adjust Capacitor Input' and 'Adjust RErInput' is enabled and injection is taking place.
NOTICE: Only one of the binary inputs may be enabled at any one time, otherwise an error code is generated for the measurements Rfr, C and REr (see table below).
Adjust Capacitor Input

0
1
0
1
Adjust REr Input

0
0
1
1
Protection active and Rfr is computed

Determination of C and Rfr
Determination of REr (Rfr = 111.0)
Error codes: 109.00 and 109.00 (Rfr = 109.0)
0: binary input disabled 1: binary input enabled Table 3.13 The configuration possibilities and their significance
3-385
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Rotor ground fault settings - Rotor-EFP

Text Trip Alarm-Delay Trip-Delay RFr Alarm Value Rfr Trip Value REr Uir RFr Adjust Coupling Capacitor Voltage Input Ui Voltage Input Ur Adjust REr Input Adjust Capacitor Input Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal Alarm Signal Start Alarm Signal Inj. Interrupt Signal Ext. Interrupt Signal Adjust Rer Signal Coupling Cap Signal Extern Block Signal s s k k k V k F Unit Default 00000000 0.50 0.50 10.0 1.0 1.00 50 10.0 4.00
*) *)
Min.
Max.
Step
0.20 0.20 0.1 0.1 0.90 (Select) 8.000 2.00
60.00 60.00 25.0 25.0 5.00 12.00 10.00
0.05 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01
CT/VT-Addr. 0 CT/VT-Addr. 0 BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr ER F F F ER
*)
REG316*4 requires an input transformer unit Type 316GW61 K67 assigned to the following voltage input channels: VoltageInpUi: Channel 8 VoltageInpUr: Channel 7
3-386
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the function (tripping logic). Alarm Delay Time between pick-up of the alarm stage and an alarm. Trip Delay Time between pick-up of the tripping stage and a trip. RFr Alarm Value Ground fault resistance setting for alarm. RFr for alarm must be higher than RFr for tripping. RFr Trip Value Ground fault resistance setting for tripping. REr Grounding resistor REr. Uir The normal rotor injection voltage is 50 V. Provision is also made for an injection voltage of 20 or 30 V by appropriately changing the wiring on the injection transformer unit Type REX 011. RFr Adjust Simulated ground fault resistance used as a reference value for calculating REr in the 'REr Adjust' mode. Coupling Capacitor The total capacitance C of the two coupling capacitors in parallel. Voltage Input Ui defines the voltage input channel for the reference voltage Ui. Channel 8 must be used. Voltage Input Ur defines the voltage input channel for the measured voltage Ur. Channel 7 must be used. Adjust REr Input switches the protection function to the REr determination mode. (F FALSE, T TRUE, binary input or output of a protection function). Adjust Capacitor Input switches the protection function to the C determination mode. (F FALSE, T TRUE, binary input or output of a protection function).
3-387
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Block Input Binary address used as blocking input. (F FALSE, T TRUE, binary input or output of a protection function). Trip Signal Output for signalling tripping. Start Signal Output for signalling the pick-up of the tripping stage. Alarm Signal Output for signalling alarm. Start Alarm Signal Output for signalling the pick-up of the alarm stage. Inj. Interrupt Signal Output for signalling an open-circuit injection circuit. Ext. Interrupt Signal Output for signalling an open-circuit measuring circuit. Output for signalling an open-circuit injection circuit. Both pick-up and reset of this signal are delayed by 5 s. Adjust Rer Signal Output for signalling the binary status of 'AdjRErInp'. Coupling Cap. Signal Output for signalling the binary status of 'AdjCoupCInp'. Extern Block Signal Output for signalling that the function is disabled by an external signal.
3-388
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The value of 'RFr Setting' for alarm must always be higher than that of 'RFr Setting' for tripping. Both alarm and tripping stages have their own timers. Typical delays used for the rotor ground fault protection are in the range of seconds. Recommended resistances: REr = 1000 RPr = 100
Settings:
Grounding resistor REr Coupling capacitor C 'RFr Setting' for tripping 'RFr Setting' for alarm Delay for alarm Delay for tripping
Typical settings:
Alarm stage: RFr-Setting Delay Tripping stage: RFr-Setting Delay 500 2s 5 k 5s
Setting procedure:
How accurately Rfr is measured depends on the values entered for REr and C. Therefore check the settings and correct them if necessary by connecting resistors between 100 and 10 k between the rotor and ground while the generator is not running. The protection function provides a convenient way of setting these two parameters in the software by switching its mode using the input 'Adjust REr Input' or 'Adjust Capacitor Input'. In this mode, the settings of the parameters 'REr' and 'C' are calculated with the aid of simulated ground fault resistances. Determination of REr

Short-circuit the coupling capacitors. Set the input 'Adjust REr Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a logical '1' to the binary input. Simulate a ground fault Rf by connecting a resistor to the rotor: 8 k < Rf < 12 k Click on the 'Configuration' menu, then the submenu 'Protection Functions': Set the input 'Adjust REr Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a logical '1' to the binary input. In the window 'Select Protection Function' select the function
3-389
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
'100% Rotor Ground Fault (Injection Principle)', and enter the value of the simulated ground fault for 'Rfr Adjust' and the nominal value for REr and download the set file into the relay. Select menu 'Monitor', 'Measurement', 'Display Function Measurements', 'Rotor Ground Fault' and click on 'Open Function'. Note the value of 'Ground Resistor' (or 'REr' on the LDU). Enter the value noted for the setting of 'REr' in the 'Configuration' menu, then the submenu 'Protection Functions' and download the set file into the relay. Remove the short-circuit from across the coupling capacitors and remove the simulated ground fault. Reset the input 'Adjust REr Input'.
Determination of C: Set the input 'Adjust Capacitor Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a logical '1' to the binary input. Ground the rotor winding (Rf = 0 ). In the window 'Select Protection Function' select the function '100% Rotor Ground Fault', now enter the nominal value of C into the parameter 'Coupling Capacitor' and download the set file into the relay. Open the submenu 'Display Function Measurements' in the 'Monitor', 'Measurement', and note the value of 'Coupling Capacitor' (or 'Ck' on the LDU). Enter the value noted for the setting of 'Coupling Capacitor' in the 'Configuration' menu, then the submenu 'Protection Functions' and download the set file into the relay. Remove the simulated ground fault from the rotor. Reset the binary input 'Adjust Capacitor Input'.
Design instructions:
The grounding resistors and coupling capacitors have to fulfill the following conditions: Rotor grounding resistor Rpr Rotor grounding resistor REr Coupling capacitors C = C1 + C2 Time constant : : : : 150 Rpr 500 900 REr 5 k 2 F C 10 F 3 ms
= REr
10 ms
The grounding resistor Rpr must be continuously rated for the injection 50 V . current I = Rpr The coupling capacitors must be designed for the maximum excitation voltage.
3-390
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Application examples:
Rpr = 200 , P = 15 W REr = 1 k C = 2 2 F, 8 kV
= 4 ms
+
Rotor
C1 C = C1 + C2 C2
REr
Ur
Uir
Injection voltage
RPr
Fig. 3.92
Injection at one pole of the rotor winding
3-391
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
+
Rotor
C1 C = C1 + C2 C2
REr
Ur
Uir
Injection voltage
RPr
Fig. 3.93
Injection at both poles of the rotor winding
3-392
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.34.
Pole slipping (Pole-Slip)
A. Application
The pole slipping function detects the condition of a generator that is completely out-of-step with the power system.
B. Features

Detection of slip frequencies in relation to the power system of 0.2 to 8 Hz Alarm before the first slip (rotor angle pick-up setting) Discriminates generating and motoring directions of rotor phaseangle Discriminates an internal and an external power swing centre Trips after a set number of slips Trips within a set rotor angle

Current Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking of the entire function Blocking operation in generating direction (to left) Blocking operation in motoring direction (to right) External enable for zone1

Alarm before the first slip Operation for generating slip (to left) Operation for motoring slip (to right) First operation in zone 1 First operation in zone 2 n1-th operation in zone 1 (tripping) n2-th operation in zone 2
IV. Measurements:

Slip impedance Slip frequency
3-393
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Pole slip settings - Pole-Slip

Text Trip1 ZA ZB ZC Phi Warn Angle Trip Angle Slip of Zone 1 Slip of Zone 2 t - Reset Current Input Chan. Voltage Input Chan. Block Input Generator Block Input Motor Block Input Enable Zone 1 Inpt Warning Signal Generator Signal Motor Signal Zone 1 Signal Zone 2 Signal Trip 1 Signal Trip 2 Signal s AnalogAddr AnalogAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr UN / IN UN / IN UN / IN deg deg deg Unit Default 00000000 0.200 -0.250 0.100 85 110 90 1 3 5.000 0 0 F F F F ER ER ER ER ER ER ER 0.000 0.000 60 0 0 0 0 0.500 5.000 5.000 270 180 180 20 20 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 -5.000 0.000 Min. Max. Step
25.000 0.010
Trip 1 Signal defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of stage 1 of the function (tripping logic).
3-394
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
ZA Forwards impedance 1). ZA marks the end of zone 2 and is also used for determining phase-angle. ZB Reverse impedance 1). ZB marks the beginning of zone 1 and is also used for determining phase-angle. ZC Impedance of the zone limit 1). ZC is the end of zone 1 between ZB and ZC and the beginning of zone 2 between ZC and ZA. phi Angle of the slipping characteristic and of ZA, ZB and ZC. Phi also determines the energy direction: 60... 90 CT neutral on the line side 240...270 CT neutral on the generator side Warn Angle Rotor angle above which alarm of potential slipping is given (rotor angle > 'Warn Angle'). Trip Angle Rotor angle below which first 'Trip 1 Signal' and the 'Trip 2 Signal' are issued (rotor angle < 'Trip Angle'). Slip of Zone 1 Number of slips for zone 1, i.e. number of slips before 'Trip 1 Signal' is issued and signalled. Slip of Zone 2 Number of slips for zone 2, i.e. number of slips before 'Trip 2 Signal' is signalled.
1)
The impedance unit 1.000 UN/IN represents an impedance of 100%. Thus if the impedance setting in percent is known, it can be set directly, e.g. the setting for 10% is 0.100. An impedance of 1.000 UN/IN corresponds to a current of 1 IN at the rated phase-to-neutral voltage UN /
3 in all three phases. The respective
positive-sequence impedance is UN / 3 / IN : UN 100 V 100 V 100 V 200 V 200 V 200 V IN 1A 2A 5A 1A 2A 5A Impedance unit 57.735 /ph 28.868 /ph 11.547 /ph 115.470 /ph 57.735 /ph 23.094 /ph 3-395
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
t - Reset The reset time 't - Reset' prevents the function from resetting between two slips providing n1 or n2 is greater than 1. Current Input Chan. defines the A/D input channel. VoltageInput Chan. defines the A/D input channel. Block Input Generator Blocking input for detecting pole slip to the left, i.e. the generator is faster than the power system. Block Input Motor Blocking input for detecting pole slip to the right, i.e. the generator is slower than the power system. (The power system drives the generator as if it were a motor.) Block Input Blocking input for the entire pole slipping function. Enable Zone 1 Input Zone 1 is enabled for slipping in zone 2 as well, i.e. independently of ZC. Warning Signal Detection of variations of rotor angle (before the first slip occurs). Generator Signal Signals rotor movement to the left, i.e. the generator is faster than the system. Motor Signal Signals rotor movement to the right, i.e. the generator is slower than the system. (The power system drives the generator as if it were a motor.) Zone 1 Signal First slip between ZB and ZC or between ZB and ZA, providing the input 'Enable Zone 1 Input' is enabled. Zone 2 Signal First slip between ZC and ZA. Trip 1 Signal Tripping and signalling when the counter for zone 1 reaches the value n1. Trip 2 Signal Signalling when the counter for zone 2 reaches the value n2. If Trip2 is to control tripping, the signal Trip2 has to be assigned to a tripping relay (see also Section 5.4.5.4.).
3-396
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
E. Detecting rotor slip and shift

Rotor shift is detected by monitoring the voltage Ucos , i.e. the component of the voltage in phase with the current. If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signalled. If the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring is signalled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor). The movements in the impedance plain can be seen from Fig. 3.94. The transient behaviour is described by the transient e.m.fs EA and EB, and by Xd' , XT and the transient system impedance ZS. The detection of rotor angle is enabled when

the minimum current 0.10 IN is exceeded the value of Ucos falls below 0.92 UN the voltage Ucos has an angular velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and the corresponding direction is not blocked.
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor in relation to the slip line and the rotor angle exceeds the angle set for 'Warn Angle'. Slipping is detected when

a change of rotor angle is detected the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB the direction of rotation has remained the same since start
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when 'Enable Zone 1 Input' is enabled (external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping). After the first slip, the signals 'Zone 1 Signal' or 'Zone 2 Signal' and depending on the direction of slip - either 'Generator Signal' or 'Motor Signal' are issued. Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements. Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the change of the rotor angle detection has reset after the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB.
3-397
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip. The 'Trip 1 Signal' tripping command and signal are generated after n1 slips in zone 1, providing the rotor angle is less than 'Trip Angle'. The 'Trip 2 Signal' signal is generated after n2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than 'Trip Angle'. All signals are reset if:

the direction of movement reverses, the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or no rotor relative movement was detected during the time 't - Reset'.
3-398
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 3.94
Locus of the impedance measured at the generator terminals during pole slipping in relation to the power system A
Xd' XT ZS
: : :
transient reactance of the generator short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer transient impedance of the power system A
3-399
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
F. Setting instructions Settings: Current and voltage inputs

A three-phase group must be used for the current input. The following can be set for the voltage input:

single-phase input using URS three-phase delta group three-phase star group
Setting: Phi
The angle Phi determines the angle of the slip line and is monitored to detect slip. The impedances ZA, ZB and ZC lie on this line. Phi is also used to check power direction, i.e. the polarity of the CTs: 60... 90 240...270 CT neutral on the line side i.e. connection according to Fig. 12.4 CT neutral on the generator side
Setting: ZA
ZA is the impedance of the slip line and marks the limit of zone 2. It is also used for measuring phase-angle (see 'Warn Angle' and 'Trip Angle'). ZA should be set to the impedance between the location of the protection and the off-load voltage of the equivalent circuit for the entire power system.
Setting: ZB
ZB is the impedance of the slip line in the reverse direction and marks the limit of zone 1. It is also used for measuring phase-angle (see 'Warn Angle' and 'Trip Angle'). ZB should be set to the generator reactance Xd' in the reverse direction (negative sign).
Setting: ZC
ZC divides the slip line into two zones. Zone 1 lies between ZB and ZC and zone 2 between ZC and ZA. ZC should be set to the impedance from the location of the protection up to the first busbar.
3-400
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 3.95
Determining the settings for ZA, ZB, ZC, and Phi according to Xd', XT and ZS
Setting: Warn Angle

The rotor angle is given by the triangle bounded by the instantaneous impedance and the impedances ZA and ZB. The protection, however, measures the angle between the instantaneous voltage and the rotor voltages EA and EB, which closely approximates the impedance triangle. The setting for 'Warn Angle' can be set between 0 and 180 and determines the rotor angle above which alarm of imminent slipping is given. With the 'Warn Angle' = 0, alarm is given immediately the rotor angle changes, providing it lies within the pick-up range. 'Warn Angle' enables the operating status of the generator to be corrected, because its rotor angle setting is reached before the first slip. The machine can normally be stabilised for rotor angles up to 135, for example, by changing the excitation or switching in compensators. For a setting of 'Warn Angle' = 180, alarm is not given until the first slip takes place, i.e. at the same time as the signal for zone 1 or zone 2. Typical setting: 'Warn Angle' = 110
3-401
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 3.96
Example of the operation for n1 = 1, Warn Angle = 53 and Trip Angle = 96
3-402
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Setting: TripAngle
Phi is evaluated in relation to 'Trip Angle' when one of the zones has reached its number of slips, i.e. n n1 or n2. For a setting of 'Trip Angle' = 180, the tripping command 'Trip1' and the signals 'Trip 1 Signal' and 'Trip 2 Signal' are issued immediately. For a setting of 'Trip Angle' = 0, these signals are only issued when the slip detector has reset, i.e. when the generator is again close to synchronism with the power system. A setting of 'Trip Angle' between 180 and 0 (typically 90) determines the rotor angle at which tripping takes place and the signals are generated. The setting at which tripping should take place is determined according to an operating point that

occurs shortly after the last permissible slip is favourable for the circuit-breaker (least stress due to reignition)
Typical setting: 'Trip Angle' = 90
Settings: n1, n2, t-Reset

The number of slips n1 or n2 that may be considered permissible depends on the generator being protected and must be stated by the manufacturer. For settings of n1 and n2 1, the reset time 't - Reset' can be set to any low value. For settings of n1 or n2 > 1, 't - Reset' must not be set lower than the period 1/fS of the lowest slip frequency fS to be detected. Slip frequencies from 0.2 Hz upwards are reliably detected using the typical setting of 5 seconds.
3-403
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-404
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6. 3.6.1.
Control functions Control function (FUPLA)
A. Application
The control function is designed to perform data acquisition, monitoring, and control functions in MV and HV substations. The control logic of a switchgear bay can be configured for SF6 gasinsulated switchgear (GIS), for indoor and outdoor switchgear and for single, double or multiple busbar stations. The control function registers and processes the switchgear position signals, the measured variables and the alarms occurring in a switchgear bay. The corresponding data are then made available at the communication interface (IBB). The control function receives instructions from the station control system (SCS) or from the local mimic, processes them in relation to the bay control logic configuration and then executes them. The interlocks included in the control function device prevent inadmissible switching operations, which could cause damage to plant or endanger personnel.
B. Features
The control function depends on the particular application for which it is specifically created using CAP 316. It includes essentially:

Detection and plausibility check of switchgear position signals Switchgear control Interlocks Monitoring of switchgear commands Run-time supervision Integration of the local mimic Detection of alarms and alarm logic Processing of measured variables
Eight FUPLA functions can be configured. The total maximum size of FUPLA code for all the functions is 128 kB. The FUPLA function cannot be copied and not configured as 48th function. The function plan programming language CAP 316 is described in the publication 1MRB520059-Uen.
3-405
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Constants, measured protection variables, IBB inputs and sampled values
II. Analog outputs:
Measured variable outputs
III. Binary inputs:

Blocking input, binary input for blocking FUPLA Binary inputs from the IBB, the system and protection functions
IV. Binary outputs:
Binary outputs to the IBB, the system, protection functions and for event processing
V. Measurements:
Measured variable outputs
3-406
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.1.1.
Control function settings - FUPLA
When the FUPLA is reconfigured, the project directory must be selected before any other parameter.
After clicking on the 'Browse' select the directory in which the files 'project1.bin' and 'project.cfg' are located and select 'project1.bin'. The project name will be inserted from this file in the first line, alongwith the time stamp in the second line and the file size in the third line.
The individual parameters can be entered now.
3-407
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.6.1.1.1.
General
Text RepetitRate Cycl. time ho Blocking ms Unit Default low 20 Min. low 0 Max. high 1000 Step 1 1
BinaryAddr F
RepetitionRate Determines the number of FUPLA runs per cycle. high: four FUPLA run per cycle
medium: two FUPLA run per cycle low: one FUPLA runs per cycle
CycleTime Determines the interval between FUPLA starts. BlockInput (F FALSE, T TRUE, system binary input, protection function binary output or input via the IBB). This blocks FUPLA.
3-408
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.1.1.2.
Timers
EXTIN signals of the time factor type and signals belonging to the TMSEC group are displayed in this window. The signals can be connected to the following sources:
Measured variable constant Setting range and resolution: TMSEC signal group: TIMEFACTOR signal group: 0...60.000 s, 0...40.00 s, 0...4000 s, for TON for TONS for TONL
Protection function binary output (measured variable) Observe the factors ms (TON), 10 ms (TONS), 1 s (TONL). Input from the SCS Observe the factors ms (TON), 10 ms (TONS), 1 s (TONL). Input from AXM Observe the factors ms (TON), 10 ms (TONS) 1 s (TONL).
3.6.1.1.3.
Binary inputs
Binary inputs can be connected to the following sources:

3.6.1.1.4.
Always ON ('1') Always OFF ('0') Binary system inputs Protection function binary outputs Inputs from the SCS: 768 inputs in 24 groups of 32 signals each
Binary signals
Binary signals can be connected to the following sinks:

LEDs Signalling relays Event processor (excluding 'BinExtOut' blocks) Protection function binary inputs Tripping channels Outputs to the SCS: 768 inputs in 24 groups of 32 signals each
3-409
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.6.1.1.5.
Measurement inputs
Measurement inputs can be connected to the following sources:

Measured variable constant, integer or percent range. Protection function measured variable, the range for angles is 180.00 and currents and voltages are transferred in the corresponding units. Input from the IBB, integer range. CT/VT input channels.

3.6.1.1.6.
Measurement outputs
Measurement outputs can be connected to the following sinks:
3.6.1.1.7.
Measurements Nos. 1...64
Flow chart for measurement inputs and outputs
O1 IBB CHAN. 4 O 64 IBB CHAN. 9
V1
FUPLA function No.
1 Measurement outputs SCS input
SCS output
Measurement inputs V 64
64
Fig. 3.97
Flowchart for measured variable inputs and outputs
IBB channel No. 4 is write-only and IBB channel No. 9 read-only. The range of values for IBB channel No. 4 is -32768... +32767 which corresponds to a 16 Bit integer.
3.6.1.2. Loading FUPLA
The FUPLA code has to be loaded again each time the FUPLA configuration is changed. After making internal FUPLA changes and copying the new versions of the files 'project1.bin' and 'project.cfg' to the FUPLA directory, select 'Communication' from the main menu and then 'Setfile Download to RE..16' to load the new FUPLA code.
3-410
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.2.
Logic (Logic)
A. Application
Logical combination of binary input signals or of output signals from the protection functions, e.g. for

specific signals required by the application supplementary protection functions
B. Features

Binary I/P channels assignable to binary I/P signals protection function O/P signals All I/P channels can be inverted Following logic functions available for selection: OR gate with 4 I/Ps AND gate with 4 I/Ps R/S flip-flop with 2 I/Ps for setting and 2 I/Ps for resetting: The O/P is '0', if at least one of the reset I/Ps is '1'. The O/P is '1', if at least one of the set I/Ps is '1' AND none of the reset I/Ps is '1'. The O/P status is sustained when all the I/Ps are at '0'. Every logic has an additional blocking I/P, which when activated switches the O/P to '0'.
None
II. Binary inputs:

4 logic inputs Blocking
III. Binary O/Ps:
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
None
3-411
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Logic function settings - Logic

Text Trip Logic Mode Binary Output Signal Block Input Binary Input 1 (R1) Binary Input 2 (R2) Binary Input 3 (S1) Binary Input 4 (S2) Units Default 00000000 OR SignalAddr ER BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F (Select) Min. Max. Step
Trip Definition of the tripping circuit excited by the functions O/P (tripping matrix). Logic Mode Definition of the logic function to be performed by the 4 binary I/Ps. Possible settings: OR: OR gate with all 4 binary I/Ps AND: AND gate with all 4 binary I/Ps R/S flip-flop: Flip-flop with 2 set I/Ps (S1 and S2) and 2 reset I/Ps (R1 and R2). The O/P is set or reset when at least one of the corresponding I/Ps is at logical '1' (OR gate). Reset I/Ps take priority over the set I/Ps. Binary Output Signal Output for signalling a trip. Block Input Input for blocking the function. F: not used xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) The O/P is always at logical '0' when the blocking I/P is at logical '1'. The blocking I/P acts as a reset I/P for the flip-flop function.
3-412
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
BinInp1 (R1), BinInp2 (R2), BinInp3 (S1), BinInp4 (S2) Binary inputs 1 to 4 (AND or OR function) Reset inputs 1 and 2 and set inputs 1 and 2 (RS flip-flop) F: not used (OR logic or RS flip-flop) T: not used (AND logic) xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-413
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-414
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.3.
Delay / integrator (Delay)
A. Application
General purpose timer for integration of pulsating binary signals to obtain a continuous signal, e.g. output of the loss-of-excitation function (out-of-step protection) or reverse power protection extension of short I/P signals (pulse prolongation) simple time delay
B. Features

I/P channel and blocking input assignable to binary I/P signals protection function output signals I/P channel and blocking input can be inverted. Adjustable reset time 2 types of time delay Integration: Only the time during which the I/P signal is at logical '1' counts at the end of the time delay. No integration: The total time from the instant the timer starts until it is either reset or expires counts.
None
II. Binary inputs:

Input signal Blocking

Pick-up Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Time from the instant the timer starts
3-415
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Delay/integrator function settings - Delay

Text Trip Trip Delay Reset Delay Integration Binary Input Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal s s 0/1 BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Units Default 00000000 01.00 00.01 0 F F ER ER 00.00 00.00 0 300.00 300.00 1 0.01 0.01 1 Min. Max. Step
Trip Definition of the tripping logic (matrix) excited by the functions output. Trip Delay Time between start signal at the input and the tripping signal at the output. Reset Delay Time required for the timer to reset after the input signal has disappeared. Integration Determination of the response of the function in the presence of a pulsating I/P signal: 0: The delay continues to run, providing the I/P signal does not disappear for longer than the reset time (see Fig. 3.98). 1: The time during which the I/P is at logical '1' is integrated, i.e. tripping does not take place until the sum of logical '1' time equals the set delay time (see Fig. 3.99). Binary Input Timer input. xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Block Input Input for blocking the function. F: enabled T: disabled xx: ll binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-416
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Trip Signal Tripping signal. Start Signal Pick-up signal.
tR Start 0 t 0
tR
tR
Impulse prolongation 0 tA Tripping 0 t 0 tA t (No tripping) t
(No tripping) t 0
tR Start 0 t 0
tR
tR t
Impulse prolongation 0 tA Tripping 0 t (No tripping) t 0 0 tA t
t
HEST 935 019 C
Note: Tripping only takes place, if a start also occurs within the time tR.
tA tR tripping time ('Trip Delay') reset time ('Reset Delay')
Fig. 3.98
Operation of the 'Delay' function without integration
3-417
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
tR Start 0 t tint 0 t (No tripping) 0 t 0 0 0 Setting
tR
tR t
Setting
tint Integration
t (No tripping) t
Tripping
tR Start 0 Setting tint Integration 0 t tint 0 t 0 Setting
tR
tR
tR t
Tripping
0
HEST 935 020 C
tint tR Setting
integrated time for tripping reset time ('Reset Delay') 'Trip Delay'
Fig. 3.99
Operation of the 'Delay' function with integration
3-418
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.4.
Counter (Counter)
A. Application
General counters, e.g. for

counting the output impulses of the field failure or reverse power protection functions prolongation of short input signals
B. Features

Input channel and blocking input can be set by binary input signals output signal from a protection function Provision for inverting signals applied to the inputs
None
II. Binary inputs:

Input signal Blocking

Start Trip
IV. Measurements:
Count reached
3-419
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Counter settings - Count

Text Trip Set Count Drop Time ResetTime Binary Input Block Input Trip Signal Start Signal S S Unit Default 00000000 1 00.04 010.0 1 00.01 000.1 100 30.00 300.0 1 00.01 000.1 Min. Max. Step
BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER
Trip defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping O/P of the function (matrix tripping logic). Set Count Number of input impulses counted by the counter before it trips. Drop Time Time the counter output signal is maintained after the input signal causing it has reset. ResetTime Time after the input signal has reset before the counter is reset to zero if it did not trip. Binary Input Counter input xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions). Block Input defines the input for an external blocking signal. F: function enabled T: function disabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Trip Signal Tripping signal. Start Signal Pick-up signal.
3-420
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.5.
Contact bounce filter (Debounce)
A. Application
Suppresses the contact bounce phenomena of binary signals. This function is only used for the signals of binary input modules.
B. Features

Adjustable maximum bounce time The first edge of the respective input signal is prolonged by the time 'SupervisTime'.
None
II. Binary inputs:

Binary signals (input signals) Blocking
None
IV. Measurements:
None
3-421
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Contact bounce filter settings - Debounce

Text Binary Input 1 Supervision Time 1 Binary Input 2 Supervision Time 2 Binary Input 3 Supervision Time 3 . . Binary Input 16 Supervision Time 16 BinaryAddr F Setting 1 ms 1 ms 10000 ms 1 ms Units Default Min. Max. Step
BinaryAddr F Setting Setting Setting 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 10000 ms 1 ms 10000 ms 1 ms 10000 ms 1 ms BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F
Binary Input 1 16 Binary inputs Nos. 1 16 F: not used xx: all binary inputs. Supervision Time (per Channel) Maximum bounce time setting.
The first edge of the input signal is prolonged by the time set for 'Supervision Time'.
NOTICE: Connect functions requiring filtered signals to the correct binary inputs to start with.
The contact bounce filter 'Debounce' may only be configured once per set of parameters.
3-422
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.6.
Signal flutter detector (Defluttering)
A. Application
Suppresses the recording of multiple events for binary signals subject to contact bounce.
B. Features
Input channels can be set by binary input signals output signals (trips) from protection functions provision for inverting signals applied to the inputs adjustable supervision time and permissible signal change Two outputs assigned to each input: signal flutter detected (too many signal changes during the supervision time) image of the status of the input signal
None
II. Binary inputs:
Binary signals (input signals)

Signal flutter detected Image of the input signal status
IV. Measurements:
None
3-423
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Signal flutter detector settings - Defluttering

Text Supervising Time Nr of Signal Changes Binary Input 1 Binary Input 2 Binary Input 3 Binary Input 4 State of Input 1 State of Input 2 State of Input 3 State of Input 4 Flutter State Input 1 Flutter State Input 2 Flutter State Input 3 Flutter State Input 4 Unit s Default 1.0 2 BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER SignalAddr ER Min. 0.1 2 Max. 60.0 100 Step 0.1 1
Supervising Time defines the time during which multiple signals count as signal flutter. Nr Of Signal Changes defines the number of signal changes during the supervision time to count as signal flutter. If a higher number of signal changes is detected during the supervision time, the signal is deemed to be fluttering. Binary Input 1 Binary input No. 1 F: function disabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Binary Input 2 Binary input No. 2 F: function disabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Binary Input 3 Binary input No. 3 F: function disabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-424
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Binary Input 4 Binary input No. 4 F: function disabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) State of Input 1 signals the status of input No. 1 State of Input 2 signals the status of input No. 2 State of Input 3 signals the status of input No. 3 State of Input 4 signals the status of input No. 4 Flutter State Input 1 signals that flutter detected on input No. 1 Flutter State Input 2 signals that flutter detected on input No. 2 Flutter State Input 3 signals that flutter detected on input No. 3 Flutter State Input 4 signals that flutter detected on input No. 4
3-425
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
E. Setting instructions General:

If a signal at an input changes its state in a given period of time (Supervising Time) more frequently than a given number of times (Nr of Signal Changes), the input is deemed to be fluttering due, for example, to contact bounce. As a result, no further signal changes at the input are recorded as events. Its basic protective function, however, remains intact. This condition is maintained until fewer signal changes are counted than the number defined for the given period.
Settings:
Supervision time Number of signal changes permissible Supervising Time Nr of Signal Changes
The functions counters continuously count the signal changes at the inputs selected. They are reset at the end of each supervision period. Should the number of signal changes counted during the period exceed the maximum permissible for the input, the input is tagged as fluttering and the corresponding output set. The 'fluttering' condition is maintained for as long as the number of signal changes is higher the set limit and is only cancelled and the output reset when a smaller number of changes is counted during the period. To prevent the flutter function from fluttering itself (i.e. the number of changes of an input is just about equal to the number of changes setting), the number of changes for resetting to the non-fluttering state must be less than the number of changes required for pick-up minus ten percent, but at least one change less when the number of changes for pick-up is set to less than ten. Note that the start and finish of a supervision period is not signalled externally. It can therefore occur that fluttering is not signalled although the number of changes briefly exceeded the maximum permissible, but the excess happened to straddle two supervision periods.
Typical settings:
Supervising Time Nr of Signal Changes 10 s 20
3-426
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.7.
LDU events (LDUevents)
A. Application
Generates events that can be viewed on the local display unit (LDU) and provides facility for setting a user name.
B. Features

Binary input that can be set by a binary input signal an output signal from a protection function Provision for inverting signals applied to the inputs Direct connection of input to output: input 1 controls output 1, input 2 control output 2 etc. Additional blocking input for entire function: all outputs are reset to logical '0' when blocking input at logical '1'.
An event lists the name of the signal connected to the input and not the name of the output.
None
II. Binary inputs:

4 independent inputs Blocking
4 independent outputs
IV. Measurements:
None
3-427
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. LDU event function settings LDUevents

Text Blocking Input Binary Input 1 Binary Input 2 Binary Input 3 Binary Input 4 Signalling Output 1 Signalling Output 2 Signalling Output 3 Signalling Output 4 Unit BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Default F F F F F ER ER ER ER Min. Max. Step
Blocking Input Binary address used as blocking input. F: not used xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) All outputs at logical '0' when the blocking input is active. Binary Input 1, Binary Input 2, Binary Input 3, Binary Input t4 Binary inputs 1 to 4: Every input acts directly on the corresponding output and can only be influenced by the inversion and blocking parameters. Signal Output 1, Signal Output 2, Signal Output 3, Signal Output 4 Signalling outputs 1 to 4: Every input acts directly on the corresponding output. Whether an output is recorded as an event can be enabled or disabled. When it is enabled, it appears on the local display.
NOTICE: In contrast to all other functions, the name of the signal connected to the corresponding input appears in the event list instead of the name of the output. A function can therefore be given a descriptive, easily understood name that appear in the event list and on the local display.
3-428
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.7. 3.7.1.
Measurement functions Measurement function (UIfPQ)
A. Application
Measurement of voltage, current, real and apparent power and frequency, e.g. for display on the monitor of the control unit or for transferring to a high level station control system for further processing.
B. Features
Single-phase measurement (1 voltage and 1 current I/P) Phase-to-ground or optionally phase-to-phase voltage measurement (providing three-phase Y connected VTs are installed) Evaluation of the fundamental frequency components High accuracy in the frequency range (0.9 ... 1.1) fN Frequency of voltage measured unless voltage too low, in which case current is measured; if both are too low, the result is set to rated frequency At least 1 measurement per second Filters for voltage and current DC components Filters for voltage and current harmonics Provision for compensation of connection and measurement phase errors.

Voltage Current
II. Binary inputs:
None
None
IV. Measurements:

Voltage Current Real power Apparent power Frequency
(unit UN) (unit IN) (unit PN (P)) (unit PN (Q)) (unit Hz)
3-429
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Measurement function settings - UIfPQ

Text Angle PN Voltage Mode Voltage Input Chan. Current Input Chan. CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr Units degrees UN*IN Default Min. 0.000 1.000 direct 0 0 -180.0 0.200 (Select) Max. 180.0 2.500 Step 0.1 0.001
Explanation of parameters
Angle Characteristic angle for measuring real power. The phase-angle is also taken into account when measuring apparent power. The default setting of 0.0 degrees should not be changed, when voltage and current I/Ps are in phase when measuring purely real power, e.g. when measuring the phase-to-ground voltage and current of the same conductor. The setting may vary from 0.0 in the following cases: compensation of CT and VT phase errors compensation of the phase-shift between phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages compensation of the phase-shift between voltage and current in general (e.g. when measuring S-T voltage and R current). PN Rated power corresponding to UN IN. This enables the amplitude of the measured power to be adjusted, for example, to equal the rated power factor of a generator. Voltage Mode Definition of the method of voltage measurement and therefore also the calculation of power. Possible settings: Direct The voltage of the selected voltage I/P is measured directly. Delta The phase-to-phase voltage formed by the selected voltage I/P and the cyclically lagging voltage channel is measured. This setting is not permitted when only a singlephase is connected or when phase-to-phase voltages are connected.
3-430
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Voltage Input Chan. Defines the VT input channel. All voltage I/Ps are available for selection. Current Input Chan. Defines the CT input channel. All current inputs are available for selection.
The measurement function must be carefully set to obtain the best accuracy. The following must be observed:
CT/VT input channel reference values The reference values for the voltage and current input channels must be set such that, when the rated values are applied to the inputs, 1.000 UN and 1.000 IN are measured by the function. In most cases it will be possible to retain the default reference setting (1.000) for the CT and VT input channels. Note that any changes made to the reference value of a three-phase voltage or current I/P applies to all phases.
'Angle' setting for phase error compensation The parameter 'Phase-angle' must be correctly set in order to measure real and apparent power correctly. In most cases it will be possible to retain the default reference setting of 0.0 degrees when measuring the phase-to-ground voltage and current of the same conductor. Other settings may be necessary in the following cases: a) A phase-to-phase voltage is being measured, e.g. measurement of the R phase current in relation to the R - S voltage: phase compensation: +30.0 b) Compensation of CT and VT phase errors. phase compensation: according to calibration, e.g. (5.0...+5.0) c) Change of measuring direction or correction of CT or VT polarity. phase compensation: +180.0 or 180 Where several of these factors have to be taken into consideration, the phase compensation in all the cases must be added and the resultant set. The angles given apply for connection according to the connections in Chapter 12.
3-431
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Power reference value 'PN' In most cases it will be possible to retain the default reference setting (1.000). Since the errors in the voltage and current reference values add geometrically, a fine setting is recommended to achieve the best possible accuracy.
Check the settings for 'Angle' and 'PN' using an accurate test set according to the following procedure: a) Inject purely active power at rated voltage and current. b) The active power measurement must be as close as possible to 1.000 or oscillate symmetrically to either side of it. Adjust the value of 'PN' as necessary. c) The reactive power measurement must be as close as possible to 0.000 or oscillate symmetrically to either side of it. Adjust the value of 'Angle' as necessary.
3-432
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.7.2.
Three-phase current plausibility (Check-I3ph)
A. Application
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase current inputs for monitoring the symmetry of the three-phase system detection of a residual current supervision of the CT input channels
B. Features

Evaluation of the sum of the three phase currents the sequence of the three phase currents Provision for comparing the sum of the three phase currents with a residual current I/P Adjustment of residual current amplitude Blocking at high currents (higher than 2 IN) Blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low currents (below 0.05 IN) Insensitive to DC components Insensitive to harmonics

Phase currents Neutral current (optional)
II. Binary inputs:
Blocking
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Difference between the vector sum of the three phase currents and the neutral current
3-433
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Current plausibility function settings - Check-I3ph

Text Trip I-Setting Delay CT Compensation Current Input Channel Summation Current Input Block Input Trip Signal CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr BinaryAddr SignalAddr IN s Units Default 00000000 0.20 10.0 1.00 0 0 F ER 0.05 0.1 -2.00 1.00 60.0 +2.00 0.05 0.1 0.01 Min. Max. Step
Trip Definition of the tripping logic (matrix) excited by the functions O/P. I-Setting Current setting for tripping. Delay Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal at the O/P. Forbidden settings: 1 s for current settings 0.2 IN CT Compensation Amplitude compensation factor for the residual current I/P, enabling different transformation ratios of the main CTs for phase and residual currents to be equalised. The polarity of the residual current can be reversed by entering negative values. Current Input Channel Defines the current input channel. Any of the three-phase current I/Ps may be selected. The first channel (R phase) of a three-phase group is entered. Summation Current Input Defines the neutral current input channel. Any of the single-phase current I/Ps may be selected. Block Input Input for blocking the function. F: enabled T: disabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-434
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Trip Signal Tripping signal.
Note:
If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place regardless of setting (I-Setting).
3-435
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-436
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.7.3.
Three-phase voltage plausibility (Check-U3ph)
A. Application
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase voltage inputs for detection of residual voltage monitoring the asymmetry of the three-phase voltage system due to the zero-sequence component supervision of the VT input channels
B. Features

Evaluation of the sum of the three phase voltages the sequence of the three phase voltages Provision for comparing the sum of the three phase voltages with a residual voltage I/P Adjustment of residual voltage amplitude Blocking at high voltages (higher than 1.2 UN) Blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low voltages (below 0.4 UN phase-to-phase) Insensitive to DC components Insensitive to harmonics
Evaluation of the phase voltages is only possible in the case of Y connected input transformers, otherwise the residual component cannot be detected.

Phase voltages Neutral voltage (optional)
II. Binary inputs:
Blocking
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Difference between the vector sum of the three phase voltages and the neutral voltage
3-437
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Voltage plausibility function settings - Check-U3ph

Text Trip V-Setting Delay VT Compensation Voltage Input Channel Summation Voltage Input Block Input Trip Signal CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr BinaryAddr Signaladdr Units 00000000 UN s 0.20 10.0 01.00 0 0 F ER 0.05 0.1 -2.00 1.20 60.0 +2.00 0.1 0.1 0.01 Default Min. Max. Step
Trip Definition of the tripping logic (matrix) excited by the functions output. V-Setting Voltage setting for tripping. Delay Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal at the O/P. Forbidden setting: 1 s for voltage settings 0.2 UN VT Compensation Amplitude compensation factor for the residual voltage I/P, enabling different transformation ratios of the main VTs for phase and residual voltages to be equalised. The polarity of the residual voltage can be reversed by entering negative values. Voltage Input Channel Defines the voltage input channel. Any of the three-phase voltage inputs may be selected. The first channel (R phase) of a three-phase group is entered. Not applicable with delta connected VTs. Summation Voltage Input Defines the neutral voltage input channel. Any of the single-phase voltage inputs may be selected.
3-438
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Block Input Input for blocking the function. F: enabled T: disabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Trip Signal Tripping signal.
Note:
If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place regardless of setting (U-Setting).
3-439
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-440
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.7.4.
Disturbance recorder (Disturbance Rec)
A. Application
Recording current and voltage wave forms and the values of function variables before, during and after operation of a protection function.
B. Features

Records up to 9 CT and VT inputs Records up to 12 measured function variables Records up to 16 binary inputs Sampling rate of 12 samples per period (i.e. 600, respectively 720 Hz) 9 analog and 8 binary signals recorded in approx. 5 seconds Function initiated by the general pick-up or general trip signals, or by any binary signal (binary I/P or O/P of a protection function). Data recorded in a ring shift register with provision for deleting the oldest record to make room for a new one. Choice of procedure if memory full: either 'stop recording' or 'Overwrite oldest records'.
All installed inputs available
II. Measured variable inputs:
All installed measured function variables available
III. Binary inputs:
All installed inputs available (also outputs of protection functions)
IV. Binary outputs:

Start of recording Memory full
V. Measurements:
None
3-441
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Disturbance recorder function settings - Disturbance Rec

Text Station Address PreEvent Event PostEvent Recording Mode Trigger Mode Storage Mode Binary Output Mem Full Signal Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 . . Analog Input 12 Binary Input 1 Binary Input 2 . . Binary Input 16 Trig Binary Input 1 Trig Binary Input 2 . . Trig Binary Input 16 MWA Input 1 . . MWA Input 12 MWA Scale1 . . MWA Scale12 Factor MeasVar Factor 1 1 1000 1 MeasVar No Trigger (Select) BinaryAddr F No Trigger No Trigger (Select) (Select) CT/VT-Addr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr F F SignalAddr SignalAddr CT/VT-Addr CT/VT-Addr ms ms ms Units Default 1 40 100 40 A TrigByStart StopOnFull ER ER Min. 0 40 100 40 (Select) (Select) (Select) Max. 99 400 3000 400 Step 1 20 50 20
3-442
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Station Address Number of the disturbance recorder for identifying records for subsequent evaluation. PreEvent Definition of how long the recorder runs before a possible event. Event Definition of the maximum limit for the duration of an event (recording mode A). In recording mode B, the same parameter sets the duration of recording. PostEvent Definition of how long the recorder runs after an event (after EventDur). Recording Mode Definition of how events should be recorded. Possible settings: A: Recording only while the trigger signal is active. (minimum time = 100 ms, maximum time = event duration setting). B: Recording from the instant of the trigger signal for the event duration setting.
Trigger Mode Definition of the instant of triggering and how binary signals are recorded. The configured CT and VT channels are always recorded. Possible settings:
TrigByStart: The disturbance recorder is triggered when a protection function picks up (general pick-up). Binary signals are not recorded. TrigByTrip: The disturbance recorder is triggered when a protection function trips (general trip). Binary signals are not recorded. TrigByBin1: The disturbance recorder is triggered by the binary I/P 1. Binary signals are not recorded. TrigAnyBin: Defined binary signals are recorded and recording is triggered by any of them via an OR gate. TrigStrt&Bin: Defined binary signals are recorded and recording is triggered by any of them via an OR gate and also when a protection function picks up (general pick-up). TrigTrip&Bin: Defined binary signals are recorded and recording is triggered by any of them via an OR gate and also when a protection function trips (general pick-up).
3-443
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
NOTICE: If the trigger conditions are connected to an OR gate and one of them is fulfilled, the other trigger conditions bear no influence and no further records are made. In this situation, a record is initiated when the disturbance recorder is reset.
Storage Mode determines the procedure when the memory is full: StopOnFull: No further data are recorded when the memory is full. Overwrite: The oldest records are overwritten and therefore lost. Binary Output O/P signalling that recording is taking place. Mem Full Signal Warning that the memory is full. Normally, there remains sufficient room for at least one more record after this signal is generated. Analog Input 1...Analog Input 12 Defines the CT and VT inputs to be recorded. The setting is the number of the I/P. The numbers of the CT and VT inputs do not necessarily have to agree with the numbers of the CT and VT channels, however, no gaps are permitted (setting zero). Binary Input 1...Binary Input 16 Binary inputs to be recorded (for triggering modes 'TrStrt&Bin, TrigAnyBin and TrTrip&Bin'). Binary address (binary input or output of a protection function). No recording takes place for FFALSE or TTRUE. A particular order is not necessary. There may also be gaps.
3-444
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Trig Binary Input 1...Trig Binary Input 16 Definition of a corresponding binary signal as one of the trigger signals for initiating recording. All the trigger signals thus defined, are connected to an OR gate so that any one of them can start recording. Possible settings are:

No trigger: The corresponding signal has no influence on the start of recording. Trigger: A positive-going edge of the corresponding signal from logical '0' to logical '1' initiates recording. Inv. Trigger: A negative-going edge of the corresponding signal from logical '1' to logical '0' initiates recording.
MWA Input 1...MWA Input 12 Measured variables to be recorded. Possible settings are:

Disconnected, no input Output of a protection function, measured variable of the selected function Input from SCS, input variable of IBB channel 4, inputs 1...64. Input from AXM, input from the remote Analog Input card
MWA Scale 1...MWA Scale 12 Scaling factors for reading the disturbance records.
3-445
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
E. Setting instructions General:
NOTICE: The disturbance recorder function may be configured only once for each parameter set.
Only the original function can be active in each set. In case a disturbance recorder is active in each parameter set or copied from the original function, the following must be observed: To prevent an incorrect interpretation all the old records are deleted, upon switching over to another active parameter set. Therefore these must be uploaded before a switch over.
The special 'disturbance recorder' function serves to record current and voltage waveforms and measured function variables when a protection function picks up. A battery buffered 64 kByte memory is provided for this purpose, which enables 9 analog and 8 binary signals to be recorded within a maximum of approx. 5 seconds. To ensure that the memory is not filled by useless data, recording only takes place after a starting signal (trigger signal). Each time a start signal is generated, the data are recorded for a predefined time and saved as an 'event'. Thus depending on the definitions of the relevant times, the memory has capacity for between 1 and approx. 56 events. To enable the circumstances leading up to an event and also the responses after an event to be studied, an event comprises three parts, the pre-event data (recorded before the start signal), the data of the event itself and the post-event data. The durations of these three periods can be independently defined. How the data prior to an event is obtained requires a little more explanation. Data are continuously recorded from the instant the programming of the perturbograph function has been completed. They are fed into a ring shift register, the older data at the beginning being overwritten as soon as the register is full. This cyclic overwriting of the ring register continues until a start signal initiates the recording of an event (trigger signal). Thus the circumstances immediately prior to the actual event are available in the ring register. The duration of the record of the actual event is determined by the tripping signal (trigger signal), i.e. recording continues for as long as it is active (recording mode A). If the tripping signal is very short, recording lasts for at least 100 milliseconds and if it is very long, recording is discontinued upon reaching the maximum duration (set event time). A second mode of operation is also provided (recording mode B), for which the duration of recording always equals the set event time regardless of the duration of the trigger signal.
3-446
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The post-event circumstances are of less importance, especially in recording mode B, in which case simply the duration of recording is extended. The essential thing is that during post-event recording, a new trigger signal can initiate the recording of new events. This, however, means that two events overlap and it may not always be possible to fully reconstruct the circumstances of both events (part of the pre-event data is in the preceding event). The entire event memory operates as a ring register. This means that a single event can be deleted to make room for a new one without having to delete the others. The procedure followed when the memory is full can be selected. Either recording is discontinued and no new events are recorded, or the oldest records are overwritten so that the memory always contains the latest events. It must be noted that in this mode, a record can be deleted before it has been transferred to an operator station. Even if transfer of a record is in progress, it will be interrupted to make room for a new record.
Application programs
Disturbance recorder data files are stored in a binary format and can only be evaluated using the PSM E_wineve program (see Operating Instructions 1MRB520372-Ude) or the REVAL program (see REVAL Operating Instructions 1MDU10024-EN). Disturbance recorder data (currents, voltages and measured variables) can be transferred back to the RE.316*4 device using the conversion program XSCON (in conjunction with the test set XS92b). To inject the disturbance signals with other test equipment convert the disturbance records with PSM / E_wineve to COMTRADE format. Refer to Section 9.3. for the procedure for transferring disturbance data via the IBB. Measured function variables may have values which cannot be entirely reproduced by the evaluation software. Such variables can be reduced using the scaling factors 'MeasScale'. The highest number the evaluation software can reproduce faithfully is 16535. The evaluation software automatically takes account of the scaling factors.
3-447
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The following table shows scaling examples for the most important measured function variables.
Function UIfPQ UIfPQ UIfPQ Synchro Check Power Meas. variable f (50Hz) P Q degrees (180) PN Nominal value 20000 820698 820698 31415 1641397 'MeasScale' 2 52 52 2 105
'MeasScale' is given by:
Nominal value + Margin 16535
Processor capacity:
The disturbance recorder function runs on the same central processing unit (CPU) as the protection functions. The processor capacity required by the disturbance recorder function as a percentage of the total capacity and in relation to the number of signals is:

20 % for 9 analog and 0 binary signals 40 % for 9 analog and 16 binary signals
The disturbance recorder function will thus be generally confined to recording the analog variables and be triggered by the general start or general trip signals. Changes in the states of binary signals are nevertheless registered by the event recorder.
3-448
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Recording duration:
The time during which data are recorded can be determined from the following relationship: t rec = 65535 ((n + 1) 22) p (2a + b) 12 max. recording time Number of events recorded Number of CT and VT channels recorded Number of Bytes required for binary channels (one Byte per eight binary signals) duration of one cycle at power system frequency (e.g. 20 ms for 50 Hz)
where trec: n: a: b: p:
Example:
n = 10 a=9 b = 2 (i.e. 9 to 16 signals) p = 20 ms t rec = 65535 ((10 + 1) 22) 20 ms = 5.44 s ( 2 9 + 2) 12
It follows that for the given number of channels and power system frequency, the capacity is sufficient for 10 events of 540 ms duration each.
3-449
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
File PLOT.TXT
The programs PSM E_wineve, REVAL and XSCON need the file PLOT.TXT to be able to process the disturbance recorder data.
Example PLOT.TXT
Hardware configuration: A/D config: Overcurrent: Overvoltage: K9 A1 (IN = 1 A) U1 (UN = 100 V)
N: S: D0 D1 D2 U0 U1 U2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 U8
1 M316V6.5 : OC101 : OC106 : f 2 Trip : : : : : : : : : UR US UT IR IS IT I0 IM0 USS
/CO: 1 /CO: 1 /CO: 1 /CO: /CO: /CO: /CO: /CO: /CO: /CO: /CO: /CO: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 /TR: /TR: /TR: /TR: /TR: /TR: /TR: /TR: /TR: 39.62000 39.62000 39.62000 54.150 54.150 54.150 54.150 1.2530 39.62000 /UN: /UN: /UN: /UN: /UN: /UN: /UN: /UN: /UN: V V V A A A A A V
where: N: S: Dnn Unn:, Inn: /CO 1 to 15: station number: text station name: text binary channels: text (max. 8 char.) voltage channel, current channel: text (max. 8 char.) number of the plot colour for PSM E_wineve (In the case of REVAL the plotting colour is determined by the particular layout) conversion ratio for PSM E_wineve, REVAL unit for PSM E_wineve, REVAL: text
/TR: /UN:
NOTICE: 'Unn:' and 'Inn:' are needed by XSCON to indicate whether a channel is being used for voltage or current.
3-450
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Ratio TR
Voltage channels for REL316*4 and REC316*4 100 V: 200 V: TR = 19.81 TR = 39.62 TR = 0.1981 in V in V times UN
Voltage channels for REG316*4 and RET316*4 15 V: 100 V: 200 V: TR = 5.144 TR = 34.312 TR = 68.624 TR = 0.34312 in V in V in V times UN
Current channels RE.316*4 Protection: 1 A: 2 A: 5 A: Metering: 1 A: 2 A: 5 A: TR = 10.83 TR = 21.66 TR = 54.11 TR = 10.83 TR = 0.2506 TR = 0.5011 TR = 1.253 TR = 0.2506 in A in A in A times IN in A in A in A times IN
These ratios enable WinEVE to determine the secondary values. These ratios must be multiplied by the ratio of the main CTs and VTs to obtain the primary system values.
Automatic creation of the file plotxxx.txt:

In case a disturbance recorder is configured, the file plotxxx.txt is automatically stored in the directory, from which the HMI is started, if:

CAP2/316 starts online, or otherwise subsequent to the upload of the configuration from the device, the configuration is downloaded to the device, a new configuration file is opened,
but not if the configuration data is stored onto a disk.
3-451
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Merger of several plotxxx.txt:

Several files plotxxx.txt with different station numbers (xxx) can be combined to a single plot.txt. The file plot.txt must be at the same location as the disturbance recorder data for the REVAL evaluation program.
Example:
PLOT.TXT (existing file), plot020.txt (data for station No. 20) and plot021.txt (data for station No. 21) can be combined using the DOS command: C:\REL316 C>copy PLOT.TXT+plot020.txt+plot021.txt PLOT.TXT The file PLOT.TXT can be modified using an editor.
Instructions for installing the data evaluation program PSM E_wineve

The data evaluation program must be installed in accordance with the operating instructions 1MRB520372-Uen.
WINEVE
Copy the file 'PLOT.TXT' to the directory: C:\I650\EVENTS A disturbance should be recorded during the commissioning of every relay and the record stored in the directory given above. The procedure for installing the station parameter files is as follows:

Start the WINEVE program. Open a fault record The following error message appears: C:\I650\STATION\ST0xx.PAR Could not find file.
Click on OK. Select the menu item 'Import station file' in the 'Parameter' menu. Select the file PLOT.TXT belonging to this disturbance recording. Select the menu item 'Save station' in the 'Parameter' menu.
This procedure must be repeated for all the relays. The configuration file PLOT.TXT is no longer necessary and the error message concerning the missing station file does not appear. WINEVE provides facility for editing and resaving all the station parameters (texts, colours etc.).
3-452
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Exception: The ratios TR have to be changed in the file PLOT.TXT and the file re-imported and saved again as described above.
REVAL
Copy the file 'PLOT.TXT' to the following directory: C:\SMS\REVAL\EVENTS REVAL rereads the file PLOT.TXT every time a disturbance record is loaded, however, any colours specified in PLOT.TXT are ignored. Instead, the colours are assigned by REVAL and can be edited after a disturbance record has been loaded.
3-453
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-454
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.7.5.
Measurement module (Measurement Module)
A. Application
Measurement of 3 phase voltages, 3 phase currents, active and reactive power, power factor cos (cos phi) and frequency, e.g. for display on an operating device or transmission to a station monitoring system.
B. Features

Measurement of 3 phase voltages (Y and delta), currents, active and reactive power, power factor cos and frequency. Provision for using the 3 phase current inputs in combination with either 3 phase-to-phase voltages or 3 phase-to-earth voltages. 2 independent impulse counter inputs for calculation of interval and accumulated energy The three-phase measurement and impulse counters can be used independently and may also be disabled. Up to 4 measurement module functions can be configured on one RE..16 device. All inputs and outputs can be configured by the user.
C. Inputs and Outputs I. CT / VT inputs:

Voltage Current
II. Binary inputs:

2 impulse inputs 2 reset inputs
2 outputs for the new counter value
IV. Measurement values:

Voltage URS (Unit UN) Voltage UST (Unit UN) Voltage UTR (Unit UN) Voltage UR (Unit UN) Voltage US (Unit UN) Voltage UT (Unit UN) Current R (Unit IN) Current S (Unit IN) Current T (Unit IN) Active power P (Unit PN) Reactive power Q (Unit QN) Power factor cos (Unit cos phi)
3-455
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Frequency f (Unit Hz) Interval energy value 1 (E1Int) Interval pulse number 1 (P1Int) Accumulated energy value 1 (E1Acc) Accumulated pulse number (P1Acc) Interval energy value 2 (E2Int) Interval pulse number 2 (P2Int) Accumulated energy value 2 (E2Acc) Accumulated pulse number 2 (P2Acc)
3-456
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
D. Measurement module function settings (Measurement Module)

Text VoltageInp CurrentInp PN AngleComp t1-Interval PulseInp 1 Reset 1 ScaleFact 1 Cnt 1 New t2-Interval PulseInp 2 Reset 2 ScaleFact 2 Cnt 2 New SignalAddr SignalAddr Select BinaryAddr BinaryAddr 15 min F F 1.0000 0.0001 1.0000 0.0001 CT/VT-Addr UN*IN*3 Deg Select BinaryAddr BinaryAddr Unit Default 0 0 1.000 0.000 15 min F F 1.0000 0.0001 1.0000 0.0001 0.200 -180 2.500 180 0.001 0.1 Min. Max. Step
VoltageInp defines the voltage input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be set and the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. Voltage and current inputs must be assigned before the threephase measurement part of the function can be activated. If only the pulse counter part of the function is to be used, both CT and VT inputs must be disabled. CurrentInp defines the current input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set and the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified. Current and voltage input signals must come from the same CT/VT input module. PN Reference value for measuring power. It enables the amplitude of the power values to be adjusted to take account, for example, of the rated power factor cos or to compensate the amplitude errors of the input transformers.
3-457
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
AngleComp Angular setting for compensating the phase error. It is set to obtain the best possible power measuring accuracy. In many cases, the default setting of 0.0 degrees will be acceptable, but a different setting may be necessary to compensate the following: a) CT and VT phase errors typical setting: -5 ... +5 b) correction of CT or VT polarity typical setting: -180or +180 t1-Interval Interval set for accumulating pulses assigned to E1 acc_interval and Pulse1acc_interval. The following settings are possible: 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 60 min and 120 min. PulseInp 1 Input for energy counter impulse. F: not used T: always active. This setting should not be used. xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Note: Minimum pulse-width is 10 ms.

Reset 1 Input to reset E1accumulate and Pulse1accumulate outputs. F: no reset T: always reset xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) ScaleFact 1 Factor for scaling E1 outputs in relation to pulse counter output: E1acc_interval = Pulse1acc_interval ScaleFact 1 E1accumulate = Pulse1accumulate ScaleFact 1. Cnt 1 New Output to indicate that new values are available at impulse counter 1 outputs and have been frozen. The binary output is cleared 30 s after the interval starts. t2-Interval See t1-Interval. PulseInp 2 See PulseInp 1.
3-458
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Reset 2 See Reset 1. ScaleFact 2 See ScaleFact 1. Cnt 2 New See Cnt 1 New.
3-459
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
E. Setting Instructions
To get the best performance from the measurement module, be sure to set it properly. The following notes should help to decide the correct settings:
Reference values for the analog input channels The settings in this case should be chosen such that the functions measures 1.000 UN and 1.000 IN when rated voltage and current are being applied. In many cases the default setting (1.000) will be satisfactory. Phase compensation 'Angle comp' This setting is important for correct measurement of active and reactive power and the power factor cos . For most cases, it is possible to accept the default value 0.0. A different setting may be necessary to compensate the following: a) CT and VT phase errors typical setting: between -5.0 and +5.0 b) correction of direction of the measurement or CT or VT polarity typical setting: -180.0 or +180.0 Add multiple errors to obtain the correct compensation setting. The angles given apply for connection according to the connections in Chapter 12.
Voltage measurement The zero-sequence component in case of delta-connected VTs is assumed to be zero, but with Y-connected VTs the zero-sequence voltage does have an influence on the phase-to-ground measurements. In an ungrounded power system, the phase-toground voltages will float in relation to ground. Power and frequency measurements A power measurement is obtained by summing the powers of the three-phase system: 3 S = UR IR* + US IS* + UT IT*. The measurement is largely insensitive to frequency in the range (0.8...1.2) fN. The frequency measured is that of the positive sequence voltage. Should the voltage be too low, the frequency is not measured and a value of 0.0 Hz results. Where only the impulse counter is in use, both analog inputs (current and voltage) must be disabled. Where only the measurement part of the function is in use, the binary impulse and reset inputs of both impulse counters must be disabled, i.e. 'always FALSE'.
3-460
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.7.5.1.
Impulse counter inputs
The impulses counted are normally generated by a measuring or metering device (see Fig. 3.100).
TPulse =
tPulse
1 fPulse
tPause
Fig. 3.100
Impulse counter input signal
The maximum impulse repetition rate is 25 Hz (see Fig. 3.100). Thus the minimum time between the positive-going edges of two input 1 impulses is TPuls, min = Hz = 40 ms . 25
The pulse-width is determined by the function generating the impulses and the ratio between the pulse-width and the interval between lagging and leading edges should be in the range 1:3 to 1:1, i.e.:
tPulse, min = 1 1 TPulse, min = TPulse, min = 10 ms 1+ 3 4
Since the impulse counter is polled approximately every 5 ms, impulses are reliably detected with a safety factor of about 2. The impulse counter evaluates the positive-going edges (0 1) of the input signal. To filter any contact bounce (debouncing) phenomena, only the first positive-going edge is evaluated within a given period (typically 10 ms).
3-461
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3.7.5.2.
Impulse counter operation
Fig. 3.101 shows the principles of impulse counter operation.

Block diagram for one impulse counter channel
Scaling factor tinterval Intermediate buffer acc_interval Counter freeze tinterval
Impulse counter input
Scaling
Eacc_interval Pulseacc_interval
Reset
Scaling factor
Intermediate buffer accumulate
Eaccumulate
Scaling
Pulseaccumulate
Signal response tinterval tinterval Impulse counter input Eacc_interval Pulseacc_interval

Counter values to be transferred
tinterval
tinterval Reset t t
Eaccumulate Pulseaccumulate
Counter value to be transferred
Fig. 3.101
Block diagram for one impulse counter channel and signal response
3.7.5.3.
Impulse counter operating principle
The binary inputs 'Reset 1' and 'Reset 2' reset the counter values Eaccumulate and Pulseaccumulate to zero. The interval values Eacc_interval and Pulseacc_interval are not reset.
3-462
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
When a reset command is applied to binary input 'Reset 1' or 'Reset 2', measurement events with the values of Eaccumulate and Pulseaccumulate are created for the respective channel before its counters are reset. Impulse counter values are stored in a RAM with a battery supply and are not lost should the auxiliary supply fail. Impulses arriving at the inputs while the software is being initialised, e.g. after settings have been made, are lost.
Capacity for Pulseaccumulate: At the maximum impulse repetition rate, the total number of impulses counted during a year is 25 pps 3,600 s/h 8,760 h/year = 788,400,000 impulses per year. The output is reset to zero when a counter reaches 2,000,000,000, i.e. 2 109. Unless special measures taken or a counter is reset, it can overflow at the worst after approx. 2,5 years. Should an impulse counter overflow, the value of Pulseaccumulate is recorded in the event list. No further measures have been included, because 1. an overflow is hardly likely to occur. 2. should an overflow occur, it is obvious providing the counters are checked regularly, for example, by an SCS. If necessary, the total number of impulses counted since the last reset can be determined even after an overflow.
3.7.5.4.
Interval processing
The interval starts at a full hour plus a even multiple of tInterval and is synchronised to a full minute by the internal RE..16 clock. Assuming tInterval is set to 120 min, the interval is started at even hours throughout the day. Impulse counter and energy outputs are set at the start of the first regular interval, even if the previous interval was incomplete. This ensures that no impulses are lost after starting the function. When tinterval expires, the following takes place:
The counter values Eaccumulate, Pulseaccumulate, Eacc_interval and Pulseacc_interval are stored in the intermediate buffers and remain unchanged until the end of the next interval. When the new impulse counter results are frozen at the end of the interval, the binary output 'Cnt 1 New', respectively 'Cnt 2 New' is set to TRUE. It is reset after 30 s regardless of interval duration and can be used to initiate reading of a new set of frozen interval values.
3-463
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
If selected for transmission, transmission of the counter values via the LON interface is initiated by the positive-going edge of this output. The values Eacc_interval and Pulseacc_interval of the respective channel are only recorded as measurement events providing the output 'Cnt 1 New', respectively 'Cnt 2 New' is being used, for example, to control an event recorder, LED or signalling relay.
The freezing of results, resetting and event recording of the interval counters is illustrated in Fig. 3.102.
Impulse counter input t
Pulseacc_interval
Internal only
t
Reset t
Measurement event
Pulseaccumulate
Internal only
CounterFrozen
30 s
tInterval
30 s
tInterval
30 s
tInterval
30 s
tInterval
30 s
tInterval
Fig. 3.102
Interval processing
3-464
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.8. 3.8.1. 3.8.1.1.
Data transmission Principle of operation of the A/D converter 316EA63 Introduction
Local and remote stations are synchronised at the same sampling rate. Because the measurement of the data exchanged between the stations is synchronised, the method of memory management and subsequent digital filtering, the measured variables of all the channels (local and transferred remote signals) are made available to the main CPU at the same time. This is an essential for reliable differential longitudinal protection.
3.8.1.2. Synchronisation principle
The transfer of data via the optical modem between the 316EA62 units in the two stations (master and slave) is synchronised. Which of the stations is designated master and which slave is determined when setting the system parameters using the operator control program (HMI). Should the communications channel become disturbed or interrupted, each of the A/D converters generates its own clock signal. A counter is started when the master transmits a signal to the slave. Upon receiving the signal, the slave sends an echo back to the master. The counter is stopped by the master and the count divided by 2 when it receives the echo. The result is the transmission time. The echo signal includes specific data which are tested by both stations and generate an error flag should the result of the test be negative.
3.8.1.3. Data transmission principle
The first three converted signals obtained from up to six local channels are transferred via the serial interface to the optical modem, which then transmits them to the synchronously operating remote station. All the converted variables of the local station (maximum 6 channels) and the variables received from the opposite station (maximum 3 channels) are digitally filtered before being transferred to the dual-port memory on the main CPU board 316VC61a. Provision is also made for the binary signal transmission function to transfer 8 binary signals at the same time for processing in the remote station (see Section 3.8.3. Binary signal transmission).
3.8.1.4. Consequences of transmission errors
Should an error occur during the transmission of data, an error flag is set. Thereby in such cases, the affected protection function is automatically blocked. Attention is immediately drawn to data errors (error flag set on the 316EA62 board) by the system alarm 'Modem error'. If the binary signal transmission function is also active, the alarm 'RemoteBiError' is generated.
3-465
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The diagnostic function, on the other hand, records these errors after a delay of 80 ms, i.e. only after the communications channel is considered to be permanently disturbed. A single transmission error, e.g. a parity error, does not therefore lead to an error being recorded by the diagnostic function.
Consequences of transmission errors for protection functions:
Functions which process the local analog variables (A/D channels 1 to 6) are excluded from blocking by the communications channel and serve as back-up protection. Functions which process the analog variables transferred via the communications channel (A/D channels 7 to 9) are blocked (DiffLine, Check-I3ph, Current etc.). The signals of the binary signal transmission function are set to 'OFF' (0 or false). The inputs of the disturbance recorder A/D channels 7 to 9 are set to zero.
Note on the 'SynchroCheck' and 'EarthFltGnd2' functions:

During an attempt to synchronise the two stations, the synchro-check function can generate the signals 'Voltage Busbar Input Phase', 'Voltage Line Input Phase', 'Phase Diff. OK Signal' and 'Freq. Diff. OK Signal'. Nevertheless, incorrect operation cannot take place (closing of the circuit-breaker not enabled). The sensitive earth fault function ('Sensitive Earth Fault for Grounded Systems') can briefly generate the signals 'Start Signal', 'Meas Forward' and 'Meas Backward'. This also cannot cause incorrect operation.
3-466
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.8.2.
Longitudinal differential protection (Diff-Line)
A. Application
Differential protection of overhead lines, cables, transformer feeders (two-winding transformers) and generator/transformer units.
B. Features

Non-linear inverse current operating characteristic (see Fig. 3.103) High stability during through-faults and CT saturation Fast operation Individual comparison of phase currents Insensitive to DC components Insensitive to harmonics
Optional for power transformer protection: Inrush restraint evaluation of the ratio of second harmonic to fundamental detection of the highest phase current detection of an energised transformer on the basis of the load current Phase compensation for group of connection Amplitude compensation (CT ratio)
Current (2 x 3 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking Inrush g-High

Tripping Tripping R phase Tripping S phase Tripping T phase Inrush signal Stability signal
3-467
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
IV. Measurements:

R phase neutral current S phase neutral current T phase neutral current R phase restraint current S phase restraint current T phase restraint current
3-468
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
D. Longitudinal differential function settings - Diff-Line

Text Trip Current Inp.Ch 1 a1 s1 Current Inp.Ch 2 a2 s2 g Setting v Setting b Setting g High Setting I -Inst InRush Ratio InRush Time Block Inp In Rush Inp High Set Inp Trip Trip-R Trip-S Trip-T Inrush Current Stabilisation Unit Default Min. Max. Step
00000000 CT/VT-Addr 0 1.00 D CT/VT-Addr 0 1.00 d0 IN 0.30 0.50 IN 1.50 IN 1.20 IN 3 % 10 s 5 BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F BinaryAddr F SignalAddr ER SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr
0.05 2.20 (Select) 0.05 (Select) 0.1 0.25 1.25 0.50 3 6 0 2.20 0.5 0.50 5.00 2.50 15 20 90
0.01
0.01 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 1 1 1
Trip Tripping logic (matrix) to which the tripping output of the function is connected. Current Inp.Ch 1 Defines the CT input channel for side 1. The first channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected. a1 CT ratio compensation factor on side 1. s1 Group of connection on side 1 (primary). Possible settings: Y: star-connected winding (transformer in the zone of protection) D: delta-connected winding
3-469
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Current Inp.Ch 2 Defines the CT input channel for side 2. The first channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected. a2 CT ratio compensation factor on side 2. s2 Group of connection on side 2. Possible settings: All the usual phase groups, defining how connected (y = star, d = delta, z = zigzag) phase-shift of the voltage on side 2 in relation to the voltage on side 1 in multiples of 30 g Setting Defines the basic setting g for the operating characteristic. v Setting Defines the pick-up ratio v for the operating characteristic. b Setting Defines the setting of b on the operating characteristic. This is normally set to about 1.5 times the load current. g High Setting This is a high-set Basic setting which becomes effective when the input 'HighSetInp' is activated. The higher setting prevents mal-operation from taking place which may otherwise occur due, for example, to a temporarily higher excitation current (overfluxing). I -Inst The differential current above which tripping takes place independently of the inrush detector. This setting enables operating times for high internal fault currents to be reduced. InRush Ratio Ratio of 2nd harmonic to fundamental of the current above which the inrush detector picks up. InRush Time Time during with the inrush detector is enabled after the protected unit is energised or after a through-fault. Block Inp Input for blocking the function F: enabled T: disabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-470
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
In Rush Inp Activates the inrush detector although the transformer is already energised. It enables inrush currents to be detected which occur, for example, when a transformer is energised in parallel. F: not used xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) High Set Inp Activates the high-set Basic setting g-High. F: not used T: always active xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions) Trip Tripping signal.
Note:
The differential protection function does not have a starting signal and every time it trips the signal 'General start' is set together with the 'Trip' signal, providing the Trip command is configured to be recorded as an event (ER). The tripping measurands will be stored in the event list only if the trip command is configured in the event list. Trip-R Tripping signal R phase. Trip-S Tripping signal S phase. Trip-T Tripping signal T phase. Inrush Current Inrush current detection signal. Stabilisation Signal IH > b during a through-fault.
3-471
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 3.103
Operating characteristic of the longitudinal differential protection function
3-472
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Basic setting Pick-up ratio Operating characteristic changing point High-set Basic setting, Instantaneous operating current (uninfluenced by inrush detector) Inrush detector pick-up ratio Time during which inrush detector active Choice of current input CT ratio compensation factors Group of connection on side 1 Group of connection on side 2 g Setting v Setting b Setting g-High Setting I -Inst InRush Ratio InRush Time Current Inp.Ch 1, 2 a1 a2 s1 s2
The longitudinal differential function is primarily a phase fault protection, but may also detect ground faults. It is a sensitive, fast and strictly discriminative unit protection.
3.8.2.1. Setting instructions for lines with a power transformer in the protected zone
Basic setting g
The setting for 'g Setting' defines the minimum operating current at which the function picks up for an internal fault. The value for 'g Setting' should be as low as possible to enable the function to detect high-resistance faults as well as solid phase faults. Inter-turn faults are also detected where the protected unit includes a power transformer. The setting for 'g Setting' must be high enough, on the other hand, to exclude any risk of mal-operation due to:

line capacitance charging currents line leakage currents CT errors the off-load current of any power transformer included in the protected unit at the highest short-time system voltage
It should be noted when the protected unit includes a power transformer that:
The off-load current of a modern transformer is very low, usually between 0.3 % and 0.5 % of IN at rated system voltage. However, the excitation current can reach 10 % or more of IN at the maximum short-time system voltage such as can occur, for example, following load shedding. A tap-changer can vary the voltage ratio in the range 5 to 10 %, in some cases up to 20 % and more. This has to be taken into account both in the case of power transformers with manually adjusted tap and with automatic tap-changers.
3-473
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Note:
This error is proportional to the through-current and is therefore best taken into account by the pick-up ratio setting 'v Setting'. These factors produce an operating current which flows under normal system operating conditions. The basic setting 'g Setting' must therefore be chosen higher than the off-load operating current. A typical value is g = 0.3 IN (30 % IN).
Pick-up ratio v
The pick-up setting 'v Setting' determines the stability of the longitudinal differential scheme during an external fault, i.e. at high levels of through-fault current. The value of 'v Setting' is defined by the ratio of the operating current to restraint current. It should be chosen such that faults can be detected under load conditions which only produce a low operating current. Through-fault stability must be maintained, however, at all costs. A typical setting is v = 0.5.
Restraint current b
The restraint current b defines the point at which the slope of the characteristic is switched. The inclined part of the operating characteristic permits the protection to remain stable even when CT saturation occurs during a throughfault. The combination of the two slopes with a variable point of switching from one to the other enables the operating characteristic to be adapted to suit the requirements of the application. A setting of 1.5 is recommended for 'b Setting'. This provides high stability during through-faults and adequate sensitivity for fault currents in the region of the load current.
Factor a2
The full setting range of factor a2 for CT ratio correction only applies when the reference values of the analog channels are set to 1.000. The highest permissible setting reduces for other reference value settings according to the ratio between the analog channel reference values (line side 2 to line side 1).
Operating characteristic
A restraint current is derived from the input variables I1 and I2 measured at the two ends of the protected unit to ensure adequate through-fault stability. As the name implies, the restraint current opposes the operating current.
3-474
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The restraint current is either given by the equation: IH = I1 I2 cos or it is zero IH = 0 The angle is defined as
= < (I1; I2 )
for -90 < < 90
for 90 < < 270
The vector diagram relating the currents entering and leaving the protected unit and the operating current measured on a loaded line is as follows:
I2 I1
I2
HEST 905 003 C
The following diagram then applies during a through-fault:

I2 I I2 I1
= 0
HEST 905 003 C
This then changes to the following for an internal fault:

I2
I1
I2
= 180
HEST 905003 C
According to the equation for the restrain current, IH becomes in the case of a through-fault ( = 0) respectively in the case of an internal fault a) supplied from one end (I2 = 0) : IH = 0 b) supplied from both ends ( = 180) : IH = 0 High through-fault currents may cause CT saturation. It is for this reason that the characteristic is switched to the one with an infinite slope for IH/IN > b. : IH = I1 I2
3-475
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
It should be noted that for the part of the characteristic with an infinite slope to be active, I1 and I2 must also be higher than b and not just IH.
I IN
0,75 0,5 0,25 g b

IH IN
HEST 905 003 C
0,5
1,5
Fig. 3.104
Operating characteristic of the longitudinal differential function for high through-currents
This characteristic would scarcely, however, detect an internal fault supplied from one end when a through-current such as the load current is flowing. Therefore if the current at one end of the line is lower than the setting for 'b', i.e. I I1 or 2 < b IN IN the slope determined by the setting for 'v' applies throughout.
I IN
1 0,75 0,5 0,25 g b
IH IN
HEST 905 003 C
Fig. 3.105
Operating characteristic for low through-currents
This characteristic provides high sensitivity for detecting internal faults.
3-476
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Example:
Internal fault and through-current.
I1 I = 4 2 =1 =0 IN IN
-I 2 I I2
I1
HEST 905 003 C
I = I1 + I2 = 4 IN - IN = 3 IN
IH = I1 I2 cos = 4 IN 1 IN 1 = 2 IN
It follows from this that even at the highest setting for 'v', the internal fault is reliably detected in spite of the through-current.
High-set Basic setting g-High

The high-set Basic setting 'g-High' is an alternative basic setting for greater stability under certain operating conditions. The change from the normal basic setting is accomplished with the aid of an external signal. In some instances with a power transformer included in the protected unit a higher operating current can be produced by, for example:
an increased off-load (excitation) current due to a higher system voltage (switching operations, following load shedding, generator regulator fault etc.) an increased CT ratio error (transformer tap-changer on the maximum or minimum tap).
Where such abnormal operating conditions are detected by a voltage relay or an overfluxing relay, they can be used to switch the basic setting of the longitudinal differential function from 'g' to 'g-High'. The recommended setting is g-High = 0.75 IN. The reset ratio in the event of a trip remains unchanged at 0.8 g.
Operating current I -Inst

The setting for 'I -Inst' enables faster tripping to be achieved for internal faults in certain circumstances (disables restraint by the inrush detector). The setting chosen must be higher than the maximum current to be expected when energising the protected unit (e.g. capacitive line charging current). The typical setting is I-Inst = 12 IN for protected units with small to medium power transformers.
3-477
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Pick-up ratio for inrush detection

This setting defines the sensitivity for detecting inrush phenomena. Most transformers have a ratio of 2nd harmonic to fundamental in excess of 15 %. A setting of 10 % is recommended to ensure reliable inrush detection.
Time allowed for inrush detection

The time during which the inrush detector is enabled is determined by how long after energising the protected unit there is a danger of maloperation due to inrush flowing just from one side. Typical settings are 5 s for protected units with power transformers. The inrush detection is active if:

the binary input 'In Rush Inp' is set, the Transformer is shut off during the period 'Inrush Time' after it is recognized that the transformer has been switched on.
The transformer will be recognized as switched on, when the highest phase current in all the windings exceeds 4 % IN (in case the 'a' factor and the reference value is one).
HINWEIS: Both inrush detectors have to be active when there is a power transformer in the protection zone even if it is only fed from one end, because both functions process the same measured variables.
Choice of current input
To simplify the setting of a1, a2, s1 and s2, reversing the selection of the channels on master and slave is recommended irrespective of whether the protected unit includes a power transformer or not. This procedure enables a1 and a2 as well as s1 and s2 to have identical settings in both master and slave. Settings: Master: Slave: CurrentInp1 CurrentInp2 CurrentInp1 CurrentInp2 to channel No.1 to channel No.7 to channel No.7 to channel No.1
CT ratio factors a1 and a2

The factors a1 and a2 provide facility for compensating differences between the rated currents of the protected unit and the CTs. The 'a' factors are defined by the ratio of the CT rated current to the reference current.
3-478
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
In the case of a two-winding transformer in the zone of protection, both windings have the same rated power and the transformer rated current is taken as the reference current. Providing the 'a' factors are correctly calculated and set, the settings for 'g Setting', 'v Setting', 'b Setting', 'gHigh Setting' and 'I -Inst' are all referred to the rated current of the transformer and not the primary rated current of the CTs.
250/5 A
1 25 MVA 2
110 kV 20 kV
131 A 722 A
1000/5 A
HEST 905 004a C
IB1 = ITN1 = 131 A IB2 = ITN2 = 722 A
a1 = a2 =
ICT1 250 = = 1.91 ITN1 131 ICT2 1000 = = 1.38 ITN2 722
The reference current setting only differs from the rated current of the transformer if this is necessary because of the setting ranges of the 'a1' and 'a2' factors. It is also possible to take account of differences between CT and twowinding power transformer rated currents using the reference value settings of the A/D channels. In this case, a1 = a2 = 1 providing the primary and secondary powers are the same. For the above example, the reference value settings are: ITN1 131 = = 0.524 ICT1 250 ITN2 722 = = 0.722 ICT 2 1000
The 'a' factors only compensate the CT ratios for the longitudinal differential function. Changing the reference values of the A/D channels compensates the CT ratios for all the systems functions and measurements.
3-479
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Compensating the phase group of a power transformer in the zone of protection

Phase-to-phase currents are used for measurement in order to be able to compare the primary and secondary currents without regard to whether the windings are connected in star or delta. The phase-angle between the currents, however, has to be compensated by adding or subtracting current components within the protection function. The phase relationships between the current vectors for the various groups of connection can be seen from the following figures. For example, for a power transformer Yd5
I R S T I 1R I
1R 1S
I 2R I 2S I 2T
Star-connected primary
R S T
I 1T
Delta-connected secondary Phase-angle between the currents of the same phase 5 30 = 150
150
HEST 905 005 C
I1r (compensat ed) =1/ 3 ( I1R + I1S ) I2r (compensat ed) =I2R
Yy0
Yy6
I 2R
Yd1
Yd5
1 R R S S T T I 2R 2 I 1R
Yd7
1 R S S T T I 2R 2 R I 1R
Yd11
1 R S T 2 R S T HEST 905 006 C I 2R I 1R
3-480
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Yz1
Yz5
1 R R S S T T 2 I1R
I 2R
Yz7
Yz11
Dy1
Dy5
1 R S T 2 R S T
1R
I 2R
Dy7
Dy11
1 R S T 2 I R S T 2R I1R
I 2R
Dd0
Dd6
1 R S T 2 R S T I1R
2R
HEST 905 007 C
Dz0
Dz2
Dz4
1 R S T R S T I 2R 2 I 1R
Dz6
1 R S T S T 2 R I1R
I2R
Dz8
1 R S S T T I 2R 2 R I1R
Dz10
1 R S T 2 R I2R S T I 1R
HEST 905 008 C
3-481
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
List of all compensation matrices for R phase (S and T phases cyclically rotated):
Compensation matrices (R phase) A B C D E F G H J K L M N O = ( 1 0 0) = (-1 0 0) = ( 1 -1 0) = (-1 1 0) = ( 1 0 -1) = (-1 0 1) = ( 2 -1 -1) = (-2 1 1) = (-1 2 -1) = ( 1 -2 1) = (-1 -1 2) = ( 1 1 -2) = ( 0 1 0) = ( 0 -1 0)
Ratio factor
1 1
1 / 3 1 / 3 1 / 3 1 / 3
1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1 1
Table 3.14
Compensation matrices with associated ratio factors
a) Y-connected on side 1
Applies to two-winding transformers: Phase group Yy0 Yy6 Yd1 Yd5 Yd7 Yd11 Yz1 Yz5 Yz7 Yz11 Compensation matrix Side 1 E E E C E C E C E C Compensation matrix Side 2 E F A B B A G H H G
3-482
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
b) -connected on side 1
Applies to two-winding transformers: Phase group Dy1 Dy5 Dy7 Dy11 Dd0 Dd6 Dz0 Dz2 Dz4 Dz6 Dz8 Dz10 Compensation matrix Side 1 A A A A A A A A A A A A Compensation matrix Side 2 C F D E A B G K L H J M
3.8.2.2.
Setting instructions for lines without a power transformer in the protected zone
The recommendations below are the result of extensive measurements on our transient network simulator and take into account the requirement of stability and tripping time of the protection. As reference current for all recommendations below, a current Ibase has to be defined. Ibase is chosen to be equal or greater than the maximal load current of the line, normally Ibase is made equal to the rated CT primary current. The settings g, b and I-Inst are per unit values referred to Ibase.
Choice of current input

To simplify the setting of a1, a2, s1 and s2, reversing the selection of the channels on master and slave is recommended irrespective of whether the protected unit includes a power transformer or not. This procedure enables a1 and a2 as well as s1 and s2 to have identical settings in both master and slave. Settings: Master: Slave: Current Inp. Ch. 1 Current Inp. Ch. 2 Current Inp. Ch. 1 Current Inp. Ch. 2 to channel No.1 to channel No.7 to channel No.7 to channel No.1
3-483
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
a1 and a2- settings (CT-ratio adaptation)

Range 0.05 ... 2.20, Steps 0.01. These settings allow adaptation of Ibase, when the rated CT primary current differs from the maximal load current.
a) Case 1 CTs in the line feeder with equal CT ratios

Lines in substations with single or multiple bus arrangement and 1 CB stations with CTs in the line feeder. The CT ratio is matched to the maximal load current, i.e. rated CT primary current = max. Iload a1 = 1; a2 = 1
b) Case 2 CTs in the line feeder with unequal CT ratios

Lines in substations with single or multiple bus arrangement and 1 CB stations with CTs in the line feeder. CTs of unequal ratio at the two line ends. Adaptation to the lower rated CT primary current: a = ICT / Ibase
Master Slave Slave Master
1000/1 A a1 = 1000/800 = 1.25 a2 = 1
800/5 A a1= 1.25 a2 = 1
1000/1 A a1 = 1 a2 = 1000/800 = 1.25
800/5 A a1 = 1 a2 = 1.25
Ibase = 800 A
Ibase = 800 A
c) Case 3 CTs in the diameter

Lines in substations with 1 - or 2 - CB arrangement. 2 CTs of a diameter connected in parallel, high CT-ratio. The CT ratio of the current transformers located in the diameter of 1 CB stations are usually matched to the through current from one bus to the other and not to the rated line current. a = ICT / Ibase
3-484
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
s- setting (Connection/Vector group correction)

For a line alone, no phase group compensation necessary and the following is selected: s1=D, s2=d0 With this setting the zero sequence component of the currents is included in the measurement, and the best sensitivity and correct phase selection is achieved. No other s- setting shall be selected, unless there is a transformer in the protected zone.
v- setting (bias at small currents, below Ibase b)

0.25 or 0.50 v= 0.50 is chosen as a standard setting
Minimum operating current

Two ranges can be set: g and g-High
a) g- setting (lower range)

Range 0.1 ... 0.5, Step 0.1 Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always FALSE The g setting defines the minimum operating current. The protection will pick up for a fault current of > Ibase g. In most line protection applications the range 0.1 ... 0.5 is too low. Settings as given in Section b) below are preferred
b) g-High setting (upper range)

Range 0.50 ... 2.5, Step 0.25 Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always TRUE With this setting the g-setting is not active any more, the g-High setting determines the pick-up current. The protection will pick up at a fault current of > Ibase g-High.
c) Minimum allowed setting

g or g High 2.5 capacitive ch arg ing current of the protected Line Ibase
This setting ensures full stability in an effectively grounded network. In non-effectively grounded networks apply a factor 3.0 instead of 2.5. With this setting transient capacitive inrush currents will not endanger the stability.
3-485
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
It may be an advantage to set g-High b, thereby minimising the requirements imposed on the CTs. See examples in Section 3. The pick-up current shall be set lower than the minimum fault current and shall allow for sufficient ground-fault resistance. Justification of factors 2.5 and 3.0 (used above)
The capacitive charging currents are measured by the protection as differential currents. The minimum operating current therefore has to be set higher then the maximum capacitive charging current occurring for a fault outside the line. Since the measurement is made on a per phase basis, the capacitive current to be taken into account is the highest possible charging current per phase. This current arises in the healthy phases during a single phase-ground fault (voltage rises). The 'capacitive charging current of the protected line' is the phasecurrent measured at single ended infeed, i.e. current measured with the circuit open at the remote end. f = 2.5 = f1 f2' f3 In solidly grounded systems f = 3.0 = f1 f2" f3 In systems with isolated neutral or Petersen coil compensation (non-effectively ground networks) f1 = 1.2 Max. system voltage Max. phase to ground voltage in solidly f2' = 0.8 3 grounded systems (Z0 / Z1 < 4) Max. phase to ground voltage in nonf2" = 3 effectively grounded systems (4 < Z0 / Z1 < ) f3 = 1.5 Safety factor The pick-up current 'g-High' may be used in most applications and may be set relatively high, since the operating current is referred to the actual short circuit current flowing through the fault ( = differential current) rather than to the individual infeed currents. A fast supervision logic blocks the differential function in the case of a communication failure in the fibre optic link, no second release criterion is therefore required. For this reason the differential protection trips both ends of the line and is not dependent on the individual infeed currents nor faces a problem in case of weak infeed from one end. Max. fault resistance The max. ground fault resistance, which can be detected is approximately (source impedances neglected):
RF = Urated 3 Ibase g high
3-486
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Inrush restraint
Parameter 'In Rush Inp' = Always TRUE This setting allows optimal stability also in case of heavy through flowing transformer inrush currents with long DC time constants.
b- setting
Switching over to v = , the 2nd harmonic inrush restraint remains active Range 1.25 ... 2.50, Steps 0.25 (b Ibase) has to be set above ILoad_max. Recommended setting: b = 1.5.
I-Inst setting
v = , the 2nd harmonic inrush restraint is not active above this current level. Range 5 ... 15, Steps 1.0 Range 3 ... 15, Steps 1.0 for SW-Versions < V4.0 for SW-Versions V4.0
I-Inst = 3 is chosen as a standard setting I-Inst = 5 is recommended for a line with single end infeed, feeding a transformer with high MVA rating. With this setting the protection tolerates high inrush currents flowing over the line. Such currents might produce unequal saturation phenomena in the CTs at the two line ends. The peak value of the inrush current may reach up to 15 Ibase.
3-487
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
3-488
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.8.3.
Binary data transmission (RemoteBin)
A. Application
Provision for transmitting and receiving up to 8 binary signals between local and remote stations. The function is only active when the system is equipped with an A/D converter Type 316EA62. The binary signals are transferred between the stations via optical modems on the 316EA62 plug-in units and the optical fibre cables linking them. Binary signals which are received can be used for blocking, tripping and control functions.
B. Features

Transmission of any 8 binary signals to the remote station Provision of 8 signals received from the remote station (4 of which can be assigned to the tripping logic)
None
II. Binary inputs:
8 inputs (binary signals for transmission to the remote station)

8 outputs (signals received from the remote station which can be assigned to binary outputs) Transmission error signal
IV. Measurements:
None
3-489
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
D. Binary data transmission settings - RemoteBin

Text Trip 1, Rem Chan 1 Trip 2, Rem Chan 2 Trip 3, Rem Chan 3 Trip 4, Rem Chan 4 Send Channel 1 Send Channel 2 Send Channel 3 Send Channel 4 Send Channel 5 Send Channel 6 Send Channel 7 Send Channel 8 Remote Channel 1 Remote Channel 2 Remote Channel 3 Remote Channel 4 Remote Channel 5 Remote Channel 6 Remote Channel 7 Remote Channel 8 Remote Bin Error Unit Trip Chan Trip Chan Trip Chan Trip Chan BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr BinaryAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr SignalAddr Default 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 F F F F F F F F ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER Min. Max. Step
Trip 1, Remote Chan 1 Tripping logic (matrix) excited by the signal 'RemChan 1' from the remote station. Trip 2, Remote Chan 2 Tripping logic (matrix) excited by the signal 'RemChan 2' from the remote station. Trip 3, Remote Chan 3 Tripping logic (matrix) excited by the signal 'RemChan 3' from the remote station. Trip 4, Remote Chan 4 Tripping logic (matrix) excited by the signal 'RemChan 4' from the remote station.
3-490
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Send Channel 1 (2...8) Input 1 (2...8) for transmitting a signal to the remote station. F: disabled T: enabled xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function) Remot Channel 1 (2...8) Signal 1 (2...8) received from the remote station. Remote Bin Error Signal indicating an error during binary data transmission.
3-491
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
NOTICE: The 'Binary Data Transmission' function may only be configured once for each parameter set.
Should the binary data transmission fail, the alarm 'Remote Bin Error' is generated and the remote channels are set to 'Off' ('0'). If this response would disrupt an application, provision is made for inverting the signals transferred by inverting the signal (Send Channel) before transmission in the remote station and inverting the signal (Remote Channel) after reception in the local station. A failure of the communications channel ('Modem Error') also generates the alarm 'Remote Bin Error' even if the 'Binary Data Transmission' function is only activated in one station.
3-492
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 04
4.
4.1. 4.2. 4.2.1. 4.2.1.1. 4.2.1.1.1. 4.2.1.1.2. 4.2.1.1.3. 4.2.1.1.4. 4.2.1.2. 4.2.1.2.1. 4.2.1.2.2. 4.2.1.2.3. 4.2.1.2.4. 4.2.1.2.5. 4.2.1.3. 4.2.1.4. 4.2.1.5. 4.2.1.5.1. 4.2.1.5.2. 4.2.1.5.3. 4.2.1.5.4. 4.2.1.5.5. 4.2.1.5.6. 4.2.1.5.7. 4.2.1.5.8. 4.2.1.5.9. 4.2.1.5.10. 4.2.1.5.11. 4.2.1.5.12. 4.2.1.6. 4.2.1.7. 4.2.2. 4.2.2.1. 4.2.2.2. 4.2.3. 4.2.3.1. 4.2.3.2. 4.2.3.3. 4.2.3.4. 4.2.3.5. 4.2.3.6. 4.2.3.7. 4.2.3.8. 4.2.3.9.
DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION AND APPLICATION

Summary............................................................................................4-4 Protection functions ...........................................................................4-6 Distance protection ............................................................................4-6 Starters ..............................................................................................4-6 Operation of the starters ....................................................................4-6 Overcurrent starters ...........................................................................4-6 Underimpedance starters...................................................................4-8 Phase selection................................................................................4-11 Measuring units................................................................................4-13 Operation of the measuring units.....................................................4-13 Measurement during processing period I.........................................4-13 Measurement during processing period II........................................4-16 Directional decision..........................................................................4-18 Construction of the measuring characteristic...................................4-19 VT supervision .................................................................................4-22 Back-up overcurrent function O/C....................................................4-25 System logic.....................................................................................4-25 Structure of the system logic............................................................4-25 Enabling and blocking logic (SUPBL) ..............................................4-26 Switch-onto-fault logic (SOTF).........................................................4-27 Short-zone logic (STUB) ..................................................................4-28 Zone extension logic (ZE) ................................................................4-29 Transient blocking logic (Transbl) ....................................................4-30 Communication channel failure (Deblock) .......................................4-32 Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT).........................4-33 Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT)...........................4-35 Overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR)..................................4-38 PLC transmit logic (HFSEND)..........................................................4-39 Tripping logic....................................................................................4-40 Power swing blocking (PSB)............................................................4-43 Signal designations and abbreviations ............................................4-45 Auto-reclosure..................................................................................4-49 Logic segments................................................................................4-49 Signal designations..........................................................................4-57 Breaker failure protection.................................................................4-60 Introduction ......................................................................................4-60 Three-phase/ single-phase mode ....................................................4-61 'Redundant Trip'...............................................................................4-61 'Retrip' ..............................................................................................4-62 'Backup Trip' ....................................................................................4-62 'Remote Trip'....................................................................................4-62 'Unconditional Trip'...........................................................................4-62 'End Fault Trip' .................................................................................4-62 'External Trip' ...................................................................................4-63
4-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.4. 4.2.4.1. 4.2.4.2. 4.2.4.2.1. 4.2.4.2.2. 4.2.4.2.3. 4.2.4.2.4. 4.2.5. 4.2.6. 4.2.6.1. 4.2.6.2. 4.2.7. 4.2.7.1. 4.2.7.2. 4.2.7.2.1. 4.2.7.2.2. 4.2.7.3. 4.2.7.4. 4.2.7.4.1. 4.2.7.4.2. 4.2.7.4.3. 4.2.7.4.4. 4.2.7.4.5. 4.2.7.5. 4.2.7.5.1. 4.2.7.5.2. 4.2.7.5.3. 4.2.7.5.4. 4.2.7.6. 4.2.7.6.1. 4.2.7.6.2. 4.2.7.7. 4.2.7.8. 4.2.7.9. 4.2.8. 4.2.8.1. 4.2.8.2. 4.2.8.3. 4.2.9. 4.2.9.1. 4.2.9.2. 4.2.9.3. 4.2.9.4. 4.2.9.5. 4.2.9.6. 4.2.9.7. 4.2.9.8. 4.2.9.9. 4.2.9.10.
High-impedance...............................................................................4-64 General ............................................................................................4-64 Restricted E/F protection for a transformer ......................................4-65 Basic requirements ..........................................................................4-65 Components of a restricted E/F scheme..........................................4-65 Design..............................................................................................4-65 Example ...........................................................................................4-67 Application of the transformer differential protection in a 1 breaker configuration ..............................................................4-72 Standstill protection..........................................................................4-72 General ............................................................................................4-72 Standstill protection using an overcurrent function ..........................4-73 Rotor ground fault protection ...........................................................4-73 Application .......................................................................................4-73 Determining the settings ..................................................................4-74 Required data ..................................................................................4-74 Recommended settings for Rf , respectively 'U-Setting' and t .........4-74 Functional check ..............................................................................4-75 Installation and wiring ......................................................................4-75 Location and ambient conditions .....................................................4-75 Checking the wiring..........................................................................4-75 Connection of a two-stage scheme..................................................4-76 Connection to excitation systems with shaft-mounted diodes .........4-76 Adaptation of the scheme in the case of shaft filters .......................4-76 Commissioning ................................................................................4-76 Pre-commissioning checks ..............................................................4-76 Calibration of the ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21 .....................4-77 Measuring the voltage values ..........................................................4-78 Testing in operation .........................................................................4-79 Maintenance ....................................................................................4-81 Likely causes of problems................................................................4-81 Maintenance ....................................................................................4-81 Fault-finding .....................................................................................4-81 Accessories and spares...................................................................4-81 Appendices ......................................................................................4-81 Application of the under reactance protection function ....................4-84 Introduction ......................................................................................4-84 Out-of-step conditions......................................................................4-84 Monitoring a given load angle ..........................................................4-84 Stator ground fault protection for generators in parallel...................4-88 Principle of operation .......................................................................4-88 Busbar ground faults........................................................................4-89 Ground fault protection during start-up ............................................4-89 Grounding transformer.....................................................................4-90 Ferro resonance damping resistor Rp ..............................................4-90 Grounding resistor Re ......................................................................4-91 Contactor .........................................................................................4-91 Residual current CT .........................................................................4-91 Required REG316*4 functions.........................................................4-91 Protection sensitivity ........................................................................4-92
4-2
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.10.
100 % stator and rotor ground fault protection.................................4-95
4-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.
4.1.
DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION AND APPLICATION

Summary Both analog and binary I/P signals pass through a signal conditioning stage before being processed by the main processor: Analog signals go through the chain comprising the input transformer, shunt, low-pass filter (anti-alias filter), amplifier, sampling (sample and hold), multiplexer and A/D converter. As digital signals they are then separated by digital filters into real and apparent components before entering the main processor. The binary signals are isolated by optocouplers in the input circuits and are evaluated by the main processor. The protection algorithms and the logic functions are then processed in the main processor. The distance protection function is equipped with overcurrent or underimpedance starters. In ungrounded systems, all the usual cyclic and acyclic phase preference schemes are available. The residual (neutral) current and/or residual (zero-sequence) voltage are monitored to detect earth faults. The first distance zone, the overreaching zone and the reverse zone are measured simultaneously. All of the distance zones have wide setting ranges and can be set totally independently of each other, also with respect to whether they measure in the forwards or reverse direction. There are three directional distance zones and a fourth, which can be either directional or non-directional as demanded by the application. The overreaching and reverse zones are for use in transfer tripping schemes with signal transmission between the units at the two ends of a line. The operating characteristics are polygons with the reactance borders slightly inclined to give an ideal tripping area. For close three-phase faults with very low voltages, the use of a reference voltage comprising a healthy voltage and the voltage of a memory feature ensures a reliable directional decision. Compensation of the mutual zero-sequence impedance of parallel circuits can be achieved by appropriate selection of the zero-sequence impedance factor (k0) or the residual current of the parallel circuit using k0m. A VT supervision feature (fuse failure) is already incorporated. Its measurement can be based on either the zero-sequence component (U0 not I0) and/or the negative-sequence component (U2 not I2). The latter is of special advantage in ungrounded systems or systems with poor grounding. An independent back-up overcurrent function becomes a short-zone protection, as soon as the line isolator is opened. Tripping of the overcurrent back-up protection is uninfluenced by any signal, which may be blocking the distance protection (e.g. VT supervision or power swing blocking).
4-4
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The power swing blocking function monitors the variation of the quantity U cos . This method of detecting power swings is entirely independent of the characteristic and location of the distance protection. Power swings with frequencies between 0.2 and 8 Hz are detected. The sensitive E/F protection for ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils measures both in the forwards and reverse directions. A characteristic angle of 90 (U0 I0 sin ) is chosen for ungrounded systems and one of 0 (U0 I0 cos ) for systems with Petersen coils. A logic, which can be freely programmed with the aid of FUPLA (function block programming language), provides convenient facility for achieving special circuits needed for specific applications. The auto-reclosure function enables up to four three-phase reclosure cycles to be carried out, each with independently set dead time for fast or slow auto-reclosure. Where necessary, a large variety of supplementary protection and logic functions is contained in the RE.216 and RE.316*4 function software libraries. The distance protection logic gives the user access for blocking or enabling purposes to a wide range of functions, including for example the kind of transfer tripping scheme, switch-onto-fault logic, zone extension logic, VT supervision logic and whether the protection should trip just the phase concerned or all three phases for an E/F. The memory of the event recorder function has sufficient capacity for up to 256 binary signals, which are recorded together with their relative times of occurrence and information regarding the distance to the fault. The disturbance recorder acquires and stores 9 analog and 16 binary signals. The number of disturbance records that can be stored depends on the total duration of an event, determined by the pre-event data (event history) and the duration of the event itself.
4-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2. 4.2.1. 4.2.1.1. 4.2.1.1.1.
Protection functions Distance protection Starters Operation of the starters The REL316*4 distance function is equipped with either overcurrent or underimpedance starters. The setting of the parameter 'StartMode' determines which of the two is in operation. A starter must pick up at least twice before its signal is processed (for phase selection, starting timers, signaling etc.). Should a starter pick up only sporadically; only the backwards-measuring system and ancillary functions such as displaying measurements etc. are enabled. Starting signals do not reset unless all the starters have reset.
4.2.1.1.2.
Overcurrent starters The variables at the I/Ps of the overcurrent starters are the phase currents IR, IS and IT and the residual current IE (3I0), respectively the neutral voltage UE (3U0). Initially, a logic determines Imax, i.e. the highest of the three phase currents IR, IS and IT. If the value of Imax exceeds the setting of the parameter 'Istart' (overcurrent starters), each of the phase currents Iph is checked to determine whether it exceeds the setting of the parameter 'Imin' (current enable) and also 80 % of Imax. In the case of the residual current, the corresponding values are the setting of the parameter '3I0min' and 25 % of Imax. In the case of the ground current IE, it is checked whether it exceeds the setting of the parameter '3I0min' and also 25 % of Imax. Depending on the setting of the parameter 'Earth fault detector' (I0, I0 AND U0, I0 OR U0), it is checked at the same time whether the residual voltage has exceeded the setting of the parameter '3U0min' (neutral voltage enable). The logical signals R, S, T and E are accordingly changed from logical '0' to logical '1' or remain at logical '0'. The kind of fault and the phases involved are thus determined, information, which is needed for phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured) signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.) enabling signals for single or three-phase tripping starting the timers for the measuring zones
The starting signals R, S, T and E do not reset until measurement has taken place and the impedances of all six loops lie outside the back-up impedance zone. (If only the overcurrent starters are in operation, there is no underimpedance-starting characteristic and relay response is determined by the setting of the overcurrent starter 'Istart'.)
4-6
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
START
IR, IS, IT, IE, UE
I max = highest value of IR, IS, IT
N I max > I start Y (Iph > Imin) AND (Iph > 0.8 I max) Y set log. signal "ph" (R, S, T) N
all phase currents IR, IS, IT Y
[(IE 3I0 min) AND (IE 0.25 Imax)] AND/OR (UE 3U0 min) Y
set log. signal "E"
END
HEST 955038 FL
Fig. 4.1
Overcurrent starters (I>)
4-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.1.1.3.
Underimpedance starters The variables at the I/Ps of the underimpedance starters are the phase currents IR, IS and IT and the residual current IE (3I0) and the phase-toneutral voltages UR, US, UT and the neutral voltage UE (3U0).
START
UR, US, UT, UE IR, IS, IT, IE
[(IE 3I0min) N AND (IE 0.25 Imax)] AND/OR (UE 3U0 min) Y (Iph1 Imin) AND (Iph2 Imin) Y Uph1 - Uph2 Iph1 - Iph2 N
Iph Imin
Y U ph 2 x Iph
Z=
Z=
N Z < Z Start Z < Z Start
Y set temp. signals "ph, "E"
Y set temp. signals "ph1", "ph2"
all ph-0 loops Y Loop = phase selection
all ph-ph loops Y Selectivity conditions
Z=
Uph Iph + 1 x IE
or
Z=
Uph1-Uph2 Iph1 - Iph2
set log. signals
N Z < Z Start
Y log. signals = temp. signals
END
HEST 955037 C
Fig. 4.2
Underimpedance starters (Z<)
4-8
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Depending on the setting of the parameter 'Earth fault detector' (I0, I0 AND U0, I0 OR U0), the function determines initially whether one or both of the E/F criteria is fulfilled, i.e. whether the residual current IE exceeds the setting of the parameter '3I0min' and/or the residual voltage UE the setting of the parameter '3U0min'. Should this be the case, the three phase-to-ground loops are measured first, otherwise just the three phase-to-phase loops. The three phase-to-ground loops are dealt with as follows: If IR (or IS, or IT) is greater than 'Imin', the corresponding loops are enabled and the loop impedances calculated as follows:
ZR = ZS = ZT =
UR 2 IR US 2 IS UT 2 IT
(uncompensated)
(uncompensated)
(uncompensated)
All uncompensated impedances ZR, ZS and ZT are compared with the starting characteristic and temporarily set the logical signals 'Ph' and 'E' (no display). An impedance loop is selected (see Section 4.2.1.1.4.) on the basis of these signals (loop = selected phase). If the loop is a phase-to-neutral one, the impedance is compensated by k0 = 1 for calculation:
Zph 0 =
Uph 0 Iph + 1 IE
e.g.
ZR 0 =
UR IR + 1 IE
If the loop is a phase-to-phase one, the impedance is calculated using phase-to-phase quantities:
Zph ph =
Uph ph Iph ph
e.g.
ZRS =
UR US IR IS
If the impedance (Z) calculated for the loop determined by the phase selection logic lies within the underimpedance-starting characteristic (Zstart), the loop is used for measurement. The logical signals are needed for signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.) enabling signals for tripping starting the timers for the measuring zones
4-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The three phase-to-phase loops are dealt with as follows:
Providing Iph1 and Iph2 (IR and IS, IS and IT, or IT and IR) are higher than 'Imin', the corresponding loops are enabled and the impedances are calculated as follows:
ZRS = Z ST = Z TR =
UR US IR IS US UT IS IT UT UR IT IR
Comparison of the three starting impedances eliminates the healthy loops (discrimination condition). If just one of the loop impedances lies within the underimpedance starting characteristic (Zstart), only the signals (R and S), or (S and T), or (T and R) would be set to logical '1'. If more than one of the loop impedances lie within the underimpedance starting characteristic, the signals R and S and T are set to logical '1'. The kind of fault is thus determined, information, which is needed for phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured) signaling the kind of fault (remote signaling relays, frontplate LEDs etc.) enabling signals for single or three-phase tripping starting the timers for the measuring zones
4-10
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Underimpedance starting and definitive zone characteristic

X
XA UNDERIMPEDANCE CHARACTERISTIC
RB
-RLoad
AngleLoad
RLoad
RA
XB
HEST 935 049 C
Fig. 4.3
Underimpedance starting and definitive zone characteristic
4.2.1.1.4.
Phase selection
The phase selection logic determines the loop for the underimpedance starting measurement when an ground fault has been detected to be measured in the first period (max. 20 ms) after starting to be measured during the time the function is in the picked-up state when a ground fault has been detected on an ungrounded system or system with Petersen coils (phase selection solidly grounded).
4-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
In a solidly grounded system (parameter 'PhaseSelMode' set to 'solid gr.'), the loop to be measured is determined according to the following table:
Starters E/F E/F E/F Phase-to-phase fault Phase-to-phase fault Phase-to-phase fault Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault Three-phase fault R,E S,E T,E R,S S,T T,R R,S,E S,T,E T,R,E R,S,T Loop measured RE SE TE RS ST TR RS ST TR TR (RS) (ST)
In a solidly grounded system, both phases involved in a phase-tophase-to-ground fault have to be tripped, which is not the case in ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils. In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils (parameter 'PhaseSelMode' set to cyclic/acyclic phase selection), the loop to be measured is determined according to the following table:
Starters Phase-to-phase fault Phase-to-phase fault Phase-to-phase fault Three-phase fault Cross-country fault *) Cross-country fault *) Cross-country fault *)
*) two E/Fs at different locations
Loop measured RS ST TR TR (RS) (ST) according to phase selection logic
R,S S,T T,R R,S,T R,S,E S,T,E T,R,E
In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils, it is usual for only one E/F of the two involved in a cross-country fault to be tripped, so that as much of the system remains in operation as possible. This is achieved by arranging for all the distance relays on the system to measure the same E/F loop and this is the purpose of the phase selection function.
4-12
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The logic of the phase selection function provides a choice of the following sequences:
Starters Fault loop measure in relation to 'PhaseSelMode' RTSR TRST cycl. cycl. R, S, E S, T, E T, R, E SE TE RE RE SE TE RTS acycl. RE TE RE RST acycl. RE SE RE TSR acycl. SE TE TE TRS acycl. RE TE TE SRT acycl. SE SE RE STR acycl. SE SE TE
RTSR cyclic (R before T, T before S, S before R) means, for example, that for a cross-country fault T-R-E, R phase (the R-E loop) is measured rather than T phase, for a cross-country fault S-T-E, T phase (the T-E loop) rather than S phase and for a cross-country fault R-S-E, S phase (the S-E loop) rather than R phase. RTS acyclic (R before T before S) means, for example, that for a cross-country fault T-R-E, R phase (the R-E loop) is measured rather than T phase, for a cross-country fault S-T-E, T phase (the T-E loop) rather than S phase and for a cross-country fault R-S-E, R phase (the R-E loop) rather than S phase.
4.2.1.2. 4.2.1.2.1. Measuring units Operation of the measuring units
When either the overcurrent or underimpedance is activated twice then, the distance measurement of a fault is enabled. Initially the fault loop determined by the phase selection function is measured. This is called processing period I and lasts until a trip signal is generated in the first zone or a maximum of one period of the power system frequency. At the latest after one period of the power system frequency, all six impedance loops are measured. This is called processing period II, during which the three phase-to-ground loops and the three phase-tophase loops are measured alternately. Comparison of the results of the six measurements eliminates those impedance loops, which are not involved in the fault (discrimination conditions). The timer started by the starting units controls the comparison of the measured impedances with the polygon characteristic.
4.2.1.2.2. Measurement during processing period I
Processing period I lasts from the instant a starter picks up until the first tripping signal is generated, but is restricted to a maximum of one period of the power system frequency. The input signals are the phase currents IR, IS, IT, the residual current IE (3I0), the residual current of any parallel circuit IEm (3I0m), the neutral current IEm of any parallel circuit of a double-circuit line (3I0m) and the three phase-to-ground
4-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
voltages UR, US and UT, which have been sampled, analog and digitally filtered and broken down into their component vectors. If the overcurrent starters are in operation and have picked up, the phase selection function is performed and the loop to be measured determined. Should this not be the case, the loop determined by the underimpedance starters is measured.
The impedance of a phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E is calculated using the equation:
ZR =
UR IR + k 0 IE + k 0m IEm
(compensated)
where k0: k0m: zero-sequence compensation factor for Z0 k0 = (Z0 - Z1) / 3Z1 zero-sequence compensation factor for the mutual impedance Z0m of double-circuit line k0m = Z0m / 3Z1
The mutual zero-sequence impedance of a double-circuit line (k0m IEm) is only compensated for the 1st, 2nd and overreaching zones, and in the latter two cases, only if their direction of measurement is the same as that of the 1st zone. In this respect, a reverse measuring zone is treated in the same manner as an overreaching zone. The mutual zero-sequence impedance (k0m IEm) is not compensated, should IEm exceed 1.25 IE or the direction of IEm not be the same as that of IE. This prevents a 'healthy' parallel circuit from being adversely influenced by a fault relatively close to the relay location of the faulted circuit. Assuming a fault between R and S, the impedance of the phase-tophase loop is calculated using the equation:
ZRS =
UR US IR IS
It is determined almost simultaneously, whether the impedance measured lies within the characteristic and whether it is in the direction of the 1st zone and overreaching zone, or in the direction of the reverse measuring zone. The corresponding tripping and other signals are processed by the system logic. Tripping of the circuit breaker, however, only takes place after a measuring unit has operated twice.
4-14
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
START
Overcurrent starter
Overcurrent starter Y Loop = phase selection
Z calculation (ph-0 compensated)
Z Start , Z 1-4 , (Z OR ),
Z Back , direction
Trip
Signalling, fault location, Z(loop)
t > 1 periode Stoping the timers Y Change to processing periode II
Change to processing periode II
END
HEST 955035 FL
Fig. 4.4
Processing period I
4-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.1.2.3.
Measurement during processing period II
Processing period II commences after the first tripping signal or at the latest one period of the system frequency after a starter picks up. The variables measured are the same as those already processed during processing period I. Only in the case of a cross-country fault in an ungrounded system or system with Petersen coils is measurement restricted during processing period II to just the impedance loop determined by the phase selection logic. Otherwise all the phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase impedance loops are continuously processed in sequence, providing the enabling and ground fault criteria are fulfilled. The equations used to calculate the loop impedances are the same as those in the preceding Section. It is then determined whether the impedance measured lies within the characteristic and whether it is in the direction of the zone being measured. The overreaching zone and reverse measuring zone are evaluated as part of the measurement of the 1st zone. The corresponding tripping and other signals are processed by the system logic. Tripping of the circuit breaker, however, only takes place after a measuring unit has operated twice. Displaying impedance and fault distance The impedance and fault distance only appear in the even list after a further measurement has tripped unless the measuring loop, i.e. the phase selection, has changed the impedance is measured to be outside the characteristic tripping was initiated by the reverse measuring zone, the overreaching zone or the switch-onto-fault (SOTF) logic
In the above cases, the impedance and fault distance stored by the preceding measurement (which produced tripping) is displayed.
4-16
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
START

I >, Z < Starting
solidly grounded network AND (I> starting active)
N
Phase selection
Y
6 Z calculations (ph-0 compensated)
N ph-E Y
Selectivity conditions
ph-0 Z-calculation
3 ph-ph Z-calculation
Z Start , Z 1-4 , (ZOR ),

Z Back , direction
Fallback conditions
N
Resetsignalling
Signalling
Trip
Y
Signalling fault location Z(loop)
Stoping the timers
END
HEST 955036 C
Fig. 4.5
Processing period II
4-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.1.2.4.
Directional decision
To determine the fault direction, the fault voltage is checked. If the fault voltage exceeds the parameter 'UminFault' (minimum fault voltage) then the phase-angle of the impedance, is determined with the fault current and fault voltage:
arg Z = arg U = arg U arg I I
arg: argument of the complex number (angle) U : fault voltage U = UR U = UR-US fault current I = IR + IE k0 + IEm k0m I = IR - IS (phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E) (phase-to-phase loop, e.g. R-S) (phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E) (phase-to-phase loop, e.g. R-S)
I :
arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be designated a 'forward fault': -27 < arg Z < +117 arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be designated a 'reverse fault': +153 < arg Z < -63 Z is the impedance measured by the protection device, corresponding to the line impedance ZL. Since the fault voltage is used the source impedance does not play any role - see following Section 4.2.1.2.5. If the fault voltage is less than the parameter 'UminFault', the impedance is determined from the fault current and a reference voltage: U arg Zref = arg ref = arg Uref - arg I I arg: argument of the complex number (angle) reference voltage Uref: Uref = [(US - UT) + 1/8 (USmem - UTmem)] 27 (phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E) Uref = [(UT - UR) + 1/8 (UTmem - URmem)] 180 (phase-to-phase loop, e.g. R-S) I : fault current I = IR I = IR - IS (phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E) (phase-to-phase loop, e.g. R-S)
The reference voltage Uref is derived from the 'healthy' phase voltages (cross-polarized voltage) and a fraction of the memory voltage Umem. The duration of the memory voltage is limited to between 5 and 15 periods of the system frequency. The duration depends on the deviation of the measured frequency from the system frequency, i.e. at
4-18
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
rated system frequency the duration is 15 periods, in the case of deviation this is reduced proportionally. In case the reference voltage Uref is greater than 0.5 % of rated voltage, it is used to determine fault direction: In this case, a 'forward fault' should satisfy the condition: -90 < arg Zref < +90 A 'reverse fault' should satisfy the condition: +90 < arg Zref < -90 Zref is the measured impedance, which in addition to the line impedance ZL contains a component of the source impedance ZS. To visualize the influence of the source impedance a transformation of the tripping zone has to be done (see Section 4.2.1.2.5) When the reference voltage is less than 0.5% of rated voltage, the direction decision for the phase-to-ground loop is ignored, and tripping is blocked. For phase-to-phase loops, depending on the parameter 'MemDirMode', tripping is either enabled or blocked.
4.2.1.2.5. Construction of the measuring characteristic
X
X
7 / 14
27
-X/8
R 27
RR
RRE
-RR/2 -RRE/2
HEST 045 010 V
Fig. 4.6
Measuring characteristic using fault voltage as reference
4-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd

X
X
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
7 / 14
R -X/8 ZS'
RR
RRE
-RR/2
-RRE/2
HEST 045 011 V
Fig. 4.7
Measuring characteristic for fault in the forward direction with healthy voltage resp. memorized voltage as reference
X
RRE/2
RR/2
-RRE
-RR
-R
X/8
R
ZS'
7 / 14 -X
HEST 045 012V
Fig. 4.8
Measuring characteristic for fault in the reverse direction using a healthy voltage resp. memorized voltage as reference
4-20
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
= 27 for Ph-E-fault, else 30 ZS' is dependant on the fault type. With single infeed and disregarding the memorized voltage for Ph-E an Ph-Phfault the ZS' value is: k +1 Ph-E-fault: Z S ' = Z S 0S k0 + 1
Ph-Ph-fault: 3-Ph-fault: ZS: k0: k0S:
3 ZS 30 2 Z ZS ' = S 9 ZS ' =
Source impedance Zero sequence current-compensation factor of the feeder, parameter 'k0 (n)' Zero sequence current-compensation factor of the source
4-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.1.3.
VT supervision
The purpose of the VT supervision function is to monitor the VT leads with respect to asymmetrical short-circuits and open-circuits. An m.c.b. can be included for three-phase VT short-circuits and arranged to block the protection via a separate opto-coupler I/P. The I/P variables monitored by the VT supervision function are the three voltages UR, US, and UT and the three currents IR, IS, IT. The zero-sequence (U0, I0) and negative-sequence (U2, I2) components are calculated for both the three-phase voltage and three-phase current systems. 3U0 = UR + US + UT 3U2 = UR + US a2 + UT a 3I0 = IR + IS + IT 3I2 = IR + IS a2 + IT a a = -0,5 + j 3 /2 = 1 /120
R S T
3I 0 > 0 3U 0 > 0
I2
>0
3I0 = 0 3U0 > 0
I2
>0
U2 > 0
U2 > 0
U0 and not I0
R S T
U2 and not I2
R S T
3I0 > 0 3U 0 > 0
I2
>0
U2 > 0
HEST 915 021 FL
U 2 and not I2
Fig. 4.9 VT supervision
4-22
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The measurement has to be performed using the negative-sequence component, whenever there is no source of residual current behind the relay, i.e. no grounded transformer neutrals. The parameter 'VTSup Mode' (operating mode) must be set accordingly. The zero and/or negative-sequence components of currents and voltages are compared with the settings of the parameters 'U0min VTSup' [U0_VTSUP], 'I0min VTSup' [I0_VTSUP], 'U2min VTSup' [U2_VTSUP] and 'I2min VTSup' [I2_VTSUP] and the associated binary signals U0, U2, I0 and I2 are then set to logical '1' or left at logical '0'. The signals U0 and U2 are delayed by 5 ms as a precaution against incorrect blocking as a result of discrepancies between the operating times of the three circuit-breaker poles. Depending on the operating mode selected, one of the following four conditions is monitored:
U0 not I0 U2 not I2 (U0 not I0) + (U2 . not I2) U2 not (I0 + I2) residual voltage, but no residual current NPS voltage, but no NPS current condition 1 or 2 NPS voltage, but neither residual current nor NPS current
Blocking by the VT supervision function is delayed for 12 s following manual closing of the circuit-breaker, an external blocking signal (m.c.b. via an opto-coupler I/P), a transfer tripping signal from the opposite station or the generation of a local tripping signal. Should U0 (or U2) and I0 (or I2) pick-up during this delay, operation of the VT supervision function remains blocked until U0 (or U2) resets. This measure prevents unwanted blocking during single-phase autoreclosure. The signal generated by the VT supervision function 'VTSupMode' instantly blocks the distance protection function. Resetting the parameter 'VTSupMode' [VTSUP_BLKDEL] enables the distance function to be blocked after delay of 12 s. From 12 s after the VT supervision circuit has picked up, resetting of blocking is delayed by 1 s. Standard m.c.bs can therefore be used, providing their main contacts do not close before their auxiliary contacts. Blocking by the VT supervision circuit resets the instant a fault with zero and negative-sequence components occurs. The parameter 'VTSupDebDel' [VTSUP_DEBDEL] (deblocking) provides facility for setting the 1 s reset delay permanently regardless of current.
4-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The blocking signal issued by the VT supervision function does not influence the back-up overcurrent function.
P_U2_VTSUP INP30C4 2 TONB I T Q
14
P_U0_VTSUP INP30C2 6 TONB I T Q
4 TOFFB I T Q
BIT_VTSUP1_1
14
8 TOFFB I T Q
BIT_VTSUP1_2
Fig. 4.10
Segment VTSUP1
P_DRST OUT3072 P_MANCL_DIST INP3105 P_HFREC INP3102 P_EXTBL_DIST INP3100 P_I2_VTSUP INP30C5 P_I0_VTSUP INP30C3
>=1
12000 >=1 3
2 TOFF I T Q 4 TOFFB I T Q
>=1
22
>=1 & 6
BIT_VTSUP1_1
o & <
BIT_VTSUP1_2
&
10 >=1 <
o &
11
P_VTFAIL_IU2 OUT3076
12 >=1
P_VTFAIL_IU0 OUT3075 BIT_VTSUP2_1
Fig. 4.11
Segment VTSUP2
4-24
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
BIT_VTSUP2_1 P_VTSUP_BLKDEL INP3A15 12000 1 TON I T 4 >=1 o 2 TOFF I T Q
3 &
1000
P_I0_VTSUP INP30C3 P_I2_VTSUP INP30C5 P_VTSUP_DEBDEL INP3A16
5 o >=1
6 &
7 >=1
P_VTFAIL_DLY OUT30B5
P_VTFAIL OUT3091
Fig. 4.12
Segment VTSUP3
4.2.1.4.
Back-up overcurrent function O/C
The distance protection function includes a definite time overcurrent unit as back-up protection. A starting signal 'Start O/C' is set to logical '1', when one or more of the currents IR, IS, and IT exceed the setting of the parameter 'I O/C'. Following the adjustable time delay 'O/C delay', the tripping signal 'Trip O/C' is set to logical '1' and applied to the system logic. Blocking signals generated by the distance, underimpedance starting, power swing blocking or VT supervision functions do not influence the back-up overcurrent function. The back-up overcurrent function is independent of the distance protection starters and, since it does not have to perform any phase selection, can therefore have a more sensitive setting.
4.2.1.5. 4.2.1.5.1. System logic Structure of the system logic
The system logic processes the binary I/P signals from external plant (opto-coupler I/Ps) and all the binary signals of the distance protection function. The system logic is programmed using FUPLA (function block programming language) and is divided into what are referred to as segments, which are processed with a higher priority than, for example, the auto-reclosure function.
4-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
VTSUP SUPBL SOTF STUB

Binary input data of the distance protection function and the Input/Output unit
ZE TRANSBL UNBLOCK PUTTREC PUTSEND POTTREC POTSEND BLOCREC BLOSEND HFSEND TRIP
Binary output data to perturbograph and the Input/Output unit
HEST 915 022 FL
Fig. 4.13
System logic in the distance protection function
The O/Ps of the system logic are binary signals for controlling a fault recorder, LED signals and auxiliary tripping and signaling relays.
4.2.1.5.2. Enabling and blocking logic (SUPBL)
The logic of the VT supervision function (segment VTSUP) has already been described in the relevant Section. The segment SUPBL coordinates all the external blocking signals distance protection [EXTBL_DIST] (opto-coupler I/Ps), the power swing blocking function [PS_BLOCK] and the VT supervision function [VT_BLOCK] and blocks all the distance protection functions [DISTBL] with the exception of the back-up overcurrent function.
4-26
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
P_EXTBL_DIST INP3100 P_PSBLOCK INP3056 P_VTFAIL OUT3091
100
1 TOFFB I T Q
>=1
12000
TON I T
P_DISTBL
P_DISTBL_DEL
Fig. 4.14
4.2.1.5.3.
Segment SUPBL
Switch-onto-fault logic (SOTF)
When a circuit breaker is closed onto and existing three-phase fault (e.g. forgotten earthing clamps), a three-phase trip is immediately initiated. The fault detectors in this case are the non-directional starters (overcurrent or underimpedance units) or optionally the overreaching zone, but this is only used in the following special cases: power transformer with high inrush currents at the remote end of the line. In such cases fault detection involving the distance measuring units is safer. Close faults with complete voltage collapse may possibly not otherwise be detected, in which case the parameter 'MemDirMode' has to be set to 'Trip'.
The switch-onto-fault logic can be activated and the switch-onto-fault signal [SOTF] set to logical '1' in one of three ways: a) by an auxiliary contact of the CB control switch when closing the CB (opto-coupler I/P 'Manual close' [MANCL_DIST]) b) by an auxiliary contact of the CB when opening the CB (optocoupler I/P 'Dead line' [DEADLINE]) c) by prolonged undervoltage ('U weak') on all three phases and no current enable which corresponds to a dead line [UWEAK_R,S,T]. Alternative 2) is used, if the VTs are connected to the busbars and alternative 1) is not possible. The criteria of alternatives 2) and 3) may only be recognised after either 200 ms or 10 s [SOTF_10S] (setting), depending on whether the switch-onto-fault logic is required to operate after auto-reclosure (200 ms) or not (10 s). For dead times longer than 10 s (autoreclosure function) there is the possibility of using the blocking input 'Ext Blk SOTF'. This is a binary I/P which is interlocked by [P_SOTF_INIT] via an AND gate (see Section 3.5.4.2.).
4-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Combining undervoltage and a missing current enable signal [CREL_ R, S, T] as in alternative 3) prevents mal-operation of the logic after 200 ms, respectively 10 s, in cases of system faults with low fault current contribution, which are detected in the higher distance zones. Resetting of the signal 'SOTF' [START_SOTF] is delayed by 1 s, i.e. every distance protection start within a time of 1 s after one of the three switch-onto-fault criteria was fulfilled gives rise to three-phase tripping [SOTF] of the circuit-breaker.
2 3
P_UWEAK_R INP3034 P_UWEAK_S INP3035 P_UWEAK_T INP3036 P_CREL_R INP3030 P_CREL_S INP3031 P_CREL_T INP3032 P_DEADLINE1 INP3107 P_SOTF_10S INP3A13 o o o
>=1
&
5000
TON I T
BIT_UWEAK_5000
>=1
4 & 5 TON I T 6 9
10000 7 200
>=1
&
8 TONB I T Q 1000
P_MANCL_DIST INP3105
10 TOFF I T Q &
11
P_START_SOTF OUT30B7 P_SOTF OUT3073
P_SOTF_INIT INP3053
Fig. 4.15
4.2.1.5.4.
Segment SOTF
Short-zone logic (STUB)
In 1 breaker schemes, the short zone between the two circuitbreakers and the line isolator can be protected by the back-up overcurrent function by permitting its instantaneous pick-up signal [OC_RST] to trip the circuit-breakers [TRIP_STUB] after 25 ms whenever the line isolator is open (signal applied to the opto-coupler I/P 'Isol open'). This arrangement is only necessary, if the VTs are installed on the line side of the isolator and the CTs are in the bars between the circuitbreakers.
P_ISOL_OPEN INP3121 P_OC_RST INP3054 & 1 2 TONB I T Q
25
P_TRIP_STUB OUT30B6
Fig. 4.16
Segment STUB
4-28
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.1.5.5.
Zone extension logic (ZE)
This logic enables the reach of the distance measurement to be switched from the underreaching first zone to overreaching [BIT_TRIP_ZE] under the control of a signal from another function or an external signal. Such a signal can originate, for example, from the internal autoreclosure function (binary input 'ZExtensionAR' [AR_ZE]) or from an opto-coupler input (binary input 'ZExtension' [ZE_FOR_ DIST]). The internal auto-reclosure function issues an overreach signal [AR_ZE] when all the auto-reclosure conditions are fulfilled.
1 & 2 4 RSFF S R Q BIT_TRIP_ZE
P_ZE_FOR_DIST INP3111 P_AR_ZE OUT3094 P_MEAS_OR2 INP3052 P_START_ALL INP3050
>=1
3 1 :B
Fig. 4.17
Segment ZE
4-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.1.5.6.
Transient blocking logic (Transbl)
This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive overreaching transfer tripping scheme (POTT) or an overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR) on double-circuit lines with infeeds from both ends and a high mutual zero-sequence impedance (both circuits on the same pylons). A blocking scheme does not require this logic, providing the waiting time is set sufficiently long. The logic solves the following problem:
The problem (with POTT)
A1
B1
t=0 s:
A2
B2
Relays A1, B1 and B2 detect the fault in the OR zone and send a signal to the opposite station. Relay A2 detects a backward fault.
A1
B1
t = sign.rec.:
Relays A1, B1 and A2 receive a signal from the opposite station.
A2
B2
A1
B1
t = CB open :
A2
B2
CB A1 opens before CB B1 opens. Relay A2 detects the fault in the OR zone, but still receives a signal from the opposite station, e.g. it trips and opens the healthy line.
HEST 915 023 C
Fig. 4.18
Transient blocking
4-30
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The operation of the logic is as follows:
The solution (with

A1 B1 TBA
Logic in relay A2
T1 >=1 &
TBE
MEAS_BW
t=0s T2
A2 B2
100ms
A1
B1
TBA
T1 >=1 &
TBE
MEAS_BW
t = sign.rec. T2
A2 B2
100ms
A1
B1
TBA
T1 >=1 &
TBE
MEAS_BW
t = CB open T2
A2 B2
100ms
TBA = (Com Rec + Unblock) Meas Oreach TRIP = TBA TBEnot

TBE is active for at least TBE resets at latest after HEST 915 024
Fig. 4.19
Transient blocking
The critical relay A2 cannot trip, because the reverse measurement signal [MEAS_BWD] is maintained for at least T1 (parameter 't1TransBl') and resets at the latest after T2 (parameter 't2TransBl'). The purpose of T2 is to ensure that blocking is maintained should auto-reclosure of the faulted circuit take place. T1 allows time for the incorrect signal 'Com Rx' to reset. Its setting is thus given by the reset time of relay B2 and the reset time of the communication channel. The receiver signal must not be prolonged.
4-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Tripping takes place instantaneously, if the tripping condition TBA is still fulfilled after the time T1. Tripping always causes the logic to be reset, after which it remains inactive for 100 ms. The faulted circuit will therefore be immediately tripped, for example, in the case of an unsuccessful auto-reclosure attempt.
P_TBA_BLOCK OUT3720 P_TBA_POTT OUT3707 PAR_B_T1_TRANSBL PAR3860 >=1 1 2 TONB I T Q 3 o & 7
P_MEAS_BWD INP3067 PAR_W_T2_TRANSBL PAR3880 P_D OUT3071
>=1 TON I T 4 5
>=1
100
6 TOFF I T Q
o <
&
FL_TRANSBL INP3832
BIT_TBE
Fig. 4.20
4.2.1.5.7.
Segment TRANSBL
Communication channel failure (Deblock)
This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive underreaching transfer tripping scheme (PUTT OR2) or a permissive overreaching transfer tripping scheme (POTT). The logic causes the communication channel failure signal from the communication equipment (opto-coupler I/P 'Com Fail') to be interpreted for 100 ms as a receive signal. This enables tripping [BIT_UNBL] to take place in PUTT OR2 or POTT schemes in cases where the PLC receive signal is attenuated by the primary system fault on the line.
FL_UNBLOCK INP3833 P_HFREC INP3102 P_HFFAIL INP3103 & o 20 1 2 TONB I T Q
100
3 TONB I T Q
&
BIT_UNBL
Fig. 4.21
Segment DEBLOCK
4-32
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.1.5.8.
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)
The PUTT logic is divided into a receive logic (segment PUTTREC) and a transmit logic (segment PUTSEND). The O/P signals from the receive logic (PUTTREC) are transferred to the transmit logic, while taking account of any weak infeed (Weak) [UWEAK_R, S, T] and short-term enable signals due to communication channel failure (Deblock) [BIT_UNBL]. The tripping criterion is thus available for evaluation in conjunction with the underimpedance starting characteristic (PUTT NONDIR) [PUTT_ NONDIR], the starting characteristic in the forward direction (PUTT FWD) [PUTT_FWD] or the overreaching zone, respectively the 2nd distance zone (PUTT OR2) [PUTT_OR2]. The O/P signals from the transmit logic (PUTTSEND) are passed on to the common transmit logic for PUTT, POTT and BLOCK OR schemes. The tripping (Trip) [TRIP_PUTT] and transmit (Tx) criteria [SEND_ PUTT] can be seen from the following diagram.
t
Delay (Def) Meas Main Delay (3) Meas Main Delay (2)
Com Rec Weak Infeed Start R+S+T Meas Bward Weak Infeed Start R+S+T Meas Fward
0 sec
Meas Main
Meas Oreach
t = Delay (1) = 0 sec : t = Com Rec :
Trip Send Trip (PUTT NONDIR) Trip (PUTT FWD) Trip (PUTT OR2) Send
= Meas Main = Meas Main = Com Rec * (Start R+S+T + Weak) = Com Rec * Meas Fward = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach = Meas Main = Meas Main = Meas Main = Meas Main = "0" = Start R+S+T (dir/nondir) = "0"
HEST 915 025 FL
t = Delay (2) :
Trip Send
t = Delay (3) :
Trip Send
t = Delay (Def) :
Trip Send
Fig. 4.22
PUTT NONDIR, PUTT FWD, PUTT OR2
4-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
FL_PUTT_NONDIR INP3810 P_START_ALL INP3050 FL_PUTT_FWD INP3811 P_UZ_FORWARD INP30C1 FL_PUTT_OR2 INP3812 P_MEAS_OR2 INP3052 P_TH2 INP3061 P_M_OWN OUT3084 BIT_UNBL P_HFREC INP3102 FL_WEAK INP3813
&
1 >=1 4
&
&
3 & 7
>=1
5 o
>=1 8 &
&
11
100
9 TOFFB I T Q 10 TOFFB I T Q
20 P_UWEAK_R INP3034 BIT_UWEAK_5000
o o & 12
P_UWEAKR_PUTT OUT3700
o P_UWEAK_S INP3035 o o
o P_UWEAK_T INP3036 o o
&
13
P_UWEAKS_PUTT OUT3701
14 >=1 15 >=1
P_UWEAKT_PUTT OUT3702 P_UWEAK_PUTT OUT3703 P_TRIP_PUTT OUT3704
Fig. 4.23
Segment PUTTREC
FL_PUTT_NONDIR INP3810 FL_PUTT_FWD INP3811 FL_PUTT_OR2 INP3812 P_TH3 INP3062 P_MEAS_MAIN INP3051 P_START_ALL INP3050
>=1
&
P_PUTT_ON OUT3721
P_SEND_PUTT OUT3722
Fig. 4.24
Segment PUTSEND
4-34
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.1.5.9.
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT)
The POTT logic is divided into a receive logic (segment POTTREC) and a transmit logic (segment POTSEND). The O/P signals from the receive logic (POTTREC) are transferred to the transmit logic, while taking account of any weak infeed (Weak) [UWEAK_R, S, T], short-term enable signals due to communication channel failure (Deblock) [BIT_UNBL] and transient blocking (Transbl) [BIT_TBE]. The O/P signals from the transmit logic (POTTSEND) are passed on to the common transmit logic for PUTT, POTT and BLOCK OR schemes, while taking account of the signal returned from the remote end of the line in the case of a weak infeed (Echo). The tripping (Trip) [TRIP_POTT] and transmit (Tx) criteria [SENDPOTT] can be seen from the following diagram.
t
0 sec
Meas Main
Meas Oreach
t = Delay (1) = 0 sec : t = Com Rec :
Trip Send Trip Trip Weak Send Send Echo
= Meas Main = Meas Oreach * notTransbl = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach * notTransbl = Com Rec * Weak * notMeas Bward * notMeas Oreach = Meas Oreach * notTransbl = Com Rec * notMeas Bward = Meas Main = "0" = Meas Main = "0" = Start R+S+T (dir/nondir) = "0"
HEST 915 026 FL
t = Delay (2) :
Trip Send
t = Delay (3) :
Trip Send
t = Delay (Def) :
Trip Send
Fig. 4.25
POTT
4-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
P_MEAS_OR2 INP3052 BIT_UNBL P_HFREC INP3102 BIT_TBE P_TH2 INP3061 P_M_OWN OUT3084 FL_ONE_CHL INP3824 P_EF_BLKHF INP31A3 P_MEAS_BWD INP3067 P_UWEAK_R INP3034 20
1 >=1
2 &
4 >=1 3 &
8 &
P_TBA_POTT OUT3707
o 5 TOFFB I T Q 6 TOFFB I T Q 7 TOFFB I T Q
200
9 o &
200 FL_WEAK INP3813 BIT_UWEAK_5000
o o o 10 o & o o o 11 o & o o o 12 >=1 13 >=1 P_UWEAKT_POTT OUT3712 P_UWEAK_POTT OUT3713 P_TRIP_POTT OUT3714 P_UWEAKS_POTT OUT3711 P_UWEAKR_POTT OUT3710
P_UWEAK_S INP3035
P_UWEAK_T INP3036
Fig. 4.26
Segment POTTREC
4-36
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
FL_POTT INP3820 P_MEAS_OR2 INP3052 BIT_TBE P_TH2 INP3061
1 1 :B
2 & o o
P_POTT_ON OUT3705
11 >=1
FL_ECHO INP3821 P_MEAS_BWD INP3067 P_M_OWN OUT3084 P_HFREC INP3102 P_EF_BLKHF INP31A3 FL_ONE_CHL INP3824
3 & 4 >=1
10 o & o
100
5 TOFFB I T Q 6 &
7 & 150
o 8 TONB I T Q
9 o & P_SEND_POTT OUT3706
Fig. 4.27
Segment POTSEND
4-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.1.5.10.
Overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR)
The BLOCK OR logic is divided into a receive logic (segment BLOCREC) and a transmit logic (segment BLOSEND). The O/P signals from the receive logic (BLOCREC) are transferred to the transmit logic, while taking account of any transient blocking due to reversal of energy direction (Transbl). The O/P signals from the transmit logic are passed on to the common transmit logic for PUTT, POTT and BLOCK OR schemes. The tripping (Trip) and transmit (Tx) criteria can be seen from the following diagram.
t
0 sec
Meas Main
Meas Oreach
t = Delay (1) = 0 sec : t = t1Block :
Trip Send Trip Send
= Meas Main = Meas Bward = Meas Oreach * notComRec * notTransbl = Meas Bward + Transbl = Meas Main = "0" = Meas Main = "0" = Start R+S+T (dir/nondir) = "0"
HEST 915 027 FL
t = Delay (2) :
Trip Send
t = Delay (3) :
Trip Send
t = Delay (Def) :
Trip Send
Fig. 4.28
BLOCK OR
4-38
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
FL_BLOCK_OR INP3830 P_HFFAIL INP3103 P_MEAS_OR2 INP3052 PAR_B_T1_BLOCK PAR3840 P_HFREC INP3102 P_TH2 INP3061 P_M_OWN OUT3084 BIT_TBE
& o
1 2 TONB I T Q 3 o & 4
>=1
o o o & 5 P_TRIP_BLOCK OUT3717 P_TBA_BLOCK OUT3720
Fig. 4.29
Segment BLOCREC
FL_BLOCK_OR INP3830 P_HFFAIL INP3103 P_TH2 INP3061 P_MEAS_OR2 INP3052 P_MEAS_BWD INP3067
& o
1 P_BLOCK_ON OUT3715
o 2 TOFFB I T Q o
&
100
>=1 & 4
BIT_TBE
P_SEND_BLOCK OUT3716
Fig. 4.30
4.2.1.5.11.
Segment BLOSEND
PLC transmit logic (HFSEND)
The task of the transmit logic is to boost (Com Boost) the PLC transmitter and transmit a signal (signaling relay O/P 'Com Send') [HFSEND] to the opposite end of the line (signaling relay O/P 'Com Boost') [HFBOOST]. General rules are: The underreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive underreaching transfer tripping scheme (PUTT). The overreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive overreaching transfer tripping scheme (POTT). The reverse measuring zone transmits the blocking signal in an overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR).
4-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
P_PUTT_ON OUT3721 P_POTT_ON OUT3705 P_BLOCK_ON OUT3715 P_SEND_PUTT OUT3722 P_SEND_POTT OUT3706 P_SEND_BLOCK OUT3716 P_DISTBL OUT3077 P_UWEAK_R INP3034 P_UWEAK_S INP3035 P_UWEAK_T INP3036
>=1
>=1
&
BIT_HF_ON
>=1
4 6
o & 5 Q o & 8
P_HFSEND OUT3081
2000 P_START_ALL INP3050
TON I T
>=1
7 P_HFBOOST OUT3080
Fig. 4.31
4.2.1.5.12.
Segment HFSEND
Tripping logic
The main purpose of the tripping logic is coordination of single and three-phase tripping of the circuit-breaker (heavy-duty tripping relay O/Ps). It also provides additional starting and tripping signals. Single, respectively three-phase tripping is initiated when at least the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: starter picked up, i.e. underimpedance start or overcurrent start or undervoltage start (Weak) [UWEAK_R, S, T] from the POTT or PUTT receive logic trip by the relays own measuring unit or by the back-up overcurrent unit or by the short-zone logic or by the switch-onto-fault logic or by the zone extension logic or from the PUTT, POTT or BLOCK OR receive logic. no blocking signal is being generated by the enable and blocking logic. (This signal cannot block tripping by the back-up overcurrent unit or short-zone logic.) the parameter '3PhTripMode' is set to '1PhTrip' the starter of just one phase has picked up none of the conditions for three-phase tripping is fulfilled. The parameter '3PhTripMode' is set to 'Trip CB 3P'. The starters of more than one phase have picked up. The auto-reclosure function has instructed the distance function to trip all three-phases. Either the back-up overcurrent function or the short-zone logic has tripped.
Only single-phase tripping will take place when:
Any one of the following conditions will result in three-phase tripping:
4-40
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
operation of the switch-onto-fault logic A second trip occurs (e.g. evolving fault) during, for example, the auto-reclosure dead time. The parameter '3PhTripMode' is set to 'Trip CB 3P/Delay 3' and the zone 3 time has expired (auto-reclosure in the 2nd zone as well).
1 >=1
P_START_R INP3000 P_UWEAKR_PUTT OUT3700 P_UWEAKR_POTT OUT3710 P_START_S INP3001 P_UWEAKS_PUTT OUT3701 P_UWEAKS_POTT OUT3711 P_START_T INP3002 P_UWEAKT_PUTT OUT3702 P_UWEAKT_POTT OUT3712
BIT_R 2 >=1
3 >=1
4 &
BIT_S
5 & 6 & 8 >=1
7 >=1
BIT_T
BIT_TRIP1_345
P_OC_RST INP3054 P_DRST OUT3072 PAR_W_T1_TRIP PAR38C0
9 & 10 TOFF I T Q o
15 &
P_RST OUT3070
11 & 4
12 TONB I T Q 13 &
14 >=1
BIT_TRIP1_12 <
Fig. 4.32
BIT_TRIP1_345 P_THREE_PH_TRIP INP3A11 P_AR_1POL_INP INP3112 P_TH3 INP3062 P_TH3P INP3A10 P_OC_D INP3055 P_SOTF OUT3073 P_TRIP_STUB OUT30B6 BIT_TRIP1_12 P_UWEAK_PUTT OUT3703 P_UWEAK_POTT OUT3713
Segment TRIP1
3 >=1
1 &
o 2 >=1
BIT_THREE_P 4 >=1 P_WI OUT30B4
Fig. 4.33
Segment TRIP2
4-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
P_SOTF OUT3073 P_ZE_FOR_DIST INP3111 P_AR_ZE OUT3094 P_ZE_EN INP3814 P_MEAS_OR2 INP3052 P_START_ALL INP3050 P_TRIP_STUB OUT30B6 P_OC_D INP3055 P_MEAS_MAIN INP3051 P_TRIP_PUTT OUT3704 P_TRIP_POTT OUT3714 P_TRIP_BLOCK OUT3717 P_HF_OFF INP30C7 BIT_THREE_P BIT_R
1 &
2 >=1 3 &
6 >=1
5 RSFF S R
4 1 :B
8 >=1 9 & o
10 >=1
100
7 TOFFB I T Q
P_M_OWN OUT3084
14 & 11 >=1
18 >=1 15 & 16 & 17 o & o
BIT_S
12 >=1 13 >=1
BIT_T
P_D OUT3071 19 I01 I02 I03 I04 I05 I06 I07 O01 O02 O03 O04 O05 O06 O07 P_DRST OUT3072 P_D3PH OUT3085 P_D1PH OUT3083 P_DH OUT3087 P_DR OUT30B0 P_DS OUT30B1 P_DT OUT30B2
P_DISTBL OUT3077
P_EF_ENABLE INP3DC5 P_EF_TRIP_OUT INP31A1
Fig. 4.34
P_DR OUT30B0 P_DS OUT30B1 P_DT OUT30B2
Segment TRIP3
>=1 1
&
P_DRST OUT3072 P_D3PH OUT3085 6
o o
&
3 >=1 4
o & o o & o
7 TONB I T Q & 8
P_D1PH OUT3083 P_DH OUT3087
BIT_TRIP3_1
Fig. 4.35
Segment TRIP4
4-42
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.1.6.
Power swing blocking (PSB)
The purpose of the power swing blocking function is to prevent unwanted tripping of the distance protection function in response to power system instability with oscillatory fluctuations of power (power swings) or loss of synchronism (out-of-step). The power swing blocking function does not influence the operation of the back-up overcurrent function. When power swings occur, the electrical parameters of the system vary at a slower or faster rate in relation to the angle between the voltage vectors of the energy sources in different parts of the system. In the case of a fault on the other hand, step changes of these parameters take place. The parameters, which regardless of location are subject to appreciable variation in the general region around phase opposition ( = 180), are the resistance R and the voltage component U cos . The value of corresponds to the angle between phase voltage and current.
E1
U
Ucos
E2
)Ucos
E1
E2
Independent of:
-Relay location -Relay characteristics -Relay settings

HEST 915 028
Fig. 4.36
Power swing blocking
4-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The voltage and current input variables are passed on to the evaluation system. The criterion for pick-up of the power swing blocking function is the continuous variation of (U cos ), which corresponds to the variation of real power in relation to current amplitude (P = I U . cos ). The value of (U cos ) is determined after every zero-crossing of the current. A blocking signal is generated, as soon as a repetitive variation of the value of (U cos ) is detected, i.e. a variation must be detected at least three times to count as a power swing. Two periods are needed to detect the faster power swings up to a frequency of 8 Hz. The power swing blocking function does not pick up during a fault, because the variation of (U cos ) in relation to time only occurs once and at a much higher rate than the functions operating range. Slow swings are evaluated over five periods by a second system. At its lowest operating limit, this system detects a frequency of 0.2 Hz. Together the two systems cover a range from 0.2 to 8 Hz and no setting is required during commissioning. The blocking signal 'PSB' is maintained for as long as the distance protection function is in the picked-up state. The power swing blocking function is only effective for the symmetrical three-phase condition and cannot block the distance function for asymmetrical faults (E/Fs and phase-to-phase faults). A blocking signal is not issued, if the zero-crossings of the current signal occur at relatively irregular intervals, because considerable differences between the zero-crossing intervals are a clear indication of a fault on the power system. Phase jumps in the current wave form occur at the incidence of a fault, as a consequence of incorrect switching and when CT saturation takes place. Since the currents during power swings are sinusoidal and do not contain a DC component, it is permissible to assume that the problem of CT saturation does not arise. Zero-crossings resulting from the slip are in any event excluded by the current enable setting of Imin.
4-44
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.1.7.
FUPLA name 3P AR_1POL-INP AR_ZE BLOCK_ON BLOCK_OR CREL_E CREL_R CREL_S CREL_T D D_RELEASE D1PH D3PH DEADLINE1 DH DISTBL DISTBL DEL DR DRST DS DT ECHO EXTBL_DIST EXTBL_PSB HF_ON HFBOOST HFFAIL HFREC HFREC_EF HFSEND HW_RDY I0_VTSUP I2_VTSUP ISOL_OPEN M_OWN MANCL_DIST MEAS_BWD MEAS_MAIN MEAS_OR2
Signal designations and abbreviations

HMI name Signal description Preparation of a three-phase trip 1P recl. ZExtensionAR Single-phase reclosure by the auto-reclosure function Sig. from recl. function to switch distance function to overreach Overreaching blocking scheme selected BLOCK OR Start I0 Overreaching blocking scheme Residual current enable, I0 criterion R phase current enable S phase current enable T phase current enable Trip RST General trip signal before blocking gate from R, S or T phases Any trip before phase selection Trip CB 1P Trip CB 3P Dead line Trip Com Dist blocked DelDistBlk Trip CB R Trip CB Trip CB S Trip CB T Echo Ext blk dist Ext blk PSB Single-phase trip signal before blocking gate Three-phase trip signal before blocking gate Line isolator open; used when VTs on the busbars. Trip via the communication channel Tripping blocked Delayed tripping blocked signal Trip signal to R phase of CB General trip from R, S or T phase Trip signal to S phase of CB Trip signal to T phase of CB Transmission of an echo sig. in a POTT scheme Distance function blocked by external signal Power swing blocking blocked by external signal A transfer tripping mode is selected. Com boost Com fail Com Rx Signal to boost PLC power ready for transmission PLC channel failure Signal received by PLC (unused) Com Tx PLC signal transmitted Hardware standing by VT supervision I0> setting exceeded. VT supervision I2> setting exceeded. Isol open Line isolator open (only in conjunction with short-zone logic) Relays own measurement, no transfer tripping involved. Manual close Meas Bward Meas main Meas Oreach Signal from CB manual control switch Fault in the reverse direction Fault in zone 1, 2, 3, 4 or <Z (dir./non-dir.) acc. to sig. delay Fault in the overreach zone or zone 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x INT x x x PAR CPU OPT OUT
4-45
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
FUPLA name OC_D OC_RST ONE_CHL POTT POTT_ON PSBLOCK PUTT_FWD PUTT_NONDIR PUTT_ON PUTT_OR2 R RELAY_RDY RST S SEND_BLOCK SEND_POTT SEND_PUTT SOTF SOTF_10S SOTF_INIT ST1 ST1FWD ST2 ST2FWD ST3 ST3FWD ST4 ST4FWD START_ALL START_E START_OC START_R START_S START_T START_U0 START_UZ STDEF STOR
HMI name Trip O/C Start O/C
Signal description General O/C trip General O/C start (not used)
INT
PAR
CPU x x
OPT
OUT x x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
POTT
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping POTT scheme selected
Power swing PUTT FWD PUTT NONDIR
Power swing function blocking signal PUTT for forwards only PUTT for the entire underimpedance characteristic A PUTT scheme is selected
PUTT OR2
PUTT only for overreach zone or zone 2 Starting or Uweak phase selection sig. for R phase
Relay ready Start RST
Relay standing by. General start with Uweak active Starting or Uweak phase selection sig. for S phase Tx signal from BLOCK OR scheme Tx signal from POTT scheme Tx signal from PUTT scheme
Trip SOTF SOTF10sec
Switch-onto-fault condition fulfilled Switch-onto-fault condition fulfilled (after 10 s) Switch-onto-fault start
Delay 1
Zone 1 time delay running Zone 1 set for forwards measurement
Delay 2
Delay 3
Delay 4
Start R+S+T Start E Start OC Start R Start S Start T Start U0 Start UZ Delay def
General start with Uweak inactive General E/F start with I0 and/or U0 Overcurrent start General start by R phase with Uweak inactive General start by S phase with Uweak inactive General start by T phase with Uweak inactive Residual voltage start, U0 criterion Underimpedance start Lock-out timer running Overreach zone selected, i.e. T4<T2
4-46
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
FUPLA name T T1_BLOCK T1_TRANSBL T1_TRIP T2_TRANSBL TBA_BLOCK TBA_POTT TBE TH1 TH2 TH3 TH3P TH4 THDEF THREE_PH_TRIP TRANSBL TRIP_BLOCK TRIP_POTT TRIP_PUTT TRIP_STUB TRIP_ZE U0_VTSUP U2_VTSUP UNBL UNBLOCK UWEAK_POTT UWEAK_PUTT UWEAK_R UWEAK_S UWEAK_T UWEAKR_POTT UWEAKR_PUTT UWEAKS_POTT UWEAKS_PUTT UWEAKT_POTT UWEAKT_PUTT UZ_FORWARD VT_FAIL VTFAIL_DLY VTFAIL_IU0 VTFAIL_IU2
HMI name
Signal description Starting or Uweak phase selection sig. for T phase
INT x
PAR
CPU
OPT
OUT
t1Block t1TransBl t1EvolFaults t2TransBl
Waiting time for HFREC, default 40 ms Timer for monitoring the TBA signal, default 50 ms Timer for detecting evolving faults, default 3000 ms Max. duration of the TBE signal, default 3000 ms BLOCK OR tripping condition fulfilled. POTT tripping condition fulfilled. Transient blocking logic selected. End of zone 1 time x
x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Delay >=2
End of zone 2 time End of zone 3 time
3PhTripDel3
Three-phase trip after TH3 End of zone 4 time End of lock-out time
3ph trip TransBl
Always 3 phases tripped. Transient blocking logic Tripping signal from BLOCK OR scheme Tripping signal from PUTT scheme Tripping signal from POTT scheme
Trip Stub
Tripping by short-zone logic Tripping by zone extension logic U0> setting exceeded. U2> setting exceeded. Deblocking selected.
Unblock
PLC channel failure 'General Uweak condition fulfilled' from POTT 'General Uweak condition fulfilled' from PUTT Weak infeed in R phase Weak infeed in S phase Weak infeed in T phase 'Uweak condition fulfilled in R phase' from POTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in R phase' from PUTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in S phase' from POTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in S phase' from PUTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in T phase' from POTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in T phase' from PUTT
Meas. Fward VTSup VTSup Delay
Fault in forwards direction V.t supervision operated. Delayed VT_FAIL signal V.t supervision using zero-sequence component V.t supervision using negative-sequence component
4-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
FUPLA name WEAK WI ZE_FOR_DIST
HMI name Weak Weak Infeed ZExtension
Signal description POTT/PUTT phase selection by weak infeed logic Weak infeed condition fulfilled. Signal switching distance function to overreach
INT
PAR x
CPU
OPT
OUT
x x
INT:
internal signal connecting two FUPLA segments P_.......... BIT_........ (not contained in the above table)
PAR: Parameter or mode which can be set. PAR_B_ (short-time element, TONB: delayed pick-up, TOFFB: delayed reset) PAR_W_...... (long-time element, TON: delayed pick-up,
TOFF: delayed reset) FL_......... (Flag, Mode)
CPU: Main processor signal P_.......... OPT: Opto-coupler input P_.......... OUT: Signal output which can be assigned to an output relay, LED, event recorder or disturbance recorder P_..........
4-48
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.2. 4.2.2.1.
Auto-reclosure Logic segments
The auto-reclosure logic comprises the several FUPLA segments, the block diagrams of which are shown below. The relationship between the inputs and outputs and the designations used for the HMI is given in Section 4.2.2.2.
1 &
P_MD1_EXT P_MD1_EXT_1P_1P P_MD1_EXT_1P_3P P_MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P P_MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P P_MD1_1P_1PAR o o o
2 >=1 3 & BIT_MD_1P_1P
o o P_MD1_1P_3PAR 5 & o P_MD1_1P3P_3PAR 7 &
4 >=1 BIT_MD_1P_3P 6 >=1 BIT_MD_1P3P_3P 8 >=1 BIT_MD_1P3P_1P3P
P_MD1_1P3P_1P3P
Fig. 4.37
Segment MODE_1AR: Selection of the mode for the first auto-reclosure cycle
4-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
P_AR_START P_AR_START_2 P_AR_START_3 P_TRIP P_TRIP_3P P_TRIP_2 P_TRIP_3P_2 P_TRIP_3 P_TRIP_3P_3 o 6 >=1 o & 4 9 >=1 o & 3 & 2 5 >=1
1 >=1
BIT_AR_START
P_AR_RUN BIT_MD_1P_3P BIT_MD_1P_1P
10 >=1
11 o &
13 >=1 12 &
BIT_DISCRT P_1AR_1P 7 >=1 o & 8 15 >=1 BIT_AR1_DEFTR
BIT_MD_1P3P_3P
14 NPLS In Out 17 RSFF S 16 NPLS In Out
P_AR_BLCKD BIT_MD_1P3P_1P3P
18 >=1 19 >=1
20 & 21 >=1 22 >=1 R 25 o & 24 >=1 26 RSFF S R 23 RSFF S
P_AR_3POL_OUT
P_CL_CB P_CL_CB2
27 o &
BIT_AR1_3P_EN
28 NPLS In Out
29 &
30 &
BIT_AR1_1P_EN
BIT_AR1 P_MAST_DEL
o o 31 & o o 33 o & o BIT_AR_TRIP 32 PPLS In Out 34 TON I Tim Q BIT_BLK_OPT_FIN
BIT_DEADT
BIT_ST_DEAD_T
TMSEC_OPERT
Fig. 4.38
Segment ARTRIP: Starting and tripping inputs, determination of the autoreclosure mode, AR initiation and fault duration time
4-50
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
P_CB_OP
100
1 TON I Tim 2 TOFF I Tim
3 >=1
P_RDY_OCO
100
o o
4 &
P_AR_RUN P_CB2_OP
100
5 TON I Tim 6 TOFF I Tim
10 &
7 >=1
P_RDY_OCO2
100
o 8 >=1
9 & 11 TOFF I Tim
16 >=1
P_CL_CB P_CL_CB2
50
12 o &
P_MANCL_AR BIT_AR_START BIT_AR_TRIP 13 o & o 14 o &
P_COND_BLCK P_EXTBL_AR P_TST_AROFF BIT_BLK_OPT_FIN P_MD1_EXT P_MD1_EXT_1P_1P P_MD1_EXT_1P_3P P_MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P P_MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P TMSEC_BLCK_T BIT_INHIB_OUT P_INH_IN
15 & o o o o 17 TOFF I Tim Q 18 >=1
19 o & o 21 &
P_AR_BLCKD 20 >=1 P_AR_RDY
P_AR1_ZE BIT_AR1 P_AR2_ZE P_2AR P_AR3_ZE P_3AR P_AR4_ZE P_4AR
25 >=1
22 &
23 &
24 &
26 &
28 >=1
P_AR_ZEMD 29 &
27 o & o 30 RSFF S R 32 RSFF S R
P_AR_ZEOUT
BIT_CB1_DISABLED
31 &
BIT_CB2_DISABLED
Fig. 4.39
Segment BLOCK: Blocking and zone extension logic
4-51
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
BIT_ST_DEAD_T
&
2 COUNTX C Q0 R Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 3 >=1 & 4
BIT_ARINI BIT_AR1 P_2AR P_3AR P_4AR BIT_AR_FIN P_AR_RUN
P_AR_MD2 P_AR_MD3 P_AR_MD4
o & 5
8 >=1
&
&
7 BIT_LAST_AR <
P_AR_BLCKD 10 & 11 TON I Tim
9 ASSB <
BIT_AR1_1P_EN
P_1AR_1P
TMSEC_DEADT1_1P
Q 12 RSFF S R
13 o &
17 >=1
14 o & 16 &
BIT_AR1_3P_EN
TMSEC_DEADT1_3P
15 TON I Tim
TMSEC_DEADT1_EXT P_EXT_T1_EN
18 TOFF I Tim Q
20 >=1
19 &
27 >=1
TMSEC_DEADT2
21 TON I Tim
22 Q o &
TMSEC_DEADT3
23 TON I Tim
24 Q o &
TMSEC_DEADT4 28 TON I Tim
25 TON I Tim
26 Q o & BIT_DEADT
TMSEC_DISCRT_1P
Q 29 RSFF S R
31 o &
36 >=1
30 o &
32 PPLS In Out 33 o &
34 >=1 35 TOFF I Tim Q BIT_DISCRT P_1AR_3P
TMSEC_DISCRT_3P
37 o & o
Fig. 4.40
Segment ARCOUNT: Auto-reclosure attempt counter
4-52
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
P_MAST_DEL P_AR_RUN BIT_CB1_WAIT BIT_DEADT BIT_CB1_DISABLED TMSEC_TIME_OUT
&
1 2 >=1 3
& o
4 TOFF I Tim Q o & BIT_T_OUT1 7 BIT_TOUT_TRIP1 17 o &
6 PPLS In Out 13 &
&
BIT_AR_TRIP P_MDSCBYPS_1P BIT_AR1_1P_EN BIT_AR1 & &
10 >=1 9 12 >=1 11 & 15 RSFF S 14 >=1 16 TON I Tim Q o P_CL_CB
P_MDSCBYPS_1P3P P_EXTSC_BYP P_SYN_CK P_CO_RDY P_DEADL
P_AR_BLCKD TMSEC_CL_T
18 PPLS In Out
19 NPLS In Out
20 o & o o
BIT_INIT_BLOCK
BIT_CB1_DEFTRIP
Fig. 4.41
Segment CLOSE1: Close signal for the first circuit-breaker
4-53
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
P_MAST_DEL P_AR_RUN BIT_CB2_WAIT BIT_DEADT BIT_CB2_DISABLED TMSEC_TIME_OUT
&
1 2 >=1 3
& o
4 TOFF I Tim Q o & BIT_T_OUT2 7 BIT_TOUT_TRIP2 17 o &
6 PPLS In Out 13 &
&
BIT_AR_TRIP P_MDSCBYPS_1P BIT_AR1_1P_EN BIT_AR1 & &
10 >=1 9 12 >=1 11 & 15 RSFF S 14 >=1 16 TON I Tim Q o P_CL_CB2 19 o & o
P_MDSCBYPS_1P3P P_EXTSC_BYP P_SYN_CK2 P_CO_RDY2 P_DEADL2
P_AR_BLCKD TMSEC_CL_T
18 NPLS In Out BIT_INIT_BLOCK
o o
BIT_CB2_DEFTRIP
Fig. 4.42
Segment CLOSE2: Close signal for the second circuit-breaker
4-54
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
P_CL_CB
300
1 TOFF I Tim
&
BIT_AR_TRIP BIT_DEADT P_AR_BLCKD 4 NPLS In Out P_AR_RUN P_CB_OP 3 >=1
5 RSFF S
Q 6 o &
BIT_CL_AND_TR1
&
o o & o 10 RSFF S R 8 9 RSFF S R 11 TON I Tim Q
BIT_CL1_UNS
BIT_CL1_SUC
40
12 & P_DEL_FLW
P_MAST_MDE
Fig. 4.43
Segment SUCCES1: Close supervision for the first circuit-breaker

1 TOFF I Tim
P_CL_CB2
300
&
BIT_AR_TRIP BIT_DEADT P_AR_BLCKD 4 NPLS In Out P_AR_RUN P_CB2_OP 3 >=1
5 RSFF S
Q 6 o &
BIT_CL_AND_TR2
&
o o & o 8 9 RSFF S R Q
BIT_CL2_UNS
BIT_CL2_SUC
Fig. 4.44
Segment SUCCES2: Close supervision for the second circuit-breaker
4-55
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
P_MAST_MDE BIT_TOUT_TRIP1 BIT_TOUT_TRIP2 BIT_CB1_DEFTRIP BIT_CL1_UNS P_AR_BLCKD BIT_CB2_DEFTRIP BIT_CL2_UNS 3 >=1 1 >=1
13 >=1
16 &
2 RSFF S R 4 RSFF S R Q & 7
5 >=1
BIT_CB2_DISABLED BIT_CL2_SUC 6 >=1 o
BIT_CB1_DISABLED BIT_CL1_SUC
& o
BIT_AR_TRIP BIT_DISCRT BIT_DEADT BIT_AR1_DEFTR BIT_CL_AND_TR1 BIT_CL_AND_TR2 BIT_LAST_AR 10 >=1 o
&
11 &
12 & 500
15 TMOC I Tim Q 17 >=1
P_BLCK_TO_FLW
P_MAST_NOSUC
14 & 19 & 20 & 22 o & 23 >=1 24 TOFF I Tim Q 500
18 TMOC I Tim
21 >=1
P_DEF_TRP
TMSEC_INHIB_T
25 & 26 o &
BIT_INHIB_OUT P_INH_OUT
P_CB2_PRIORITY BIT_T_OUT2
o 27 o & o o
BIT_CB1_WAIT
BIT_T_OUT1
BIT_CB2_WAIT
Fig. 4.45
Segment DEFTRIP: Master/follower and duplex logic and definitive TRIP signal
4-56
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.2.2.
Signal designations
The relationship between the designations of the FUPLA input and output signals and the parameter designations used in the HMI can be seen from the following tables. The tables do not show the connections between the various segments.
Timer settings
FUPLA signal name TMSEC_BLCK_T TMSEC_CL_T TMSEC_DEADT1_1P TMSEC_DEADT1_3P TMSEC_DEADT1_EXT TMSEC_DEADT2 TMSEC_DEADT3 TMSEC_DEADT4 TMSEC_DISCRT_1P TMSEC_DISCRT_3P TMSEC_INHIB_T TMSEC_OPERT TMSEC_TIME_OUT HMI designation t AR Block t Close t Dead1 1P t Dead1 3P t Dead1 Ext t Dead2 t Dead3 t Dead4 t Discrim. 1P t Discrim. 3P t Inhibit t Oper t Timeout HMI setting 0.05 300 0.05 300 0.05 300 0.05 300 0.05 300 0.05 300 0.05 300 0.05 300 0.10 300 0.10 300 0.05 300 0.05 300 0.05 300
Binary inputs
FUPLA signal name P_AR_MD2 P_AR_MD3 P_AR_MD4 P_AR_START P_AR_START_2 P_AR_START_3 P_AR_ZEMD P_AR1_ZE P_AR2_ZE HMI designation 2..4WE Modus 2..4WE Modus 2..4WE Modus Start Start 2 Start 3 ZE Prefault ZE 1. AR ZE 2. AR HMI setting 2 AR 3 AR 4 AR On On On
4-57
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
FUPLA signal name P_AR3_ZE P_AR4_ZE P_CB_OP P_CB2_OP P_CB2_PRIORITY P_CO_RDY P_CO_RDY2 P_COND_BLCK P_DEADL P_DEADL2 P_EXT_T1_EN P_EXTBL_AR P_EXTSC_BYP P_INH_IN P_MANCL_AR P_MAST_DEL P_MAST_MDE P_MAST_NOSUC P_MD1_1P_1PAR P_MD1_1P_3PAR P_MD1_1P3P_3PAR P_MD1_1P3P_1P3P P_MD1_EXT P_MD1_EXT_1P_1P P_MD1_EXT_1P_3P P_MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P P_MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P P_MDSCBYPS_1P P_MDSCBYPS_1P3P P_RDY_OCO P_RDY_OCO2
HMI designation ZE 3. AR ZE 4. AR CB Open CB2 Open CB2 Priority CO Ready CO Ready 2 Cond.Blk AR Dead line Dead line 2 Extend t1 Ext. Blk. AR Ext.SCBypas Inhibit Inp. Manual Close MasterDelay Master mode Mast.noSucc 1. AR Mode 1. AR Mode 1. AR Mode 1. AR Mode 1. AR Mode MD1_EXT_1P_1P MD1_EXT_1P_3P MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P SCBypas 1P SCBypas1P3P CB Ready CB2 Ready
HMI setting On On On 1. 1P-1P 1. 1P-3P 1. 1P3P-3P 1. 1P3P-1P3P Ext. selection -
4-58
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
FUPLA signal name P_SYN_CK P_SYN_CK2 P_TRIP P_TRIP_2 P_TRIP_3 P_TRIP_3P P_TRIP_3P_2 P_TRIP_3P_3
HMI designation SynchroChck SynchroChck2 Trip CB Trip CB2 Trip CB3 Trip CB 3P Trip CB2 3P Trip CB3 3P
HMI setting -
Signal outputs FUPLA signal name P_1AR_1P P_1AR_3P P_2AR P_3AR P_4AR P_AR_3POL_OUT P_AR_BLCKD P_AR_RDY P_AR_RUN P_AR_ZEOUT P_BLCK_TO_FLW P_CL_CB P_CL_CB2 P_DEF_TRP P_DEL_FLW P_INH_OUT HMI designation First AR 1P First AR 3P Second AR Third AR Fourth AR Trip 3-Pol. AR Blocked AR Ready AR in Prog ZExtension. Blk.toFlwr. Close CB Close CB2 Def. Trip DelayFlwr. Inhibit Outp
4-59
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.3. 4.2.3.1.
Breaker failure protection Introduction
This function provides backup protection to clear a fault after being enabled by the unit protection for the case that the circuit-breaker (CB) should fail. It has to operate as quickly and reliably as possible especially on EHV systems where stability is crucial. To this end, current detectors continuously monitor the line currents and if they do not reset after a preset time, which allows for the operating times of the unit protection and the circuit-breaker, a tripping command is issued to either attempt to trip the same circuit-breaker again or trip the surrounding circuit-breakers. Resetting of current detectors is influenced by the following factors: Even after the main CB contacts open, the current does not immediately drop to zero, but to a level determined by the fault resistance and the resistance of the arc across the open CB contacts. The current only becomes zero after the de-ionization time of the CB arc. The pick-up setting of the detector The fault level prior to operation of the CB Whether the main CTs saturate. If a CT saturates, its secondary current may not pass through zero at the same time as its primary current and if the primary current is interrupted at zero, the CT flux may be at some positive or negative value. The secondary current therefore decays through the burdens of the relays thus increasing the reset time.
The resetting time varies typically between 20 and 30 ms. Since for the above application, the current detectors should reset as quickly as possible, Fourier filter algorithms are included to minimize the affect of CT saturation and eliminate completely or substantially any DC offset. The block diagram below shows the basic functions, which are explained in the following Sections.
4-60
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Current detectors Redundant logic Red Trip Lx
Start Lx
Trip t1 Lx Retrip logic Retrip t1 Remote Trip Backup Trip t2 EFP Bus Trip CB Off CB On Start Ext Ext Trip EFP Ext Trip t2 1 1 1 Ext Trip t1 Trip t1 Trip t2 Unconditional logic End Fault logic EFS Rem Trip Uncon Trip t2 Uncon Trip t1
Remote logic
Back up logic
HEST 005 045 C
Fig. 4.46
4.2.3.2.
Block diagram
Three-phase/ single-phase mode
The function has three current detectors. When it is used in the threephase mode, each current detector measures the current in each of the three phases. In order to accommodate a fourth current detector measuring the neutral current, this function has to be duplicated and the second function set to the single-phase mode and the appropriate current pickup. The two functions then operate in parallel. This arrangement also covers the two special cases of phase-tophase-to-ground and three-phase-to-ground faults.
4.2.3.3. 'Redundant Trip'
The 'Redundant Trip' logic performs phase-segregated direct tripping of the same circuit-breaker without any intentional time delay, if the Start inputs are active and the corresponding current detectors have picked up. This ensures that the breaker receives a tripping command in the event of a unit protection trip circuit failure, which would otherwise cause a second attempt to trip the same breaker or backup tripping of the surrounding breakers.
4-61
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.3.4.
'Retrip'
The unit protection issues a trip command and simultaneously starts individual phases or all three phases of the breaker fail function. A second attempt is made to trip the corresponding phase or phases after the first time step (t1), providing the current detectors have not reset. The 'Retrip' logic can be disabled if not required. Separate timers for each phase ensure correct operation during evolving faults.
4.2.3.5. 'Backup Trip'
A second time step (t2) follows the first time step (t1) and initiates backup tripping, which is always of all three phases. If the first time step is disabled, the second time step is started immediately, providing the current detectors have activated by the starting signal from the protection. The backup trip logic trips all surrounding breakers feeding the fault.
4.2.3.6. 'Remote Trip'
The 'Remote Trip' logic trips the breaker at the remote end of the line. Remote tripping can take place concurrently with the 'Retrip' or 'Backup' functions or not at all as desired. In contrast to the other tripping commands which remain activate for a given period after the initiating signal has reset, the remote tripping signal is an impulse with a width which is adjustable irrespective of when the starting signal from the protection resets.
4.2.3.7. 'Unconditional Trip'
This feature was introduced to respond to low-level faults with currents too low for the current detectors to pick up or do not initially cause any fault current at all such as mechanical protection devices like Buchholz, etc. The start input bypasses the current detectors and activates the time steps if the breaker is in the closed position. In all other respects, this logic is similar to the 'Retrip' and 'Backup' logics.
4.2.3.8. 'End Fault Trip'
While in the case of a fault between a circuit-breaker and a single set of CTs, the circuit-breaker may not fail, the affect on the power system and the action that has to be taken are the same as if the circuitbreaker had failed. Where there is only a single set of CTs on the busbar side of a circuitbreaker, the zones of protection do not overlap and a fault between the circuit-breaker and the CTs is seen as a line fault, although it belongs to the busbar zone and persists after the circuit-breaker has been
4-62
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
tripped. The breaker failure protections 'End Fault Trip' logic ultimately clears such faults at the end of the second time step. This logic is enabled if the breaker is open and the current detectors are still picked up, indicating a fault between the breaker and the CTs. The speed of tripping is determined by the time delay setting. Depending on whether the single set of CTs is on the line side or bus side of the circuit breaker, either the section of busbar or the circuit breaker at the remote end of the line is tripped.
4.2.3.9. 'External Trip'
This function has been included to make the breaker fail protection more user-friendly and reduce the amount of systems engineering required. It generates an instantaneous trip when either of the following inputs is activated:
The input connected to the second time steps of other breaker fail protection devices in the station. The input connected to the end fault outputs of other breaker fail protection devices in the station.
4-63
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.4. 4.2.4.1.
High-impedance General
In a high-impedance scheme, the measurement circuit represents a high-impedance across a circulating current circuit. High-impedance protection is used for phase and possibly earth fault protection for generators, motors and compensators restricted E/F protection for power transformers
The main advantage of a high-impedance scheme compared with a normal differential scheme is its better stability for relatively low through-fault currents (between IN and 5 IN). The disadvantages are the high voltage across the circulating current circuit during internal faults the special requirements to be fulfilled by the CTs
A high-impedance scheme is used to advantage where fault currents are relatively low, discrimination is absolutely essential.
This is the case for phase faults on air-cored compensators and earth faults on power transformers that are grounded via an impedance. In some instances solidly grounded transformers can also be protected. Either an overcurrent function with a series resistor or an overvoltage function can be used in a high-impedance scheme. The restricted earth fault protection (R.E.F.) described in the next Section is an example for the application of an overcurrent function. The required level of through-fault stability is determined by the value of the high impedance presented by the protection measuring circuit.
4-64
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.4.2. 4.2.4.2.1.
Restricted E/F protection for a transformer Basic requirements
A restricted E/F scheme must be able to detect E/Fs in the protection zone remain stable during both phase and earth through-faults
The scheme is designed to remain stable in the case of a solidly grounded star-point for an external E/F current in the case of an impedance grounded star-point for the highest external phase and earth fault current
When designing a scheme, it is assumed that one CT is fully saturated and none of the others.
4.2.4.2.2. Components of a restricted E/F scheme
A restricted E/F scheme comprises the following items:

4.2.4.2.3.
RE.316*4 overcurrent function is connected to a measuring CT linear stabilizing resistor RS non-linear resistor shorting contacts where necessary
Design
The E/F current is determined by a) the generator and step-up transformer reactances when the HV circuit breaker is open (see Fig. 4.47). b) in addition to a) by the HV power system when the HV circuitbreaker is closed (see Fig. 4.48). As a result of the current distribution for a through-fault, the star-point CT conducts the highest current in the case of a solidly grounded transformer as shown in Fig. 4.48. Apart from the burden of the cables, the high fault level results in a high CT flux and a high probability of it saturating. The influence of external phase faults on the circulating current circuit is limited, especially if the connections between the CT cores can be kept short. Phase faults are therefore neglected when designing a scheme for a solidly grounded system. They may not be neglected, however, where a system is impedance grounded.
4-65
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The value of the stabilizing resistor is chosen such that the voltage drop caused by the highest external E/F and possibly phase fault current across the secondary winding and leads of the saturated CT cannot reach the pick-up setting of the protection (see Fig. 4.49). The knee-point voltage of the CTs is specified such that the they can supply sufficient current during an internal fault to enable the protection to trip. The knee-point voltage Uk of the CTs must therefore be appreciably higher than the voltage drop Ua. Symbols used: IE I2 I2N I1N IN R2 RL Ua , Ui Uk I RS IF Equations: Ua = (R2 + 2 RL) I2 Uk 2 Ua I = 0.25 I2N (solidly grounded star-point) I = 0.10 I2N (impedance grounded star-point) RS primary star-point current (AC component) for a through-fault secondary current of the non-saturated CTs CT secondary rated current CT primary rated current protection rated current secondary resistance of the saturated CT at 75C lead resistance according to the Figure voltage drops across the circulating current circuit for external and internal faults CT knee-point voltage current setting stabilizing resistor highest primary fault current (AC component) for an internal E/F
Ua I
Ui = RS I2 (I2 results from IF)
Umax = 2 2 Uk ( Ui Uk )
4-66
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.4.2.4.
Example
Determination of the stabilizing resistor: CTs 1000/1 A R2 = 5 RL = 100 m = 0.5 50 4 mm 2
(CT lead gauge 4 mm2)
Maximum earth fault through current: IE = 10,000 A This is the E/F current on an HV system with the following data: xd" = x2 = 0.2 ; I2 = 10 000 xT = xT0 = 0.1 ; xsys = xsys 0 = 0.01
1 = 10 A 1000
Ua = (5 + 2 0,5) 10 = 60 V Uk 2 Ua = 120 V Chosen Uk = 200 V
Settings for a solidly grounded system: I = 0.25 IN = 0.25 A (The setting I = 0.1IN is usually chosen for a impedance grounded system.) Stabilizing resistor RS
U 60 = = 240 I 0,25 RS = 300 3 I1N 2 xNetz + xNetz0 3 1000 = 100 000 A 0,02 + 0,01
Chosen
Check of the overvoltage at maximum fault current IF = =
I2 = 100 000
1 = 100 A 1000
Ui = RS I2 = 300 100 = 30 000 V Umax = 2 2 Uk ( Ui Uk )

= 2 2 200 (30 000 200 ) = 6 905 V
4-67
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Since this value exceeds the permissible maximum peak value of 2,000 V, a non-linear resistor must be connected across the circulating current circuit to limit the voltage. Shorting contacts may also be necessary.
CT specification: Rated currents Winding resistance Knee-point voltage Magnetising current i.e. 1000/1 A R2 5 Uk = 200 V I2m 2 % I2N I2m 0.02 A at U2 = 60 V
The CTs must conform to British Standard 3938, Class X. The CTs should also: have evenly distributed secondary windings on a toroidal core (i.e. to minimize the secondary leakage flux) not have any winding correction
Stabilizing resistor specification: 300 ; 0.5 A
Test voltage: 2 kV
Non-linear resistor specification: E.g. Metrosil Type 600 A/S1.
Shorting contacts: The circulating current circuit must be short-circuited within the thermal rating time of the two resistors, if an internal fault cannot be tripped in a shorter time.
Overcurrent function settings: I-Setting Delay 0.25 IN 0.02 s
4-68
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
T
4.286
Power system
4.286
HEST 935 005 FL
Fig. 4.47
E/F on the HV system supplied by the generator xd" = x2 = 0.2 ; xT = xT0 = 0.1
The current values are referred to the rated current of the transformer.
4-69
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
95.8793
4.1238
105.4672
2.0619
5.4641
2.0619
Fig. 4.48
E/F on the HV system supplied by the generator and the HV system xT = xT0 = 0.1 ; xd" = x2 = 0.2 ; xsys = xsys 0 = 0.01
4-70
9.5879
95.8793
HEST 935 006 FL
Power system
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Saturated c.t. IE IE R2
Internal E/F
External E/F
RS I2
I>
Ui I2
RS VDR
I>
Shorting contact
HEST 935 007 FL
Fig. 4.49
Restricted E/F protection of a Y connected transformer winding
4-71
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.5.
Application of the transformer differential protection in a 112 breaker configuration
A stable behavior of the differential protection function at through fault conditions is achieved by using a three feeder differential protection as it is shown in Fig. 4.50. Therefore, a RET316*4 version with a input transformer unit K22 and a software code ST310, ST320 or ST330 is needed.
Through Fault
RET316*4 ST3xx
HEST 985036 C
Fig. 4.50
Connection of the transformer differential protection in a 1 breaker configuration. Standstill protection
4.2.6. 4.2.6.1.
Standstill protection General
The purpose of the standstill protection is to isolate the generator from the system as quickly as possible, if it is connected to the system by mistake, e.g. when stationary, during start-up or when running without voltage. The protection must have a short operating time to minimize the mechanical stress on the rotors and bearings of generator and turbine, should the unit be connected to the system suddenly under these conditions. Nevertheless, it must remain stable during external faults and transients. Standstill protection can be provided by a fast overcurrent or power function. Function modules for both alternatives are included in the REG316*4 function library. The following example shows the overcurrent alternative.
4-72
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.6.2.
Standstill protection using an overcurrent function
The overcurrent function is enabled by an undervoltage function, if the period without voltage exceeds a given time. The standstill protection scheme comprises the following items: an overcurrent function 'Current' an undervoltage function 'Voltage' a timer 'Delay'
The block diagram can be seen from Fig. 4.51. The computing requirement is 23 %.
Function No.1 Voltage U U-Setting Delay = 0.85 UN = 1.00 s Trip
Function No.2 Delay TRIP time Reset time = 0.0 s = 20.0 s Trip
Block Function No.3 Current I-Setting Delay = 1.5 IN = 0.02 s Trip Standstill protection
HEST 935 008 FL
Fig. 4.51
Block diagram of a standstill protection scheme based on an overcurrent function
4.2.7. 4.2.7.1.
Rotor ground fault protection Application
Ground faults on the rotor windings of synchronous generators and motors can be detected by the protection function 'Voltage' in combination with an ancillary unit Type YWX111-11 or YWX111-21. The scheme is connected by coupling capacitors (electrical insulation) to positive and negative poles of the rotor winding and to the shaft ground. The ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21, the coupling capacitors and the natural capacitance of the rotor winding form a balanced R/C bridge. In the event of a ground fault, the fault resistance shunts the capacitance of the rotor winding to the shaft and disturbs the balance of the bridge. The voltage difference across the bridge is applied to an input VT on the REG316*4 and causes its voltage function to trip.
4-73
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Mechanical design
The ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21 is accommodated in a casing of dimensions 183 113 81 mm for surface mounting on a panel.
4.2.7.2. Determining the settings
Since it is not possible with this scheme to set the value of leakage resistance directly, a voltage corresponding to the leakage resistance has to be determined for setting on the REG316*4 (U-Setting). The time delay t [s] before tripping takes place must also be set. The normal setting range for the leakage resistance R is between 0 and 5000 : U-Setting t = 0.5...3 V = 0.5...5 s
R: U-Setting: t:
4.2.7.2.1. Required data
leakage resistance between the rotor winding and ground (shaft) voltage setting operating time
No special data are required in order to determine the settings for the protection. Determining the settings by calculation is somewhat difficult and therefore they are determined by measurement.
4.2.7.2.2. Recommended settings for Rf , respectively 'U-Setting' and t
Basically any value may be set for Rf and the time delay t within their available ranges. Very sensitive settings are not recommended to prevent mal-operation of the protection during fast load regulation on the power system. This is especially the case in schemes which trip the field switch and shut the machine down. Recommendation: Stage 2: 'Trip' R 2000 t Stage 1: 1.5 s
'Alarm' R 5000 t 1.5 s
Note that the difference voltage across the bridge is low for high leakage resistances and high for low leakage resistances.
4-74
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.7.3.
Functional check
The procedure for checking the function of the protection prior to installation or connection is given in Section 4.2.7.5.3. Alternatively a test circuit can be set up as shown in Fig. 4.54 and the procedure followed according to Section 4.2.7.5.4.
4.2.7.4. 4.2.7.4.1. Installation and wiring Location and ambient conditions
The ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21 must be mounted as close as possible to the REG316*4 (same cubicle or panel) to minimize the probability of interference. The coupling capacitors CK, on the other hand, should not be in the relay room, but as close as possible to the machine. The connecting cables to the primary system must be suitable for the insulation level of the rotor circuit.
4.2.7.4.2. Checking the wiring
Check the conformity of all connections with the wiring diagram for the plant. Check that the rated frequency and supply voltage of 100 V AC or 220 V AC agree with the data on the rating plate of the ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21. The supply voltage of 100 V AC or 220 V AC can be provided by the normal power distribution network or a VT connected to the generator concerned. The auxiliary supply can also be taken from the input terminals of an input transformer module of the REG316*4 used for measuring the generator voltage. Since duplicate grounds can be problematical, it may be necessary to interrupt the ground connection to terminal 3 of YWX111-11/-21 (connection to the shaft ground) in the cubicle or on the panel. A high percentage of harmonics produced by the excitation system between the excitation voltage and ground, can lead to an overload on the ancillary system YWX111-11/-21. When the power loss between the terminals 6 and 3 is more than 10 W, then the bridge between terminals 6 and 7 should be removed, and connect an external resistor between terminals 6 and 8. This data can be utilized for the explanation of the Fig. 4.52
4-75
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.7.4.3.
Connection of a two-stage scheme
A two-stage protection scheme requires two 'Voltage' functions and one ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21. Usual utilization:
4.2.7.4.4.
Stage 1: Stage 2:
'Alarm' 'Trip'
The connection are the same as the one stage scheme.

Connection to excitation systems with shaft-mounted diodes
Schemes for protecting excitation circuits with diodes mounted on the shaft of the generator (rotating diodes) must have a connection via a slip-ring to just one pole of the rotor circuit. The two coupling capacitors CK1 and CK2 must thus be connected in parallel to either the positive or negative pole. Where there is a choice (several slip-rings), the connection of CK1/2 to the minus pole is to be preferred. The remaining connections must be in accordance with Fig. 4.55.
4.2.7.4.5. Adaptation of the scheme in the case of shaft filters
If the rotor circuit includes a so-called shaft filter to prevent damage to the bearings, the filter reduces the sensitivity of the protection. In such cases, the sensitivity can be restored to the desired level by increasing the value of R9 in the ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21. Standard: With shaft filter: R 9 = 120 (normal sensitivity) R 9 = 1 k (increased sensitivity) see Fig. 4.57.
Location of resistor R9:

4.2.7.5. Commissioning
The commissioning procedure is described in Sections 4.2.7.5.1. to 4.2.7.5.4. The tripping circuits of the REG316*4 should be interrupted while performing the tests according to Sections 4.2.7.5.3. and 4.2.7.5.4.
4.2.7.5.1. Pre-commissioning checks
Check the wiring according to Section 4.2.7.4. Check that the YWX111-11/-21 is connected to the correct auxiliary supply voltage of 100 V AC or 220 V AC.
Check that the shaft grounding brush of the generator makes proper contact and is in good working order.
4-76
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.7.5.2.
Calibration of the ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21
The measuring bridge of which the YWX111-11/-21 is part must be balanced with the unit connected by appropriately selecting the values of the capacitors CX.
Fig. 4.52 USH: CR: CK1, CK2: CX: RE:
Calibration of the YWX111-11/-21 Aux. supply 100 V AC or 220 V AC Stray rotor ground (shaft) capacitance Coupling capacitors, 2 F each Calibration capacitor, Polyester, U 400 V External resistance 2.2 k, 137 W (Type designation FWA40-20, Ident-Nr. 1MRB380107P0001) AC voltmeter with battery supply
V:
Calibration can be carried out while the machine is stationary.

Procedure:
Interrupt the REG316*4 tripping circuits. Connect an AC voltmeter to terminals 1 and 2 of YWX111-11/-21. Connect a decade capacitor in place of CX. Close the excitation switch. Switch on the auxiliary supply USH. Vary CX until the output voltage across terminals 1 and 2 of YWX111-11/-21 becomes a minimum; typically 50 mVr.m.s..
Note:
It is possible that the 50 mVr.m.s. will not be reached in the case of schemes with shaft filters and increased YWX111-11/-21 sensitivity (R9 = 1 k).
4-77
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Solder in a capacitor or combination of capacitors with the total value determined for CX.
Theoretical value of CX
a)
Circuit according to Fig. 4.55a (or Fig. 4.52): CX = (CK1 + CK 2 ) CR CK1 + CK 2 + CR 3CK (3CS + CR ) 3CK + 3CS + CR
b)
Circuit according to Fig. 4.55b: CX =
4.2.7.5.3.
Measuring the voltage values
The value of the voltage across the bridge as measured on the YWX 111 in relation to different leakage resistances is determined by measurement with a variable resistor inserted in place of the leakage resistance as shown in Fig. 4.53.
Fig. 4.53
Measuring the voltages corresponding to leakage resistance Aux. supply 100 V AC or 220 V AC Coupling capacitors, 2 F each Test E/F resistor AC voltmeter with battery supply
USH: CK1, CK2: RP: V:
Leakage resistor RP: 0 , solid ground fault 2000 , 2.5 W 5000 , 2.5 W
The measurement can be carried out with the machine stationary.
4-78
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Procedure:

4.2.7.5.4.
Interrupt the REG316*4 tripping circuits. Connect RP = 5000 , 2000 or 0 to the positive pole of the excitation circuit. Close the excitation switch. Switch on the auxiliary supply USH.
Measure the voltage for different values of leakage resistance.

Set the voltage measured for 2000 or 5000 on the REG316*4. The voltages are usually in the range of 0.5 and 3 V. Repeat the procedure for RP = 5000 , 2000 or 0 , but connected to the minus pole.
Testing in operation
This test checks that the REG316 and the ancillary unit function correctly with the generator in operation. Once again a rotor fault is simulated by installing a leakage resistor. The protection must effectively trip.
Fig. 4.54 USH: CK1, CK2: RP: V:
Circuit for testing in operation Aux. supply 100 V AC or 220 V AC Coupling capacitors, 2 F each Test E/F resistor AC voltmeter with battery supply 1000 , 10 W, insulation voltage according to IEC recommendations (for different excitation voltages)
Leakage resistor RP:
4-79
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Procedure:
Test conditions: machine at rated speed with excitation and on load, grounding test switch ES open. Interrupt the REG316*4 tripping circuits. Set the voltage on the REG316*4 as measured according to Section 4.2.7.5.3. Close the grounding switch ES. Slowly reduce the voltage setting 'U-Setting' in steps until the protection trips.
Caution: The tripping signal is delayed.
Connect the test resistor RP to the minus pole of the excitation circuit and repeat the above procedure. Measure and record the voltage across terminals 1 and 2 of YWX111-11/-21 during the test. After the test has been completed, open the grounding switch ES and close the REG316*4 tripping circuits.
Checking the calibration of YWX111-11/-21
Measure the voltage across the bridge at terminals 1 and 2 of YWX111-11/-21 with the machine running on load with excitation. The reading should be 150 mVr.m.s. in normal operation (ES open). If it is higher, check the contact resistance of the shaft grounding brush (see Section 4.2.7.6.). repeat the calibration of YWX111-11/-21 according to Section 4.2.7.5.2.
Note:
It is possible that the 150 mVr.m.s. will not be reached in the case of schemes with shaft filters and increased YWX111-11/-21 sensitivity (R9 = 1 k).
4-80
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.7.6. 4.2.7.6.1.
Maintenance Likely causes of problems
Should the protection become defective, i.e. operate incorrectly, the cause may be one of the following
4.2.7.6.2.
The shaft grounding brush is making poor contact see Section 4.2.7.6.2. The calibration of the YWX111-11/-21 is incorrect see Sections 4.2.7.5.2. and 4.2.7.5.4. The YWX111-11/-21 is grounded in the cubicle (terminal 3) causing a duplicate ground see Section 4.2.7.4.2. The protection is too sensitive (the setting for the level of leakage resistance is too high) or the time delay t is too short.
Maintenance
The ancillary unit requires no special maintenance. As with all safety systems, however, it should be tested at regular intervals. This can be carried out as described in Section 4.2.7.5. The shaft grounding brush should be checked and cleaned at frequent intervals and the contact pressure adjusted as necessary.
4.2.7.7. Fault-finding
Fault-finding is confined to testing the device according to Section 4.2.7.5. to determine whether it operates correctly. Faulty units should be returned to the nearest ABB agent or directly to ABB Switzerland Ltd., Baden, Switzerland.
4.2.7.8. Accessories and spares
When ordering accessories or spares, state the type and serial number of the unit for which they are intended. If a number of identical units is installed in a plant, keeping a spare unit on stock is recommended. Spare material must be stored in a clean dry room at moderate temperatures. Testing spare units in conjunction with the routine testing of units in operation is recommended.
4.2.7.9. Appendices
Fig. 4.55 Fig. 4.56 Fig. 4.57
Wiring diagram of the REG316 and the ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21 Internal operation and terminals of the YWX111-11/-21 Component side of the PCB in the YWX111-11/-21
4-81
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
a) Connection to the DC side of the rotor circuit
b) Connection to the AC side of the rotor circuit Fig. 4.55 Wiring diagram of the REG316*4 and the ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21 coupling capacitors; 2 x 2 F, 8-20 kV, 0.55 A coupling capacitors; 3 x 0.5 F, 8-20 kV, 0.55 A filter capacitors for thyristor excitation auxiliary supply; 100 V or 220 V, 50/60 Hz shaft grounding brush
CK1, CK2: CK: CS: USH: B:
4-82
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 4.56
Internal operation and terminals of the YWX111-11/-21
Fig. 4.57
Component side of the PCB in the YWX111-11/-21, (derived from HESG 437 807)
4-83
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.8. 4.2.8.1.
Application of the under reactance protection function Introduction
The under reactance protection function can be used for a number of purposes. It is normally used, however, to detect out-of-step conditions for load angles 90. It is similarly applicable to monitoring a maximum load angle, e.g. = 70.
4.2.8.2. Out-of-step conditions
The stability limit of a turbo-alternator with or without step-up transformer is illustrated at the upper left in Fig. 4.58 as a function of the impedance measured at the generator terminals and at the upper right as a power diagram. The operation of the protection is set to the circle (lower left of Fig. 4.58) to avoid tripping during a fault or power swings on the power system. The setting range permits the protection characteristic to be adjusted to the stability limit curve (see upper left of Fig. 4.58), which is applicable whether the generator is connected to a step-up transformer or directly to a busbar.
4.2.8.3. Monitoring a given load angle
The setting range also facilitates monitoring a given load angle, e.g. < 90, for:

alarm purposes when a certain maximum load angle is reached fulfilling special requirements, e.g. to take account of the influence of differing values of Xd and Xq at the stability limit salient pole machines
A load angle of < 90 represents an offset circle in the impedance plane (see left of Fig. 4.59). The centre of the circle lies on a straight line, which is displaced from the R axis by the angle . The circle is the locus of the operating points with the load angle . The corresponding characteristic in the power diagram is a straight line with a slope of . The value of the load angle is set by means of the phase-angle compensation setting, which must be increased by the amount (90 ). For = 70, the reference voltage R-S and the R phase current, the following phase-angle compensation must be set: 30 + (90 70) = 50 The reactance XA is set either to the synchronous reactance Xd or a value, which takes account of differing values of Xd and Xq. The following general statement applies:
XA =
X sin
4-84
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
XB = 0 in Fig. 4.59. XB can also be positive or negative and represented in an impedance plane by circles, which do not pass through the origin. In a power diagram, these circles correspond to circles to the left and right of the straight lines through points C', A' and E'. Point A is common to all circles with the same load angle and the same XA setting (see Fig. 4.58).
Instable ZN XT 0 B SN Stable
Xd Instable Stable Instable A ~ Xd ~ XT
X'd ~ Xd
SN
Fig. 4.58
Stability limit of a generator/transformer set and the characteristic of the 'Minreactance' protection function
4-85
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 4.59
Locus of the load angle < 90
4-86
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 4.60
Operating characteristic for different settings of 'XB-Setting' and a load angle < 90
4-87
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.9.
Stator ground fault protection for generators in parallel
This is a discriminative ground fault scheme for generators with ungrounded star-points. It covers 80 % of the winding and operates on the basis of a directional zero-sequence component in the various generator feeders. Since the capacitive component of a ground fault current does not usually provide a sufficiently reliable criterion for determining the feeder concerned, the ground fault current is artificially increased by adding a real power component. The latter is generated either by three single-phase VTs or a three-phase VT Whichever is the case, the secondaries are connected as a broken delta and a resistor (Re) is switched briefly into the delta after a ground fault has been detected. The combined VT and grounding transformer are connected to the continuously energized busbars. The number of generator feeders can vary. The protection scheme comprises two parts: The first part is a non-discriminative ground fault detector on each busbar comprising a: grounding transformer Ferro resonance damping resistor Rp switched grounding resistor Re zero-sequence voltage detector for switching in the resistor contactor interposing VT
The second part comprises the power function and either a corebalance or three bushing CTs to measure the zero-sequence current and discriminatively locate the ground fault after the real power component has been added.
4.2.9.1. Principle of operation
Initially a ground fault is detected non-discriminately due to the occurrence of a neutral voltage measured by a sensitively set voltage function. The grounding resistor Re is switched in circuit after a short delay (t1 = 0.1 s) to prevent operation during power system transients. Only then is the ground fault current large enough to enable the power functions on the generators to decide whether the ground fault is on their generator feeder or not. The delay for the power function is set to isolate the fault after 0.5 s. The grounding resistor Re is connected for 1.9 s. The resistor Re is switched out of circuit again after a delay of 2 s initiated by the voltage function. Two timers ensure correct operation of the scheme: T1 prevents operation during transients, t1 = 0.1 s T2 prevents 'pumping' when the grounding resistor Re is switched in and out of circuit, t2 = 1 s
4-88
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The protection operates with a maximum real power component in the ground fault current of 1220 A for a ground fault at the generator terminals. The neutral voltage is then a maximum. The ground fault current is proportional to the neutral voltage and is a maximum for a ground fault at the generator terminals and a minimum for a ground fault at the star-point. An offset of the of the neutral of the three phase voltages is caused: a) in normal operation by: asymmetries of the phase-to-ground the presence of a third harmonic component b) under abnormal operating conditions by switching transients internal and external ground faults To avoid any risk of mal-operation, the setting of the ground fault detector must be higher than any voltage offset, which can occur during normal operation. Under abnormal conditions, the voltage offset can be increased by the ferro resonance of the capacitance with the inductance of the VTs. The danger of mal-operation of the ground fault detector due to switching operations is minimized or even eliminated altogether by adding the resistor Rp and also a delay. The effectiveness of this measure depends on how low the resistor Rp can be. A low resistor, however, increases the current, the power of the resistor and the load on the VTs or grounding transformer.
4.2.9.2. Busbar ground faults
Should no ground fault be located on one of the generator feeders, it has to be on the busbars or possibly an outgoing feeder. In such a case, the voltage function operates and the alarm 'Busbar ground fault' is generated after the set delay of 2 s.
4.2.9.3. Ground fault protection during start-up
The power function can only detect a ground fault on the generator feeder when the circuit-breaker is closed. For the time that the circuitbreaker is open, ground fault protection is afforded by a sensitive voltage function which trips the excitation switch in the event of a stator ground fault after a delay of 0.5 s. This ground fault protection scheme is blocked once the circuit-breaker closes.
4-89
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.9.4.
Grounding transformer
The following arrangements can be used to increase the ground fault current: 3 single-phase VTs with a maximum rating of 80 kVA for 10 s. This arrangement can be used at 6.66 A up to a rated generator voltage of 12 kV, at 5 A up to 16 kV and at 4 A up to 20 kV. 3 single-phase dry VTs can conduct 6.66 A at voltages higher than 12 kV.
Apart from a higher overload rating, a 3 single-phase grounding transformer also has the advantage of a negligible voltage drop.
Example for generators with a rated voltage of 10.5 kV and a ground fault current of 20 A (6.66 A per phase):
Voltage transformers U1N [V]
10500 3
Short-time sec. rating U2N [V] 167 S [kVA] 70 [A] 10 s 240
4.2.9.5.
Ferro resonance damping resistor Rp
For a ground fault in the busbar zone, the ground fault detector issues an alarm without interrupting operation. The resistor Rp must therefore be rated for continuous operation. It generally has a rating of 1 or 2 A, which is permissible for most VTs, but has only a limited damping capacity. The output power of the VT in the example varies at a continuous current of 2 A between 577 and 831 VA. When the main priority is to prevent mal-operation, the resistor Rp is chosen according to the maximum continuous rating of the VTs, which is usually in the range of 5 to 10 % of the permissible 10 s current. Where the VTs are also used for metering, it should be noted that the voltage and phase errors increase at the maximum continuous current.
4-90
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.9.6.
Grounding resistor Re
The grounding resistor must be rated for 10 s. A voltage drop of 20 % is allowed if a VT is used as grounding transformer. For a ground fault current of 20 A and a rated voltage of UN = 10.5 kV, the recommended value of the resistor is:
UN [V] 10.500 Ubroken [V] 500 [] 250 Rp [A] 2 Re VT 1.7 I2 [A] 10 s 240
4.2.9.7.
Contactor
The contactor switches both ends of the grounding resistor Re.

4.2.9.8. Residual current CT
Alternative I: 1 core-balance CT 100/1 A, rated burden 2.5 . Alternative II: 3 bushing CTs, .../5 A - 33/1 A, rated burden 1.5 . The above burdens apply for CT leads of 2 100 m with a gauge of 4 mm2.
4.2.9.9. Required REG316*4 functions
The following REG316*4 functions are required for a discriminative ground fault scheme: 1 100 V voltage input 1 metering current input 1 to 4 tripping channels depending on the number of circuit-breaker tripping coils and whether redundancy is required or not 1 'Ground fault' signaling channel 2 signaling inputs
The start-up scheme requires: 1 100 V voltage input 1 or 2 tripping channels for the de-excitation switch 1 'Start-up ground fault' signaling channel 1 'Generator CB closed' signaling input
4-91
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
4.2.9.10.
Protection sensitivity
For a ground fault at the generator terminals, a real power current of 20 A results in a voltage of approximately 80 V, respectively 100 V at the input of the REG316*4. The lower of the two voltages takes the voltage drops of three single-phase VTs into account. A current of 4 A and a voltage of 16 V are produced by a ground fault at 20 % of the winding from the start-point. The current at the input of the REG316*4 in the case of a core-balance CT with a ratio of 100/1 A is 0.04 A which corresponds to a power of 0.64 W at 16 V. This is detected by the power function with a setting of 0.5 % or 0.5 W at URN = 100 V and IRN = 1 A.
Fig. 4.61
Discriminative ground fault and start-up schemes for a generator feeder
4-92
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 4.62
Operation of the ground fault protection for a fault a) on the busbar b) on a feeder
4-93
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
1 3 U> 2 5
P> 4
U> 9
UR UTR USR U TR U UT US
HEST 965039 FL
U SR
Legend:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Generator star-point VT Start-up scheme VT 3 neutral CTs for the generator ground fault current Power relay for the generator ground fault protection Grounding transformer Grounding resistor Re Ferro resonance damping resistor Rp Interposing VT Voltage relay for the busbar ground fault protection
Fig. 4.63
Three-phase diagram and vector diagram of the protection
4-94
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.2.10.
100 % stator and rotor ground fault protection Stator ground fault protection
The ground fault protection of the entire stator winding comprises a 95 % scheme and a 100 % scheme (see Fig. 4.64). The zones of the two schemes overlap in the stator windings. Ground faults in the region of the generator terminals are detected primarily by the 95 % stator ground fault scheme. Ground faults near the star-point, on the other hand, can only be detected by the 100 % stator ground fault scheme. The functions required for the two schemes are

a 'Voltage' function for the 95 % stator ground fault protection the 'Stator-EFP' for the star-point zone protection
The 95 % scheme uses the generator voltage and detects a ground fault on the basis of the displacement of the star-point voltage it causes. The 100 % star-point scheme injects a voltage to permanently bias the star-point. The injection voltage has an impulse waveform with an amplitude of about 100 V and a frequency of 12.5 or 15 Hz. It is provided by an injection unit Type REX010 and an injection transformer unit REX011. The scheme measures the ground fault leakage resistance. The sensitivities of the two schemes can be set in the case of the

95 % scheme by the pick-up voltage (typically 5 V) 100 % star-point scheme by settings for the ground fault resistance (typically 5 k for alarm and 500 for tripping)
The zone of the 100 % scheme depends on the maximum zerosequence current at fundamental frequency flowing at the star-point. This occurs for a fault at the generator terminals. The low-frequency injection voltage is switched off when the zero-sequence current component at power system frequency exceeds 5 A. For a current of IE max = 20 A, the pick-up current of 5 A is reached for a ground fault at 25 % of the winding from the star-point. It is of advantage to limit the ground fault current to IE max 5 A so that the zone of the 100 % scheme extends over the whole stator winding.
4-95
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 4.64
100 % stator and rotor ground fault protection
4-96
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Rotor ground fault protection
The rotor ground fault protection injects a voltage with an amplitude of 50 V and a frequency of 12.5 or 15 Hz to permanently bias the potential of the rotor circuit in relation to ground. The scheme signals a ground fault when the leakage resistance of the rotor circuit falls below the value set on the protection. The injection voltage of 50 V is supplied by the same injection unit Type REX010 and injection transformer unit Type REX011 as are used for the stator ground fault scheme.
4-97
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 2004
5.
5.1. 5.2. 5.2.1. 5.2.2. 5.2.3. 5.2.4. 5.2.4.1. 5.2.4.2. 5.2.4.3. 5.3. 5.3.1. 5.3.2. 5.3.2.1. 5.3.2.2. 5.4. 5.4.1. 5.4.2. 5.4.2.1. 5.4.2.2. 5.4.2.3. 5.4.2.4. 5.4.2.5. 5.4.2.6. 5.4.3. 5.4.4. 5.4.5. 5.4.5.1. 5.4.5.2. 5.4.5.3. 5.4.5.4. 5.4.5.5. 5.4.5.6. 5.4.5.7. 5.4.6. 5.4.6.1. 5.4.6.2. 5.4.6.3. 5.4.6.4. 5.4.6.5. 5.4.6.6. 5.4.7. 5.4.7.1. 5.4.7.2.
OPERATION (CAP2/316)
Summary............................................................................................5-5 Installing and starting CAP2/316........................................................5-6 PC requirements ................................................................................5-6 Installing CAP2/316 ...........................................................................5-6 Starting the HMI .................................................................................5-9 Starting and stopping CAP2/316......................................................5-10 Operating modes of the configuration program CAP2/316 ..............5-10 Starting CAP2/316 ...........................................................................5-11 Stopping CAP2/316 .........................................................................5-12 Operation .........................................................................................5-13 General ............................................................................................5-13 Screen display .................................................................................5-14 The status display ............................................................................5-14 Main menu items and icons .............................................................5-15 Step-by-step configuration of a device.............................................5-18 Short introduction.............................................................................5-18 Relay configuration ..........................................................................5-18 Binary input card 316DB6x ..............................................................5-20 Double indication .............................................................................5-21 Signal outputs of the card 316DB6x ................................................5-23 Tripping relay outputs of the card 316DB6x.....................................5-24 Light emitting diodes (LED)..............................................................5-25 Analog Digital converter................................................................5-26 Station and bay name ......................................................................5-28 System I/O .......................................................................................5-28 Configuring binary outputs ...............................................................5-29 Signal LED .......................................................................................5-30 Signal relays ....................................................................................5-31 Event recording................................................................................5-32 Trip indication relays ........................................................................5-33 Signal to SCS (Substation Automation System) ..............................5-34 Signal to RBO (Remote input output system) ..................................5-35 Signal to ITL (Interlocking) ...............................................................5-36 Configuring binary inputs .................................................................5-37 TRUE / FALSE.................................................................................5-38 Inputs via optocoupler (binary inputs) ..............................................5-39 Output from a protection function.....................................................5-40 Inputs from SCS (Substation automation system) ...........................5-41 Inputs from RBI (Remote input output system)................................5-42 Inputs from ITL (Interlocking data) ...................................................5-43 Configuring protection functions ......................................................5-44 Protection functions in the library and active functions ....................5-44 Inserting a function...........................................................................5-45
5-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.7.3. 5.4.7.4. 5.4.7.5. 5.4.8. 5.4.8.1. 5.4.8.2. 5.4.9. 5.4.9.1. 5.4.9.2. 5.4.10. 5.4.10.1. 5.4.10.2. 5.5. 5.5.1. 5.5.1.1. 5.5.1.2. 5.5.1.3. 5.5.1.4. 5.5.2. 5.5.2.1. 5.5.2.2. 5.5.2.3. 5.5.2.4. 5.5.2.5. 5.5.2.6. 5.5.2.7. 5.5.3. 5.5.3.1. 5.5.3.2. 5.5.3.3. 5.5.3.4. 5.5.3.5. 5.5.3.6. 5.5.3.7. 5.5.4. 5.5.5. 5.6. 5.6.1. 5.6.2. 5.6.3. 5.6.4. 5.6.5. 5.6.6. 5.7. 5.7.1. 5.7.2. 5.7.3.
Deleting a function ...........................................................................5-45 Copying a function ...........................................................................5-46 Configuring a function ......................................................................5-47 Listing the settings ...........................................................................5-50 Displaying the parameters ...............................................................5-50 Displaying the reference value of analog and process measurements....................................................................5-51 Saving and loading the configuration from a file ..............................5-51 Saving the configuration to a file......................................................5-52 Loading a saved configuration from a file ........................................5-52 Down-/uploading a configuration from the device ............................5-52 Uploading a configuration from the device.......................................5-52 Downloading a configuration to the device ......................................5-54 Monitor menu ...................................................................................5-54 Event handling .................................................................................5-55 Displaying new events .....................................................................5-55 List of the events..............................................................................5-56 Clearing the event list ......................................................................5-57 Clearing latched outputs ..................................................................5-58 Processing of measurements ..........................................................5-58 Displaying A/D converter channels ..................................................5-59 Displaying the process measurement values ..................................5-59 Displaying binary inputs, signal outputs, trip relays and LEDs ........5-61 Displaying remote analog or binary in-/outputs................................5-61 Displaying ITL in-/outputs ................................................................5-62 Displaying SCS outputs ...................................................................5-63 Displaying FUPLA signals................................................................5-63 Test function ....................................................................................5-65 Activating the protection functions ...................................................5-66 Activating trip outputs, signal outputs and LED outputs...................5-67 Activating the RBO outputs (Remote Binary Outputs) .....................5-68 Activating the analog outputs (remote output) .................................5-69 Event handling, measurement and diagnostic information ..............5-69 Parameter set switching...................................................................5-69 Toggling binary outputs....................................................................5-70 Diagnostics ......................................................................................5-71 Disturbance recorder .......................................................................5-72 Configurating CAP2/316 ..................................................................5-73 Changing the language....................................................................5-73 Changing the password ...................................................................5-74 Automatic deletion of the event list after a download.......................5-74 Downloading device firmware ..........................................................5-74 EA63 firmware download .................................................................5-75 Configurating the communications port ...........................................5-75 Help menu........................................................................................5-76 User Manual.....................................................................................5-76 RIO580/ LON/ MVB/ IEC60870-5-103 User Manual........................5-76 About CAP2/316 ..............................................................................5-76
5-2
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.8. 5.8.1. 5.8.1.1. 5.8.1.2. 5.8.2. 5.8.2.1. 5.8.2.2. 5.9. 5.9.1. 5.9.2. 5.9.2.1. 5.9.2.2. 5.9.2.3. 5.10. 5.10.1. 5.10.2. 5.10.3. 5.10.3.1. 5.10.3.2. 5.10.3.3. 5.10.3.4. 5.10.3.5. 5.10.4. 5.10.4.1. 5.10.4.2. 5.10.4.3. 5.10.4.4. 5.10.4.5. 5.10.4.6. 5.10.4.7. 5.10.5. 5.10.5.1. 5.10.5.2. 5.10.5.3. 5.10.5.4. 5.10.6. 5.10.7. 5.10.8. 5.10.8.1. 5.10.8.1.1. 5.10.8.1.2. 5.10.8.1.3. 5.10.8.2. 5.10.8.3. 5.10.8.4. 5.10.8.5. 5.10.8.5.1. 5.10.8.5.2. 5.10.8.5.3.
Import / Export of data .....................................................................5-77 Importing files...................................................................................5-77 Loading MBA parameters (mbaXX.par)...........................................5-77 Loading RIO parameters (*.rio)........................................................5-77 Exporting files ..................................................................................5-78 SigTOOL (*.sig)................................................................................5-78 Saving RIO parameters (*.rio)..........................................................5-78 Operation with several sets of parameters ......................................5-79 Switching over a parameter set .......................................................5-79 Creating parameter sets ..................................................................5-80 Assigning a protection function to a parameter set..........................5-80 Copying a configured protection function.........................................5-81 Logic interconnection .......................................................................5-81 Local operation ................................................................................5-82 Summary..........................................................................................5-82 Limitations........................................................................................5-82 General description..........................................................................5-82 Mechanical assembly and front view ...............................................5-82 Electrical connection ........................................................................5-83 Password .........................................................................................5-83 Passive operation ............................................................................5-83 LDU keypad .....................................................................................5-84 The three status LEDs .....................................................................5-85 General ............................................................................................5-85 Starting the device ...........................................................................5-85 Protection functions inactive ............................................................5-85 Normal device operation ..................................................................5-86 Pick-up of a protection function (General start) ...............................5-86 Protection trip (General Trip) ...........................................................5-86 Fatal device error .............................................................................5-87 Text display (LCD) ...........................................................................5-87 General ............................................................................................5-87 Language .........................................................................................5-87 Interdependence ..............................................................................5-87 Configurability ..................................................................................5-87 Menu structure .................................................................................5-88 Entry menu.......................................................................................5-90 Main menu .......................................................................................5-90 Measurands .....................................................................................5-91 A/D Channels...................................................................................5-91 Function measurands ......................................................................5-92 Binary signals...................................................................................5-93 Event list ..........................................................................................5-96 Users guide .....................................................................................5-96 Disturbance recorder .......................................................................5-96 Diagnosis menu ...............................................................................5-97 Diagnosis Info ..................................................................................5-97 IBB-Status-Info.................................................................................5-98 Process bus info ..............................................................................5-98
5-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.10.8.5.4. 5.10.8.6. 5.10.9. 5.10.9.1. 5.10.9.2. 5.10.9.3. 5.10.9.4.
LED Description ...............................................................................5-98 Reset-Menu .....................................................................................5-99 Automatic display...........................................................................5-100 General description........................................................................5-100 Starting the automatic display........................................................5-100 Stopping the automatic display ......................................................5-100 Automatic display cycle..................................................................5-100
5-4
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.
5.1.
OPERATION (CAP2/316)
Summary The HMI program CAP2/316 has been designed to be largely selfsufficient and requires a minimum of reference to the manual. This approach achieves a number of advantages: The same program can be utilized for both the RE.216 and the RE.316*4 devices. Functions can be selected from extremely user-friendly menus with full screen displays and windows. 'Pop-up' prompts wherever practical to guide the user and avoid errors, see Section 6.11. Provision for creating, editing and checking parameter sets off-line, i.e. without being connected to the protection device. Provision for reading or writing parameter sets from and to files. Self-explanatory texts using a minimum of mnemonic codes. Provision for the user to enter customized descriptions for functions, inputs and outputs. The possibility to view and analyse event lists offline or online. Copy Paste Windows functionality for configuration of comments. Call up of HELP with the 'F1' key, for clarifications or aid to problems - from help files stored in PDF format.
5-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.2. 5.2.1.
Installing and starting CAP2/316 PC requirements Processor Operating system i486 / 50 MHz or higher Windows XP / Windows 2000/ Windows NT 4.0 Hardware memory Free disk space Interfaces 128 MB 50 .. 500 MB 1 serial interface USB with USB serial connector PC Card with serial I/O converter
5.2.2.
Installing CAP2/316 Start menu Install the complete software packet on one disk. Stop all other application programs and insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The following start-up menu will pop up.
Fig. 5.1
Start menu of the installation CD
NOTICE: Ensure that the latest installation instructions are available. You are recommended to go through the Readme.txt, which is stored in the installation CD.
5-6
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Installation of the CAP2/316 1. Stop all user programs, and insert the installation CD into the CDROM drive 2. The start menu will pop-up automatically. In case this does not happen select 'Start' and 'Execute' buttons. In the 'Open' menu and with the 'Search' button, change the drive to the CD-ROM and executeCD-Start.exe 3. When the next window pops-up execute 'Start Install' 4. Follow the installation instructions as displayed on the screen regarding Language, License contract, Registration and the destination directory. 5. Select the installation sequence:
Fig. 5.2
Selection menu for start of the installation
5-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
6. When 'Customize' is selected the possibilities shown in the figure below are available:
Fig. 5.3
Installation components
It is important, that the selected option boxes are checked. The description on the right side displays the required amount of storage space. 7. Select 'Next' and follow the instructions. 8. Once all inputs are completed the installation will begin automatically.
NOTICE: All available options are displayed. This includes existing installed CAP2/316 versions. If the box corresponding to the installed versions were inadvertently crossed, this would lead to the deinstallation of that version.
5-8
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.2.3.
Starting the HMI To start the HMI, click on the 'Start' icon at the bottom left hand corner of your PC display, and select 'Program Files', 'ABB Industrial IT', 'Protect IT', 'RE..16', 'RE..16 Selector'.
Fig. 5.4
Window displayed on selection of RE..16 Selector
The selector searches all COM interfaces for a connected relay. If a connected relay is found, then the corresponding CAP2/316 will be started on-line, else the user can start one of the installed CAP2/316 off-line.
Fig. 5.5
CAP2/316 off-line
5-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.2.4.
Starting and stopping CAP2/316 On clicking on the 'Continue' button the HMI is started with the selected parameters.
Fig. 5.6
Window on start of the CAP2/316
5.2.4.1.
Operating modes of the configuration program CAP2/316 The configuration program can be started in three modes. off-line: If no device is connected at the start of the CAP2/316, it starts off-line. Even if a device is connected, the user can choose to start in off-line mode. In this case the device type has to be selected in the box 'General Device'. Normally the RE.216 is pre-selected, however, the RE.316 can be selected for configuring such a device. See Section 5.2.4.2. on-line If a device is connected then the CAP2/316 starts in the online mode. One can switch from off-line to on-line mode (with a connected device) by selecting 'Connect' from the 'Communication' menu. See Section 5.4.10.1. If the program is started with a connected device, then the software automatically selects the correct device type.
5-10
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Demo
If at startup 'Demo' is selected in the 'Communication' field, then a virtual device with predefined configuration is simulated. This mode permits configuration changes, however this does not have any effect on the event list and the measurand values. The demo mode enables familiarisation with the CAP2/316 without requiring a connected device. For example, it is possible to display the event list and measurand values of a predefined device.
Fig. 5.7 5.2.4.2.
Selection of the device type
Starting CAP2/316 As soon as the program starts select the mode of operation and the device type, and click on the box 'Continue'.
Change from off-line to Demo, or if a device is connected , then from on-line to off-line. Select the device type
'Continue' starts the configuration program
Fig. 5.8
Start the CAP2/316
The main program starts with the selected parameters, when 'Continue' is selected. If a device is connected, then at first all settings are loaded into the main memory of the PC. This procedure lasts a while. See Section 5.4.10. The communication port number (1..4) and communication speed (9600, 19200) can be selected by clicking on the button 'Setting'. If accidentally the CAP2/316 is started without a connected device, and then retroactively an appropriate device is connected, one can execute 'Check on-line'. Thereby one has the possibility to switch to
5-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
the online mode without having to start the program once again. The device type is selected automatically.
NOTICE: If the configuration program has to operate in the 'online' mode with data exchange between the PC-HMI and the unit, ensure that the serial data cable is connected. The connection is established between the configured serial port of the PC-HMI and the fiber optical connector on the device front. The device must be in operational mode i.e. the green LED in on state or blinks. If changing over the cable from one device to another, stop and restart the CAP2/316 program, after the cable is re-connected. If the device is not time synchronized via the IBB, and if the device is so parameterized, then the CAP2/316 acquires the PC clock time.
5.2.4.3.
Stopping CAP2/316 Similar to other Windows programs, stop the CAP2/316 from the pulldown main menu 'File' 'Exit' or ALT-F4.
5-12
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.3. 5.3.1.
Operation General The HMI can be in one of four modes: Menu: Operation: Output: Wait: User can select a sub-menu item. User can enter data, e.g. parameter settings, confirmation of prompts, password etc. Display of measured variables, event lists etc. This can occur in any one of the above states, while a function is being executed (menu is blocked, other programs can still execute, Multitasking feature of Windows).
If a selection is made in the main menu or in the icon bar, a new Window is opened. In this Window it is possble to select further submenus. In order that a modification becomes effective, click on the 'OK' or 'Save to file' button. To discard changes click on the 'Cancel' button.
NOTICE: If off-line changes are made and it is intended to load these into the device, then these changes should be saved onto the disk, before the connection to the device is established. As soon as the device is connected the configuration in the device is uploaded into the HMI (working memory). The configuration or modifications made before are thereby overwritten. If the previously made modifications are to be saved to the device, these must be read in into the HMI after establishing connection to the device, and then downloaded from the HMI to the device. See Section 5.4.10.1. If from sub-menus further sub-menus are opened, then the changes will become active and taken over as the actual configuration if it is confirmed with 'OK' in the topmost sub-menu.
5-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.3.2. 5.3.2.1.
Screen display The status display The following information is displayed in the lowermost frame of the CAP2/316:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Fig. 5.9
Status Display
1) Help: Information regarding the active menu item. 2) Software version of the CAP2/316 It is mandatory that this value corresponds to the version number (x) in front of the dot and with the sub-version number (y) after the dot. See item 3. below in the status line. (Example: x.yz; the revision index is represented as a character (z)). 3) Software version of the device (CPU Firmware): Provides information of the firmware-version of the device. To guarantee an accurate communication between the device and the PC, the firmware number of the device must correspond to the SW version number of the CAP2/316 as described under point 2). 4) Provides information of the utilized communication protocol to the substation automation system (SCS) resp. which type of firmware is stored in the device: 'SPA', 'IEC103', 'LON' or 'MVB'. 5) Displays whether the configuration program is in the: 'on-line', 'off-line' or 'Demo' mode of operation. 6) Displays the active parameter set: 'Parset (14) '. 7) Displays the configured communication port 'COM (14) '. 8) Displays the active interface to the device: The data displays which port is connected to the PC: 'TC57' = Communication is via the Frontend 'SPA' = Communication is via the interface at the rear. 9) Displays the relay type: 'REC316*4', 'REG316*4', 'REL316*4', or 'RET316*4'.
5-14
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.3.2.2.
Main menu items and icons From the main menu list or the icons bar the user can activate the following
Main menu Icon header
Fig. 5.10
Main menu items and icons
Main menu:
File: Open and save the settings, open the event list Import MBA and RIO parameters, Export from SIGTool and RIO parameters Printer configuration End the configuration (HMI) program View: Activate the toolbar or status bar View Edit parameters View the Reference values Configuration: Create the relay configuration, the protection functions and the station and bay name The configuration menus can also be activated from the icon bar. Monitor: Event list: Display, or, print all the events in the device event list memory, or, clear the memory. Clear latched outputs. Measurements: Display the variables of the protection system and the process input values of the A/D converter. Test-Functions: Test the protection function of the parameter sets Checking of the LEDs, tripping and signalling relays. Diagnostics All relevant information to analyse a fault. Disturbance recorder: Upload the DR file, if configured.
5-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Communication:
Connect or disconnect communication to the device. Upload / download set files from / to the device. The set files can also be cleared from the device. Configuration of the communication only possible in offline mode.
Options:
Set the language or change the password. Clear the event list after download of the set file. Download 'Firmware' to the processor or the line differential protection card 316EA63.
Help:
Select the operation manual or other HW / SW specific manuals. Information about the license and SW version.
The above is valid for the 'on-line' mode. In the 'off-line' mode it is possible to use the following menu items i.e. 'File', 'View', 'Configuration', 'Help' and some of the sub-menus in 'Options' and 'Monitor'.
NOTICE: The above mentioned menus, with the exception of 'Configuration', 'Options', 'Help', is meaningful only when the system is in 'on-line' mode with active communication to the device. All displays are an exact replica of the data in the device.
Icon list The icon bar is activated in the 'View' menu by selection 'Toolbar'. This facilitates a fast selection of the configuration menus. Create a new set file. If the currently open set file is not saved, it will be lost!. Save the current set file. If the set file in the PC memory has to be saved under a different file name, use the 'Save as' sub-menu in the menu 'File'. Create the device configuration. The hardware related device configuration such as AD Converter, Binary channels, Tripping channels, Signalling channels and the Software key.
5-16
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Configuration of the system (In- /Output) parameters: The system parameters concern those that are independent of the functions. The significance of the parameters is explained in Section 5.4.4 and Section 3.4.5. Configuration of the parameter for the InterBayBus: This is required for connection to the control system e.g. LON, SPA, MVB. The description of the parameterisation is explained in the respective documentation of the bus. Monitoring of the IBB is possible in the pull down menu 'Monitor' 'Diagnostics' 'IBB Information' (see 'Help'). Configuration of the potection functions and selecting all possible functions from the functions library. Configuration of the PC COM interface Communications port (COM 1...4) as well as the baud rate (9600, 19200 baud). ABB recommends use of 9600 baud. Call up the CAP2/316 short description. When 'Help' is called up in the main menu, in addition to the operating instructions, the complete description of the IBB is available.
5-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.
Step-by-step configuration of a device This section guides you step-by-step the items to be configured so that the configuration can be successfully downloaded into the device. Start the CAP2/316 (see Section 5.2.4.2.).
5.4.1.
Short introduction It is mandatory that the following sequence is followed for the configuration of the device:
Section(s)
1) Configure the relay 2) Configure the binary inputs / outputs (comments and latching) 3) Configure the AD converter (Sec. Nom value, Reference value, Prim/Sec.-ratio, Comments) 4) Configure the station- and bay name 5) Configure system in- /outputs 6) Configure the protection function 7) Save the complete device configuration 8) Download the configuration to the device
5.4.2. 5.4.2.1., 5.2.4.3., 5.4.2.4., 5.4.2.5. 5.4.2.6.
5.4.3. 5.4.4. 5.4.7. 5.4.9.1. 5.4.10.1.
5.4.2.
Relay configuration The relay identification code on the rear of the device is used for the relay configuration. Information regarding the relay type and the relay identification code are available in the Datasheet in Section 8. The configuration menu of the individual cards is opened by clicking on the 'Edit' button by the side of the definition of each of the cards (s. Fig. 5.11). A typical order code is shown below: A1,B0,C5,D0,U1,K63,H2,E1,I3,F1,J3,Q0,V0,R0,W0,Y2,N1,M1,SR200.
5-18
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The relay identification code is explained in detail in the data sheet. Use this table to help in the configuration shown below:
Fig. 5.11
'Relay Configuration RE.316*4' Determines the rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Defines the type of the A/D converter unit (316VC61 or 316EA62/ 316EA63 for longitudinal distance protection). Determines the type in- /output unit in Slots 1 ... 4. Determines the predefined variant of the converter unit. The first part (letter code) of the software key. Second part (number) of the software key.
Nominal Frequency: A/D Converter:
Slot Nr. 1 to Slot Nr. 4: A/D Config K: SW Vers SX: SW Vers S.XXX:
A major part of the configuration is achieved once the parameters defined above A/D Config K and SW Vers are configured. When the 'A/D Config K' parameter is configured, the predefined values as per the connection diagram in Chapter 12 are loaded. The converter 'Sec.nom.value' has to be configured in addition. This is explained in Section 5.4.2.6. With the SW Vers, licensed protection functions are available from the software library. The SW Vers (SW key) configured in the CAP2/316 must tally with the software key in the device. If this is not the case, then it will not be possible to download the configuration to the device. There are a few more parameters to be configured and comments to be defined for the In / Output cards as per the Sections 5.4.2.1. to 5.4.2.6.
5-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.2.1.
Binary input card 316DB6x The following window opens on clicking the 'Edit' button next to the 316DB6x (slot Nr. 14) card in the 'Relay Configuration' menu:
Binary inputs are not displayed in the event list
Channel number
Comments of binary inputs
Fig. 5.12
Configuration window for the binary input events
The comments for the binary inputs can be configured in this window, for display in the event list. A check in the box next to the comments supresses display in the event list.
5-20
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.2.2.
Double indication By clicking on the folder 'Double Indication' it is possible to define up to 30 double indications.
1st select double indication channel Run time supervision 2nd input is selected automatically
Fig. 5.13
Configuration of 'Double indication'
When a double signal is configured, then a change of state of one of two consecutive binary signals results in a display in the event list. On configuring the first binary input the second consecutive binary input is automatically configured as the second input of the double indication. The parameter 'Runtime supervision' enables or disables the runtime supervision for each double indication. What is the runtime supervision: Double signals are needed to unequivocally determine the status (position) of switchgears. For this purpose, the two signals detecting the end positions of the switch are connected to two consecutive inputs and form a 'double indication'. Double indications are presented in a somewhat different form in the event list. Instead of 'on' or 'off', the signals are listed as '0-0', '0-1', '1-0' or '1-1', whereby '0-1' means that the switch is closed and '1-0' that it is open. The switch is moving when the signals produce '0-0', while the combination '1-1' should not occur at all in normal operation.
5-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The event '0-0' only signifies a transitory status while the switch (CB or isolator) is actually moving. Providing everything is functioning normally this signal is less interesting and therefore can be suppressed. Should on the other hand, the switch stick in an intermediate position, this signal becomes very important. The runtime supervision enables these two conditions to be distinguished. It can be set independently for each double indication and is active for a setting other than zero. The event '0-0' is thus initially suppressed and remains so, as long as the switch reaches either its open or closed limit position before the end of the runtime supervision setting. This prevents the event list from becoming filled up with unnecessary data. The '0-0' event is subsequently displayed in the event list, should a switch not reach its end position within the specified time. The time stamp corresponds to the start of the switch movement. The status '1-1' is never suppressed even during the period of the runtime and appears in the event list immediately. This status indicates that the switch is 'Open' or 'Closed' simultaneously. This impossible situation is reported as a fault of the switch feedback. The configuration of the double indication for the remote in- /output system RIO580 is described in the respective documentation. Timer data: Min. setting: Max. setting: Increments: Default setting: 0.0 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s (i.e. runtime disabled)
5-22
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.2.3.
Signal outputs of the card 316DB6x Two outputs are available: Optical LED outputs on the frontend of the relay (see Section 5.10.8.5.4.) or signalling relay contacts.
Latched signal output Comment of the signal outputs
Fig. 5.14
Selection window for the 'Signal Outputs'
The comments of the signal outputs document and provide a better overview of the configuration of the device as supplemental information for the signal in the event list. Latched outputs can be reset when they are acknowledged with the binary input 'ExtReset', from the local interface (LDU), or from the CAP2/316 in the main menu 'Monitor' and sub-menus 'Event Handling' 'Clear latched outputs' (see Section 5.10.8.6.).
5-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.2.4.
Tripping relay outputs of the card 316DB6x A tripping output matrix can be created from the OUTPUT-command of the various protection functions or by the combination of output channels (see Section 5.4.7.5.):
Latched tripping output Comments of the trip latched output in the output-matrix
Fig. 5.15
Configuration window of the 'Trip Out Latched'
The in-/output cards 316DB61 and 316DB62 have two 'Trip Out Latched' intermediate relays. The 316DB63 output card does not have this functionality.
The comments of the 'Trip Out Latched' serve the purpose of documentation of this output. This is then displayed in the tripping matrix of the function. The 'Trip Out Latched' outputs can be reset when they are acknowledged with the binary input 'ExtReset', from the local interface (LDU), or from the CAP2/316 in the main menu 'Monitor' and submenus 'Event Handling' 'Clear latched outputs' (see Section 5.10.8.6.).
NOTICE: The 'OUTPUT' command of a function sets the 'General Trip' combination signal only if the tripping matrix is configured and the event recorder is parametrized. An exception is the distance function, for which the 'General Trip' combined OR signal is always set.
5-24
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.2.5.
Light emitting diodes (LED) A maximum of 2 8 'LEDs' can be parameterized. If only one slot of the 316DB6x is populated than only 8 LEDs can be used on the front end of the device (LED 1 ... 8). The LEDs channels 9 ... 16 can be utilized if the 2nd slot of the device is also populated. The slots 3 and 4 cannot control the LEDs.
Latching LED Comments of the LEDs
Fig. 5.16
Configuration window for the 'Signal LEDs'
NOTICE: The first channel (green LED 1) is reserved for the function READY display and therefore cannot be configured for other puposes. The second channel (red LED 2) is mainly utilized for displaying a TRIP activation. The remaining 3..16 channels are yellow LEDs. Latched LED outputs can be reset when they are acknowledged with the binary input 'ExtReset', from the local interface (LDU), or from the CAP2/316 in the main menu 'Monitor' and sub-menus 'Event Handling' 'Clear latched outputs' (see Section 5.10.8.6.). In contrast to the signalling and trip output relays, the LEDs are also latched when the power to the device is switched OFF and then ON.
5-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.2.6.
Analog Digital converter On clicking the 'Edit' button next to the 'A/D Config K' the following window is displayed (see Section 5.4.2.):
Fig. 5.17
Configuration of the A/D converter
In sub-menu 'Configuration Transformers RE.316' the following parameters can be configured which are described in detail in Section 3.4.2. Modify channel type: When in the relay configuration the Parameter 'A/D Config K' is set to K = 00 or K 80, then for each analog channel the converter type can be selected. Three phase converter can only be selected for channels 1...3, 4...6 or 7...9. Normally the relay is preconfigured with the 'A/D Config K' and therefore need not be reconfigured.
Fig. 5.18
Configuration channel type with K=00
Prim/Sec ratio: This value is required for the IEC60870-5-103-protocol, for the display of the measurand values in the sub-menu 'Monitor' of the 'Main menu', and for the signal display in the evaluation program 'E_Wineve'. For three phase A/D converters this value is valid for all three phases simultaneously.
5-26
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Sec.nom.val: Configure the nominal rated value of the current and voltage transformer. For three phase A/D converters this value is valid for all three phases simultaneously. Ref. value: With the reference value the relay nominal rated value can be adapted to the primary equipment nominal value. For three phase A / D converters this value is valid for all three phases simultaneously. Comments: Comments up to 25 characters can be configured for each channel.
5-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.3.
Station and bay name The station and bay name for a device can be configured. This is displayed on the topmost line of the CAP2/316 display, along with the file name. Up to 12 characters can be used for each name. This can be configured by selecting the menu 'Configuration', 'Station Name_Bay name'.
Fig. 5.19
Station and bay name configuration
The station- and bayname is also displayed on the local control unit (LDU) if one is utilized. 5.4.4. System I/O The most important parameters, which are utilized as an ABB standard, are presented here. For details regarding the system parameters see Section 3.4.5. To access the system parameters select 'Configuration' and then 'System Parameters'.
LED Sig Mode = ResetSigAll Relay Ready = depending on the application configure a signalling relay binary output. Per default the signalling relay Nr. 6 is configured, as this has a N/O, N/C contact. General Trip = LED 2 (red LED) Ext Reset = depending on the application connect to an external input, for resetting the latched outputs.
Fig. 5.20
System parameter
5-28
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.5.
Configuring binary outputs A binary output can be configured with 'Edit' in the 'System Parameters' menu or as an output of a protection function. Two physical output sinks can be configured per source (e.g. output of a function). The listing in the event recording, signal transmission to the substation automation system 'SCS', signal to a remote I/O 'Remote Binary Output' (RBO), as also the 'Interlocking Data' signal to ITL do not count as physical outputs. Therefore these can be used in addition to both physical sinks (see Section 5.4.5.3.). If an attempt is made to utilize more than two physical sinks, then further assignments are not possible. Typical sources are Outputs from system parameters such as 'Relay Ready', 'Modem Error' etc. Output from a protection function (e.g. 'Start Overcurrent')
Physical sinks are Signal LEDs Signal relays Trip relays
Other sinks are: Event recorder / event list Signal transmission to the SCS (Substation Automation System), RBO (Remote Binary Output), ITL (Interlocking data)
Source
Sink Nr. 1 physical Sinks Sink Nr. 2
Each 1x ER, SCS, RBO, ITL Fig. 5.21 Definition of the source binary outputs
NOTICE: Use the trip matrix if more than two sinks are required per source. Normally the trip matrix is utilized for trip signals. (see Section 5.4.7.5). The 'General Start' and 'General Trip' are available in duplicate.
5-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.5.1.
Signal LED On selecting the 'Edit' button next to a source card and the folder 'Signal LEDs' the following window is displayed:
Slot Channel number of the signal LED Allocation of the signal LED
Fig. 5.22
Signal LED
Comment text if defined for the inputs and outputs are displayed. A tick in the box enables the selection of the text. Select the second slot to configure the signal LEDs in this slot. If the allocation is made for an output and confirmed with 'OK', then in the box next to the 'Edit' button the following text will be displayed: Lx: L = LED on the front of the relay x = LED channel number 1 ... 16 Example: L02, (signal LED, channel 02)
NOTICE: The first channel (green LED 1) is reserved for the function READY display, and, hence cannot be used. If a channel is already utilized, it is displayed in grey, and cannot be selected The second channel (red LED 2) is mainly utilized for displaying a TRIP activation. (Parameterization of the 'General Trip' see Section 5.4.4.) The channels 8 to 16 on the relay front can only be configured if the second slot is populated. Slots 3 and 4 cannot control LEDs.
5-30
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.5.2.
Signal relays On selecting the 'Edit' button next to a source, and on selecting the folder 'Signal Relays' the following window is displayed:
Slot Channel number for the signalling relays Allocation of the signalling relays
Fig. 5.23
Signal relays
Comment text if defined for the inputs and outputs are displayed. A tick in the box enables the selection of the text. Select the second slot to configure the signal LEDs in this slot. An allocated channel is shown as a grey block, and cannot be reused. If the allocation is made for an output and confirmed with 'OK', then in the box next to the 'Edit' button the following text will be displayed: Sxyy: S = Signal relay x = Slot number (1 ... 4) yy = Channel number (1 ... 10)
Example: S106, (signal relay, channel 06)
5-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.5.3.
Event recording On selecting the 'Edit' button next to a source, and on selecting the folder 'Event Recording' the following window is displayed:
Event recording On / Off
Fig. 5.24
Event recording
If the event recording is activated with 'On' and 'OK', then an 'ER' is displayed in the field next to the 'Edit' button.
NOTICE: The 'Start' message of a function sets the 'General Start' message only if the 'Event Recording' is parameterized. The distance function is an exception whereby the start signal 'Start R+S+T' is always displayed as an event and results in the 'General Start' combined signal. In the case of the differential protection function, the 'Start' signal is displayed in the 'General start' when the 'Event Recording' is parameterized.
NOTICE: A 'Start' command from a function sets the 'General Start' message only if the trip matrix is configured and the 'Start' message is parameterized in the 'Event Recording'. The distance function is an exception whereby the 'General Start' signal is always configured.
5-32
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
NOTICE: A 'Start' measurement value from a function is displayed in the event recorder only when the 'Start' message is parameterized in the 'Event Recording'.
5.4.5.4.
Trip indication relays On selecting the 'Edit' button next to a source, and on selecting the folder 'Trip Relays' the following window is displayed:
Selection of slot Channel number for the trip relay Allocation of the trip relay
Fig. 5.25
'Trip Relay' indication
The allocation of a source of a trip relay is similar to that of the indication relay see Section 5.4.5.2. Once the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the field next to the 'Edit' button will have the following text: Cxyy: C = Trip relay x = Slot number (1 ... 4) yy = Channel number (01 ... 02) Example: C101, (trip relay Slot 1, Channel 01)
NOTICE: Trip Relays can also be utilized for Indication. In general the Trip Relay is used for the Trip Matrix to activate the protection function (see Fig. 5.40). It is possible to use an OR function for the trip and the trip relay indication. Thereby the trip relay can be activated by an indication output or from the tripping matrix.
5-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.5.5.
Signal to SCS (Substation Automation System) On selecting the 'Edit' button next to a source, and on selecting the folder 'Signal to SCS' the following window is displayed:
SCS group selection SCS data point Allocation of 'Signal to SCS'
Fig. 5.26
'Signal to SCS'
Select the group from which the signal is to sent to the SCS (Station Control System = Substation automation system). The SCS groups 1c 24c are used for transmitting short signals to the MVB interbaybus (signal capturing). If a channel is already selected then it is displayed in grey and cannot be allocated again. Once the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the field next to the 'Edit' button will have the following text: SCxxyy: SC = SCS signal xx = number of the SCS group (1 ... 24) yy = data point within a group (01 ... 32) (*) = (c) signal capturing, ( ) no signal capturing Example: SC503, (SCS group 5, data point 03)
5-34
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.5.6.
Signal to RBO (Remote input output system) On selecting the 'Edit' button next to a source, and on selecting the folder 'Signal to RBO' the following window is displayed:
RBO Group = module address Output relay within the module Allocation to 'Signal to RBO' Utilized output
Fig. 5.27
'Signal to RBO'
To allocate a signal to a RBO (Remote Binary Output) select the device (RBO-Grp xx). If the channel has already been allocated, then it cannot be selcted once again, the field is displayed in gray. Once the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the field next to the 'Edit' button will have the following text: RBOxxyy: RBO = RBO signal xx = module address (1 ... 80) yy = output relay within a module (01 ... 16) Example: RBO302, (output module with the address 3, output relay 02)
5-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.5.7.
Signal to ITL (Interlocking) On selecting the 'Edit' button next to a source, and on selecting the folder 'Signal to ITL' the following window is displayed:
ITL Group Signal number Allocation of the Signal to ITL Utilized Signal
Fig. 5.28
Signal to ITL
An interlocking telegram comprises 48 signals. These are grouped in the ITL-Grp 1 the signals 1 to 16, in the ITL-Grp 2 the signals 17 to 32 and in the ITL-Grp 3 the signals 33 to 48. Once the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the field next to the 'Edit' button will have the following text: ITLxx: ITL = ITL signal xx = signal number (1 ... 48). Example: ITL1, (ITL signal 1)
5-36
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.6.
Configuring binary inputs A binary input can be configured by selecting a pushbutton in the 'System Parameters' or in a protection function.
Click on the respective button
Fig. 5.29
Example: Configuration of a binary input
Each binary input can be allocated to many sinks. However one sink can have only one source. Typical sources are: Signal from SCS (Substation Automation System), RBI (Remote Binary Input), ITL (Interlocking data) Output from a system parameter e.g. 'Relay Ready', 'Modem Error' etc. (similar to a protection function) Output of a protection function (e.g. 'Start Overcurrent') Predefined values (Always ON, Always OFF) Binary inputs acquired via Opto-coupler inputs
Typical sinks are: Input from a function (e.g. Blocking 'Under frequency' with 'Breaker Open') Inputs from system parameters e.g. 'Ext Reset' Source Sink Nr. 1 Sink Nr. 2
Sink Nr. xx Fig. 5.30 Definition of source sink binary inputs
5-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.6.1.
TRUE / FALSE By clicking on the selector button next to a source, and then selecting the folder 'TRUE/FALSE' the following window is displayed:
Binary input 'Always FALSE'
Fig. 5.31
TRUE / FALSE
The binary input of a function can be set to ON (logical 1) or OFF (logical 0). This allocation can be performed by clicking on the 'Edit' button next to the binary input and selecting the 'TRUE/FALSE' folder. Once the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the field next to the 'Edit' button will have the following text: Always ON ('1') Always OFF ('0') or
NOTICE: The default value for all inputs is 'Always OFF'. If a particular input is no longer used it should be set to 'Always OFF'.
5-38
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.6.2.
Inputs via optocoupler (binary inputs) By clicking on the selector button next to a source, and then selecting the folder 'Binary Inputs' the following window is displayed:
Selection of slot Input channelnumber Allocation of optocoupler channel Inversion input signal
Fig. 5.32
Binary input
Each input to a function can be allocated to a normal or inverted system binary input (optocoupler input). The allocation is done in the folder of the programable binary input of a function. The allocation is done by clicking on the button of the programable input of a function. In the menu 'Binary inputs' select the slot number and then the desired channel number. By clicking on the 'Inv.' box the input to the function will be inverted. Comments if configured for this input will be displayed. If the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the button next to the input will display the follwing text: (*) Slot x / y: (*) = (-) Inverted, ( ) normal input x = Card / slot number (1 ... 4) y = Optocoupler input channel number (1 ... 10) Cancel the channel selection by configuring the 'TRUE / FALSE' (see Section 5.4.6.1.).
5-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.6.3.
Output from a protection function By clicking on the selector button next to a source, and then selecting the folder 'Output from Function' the following window is displayed:
Select the function Allocation of the function output Inversion of the function output Signal name
Fig. 5.33
Output from a protection function
Each function input can be allocated as normal or inverted to an output of a protection function. The allocation is done in the folder of the programable binary input of a function. The allocation is done by clicking on the button of the programable input of a function. In the menu 'Binary inputs' select the folder 'Output from function' and the channel number. By clicking on the 'Inv.' box the input to the function will be inverted and sent to the output. Comments provides the association of the signal output to the function (e.g. Trip, Start of function etc.) If the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the button next to the input will display the follwing text: (*) f x y: (*) = (-) inverted, ( ) normal input x = function number (0 ... 48) or IBB y = signal name (Start, Trip ... )
Cancel the channel selection by configuring the 'TRUE / FALSE' (see Section 5.4.6.1.).
5-40
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.6.4.
Inputs from SCS (Substation automation system) By clicking on the selector button next to a source, and then selecting the folder 'Inputs from SCS' the following window is displayed:
SCS group selection Signal input channel number Allocation of the signal from SCS Inversion of input from function
Fig. 5.34
Input from SCS
Each function input can be allocated a normal or inverted input from the SCS. The allocation is done in the folder of the programmable binary input of a function. The allocation is done by clicking on the button of the programmable input of a function. In the 'Select Binary Input' window select the folder 'Input from SCS' select the 'SCS Grp Nr.' and the channel number within this group. By clicking on the 'Inv.' box the input will be inverted and transmitted to the input of the function. If the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the button next to the input will display the follwing text: (*) SCS xx / yy: (*) = (-) inverted, ( ) normal input xx = number of the SCS group (1 ... 24) yy = channel number within a SCS group (01 ... 32) Cancel the channel selection by configuring the 'TRUE / FALSE' (see Section 5.4.6.1.).
5-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.6.5.
Inputs from RBI (Remote input output system) By clicking on the selector button next to a source, and then selecting the folder 'Inputs from RBIs' (Remote Binary Input) the following window is displayed:
RBI Group = module address Signal input channel number Allocation of the input from the RBI Inversion of the input to the Function
Fig. 5.35
Input from RBI
Each function input can be allocated a normal or inverted input from the RBI. The allocation is in a manner similar to that for the SCS input (see Section 5.4.6.4.). If the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the button next to the input will display the follwing text:
(*) RBI xx / yy: (*) = (-) inverted, ( ) normal input xx = module address (1 ... 80) yy = input number of the device (01 ... 19) Cancel the channel selection by configuring the 'TRUE / FALSE' (see Section 5.4.6.1.).
NOTICE: The inputs 17, 18 and 19 deliver special information. Input 17: Input 18: Input 19: A value of 1 denotes that the device is transmitting and receiving data ('Device connected'). A value of 1 denotes Channel A of the device is defective ('Line A defect'). A value of 1 denotes Channel B of the device is defective ('Line B defect').
5-42
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.6.6.
Inputs from ITL (Interlocking data) By clicking on the selector button next to a source, and then selecting the folder 'Inputs from ITL' (Interlocking data) the following window is displayed:
ITL Group = Field device address Output channel Allocation to the input from ITL Inversion of the input
Fig. 5.36
Input from ITL data
Each function input can be allocated a normal or inverted input from the ITL data. The allocation in a manner similar to that for the SCS input (see Section 5.4.6.4.). If the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the button next to the input will display the follwing text: (*) ITL xx / yy: (*) = (-) inverted, ( ) normal input xx = address of the source signal from the field device (1 ... 64) yy = signal number (1 ... 49) Cancel the channel selection by configuring the 'TRUE / FALSE' (see Section 5.4.6.1.).
NOTICE: The Input Number 49 Signal, provides the information whether the device is active (Signal is 1) or not (Signal is 0).
5-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.7. 5.4.7.1.
Configuring protection functions Protection functions in the library and active functions Function library Function list in device
5)
4) 6) 7)
9)
2)
3)
1)
8)
Fig. 5.37
Function library and active functions
To open the 'Select Protection Function' sub-menu, select 'Configuration' in the main menu, and then 'Protection Functions' from the pull down menu. Function library As described in Section 5.4.2, as per the SW Vers Sx.xxx as well as the configured relay identification, the respective protection functions can be loaded into the device. These are displayed in the function library on the left hand side of the 'Select Protection Function' window. The scope of the functions in the function library is dependant on the Software key (SW Vers Sx.xxx). List of functions in the device On the right side of the 'Select Protection Function' window the functions which are stored in the device are displayed. Legend 1) Configured functions with the ANSI code and the corressponding symbol. 2) A green button next to the right of the ANSI code indicates that the minimal requirements of the function have been configured. If the
5-44
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
button is red, then the function is not correctly configured and therefore cannot be activated. 3) The number between the button and the function is the function number. This is utilized for the allocation of the output from the function (see Section 5.4.6.3.). 4) For each of the functions a short description of the function is provided. The ANSI code of the function is provided before the desription. The ANSI code represents the exact meaning and functionality of the protection function, and overrides the text description / clarification. 5) This provides an overview of the function configured for the various parameter sets, which can be defined by item 6) below. 6) A tick in the P1..4 box indicates if the function is configured for the respective parameter set (see Section 5.9.2.1.). 7) Displays from which function this particular function has been copied. The A/D converter, the trip signal card and the signal outputs cannot be changed (see Section 5.4.7.2.). 8) The bar display and the numeric value provide information of the capacity utilization of the CPU by the currently configured protection functions in the device. 9) The protection functions in the device can be further added from the function library with the 'drag and drop' method (see Section 5.4.7.2.). 5.4.7.2. Inserting a function In order to insert a new function from the function library into the device configuration, select the function with the left mouse button, and drag it across to the device configuration side with the button pressed, and then drop it by releasing the button. The function is added to the end of the list. In case the new function is to be placed in a empty place ('No Func'), drag the function to this placeholder and then drop it. In order to replace an existing function with a new function, the old function has to be first deleted which results in a 'No Func', if it is not the last function in the device. If a particular function placeholder has to be left free then insert a 'No Func' in this spot from the library. 5.4.7.3. Deleting a function An activated function can de deleted, by selecting this with the left mouse button. Then press the right mouse for the pop-up menu and select 'Delete'. Fig. 5.38 Deleting a function
5-45
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.7.4.
Copying a function If the configuration of a parametrized function has be reutilized to a large extent in a second parameter set, then this function can be copied. The new copied function inherits all the configuration of the original function. In the new copied function the following parameters cannot be changed: all analog inputs all signalling outputs all trip output channels
If these parameters are changed in the original function, then these are automatically changed in the copied function. The configuration of the binary input and the parameter 'ParSet1...4'' has to be configured once again in the copied function. The source of the binary inputs must be active in the same parameter set as that of the copied function. The copied function cannot be active in the same parameter set as the original function, and the parameter set of the copied must be greater than that of the original: P1 pO P4 and pO < pK P4
pO = parameter set number of the original function pK = parameter set number of the copied function If copies of a function exist, the original function cannot be deleted (see Section.5.9.2.2.).
5-46
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.7.5.
Configuring a function To configure a function double click with the left mouse button on the function or position the mouse pointer on the desired function, click the right mouse button and select 'Properties' from the pop-up menu (as described in Section 5.4.7.3). Example: Configuration of a current function.
7) 1) 2) 3)
4) 5) 6)
Fig. 5.39
Configuration of a function
The configuration and setting of the parameters are not explained here. This is explained in detail in Chapter 3. The configuration guidelines and a description of the function can be called up by pressing the 'F1' key. A prerequisite is that during the installation of the configuration program the complete operating instructions should also be installed (see Section 5.2.2.). 1) In the case of a RE.316*4 device the default value for 'Run On CPU' is CPU-1, as the device has only one CPU. 2) The trip channels can be configured by clicking on the button next to the trip. The trip channel matrix will be displayed, which are configured with a tick mark. When the mouse is moved near the selected trip matrix, as described in Section 5.4.2.4 below, the configured description of the trip channel is displayed. A grey background indicates that the trip channels are configured for another protection function. Click on the button 'OK' to activate the configuration. In the box next to the 'Trip' the text 'Select' will be displayed, to indicate that the trip channel has been configured. An empty text field i.e. '.......' indicates the trip channel is not configured.
5-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Function number
Function type
Configured trip channels
Comments for the trip channel
Trip channel matrix
Fig. 5.40
Trip signals as per the trip matrix
Notice : ABB recommends that the trip channels are configured via the trip channel matrix. This facilitates the simultaneous activation of the trip channel from different protection functions.
NOTICE: A 'Trip' command from a function activates the combined 'General trip' signal only if the trip matrix is configured and the 'Trip' signal is parametrized for the event logger (ER) display. An exception is the distance function, for which the 'General trip' combined signal is always set.
3) The function parameters are defined in detail in Chapter 3. 4) In the current channel (voltage channel) the A/D channels utilized by the function are configured. If the particular protection function is a three phase function, then only a three-phase input A/D channel can be configured. It is sufficient to configure only the first of the three consecutive phases with a tickmark. If a single phase function has to be configured then any one of the three phases can be configured. If the configuration is activated with 'OK' then a numerical value is displayed in the box next to the A/D converter channel. Otherwise '.......' is displayed indicating that the A/D converter is not yet configured.
5-48
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 5.41
A/D converter channels
5) The function can be blocked by an output from another function or by a binary input (see Section 5.4.6.). 6) If the function is triggered or started, the start or trip can be output as a binary output (see Section 5.4.5.). 7) The trip characteristic of the actual function is displayed.
5-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.8. 5.4.8.1.
Listing the settings Displaying the parameters All the settings of a specific group of settings can be displayed on the screen, printed or saved to a file. These possibilities are shown in the Fig. 5.42 below. The menu shown below can be called up from the main menu 'View' and 'View Edit Parameters'.
Selection of a group Display of the selected group Printing of the parameters Save as file
Fig. 5.42
Display of the parameters
The desired display of the parameter can be selected by the mouse, which is displayed on the screen. The selected view can be printed on the installed printer by clicking on the button 'Print'. If it is desired to import the parameters into a document editor, the data can be stored in *.rtf-Format (rich text file) file by clicking on 'Save to file'.
5-50
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.8.2.
Displaying the reference value of analog and process measurements In the top menu under the pulldown menu 'View' select 'View Reference values' to view all analog reference values and measurement values from the protection functions. The format of the measurand values are also displayed (Integer, Complex etc.) The nominal value can be used for the calculation of the conversion scale for the input values of the disturbance recorder. See Chapter 3, Configuration of the disturbance recorder function.
Analog channel Nominal value analog channel Reference value analog channel
Measurand
Legend format measurand
Meas nominal value
Format measurand
Description measurand
Fig. 5.43 5.4.9.
Reference value
Saving and loading the configuration from a file The saving and loading of a configuration is similar to other programs that run in a Windows environment. In order to save or open a file, a disk drive with directories has to selected or installed.
NOTICE: In general the modifications done to the configuration are in the working memory of the CAP2/316. Before downloading a configuration into the RE..16 device it is recommended to store the configuration onto a harddisk or diskette to prevent overwriting with subsequent changes, unless the CAP2/316 is connected to the device and is 'on-line' mode.
5-51
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.9.1.
Saving the configuration to a file The configuration can be saved from the main menu 'File' and from the pulldown menu 'Save'. If the file has to saved under a different name us 'Save As'. When the configuration is saved two files are created, which are in machine code and utilized by the configuration program. The files have the ending '.asc' and '.set'.
5.4.9.2.
Loading a saved configuration from a file If the configuration is to be downloaded into a device, in the main menu in the folder 'File' select 'Open' 'Set File' and select the set file. The configuration is in the main memory of the computer. To load it and to store into the device follow the instructions described in Section 5.4.10.1.
NOTICE: In the PC-HMI all configuration saved with the DOSVersion from V5.0 upwards, can be opened with the configuration program CAP2/316.
5.4.10.
Down-/uploading a configuration from the device To be able to communicate with the device ensure that the PC is connected to the device with the serial cable provided for this purpose. The connection from the PC is via a serial port (RS232) or an USB port, connecting to the optical connector on the front end of the device. The device must be operational i.e. the green LED should be ON indicating that a valid configuration is stored in the device, or blinking indicating that the device is not yet configured.
5.4.10.1.
Uploading a configuration from the device If the PC-HMI is connected to the device when starting the CAP2/316 the configuration in the device is automatically uploaded to the CAP2/316 (see Section 5.2.4.2). If the CAP2/316 has already been opened, it can be in one of two states described below (no communication is possible with the device in 'Demo' mode.): on-line In the on-line state of the CAP2/316 the configuration can be uploaded from the device into the working memory of the CAP2/316 by selecting 'Communication' and then the sub-menu 'Setfile Upload from RE..16'. off-line If the PC is connected to the device as described above and if the CAP2/316 is in the off-line mode, then establish communication with the device by selecting 'Communication' in the main menu and then the sub-menu 'Connect'. Now the active configuration in the device will be automatically uploaded to the CAP2/316.
5-52
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Display during the upload of the configuration If the configuration program was initially in the off-line state, this warning message is displayed before the configuration is uploaded from the device to the CAP2/316.
Fig. 5.44
Warning message before upload of the configuration
The time required for the upload of the configuration from the device is dependant on the baud rate.
Fig. 5.45
Display during upload of the device configuration
At the end of the upload the display to the left confirms that the upload from the device has been succesfully concluded. The window can be closed by clicking on the 'OK' button.
Fig. 5.46
Completion of the upload from the device
If the configuration has been downloaded from the same PC to the device, then the upload from the device is not executed (see Fig. 5.45) and the confirmation (see Fig. 5.46) displayed is 'Upload from relay finished'. In this case the configuration is taken from the '*.dat' file, as long as the device identification and the time stamp in the file is identical to that stored in the device.
If the configuration program was initially in the off- line state, then at the end of the upload, the window on the left side is displayed, which can be closed by clicking on the 'OK' button.
Fig. 5.47
Device connected
5-53
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.4.10.2.
Downloading a configuration to the device To download the configuration in the working memory of the CAP2/316 to the device, select 'Communication' in the main menu and then the sub-menu 'Setfile Download to RE..16'. The password dialog box will be displayed, see Section 5.6.2. Per default no password is set. Subsequently the configuration is downloaded to the device.
Display during download of the configuration The download time of the configuration to the device is dependant on the baud rate of the communication link.
Fig. 5.48
Display during download of the configuration
To be certain that the configuration is downloaded into the device the popwindow shown on the left is displayed, which is closed by clicking on the 'OK' button.
Fig. 5.49
End of the configuration download
5.5.
Monitor menu The monitor menu is meaningful only in the on-line mode. In the off-line mode the event list can be read from the saved binary file (*.ebn). If the event list is stored as an ASCII file (*.evt), it can be opened from the menu 'File' 'Open' 'Event ASCII-File'. Fig. 5.50 Display menu
5-54
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.5.1.
Event handling The events can be displayed in two different modes. The two sub-menus in the pull down menu of 'Monitor' 'Event Handling' are 'Display Current Events' and 'List Event List'. In addition the event list and latched outputs can be cleared. Fig. 5.51 Overview of the 'Event Handling' menu
5.5.1.1.
Displaying new events

Event number Date No time synch. Function description State of the signal
Exit
Time
Function number
Signal comment, I/O
Scrollbar
Fig. 5.52
Display a new event list
In this display mode the PC acquires the latest events from the device. All existent events are displayed with absolute time, and in sequence in which they are created. The events are displayed once, in short when the display is closed and reopened events from the previous display are not shown, only the latest created events are displayed.
5-55
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The events can be printed on the configured printer when the 'Print' button is actuated. The events can be stored as an ASCII file (*.evt), if the 'Save as ASCII' button is actuated. Detailed instructions are provided in Section 5.5.1.2.
5.5.1.2.
List of the events

Event nimber Date No time synch. Function description State of the signal
Exit
Time
Function number
Signal comment, I/O
Scrollbar
Fig. 5.53
Listing of the events in the device event list buffer
In this display mode the entire event storage buffer is displayed (255 events). If the signal 'General Start Signal' is received, then the subsequent events are diplayed with relative time to this signal, otherwise an absolute time is displayed. The display can be called up repeatedly, until it is deleted. With the keys '', '', 'PgUp', 'PgDn' and the 'Scrollbar' one can move one line up / down or a complete page. Hitting the 'Home' or 'End' key moves the cursor to the start or end of the event list. To display the relative time of events subsequent to a particular event, double click with the mouse on that particular event line. In both types of display an invalid time stamp is marked with a 'T' between the time stamp and the function number. An invalid time stamp occurs due to loss of the time synchronisation signal on the Inter Bay Bus. If a device is not connected to an IBB then on loss of upply power all events are marked as invalid, until the device is
5-56
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
connected to a PC running the CAP2/316. The device is then synchronized with the PC system time. The event list can be saved as files for further analysis in the off-line mode. The files can be saved in two formats: a) Save as ASCII file (.evt-file extension) If the events are saved as an ASCII file, it can be opened and edited with any word processor. It is also possible to open the file with the CAP2/316 in the off-line mode and if necessary printed. The *.evt file can be opened from the main menu 'File', 'Open', 'Event ASCII File'. b) Save as binary file (.ebn-file extension) If the event list is stored as a binary file *.ebn then it can only be opened in the off-line mode with the CAP2/316 program. To open the file, select in the main menu 'Monitor', 'Event Handling' and then 'List Event List'. It is possible to save the events in ASCII format to facilitate processing with a word processor program as described above.
5.5.1.3.
Clearing the event list
To delete the event list select 'Clear Event List'.
Subsequently confirm the clearing of the list.
Entering the password. Per default no password is set. For details of password input see Section 5.6.2. When the event list is cleared the following diplay is shown.
Fig. 5.54
Clearing the event list
5-57
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
When a new configuration is downloaded to the device the event list is automatically cleared. See Section 5.6.3. 5.5.1.4. Clearing latched outputs If latched outputs have to be reset, they can be cleared from the main menu under 'Monitor' and 'Event Handling', 'Clear latched outputs'. Fig. 5.55 Clearing the latched outputs
The exact process for the password is explained in detail in Section 5.5.1.3
5.5.2.
Processing of measurements The process values of the protection functions as well as the inputs / outputs of the device can be displayed with this menu item. The menu item 'Display FUPLA Signals' facilitates the control of the logic signals of the FUPLA blocks and can be used for test purposes. Fig. 5.56 Overview of the measurement display
5-58
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.5.2.1.
Displaying A/D converter channels 9 converter channel inputs are displayed together:
Reference channel
Measurement
value
Value at 100 %
Selection of display
Current date/ time
Phase angle
Selection of 1st channel
Selction of reference channel
Hold/activate the measurement display
Fig. 5.57
A/D converter channel display
The reference channel has to be assigned. The frequency is measured in the reference channel and serves as reference for the phase angle display. if the primary or secondary values are selected, in the display settings the process values of the individual converter channels are displayed. By clicking on the 'Stop' button the process values can be frozen or reactivated. 5.5.2.2. Displaying the process measurement values All protection functions with a measurement algorithm provide process measurement values. In the Monitor sub-menu 'Measurements', the desired protection function can be selected. The following functions do not provide any process measurands: Autoreclose Remote binary signals FUPLA IEC 60870-5-103 Flutter detector Logic Disturbance recorder LDU events Bounce supression
5-59
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
To view the process values, select in the 'Monitor' sub-menu 'Measurements' and 'Display Function Measurement' and select the protection function from the list.
Fig. 5.58
Select protection function
Function type
Setting value of the function
Trip characteristic
Process value
Fig. 5.59
Process measurement display
The display 'Process Measurement' displays the actual setting value on the left side. The trip values are partially dynamic. The actual measurement value of the protection function is displayed online.
5-60
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.5.2.3.
Displaying binary inputs, signal outputs, trip relays and LEDs
Binary inputs Fig. 5.60
Signal outputs
Trip relays
LEDs
Display of the in-/outputs of the device
The status display of the in-/outputs is possible with the above shown displays. The legend at the bottom of the display indicates the meaning of the color of the lamps for ON / OFF state. The slot number and the card number are displayed in the top respectively bottom lines. 5.5.2.4. Displaying remote analog or binary in-/outputs Display of the measurement Select module address
Fig. 5.61
Display of the AXM input
The desired remote analog inputs / outputs (AXM) or binary inputs (RBI) or binary ouputs (RBO) are displayed when the module address is selected in the right hand field.
5-61
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.5.2.5.
Displaying ITL in-/outputs It is possible to display the ITL data. In total there are 48 outputs (16 outputs organized in 3 groups) and 3072 inputs (48 inputs in 64 groups). Once the group is selected in the right hand side the requested data is displayed. The active signals are displayed in a different color than the inactive as per the legend shown in the lower left corner of the window. For the supervision of the data transmission a counter (heartbeat) is displayed. For outputs the counter of the local device is displayed, where as in the case of the inputs, the local as well as the remote counter is displayed.
The two counters display, whether the data is being updated. Selection of the field device address
Fig. 5.62
ITL data input display
Fig. 5.63
ITL data output display
5-62
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.5.2.6.
Displaying SCS outputs The SCS outputs are displayed in 3 groups each comprising 256 signals. The group can be selected with a mouse click in the lower left hand side of the display. The selected SCS group (01...03) is displayed in the lower left hand corner, as well the output signals 1256, 257512, upto 513768 in the other section of the display. Display of SCS output (1...256, 257...512 upto 513...768)
Selection of the SCS group (01...03) Fig. 5.64 SCS output display
Active outputs are displayed in a color corresponding to the legend at the bottom of the display.
5.5.2.7.
Displaying FUPLA signals FUPLA signals can also be displayed. The FUPLA file with the extension 'xx.BIN' must be available so that it can be opened by the CAP2/316 program. This means that the file must be in the directory specified in the configuration data. On selection of 'Display FUPLA Signals' a list of functions is displayed, similar to the process measurement values see Section 5.5.2.2. After the selection of the function the following window is displayed.
5-63
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
With a double click on the signal the 'Input List' resp. 'Output List' or 'Segment List' will display the respective signals in the display window. The 'Fupla Cycletime' displays the start, stop and the operating time of the FUPLA, which serves as supervision of whether the FUPLA is operating or not.
To check the status of the FUPLA signals select 'Display Signals'. The status of the signals will be displayed online. Fig. 5.65 Display of FUPLA in-/outputs, cycle time and signals
5-64
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.5.3.
Test function
Fig. 5.66
Menu selection of the test function
The test functions can only be opened with a password, because they can stop the normal operation of the device. The functionality is meant specifically for commissioning, and should be used only when the station is out of operation, or, in operation, if the trip and signalling relays are isolated. On closing the menu 'Test Functions' the device will be restarted with the last active parameter set. The operation of the test function is illustrated below.
5.5.3.1. 5.5.3.5. 5.5.3.2. 5.5.3.6.
5.5.3.3.
5.5.3.7.
5.5.3.4.
5.5.1.1.
Fig. 5.67
Sub-menus of the test function
5-65
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.5.3.1.
Activating the protection functions By clicking on 'Protection Functions' a list of the functions that can be tested are displayed. Out of this list the function that has to be activated can be selected. The following functions cannot be tested: Distance protection Counter Auto-reclosure Logic Pole slip Measurements Earth fault grounded Measurement module Remote binary Disturbance recorder FUPLA LDU-Events IEC60870-5-103 Bounce suppression Defluttering Breaker failure Time delay The simulated values can be entered in a display which is similar to the one used for the configuration of the protection function and the display of the process measurements. The functioning of the protection function, the trip and signalling relays can be checked with the simulated values. When the simulated value has been entered click on the 'Perform Test' button to start the test.
Configuration of the protection function Protection function characteristic
Simulated measurement value of the protection function
Perform the test
Fig. 5.68
5-66
Enter simulated value for testing
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.5.3.2.
Activating trip outputs, signal outputs and LED outputs Clicking on one of the pushbuttons 'Trip Outputs', 'Signal Outputs' or 'LED Outputs' - in the 'Test Functions' opens the respective window. The slots that have been configured are displayed. When the output is selected with a mouse click, then the color of the output is displayed in blue. When all the ouputs to be activated are selected, click on the 'Perform Test' button. The outputs will be activated and displayed in red color. If the outputs have to be reset click on the 'Reset Test' pushbutton. The output will be deactivated excepting if it is configured as a latched output. In the case of latched ouputs select the sub-menu 'Event Handling' in the window 'Test Functions' and select 'Clear latched outputs' to reset the latched outputs. When the 'Test Functions' window is closed, the device is restarted and the ouputs are automatically reset. Only the trip or signalling outputs can be activated at a time from an in-/output type. It is also not possible to set two different types of signals e.g. signalling outputs and LEDs.
Slot
Signal in Testmode
Start of the test
Reset test
Fig. 5.69
Activation of the trip relay, signalling relay or LEDs
5-67
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.5.3.3.
Activating the RBO outputs (Remote Binary Outputs) On entering the module address one or more output channels can be selected (with a mouse click as explained in Section 5.5.3.2). The outputs can be activated by clicking on the 'Perform Test' pushbutton whereby the selected channel will be activated. Only the relays from the respective module can be simulated. Besides, it is not possible to set two different types of signals e.g. signalling outputs in the RE.316*4 and one on a remote RIO device.
Relay output channel
Module address
Fig. 5.70
Activation of the RBO outputs
5-68
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.5.3.4.
Activating the analog outputs (remote output) After entering the module number select the output channel. The simulated value is output on activation of the test, i.e. on clicking 'Perform Test'. Only one module can be accessed at a time.
Scaling of the process value Module number
Channel selection
Test value input
Perform test
Fig. 5.71 5.5.3.5.
Activation of the analog output
Event handling, measurement and diagnostic information The sub-menus 'Event Handling', 'Measurement' and 'Diagnostics' permit the use of this functionality within the test mode. These provide the same functionality as described in the Sections 5.5.1, 5.5.2 and 5.5.4.
5.5.3.6.
Parameter set switching In order to test a protection function from another parameter set, the required parameter set has to be activated. This is achieved in the sub-menu 'Paraset Switch'.
Select the desired parameter set with the mouse. The active parameter set is displayed in gray. Active parameter set
Fig. 5.72
Parameter set switching
In the case of LON, communication is interrupted for 20 to 25 s.
5-69
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.5.3.7.
Toggling binary outputs To select the binary output double click on the function in the list and then choose the desired output. By clicking on the button 'Toggle to' 'On' or 'Off' the status of the binary output can be changed respectively toggle the status from ON to OFF and vice versa.
Selection of the function Selection of the function signal
Close the selection window
Pushbutton of the status
Signal
Signal status
Fig. 5.73
Toggle binary outputs
As long as the 'Toggle Binary Output' window is open, all remote I/Os are decoupled from the process signals. These are transmitted only when the test function menu is closed. See the following logic:
Process signal Selected window 'Toggle Binary Output' closed Simulated signal
& 1
Binary output
HEST 045 006 V
Fig. 5.74
Decoupling of the process during the toggling of the binary output
5-70
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.5.4.
Diagnostics
Fig. 5.75
Diagnostics menu
The diagnostic menu in 'Monitor' in the main menu provides the following possibilities:
'List Diagnostic Info' The result of the self-monitoring of the complete device, the main processor, the analog inputs card 316EA62 or 316EA63 (if present) and the analog input on the main processor board are displayed. It also comprises the time of the last changes in the configuration. Furthermore the name and status of the FUPLA-Logic loaded in the device are displayed.
'Get Hex Dump', 'Clear Hex Dump' This is vital help information for finding the cause of restarts. 'IBB-Information' Provides information on the status of the IBB connection. This is dependent on the type of the bus protocol (LON, IEC60870-5-103, SPA, or MVB). 'RBIO-Information' Displays information of the status of the process bus and the remote in-/output system. 'Reset SCS Input Data' On entering the respective password, the SCS input data stored in the device will be reset.
Further information is available in Chapter 6.
5-71
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.5.5.
Disturbance recorder
Fig. 5.76
Selection of the disturbance recorder menu
Two possibilities are available for the processing of the disturbance recorder. a) Display Disturbance Recorder Data Displays all the stored disturbance records. Display date and event time Close window Transfer the selected recording to a file Delete the first recording Fig. 5.77 Store to file: A recording can be saved to a file by first selecting the recording with the mouse and then clicking on the button 'Transfer to file'. After selection of the directory, the recording is stored to the file. It is important that the file name which contains the Station- (xxx) and recording (yyy) (RExxx.yyy) is not modified. These are created by the CAP2/316. Delete first recording: The oldest i.e. the first recording is deleted. This action cannot be undone! b) Reset Disturbance Recorder The disturbance recorder is reset. All recorded disturbances are deleted. This process cannot be reversed! The disturbance records are also deleted if the disturbance recorder configuration is modified. Display of the stored disturbance recordings.
5-72
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.6.
Configurating CAP2/316 In the main menu 'Options' the basic settings of the CAP2/316 can be done:
Fig. 5.78 5.6.1.
Sub-menu options
Changing the language The desired language can be selected through the displayed icons. The selection is done by clicking on the 'OK' button or double clicking on the desired language icon. After a short delay the language is switched over. Selection of the desired language.
Fig. 5.79
Switching the language
NOTICE: To change the language in the LDU on the device, it is neccessry to download the configuration to the device once again (see Section 5.4.10.2).
5-73
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.6.2.
Changing the password To change the password, first enter the old password, then the new password and verify (reconfirm) the new password. Only a maximum of 6 characters can be used. A lost password can only be modified in SYSMAN in the sub-menu 'Old Password'.
Fig. 5.80
Change the password
This 'Password' is requested if password protection is configured e.g. when modified configuration has to be downloaded to the device.
Fig. 5.81 5.6.3.
Enter password
Automatic deletion of the event list after a download When selected the event list is cleared automatically after a download to the device. Fig. 5.82 Clear event list after a download
A tick mark next to this sub-menu indicates that the functionallity is activated, whereby after every download to the device the event list is cleared. To activate the functionallity click with the left mouse button on this item. If already activated a second lick will deactivate this functionallity. 5.6.4. Downloading device firmware New or augmented functionallity can be implemented by updating the firmware as also by adding new hardware. With this menu the existing firmware in the device is deleted and replaced with the newly selected firmware. This activity has a duration of approx. 15 minutes. The exact process is described in Chapter 7, in updating of firmware.
5-74
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.6.5.
EA63 firmware download The firmware for the line differential protection card 316EA63 must be downloaded to the device before it is commissioned. The menu is active only if the 316EA63 is activated and the CAP2/316 is on-line (see Section 5.4.2. and Chapter 7).
NOTICE: After the command Firmware download the device must be started once again with a power off power on sequence.
NOTICE: After the command Clearset to clear the set file in the RE..16 the EA63 Firmware must be downloaded once again to the device.
5.6.6.
Configurating the communications port A further configuration is displayed in the menu 'Communication'.
Fig. 5.83
Communication port configuration
In the sub-menu 'Comm Settings' the communication port to be used on the PC and the baud rate (9600 oder 19200 baud) can be configured. The configuration is activated by clicking on 'OK'. This configuration can only be done in the off-line mode. In the on-line mode this sub-menu is displayed in grey and cannot be selected. The sub-menu item can also be selected from the icon list.
5-75
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.7.
Help menu
Fig. 5.84
Help main menu
The following menu items are meaningful only if the manuals have been installed along with the main operation program - the CAP2/316. Otherwise the manuals will not be displayed (see also Section 5.2.2.), instead an error message. 5.7.1. User Manual This menu item will call up the latest operating instructions of the device. The SPA commands and the respective SPA address list are clarified in Chapter 9 of the operating instructions. 5.7.2. RIO580/ LON/ MVB/ IEC60870-5-103 User Manual With this menu item all the operating instructions of the various communication protocols can be called up. 5.7.3. About CAP2/316 This sub-menu provides information about the actual software version and license information.
5-76
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.8.
Import / Export of data With the function 'Import'/'Export' different files can be created that help in the execution of the SCS engineering and in commissioning.
5.8.1.
Importing files
Fig. 5.85 5.8.1.1.
Import of files
Loading MBA parameters (mbaXX.par) The mbaXX.par file created for a different RE.216 or RE.316*4 which is connected to the same process bus can be downloaded to another device. The PB-device address should be substituted for the XX. Thereby the configuration of the bus adminstrator and the cycle times from the other device on the process bus can be reutilized.
5.8.1.2.
Loading RIO parameters (*.rio) The saved RIO parameters of another remote device which is connected to the same process bus can be download with the submenu item 'Load Rio pars'.
5-77
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.8.2.
Exporting files
Fig. 5.86 5.8.2.1.
Export of files
SigTOOL (*.sig) The sub-menu lists all the signals along with the different associated information (Name, Address, Event number, BWA-Index etc.). This can be used subsequently for loading the database of the substation control system.
5.8.2.2.
Saving RIO parameters (*.rio) The RIO parameters can be saved with this sub-menu item 'Save Riopars' for further use in other remote RIO devices, which are connected to the same process bus.
5-78
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.9.
Operation with several sets of parameters The protection and control devices permit up to four independent sets of relay settings respectively protection configurations to be defined. Only one of these parameter sets can be active when in operation. Provision is available for activating or deactivating individual parameter sets.
5.9.1.
Switching over a parameter set Each of the parameter sets can be switched over by a) a binary input signal (opto-coupler galvanically isolated) or b) a command from the station automation system (SCS). Configuration of the binary inputs A maximum of four binary inputs is used for switching the parameter sets. These are configured by clicking on the icon 'I/O' in the icon list, or selecting the sub-menu 'System Parameters' in the main menu item 'Configuration' (see Section 5.4.4.). In case the parameters 'ParSet 2 IN''ParSet 4 IN' have the default value 'Always FALSE' then, only the parameter set 1 can be activated.
'Remote Setting'
If this parameter is set to TRUE, the switching of the parameter sets can be activated from the substation control system (SCS), else the switching is controlled by the binary inputs 'ParSet 2 IN', 'ParSet 3 IN' and 'ParSet 4 IN'
'ParSet 2 IN', 'ParSet 3 IN', 'ParSet 4 IN':
The four parameter sets can be activated as per the table below
ParSet2 IN F T F T F T F T ParSet3 IN ParSet 4 IN F F T T F F T T F F F F T T T T active Parameterset 1 2 3 No switching 4 No switching No switching No switching
As is apparent from this table, simultaneous activation of more than one input will not switch over the active parameter set.
5-79
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Configurating signalling outputs The active parameter set can be indicated with one of four outputs ('ParSet 1 OUT' 'ParSet4 OUT '), via a signalling relay or a LED. The output can also be recorded in the event list. These outputs can be configured similar to other outputs.
5.9.2. 5.9.2.1.
Creating parameter sets Assigning a protection function to a parameter set All protection functions have parameters 'P1''P4'. The configuration of these parameters determines in which parameter set the function is active. 'P1''P4' corresponds to parameter set 14.
Overview of all functions Folder to view the active functions of the respective parameter set.
Selection in which parameter set the function should be active. Indicates from which parameter set the function has been copied.
Fig. 5.87
Assignment to the parameter sets
The assignment is done with a tick in the box 'P1''P4'. Select the folder 'ParSet1...4' for this purpose. Select the folder 'ParSet1...4' to view the active functions of a parameter set and the respective CPU usage. From which parameter set a protection function has been copied, is displayed in the column 'Copy of' (see Section. 5.9.2.2).
5-80
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.9.2.2.
Copying a configured protection function If the settings of a configured protection function are to be reutilized to a large extent in another parameter set, then the function can be copied to another parameter set. The procedure is described in Section 5.4.7.4 The copied function cannot be active in the same parameter set as the original function, and the parameter set of the copied must be greater than that of the original: P1 pO P4 and pO < pK P4
pO = parameter set number of the original function pK = parameter set number of the copied function If copies of a function exist, then the original function cannot be deleted
5.9.2.3.
Logic interconnection If the inputs and outputs of more than one function are linked together, then the functions must be active in the same parameter set.
NOTICE: The outputs from copied distance functions can be linked to inputs of other functions only if these functions appear after the distance function in the function list.
5-81
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.10. 5.10.1.
Local operation Summary The local mimic (LDU = Local Display Unit) of the RE.316*4 is a simpler alternative to the PC based HMI, the CAP2/316. It provides service personnel with facility for viewing status, events and measurements. The hierarchically structured menu provides limited access to the process and system data. The unit is operated with the aid of just a few pushbuttons. Three light-emitting diodes (LEDs) indicate the status of the system independently of the menu being displayed.
5.10.2.
Limitations The LDU is an integral part of an RE.316*4 device and provides a number of facilities for service personnel. Information about the process and the state of the device can be viewed on the LDU, but it is not possible to either change or copy device settings. The device can be restarted, however, by selecting a special menu.
5.10.3.
General description The LDU is primarily intended for service personnel so that they can obtain brief information on the status of the RE.316*4 device and the process. An overview is provided by the three LEDs, further details can be viewed with the various menus on the LCD. It is neither possible to configure the functions of the LEDs nor the menu structure. The texts of the different displays cannot be edited, since these conform to the text on the PC-HMI and correspond to the configuration of the device.
5.10.3.1.
Mechanical assembly and front view The LDU is fitted at the bottom right of the frontplate. The LEDs familiar from older units are at the top. The reset button is accessible through a small hole in the frontplate.
5-82
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3 1 Green LED 2 Yellow LED 3 Red LED 4 4 LCD 5 CLEAR PB 6 ENTER PB 7 Arrow keys 8 Optical Serial Interface
C E
5 6
Fig. 5.88 5.10.3.2.
Front view of the local display unit (LDU)
Electrical connection The PC-HMI is connected to the device via the optical interface on the LDU, which provides a galvanic isolation of the device. A special cable has to be used to connect the PC which converts electrical signals into optical signals and vice versa.
5.10.3.3.
Password A password is not required for the LDU.
5.10.3.4.
Passive operation The user communicates with the RE.316*4 via the LDU in a passive role, i.e. device and process data can be viewed, but none of the displayed data or parameters can be modified. Modifications can only be done with the PC-HMI. The only exception is the reset function which is available in a special menu.
5-83
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.10.3.5.
LDU keypad The LDU keypad comprises six pushbuttons. Only one key can be activated at a moment to excute an action. As long as one PB is pressed, pressing a second has no effect. There are two possibilities of navigating the menu: Step-by-step: A button is pressed to activate the first operation and then the next button to activate the second operation etc. Holding down a button: An action can be repeated (scrolling) by holding down a key longer than the preset time (fixed setting of 0.5 seconds).
The pushbuttons activate the following functions:

'E'
executes an operation (ENTER function), i.e. a menu item is executed, normally, moving down a level in the menu hierarchy. The button has no effect at the lower most level of the menu structure.
'C'
corresponds to the ESCAPE button on a PC. It is used to return to the entry level menu.
'', ''
The up and down arrow keys are used either for selecting a desired menu item in a menu structure or for moving within a displayed list (e.g. different events in the event list). In the following text, these keys are represented by the symbols '^' and 'v'.
''
The right arrow key has the same effect as the 'E' button. In the following text it is represented by the symbol '>'.
''
Use this key to exit an active menu and to return to the next level up in the menu hierarchy. In the following text this key is represented by the symbol '<'.
5-84
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.10.4. 5.10.4.1.
The three status LEDs General An RE.316*4 unit can be in different states, the important ones are indicated by the three LEDs. The three LEDs colors: green, yellow and red can be in different states - off, flashing or on. The LEDs are represented by squares as in the diagrams below.
= on = flashing = off
In the start menu, on the first line, the meaning of the three LEDs is explained.
green
yellow
red
Active Start Trip ABB REC316*4
Fig. 5.89 5.10.4.2.
Caption of the LEDs
Starting the device During the start of the device and the initialization phase, the yellow and green LEDs flash, to indicate that the device is not operational.
green
yellow
red
Fig. 5.90 5.10.4.3.
LED states at start of the RE.316*4
Protection functions inactive If none of the protection functions is active (none programmed or all blocked), the device initialization has been successful and no errors are found, the device is still not ready for operation. In this state the green LDU LED flashes and the green LED in the top row is ON continuously.
green
yellow
red
Fig. 5.91
LED states when the protection functions are inactive
5-85
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.10.4.4.
Normal device operation When the device is active and operates without errors or faults, the green LDU LED is ON , yellow and red LEDs are OFF.
green
yellow
red
Fig. 5.92 5.10.4.5.
LED states in normal operation
Pick-up of a protection function (General start) The pick-up of at least one protection function (General start signal active) is indicated when the green and yellow LDU LEDs are ON. The yellow LED remains ON after reset of the general start. The latched ON has to be reset manually (see Section 5.10.8.6).
grn
gelb
rot
Fig. 5.93 5.10.4.6.
LED states in general start
Protection trip (General Trip) A trip initiated by at least one protection function (General Trip signal active) is indicated when the green, yellow and red LDU LEDs are ON. The yellow and red LEDs remain ON after reset of the general trip. The latched ON has to be reset manually (see Section 5.10.8.6).
green
yellow
red
Fig. 5.94
LED states for a general trip
5-86
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.10.4.7.
Fatal device error When the device has a fatal error and is no longer operational then all three LDU LEDs flash.
green
yellow
red
Fig. 5.95 5.10.5. 5.10.5.1.
LED states for a fatal error
Text display (LCD) General Upper and lower case characters are displayed as well as all language specific characters for German, English and French. Measurand display are refreshed (measurements, binary signals etc.). approx. every second
5.10.5.2.
Language The LDU supports a number of languages, however, the language used by the HMI on the PC during commissioning is the language set on the LDU. This cannot be modified during normal operation. The LDU language is programmed automatically to correspond to that of the PC-HMI. Care must therefore be taken when changing parameter settings that the HMI on the PC is operating in the desired language.
5.10.5.3.
Interdependence The menus are not dependent on changes in the process or the status of the device, i.e. a menu text remains unchanged on the display until the user selects a different menu item. The only exceptions are the start-up procedure and during downloading of parameter settings from the CAP2/316 to the device. During these procudures the entry menu is displayed. No menus can be selected during download from the PC to the RE.316*4.
5.10.5.4.
Configurability The menu structure described below cannot be modified or configured. It is neither possible to add a menu item nor to change a menu text. Certain menu items and texts are dependent on the system configuration. For example, if an additional protection function is configured, the menu items needed to view the measurands are automatically inserted. The signal texts are inherited from the HMI.
5-87
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.10.6.
Menu structure The information displayed on the LDU is organized in a five level hierarchical structure. An overview of the menu structure is given in the diagram below. The user can only navigate vertically from one menu level to the next i.e. it is not possible to jump to the same hierarchical level in another vertical branch. Every menu item (excepting the entry menu) consists of two parts: Header (first line on the LCD): The header displays the title of the active menu item. This line has a hyphen '-' at the start and the end of the text, to differetiate it from a selectable menu item. This header is always displayed, even when there are more than three selectable menu items and it is necessary to scroll through them. Menu lines: Lines two, three and four display the sub-menus. Note: An arrow pointing downwards at the end of line 4 means that the menu contains more displayable sub-menu items. These can be viewed by pressing the arrow key 'v'. An arrow pointing upwards at the end of line 2 means that the menu contains more sub-menu items above the ones displayed. These can be viewed by pressing the arrow key '^'.
5-88
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
ENTRY MENU MAIN MENU MEASURANDS AD Channels Nominal Values Primary Values Secondary Values Function Measurands 1. Function : n. Function Binary Signals Input Signals RBI Inputs ITL Inputs Signal Relays Trip Relays RBO Outputs ITL Outputs Analog Signals Input Signals Output Signals EVENT LIST USERS GUIDE DISTURBANCE RECORDER DIAGNOSIS MENU Diagnosis Info IBB-Status Info ProcessbusInfo LED Description RESET MENU Latch-Reset Clear Eventlist Reset PC-Card System Restart
Fig. 5.96
Menu structure
5-89
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.10.7.
Entry menu The first menu level is the entry level menu. It is displayed after every system start or after pressing the 'C' pushbutton. It does not have a header, but four lines of text. The main menu can be accessed from the entry menu by pressing either button 'E' or '>'. The entry menu comprises two parts: The first line states the significance of the three LEDs: green LED: 'Active' yellow LED: 'Start' red LED: 'Trip' Lines two to four show the name of the device, the system name assigned to it and the software version.
The entry menu comprises four lines. The buttons 'C', '^' and 'v' have no effect in this menu. As there is no item to select an underscore is not displayed. If the RE.316*4 has not been configured, 'Local Display' appears on line 3, otherwise the name assigned to the device using the HMI. The figure below shows a typical entry menu:
Activ Start Trip ABB REC316*4 Example V5.1

Fig. 5.97 5.10.8. Main menu The main menu displays all the sub-menus to help obtain more information on the device and the primary process. 'Main Menu' is displayed in the header line. The three lines below display the submenus. If there are more sub-menus, these are indicated with a downward pointing arrow, in line four. The first of the sub-menus (line 2 of the display) is always underscored, indicating it is preselected. The list can be scrolled through using the arrow keys '^' and 'v', whereby the sub-menus scroll up resp. down, and a different submenu item is then displayed on line 2 with an underscore. Hence one sub-menu item is always underscored and preselected. The selected sub-menu is activated by pressing either button 'E' or '>'. A 'v' (down arrow) on the last position of line 4 or a '^' (up arrow) indicates the possible scroll direction, for the display of other sub-menus. Entry menu
5-90
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The following sub-menus are available: Measurands Eventlist Users -Guide Disturbance Recorder Diagnosis menu Reset Menu
-MainmenuMeasurands Eventlist Users Guide

Fig. 5.98 5.10.8.1. Measurands The measurands menu lists all the sub-menus that can be selected for viewing the various measurand displays. 'Measurands' is displayed in the header and below this the three lines of sub-menus are displayed The following sub-menus can be selected: AD-Channels Funct. Measurements Binary Signals Analog Signals Main menu
-MeasurandsAD-Channels Funct. Measurements Binary Signals

Fig. 5.99 5.10.8.1.1. Measurands menu
A/D Channels This menu provides facility for selecting the display of the rated, primary or secondary values.
-AD-ChannelsNominal Values Prim.Values Sec.Values

Fig. 5.100 A/D channels
5-91
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The three sub-menus list all the CT and VT input signals that can be displayed. The headers are 'Rated values', 'Prim.values' and 'Sec.values' respectively and the measurands are displayed on the three lines below. To scroll through the list use the '^' and 'v' keys. The 'E' and '>' have no effect, because this is the lowest level of the submenu. An arrow at the end of line four pointing downwards and/or at the end of line two pointing upwards indicate in which direction the user can scroll to view the other values. The displayed values and text (units etc.) vary according to the configuration of the RE.316*4. Nine current or voltage input values can be displayed and the phase-angle of the measured value in relation to the reference channel is also displayed.
-Nominal Values3 0.865IN 120 4 1.102UN 0 5 1.021UN-120

Fig. 5.101 Rated values
Frequency display and setting the reference channel The tenth measurand displays the frequency of the reference channel. To change the reference channel, scroll to line 11 using the down arrow key 'v'. The reference channel is set on this line. Each time the arrow key 'v' is pressed after line 11 selects the next higher input as reference channel. After the ninth channel, the first channel is used once again as the reference channel. On pressing the up arrow key '^' the last selected input is selected as the reference channel. Channel 1 is selected as the default reference channel on entry into this menu.
-AD-Channels9 0.77IN-120 10 51.11 Hz 11 Ref.Channel 1

Fig. 5.102 5.10.8.1.2. CT and VT inputs and selection of reference channel
Function measurands This menu displays all the configured functions. The header is 'Funct. measurands', the configured functions are displayed on the next three lines. The no of lines displayed is dependent on the configured protection functions. When no function has been configured, a 'No function' is displayed.
5-92
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
-Funct.Measurand1.Current-DT 2.U>High Voltage 3.Power

Fig. 5.103 Function measurand menu
Display of the function measurands The menu lists all the measurands that can be viewed for the selected function. The function name is displayed in the header, followed on the next three lines by the measurands. If there are more than three measurands, the rest of the list can be viewed using the arrow keys '^' and 'v'. The buttons 'E' and '>' have no effect, because this is the lowest level of menu. If a function does not have any measurands then lines 2 to 4 are empty. The displayed values and text (units etc.) vary according to the selected function.
-10.UifPQ1 0.997 UN 2 4.014 IN 3 10.999 P(PN)

Fig. 5.104 5.10.8.1.3. Measurements by the UifPQ function
Binary signals The binary signals menu lists all the binary signals that can be viewed. The header is 'Binary Signals' and in the following three lines the types of binary signals are listed as sub-menus. The following sub-menus are available: Binary Inputs RBI-Inputs ITL-Inputs Signalling Relays Trip Relays RBO-Outputs ITL-Outputs
-Binary SignalsInput Signals RBI-Inputs ITL-Inputs

Fig. 5.105 Binary signals menu
5-93
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Binary inputs, signalling relays, trip relays The selection and display of the binary inputs, signalling relays and tripping relays are similar to one another, and, as an example the procedure for the binary inputs is explained. Selecting the menu item 'Input Signals' opens a sub-menu with the numbers of input/output modules, which when selected displays the states of the input signals. The header is 'Input signals' and all the populated slots of the binary input/output modules are displayed on the next three lines.
-Input SignalsSlot 1 DB61 Slot 2 DB62
Fig. 5.106
Binary inputs
Measurands - binary input modules The process values of the binary input card are displayed in this submenu. 'Slot 1 DB6' for example is displayed on the header line and the process values on line 3. The buttons 'E' and '>' have no effect, because this is the lowest level of the menu structure. Since only one line is displayed, the arrow keys 'v' and '^' are not used. To present the states in a readable manner a logical '0' is represented by a hyphen '-' and a logical '1' by an 'X'. The LSB is on the extreme left similar to the HMI.
-Slot 1 DB61-X-X---X LSB

Fig. 5.107 Display of the binary input module values
RBI, ITL inputs, RBO and ITL outputs Since the selection and display of the RBI and ITL inputs and outputs is very similar, the procedure for the RBI inputs will be explained and applies for all the others. When opened, the 'RBI-Inputs' display the current states of the RBI inputs of the first module. If none of the input modules is assigned this number, all the inputs indicate a zero. The display can be switched from one remote module to the next using the arrow keys 'v' and '^'. To present the states in a readable manner a logical '0' is represented by a hyphen '-' and a logical '1' by an 'X'. The LSB is on the extreme left is as in the HMI.
5-94
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
-RBI-Inputs1 -X-X---X-------LSB
Fig. 5.108 RBI inputs
Analog inputs, Analog outputs Since the selection and display of the analog inputs and analog outputs are very similar, the selection and display of analog inputs is illustrated. The 'Analog Signals' menu provides a choice between inputs and outputs. The 'Input signals' sub-menu displays the numbers of all the devices that have been configured. To display the input signal values select one of the devices.
-Analog SignalsInput signals Output signals
Fig. 5.109
Analog signals
-Input signalsDevice No. 9 Device No. 10
Fig. 5.110
Input signals
Display of the analog values This menu displays all the measurands of the selected device. The device number is displayed as the menu header and the measurands are listed below. The measurands in the list can be viewed using the '^' and 'v' buttons. The buttons 'E' and '>' have no effect, because this is the lowest level of the menu structure.
-Device No. 1 14.01 mA 2 2.52 V 3 143.42

Fig. 5.111
9-
Viewing the input variables of device No. 9
5-95
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.10.8.2.
Event list This menu item displays the latest 20 events, together with the tripping values of the protection functions and also the special 'LDU events' function. 'Event List' is displayed in the header and the latest events are displayed below it. The older events can be viewed using the arrow keys. The numbers of the events are the same on the LDU and the HMI. Note that an event cannot be displayed in total because 4 lines are needed and only 3 are available. To view the complete information use the arrow keys 'v' and '^'. The displayed text (function name and unit) is the same as that in the event list on the HMI.
-Event list32 1.Current-DT 4.036 IN 13:55;57.571

Fig. 5.112 5.10.8.3. Users guide This menu item provides access to brief instructions on the use of the LDU, e.g. the functions of the buttons. Event list
-Users GuideE=Enter the preselected menu

Fig. 5.113 5.10.8.4. Users guide
Disturbance recorder The menu 'Disturb.Rec.' displays a list of the data stored in the disturbance recorder. If there are several entries, these can be scrolled through using the arrow keys 'v' and '^'. When the list is opened the oldest record is displayed first. When the disturbance recorder is empty, '0 events' is displayed.
5-96
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
-Disturb.Rec.Event 1 9803-17 13:55;56.575

Fig. 5.114 5.10.8.5. List of disturbance records
Diagnosis menu This menu provides access to the different kinds of diagnostic information. The header displays 'Diagnosis Menu' and the list of submenus are listed below. DiagnosisInfo IBB-StatusInfo ProcessbusInfo LED Description
-Diagnosis MenuDiagnosisInfo IBBStatusInfo ProcessbusInfo

Fig. 5.115 5.10.8.5.1. Diagnostics
Diagnosis Info This menu item displays diagnostic information in a similar form to the HMI. 'Diagnosis Info' is displayed in the header and the diagnostic information is displayed on the three lines below. The entire list can be viewed using the arrow keys '^' and 'v'. The status of the device is displayed first, followed by the date and time when the software was downloaded, then the time when settings were last changed and finally the status of the loaded FUP programs.
-Diagnosis InfoRelayStatus: No Error

Fig. 5.116 General status information
5-97
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
5.10.8.5.2.
IBB-Status-Info Select this menu item to view information on the interbay bus (LON, MVB etc.). 'IBB-StatusInfo' is displayed in the header followed by three lines with the IBB diagnostic information. You can scroll through the list using the '^' and 'v' keys: The connected interbay bus (SPA, IEC60870-5-103, LON or MVB) is shown on the second line together with the information 'Ready' (operational), 'No response' (if no telegrams are transferred, but the device is ready) or 'Inactive' (this appears, for example, when the corresponding interface is not configured). The HMI must be used to obtain more detailed information. Station number and actual time Neuronchip ID (only for LON)
-IBB-StatusInfoSPA-BUS Ready
Fig. 5.117 5.10.8.5.3.
Interbay bus information
Process bus info Here information about the process bus can be viewed in a manner similar to information about the station bus. The 'Process bus inf' is displayed in the header. The operating mode and the status of the PC card, the PC card type, the software version and the PC card counter appear below.
-ProcessbusInfoPC-Card Error: No Error

Fig. 5.118 5.10.8.5.4. Information about the process bus (PC card error)
LED Description With the help of this menu, the description of the LEDs at the top left of the frontplate can be viewed on the LDU.
-LED Description1:Relay ready 2:Trip 1 3:Trip 2

Fig. 5.119 Significance of the LEDs
5-98
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Entering the LED description text As described in Section 5.4.2.5, the text entered for the LEDs and the rest of the text in the HMI has to be downloaded to the device, so that it can be eventually displayed. 5.10.8.6. Reset-Menu This menu item opens a sub-menu that enables the user to delete different kinds of information or execute a warm start. Following four possibilities are available: Latch-Reset (resetting of latched signals) Clear Eventlist Reset PC-Card System Restart The first menu item 'Latch reset' resets the two LEDs 'Start' and 'Trip' on the front of the LDU. In addition all the latched LEDs on the frontplate and all latched outputs (signalling and tripping relays) are reset. The second menu item clears the event list (only the one displayed in the LDU and not the one in the PC). The item 'System Restart' initiates a warm start of the device.
-Reset-MenuLatch-Reset Clear Eventlist Reset PC-Card System Restart

Fig. 5.120 Reset menu
For every selection of the above menu items, a dialogue appears requesting confirmation for the execution of the action 'Are you sure? No / Yes?'. The default response is 'No'. Select the appropriate response using the arrow keys 'v' and '^' (in the same way as selecting a menu item) and execute by pressing 'E' or '>'.
-Latch-ResetAre you sure? No / Yes

Fig. 5.121 Are you sure?
5-99
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
-Reset PC-CardAre you sure? No / Yes

Fig. 5.122 5.10.9. 5.10.9.1. Are you sure?
Automatic display General description In addition to the manual procedure for selecting information for display, there is an automatic display routine that cyclically displays the latest available information. This executes if the PC-HMI is not connected and no buttons are actuated on the LDU. The automatic display switches continuously through the different data.
5.10.9.2.
Starting the automatic display After each system start, the entry menu appears. The automatic display cycle starts, providing no buttons are pressed within a minute. If a particular menu item (e.g. measurements) has been selected manually, then this is displayed even if no buttons are pressed. The automatic display starts only from the entry menu providing no buttons are pressed and the HMI is not connected.
5.10.9.3.
Stopping the automatic display Stop the automatic display routine by pressing the button 'C' (clear button). The entry menu appears and you can navigate through the menu structure in the normal way.
5.10.9.4.
Automatic display cycle The sequence of the automatic display cycle is as follows: Entry menu Measurand(s) 1. Function Measurand(s) 2. Function .... Measurand(s) of last function Event list
Each display remains visible for about 15 seconds before switching to the next block of information. When a function has more than three measurands, all of them are shown in sequence before next function is displayed. The same applies when there are more than three events in the event list.
5-100
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Oktober 04
6.
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6. 6.6.1. 6.6.2. 6.6.3. 6.7. 6.8. 6.8.1. 6.8.2. 6.8.3. 6.8.4. 6.9. 6.10. 6.11.
SELF-TESTING AND MONITORING

Summary............................................................................................6-2 Monitoring the auxiliary supply...........................................................6-2 Monitoring the firmware .....................................................................6-2 Monitoring the hardware ....................................................................6-3 Diagnostic events...............................................................................6-4 Device diagnosis................................................................................6-6 Signaling of the detailed diagnostic information 316VC61.................6-9 Display of the detailed diagnostic information 316EA63 ..................6-10 Display of the FUPLA status ............................................................6-12 HEX dump........................................................................................6-13 IBB information ................................................................................6-13 SPA bus ...........................................................................................6-14 LON bus...........................................................................................6-14 MVB bus ..........................................................................................6-16 IEC 60870-5-103 bus.......................................................................6-18 RIO information................................................................................6-18 Resetting SCS data .........................................................................6-18 Possible error messages of CAP2/316 ............................................6-19
6-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
6.
6.1.
SELF-TESTING AND MONITORING

Summary The continuous self-monitoring and diagnostic features incorporated in RE. 316*4 assure high availability both of the protection functions and the power system it is protecting. Hardware failures are signaled instantly via an alarm contact. Special importance has been given to monitoring the external and internal auxiliary supply circuits. The A/D converters (external CT/VT input boards Type 316EA62 or 316EA63 or A/D converters on the CPU board) are checked for their functioning and tolerance, by comparing with the A/D conversion of two reference voltages. The execution of the program itself is monitored by a watchdog. Security when transferring data by serial communication between the protection and a local control and setting unit (PC) or with a remote system (station control system) is provided by a communication protocol with a "Hamming" distance of 4. Special functions are provided for monitoring the integrity of the VT connections and for checking the symmetry of the three phase voltages and currents.
6.2.
Monitoring the auxiliary supply Both the external auxiliary supply applied to the protection and the internal electronic supplies are continuously monitored. The supply unit is capable of bridging supply interruptions up to 50 ms. After this time, the O/P's are blocked and the unit is reset and reinitialized.
6.3.
Monitoring the firmware A hardware timer (watchdog) monitors the execution of the program. Providing the program runs correctly, the timer is reset at regular intervals. Should for some reason the execution of the program be interrupted and the timer not be reset, the O/Ps are blocked and the unit reinitialized.
Note: If a watchdog start has occurred five times within 24 hours, the device is blocked and indicates fatal error.
6-2
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.4.
Monitoring the hardware For the most part, the hardware is either monitored or self-testing both while the system is being initialized after switching on and afterwards during normal operation. Upon switching on the auxiliary supply, a test routine completely checks the hardware including the RAM and the flash EPROM checksums. The function and accuracy of the A/D converter is tested by converting a 10 V reference voltage to a digital value and checking that the result lies within 1 %. The 'power up' test takes about 10 seconds. During this period the green ('Active') LED is OFF and the protection functions are blocked. Upon successful completion of the test, the green LED flashes and the start-up routine commences. As soon as the green LED is ON, the device is operational. The above routine continues to run in the background during normal operation, and the memory (excepting the RAM) is checked periodically. The reference voltage, current and voltage signals are converted to digital signals (A/D converters), and continuously monitored.
6-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
6.5.
Diagnostic events A corresponding entry is made in the event list whenever the diagnostic function detects a failure. The following entries in the list are possible: System start The device was switched on. Protection restart The protection and control functions were activated. System warm start The device was restarted after the reset button was pressed or a watchdog time-out. Protection stop The protection and control functions were stopped by the parameters being re-entered. Supply failure The device was switched off or there was a supply failure. Diagnosis: main processor 316VC61a/316VC61b ready (0001H). Diagnosis: A/D processor EA6. not ready. The external A/D processor 316EA62 or 316EA63 is not ready. This occurs during normal operation, because the A/D processor on the 316VC61a/316VC61b is active. Diagnosis: internal A/D ready (0001H) The A/D processor on the 316VC61a/316VC61b is ready. Diagnosis: system status: OK
The above list of diagnostic messages reflects the operating state when the device is standing by.
6-4
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The following messages and hexadecimal weightings can be generated by a fault recognized by the diagnosis in the device:
Designation RDY WDTO WDDIS HLT SWINT RAM ROM VREF ASE EEPROM
Function Device standing by Watchdog time-out Watchdog disabled Stop procedure initiated Software interrupt RAM error ROM error Reference voltage out-of-tolerance A/D converter error Parameter memory error
Weighting 0001H 0002H 0004H 0008H 0010H 0100H 0200H 0400H 0800H 2000H
Table 6.1
Hexadecimal weightings
The hexadecimal weighting of an error message may also be the addition of simpler errors. For example, VREF and ASE are recorded as 0400H + 0800H = 0C00H. Failures with a weighting less than 080H are listed as minor errors, e.g. a warm start after pressing the reset button. Failures with a weighting higher than 0100H are fatal errors and result in blocking of the protection and control functions.
Note: Normally, a 'fatal error' always blocks the protection and control functions. To reset a 'fatal error' switch the device off and on. If the error disappeared, the device will restart and change to 'no error'.
6-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Example
Diagnostic signal CPU Diagnostic signal 316EA6.
Fig. 6.1
Event list after switching the device off and on
6.6.
Device diagnosis Device diagnostic data can be viewed by selecting 'Signals' and Diagnostics from the HMI main menu:
Fig. 6.2
Diagnostics menu
6-6
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Selecting 'List Diagnostic Info' shows the following:

Selection of plug-in unit Status signals
Fig. 6.3
Device diagnosis
The green status signals indicate that the protection unit is in order. Red and not green colors of one or more status signals indicate an erroneous behavior, a fatal error, of the device. The yellow status signals indicate a non-urgent error. The errors are explained in more detail under Details. For viewing details of other cards these must be selected beforehand.
6-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Significance of the individual status signals:

Status State of the device Display No error Non-urgent error Significance Signifies that the device is fully operational. Signifies that the device is operational, however that a restart has occurred (see also Fig. 6.4), or that the plug-in unit 316EA6 is not ready. This error occurs if an EEPROM error has occurred on the 316EA62 plug-in unit. A severe error blocking the device. This means that the device has been configured. The green LED on the device front is flashing, because no valid configuration has yet been uploaded in the device. This means that the A/D conversion on the 316EA6 plug-in unit is ready and running. This means that the A/D conversion on the 316EA6 card is not running. This is not a problem, since the conversion occurs on the 316VC61card. This means that the A/D conversion on the 316EA6 card is not running.
Urgent error
Fatal error Protection state Running Not running
Internal A/D status
No error (with 316EA6.) Not ready (with 316EA6.)
Not ready (with 316EA6.)
Table 6.2
Status signals
Note: Pay no further attention to non-urgent errors. The status signals may be cancelled with the reset button or with the aid of the reset menu of the local signal. The status signals are reset automatically at the latest after one day.
6-8
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.6.1.
Signaling of the detailed diagnostic information 316VC61. The detailed diagnostic information for the individual plug-in units is displayed by their selection and with the button Details. Details of the CPU 316VC61. are to be interpreted as follows: HW-number: 00000078D5CF1 Every processor board 316VC61a resp. 316VC61b has a unique hardware number. ProcessorID: 04A4 Codes for the microprocessor: 0434 stands for processor board 316VC61a 04A4 stands for processor board 316VC61b PCMCIA ID: 0082 Code for the PCMCIA controller (PC card). Firmware Date: = 2002-12-12 08:57;48 Date and time when the device firmware was created. Set-File Date: = 2002-12-20 14:13;30 Date and time when the parameter settings were last downloaded. Detailed information on the erroneous behavior is given under Discovered errors. The mentioned hexadecimal weightings of the error messages are not encoded here but emitted in text form. For the error message below (Fig. 6.4) the result is 001BH. This is composed of 02H + 08H + 10H + 01H = 1BH. 01H for device ready is not indicated as an error. As an example the warm start of a device is shown as non-urgent error:
Fig. 6.4
Device diagnosis 316VC61b after warm start
6-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
6.6.2.
Display of the detailed diagnostic information 316EA63 The detailed diagnostic information for the individual plug-in units is displayed by their selection and with the button Details. The details of 316EA63 are to be interpreted as follows: Status: Error located Here the status of the 316EA63 card is specified. FW version: 4.2.1.3 EA63 Gives information about the firmware of the card. This is uploaded on this plug-in unit with the CAP2/316. See also Section 7. 4. = means EA-VC interface version 2. = means EA-EA compatibility version 1. = means 316EA63 hardware version 3 = means 316EA63 firmware version HW version: C.0.1 Gives information about the hardware of the card. C. = means revision status of the print 0. = means version DIC 1 = means version ACC EA63 configuration: Here the configuration of the 316EA63 is specified. This can work either as master or as slave, whereby L stands for long distance and K for short distance. Optical receiver energy A: Here the signal strength of the receiver A is indicated. This should be within the range of 400 ... 15000. If the receiving signal is too small, the 316EA63 configuration at the opposite end must be set to L (long). If the signal is too strong, it must be set to S (short). Optical receiver energy B: This port is not foreseen at present and not to be considered further. Under Undiscovered error detailed information of the erroneous behavior is given. This allows the location and correction of the error. The following figure (Fig. 6.5) shows an overdriven signal of the 316EA63.
Fig. 6.5
Detail diagnosis 316EA63 (overdriven)
6-10
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The A/D converter 316EA62 resp. 316EA63 generates its own diagnostic messages:
Short description Ready Watchdog HW version Incompatibility SW version Incompatibility Local channels No signal Synchronization RAM error Vref error Vref0 error Parameter incompatibility Modem A not ready Modem B not ready Function Device standing by Watchdog timeout EA EA versions check. Here the versions of the two EA-plug-in units are checked on their versions. EA EA versions check. Here the versions of the two EA-plug-in units are checked on their versions. Error of the local conversion values Error of the values transmitted from the opposite end, no signal. Error in the communication with the opposite end, no synchronization. RAM error The reference voltage is out of tolerance The admissible base voltage is out of tolerance. The configurations of both devices exhibit parameters not compatible with each other. Modem A is not ready. Modem B is not ready. Weighting 0001H 0002H 0004H
0008H
0020H 0040H 0040H 0200H 0400H 0800H 1000H
2000H 4000H
Table 6.3
Hexadecimal weightings of the 316EA6. card
6-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
6.6.3.
Display of the FUPLA status
Fig. 6.6
Display of the FUPLA status
FUPLA status: FUPLA-No. 1 (DIST600 ): in process (Prog). Shows the name of the FUPLA uploaded in the device. This allows the explicit identification of the uploaded FUPLA code. The FUPLA can be processed either in the program memory (Prog) or in the parameter memory (Para). Uploading the FUPLA code is followed by the start of the process in the parameter memory. Afterwards the code is copied into the program memory Prog in the background. In the program memory the processing speed is higher. It is possible to upload up to eight different FUPLA logics. The status of each logic is displayed. The following states are possible:
Status Blocked (*) Halted (*) Significance The blocking input is preventing the execution of the FUPLA logic. The execution of the FUPLA logic has been halted because, for example, the FUPLA code cannot be accessed temporarily. The FUPLA logic is being processed. The FUPLA logic is already initialized, but inactive. The FUPLA logic is loaded, but is not running. The respective states can be processed either in the (Prog) or (Para) memory. This is shown in brackets in each case.
Processing (*) Initialized (*) Inactive (*) (*)
Table 6.4
FUPLA status
6-12
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.7.
HEX dump Additional information to the diagnostic information is available by selecting Diagnostics from the main menu and then Load HEX dump. The user cannot evaluate this data, but they are frequently useful to ABB personnel for fault finding. Once the data has been read, it should be deleted again by selecting Delete HEX dump to make room for saving new data. There is only one HEX dump that may be old, because it is not overwritten by the newest device fault.
Fig. 6.7
HEX dump
If you are not sure whether this HEX dump has been generated by the fault to be examined, forward it together with the following information to sa-t.supportline@se.abb.com: 6.8. HEX DUMP (*.hdp) Device configuration (*.set) Information about the used CAP2/316 software version Device type: REG-, RET-, REC- or REL316*4, with or without local display unit (LDU, display on the front) Event list (*.evt or *.ebn) Stored diagnostic information (*.rtf)
IBB information Depending on the firmware installed and therefore the choice of the interbay bus, various data on the status of the bus in relation to the station control system and the PC card can be obtained via this menu item.
6-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
6.8.1.
SPA bus In the case of the SPA bus, only little information is displayed, such as status information, number of errors, etc..
Fig. 6.8 6.8.2. LON bus
Diagnostic menu for the SPA bus
In the case of LON bus, information about the PC card and the number of messages transmitted and received is provided.
Fig. 6.9
6-14
Diagnostic menu for the LON bus
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The table below explains the significance of the various items of information.
Text displayed Neuron Chip ID-No. Domain Subnet No. Node No. Transmission errors Transaction timeouts Receiver transaction timeouts Missed messages Reset cause Interface status Version number Error number Model number Driver state Cross table for network variables No. Of semaphore hits No. Of semaphore misses No. Of semaphore fails No. Of IN buffer overflows No. Of transmitted messages No. Of received messages Significance Hardware number of the neuron chip on the PC card Number of the domain to which the device belongs (can be set via the LON bus). Number of the sub-network to which the device belongs (can be set via the LON bus). Device node number (can be set via the LON bus). Number of errors detected during reception Number of transaction confirmations not received. Number of messages received that were lost, because of incorrect settings at the receiving end. Number of messages lost, because the receive memory in the RE.316*4 was full. Reason for the last restart executed by the PC card. Normal: Configured and on-line. PC card firmware version 0 = no error otherwise error on the PC card. Always 0 OK or error message Valid or invalid (table loaded via the LON bus). Information for ABB purposes Information for ABB purposes Information for ABB purposes Number of messages received and lost, because the driver buffer was full. Total number of messages transmitted since the information was deleted. Total number of messages received since the information was deleted.
No. Of transmitting errors Counts the number of data transmitted erroneously.
6-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Text displayed No. Of OUT buffer overflows No. Of event buffer overflows No. Of lost incoming messages
Significance Number of messages not transmitted, because the buffer on the PC card was full. Number of events not transmitted, because the buffer on the PC card was full. Number of messages lost, because the driver receive buffer was full.
Table 6.5
Diagnostic information LON
Clear LON Bus diagnostic info 'InterbayBus Diagnostic Info' Selecting the button 'Clear' resets the various diagnostic information counters to zero. Send service telegram 'Serv. Tel' The button 'Serv. Tel' causes the PC card to send a service telegram, which corresponds to pressing the service button on the PC card. It is needed when configuring the network. 6.8.3. MVB bus The MVB bus provides information about the PC card and the number of messages transmitted and received.
Fig. 6.10
Diagnostic menu for the MVB bus
6-16
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The table below explains the significance of the various items of information in the diagnostic menu.
Text displayed Working Mode Significance Indicates the function of the PC card as connection to the interbay bus. If a PC card is not inserted, 'Not connected' is displayed on this line Initializing, ready, minor error, fatal error, 'no state' No error, Unknown error, No response, Initial error, Subsystem error etc. Interbay bus. If a PC card is not inserted, 'Software unknown' is displayed. PC card firmware date and version Signals whether the PC card firmware is active or not. Possible states: initializing, ready, minor error, fatal error, ' no state ' Signals whether the driver software in the RE.316*4 is active or not. Total number of messages received since the information was deleted. Total number of messages received since the information was deleted. Number of errors while transmitting a message, for example, because the buffer on the PC card was not available. Number of messages lost, because the driver receive buffer was full.
PC-Card Status PC-Card Error PC-Card Type PC-Card SW-Vers. PC-Card Heartbeat Driver State Driver Heartbeat No. of received Messages No. of transmitted Messages No. of Transmission fails No. of lost incoming Messages
Table 6.6
Diagnostic information MVB
Clear MVB-diagnostic info 'InterbayBus Diagnostic Info ' With the button Clear the various counters of the diagnostic information can be reset to zero.
6-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
6.8.4.
IEC 60870-5-103 bus In the case of the IEC60870-5-103 bus no detailed information is available.
Fig. 6.11 6.9.
Diagnostic menu for the IEC 60870-5-103 bus
RIO information Information is displayed on the status of the process bus and the distributed input/output system. A detailed description of the data is given in publication 1MRB520192-Uen.
6.10.
Resetting SCS data After entering his password, an authorized user can delete the SCS input data.
6-18
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.11.
Possible error messages of CAP2/316

Remedy - Plug in communication cable - Check communication interface (Port) - Switch the device off/on.
Error message
- Plug in communication cable - Switch the device off/on.
- Close another application using the same interface.
- The wrong CAP2/316 has been used for the resp. device. - Use the correct CAP2/316 for the device.
- Connection is not available any more. Wait possibly until CAP2/316 is in the offline status. Afterwards select Connect under Communication.
- Compare the SW key in the settings under I/O with the one at the rear of the device (SW Vers SX.YYY).
6-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
- There have been inadmissible connections made between the protection functions, which were detected only during the final test. Check again the connections between the functions. - It is possible that the memory for the local data overflows, if several parameter sets with many functions are being configured. In this case these signals are also displayed. Reduce the size of the configuration.
and after acknowledgement with 'OK':
Table 6.7
Error message and remedy
6-20
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 2004
7.
7.1. 7.2. 7.2.1. 7.2.2. 7.3. 7.3.1. 7.3.2. 7.3.3. 7.4. 7.4.1. 7.4.1.1. 7.4.1.2. 7.4.2. 7.4.2.1. 7.4.2.2. 7.4.3. 7.4.3.1. 7.4.3.2. 7.4.4. 7.4.4.1. 7.4.5. 7.4.6. 7.4.7. 7.4.8. 7.4.9. 7.4.10. 7.5. 7.5.1. 7.5.1.1. 7.5.1.2. 7.5.1.3. 7.5.2. 7.5.3. 7.5.4. 7.5.5. 7.5.6. 7.6. 7.6.1. 7.6.1.1. 7.6.1.2.
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE7-3

Summary............................................................................................7-3 Inspection and precautions ................................................................7-4 Inspection upon receipt......................................................................7-4 Precautions to avoid transport damage .............................................7-4 Assembly ...........................................................................................7-4 Place of installation and ambient conditions ......................................7-4 Cubicle ...............................................................................................7-5 Installing racks in cubicles .................................................................7-6 Installation..........................................................................................7-6 Grounding guidelines .........................................................................7-6 Cubicle grounding ..............................................................................7-6 Additional grounding points along cables ........................................7-11 Wiring...............................................................................................7-11 External wiring .................................................................................7-11 Internal wiring...................................................................................7-11 Screening.........................................................................................7-12 Cable screens ..................................................................................7-12 Terminating cable screens...............................................................7-12 Communication cables.....................................................................7-13 Laying optical fiber cables................................................................7-15 Guidelines for wiring rack assemblies..............................................7-15 Checking the CT connections ..........................................................7-18 Checking the VT connections ..........................................................7-18 Checking the auxiliary supply connections ......................................7-19 Checking the duty of the tripping and signaling contacts .................7-19 Checking the opto-coupler inputs ....................................................7-19 Commissioning ................................................................................7-20 Connecting the setting and control PC ............................................7-20 Minimum PC requirements ..............................................................7-20 Serial interface parameters..............................................................7-20 PC connecting cable ........................................................................7-20 Connecting the equipment to the auxiliary d.c. supply.....................7-20 Connecting the binary inputs and outputs........................................7-21 Connecting VT and CT circuits ........................................................7-22 Connecting optical fiber cables for the longitudinal differential protection .........................................................................................7-22 Commissioning tests........................................................................7-23 Maintenance ....................................................................................7-24 Fault-finding .....................................................................................7-24 Stand-by LED on the frontplate........................................................7-24 Human/machine interface ................................................................7-25
7-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
7.6.1.3. 7.7. 7.7.1. 7.7.2. 7.7.3. 7.8. 7.9. 7.9.1. 7.9.1.1. 7.9.1.2. 7.9.1.3. 7.9.2. 7.9.3. 7.9.4. 7.9.4.1. 7.9.4.2. 7.9.4.3. 7.9.4.4.
Restarting.........................................................................................7-26 Software updates .............................................................................7-27 Settings ............................................................................................7-27 Deleting the settings and the program and downloading a new program............................................................................................7-27 Problems transferring the new software ..........................................7-28 Replacing hardware units ................................................................7-30 Testing the protection functions .......................................................7-32 MODURES test set XS92b ..............................................................7-32 Test socket case XX93 and test connector YX91-4.........................7-33 Test socket casing 316 TSS 01, test plug RTXH 24 and test cable YX 91-7............................................................................7-34 Switching to the test mode...............................................................7-34 Testing the distance protection function ..........................................7-35 Checking the direction of measurement ..........................................7-35 Testing the directional E/F function..................................................7-37 Injecting power system voltages and currents .................................7-37 Real power measurement................................................................7-37 Apparent power measurement.........................................................7-38 Testing using a test set ....................................................................7-39
7-2
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.
7.1.
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

Summary The place of installation and the ambient conditions must conform to the data given in the data sheet (see Chapter 8). Sufficient room must be left in front and behind the equipment to allow access for maintenance or adding to the system. Air must be allowed to circulate freely around the unit. During the course of commissioning, all the wiring to the unit must be checked and the auxiliary supply voltage and the voltage for the optocoupler inputs must be measured. Functional testing can be carried out with the aid of the test set Type XS92b. All the essential functions of the protection are subject to continuous self-testing and monitoring and therefore periodic maintenance and testing are not normally necessary. It is recommended, however, to check the values of the voltages and currents of the external circuits from time to time using the on the input channel display on the HMI. The tripping circuits should be tested at the same time.
7-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
7.2. 7.2.1.
Inspection and precautions Inspection upon receipt Upon receipt, check that the consignment is complete. Inform your local ABB company or representative should discrepancies be found in relation to the delivery note, shipping documents or order. Visually check all the items when unpacking. Should any transport damage be found, lodge a claim in writing with the last carrier without delay and inform the nearest ABB company or agent. If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, it must be stored in a suitable room in its original packing.
7.2.2.
Precautions to avoid transport damage Install the relays carefully into the racks so that they cannot fall out. Relays and other loose parts that are separate must be packed in the original packing box to preclude damage.
7.3. 7.3.1.
Assembly Place of installation and ambient conditions When choosing the place of installation, ensure that there is sufficient space in front of the equipment, i.e. that the serial interface connector and the local control and display unit are easily accessible. In the case of semi-flush mounting or installation in 19" equipment racks, space behind the equipment must be provided for adding ancillary units (e.g. 316DB61 and 316DB62), replacing units and changing electronic components (firmware). Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient conditions the relay location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances) severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, surge voltages of high amplitude and short rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as far as possible air should be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment
The room where the equipment is installed should be free of dust, the floor covered if possible with a semi-conducting plastic flooring material and cement floors and walls should be suitably painted. The room must be well ventilated so that the temperature is in the range 10 C to +55 C and the relative humidity between 30 and 70%. Lead/acid batteries must not be in the same room.
7-4
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.3.2.
Cubicle The cubicles delivered by ABB are equipped with a hinged frame and are suitable for installation: standing against a wall back-to-back side-by-side free-standing
Leave sufficient space in front to avoid damage when the hinged frame is opened. There must generally be enough room for carrying out maintenance and for using the associated instruments. Do not install equipment cubicles in corners, which would hinder opening the hinged frame and working on the cubicle. Free access is especially important in the case of cubicles not equipped with a hinged frame. Cubicles are normally erected on a pedestal or as a suite of cubicles on a platform to facilitate cleaning the floor and routing of cables.
Fig. 7.1
Example of a front view and view with the hinged equipment frame swung out of a cubicle
7-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
7.3.3.
Installing racks in cubicles Pay attention when determining the cubicle layout to leave a space of at least 1 Unit between the racks (1 U / 1 HE = 44.45 mm as specified in IEC 60297 and DIN 41494 Part 1). This space is necessary for cables and ventilation to prevent overheating (see Fig. 7.1).
7.4. 7.4.1.
Installation Grounding guidelines Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over-voltages on instrument transformer and control signal cables. There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce spurious currents in the relays themselves or the leads connected to them. Transient overvoltages and RF fields can affect the operation of the relay. On the other hand, the relay can transmit interference that can interfere with and disrupt the operation of other relays. In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
NOTICE: All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
7.4.1.1. Cubicle grounding Mechanical design The RF (radio frequency) impedance from the location of the various relays in the cubicle to the cubicle ground must be low. There must therefore be a good electrical contact between the metal parts of the cubicle such as side plates, blanking plates etc., and the frame and base of the cubicle. The contact surfaces must not only be good electrical conductors, they must also be corrosion-proof so that long-term good electrical conductivity is preserved. Non-observance of these conditions can result in the cubicle or parts of it resonating at certain frequencies, which increase the interference transmitted by the relays in the cubicle and can lower their immunity to electrical interference from outside.
7-6
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Grounding straps (copper braid) and their fittings The interference currents conducted by the ground connections are of high frequency and as a result of the skin effect, only the part of the ground straps near the surface is of consequence. Tinned copper braid is therefore used for the ground straps and not copper rod, because the cross-section of an equivalent rod would be much greater. Data of copper braid straps: Width 20 mm Cross-section 16 mm2
(necessary for protection grounds)
Both ends of the straps must be fitted with lugs suitable for the connecting to ground bolts. The surfaces in contact with the lugs must be electrically conducting and corrosion-proof.
2 1
3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 Fig. 7.2
Copper braid Cable lug Ground bolt Steel flat washer Contact surface
Grounding straps and fixture
CAUTION: In the case of aluminium contact surfaces, a cupal disc (copper-plated aluminium) must be fitted between the lug and aluminium surface to prevent corrosion.
7-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Grounding a single cubicle The moving parts of a cubicle such as the doors (front and rear) or hinged frame must be connected to the cubicle structure by three copper braid straps.
Braided copper strip, width 20 mm, cross-section 16 mm2 Ground rail terminal (sleeve) or conducting connection 1 2 3 4 Fig. 7.3 Door or hinged frame Cubicle ground rail near bottom of cubicle Station ground RE.316*4
Cubicle grounding principles
The cubicle ground rail is connected to the station ground by a copper braid strap. If the distance to the station ground exceeds 5 m, two straps must be run in parallel as closely as possible to each other.
7-8
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Grounding principles for adjacent cubicles Where cubicles are standing next to each other (less than 1 m apart), observe the following additional conditions (example with 2 cubicles):
3
HEST 045 001 V
1 2 3 Fig. 7.4
Cubicle Cubicle ground rail Station ground
Grounding principles for two adjacent cubicles (schematic view)
The ground rails in the two cubicles are connected together and each one individually connected to the station ground. The ground rails of cubicles that are more than 1 m apart do not have to be connected. The cubicles of a suite of several cubicles are also connected together and each one individually connected to the station ground.
7-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Grounding for relays mounted in an open frame An open frame must be electrically conducting, corrosion-proof and properly connected to the station ground (see below).
2 3
4 5
non-insulated connection
1 2 3 4 5 Fig. 7.5
Electrically conducting connection on both sides Mounting plate Open frame braided copper (at least 3 cm wide) Station ground
Methods of grounding relays in open frames (front view, semi-flush and surface mounting)
The contact surfaces between mounting plates or covers and the frame must be electrically conducting, i.e. neither contact surface may be painted and the contact area must be corrosion-proof (e.g. galvanized). The relays must be grounded directly to the rack frame (see Fig. 7.5), if the contact surfaces are poor conductors or to the mounting plate providing the surfaces are good conductors. The relays must be grounded such that the grounding straps are as short as possible. As described in Section 7.4.1.1., a second grounding strap must be run in parallel if the station ground is more than 5 m away. Also refer to document 1MRB520197-Ten 'Grounding and Wiring of Control and Protection Equipment'.
7-10
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.4.1.2.
Additional grounding points along cables Where cubicles are at different potentials, balancing currents can flow through the screens of cables that are grounded at both ends, which induce interference in the cable cores. Where the distance between the cubicles is greater than approximately 10 m, the induced interference can be strong enough to affect the equipment. One solution is to run the cables next to the ground rails of the station grounding mesh and to ground the cables screens every 5 to 10 m. For this purpose, remove a suitable length of insulation and fit a clamp to ground the exposed screen to a grounded metal surface. The clamp and the metal surface must be clean, electrically conducting and corrosion-proof. The type of clamp must be chosen such that it holds the cable firmly without pinching or crushing the screen of the cores.
7.4.2. 7.4.2.1.
Wiring External wiring The external wiring includes all the connections between the primary system plant and the cubicle, rack or relay terminals. The corresponding cables should be run in metal cable ducts that are connected at several points to the station ground. The external wiring comprises of the following groups: instrument transformer leads auxiliary supply connections binary inputs and outputs
Experience as shown that most interference is induced in the instrument transformer leads and therefore these should be run in separate cable ducts away from the other cables. CAUTION: The instrument transformer leads in GIS stations must be screened (see Section 7.4.3. 'Screening'). This is also to be recommended in other kinds of stations.
7.4.2.2.
Internal wiring The internal wiring comprises the connections between the cubicle or rack terminals and the terminals on the relays. This wiring should be kept as short as possible especially in open frames. As described in Section 7.4.2.1. 'External wiring', it is recommended to separate the instrument transformer leads from the other cables, i.e. they should not be run in the same cable ducts or loom. To reduce the
7-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
risk of parallel coupling, cables may also be crossed at right angles. The minimum cross coupling occurs when cables cross at right angles. Pre-wiring non-defined inputs should be avoided wherever possible for EMC reasons (antenna for interference). 7.4.3. 7.4.3.1. 7.4.3.2. Screening Cable screens Cables have braided screens with a cover ratio of more than 80%. Terminating cable screens Cable screens must be terminated such that the entire circumference of the screen is in contact with ground. Cable screens must be grounded at both ends. CAUTION: The screening effect is inadequate in industrial installations if the cable screen is grounded by a wire soldered to it.
The screens of cables can be grounded best if the cables enter cubicles via cable glands. Where this is not possible, proceed as illustrated in Fig. 7.6, taking care that that the cable screens are grounded inside the cubicle as closely as possible to the entrance. In order to connect the screen to ground, remove a suitable length of the insulation, push the exposed screen back over end of the remaining insulation and clamp it to a metal surface. Both the clamp and the metal surface must be electrically conducting and corrosion-proof.
1 2 3 4 Fig. 7.6
Cable insulation Screen pushed back over end of insulation Cable clamp Cores
Cable screen termination
7-12
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
It is important that the screen be pushed back over the end of the insulation as otherwise it frays with time and the quality of the ground connection diminishes. The risk of the screen and cores being pinched is also reduced. Screens in the case of open frames are also secured by a clamp to the mounting plate close to the relay as shown in Fig. 7.7.
2 1
1 2 3 4 5 Fig. 7.7
Equipment frame Bare mounting plate with relay Cable screen terminations Station ground Screened cables
Cable screen terminations in open equipment frames (rear view for semi-flush mounting, front view for surface mounting)
The unscreened ends of the cores going to the relay terminals must be kept as short as possible and the groups of cables should be run separately as explained in Section 7.4.2.2. 'Internal wiring'.
7.4.4. Communication cables
No precautions have to be taken in the case of optical fiber cables. Conventional copper communication cables must be screened (see Section 7.4.3.). The cable shield must be effectively connected to ground in the cubicles at both ends immediately adjacent to the cable inlet (see Section 7.4.1.1.). With the cable shields grounded at both ends, any potential differences between the cubicles will cause balancing currents to flow in the shields that can induce interference in the cables. This can interfere with the function of a relay at cable lengths of 10 m and more.
7-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
A possible solution is to run the cables along ground rails of the meshed ground system of the station building and grounding the shields at intervals of 5 to 10 m. For this purpose, a suitable length of insulation is stripped from the shield and the exposed shield connected by a cable cleat to a grounded metal surface (Fig. 7.6). Both the cleat and the contact surface must be electrically conducting and non-corroding. An alternative is to run a low-impedance ground connection parallel to the screened cables to 'bypass' the balancing currents.
HEST 045 002 V
1 2 3 4 5 Fig. 7.8
Second cubicle, e.g. control console Screened signal cable Cubicle Grounded cable shield Bypass (braided copper parallel ground)
Low-impedance parallel ground connection
Fig. 7.8 shows a parallel ground connection between an substation automation system console and a cubicle. The same arrangement applies in the case of two cubicles. The parallel ground is of braided copper. It should be kept parallel to the signal cable. This reduces the RF impedance of the connection. To ensure that the screened cable and the bypass ground remain physically parallel, they can be loosely strapped together at intervals. Cables conducting analog (LF) signals must have twisted cores. Multicore cables must have twisted pairs.
7-14
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.4.4.1.
Laying optical fiber cables
Refer to the suppliers instructions for how to lay optical fiber cables. Optical fiber cables may never be sharply bent or pinched. Always observe the minimum permissible bending radius (typically 50 mm).
7.4.5. Guidelines for wiring rack assemblies
Where digital protection devices (individual units) or protection systems are supplied in a rack, it is essential that the binary inputs and outputs (BIOs) and the auxiliary supply which have to be wired from the rack to the cubicle terminals be run separately from the CT and VT cables (not in the same duct or loom). This precaution reduces the parallel coupling of conducted interference. Should this not be possible along the whole route, parallel coupling can be reduced by transposing the cables. Complete separation, however, is to be preferred.
7-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
RE. 316*4
c.t's/v.t's
Aux. supply
Aux. supply
Crossing
c.t's/v.t's Terminals
Fig. 7.9
Separation of rack wiring in a cubicle
Screened leads must be used for the CT and VT wiring from the terminals to the equipment. Recommendation
It is also recommended to use screened leads for the binary inputs and outputs (BIOs) and the auxiliary supply.
The following applies if the equipment is not installed in a cubicle:
The terminals should be as close as possible to the equipment terminals so that the unscreened lengths of cables are very short! Screened CT, VT, binary input and output and auxiliary supply cables can be secured in one of the following ways:
7-16
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Assemblies fitted into panels
CT and VT leads to the terminals can be secured, for example, to a surface (steel rail) using cable clamps. The surface must be in direct contact with the plant ground and the cable screens must make good contact with the cable clamps all the way round. This, however, is not always the case and the screen is frequently not in contact at the sides which impairs the screening effect. To overcome this drawback, a tinned copper braid tape can be wound on top of the cable screen in the region of the clamps. This then ensures maximum screening efficiency.
Assemblies fitted into cubicles (2 alternatives)
a) The CT and VT cables going to the terminals can pass through cable glands. Again the cable screens must be in good contact with the gland all the way round and the gland with the station ground (e.g. via the panel or strip material in which the gland is fitted). CT and VT leads to the terminals can be secured, for example, to a surface (steel or copper) using conduit clamps. The surface (e.g. floor plate) must be in direct contact with the station ground and the cable screens must make good contact with the conduit clamps all the way round. b) This, however, is not always the case and the screen is frequently not in contact at the sides which impairs the screening effect. To overcome this drawback, a tinned copper braid tape can be wound on top of the cable screen in the region of the clamps. This then ensures maximum screening efficiency. To prevent corrosion, a Cupal disc (copper plated aluminium) must be inserted between aluminium and copper parts.
7-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
7.4.6.
Checking the CT connections
The CTs must be connected in strict accordance with diagram supplied with the equipment. The following must be carried out to check the CTs and CT circuits:

polarity check primary injection test plot of the excitation curve CT circuit grounding
The polarity check (as close as possible to the protection equipment) not only checks the current input circuit as a whole, it also checks the phase-angle of the CT. Primary injection checks for a ratio error and the wiring to the protection equipment. Each phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase circuit should be injected. In each case, the phase currents and the neutral current should be measured. The relative polarities of the CTs and their ratios can also be checked using load current. Plotting the excitation curve verifies that the protection is connected to a protection core and not a metering core. Each electrically independent current circuit may only be earthed in one place, in order to avoid balancing currents created by potential differences.
Core-balance CTs
If the residual current is obtained from a core-balance CT, the ground for the cable screen must first be taken back through the core-balance CT before connecting it to ground. The purpose of this is to ensure that any spurious E/F current flowing along the screen of the cable cancels itself and is not measured falsely as an E/F on the relays own feeder.
7.4.7. Checking the VT connections
The VTs must be connected in strict accordance with diagram supplied with the equipment. The following checks must be carried out to check the VT circuits:

polarity check wiring check VT circuit grounding
The rated voltage of an E/F protection scheme is defined as the voltage which occurs between the terminals 'e' and 'n' for a solid phase-toground fault. An E/F of this kind, e.g. on T phase (see Fig. 7.10), causes the voltages of R and S phases to increase from phase-to-
7-18
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
neutral to phase-to-phase potential and these add vectorially to produce a voltage between terminals 'e' and 'n', which is three times the phase-to-neutral voltage.
R
UR UR UT
US
u
R
3 u
U0
US
S
HEST 945 002 C
a) normal load condition
b) E/F on T phase
Fig. 7.10
7.4.8.
Voltages in an ungrounded three-phase power system
Checking the auxiliary supply connections
Check that the supply is connected with the correct polarity. The d.c. supply voltage must lie within the permissible operating range of the power supply unit installed under all operating conditions (see Technical Data for the respective power supply unit). The power supply unit, type 316NG65 is protected by a fuse, type T 3.15 A.
7.4.9. Checking the duty of the tripping and signaling contacts
Check that the loads connected to all the contacts are within the specified ratings given in the 'Contact ratings' section of the data sheet.
7.4.10. Checking the opto-coupler inputs
Check the polarity and supply voltage of all opto-coupler inputs in relation to the ordering code (also given on the rating plate at the rear of the equipment).
7-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
7.5.
Commissioning
Before commencing commissioning, i.e. before the station is energized, carry out the checks given in Section 7.4.4.
7.5.1. Connecting the setting and control PC
Connect the serial interface of the PC to the interface connector on the front of the equipment. Details of the communication parameters and the connector pins are given in the following Sections.
7.5.1.1. Minimum PC requirements
The minimum requirements to be fulfilled by the HMI PC are:

7.5.1.2.
MS Windows 3.1x, Windows 95 or Windows NT4.0 operating system or higher 16 MByte RAM 1 floppy drive (3"; 1.44 MByte) and a hard disc with at least 12 MByte of free space 1 serial interface (RS-232C) 1 parallel interface (Centronics)
Serial interface parameters
The HMI initializes the serial interface and automatically sets the corresponding parameters.
7.5.1.3. PC connecting cable
The connecting cable between the serial interface connectors on the frontplate of the protection equipment (optical connector on the front of the local control and display unit) and on the PC (9-pin SUB-D plug) is an optical fiber cable with the order No. 1MRB380084-R1 (see data sheet).
7.5.2. Connecting the equipment to the auxiliary d.c. supply
The plug for the auxiliary supply is inserted upon delivery in the connector at the rear of the power supply unit. This plug must be fitted to the power supply cable as shown in Fig. 7.11.
7-20
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
+ POL - POL
ABB Switzerland Ltd
N.C.
N.C.
HEST 935 055 C
Fig. 7.11
7.5.3.
Auxiliary supply plug
Connecting the binary inputs and outputs
In the case of the narrow casing (N1), the binary inputs and outputs have to be wired to connectors C and D at the rear for the first unit and to connectors A and B for the second unit. In the case of the wide casing (N2), the binary inputs and outputs have to be wired to connectors G and H at the rear for the first unit, to connectors E and F for the second, to connectors C and D for the third unit and to connectors A and B for the fourth unit.
NOTICE: All external auxiliary relays or other inductances controlled by signals from the protection must be fitted with free-wheel diodes across their coils.
Instructions for wiring the terminals
Type and gauge of wire: The signal connections to the terminals are made with 1.5 mm2 stranded wire. Do not use crimped sleeves or other terminations; the flexible cores are protected by the design of the terminals. Terminating the wires: Do not strip more than 10 mm of insulation from the ends of the wires. Insert the stripped ends of the cores perpendicularly to the rear of the device into the terminals and secure with the nearby screw. As the channel for the wire in the terminals is slightly curved, twisting the wires slightly when inserting them is a help. Only insert one stranded wire into each terminal. Take care that no strands protrude that may cause arcing or shortcircuits.
7-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Bridging terminals: Where it is necessary to bridge terminals, do so at external terminals on the cubicle.
7.5.4.
Connecting VT and CT circuits Instructions for wiring the terminals
Type and gauge of wire: The VT and CT connections to the terminals are made with 2.5 mm2 stranded wire (e.g. H07V-K). The ends of the wires in this case must be fitted with crimped sleeves. VT and CT connections may be made alternatively by 4 mm2 solid wire. Terminating the wires: Insert the ends of the wires perpendicularly to the rear of the device into the terminals and secure them by tightening the screw next to each one. Take care that no strands protrude that may cause arcing or shortcircuits. Bridging terminals: Where it is necessary to bridge neighboring terminals, do so directly at the protective device using standard links (e.g. as manufactured by PHOENIX). The terminals are designed to accommodate these in addition to a 2.5 mm2 gauge lead. Alternatively, circuits have to be bridged at external terminals on the cubicle.
7.5.5.
Connecting optical fiber cables for the longitudinal differential protection
Optical fiber cables are connected using Type FC connectors.

NOTICE: Take care when inserting the connectors only to tighten the screw fitting after checking that the ridge on the plug is properly engaged in the groove of the base.
To exclude any risk of false tripping when connecting or disconnecting a cable in operation, only do so after the auxiliary supply to at least one of the terminal units has been switched off. In cases where the terminal units are connected via communications devices such as FOX-U, ensure that the communication in both directions is via the same route (equal lengths). Otherwise follow the instructions for the 'A/D Converter' in Section 3.4.1.
7-22
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.5.6.
Commissioning tests
For the protection scheme as a whole to operate correctly, it is not enough for just the protection equipment itself to be in order, the reliable operation of the other items of plant in the protection chain such as circuit-breakers, CTs and VTs (e.g. protection and metering core leads exchanged), station battery (earth fault), alarm and signaling circuits etc. The wiring between these items is equally important. The correct operation of the equipment itself is determined by the following tests:

secondary injection of every current and voltage input activating and deactivating every binary input (opto-coupler) energizing and de-energizing every auxiliary tripping and signaling relay checking the settings (printed by the HMI)
These tests confirm that none of the protection hardware is defective. The actual protection functions are contained in the software and are continuously monitored. They do not therefore need to be especially tested during commissioning. The following is a list of some of the tests and the faults they are intended to disclose.
Test Injection of rated value at all CT and VT inputs (e.g. using test set Type XS 92b)
Faults disclosed Hardware defective Wrong rated current Wrong rated voltage Wrong reference value Hardware defective Incorrect setting (not inverted) Incorrect assignment Hardware defect Incorrect assignment Hardware defect Incorrect assignment
Activation/deactivation of all binary inputs (opto-couplers)
Energization of all auxiliary tripping relays (using the test function) Energization/de-energization of all auxiliary signaling relays (using the test function)
A further useful facility is provided by the 'Display analog values' menu which enables the currents and voltages applied to the protection to be viewed. It can thus be seen whether the amplitude and phase of the currents and voltages are correct. The Appendix in Chapter 12 includes a test report.
7-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
7.6.
Maintenance
Because of the self-testing and monitoring features included, the equipment requires neither special maintenance nor periodic testing. Where testing is considered necessary, the following procedure is recommended:
Measure the currents and voltages in the secondaries of the main CTs and VTs and compare the results with the values displayed by the HMI. Test the external circuits using the test functions provided by the HMI (see Section 5.5.3.).
The life of the wet electrolytic condensers is about 20 years. This assumes a mean ambient temperature outside the casing of 40 C. An increase of 10 C shortens the life by half and a decrease of 10 C extends it by half.
7.6.1. 7.6.1.1. Fault-finding Stand-by LED on the frontplate
The following may be possible causes, should the green stand-by LED not light continuously, but be extinguished or flash although the auxiliary supply is switched on:
Stand-by LED extinguished
The auxiliary supply unit Type 316N65 is not properly inserted or is defective. Insert properly or replace the unit. The input/output unit Type 316DB6. is not properly inserted or defective. Insert properly or replace the unit. The logic processor Type 316VC61a or 316VC61b is defective. Replace either the main processor unit or the complete equipment.
Green stand-by LED flashes
The equipment does not have a valid set of parameter settings. The active set of parameters and the 'software key' are not the same. A hardware fault has been discovered by the diagnostic function of either the 316VC61a/316VC61b or 316EA62 unit.
To determine whether a set of settings has been downloaded to the equipment, connect it to a PC and start the HMI. Check via the menus 'Editor' and 'Edit function parameters' and 'Edit hardware functions' whether functions have settings and whether the hardware has been configured.
7-24
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
If the settings appear in order, check whether parameters or functions have been entered which are not permitted by the 'software key'. Should it appear that there is a disagreement with the 'software key', proceed as follows:

Connect the equipment to a PC and start the HMI. Download a slightly changed set of settings to the equipment. The HMI then compares the 'software key' with the programmed functions before it actually downloads the settings and reports and error if they do not agree (EPLD error).
7.6.1.2.
Human/machine interface
If communication between the protection equipment and the PC is not possible even if the stand-by LED is on, then check the serial interface connectors and connecting cable. If the connection appears to be in order, try to reboot the PC, and then restart the HMI. Should this also prove unsuccessful, restart the device either by selecting the menu item 'Warm start' in the RESET menu on the local control and display unit (see Section 5.10.8.6.) or by holding the reset button depressed until the stand-by LED (green) starts to flash (about 10 seconds). This is a software restart, which is equivalent to switching the auxiliary supply off and on.
NOTICE: In the event of a defect, send the diagnostic information obtained via 'List DiagInfo' and 'Get Hex Dump' together with the device settings to your local support center.
The following example is of a ROM defect in the main processor unit: List DiagInfo:
MODURES 316 Diagnosis Relay status : fatal error Main processor VC61 status : Fault detected ROM HW number : 000000B0A538 Software = 1995-08-11 11:38;00 Setting = 1992-01-03 09:44;05 Protection stop A/D processor EA6. status : not ready internal A/D status : no error FUPLA status: FUPLA not loaded Press any button to continue; press <ESC> to close.
7-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Get Hex Dump:

1000:0000 1000:0002 1000:0004 1000:0006 1000:0008 1000:000A 1000:000C 1000:000E 1000:0010 1000:0012 1000:0014 1000:0016 1000:0018 1000:001A 1000:001C 1000:001E 0004 Error code = stopped 0000 Code segment = 00D8H 06D9 Module name = RUNPROT_TEXT 00D8 Program counter = 06D9H 0004 0052 01F1 0178 EEPROM: 00000000000000101 0199 00A0 00E1 0730 0000 0000 0000 0005.
7.6.1.3.
Restarting
The detection of an error or defect by the self-testing and monitoring functions during normal operation initiates the following:

Processing by the protection functions is stopped and their operation blocked. The binary outputs are reset and further operation blocked. This includes resetting the 'Relay ready' signal, if it was activated. The stand-by signal (green LED on the frontplate) flashes.
Communication between the PC and the protection equipment remains intact, however, and provides facility for localizing the cause of the problem. Blocking of the protection is maintained until an attempt is made to restart it by pressing the reset button on the frontplate. Should restarting be successful, but the original defect still exists, the same sequence is repeated and the protection is blocked once again. Either the 316VC61a or 316VC61b unit or the complete equipment has to be replaced in the case of error messages concerning the main or logic processors. Should the diagnostic function report an error in the A/D processor (Type 316EA62) although none is fitted, the message can be ignored. If one is fitted, however, it must be replaced. An entry is made in the event list every time the protection is restarted.
7-26
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.7.
Software updates
Updating the software with the latest version and where necessary also the hardware can add new functions or new features to the device. The software version can be is given in the bottom right-hand corner of the HMI screen when it is operating on-line (the first number is the version of the HMI and the second number the version of the software in the equipment). The HMI is compatible with the equipment software when the first digit after the point is the same in both numbers. The equipment software can be updated without opening the equipment, because it is stored in a read/write memory (flash EPROMs). Generally the software must be updated by ABB personnel. Nevertheless, the procedure is described below so that it can be performed by correspondingly qualified personnel (PC experience essential) if necessary.
7.7.1. Settings
Make a backup copy of the settings using the HMI (menu items 'Enter function parameters' and 'Save in file'). Then close the HMI.
7.7.2. Deleting the settings and the program and downloading a new program
The following additional files which are necessary to update the firmware are in the HMI directory after installation:
spa316a.h26, lon316a.h26, vdew316a.h26: spa316b.h26, lon316b.h26, vdew316b.h26:
Software for the processor unit 316VC61a, depends on communications protocol. Software for the processor unit 316VC61b, depends on communications protocol.
The type of processor board can be determined using the HMI diagnostic function. Upon selecting 'Show diagnostic data', one of the lines displayed is 'HW No.', which in the case of 316VC61a includes the code '0434': HW-No.: xxxx/0434/xx or for 316VC61b the code '04Ax': HW-No.: xxxx/04Ax/xx In order to update click on the pull-down menu 'Options' and select 'Firmware download'.
7-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
As soon as the deletion process is completed, the new Firmware for the desired communication protocol can be selected in the pop-up window. The file '*.h26' will be automatically downloaded to the device, which takes about 5 minutes. Thereafter the new program is started automatically and the timestamp of the *.H26 file is stored in the devices.
7.7.3. Problems transferring the new software
Problems and errors can never be excluded when transferring and saving new software (e.g. supply failure during transfer). Should something of this kind occur, an attempt can be made to repeat the transfer by executing the batch file again. If the equipment responds neither to the call by the batch file nor the HMI, try to reinitialize the equipment by switching the auxiliary supply off and back on again and then repeat the transfer of the program file. Should this also prove unsuccessful, the following procedure must be executed to delete the contents of the program memory in the main processor unit: Devices with the main processor unit 316VC61a have to be opened and the main processor unit removed from them. Fit the two jumpers X601 and X602 and reinsert the main processor unit. Switch on the auxiliary supply and wait for thirty seconds. Switch off the auxiliary supply and withdraw the main processor again. The program is now deleted. Remove the two jumpers, plug the main processor in again, reassemble the equipment and repeat the program transfer procedure. Switch of the auxiliary supply to devices equipped with main processor 316VC61b and then insert the pin supplied into the socket below the SPA or VDEW6 communication interface. Switch on the auxiliary supply for about thirty seconds, switch it off again and withdraw the pin. This procedure deletes the program and the new program can be loaded after switching on the auxiliary supply again. Should the pin not be available, the same procedure can be used as described in the previous paragraph for the 316VC61a with the exception that the jumper marked 'TEST' has to be inserted instead of X601 and X602.
CAUTION ESD: This work should be carried out only by a suitably qualified personnel. Above all it is essential for the basic precautions concerning protection against electrostatic discharge be observed.
7-28
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 7.12
Main processor unit 316VC61a showing the jumpers X601 and X602 (derived from HESG 324 502)
7-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
7.8.
Replacing hardware units Qualifications CAUTION ESD: Hardware units may only be replaced by suitably qualified personnel. Above all it is essential for the basic precautions concerning protection against electrostatic discharge be observed.
It may be necessary to transfer existing settings from the relay or download new ones to the relay, procedures which assume familiarity with the HMI.
NOTICE: Incorrect handling of the devices and their component parts can cause damage (to the devices or the plant).
Example of damages:

false tripping of items of plant in operation destruction of main CTs and VTs etc.
The following are basic precautions which have to be taken to guard against electrostatic discharge: Before handling units, discharge the body by touching the station ground (cubicle).

Hold units only at the edges, do not touch contacts or components. Only store and transport units in or on the original packing.
Tools required
Relays can be opened at the rear. The backplates are secured either by Philips screws or Torx screws. Accordingly one of the following is required:
Philips screwdrivers No. 1 and No. 2
or
Torx screwdrivers No. 10 and No. 20.
Terminal screws are always of the normal slotted type. No other tools are required.
7-30
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Procedure
Follow the check list in the Appendix of Chapter 12. when replacing hardware units. The check list is primarily intended for replacing defective units by ones of the same type (same code). If a different relay configuration is desired or necessary, units may be have to be replaced. A change of software may also be involved. At least the codes in the relay and on the rating place will have to be corrected. Where problems arise, consult ABB Switzerland Ltd. In order to keep records of the PCBs installed up-to-date, the corresponding data should be forwarded to ABB Switzerland Ltd, when PCBs are changed (see Appendix).
NOTICE: When replacing a processor board Type 316VC61a, the positions of the jumpers must be checked in relation to Fig. 7.13.
HEST 045 007 V
HEST 045 008 V
Devices with LDU Fig. 7.13
Devices without LDU
Jumper positions on the processor board 316CV61a for devices with and without the local control and display unit (LDU)
7-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
NOTICE: If a processor board, type 316VC61b is replaced in a unit, check the jumpers according to Fig. 7.14. These jumpers are located between the two connectors.
Including LDU:
X2200 X2201 X2203 X2204 X2206 X2207 X2201 X2202 X2204 X2205 X2207 X2208
Excluding LDU:
Fig. 7.14
Jumper positions on the 316VC61b processor board for devices including and excluding a local control and display unit (LDU) on the front (derived from HESG 324 526)
7.9.
Testing the protection functions
The current data, settings and protection configuration can be selected, viewed and also printed, providing a printer is connected to the PC, via the HMI menu 'LIST RELAY SETTINGS' (see Section 5.4.8.).
7.9.1. MODURES test set XS92b
The REL316*4 protection functions can be tested using a normal protection relay test set, e.g. MODURES XS92b. This is most conveniently achieve in the plant by inserting the REL316*4 into the test socket case XX93 or 316 TSS 01 which is wired to the test set.
7-32
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
A detailed description of the test set XS92b is to be found in data sheet 1MDB520006-Ben and in the Instructions for Installation and Operation 1MRB520014-Uen.
7.9.1.1. Test socket case XX93 and test connector YX91-4
Upon inserting the test plug YX91-4 (see Appendices in Chapter 12):

the secondaries of the main CTs are short-circuited the protection equipment is isolated from the primary system CTs and VTs the tripping circuits are interrupted the protections current and voltage inputs are connected to the test set the opto-coupler input OC101 is interrupted which automatically switches the protection to the test mode the signaling relay S 102 is connected to the test set.
NOTICE: Every tripping relay has two contacts in parallel. Test plug YX91-4 can interrupt up to four DC tripping circuits. This must be taken into account when connecting the tripping circuits.
If necessary, the DC circuits, which have been interrupted, can be closed on the test set XS92b. For this purpose, twelve 2 mm diameter sockets marked 1 to 12 are provided on the front of the AC93 unit in the test set (AX91/92 in the case of XS92a). They are connected in parallel with test plug contacts B1 to B12 which correspond to sockets A1 to A12 on the test socket case XX93. The connections can thus be made again by inserting jumpers in sockets 1 to 12.
NOTICE: Take care when inserting jumpers into the 2 mm sockets, because they are directly connected to the DC battery supply for the tripping circuits!
The surface mounting, semi-flush mounting and 19" rack versions can all be tested using the test socket case XX93. The corresponding dimensioned drawings and the wiring diagram for the connections between the REL316*4 and the XX93 are included in the Appendices (Chapter 12). The connections to the test set Type XS92b are established using the cable and test connector YX91-4. This enables testing with four currents and three voltages. An ancillary test plug Type YX93 is optionally available for testing REL316*4 units equipped with a fifth CT
7-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
and a fourth or fifth VT The ancillary plug is inserted into the XX93 casing and connected by banana plugs and cables to the test set. The connections between the XS92b test set and the XX93 casing via the YX91-4 test plug are shown in the Appendices (Chapter 12).
7.9.1.2. Test socket casing 316 TSS 01, test plug RTXH 24 and test cable YX 91-7
The test socket casing 316 TSS 01 consists of a casing into which a block of RTXP 24 test sockets has been installed. It is suitable for testing the surface mounting, semi-flush mounting and 19" rack versions of the REL316*4. The corresponding dimensioned drawings and the wiring diagram for the connections between the REL316*4 and the 316 TSS 01 are included in the Appendices (Chapter 12). The connections to the test set Type XS92b are established using the test connector RTXH 24 and test cable YX91-7. This enables testing with four currents and three voltages. Banana plugs and cables are used for connecting REL316*4 units equipped with a fifth CT and a fourth VT to the test set. The connections between the XS92b test set and the RTXH24 test plug and the 316TSS01 casing via the YX91-7 cable are shown in the Appendices (Chapter 12). Inserting the test plug RTXH 24 and test cable YX91-7:

short-circuits the secondaries of the main CTs isolates the protection device from the primary system CTs and VTs interrupts two auxiliary DC supplies to the tripping relays connects the current and voltage inputs of the protection device to the test set activates the opto-coupler input OC101 to switch the protection device automatically to the test mode connects the signaling relay S102 to the test set.
The unused contacts A8-B8 and A9-B9 are available for either interrupting the two other DC circuits or for connecting a fifth VT (for the synchrocheck function).
7.9.1.3. Switching to the test mode
The protection switches automatically to the injection test mode when a logical '1' is applied to the binary I/P 'Inj. Test Enable' (normally optocoupler OC 101). In the test mode:

the distance protection signal 'Trip CB' is assigned to the output signal 'Inj. Test Output' all tripping and signaling relays (including 'Relay ready') are blocked excluding the signaling relay assigned to 'Inj. Test Output'
7-34
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
the distance protection function is waiting to receive control data from the test set XS92b for assigning signals to the output 'Inj. Test Output' the baud rate of the interface at the front is reduced to 9600 if not already at it, because the test set XS92b cannot communicate at a higher baud rate.
The binary input 'Inj. Test Enable' has to be inverted when using the test socket casing XX93.
7.9.2. Testing the distance protection function
General instructions for testing the distance protection function are given in Chapter 8 of publication 1MRB520014-Uen and for the use of test programs in publications CH-ES 86-11.52 E and CH-ES 86-11.54 E.
7.9.3. Checking the direction of measurement
The HMI menu for checking the direction of measurement is as follows: In the menu 'Monitor', select 'Measurement', 'Display Function Measurement', in window 'Select Function', select function ' (HV ) Distance '. The following is displayed in the sub-window 'Measurement' e.g. in this case in /phase: ---------- [Ref Length] ---------- + j ------ Z (RE) ---------- + j ------ Z (SE) ---------- + j ------ Z (TE) 50.00 50.00 50.00 + j 1.50 Z (RS) + j 1.50 Z (ST) + j 1.50 Z (TR)
This display indicates that the relay is measuring in the forwards direction, because the real component of the phase-to-phase impedance is positive, i.e. providing the scheme is wired according to the standard ABB diagram in the Appendices (Chapter 12.), the CTs are grounded on the line side and power flows from the busbars into the line. If the real component is negative, power is flowing from the line towards the busbars. The settings 'CT Neutral' on line and busbar sides and the binary input 'Chg Measurement Dir' on the distance protection function influence this display. The first four lines (fault distance and phase-to-ground loop impedances) do not influence the direction of measurement.
7-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The last three lines (phase-to-phase loop impedances) are displayed providing the load current exceeds
U V 0,5 Ph 0 XA where: XA Imin reactance in the tripping direction (see Section 3.5.2.2.2.) pick-up setting of the low-current enabling function and 0.5 Imin
If no impedances are displayed at the normal settings, increase the setting of the impedance parameter Xi (e.g. XBACK) until the first condition is fulfilled. A second possibility for checking the direction of measurement or for obtaining a 'second opinion' is to use the menu Monitor / Measurement / ' Display A/D Channels' (see Section 5.5.2.1.). This method works for load currents down to about 5 % of rating. Since this menu is not restricted to a single protection function, it is not dependent on the settings of the various functions (excepting the reference for analog channels) and especially not on the 'Bus side/ Line side' setting of the 'CT neutral' parameter and the binary input ' Chg Measurement Dir ' on the distance protection function.
Example:
For a purely resistive load with power flowing from the busbar into the line and the CT neutral on the line side, the angle between R phase voltage and current (or US-IS, UT-IT) is zero degrees. This method of checking the direction of measurement, however, does not disclose whether the setting of the parameter 'CT neutral' ('Bus side/Line side') is correct.
7-36
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.9.4. 7.9.4.1.
Testing the directional E/F function

(for ungrounded systems)
Injecting power system voltages and currents
Where it is not possible to test the protection by installing an E/F on the primary system, it can be tested using load current. The test circuits of Fig. 7.17 to Fig. 7.20 differ only in the wiring of the VTs. Version a) is used in all cases in which the terminals of all the secondaries are accessible, e.g. three single-phase VTs. Version b) is used in all other cases, but it must be noted that the residual voltage can only be measured, if the power system neutral has a defined potential.
DANGER: The following changes to the CT and VT circuits may only be carried out when no current is flowing, respectively when the voltage is switched off.
7.9.4.2.
Real power measurement a) Testing with the residual current of a Holmgren circuit (three CTs in parallel)
If a staged E/F cannot be installed on the system, the protection function can be tested using load current. To this end, the connections to the CTs and VTs must be temporarily changed (see Fig. 7.17a and b). No changes have to be made to the wiring of the protection.: Short-circuit the R and S phase CTs and disconnect them from the Holmgren circuit with the T phase such that only the T phase CT supplies current to the relay. Interrupt the VT secondary of the same phase (T phase in the above example) or isolate (by opening the corresponding singlephase isolator or removing the fuse) and short-circuit its primary.
Providing load energy is flowing into the line, the red LED on the front of the protection must now light up.
NOTICE: Be sure to re-establish the original circuit at the conclusion of the test!
b) Injecting residual current from a core-balance CT
In the case of a core-balance CT, the load currents flowing in the three phases cancel each other. Therefore for purposes of the test, an additional conductor supplied from an auxiliary AC source is passed through the core. No changes have to be made to the wiring of the protection.:
7-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Carry out the changes to the VT circuit as described under a) above (see Fig. 7.18a and b). The voltage between VT terminals e and n is used as the auxiliary AC source for the test current through the core-balance CT The test current circuit includes a switch and a series resistor. The series resistor limits the current to a permissible level for the VTs and the switch limits the duration of the load on the VTs to a minimum. It may be necessary to reduce the setting of the parameter (P-Setting) at low injection currents.
The value of the resistor is determined as follows:
10 UH Urel [] PK
where: UH Urel P K voltage across the VT secondary terminals n and e voltage across the I/P terminals of the protection pick-up power setting ratio of the core-balance CT
The 'Pick-up' and 'Trip' signals must operate, if the conductor passing through the CT is connected to terminal n on the busbar side and terminal e on the line side.
7.9.4.3. Apparent power measurement
The phase sequence of the power system must be R-S-T for this test.
a) Testing with the residual current of a Holmgren circuit (three CTs in parallel)
If a staged E/F cannot be installed on the system, the protection function can be tested using load current. To this end, the connections to the CTs and VTs must be temporarily changed (see Fig. 7.19a and b). No changes have to be made to the wiring of the protection.: Short-circuit the R and S phase CTs and disconnect them from the Holmgren circuit with the T phase such that only the T phase CT supplies current to the relay. Interrupt the secondary circuit of the R phase VT or isolate and short-circuit its primary.
Providing load energy is flowing into the line, the signals 'Pick-up' and 'Trip' must operate.
7-38
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
b) Injecting residual current from a core-balance CT
For purposes of the test, an additional conductor supplied from an auxiliary AC source is passed through the core. No changes have to be made to the wiring of the protection (see Fig. 7.20a and b): Interrupt the secondary circuit of the T phase VT or isolate and short-circuit its primary. The phase-to-phase voltage of the two other phases (R and S) is used as the auxiliary AC source for the test current through the core-balance CT The test current circuit includes a switch and a series resistor. The series resistor limits the current to a permissible level for the VTs and the switch limits the duration of the load on the VTs to a minimum. It may be necessary to reduce the setting of the parameter (P set) at low injection currents.
The value of the resistor is determined as follows:
10 UH Urel [] PK
voltage across the VT secondary terminals n and e voltage across the I/P terminals of the protection pick-up power setting ratio of the core-balance CT
where: UH Urel P K
The 'Pick-up' and 'Trip' signals must operate, if the conductor passing through the CT is connected to terminal v on the busbar side and terminal u on the line side.
7.9.4.4. Testing using a test set
The MODURES test set XS92b injects the corresponding variable AC signals and enables the accuracy of the pick-up and time delay settings to be determined.
7-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd a) Three single-phase VTs or a five-limb threephase VT: Residual voltage across the broken delta secondary circuit (also applies to a normal three-phase VT with an interposing Y/delta connected VTs)
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
R S T
U UR V US W
UR e
US U0 n
broken delta connection U0 = UR + US
w
HEST 945017 C
metering windings where fitted
Legend: R, S, T = U, V, W = u, v, w = n, e =
three-phase primary system VT primary terminals VT metering terminals broken delta terminals for E/F protection
R S T
R S T
U V W
u e
v U0 n
e U0
HEST 945018 FL
n
HEST 945019 FL
b) Five-limb VT
c) Three-phase VT plus star-point VT (must have delta-connected balanc ing windings)
Fig. 7.15
Methods of measuring residual voltage
7-40
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
R
K K k k
ABB Switzerland Ltd

RST
S
K
k
k
l L L
l L
HEST 945020 FL
HEST 945021 FL
a) Holmgren CT connection
b) Core-balance CT
R
K
S
K
T
K
k L L L
HEST 945022 FL
c) Special CT arrangement for sensitive E/F protection
Fig. 7.16
Methods of measuring residual current
7-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
R S T
6 4
R S T
6 4
1 3
1 3
K
2
K k l k l L
K k l L
HEST 945023 FL 5
K
2
K k l k l L
K k l L
HEST 945024 FL 5
a) Changes to VT secondary circuit for testing
b) Changes to VT primary circuit for testing CTs (2): T phase separated from R and S phases and supplying protection R and S phases short-circuited VTs (3): T phase primary fuse removed or isolator opened (4) and winding short-circuited
CTs (2): T phase separated from R and S phases and supplying protection R and S phases short-circuited VTs (3): T phase removed from broken delta
The phases used must by as shown or cyclically rotated! Legend: 1 circuit-breaker 2 CTs 3 VTs 4 fuse 5 REL316*4 6 load direction
Fig. 7.17
Test circuit (for = 0) with Holmgren connected CTs
7-42
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
R S T
8 4
R S T
8 4
1 3
1 3
k l
k I
HEST 945025 FL
HEST 945026 FL
b) Changes to VT primary circuit for testing CTs (2): Test current passed through corebalance CT with VT terminal e (3) supplying the line side and n the busbar side VTs (3): T phase primary fuse removed or isolator opened (4) and winding short-circuited
CTs (2): Test current passed through core-balance CT with VT terminal e (3) supplying the line side and n the busbar side
VTs (3): T phase removed from broken delta
The phases used must by as shown or cyclically rotated! Legend: 1 circuit-breaker 2 CTs 3 VTs 4 fuse 5 REL316*4 6 test switch 7 test resistor (see b) in Section 7.9.4.2. for calculation) 8 load direction
Fig. 7.18
Test circuit (for = 0) with core-balance CT
7-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
R S T
6 4
R S T
6 4
1 3
1 3
K
2
K k l k l L
K k l L
HEST 945027 FL 5 2
K k l L
K k l L
K k l L
HEST 945028 FL 5
b) Changes to VT primary circuit for testing CTs (2): T phase separated from R and S phases and supplying protection R and S phases short-circuited VTs (3): R phase primary fuse removed or isolator opened (4) and winding short-circuited
CTs (2): T phase separated from R and S phases and supplying protection R and S phases short-circuited VTs (3): R phase removed from broken delta
The phases used must by as shown or cyclically rotated! Legend: 1 circuit-breaker 2 CTs 3 VTs 4 fuse 5 REL316*4 6 load direction
Fig. 7.19
Test circuit (for = -90 capacitive) with Holmgren connected CTs
7-44
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
R S T
8 4
R S T
8 4
1 3
1 3
u
6 7
w
6 7
k l
k l
HEST 945029 FL
HEST 945030 FL
b) Changes to VT primary circuit for testing CTs (2): Test current passed through corebalance CT with VT terminal e (3) supplying the line side and u the busbar side VTs (3): T phase primary fuse removed or isolator opened (4) and winding short-circuited
CTs (2): Test current passed through core-balance CT with VT terminal e (3) supplying the line side and u the busbar side
VTs (3): T phase removed from broken delta
The phases used must by as shown or cyclically rotated! Legend: 1 circuit-breaker 2 CTs 3 VTs 4 fuse 5 REL316*4 6 test switch 7 test resistor (see b) in Section 7.9.4.3. for calculation) 8 load direction
Fig. 7.20
Test circuit (for = -90 capacitive) with core-balance CT
7-45
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 2004
8.
TECHNICAL DATA
Data Sheet REC316*4 .............................................. 1MRK511016-Ben Data Sheet REG316*4.............................................. 1MRK502004-Ben Data Sheet REX010 / REX011 ................................. 1MRB520123-Ben Data Sheet REL316*4............................................... 1MRK506013-Ben Data Sheet RET316*4 .............................................. 1MRK504007-Ben CT requirements for the REL316*4 distance protection function ...................................... CH-ES 45-12.30 E CT requirements for the longitudinal differential protection of lines not having a transformer in the protection zone .................................... ESP 9.201 E Protection CT core requirements for transformer protection (also applies to transformer protection by a longitudinal differential function) ....................... CH-ES 30-32.10 E CT requirements for the differential protection of generators ............................................ CH-ES 30-32.20 E
8-1
Numerical Control and Protection Unit
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 1 Issued: May 2003 Changed since: February 2002 Data subject to change without notice
Features
Application MV and HV systems for power transmission and distribution and for the power requirements of industrial plants and power stations Air or gas insulated switchgear Decentral installation in switch bay or kiosk New installations, refurbishment of existing plants A large number of standard functions for control, metering, monitoring, automation and protection Customer-specific solutions. Control functions Control of circuit breakers, isolators and grounding devices State acquisition with plausibility check Command output with double command Runtime supervision Bay-oriented interlocking Stationwide interlocking Simple adaption through graphical engineering tool CAP316.
Protection functions Definite time over-/undervoltage protection High-set over-/undervoltage protection Definite time overcurrent protection with inrush detection High-set overcurrent protection Inverse time overcurrent protection with four characteristics according to B.S. 142 Directional inverse and definite time overcurrent protection Thermal overload protection Frequency protection Rate-of-change of frequency The product ranges entire function library of the RE.316*4 is available for customerspecific solutions Four independent, user-selectable setting groups Multi-activation facility of the available functions Breaker-failure protection. Automation Single and/or three-phase multi-shot autoreclosure
ABB Switzerland Ltd Utility Automation Systems
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 2
Features (contd)
Synchrocheck function High-speed busbar transfer Load shedding. Metering Metering function for the measurement of voltage, current, frequency and active and reactive power. Process supervision Sequential recorder having a resolution of 1 ms Defluttering of binary inputs Disturbance recording of freely selectable analog inputs, such as vts, cts and internal results of protection functions as well as binary information. Functions for programming by the user Logic (AND, OR and S/R flip-flop) Timer/integrator. Application-specific functions Customizing of control functions with the graphical engineering tool CAP316.
Self-supervision Continuous self-supervision and diagnosis Test equipment for quantitative testing available Plausibility check of the three-phase current and voltage inputs. Operational control Multi-lingual menu-based operator program CAP2/316 based on Windows Provision for storing four independent sets of settings in REC316*4. Serial interfaces Frontplate interface for local connection of a personal computer Back plane interface for remote communication with a station control system: LON, IEC60870-5-103, MVB (part of IEC 61375), SPA Back plane interface for process bus: MVB (part of IEC 61375). Installation REC316*4 is suitable for semi-flush or surface mounting or installation in a rack.
Application
The numerical control unit REC316*4 is a compact multi-functional unit. It is designed for the control, metering, monitoring, automation and protection functions of MV and HV transmission systems. Simply programmable standard functions from a comprehensive software library of the RE.216/316*4 product range and a powerful and fast function block language make the unit a user-friendly and extremely flexible terminal. The control of switching objects is performed with the highest possible supervision and safety. A large selection of protection functions reduces the number of necessary devices in HV bays through the combination of control and back-up protection functions in one unit. The integrated autoreclosure function can be utilized by both main protection devices.
The closure of the circuit breaker can be supervised by a synchrocheck function. Motor busbars can be switched on with phase synchronization by a fast switch-over function. Apart from the operating asset protection in cooperation with function block engineered modules using the CAP316 tool, the multyconfigurable frequency function allows the generation of intelligent load shedding automatics. Automatic network restoration is enabled by integrating the REC316*4 into a station control system. For metering, the quantities current, voltage, real power, apparent power and frequency are available. In addition the transmission of energy counting impulses to the control system is possible. The recording of disturbances, switching operations and analog results of protection functions is performed by the integrated disturbance recorder.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 3
Device design
The REC316*4 belongs to the generation of fully numerical control and protection terminals, i.e. analog to digital conversion of the input variables takes place immediately after the input transformers and all further processing of the resulting numerical signals is performed by microprocessors and controlled by programs. Resulting numerical processing ensures consistent ACCURACY and SENSITIVITY throughout its operational life. REC316*4 is noted for its process interface, satisfying the highest EMC requirements, as well as for the standardized serial interfaces for integration into a control system. This enables an information exchange both in a vertical direction with systems of higher order and in a horizontal direction between various bay control units. Because of its compact design, the very few hardware units it needs, its modular software and the integrated continuous self-diagnostic and supervision functions, REC316*4 ideally
fulfils the users expectations of a modern control and protection terminal at a costeffective price. The AVAILABILITY of a device, i.e. the ratio between its mean time in service without failure and the total life, is most certainly its most important characteristic. As a consequence of the continuous supervision of its functions, this quotient in the case of REC316*4 is typically always close to 1. The menu-based HMI (Human Machine Interface) and the terminals small size makes the tasks of connection, configuration and setting simple. A maximum of FLEXIBILITY, i.e. the ability to adapt the protection for application in a particular power system or to coordinate with, or replace units in an existing control and protection scheme, is provided in REC316*4 by the extensive library of standard functions and the powerful function block engineering. The free assignment of input and output signals is enabled via the HMI. times per period and converted to digital signals. The analog/digital conversion is performed by a 16 Bit converter. A DSP carries out part of the digital filtering and makes sure that the data for the protection algorithms are available in the memory to the main processor. The processor core essentially comprises the main microprocessor for the protection algorithms and dual-ported memories (DPMs) for communication between the A/D converters and the main processor. The main processor performs the protection algorithms and controls the local HMI and the interfaces to the station control system. Binary signals from the main processor are relayed to the corresponding inputs of the I/O unit and thus control the auxiliary output relays and the light emitting diode (LED) signals. The main processor unit is equipped with an RS232C serial interface via which among other things the protection settings are made, events are read and the data from the disturbance recorder memory are transferred to a local or remote PC. On this main processor unit there are two PCC slots and one RS232C interface. These serial interfaces provide remote communica-
Hardware
The hardware concept for the REC316*4 numerical control unit comprises four different plug-in units, a connecting mother PCB and housing (Fig. 1): analog input unit central processing unit 1 to 4 binary input/output units power supply unit connecting mother PCB housing with connection terminals. In the analog input unit an input transformer provides the electrical and static isolation between the analog input variables and the internal electronic circuits and adjusts the signals to a suitable level for processing. The input transformer unit can accommodate a maximum of nine input transformers (voltage-, protection current- or measuring transformer). Every analog variable is passed through a first order R/C low-pass filter on the main CPU unit to eliminate what is referred to as the aliasing effect and to suppress HF interferences (Fig. 2). They are then sampled 12
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 4
Hardware (contd)
Fibre optical connections for line differential protection and binary signal transmission
DC
+5V
RX
Tx
A/D DSP
A/D DSP
Trip outputs Trip Trip Outputs I/O Trip Signal Outputs I /Ports O Sign. Outputs outputsI / O Sign. Outputs/ Ports I Sign.BinaryO Outputs Ports Ports Outputs Bin. inputs Bin. Inputs Bin. Inputs Inputs FLASH EPROM
DPM
CPU 486
SW-Key
+15V -15V +24V
Power supply
Remote I/O Remote I/OTrip Outputs Trip Remote I/O Sign. Outputs Trip Outputs Sign. outputs Bin. Outputs Signal Inputs Bin. outputs Inputs Binary inputs
DC
PCC
a
MVB Process bus
Tranceiver
RAM
P C M C I A
(MVB)
PCC
c
LON MVB
LED's
RS 232
Serial controller
SCS SMS
RS 232
Serial controller
SPA / IEC870-5-103
HMI
Fig. 1
Hardware platform overview
tion to the station monitoring system (SMS) and station control system (SCS) as well as to the remote I/Os. REC316*4 can have one to four binary I/O units each. These units are available in three versions: a) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty contacts each, 8 optocoupler inputs and 6 signalling relays Type 316DB61 b) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty contacts each, 4 optocoupler inputs and 10 signalling relays Type 316DB62
c) 14 optocoupler inputs and 8 signalling relays Type 316DB63. When ordering REC316*4 with more than 2 I/O units, N2 casing must be selected. According to whether one or two I/O units are fitted, there are either 8 LEDs or 16 LEDs visible on the front of the terminal.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 5
Software
Both analog and binary input signals are conditioned before being processed by the main processor. As described under hardware above, the analog signals pass through the sequence input transformers, shunt, low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter), multiplexer and A/D converter stages and DSP. In their digital form, they are then separated by numerical filters into real and apparent components
before being applied to the main processor. Binary signals from the optocoupler inputs go straight to the main processor. The actual processing of the signals in relation to the protection algorithms and logic then takes place.
Fig. 2
Data Flow
Graphical engineering tool
The graphical programming language used in the tool CAP316 makes CAP316 a powerful and user-friendly engineering tool for the engineering of the control and protection units RE.216/316*4. It is similar to IEC 1131. CAP316 permits the function blocks representing the application to be directly translated into an application program (FUPLA) capable of running on the processors of the control and protection units RE.316*4. The program packet contains an extensive library of function blocks. Up to 8 projects (FUPLAs created with CAP316) are able to run simultaneously on a RE.316*4.
List of functions Binary functions: AND ASSB B23 B24 BINEXTIN
BINEXOUT COUNTX CNT CNTD OR RSFF SKIP TFF TMOC TMOCS, TMOCL TMOI TMOIS, TMOIL TOFF TOFFS, TOFFL TON TONS, TONL XOR Analog functions: ABS ADD
External binary output Shift register Counter Downwards counter OR gate RS flip-flop Skip segment T flip-flop with reset Monostable constant Monostable constant short, long Monostable constant with interrupt Monostable constant with interrupt short, long Off delay Off delay short, long On delay On delay short, long Exclusive OR gate
AND gate Assign binary 2-out-of-3 selector 2-out-of-4 selector External binary input
Absolute value Adder/subtracter
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 6
Graphical engineering tool (contd)
ADDL ADMUL CNVIL CNVLBCD CNVLI CNVLP CNVPL DIV DIVL FCTL FCTP FILT INTS, INTL KMUL LIM Example:
Long integer adder/subtracter Adder/multiplier Integer to long integer converter Long integer to BC converter Long integer to integer converter Long integer to percent converter Percentage to long integer converter Divider Long integer divider Linear function Polynomial function Filter Integrator Factor multiplier Limiter
LOADS MAX MIN MUL MULL NEGP PACW PDTS, PDTL PT1S, PT1L SQRT SWIP THRLL THRUL TMUL UPACW
Load shedding function Maximum value detector Minimum value detector Multiplier Long integer multiplier Percent negator Pack BINARY signals into INTEGER Differentiator Delayed approximation Square root Percent switch Lower limit threshold Upper limit threshold Time multiplier Unpack BINARY signals from an INTEGER
.
B_DRIVE CL OP
CL OP POK
4 & 5 &
Q0_CL Q0_OP Q0_Q0_POK Q0_Q0_CLOSED Q0_Q0_OPEN Q0_GUIDE_ON Q0_GUIDE_OFF Q0_GUIDE_EXE Q0_EXE Q0_GOON_Q0 Q0_GOOFF_Q0 Q0_Q0_SYST DPMOUT_Q0_SEL_REL
DPMIN_Q0_CLOSED DPMIN_Q0_OPEN
SEL RQON RQOF
1 &
Q0_SEL_DRIVE_Q0 GEN_REQUEST_ON GEN_REQUES_ON GEN_SYNC Q1_Q1_OPEN Q2_Q2_OPEN GEN_REQUEST_EXE
2 >=1
SYNC RQEX 30 1
GON GOF GEX EXE GOON GOOF SYST SREL
T:SY T:RT ALSY BKS KDOF
6 =1
Q0_SUP_SEL_REL_Q0 Q0_ALSY Q0_BLOCK_SELECT Q0_KDO_FAIL
Part of a FUPLA application (Q0: Control and interlocking logic for three objects Q0, Q1, Q2. B_DRIVE is a macro composed of binary function blocks)
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 7
Functions
The entire function library of the RE.316*4 product range is available in the REC316*4. A selection from this library for the standard versions of the REC316*4 is released via a key. Customer-specific keys and also input transformer configurations may be made on request. The available standard functions are
described below. Within the constraints of the available processing capacity, the same function may be included several times. Further user functions, such as the control of switching objects, are realized by the combination of FUPLA modules and standard functions.
Function library
I> 51
I>
I>> 50
I>U< 51-27
U 60
F<> 81 CTRL 0->I 79 CTRL I TH 49

SYNC
I 87G
I 87T
I2 46
I TH 49
51
U> 59
U< 27
F<> 81
U/f 24
I> 51
Z< 21 U0> 64S
X< 40
Ucos 78
P<32
25 CTRL
Logics
Timer Counter
CPU capacity 250%
e.g. Z<3ph requires 17%
Control of switching objects
The REC316*4 receives the control commands from the station control system or from a local oparator control panel via fibre optic links. In both cases a three-step command input is adhered to for safety reasons. The user is informed about the actual switching state at any time, because the state of the switching object is registered via double signalling with plausibility check. Command output is made with a double command, interlocked against all other switching objects in order to avoid undesired or simultaneous switching operations due to short-circuits or operator errors. Subsequent to the command output the individually adjustable run time supervision is started. The bay-oriented interlocking makes sure that only permissible switching operations within a particular bay can be executed. For stationwide interlocking, interlocking signals are exchanged between the individual bay control units. The control functions are created by the graphical function block engineering tool CAP316 and can easily be matched to the individual process requirements.
Autoreclosure
The autoreclosure function included in REC316*4 permits up to four three-phase reclosure cycles to be carried out, each with an independently adjustable dead time for fast and slow autoreclosure. Where single-phase reclosure is being applied, the first reclosure is the single-phase one and the others are three-phase. The function may be actuated by internal protection functions or external protection relays via optocoupler inputs.
Synchrocheck
The synchrocheck function determines the difference between the amplitudes, phaseangles and frequencies of two voltage vectors. Checks are also included to detect a dead line or busbar.
High-speed busbar transfer
This function allows the fast synchronized transfer of motor busbars between the main and standby supply. Automatic transfer at phase coincidence of the voltages as well as slow transfer (low voltage, max. time) and manual transfer are included.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 8
Functions (contd)
Thermal overload
The thermal overload function can be used for either cables or transformers. It is equipped with alarm and tripping stages and has a wide setting range for adjusting the time constant to match that of the protected unit.
Instantaneous overvoltage function (instantaneous tripping)
Inverse time ground fault overcurrent function
The frequency-dependent voltage function can be applied either as maximum or minimum function for instantaneous tripping or with settable delay. Single or three-phase measurement with maximum value detection for multi-phase functions. The voltage function is supplementary to the voltage indicator used for interlocking of the feeder earthing switch. Adjustable lower limiting frequency.
Definite time voltage function
The inverse time ground fault overcurrent function monitors the neutral current of the system which is either measured via a neutral current input transformer or derived internally in the terminal from the three-phase currents. Four different characteristics according to British Standard 142 designated normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and long time inverse but with an extended setting range are provided.
Directional overcurrent protection
The voltage function can be set to operate on overvoltage or undervoltage with a definite time delay. Either single or three-phase measurements can be performed.
Instantaneous overcurrent function (instantaneous tripping)
The directional overcurrent protection function is available either with inverse time or definite time overcurrent characteristic. This function comprises a voltage memory for faults close to the relay location. The function response after the memory time has elapsed can be selected (trip or block).
Frequency function
The frequency-dependent current function can be applied either as maximum or minimum function for instantaneous tripping or with settable delay. Single or three-phase measurement with maximum value detection for multi-phase functions. Adjustable lower limiting frequency.
Definite time current function
The frequency function is based on the measurement of one voltage. This function is able to be configured as maximum or minimum function and is applied as protection function and for load shedding. By multiple configuration of this function almost any number of stages can be realized.
Rate-of-change of frequency
The current function can be set to operate on overcurrent or undercurrent with a definite time delay. Either single or three-phase measurements can be performed.
Inverse time-overcurrent function
This function offers alternatively an enabling by absolute frequency. It contains an undervoltage blocking facility. Repeated configuration of this function ensures a multi-step setup.
Measuring
The operating time of the inverse time-overcurrent function reduces as the fault current increases and it can therefore achieve shorter operating times for fault locations closer to the source. Four different characteristics according to British Standard 142 designated normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and long time inverse with an extended setting range are provided. The function can be configured for single-phase measurement or a combined three-phase measurement with detection of the highest phase current.
Both measuring functions measure the singleor three-phase rms values of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power for display on the local HMI or transfer to the station control system. A choice can be made bet-ween phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase voltages.
Ancillary functions
Ancillary functions such as a logic and a delay/integrator enable the user to create logical combinations of signals and pick-up and reset delays.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 9
A runtime supervision feature enables checking the opening and closing of all kinds of breakers (circuit-breakers, isolators, ground switches...). Failure of a breaker to open or close within an adjustable time results in the creation of a corresponding signal for further processing.
Plausibility check
The software can be used either ON-LINE or OFF-LINE and furthermore contains a DEMO mode.
The current and voltage plausibility functions facilitate the detection of system asymmetries, e.g. in the secondary circuits of CTs and VTs. The internal sum of phasors can be compared with an external summation when quantities are applied to an input.
Sequence-of-events recorder
The event recorder function provides capacity for up to 256 binary signals including time marker with a resolution in the order of milliseconds. It is also possible to activate flutter recognition in order to avoid filling up the memory by continuously recurring signal response (flutter).
For each protection function a tripping characteristic is displayed. Apart from the basic understanding of the protection functions, the graphical display of these functions also makes the setting of the parameters clearer.
The disturbance recorder monitors up to 9 analog inputs, 16 binary inputs and internal results of protection functions. The capacity for recording disturbances depends on the duration of a disturbance as determined by its pre-disturbance history and the duration of the disturbance itself. The total recording time is approximately 5 s.
Other protection functions
See data sheets of REL316*4, RET316*4 and REG316*4.

Human machine interface (HMI) - CAP2/316
For local communication with REC316*4, there is the setting software CAP2/316 available which is based on Windows. This software runs under the following operating systems: Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000. This optimal programming tool is available for engineering, testing, commissioning and operation.
Any desired protection function can be selected from the software library of all released protection functions by means of the dragand-drop feature.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 10
Functions (contd)
Built-in HMI
The front HMI unit serves primarily for the signalling of actual events, measurands and diagnostic data. Settings are not displayed. Features: Measurand display - Amplitude, angle, frequency of analog channels - Functional measurands - Binary signals Event list Operating instructions Disturbance recorder information Diagnostic information Acknowledgment functions - Resetting LEDs - Resetting latched outputs - Event erasing - Warmstart.
Remote communication
Analog signals can also be connected to the system via the 500AXM11 from the RIO580 family: DC current 4...20 mA 0...20 mA -20...20 mA 0...10 V -10...10 V Pt100, Pt250, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni250, Ni1000.
DC voltage Temp. sensor
Self-diagnosis and supervision
REC316*4 is able to communicate with a station monitoring system (SMS) or a station control system (SCS) via an optical fibre link. The corresponding serial interface permits events, measurements, disturbance recorder data and protection settings to be read as well as control commands and demand value parameters to be received and sets of parameter settings to be switched. Using the LON bus permits in addition the exchange of binary information between the individual bay controllers, e.g. signals for station interlocking.
Remote in- and outputs (RIO580)
RE.316*4s self-diagnosis and supervision functions ensure maximum availability not only of the protection device itself, but also of the power system it is protecting. Hardware failures are immediately signalled by an alarm contact and the communication supervision of the control system. In particular, the external and internal auxiliary supplies are continuously supervised. The correct function and tolerance of the A/D converter are tested by cyclically converting two reference voltages. Special algorithms regularly check the processors memories (background functions). A watchdog supervises the execution of the programs. The program execution in the processor itself is monitored by a watchdog function. An important advantage of the extensive selfdiagnosis and supervision functions is that periodic routine maintenance and testing are reduced.
Supporting software
The operator program facilitates configuration and setting of the protection, listing parameters, reading events and listing the various internal diagnostic data. The evaluation programs REVAL and E_wineve(Windows NT/Windows 2000) are available for viewing and evaluating the disturbances stored by the disturbance recorder. The program XSCON (MS Windows) is available for conversion of the RE.316*4s disturbance recorder data to ABBs test set XS92b format. This enables reproduction of electrical quantities recorded during the disturbance.
Using the process bus type MVB remote inand output units 500RIO11 can be connected to the RE.316*4 terminals. The in- and output channels can be extended to a large number by using RIO580 remote input/output system. Installing 500RIO11 I/O units close to the process reduces the wiring dramatically, since they are accessible via fibre optic link from the RE.316*4 terminals.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 11
Example of an application
Q1 Q2
REC316*4
Control
SEQ 1 AND TON
FUPLA
RSFF
Q51 Q0
SEQ 2 AND
CNT
Q53
Q9
Monitoring
UIfPQ
Protection
87T Id 49 ITH
51N Io
24 U/f
21 Z<
Example for control and protection of a transformer bay
Control
Protection
Control of circuit breakers, isolators and grounding devices Bay-oriented interlocking Station interlocking Run time supervision Process supervision Measuring.
Transformer differential Thermal protection Overexcitation Distance protection etc.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 12
Technical data Hardware
Table 1: Analog input variables

Number of inputs according to version, max. 9 analog inputs (voltages and currents, 4 mm2 terminals) Rated frequency fN Rated current IN Thermal rating of current circuit continuous for 10 s for 1 s dynamic (half period) Rated voltage UN Thermal rating of voltage circuit continuous during 10 s Burden per phase current inputs at IN = 1 A at IN = 5 A voltage inputs at UN VT fuse characteristic 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A, 2 A or 5 A 4 x IN 30 x IN 100 x IN 250 x IN (peak) 100 V or 200 V 1.3 x UN 2 x UN
<0.1 VA <0.3 VA <0.25 VA Z acc. to DIN/VDE 0660 or equivalent
Table 2: Contact data

Tripping relays No. of contacts Max. operating voltage Continuous rating Make and carry for 0.5 s Surge for 30 ms Making power at 110 V DC Breaking capacity for L/R = 40 ms Breaking current with 1 contact at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC Breaking current with 2 contacts in series at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC Signalling contacts No. of contacts 6, 10 or 8 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63), 1 contact per sig. relay with 1.5 mm2 terminals Each interface unit equipped with 1 C/O contact and the all other N/O contacts 250 V AC or V DC 5A 15 A 100 A 550 W 0.5 A 0.1 A 0.04 A 2 relays per I/O unit 316DB61 or 316DB62 with 2 N/O contacts each. 1.5 mm2 terminals 300 V AC or V DC 5A 30 A 250 A 3300 W
1.5 A 0.3 A 0.1 A 5A 1A 0.3 A
Max. operating voltage Continuous rating Make and carry for 0.5 s Surge for 30 ms Making power at 110 V DC Breaking current for L/R = 40 ms at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC
The user can assign tripping and signalling contacts to protection functions
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 13
Table 3: Optocoupler inputs

No. of optocouplers Input voltage Threshold voltage Max. input current Operating time 8, 4 or 14 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63) 18 to 36 V DC/ 36 to 75 V DC / 82 to 312 V DC / 175 to 312 V DC 10 to 17 V DC / 20 to 34 V DC / 40 to 65 V DC / 140 to 175 V DC <12 mA 1 ms
The user can assign the inputs to protection functions.
Table 4: Light-emitting diodes

Choice of display modes: Accumulates each new disturbance Latching with reset at next pick-up Latching only if protection trips with reset at next pick-up Signalling without latching 1 green (standby) 1 red (trip) 6 or 14 yellow (all other signals) The user can assign the red and yellow LEDs to functions.
Table 5: Configuration and settings

Local via the communication interface on the front port connector using an IBM-compatible PC with Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000. The operator program can also be operated by remote control via a modem. Operator program in English or German
Table 6: Remote communication

RS232C interface Data transfer rate Protocol Electrical/optical converter (optional) PCC interface Number PCC (optional) Interbay bus protocol Process bus protocol (interbay and process bus can be used concurrently) LON bus Data transfer rate MVB bus Data transfer rate Event memory Capacity Time marker resolution Time deviation without remote synchronizing Engineering interface PCC with redundant fibre-optical port, ST connectors 1.5 Mbit/s 256 events 1 ms <10 s per day integrated software interface for signal engineering with SigTOOL 9 pin Sub-D female 9600 Bit/s SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 316BM61b 2 plug-in sockets for type III cards LON or MVB (part of IEC 61375) MVB (part of IEC 61375) PCC with fibre-optical port, ST connectors 1.25 MBit/s
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 14
Technical data Hardware (contd)
Table 7: Auxiliary supply

Supply voltage Voltage ranges Voltage interruption bridging time Fuse rating Load on station battery at normal operation (1 relay energized) during a fault (all relays energized) with 1 I/O unit with 2 I/O units with 3 I/O units with 4 I/O units Additional load of the options line differential protection SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or LON interface MVB interface Buffer time of the event list and fault recorder data at loss of auxiliary supply 36 to 312 V DC >50 ms 4 A <20 W
<22 W <27 W <32 W <37 W 7.5 W 1.5 W 2.5 W >2 days (typ. 1 month)
Table 8: General data

Temperature range operation storage Humidity Seismic test Leakage resistance Insulation test -10 C to +55 C -40 C to +85 C 93%, 40 C, 4 days 5 g, 30 s, 1 to 33 Hz (1 octave/min) >100 M, 500 V DC 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min 1 kV across open contacts 5 kV, 1.2/50 s 1.0/2.5 kV, Cl. 3; 1MHz, 400 Hz rep.freq. 2/4 kV, Cl. 4 6/8 kV (10 shots), Cl. 3 EN 60255-6 (1994), IEC 60255-6 (1988) IEC 60068-2-3 (1969) IEC 60255-21-3 (1995), IEEE 344 (1987) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000), EN 60950 (1995) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000) * IEC 60255-22-1 (1988), ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (1989) EN 61000-4-4 (1995), IEC 61000-4-4 (1995) EN 61000-4-2 (1996), IEC 61000-4-2 (2001) EN 61000-4-8 (1993), IEC 61000-4-8 (1993) EN 61000-4-6 (1996) EN 61000-4-6 (1996), EN 61000-4-3 (1996), IEC 61000-4-3 (1996), ENV 50204 (1995) EN 61000-6-2 (2001), EN 55011 (1998), CISPR 11 (1990)
Surge voltage test 1 MHz burst disturbance test
Fast transient test Electrostatic discharge test (ESD) Immunity to magnetic interference at power system frequencies Radio frequency interference test (RFI)
300 A/m; 1000 A/m; 50/60 Hz 0.15-80 MHz, 80% amplitude modulated 10 V, Cl. 3 80-1000 MHz, 80% amplitude modulated 10 V/m, Cl. 3 900 MHz, puls modulated 10 V/m, Cl. 3 Cl. A
Emission
* Reduced values apply for repeat tests according to IEC publication 255-5, Clauses 6.6 and 8.6.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 15
Table 9: Mechanical design

Weight Size N1 casing Size N2 casing Methods of mounting approx. 10 kg approx. 12 kg semi-flush with terminals at rear surface with terminals at rear 19" rack mounting, height 6U, width N1: 225.2 mm (1/2 19" rack). Width N2: 271 mm. IP 50 (IP 20 if MVB PCC interfaces are used) IPXXB for terminals.
Enclosure Protection Class
Technical data Functions
Table 10: Autoreclosure (79)

Single and three-phase autoreclosure. Operation in conjunction with distance, longitudinal differential, overcurrent and synchrocheck functions and also with external protection and synchrocheck relays. Logic for 1st. and 2nd. main protections, duplex and master/follower schemes. Up to four fast or slow reclosure shots. Detection of evolving faults. Settings: 1st. reclosure none 1P fault - 1P reclosure 1P fault - 3P reclosure 1P/3P fault - 3P reclosure 1P/3P fault - 1P/3P reclosure none two reclosure cycles three reclosure cycles four reclosure cycles 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.1 to 300 s All settings in steps of 0.01 s
2nd. to 4th. reclosure
Single-phase dead time Three-phase dead time Dead time extension by ext. signal Dead times for 2nd., 3rd. and 4th. reclosures Fault duration time Reclaim time Blocking time Single and three-phase discrimination times
Table 11: Synchrocheck function (25)

Determination of synchronism Single-phase measurement. The differences between the amplitudes, phase angles and frequencies of two voltage vectors are determined. Voltage supervision Single or three-phase measurement Evaluation of instantaneous values and therefore wider frequency range Determination of maximum and minimum values in the case of three-phase inputs Phase selection for voltage inputs Provision for switching to a different voltage input (double busbar systems) Remote selection of operating mode
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 16
Technical data Functions (contd)
Settings: Max. voltage difference Max. phase difference Max. frequency difference Min. voltage Max. voltage Supervision time Resetting time Accuracy Voltage difference Phase difference Frequency difference 0.05 to 0.4 UN in steps of 0.05 UN 5 to 80 in steps of 5 0.05 to 0.4 Hz in steps of 0.05 Hz 0.6 to 1 UN in steps of 0.05 UN 0.1 to 1 UN in steps of 0.05 UN 0.05 to 5 s in steps of 0.05 s 0 to 1 s in steps of 0.05 s for 0.9 to 1.1 fN 5% UN 5 0.05 Hz
Table 12: High-speed busbar transfer (HBT)

Frequency range Operating modes 0.8 to 1.04 fN - Manual transfer (with-break or no-break), with synchronism check - High-speed automatic transfer (max. phase angle and/or closing at phase coincidence) - Slow automatic transfer (low voltage and/or max. time) 0 to 150 ms in steps of 1 ms
Parameters: Closing time CB1 and CB2
For more details see separate data sheet 1MRB520156-Ben
Table 13: Thermal overload function (49)

Thermal image for the 1st. order model. Single or three-phase measurement with detection of maximum phase value. Settings: Base current IB Alarm stage Tripping stage Thermal time constant Accuracy of the thermal image 0.5 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N 2 to 500 min in steps of 0.1 min 5% N (at fN) with protection CTs 2% N (at fN) with metering CTs
Table 14: Definite time current function (51DT)

Over and undercurrent detection. Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase current. 2nd. harmonic restraint for high inrush currents. Settings: Pick-up current Delay Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio overcurrent undercurrent Max. operating time without intentional delay Inrush restraint pick-up setting reset ratio 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% or 0.02 IN >94% (for max. function) <106% (for min. function) 60 ms optional 0.1 I2h/I1h 0.8
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 17
Table 15: Definite time voltage function (27/59)

Over and undervoltage detection Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase voltage Also applied for detection of: stator ground faults (95%) rotor ground faults (requires external measuring bridge YWX111 and coupling capacitors) interturn faults Settings: Pick-up voltage Delay Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio (U 0.1 UN) overvoltage undervoltage Max. operating time without intentional delay 0.01 to 2.0 UN in steps of 0.002 UN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 2% or 0.005 UN >96% (for max. function) <104% (for min. function) 60 ms
Table 16: Inverse time-overcurrent function (51)

Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest phase current Stable response to transients Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long time inverse or RXIDG characteristic Settings: Number of phases Base current IB Pick-up current Istart Min. time setting tmin k1 setting Accuracy classes for the operating time according to British Standard 142 RXIDG characteristic Reset ratio 1 or 3 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 1 to 4 IB in steps of 0.01 IB 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s E 5.0 4% (1 - I/80 IB) >94 % t = k1 / ((I/IB)C- 1) c = 0.02 c=1 c=2 c=1 t = 5.8 - 1.35 In (I/IB)
Table 17: Directional definite time overcurrent protection (67)

Three-phase measurement Suppression of DC- and high-frequency components Definite time characteristic Voltage memory feature for close faults Settings: Current Angle Delay tWait 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN -180 to +180 in steps of 15 0.02 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 s to 20 s in steps of 0.01 s
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 18
Memory duration Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) Voltage input range Voltage memory range Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage memory Frequency dependence of angle measurement at voltage memory Max. response time without delay
0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% or 0.02 IN >94% 5 0.005 to 2 UN <0.005 UN 20 0.5/Hz 60 ms
Table 18: Directional inverse time overcurrent function (67)

Three-phase measurement Suppression of DC- and high-frequency components Inverse time characteristic Voltage memory feature for close faults Settings: Current I-Start Angle Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long-time earth fault k1-setting t-min IB-value tWait Memory duration Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 fN ) Accuracy class of the operating time acc. to British Standard 142 Voltage input range Voltage memory range Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage memory Frequency dependence of angle measurement at voltage memory Max. response time without delay 14 IB in steps of 0.01 IB -180+180 in steps of 15 t = k1 / ((I/IB)C- 1) c = 0,02 c=1 c=2 c=1 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 s to 20 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% >94% 5 E 10 0.005 to 2 UN <0.005 UN 20 0.5/Hz 60 ms
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 19
Table 19: Inverse time ground fault overcurrent function (51N)

Neutral current measurement (derived externally or internally) Stable response to transients Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long time inverse or RXIDG characteristic Settings: Number of phases Base current IB Pick-up current Istart Min. time setting tmin k1 setting Accuracy classes for the operating time according to British Standard 142 RXIDG characteristic Reset ratio 1 or 3 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 1 to 4 IB in steps of 0.01 IB 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s E 5.0 4% (1 - I/80 IB) >94% t = k1 / ((I/IB)C - 1) c = 0.02 c=1 c=2 c=1 t = 5.8 - 1.35 In (I/IB)
Table 20: Metering function UIfPQ

Single-phase measurement of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power Choice of measuring phase-to-ground or phase-to phase voltages Suppression of DC components and harmonics in current and voltage Compensation of phase errors in main and input CTs and VTs Settings: Phase angle Reference value of the power SN Refer to Tabelle 33 for accuracy. -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1 0.2 to 2.5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN
Table 21: Three-phase measuring module

Three-phase measurement of voltages (star or delta) und currents. Measurement of frequency, real and apparent power and power factor. Two independent impulse counter inputs for calculation of interval and accumulated energy. The threephase measurement and the impulse counters can be used independently and may also be disabled. This function may be configured four times. Settings: Angle Reference value for power t1-Interval Scale factor of power Max. impulse frequency Min. impulse duration Accuracy of time interval See Tabelle 33 for accuracy -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1 0.2 to 2.5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN 1 min., 2 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 60 min. or 120 min. 0.0001 to 1 25 Hz 10 ms 100 ms
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 20
Table 22: Instantaneous overcurrent (50)

Features: Maximum or minimum function (over- and undercurrent) Single- or three-phase measurements Wide frequency range (0.04 to 1.2 fN) Peak value evaluation Settings: Current Delay Accuracy of pick-up value (at 0.08 to 1.1 fN) Reset ratio Max. trip time with no delay (at fN) 0.1 to 20 IN in steps of 0.1 IN 0 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% or 0.02 IN >90% (for max. function) <110% (for min. function) 30 ms (for max. function) 60 ms (for min. function)
Table 23: Instantaneous overvoltage protection function (59, 27) with peak value evaluation
Features: Evaluation of instantaneous values, therefore extremely fast and frequency-independent on a wide scale Storing of the highest instantaneous value after start No suppression of DC components No suppression of harmonics 1- or 3phase Maximum value detection for multi-phase functions Variable lower limiting frequency fmin Settings: Voltage Delay Limiting fmin Accuracy of pick-up value (at 0.08 to 1.1 fN) Reset ratio Max. trip time at no delay (at fN) 0.01 to 2.0 UN in steps of 0.01 UN 0.00 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 25 to 50 Hz in steps of 1 Hz 3% or 0.005 UN >90% (for max. function) <110% (for min. function) <30 ms (for max. function) <50 ms (for min. function)
Table 24: Frequency (81)

Features: Maximum or minimum function (over-, underfrequency) Minimum voltage blocking Settings: Frequency Delay Minimum voltage Accuracy of pick-up value Reset ratio Starting time 40 to 65 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 to 0.8 UN in steps of 0.1 UN 30 mHz (at UN and fN) 100% <130 ms
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 21
Table 25: Rate-of-change of frequency df/dt (81)

Features: Combined pick-up with frequency criterion possible Blocking by undervoltage Settings: df/dt Frequency Delay Minimum voltage Accuracy of df/dt (at 0.9 to 1.05 fN) Accuracy of frequency (at 0.9 to 1.05 fN) Reset ratio df/dt -10 to +10 Hz/s in steps of 0.1 Hz/s 40 to 55 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz at fN = 50 Hz 50 to 65 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz at fN = 60 Hz 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 to 0.8 UN in steps of 0.1 UN 0.1 Hz/s 30 mHz 95% for max. function 105% for min. function
Table 26: Power function (32)

Measurement of real or apparent power Protection function based on either real or apparent power measurement Reverse power protection Over and underpower Single, two or three-phase measurement Suppression of DC components and harmonics in current and voltage Compensation of phase errors in main and input CTs and VTs Settings: Power pick-up Characteristic angle Delay Phase error compensation Rated power SN Reset ratio Accuracy of the pick-up setting -0.1 to 1.2 SN in steps of 0.005 SN -180 to +180 in steps of 5 0.05 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s -5 to +5 in steps of 0.1 0.5 to 2.5 UN IN in steps of 0.001 UN IN 30% to 170% in steps of 1% of power pick-up 10% of setting or 2% UN IN (for protection CTs) 3% of setting or 0.5% UN IN (for core-balance CTs) 70 ms
Max. operating time without intentional delay
Table 27: Breaker failure protection (50BF)

Features Individual phase current recognition Single or three-phase operation External blocking input Two independent time steps Remote tripping adjustable simultaneously with retripping or back-up tripping Possibility of segregated activating/deactivating each trip (Redundant trip, retrip, back-up trip and remote trip). Settings Current Delay t1 (repeated trip) 0.2 to 5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 22
Delay t2 (back-up trip) Delay tEFS (End fault protection) Reset time for retrip Reset time for back-up trip Pulse time for remote trip Number of phases Accuracy of pick-up current (at fN) Reset ratio of current measurement Reset time (for power system time constants up to 300 ms and short-circuit currents up to 40 IN)
0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 1 or 3 15% >85% 28 ms (with main CTs TPX) 28 ms (with main CTs TPY and current setting 1,2 IN) 38 ms (with main CTs TPY and current setting 0,4 IN)
Table 28: Disturbance recorder

Max. 16 CT/VT channels Max. 16 binary channels Max. 12 analog channels of internal measurement values 12 samples per period (sampling frequency 600 or 720 Hz at a rated frequency of 50/60 Hz) Available recording time for 9 CT/VT and 8 binary signals approximately 5 s Recording initiated by any binary signal, e.g. the general trip signal. Data format Dynamic range Resolution Settings: Recording periods Pre-event Event Post-event 40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms 100 to 3000 ms in steps of 50 ms 40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms EVE 70 x IN, 1.3 x UN 12 bits
Ancillary functions
Table 29: Logic
Logic for 4 binary inputs with the following 3 configurations: 1. OR gate 2. AND gate 3. Bistable flip-flop with 2 set and 2 reset inputs (both OR gates), resetting takes priority All configurations have an additional blocking input. Provision for inverting all inputs.
Table 30: Delay/integrator

For delaying pick-up or reset or for integrating 1 binary signal Provision for inverting the input Settings: Pick-up or reset time Integration 0 to 300 s in steps of 0.01 s yes/no
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 23
Table 31: Plausibility check

A plausibility check function is provided for each three-phase current and three-phase voltage input which performs the following: Determination of the sum and phase sequence of the three-phase currents or voltages Provision for comparison of the sum of the phase values with a corresponding current or voltage sum applied to an input Function blocks for currents exceeding 2 x IN, respectively voltages exceeding 1.2 UN Accuracy of the pick-up setting at rated frequency Reset ratio Current plausibility settings: Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation current or between internal and external summation currents Amplitude compensation for summation CT Delay Voltage plausibility settings: Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation voltage or between internal and external summation voltages Amplitude compensation for summation VT Delay 2% IN in the range 0.2 to 1.2 IN 2% UN in the range 0.2 to 1.2 UN >90% whole range >95% (at U >0.1 UN or I >0.1 IN)
0.05 to 1.00 IN in steps of 0.05 IN -2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s
0.05 to 1.2 UN in steps of 0.05 UN - 2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s
Table 32: Runtime supervision

The runtime supervision feature enables checking the opening and closing of all kinds of breakers (circuitbreakers, isolators, ground switches...). Failure of a breaker to open or close within an adjustable time results in the creation of a corresponding signal for further processing. Settings Setting time Accuracy of runtime supervision 0 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 2 ms
Table 33: Accuracy of the metering function UIfPQ and three-phase measuring module (including input voltage and input current CT)
Input variable Accuracy Core balance CTs with error compensation Voltage Current Real power 0.5% UN 0.5% IN 0.5% SN Protection CTs without error compensation 1% UN 2% IN 3% SN 0.2 to 1.2 UN f = fN 0.2 to 1.2 IN f = fN 0.2 to 1.2 SN 0.2 to 1.2 UN 0.2 to 1.2 IN f = fN S = SN, f = fN 0.9 to 1,1 fN 0.8 to 1,2 UN Conditions
Apparent power Power factor Frequency
0.5% SN 0.01 0.1% fN
3% SN 0.03 0.1% fN
SN = 3 UN IN (three-phase) SN = 1/3 3 UN IN (single-phase)
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 24
Wiring diagram
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE INPUTS ACC. TO K-CODE SIGNALLING
COMMUNICATION PORT (LOCAL HMI) (PC))
SERIAL COMMUNICATION WITH SUBSTATION CONTROL EARTHING SCREW ON CASING
OPTOCOUPLER INPUTS
TRIP
DC SUPPLY
Fig. 3
Typical wiring diagram of REC316*4 in size N1 casing with two input/output units 316DB62
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 25
Ordering
Please specify: Quantity Ordering number ADE code + key
The following basic versions can be ordered: Stand-alone units REC316*4 with built-in HMI (see table below) HESG448750M0003
Table 34: REC316*4 basic versions

HBT BAS 533 HBT BAS 535 Relay ID code OCInv Dir OCDT Dir OCINV OCInst
Order No. HESG448750M0003
A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX100 A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX200 A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX300 A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX900 A*B*C*D*U*K64E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M* SX900 A*B*C*D*U*K64E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M* SX900 A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX992 Legend CTRL: Basic-SW:
T*** T*** T*** T*** T903 T904 T***
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X
Entire function library of RE.316*4
project-specific control logic (FUPLA) basic software including the following functions: - synchrocheck function - definite time overvoltage function - instantaneous overvoltage protection function with peak value evaluation - metering function UIfPQ - three-phase measuring module - power function - logic - delay - counter - disturbance recorder function - flutter recognition - inverse time ground fault overcurrent - breaker-failure protection - runtime supervision Options single or three-phase autoreclosure definite time overcurrent protection instantaneous overcurrent protection inverse time overcurrent protection directional inverse time overcurrent protection directional definite time overcurrent protection thermal overload frequency protection rate-of-change of frequency high-speed busbar transfer high-speed busbar transfer, 2 breakers standard solution high-speed busbar transfer, 3 breakers standard solution
AR: OCDT: OCInst: OCInv: OCInv Dir OCDT Dir TH: Freq: df/dt HBT: HBT BAS 533: HBT BAS 535:
All the functions of the basic version can be applied in any combination providing the maximum capacity of the processor and the number of analog channels is not exceeded.
Basic-SW X X X X X
OCDT
CTRL
Freq
HBT
df/dt
AR
TH
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 26
Ordering (contd)
Other functions (function library of RE.316*4) < Z: Long.diff: BST: E/Fungnd: F/Fgnd: Diff T: Diff G: OCDT(REF): EFStat100: EFRot100: NPSDT: NPS Inv: U/F(inv): UZ: LossEx: Polsl: VTDT (EF Stat): VTDT (EF Rot): >I/<U: V bal: V check: I check OL Stat: OL Rot: <Z HV Dist: Distance including power swing Line differential Binary signal transmission Directional ground fault function for ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils Directional ground fault function for grounded systems Transformer differential Generator differential Restricted earth fault Stator earth fault 95%, 100% Rotor earth fault Negative-sequence current Inverse time negative phase-sequence Overexcitation Underimpedance Loss of excitation Pole slipping Definite time voltage function for stator earth fault protection Definite time voltage function for rotor earth fault protection Combined overcurrent/undervoltage protection Balanced voltage measurement protection Voltage plausibility Current plausibility Stator overload Rotor overload High-voltage distance protection
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 27
Table 35: Definitions of the relay ID codes in Table 34

Sub code AA0 A1 A2 A5 B0 B1 B2 B5 C0 C1 C2 C5 D0 D1 D2 D5 U0 U1 U2 K41 Significance none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 100 V AC 200 V AC 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 CTs (3ph Code C-) 3 CTs (3ph Code D-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 VTs (3ph delta Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 VTs (3ph delta Code U-) 3 VTs (3ph delta Code U-) Description rated current Remarks state
B-
rated current
state
C-
rated current
state
D-
rated current
state
U-
rated voltage
state
K-
CT = current transformer VT = voltage transformer MT = metering transformer
K42
K43
K44
K45
K46
K47
K64
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 28
Ordering (contd)
K00
Free arrangement of voltage and current analog inputs. There is a maximum of 9 analog inputs per unit. 8 optocouplers 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LED's 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LED's 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays 8 LED's 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LED's 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LED's 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays 8 LED's none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 4. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 4. binary input/output unit Type 316DB62 3. binary input/output unit optocoupler input voltage 3. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 3. binary input/output unit Type 316DB62 3. binary input/output unit Type 316DB63 2. binary input/output unit optocoupler input voltage 2. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 1. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61
On request
E-
E1
see previous table
E2
1. binary input/output unit Type 316DB62
E3
1. binary input/output unit Type 316DB63 1. binary input/output unit optocoupler input voltage state
I-
I3 I4 I5 I9 F0 F1
F-
see previous table
F2
F3
J-
J0 J3 J4 J5 J9
state
Q-
Q0 Q1
see previous table
Q2
Q3 VV0 V3 V4 V5 V9 RR0 R1
state
see previous table
R2
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 29
R3 WW0 W3 W4 W5 W9 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y41) N1 N2 M1 M51) SX000 to SY990 SZ990 TT000 T001x to T999x T903x T904x
14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC no comm. protocol SPA IEC 60870-5-103 LON MVB (part of IEC 61375) casing width 225.2 mm casing width 271 mm Semi-flush mounting Surface mounting, standard terminals basic versions REC316*4
Y-
Interbay bus protocol
NM-
see previous table Order M1 and separate assembly kit for 19" rack mounting see previous table
S-
order not acc. to Data Sheet none FUPLA logic Customer-specific logic x = version of the FUPLA logic Defined by ABB Switzerland Ltd
FUPLA logic for HBT standard solution for 2 breakers FUPLA logic for HBT standard solution for 3 breakers
1)MVB interface (for interbay or process bus) not applicable for surface-mounted version
The order number has been defined for the basic version as above and the required accessories can be ordered according to the following Table.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 30
Ordering (contd)
.
Table 36: Accessories
Assembly kits Description 19"-mounting plate for hinged frames, light-beige for use with: 1 REC316*4 (size 1 casing) 2 REC316*4 (size 1 casing) 1 REC316*4 (size 2 casing) REC316*4 size 1 surface mounting kit REC316*4 size 2 surface mounting kit PCC card interface Type For interbay bus: PCCLON1 SET 500PCC02 For process bus: 500PCC02 Type 316BM61b 316BM61b 316BM61b Protocol LON MVB MVB Connector ST (bajonet) ST (bajonet) ST (bajonet) Optical fibre* G/G G/G G/G Gauge ** 62.5/125 62.5/125 62.5/125 Order No. HESG448614R0001 HESG448735R0231 HESG448735R0232 Order No.
HESG324310P1 HESG324310P2 HESG324351P1 HESG448532R0001 HESG448532R0002
RS232C interbay bus interface Protocol SPA IEC 60870-5-103 SPA Connector ST (bajonet) SMA (screw) Plug/plug Optical fibre* G/G G/G P/P Gauge ** 62.5/125 62.5/125 Order No. HESG448267R401 HESG448267R402 HESG448267R431
* receiver Rx / transmitter Tx, G = glass, P = plastic Human machine interface Type CAP2/316 * Optical fibre PC connecting cable Type 500OCC02 communication cable for device with LDU Disturbance recorder evaluation program Type, description REVAL English REVAL German E_wineve E_wineve E_wineve E_wineve 3-Disk 3-Disk English/German English/German English/German English/German Description
**optical fibre conductor gauge in m
Order No. German/English 1MRB260030M0001
Installation CD
* Unless expressly specified the latest version is supplied. Order No. 1MRB380084-R1 Order No. 1MRK000078-A 1MRK000078-D (Professional) (Expert) (Professional) (Expert) Single-licence Single-licence Multy-licence Multy-licence 1MRB260034R0011 1MRB260034R0021 1MRB260034R0012 1MRB260034R0022
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 31
Dimensioned drawings
Mounting element
Rear view
219 1
Panel cutout
= Instr. transformer inputs cross section = 4 mm2 A to D = Commands, input and output signals cross section = 1.5 mm2 H1 = Auxiliary voltage
Fig. 4
Semi-flush mounting, rear connections. Size N1 casing.
254 1
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 32
Dimensioned drawings (contd)

Mounting element
Rear view
Panel cutout
= Instr. transformer inputs cross section = 4 mm2 A to H = Commands, input and output signals cross section = 1.5 mm2 H1 = Auxiliary voltage T
Fig. 5
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 33
Fig. 6
Surface mounting, casing able to swing to the left, rear connections. Size N1 casing
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 34
Fig. 7
Surface mounting, casing able to swing to the left, rear connections. Size N2 casing.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 35
Example of an order
Rated current 1 A, rated voltage 100 V AC 6 phase voltages, three-phase currents 110 V DC aux. supply 8 command relays 24 signalling relays 32 optocoupler inputs (110 V DC) 1 relay for 19" rack mounting Frequency function Autoreclosure Communication with the station control system (e.g. LON) Operator program in English on CD The corresponding order is as follows: 1 REC316*4, HESG448750M0003 110 V DC aux. supply Optocoupler input voltage 110 V DC Rated current 1 A Rated voltage 100 V AC
1 mounting kit HESG324351P1 1 PC-Card LON 1 CD RE.216 / RE316*4 1MRB260030M0001 1 PC connecting cable (if not already available) 1MRB380084-R1 Alternatively, the relay ID code may be given instead. In this case the order would be: 1REC316*4, A1B0U1K42E1I3F1J3Q 1V3R1W3Y3M1N2SX300T0 1 mounting kit HESG324351P1 1 CD RE.216 / RE316*4 1MRB260030M0001 1 PC-Card HESG448614R1 1 PC connecting cable (if not already available) 1MRB380084-R1 Relay ID codes are marked on all relays. The significance of the sub codes can be seen from Table 35.
Example of a specification
Numerical control unit with extensive selfmonitoring and analog/digital conversion of all input quantities. It shall be suitable for bay-oriented data recording and supervision and control of MV and HV switchgear plants. A compact design and modular software shall enable a high flexibility of the control system in order to adapt itself easily to the requirements of the different switch bays. Apart from semi-flush mounting in a 19" electronic equipment rack, the control unit shall be able to be mounted directly in the control panel of the primary plant. The bay control logic shall be able to be designed for SF6 gas-insulated (GIS) plants as well as for indoor and outdoor switchgear plants in single, double and multiple busbar arrangements. This logic shall cover supervision and control of switching devices, interlocking devices, command outputs and alarm registration. It shall be able to be easily complemented by means of a graphical function plan language.
The checking of feeder and busbar voltages for synchronization shall be guaranteed by a synchrocheck function integrated in the control unit. The control unit shall be configurable with an integrated voltage indication, entering the interlocking conditions of the feeder grounding device. The integrated metering function shall be able to calculate complementary the real power, apparent power and frequency, starting from the primary CT. The integrated disturbance recorder should have a capacity of recording at least 9 analog and 16 binary signals. It should be possible to assign CT and VT inputs as well as internal results of any included protection function, e.g. OCDT trip, to the disturbance recorder. The control unit shall be supported by a software library which supplies protection functions. A menu-assisted HMI (human machine interface) shall allow the user to activate protection functions available in the library.
REC316*4
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 36
References
Operating instructions (printed) Operating instructions (CD) Reference list REC316/REC316*4 Data sheet CAP316 Data sheet Test Set XS92b Data sheet SigTOOL Data sheet High-speed Bus Transfer (HBT) Data sheet REL316*4 Data sheet RET316*4 Data sheet REG316*4 Data sheet RIO580
1MRB520044-Uen 1MRB260030M0001 1MRB520209-Ren 1MRB520167-Ben 1MRB520006-Ben 1MRB520158-Ben 1MRB520156-Ben 1MRK506013-Ben 1MRK504007-Ben 1MRK502004-Ben 1MRB520176-Ben
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Utility Automation Systems Brown-Boveri-Strasse 6 CH-5400 Baden/Switzerland Tel. +41 58 585 77 44 Fax +41 58 585 55 77 E-mail: substation.automation@ch.abb.com www.abb.com/substationautomation
Printed in Switzerland (0311-0600-0)
Numerical Generator Protection
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Features
Selectable protection functions Multitude of applications Setting menu-assisted with personal computer by means of the Windows-based operator program CAP2/316 Fully numerical signal processing Continuous self-monitoring by hardware Cyclically executed testing routines, mostly by software Setting of parameters and recording of the settings Display of measured values
Display of events, their acknowledgment and printout Disturbance recording Self-documentation Long-term stability Serial port for communication Available for 19" rack mounting in panel, surface or flush mounting. Four independent, user-selectable parameter sets able to be activated via binary input Multi-activation facility of the available functions.
Application
The main areas of application of the REG316*4 terminal are the protection of generators, motors and unit transformers. The modular design makes it extremely flexible and simple to adapt to the size of the primary system installation and the desired protection schemes to be included. Economic solutions can thus be achieved in the full range of applications for which it is intended.
Different degrees of redundancy are possible, availability and reliability of the protection can be chosen to suit the application by duplicating of REG316*4 units, but also by multiple configuration of the protection functions. The use of standard interfaces makes REG316*4 compatible with process control systems. Different forms of data exchange with higher process control levels are possible, e.g. one-way reporting of digital states and events, measured values and protection parameters.
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 2
Application (contd)
Protection functions
All important protection functions required for the protection of generators, motors and unit transformers are included. The system can therefore replace several relays of a conventional protection scheme. The following table gives a survey of the most significant protection functions of REG316*4. The desired protection functions to suit the particular application can simply be selected from a comprehensive library using the personal computer. No knowledge of programming whatsoever is required. All setting ranges are extremely wide to make the protection functions suitable for a multitude of applications. The following main parameters can be set, among others: input channel or channels pick-up setting time delay definition of the operating characteristics tripping logic control signal logic. Setting a corresponding parameter enables the protection functions to be connected to particular input channels. Digital input and output signals can also be connected together logically: The tripping outputs of each protection function can be allocated to channels of thetripping auxiliary relay assembly in a man-ner corresponding to a matrix. The pick-up and tripping signals can be allocated to the channels of the signalling auxiliary relay assembly. Provision is made for blocking each protection function with a digital signal (e. g. digital inputs or the tripping signal of another protection function).
External signals applied to the digital inputs can be processed in any desired fashion. Digital signals can be combined to perform logical functions, e.g. external enabling or blocking signals with the output signals of an internal protection function and then used to block one of the other protection functions.
Protection functions: Generator differential Transformer differential Definite time overcurrent (undercurrent) (optionally with inrush detection) Instantaneous overcurrent (undercurrent) Voltage-controlled overcurrent Inverse time overcurrent Directional overcurrent protection with definite or inverse time characteristic Negative phase sequence current Definite time overvoltage (undervoltage) Stator earth fault (95%) Rotor earth fault Instantaneous overvoltage (undervoltage) with peak value evaluation Voltage balance 100% stator earth fault (+ rotor earth fault) Underimpedance Minimum reactance (loss of excitation) Power Overload Inverse negative phase-sequence current Overtemperature Frequency df/dt Overexcitation Logical functions Pole slip protection
Design
The REG316*4 belongs to the generation of fully numerical generator protection terminals, i.e. analog-to-digital conversion of the input variables takes place immediately after the input transformers and all further processing of the resulting numerical signals is performed by microprocessors and controlled by programs. Standard interfaces enable REG316*4 to communicate with other control systems. Provision is thus made for the exchange of
data such as reactionless reporting of binary states, events, measurements and protection parameters or the activation of a different set of settings by higher level control systems. Because of its compact design, the very few hardware units it needs, its modular software and the integrated continuous self-diagnosis and supervision functions, REG316*4 ideally fulfils the users expectations of a modern protection terminal at a cost-effective price. The AVAILABILITY of a terminal, i.e. the
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 3
ratio between its mean time in service without failure and the total life, is most certainly the most important characteristic required of protection equipment. As a consequence of the continuous supervision of its functions, this quotient in the case of REG316*4 is typically always close to 1. The menu-based HMI (human machine interface) and the REG316*4 small size makes the tasks of connection, configuration and setting simple. A maximum of FLEXIBILITY, i.e. the ability to adapt the protection for applica-
tion in a particular power system or to coordinate with, or replace units in an existing protection scheme, is provided in REG316*4 by ancillary software functions and the assignment of input and output signals via the HMI. REG316*4s RELIABILITY, SELECTIVITY and STABILITY areked by decades of experience in the protection of generators and motors in transmission and distribution systems. Numerical processing ensures consistent ACCURACY and SENSITIVITY throughout its operational life. nals to a suitable level for processing. The input transformer unit can accommodate a maximum of nine input transformers (voltage-, protection current- or measuring transformer). Every analog variable is passed through a first order R/C low-pass filter on the main CPU unit to eliminate what is referred to as the aliasing effect and to suppress HF interferences (Fig. 2). They are then sampled 12 times per period and converted to digital signals. The analog/digital conversion is performed by a 16 Bit converter. A DSP carries out part of the digital filtering and makes sure that the data for the protection algorithms are available in the memory to the main processor.
DC
+5V
Hardware
The hardware concept for the REG316*4 generator protection equipment comprises four different plug-in units, a connecting mother PCB and housing (Fig. 1): analog input unit central processing unit 1 to 4 binary input/output units power supply unit connecting mother PCB housing with connection terminals. In the analog input unit an input transformer provides the electrical and static isolation between the analog input variables and the internal electronic circuits and adjusts the sig-
A/D DSP
Trip outputs Trip Trip Outputs I/O Trip Signal Outputs I /Ports O Sign. Outputs outputs I / O Sign. Outputs/ Ports I Sign.BinaryO Outputs Ports Ports Outputs Bin. inputs Bin. Inputs Bin. Inputs Inputs FLASH EPROM
DPM
CPU 486
SW-Key
+15V -15V +24V
Power supply
Remote I/O Remote I/OTrip Outputs Trip Remote I/O Sign. Outputs Trip Outputs Sign. outputs Bin. Outputs Signal Inputs Bin. outputs Inputs Binary inputs
DC
PCC
a
MVB Process bus
Tranceiver
RAM
P C M C I A
(MVB)
PCC
c
LON MVB
LED's
RS 232
Serial controller
SCS SMS
RS 232
Serial controller
SPA / IEC870-5-103
HMI
Fig. 1
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 4
Hardware (contd.)
The processor core essentially comprises the main microprocessor for the protection algorithms and dual-ported memories (DPMs) for communication between the A/D converters and the main processor. The main processor performs the protection algorithms and controls the local HMI and the interfaces to the station control system. Binary signals from the main processor are relayed to the corresponding inputs of the I/O unit and thus control the auxiliary output relays and the light emitting diode (LED) signals. The main processor unit is equipped with an RS232C serial interface via which among other things the protection settings are made, events are read and the data from the disturbance recorder memory are transferred to a local or remote PC. On this main processor unit there are two PCC slots and one RS232C interface. These serial interfaces provide remote communication to the station monitoring system (SMS) and station control system (SCS) as well as to the remote I/Os.
REG316*4 can have one to four binary I/O units each. These units are available in three versions: a) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty contacts, 8 optocoupler inputs and 6 signalling relays Type 316DB61 b) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty contacts, 4 optocoupler inputs and 10 signalling relays Type 316DB62 c) 14 optocoupler inputs and 8 signalling relays Type 316DB63. When ordering REG316*4 with more than 2 I/O units, casing size N2 must be selected. According to whether one or two I/O units are fitted, there are either 8 LEDs or 16 LEDs visible on the front of the REG316*4.
Software
Both analog and binary input signals are conditioned before being processed by the main processor. As described under hardware above, the analog signals pass through the sequence input transformers, shunt, low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter), multiplexer and A/D converter stages and DSP. In their digital
form, they are then separated by numerical filters into real and apparent components before being applied to the main processor. Binary signals from the optocoupler inputs go straight to the main processor. The actual processing of the signals in relation to the protection algorithms and logic then takes place.
Fig. 2
Data Flow
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 5
The graphical programming language used in the tool CAP316 makes CAP316 a powerful and user-friendly engineering tool for the engineering of the control and protection units RE.216/316. It is similar to IEC 1131. CAP316 permits the function blocks representing the application to be directly translated into an application program (FUPLA) capable of running on the processors of the control and protection units RE.316*4. The program packet contains an extensive library of function blocks. Up to 8 projects (FUPLAs created with CAP316) are able to run simultaneously on a RE.316*4.
List of functions Binary functions: AND ASSB B23 B24 BINEXTIN BINEXOUT COUNTX CNT CNTD OR RSFF SKIP TFF TMOC TMOCS, TMOCL TMOI TMOIS, TMOIL TOFF
TOFFS, TOFFL TON TONS, TONL XOR Analog functions: ABS ADD ADDL ADMUL CNVIL CNVLBCD CNVLI CNVLP CNVPL
Off delay short, long On delay On delay short, long Exclusive OR gate Absolute value Adder/subtracter Long integer adder/subtracter Adder/multiplier Integer to long integer converter Long integer to BC converter Long integer to integer converter Long integer to percent converter Percentage to long integer converter Divider Long integer divider Linear function Polynomial function Filter Integrator Factor multiplier Limiter Load shedding function Maximum value detector Minimum value detector Multiplier Long integer multiplier Percent negator Pack BINARY signals into INTEGER Differentiator Delayed approximation Square root Percent switch Lower limit threshold Upper limit threshold Time multiplier Unpack BINARY signals from an INTEGER
AND gate Assign binary 2-out-of-3 selector 2-out-of-4 selector External binary input External binary output Shift register Counter Downwards counter OR gate RS flip-flop Skip segment T flip-flop with reset Monostable constant Monostable constant short, long Monostable constant with interrupt Monostable constant with interrupt short, long Off delay
DIV DIVL FCTL FCTP FILT INTS, INTL KMUL LIM LOADS MAX MIN MUL MULL NEGP PACW PDTS, PDTL PT1S, PT1L SQRT SWIP THRLL THRUL TMUL UPACW
Example:
B_DRIVE CL OP
CL OP POK
4 & 5 &
SEL RQON RQOF
1 &
2 >=1
SYNC RQEX 30 1
6 =1
Part of FUPLA application (Q0) : control and interlocking logic for three objects Q0, Q1, Q2. B_DRIVE is a macro based on binary function blocks.
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 6
Functions
This is an overview of the possible functions according to the hardware variants. These functions can be activated within the scope of the CPU capacity. One or the other function
may be applied in accordance with the PT connections (e.g. three phase for minimum impedance or single phase for rotor and stator earth fault protection). Variant
Protection Function Definite time overcurrent (51) Overcurrent with peak value evaluation (50) Inverse time overcurrent (51) Directional definite time overcurrent protection (67) Directional inverse time overcurrent function (67) Voltage-controlled protection (51-27) Thermal overload function (49) Stator overload (49S) Rotor overload (49R) Inverse time negative phase sequence (46) Negative phase sequence current (46) Generator differential (87G) Transformer differential (87T) 3-winding trafo differential (87T) * High-impedance REF Definite time overvoltage (27,59) Instant. overvolt. with peak value eval. (59,27) Undervoltage (27) Overexcitation with inverse time delay (24) Overexcitation (24) Frequency (81) df/dt 80-95% Stator earth fault ** 100% Stator earth fault (64S) Pole slip (78) *** Rotor earth fault (64R) ** Rotor earth fault with injection principle Minimum reactance (40) Interturn fault Underimpedance (21) Reverse power (32) Voltage comparison (60) Voltage plausibility Current plausibility Metering Delay Counter Logic Project-specific control logic Disturbance recorder
Fig. 3 * ** *** 1 Main versions
Requires external stabilizing resistor and VDR Requires injection unit REX010 and injection transformer block REX011 Requires external measuring bridge YWX111-.. and coupling capacitors minimum setting: >2%.
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 7
Version CTs' protection characteristic CTs' measuring characteristic VTs VTs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 6 3 3 6 3 3 1A, 2A or 5A - 3 - 1 1 - 1A, 2A or 5A 3 3 6 2 5 2 100 V or 200 V - - - - - 4 only for 100% stator and rotor earth fault protection and for 95% stator earth fault protection
Fig. 4
Analog inputs (9 channels max.)
Frequency function
ground switches...). Failure of a breaker to open or close within an adjustable time results in the creation of a corresponding signal for further processing.
Plausibility check
The current and voltage plausibility functions facilitate the detection of system asymmetries, e.g. in the secondary circuits of CTs and VTs.
The event recorder function provides capacity for up to 256 binary signals including time marker with a resolution in the order of milliseconds.
Measuring
Both measuring functions measure the singleor three-phase rms values of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power for display on the local HMI or transfer to the station control system. A choice can be made between phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase voltages.
Ancillary functions
The disturbance recorder monitors up to 9 analog inputs, up to 16 binary inputs and internal results of protection functions. The capacity for recording disturbances depends on the duration of a disturbance as determined by its pre-disturbance history and the duration of the disturbance itself. The total recording time is approximately 5 s.
For local communication with REG316*4, there is the setting software CAP2/316 available which is based on Windows. This software runs under the following operating systems: Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000. This optimal programming tool is available for engineering, testing, commissioning and operation. The software can be used either ON-LINE or OFF-LINE and furthermore contains a DEMO mode.
Ancillary functions such as a logic and a delay/integrator enable the user to create logical combinations of signals and pick-up and reset delays. A runtime supervision feature enables checking the opening and closing of all kinds of breakers (circuit-breakers, isolators,
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 8
Functions (contd)
Features: Measurand display - Amplitude, angle, frequency of analog channels - Functional measurands - Binary signals Event list Operating instructions Disturbance recorder information Diagnostic information Acknowledgment functions - Resetting LEDs - Resetting latched outputs - Event erasing - Warm start.
REG316*4 is able to communicate with a station monitoring and evaluation system (SMS) or a station control system (SCS) via an optical fibre link. The corresponding serial interface permits events, measurements, disturbance recorder data and protection settings to be read and sets of parameter settings to be switched. Using the LON bus permits in addition the exchange of binary information between the individual bay controllers, e.g. signals for station interlocking.
Using the process bus type MVB, remote inand output units 500RIO11 can be connected to the RE.316*4 terminals. The input and output channels can be extended to a large number by using the RIO580 remote input/output system. Installing the 500RIO11 I/O units close to the process reduces the wiring dramatically, since they are accessible via fibreoptic link from the RE.316*4 terminals. Analog signals can also be connected to the system via the 500AXM11 from the RIO580 family: DC current
Built-in HMI
The front HMI unit serves primarily for the signalling of actual events, measurands and diagnostic data. Settings are not displayed.
4...20 mA 0...20 mA -20...20 mA 0...10 V -10...10 V
DC voltage
Temp. sensor Pt100, Pt250, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni250, Ni1000.
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 9
RE.316*4s self-diagnosis and supervision functions ensure maximum availability not only of the protection terminal itself, but also of the power system it is protecting. Hardware failures are immediately signalled by an alarm contact. In particular, the external and internal auxiliary supplies are continuously supervised. The correct function and tolerance of the A/D converter are tested by cyclically converting two reference voltages. Special algorithms regularly check the processors memories (background functions). A watchdog supervises the execution of the programs. An important advantage of the extensive selfdiagnosis and supervision functions is that periodic routine maintenance and testing are reduced.
Supporting software
The operator program facilitates configuration and setting of the protection, listing parameters, reading events and listing the various internal diagnostic data. The evaluation programs REVAL and E_wineve (Windows NT/Windows 2000) are available for viewing and evaluating the disturbances stored by the disturbance recorder. Where the disturbance data are transferred via the communications system to the disturbance recorder evaluation station, the file transfer program WinCom (Windows NT/ Windows 2000) is also used. The program XSCON (MS Windows) is available for conversion of the RE.316*4s disturbance recorder data to ABBs test set XS92b format. This enables reproduction of electrical quantities recorded during the disturbance.
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 10

Number of inputs according to version, max. 9 analog inputs (voltages and currents, 4 mm2 terminals) Rated frequency fN Rated current IN Thermal rating of current circuit continuous for 10 s for 1 s dynamic (half period) Rated voltage UN Thermal rating of voltage circuit continuous Burden per phase current inputs voltage inputs VT fuse characteristic 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A, 2 A or 5 A 4 x IN 30 x IN 100 x IN 250 x IN (peak) 100 V or 200 V 2.2 x UN <0.1 VA at IN = 1 A <0.3 VA at IN = 5 A <0.25 VA at UN Z acc. to DIN/VDE 0660 or equivalent

Tripping relays No. of contacts 2 relays per I/O unit 316DB61 or 316DB62 with 2 N/O contacts each 1.5 mm2 terminals 300 V AC or V DC 5A 30 A 250 A 3300 W
Max. operating voltage Continuous rating Make and carry for 0.5 s Surge for 30 ms Making power at 110 V DC Breaking capacity for L/R = 40 ms Breaking current with 1 contact at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC Breaking current with 2 contacts in series at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC Signalling contacts No. of contacts
1.5 A 0.3 A 0.1 A 5A 1A 0.3 A 6, 10 or 8 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63), 1 contact per sig. relay with 1.5 mm2 terminals Each interface unit equipped with 1 C/O contact and all others N/O contacts 250 V AC or V DC 5A 15 A 100 A 550 W 0.5 A 0.1 A 0.04 A
Max. operating voltage Continuous rating Make and carry for 0.5 s Surge for 30 ms Making power at 110 VDC Breaking current for L/R = 40 ms at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 11

No. of optocouplers Input voltage Threshold voltage Max. input current Operating time 8, 4 or 14 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63) 18 to 36 V DC / 36 to 75 V DC / 82 to 312 V DC / 175 to 312 V DC 10 to 17 V DC / 20 to 34 V DC /40 to 65 V DC / 140 to 175 V DC <12 mA 1 ms

Choice of display modes: Accumulates each new disturbance Latching with reset by next pick-up Latching only if protection trips with reset by next pick-up Signalling without latching Colours 1 green (standby) 1 red (trip) 6 or 14 yellow (all other signals)
The user can assign the LEDs to protection functions.


RS232C interface Data transfer rate Protocol Electrical/optical converter (optional) PCC interface Number PCC (optional) Interbay bus protocol Process bus protocol (interbay and process bus can be used concurrently) LON bus Data transfer rate MVB bus Data transfer rate Event memory Capacity Time marker resolution Time definition without synchronizing Engineering interface 9 pin Sub-D female 9600 Bit/s SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 316BM61b 2 plug-in sockets for type III cards LON or MVB (part of IEC 61375) MVB (part of IEC 61375) PCC with fibre-optical port, ST connectors 1.25 MBit/s PCC with redundant fibre-optical port, ST connectors 1.5 Mbit/s 256 events 1 ms <10 s per day integrated software interface for signal engineering with SigTOOL
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 12

Supply voltage Voltage range Voltage interruption bridging time Fuse rating Load on station battery at normal operation (1 relay energized) during a fault (all relays energized) with 1 I/O unit with 2 I/O units with 3 I/O units with 4 I/O units Additional load of the options SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or LON interface MVB interface Buffer time of the event list and fault recorder data at loss of auxiliary supply 36 to 312 V DC >50 ms 4 A <20 W
<22 W <27 W <32 W <37 W 1.5 W 2.5 W >2 days (typ. 1 month)

Temperature range operation storage Humidity Seismic test Leakage resistance Insulation test -10 C to +55 C -40 C to +85 C 93%, 40 C, 4 days 5 g, 30 s, 1 to 33 Hz (1 octave/min) >100 M, 500 V DC 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min 1 kV across open contacts 5 kV, 1.2/50 s 1.0/2.5 kV, Cl. 3; 1MHz, 400 Hz rep.freq. 2/4 kV, Cl. 4 6/8 kV (10 shots), Cl. 3 EN 60255-6 (1994), IEC 60255-6 (1988) IEC 60068-2-3 (1969) IEC 60255-21-3 (1995), IEEE 344 (1987) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000), EN 60950 (1995) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000) * IEC 60255-22-1 (1988), ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (1989) EN 61000-4-4 (1995), IEC 61000-4-4 (1995) EN 61000-4-2 (1996), IEC 61000-4-2 (2001) EN 61000-4-8 (1993), IEC 61000-4-8 (1993) EN 61000-4-6 (1996) EN 61000-4-6 (1996), EN 61000-4-3 (1996), IEC 61000-4-3 (1996), ENV 50204 (1995) EN 61000-6-2 (2001), EN 55011 (1998), CISPR 11 (1990)
Emission
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 13

Weight Size N1 casing Size N2 casing Methods of mounting approx. 10 kg approx. 12 kg semi-flush with terminals at rear surface with terminals at rear 19" rack mounting, height 6U, width N1: 225.2 mm (1/2 19" rack). Width N2: 271 mm. IP 50 (IP 20 if MVB PCC are used) IPXXB for terminals.
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 14
Technical Data Functions

Thermal image for the 1st. order model. Single or three-phase measurement with detection of maximum phase value. Settings: Base current IB Alarm stage Tripping stage Thermal time constant Accuracy of the thermal image 0.5 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N 2 to 500 min in steps of 0.1 min 5% N (at fN) with protection CTs 2% N (at fN) with core-balance CTs

Over and undercurrent detection. Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase current. 2nd. harmonic restraint for high inrush currents. Settings: Pick-up current Delay Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio overcurrent undercurrent Max. operating time without intentional delay Inrush restraint pick-up setting reset ratio 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% or 0.02 IN >94 % (for max. function) <106 % (for min. function) 60 ms optional 0.1 I2h/I1h 0.8

Over and undervoltage detection Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase voltage Also applied for detection of: stator ground faults (95%) rotor ground faults (requires external measuring bridge YWX111 and coupling capacitors) interturn faults Settings: Pick-up voltage Delay Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio (U 0.1 UN) overvoltage undervoltage Max. operating time without intentional delay 0.01 to 2.0 UN in steps of 0.002 UN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 2% or 0.005 UN >96% (for max. function) <104% (for min. function) 60 ms
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 15

Three-phase measurement Suppression of DC- and high-frequency components Definite time characteristic Voltage memory feature for close faults Settings: Current Angle Delay tWait Memory duration Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) Voltage input range Voltage memory range Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage memory Frequency dependence of angle measurement at voltage memory Max. response time without delay 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN -180 to +180 in steps of 15 0.02 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 s to 20 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% or 0.02 IN >94% 5 0.005 to 2 UN <0.005 UN 20 0.5/Hz 60 ms

Three-phase measurement Suppression of DC- and high-frequency components Inverse time characteristic Voltage memory feature for close faults Settings: Current I-Start Angle Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long-time earth fault k1-setting t-min IB-value tWait Memory duration Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) Accuracy class of the operating time acc. to British Standard 142 Voltage input range Voltage memory range Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage memory Frequency dependence of angle measurement at voltage memory Max. response time without delay 14 IB in steps of 0.01 IB -180+180 in steps of 15 t = k1 / ((I/IB)C- 1) c = 0,02 c=1 c=2 c=1 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 s to 20 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% >94% 5 E 10 0.005 to 2 UN <0.005 UN 20 0.5/Hz 60 ms
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 16
Technical Data Functions (contd)

Single-phase measurement of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power Choice of measuring phase-to-ground or phase-to phase voltages Suppression of DC components and harmonics in current and voltage Compensation of phase errors in main and input CTs and VTs Settings: Phase-angle Reference value of the power SN Refer to Table 46 for accuracy. -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1 0.2 to 2.5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN

Three-phase measurement of voltage (star or delta), current, frequency, real and apparent power and power factor. Two independent impulse counter inputs for calculation of interval and accumulated energy. The threephase measurement and the impulse counters can be used independently and may also be disabled. This function may be configured four times. Settings: Angle Reference value for power t1-Interval Scale factor of power Max. impulse frequency Min. impulse duration Accuracy of time interval See Table 46 for accuracy -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1 0.2 to 2.5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN 1 min., 2 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 60 min. or 120 min. 0.0001 to 1 25 Hz 10 ms 100 ms
Table 17: Generator differential (87G)

Features: Three-phase function Current-adaptive characteristic High stability for external faults and current transformer saturation Settings: g-setting (basic sensitivity) v-setting (slope) Max. trip time - for I >2 IN - for I 2 IN Accuracy of pick-up value of g 0.1 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.05 IN 0.25 or 0.5 30 ms 50 ms 5% IN (at fN)
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 17
Table 18: Transformer differential (87T)

Features: For two- and three-winding transformers Three-phase function Current-adaptive characteristic High stability for external faults and current transformer saturation No auxiliary transformers necessary because of vector group and CT ratio compensation Inrush restraint using 2nd harmonic Settings: g-setting v-setting b-setting Max. trip time (protected transformer loaded) - for I > 2 IN - for I 2 IN Accuracy of pick-up value Reset conditions Differential protection definitions: 30 ms 50 ms 5% IN (at fN) I <0.8 g-setting 0.1 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.1 IN 0.25 or 0.5 1.25 to 5 in steps of 0.25 IN
I = I1+ I2 + I3 IH =
0
I 1 I 2 cos
for cos 0 for cos <0
= arg (I1' - I2')
2-winding: 3-winding:
I 1 ' = I1 , I 2 ' = I2 I1' = MAX (I1, 2, 3) I2' = I1 + I2 + I3 - I1'
Fig. 5
Differential protection characteristic

REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 18
Table 20: Voltage-controlled overcurrent (51-27)

Features: Maximum current value memorized after start Reset of function after voltage return or after trip Single- or three-phase measurement for current Positive-sequence voltage evaluation Settings: Current Voltage Delay Hold time Accuracy of pick-up value Reset ratio Starting time 0.5 to 20 IN in steps of 0.1 IN 0.4 to 1.1 UN in steps of 0.01 UN 0.5 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.1 to 10 s in steps of 0.02 s 5% (at fN) >94% 80 ms

Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest phase current Stable response to transients Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long time inverse or RXIDG characteristic Settings: Number of phases Base current IB Pick-up current Istart Min. time setting tmin k1 setting Accuracy classes for the operating time according to BritishStandard 142 RXIDG characteristic Reset ratio 1 or 3 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 1 to 4 IB in steps of 0.01 IB 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s E 5.0 4% (1 - I/80 IB) >94 % t = k1 / ((I/IB)C- 1) c = 0.02 c=1 c=2 c=1 t = 5.8 - 1.35 In (I/IB)

Neutral current measurement (derived externally or internally) Stable response to transients Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long time inverse or RXIDG characteristic Settings: Number of phases Base current IB Pick-up current Istart Min. time setting tmin 1 or 3 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 1 to 4 IB in steps of 0.01 IB 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s t = k1 / ((I/IB)C - 1) c = 0.02 c=1 c=2 c=1 t = 5.8 - 1.35 In (I/IB)
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 19
k1 setting Accuracy classes for the operating time according to British Standard 142 RXIDG characteristic Reset ratio
0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s E 5.0 4% (1 - I/80 IB) >94%
Table 23: Negative phase sequence current (46)

Features: Protection against unbalanced load Definite time delay Three-phase measurement Settings: Negative phase-sequence current (I2) Delay Accuracy of pick-up value Reset ratio I2 0.2 IN I2 <0.2 IN Starting time 0.02 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.5 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 2% IN (at fN, I IN) (with measuring transformers) >94% >90% 80 ms
Table 24: Instantaneous overvoltage prot. function (59, 27) with peak value evaluation
Features: Evaluation of instantaneous values, therefore extremely fast and frequency-independent on a wide scale Storing of the highest instantaneous value after start No suppression of DC components No suppression of harmonics 1- or 3phase Maximum value detection for multi-phase functions Variable lower limiting frequency fmin Settings: Voltage Delay Limiting fmin Accuracy of pick-up value (at 0.08 to 1.1 fN) Reset ratio Max. trip time at no delay (at fN) 0.01 to 2.0 UN in steps of 0.01 UN 0.00 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 25 to 50 Hz in steps of 1 Hz 3% or 0,005 UN >90% (for max. function) <110% (for min. function) <30 ms (for max. function) <50 ms (for min. function)
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 20
Table 25: Underimpedance (21)

Features: Detection of two- and three-phase short circuits (back-up protection) Single- or three-phase measurement Circular characteristic centered at origin of R-X diagram Lowest phase value evaluation for three-phase measurement
Fig. 6 Settings:
Underimpedance protection function characteristics 0.025 to 2.5 UN/lN in steps of 0.001 UN/lN 0.2 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s <106% <50 ms (at fN) 5%
Impedance Delay Reset ratio Starting time Accuracy of pick-up values
Table 26: Minimum reactance (40)

Features: Detection of loss-of-excitation failure of synchronous machines Single- or three-phase measurement Out-of-step detection with additional time delay or count logic Circular characteristic Tripping possible inside or outside the circle
Fig. 7 Settings:
Minimum reactance protection function characteristics -5 to 0 UN/lN in steps of 0.01 UN/lN -2.5 to +2.5 UN/lN in steps of 0.01 UN/lN 0.2 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s -180 to +180 in steps of 5 5% of highest absolute value of XA, XB (at fN) (related to origin of circle), 105% for min. function, 95% for max. function. <50 ms
Reactance XA Reactance XB Delay Angle Accuracy of pick-up values Reset ratio Starting time
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 21
Table 27: Stator overload (49S)

Features: Single- or three-phase measurement Operating characteristics according to ASA-C50.13 Highest phase value for three-phase measurement Wide time multiplier setting.
Fig. 8 Settings:
Stator overload protection function characteristics 0.5 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s 1.0 to 1.6 IB in steps of 0.01 IB 1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s 10 to 2000 s in steps of 10 s 100 to 2000 s in steps of 10 s 10 to 2000 s in steps of 10 s 5% (at fN), 2% (at fN) with measuring transformer 80 ms
Base current (IB) Time multiplier k1 Pick-up current (Istart) tmin tg tmax treset Accuracy of current measurement Starting time
Table 28: Rotor overload (49R)

Features: Same as stator overload function, but three-phase measurement Settings: Same as for stator overload function
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 22
Table 29: Inverse time negative phase sequence current (46)

Features: Protection against unbalanced load Inverse time delay Three-phase measurement
Fig. 9
Inverse time negative phase sequence current protection function characteristics 0.5 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 5 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.02 to 0.20 in steps of 0.01 1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s 500 to 2000 s in steps of 1 s 5 to 2000 s in steps of 1 s 2% (at fN) with measuring transformers 80 ms
Settings: Base current (IB) Time multiplier k1 Factor k2 (pick-up) tmin tmax treset Accuracy of NPS current (I2) measurement Starting time

Features: Maximum or minimum function (over-, underfrequency) Minimum voltage blocking Settings: Frequency Delay Minimum voltage Accuracy of pick-up value Reset ratio Starting time 40 to 65 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 to 0.8 UN in steps of 0.1 UN 30 mHz at UN and fN 100% <130 ms
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 23

Features: Combined pick-up with frequency criterion possible Blocking by undervoltage Settings: df/dt Frequency Delay Minimum voltage Accuracy of df/dt (at 0.9 to 1.05 fN) Accuracy of frequency (at 0.9 to 1.05 fN) Reset ratio df/dt -10 to +10 Hz/s in steps of 0.1 Hz/s 40 to 55 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz at fN = 50 Hz 50 to 65 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz at fN = 60 Hz 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 to 0.8 UN in steps of 0.1 UN 0.1 Hz/s 30 mHz 95% for max. function 105% for min. function
Table 32: Overexcitation (24)

Features: U/f measurement Minimum voltage blocking Settings: Pick-up value Delay Frequency range Accuracy (at fN) Reset ratio Starting time 0.2 to 2 UN/fN in steps of 0.01 UN/fN 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.5 to 1.2 fN 3% or 0.01 UN/fN >97% (max.), <103% (min.) 120 ms
Table 33: Overexcitation function with inverse time delay (24)

Features: Single-phase measurement Inverse time delay according to IEEE Guide C37.91-1985 Setting made by help of table settings Settings: Table settings Start value U/f tmin tmax Reset time Reference voltage Accuracy of pick-up value Frequency range Reset ratio Starting time U/f values: (1.05; 1.10 to 1.50) UN/fN 1.05 to 1.20 UN/fN in steps of 0.01 UN/fN 0.01 to 2 min in steps of 0.01 min 5 to 100 min in steps of 0.1 min 0.2 to 100 min in steps of 0.1 min 0.8 to 1.2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN 3% UN/fN (at fN) 0.5 to 1.2 fN 100% <120 ms
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 24
Table 34: Voltage balance function (60)

Features: Comparing of the voltage amplitudes of two groups of voltage inputs (line 1, line 2) 1- or 3-phase voltage measurement Signalling of the group having the lower voltage Evaluation of the voltage differences per phase for the 3-phase function and logic OR connection for the tripping decision Variable tripping and reset delay Suppression of d. c. components Suppression of harmonics
Fig. 10 Settings:
Tripping characteristic Voltage comparison (shown for the phases R and the setting value volt. diff. = 0.2 . UN) 0.1 to 0.5 UN in steps of 0.05 UN 0.00 to 1.0 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.1 to 2.0 s in steps of 0.01 s >90% 2% or 0.005 UN 1 or 3 50 ms phase R voltage amplitude, voltage channel 1 (line 1) phase R voltage amplitude, voltage channel 2 (line 2)
Voltage difference Trip delay Reset delay Reset ratio Accuracy of pick-up value (at fN) Numbers of phases Maximum tripping time without delay U1R: U2R:
For 3-phase function: the characteristic is valid accordingly for the phases S and T
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 25
Table 35: Dead machine protection (51, 27)

Features: Quick separation from network at accidental energization of generator (e.g. at stand-still or on turning gear) Instant overcurrent measurement Voltage-controlled overcurrent function e.g. blocked at voltage values >0.85 UN This function does not exist in the library, it must be combined from the voltage, current and time function Settings: Voltage Reset delay Current Delay 0.01 to 2 UN in steps of 0.002 UN 0 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.02 IN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Table 36: 100% Stator earth fault protection (64S)

Features: Protection of the entire stator winding, including star points, even at standstill. Works also for most of the operating conditions. Also suitable when 2 earthings (groundings) are in the protection zone Permanent supervision of the alsostate of the insulation Based on the earth (ground) voltage displacement principle and calculation of the earth (ground) fault resistance Alarm and tripping values are entered, resp. measured and displayed in k Type of earthings (groundings): Star point earthing with resistors (requires REX011) Star point earthing with grounding transformer (requires REX011-1) Earthing transformers on generator terminals (requires REX011-2) Settings: Alarm stage Delay Tripping stage Delay RES Number of star points RES-2. starpoint Reset ratio Accuracy Starting time Functional requirements: - max.earthing current - stator earthing capacity - stator earthing resistance RPS - stator earthing resistance RES (All values are based on the starpoint side) The actual earthing resistances RES + RPS have to be calculated in accordance with the Users Guide: The 100% stator earth fault protection function always requires an injection unit type REX010, an injection transformer block type REX011 and a 95% stator earth fault protection function. I0 <20A (recommended I0 = 5A) 0.5 F to 6 F 130 to 500 700 to 5 k (4.5 x RPS) 100 to 20 k in steps of 0.1k 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s 100 to 20 k in steps of 0.1k 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s 400 to 5 k in steps of 0.01k 2 900 to 30 k in steps of 0.01k 110% for setting values of 10 k 0.1 k to 10 k: <10% 1.5 s
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 26
Table 37: Rotor earth fault protection (64R)

Features: Continuous supervision of the insulation level and calculation of the earthing (grounding) resistance Alarm and tripping values are entered resp. measured and displayed in k Settings: Alarm stage Delay Tripping stage Delay RER Coupling capacity Reset ratio Accuracy Starting time Functional requirements: - total rotor earthing capacity - rotor earthing resistance RPR - rotor earthing resistance RER - coupling capacity - time constant 200 nF to 1F 100 to 500 900 to 5 k 4 F to 10 F T = RER, x C = 3 to 10 ms 100 to 25 k in steps of 0.1k 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s 100 to 25 k in steps of 0.1k 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s 900 to 5 k in steps of 0.01k 2 F to 10 F 110% 0.1 k to 10 k <10% 1.5 s
The actual earthing resistance RER + RPR have to be calculated in accordance with the Users Guide. The 100% rotor earth fault protection function always requires an injection unit type REX010 and an injection transformer block type REX011 which are connected to the plant via coupling capacitors.
Table 38: Pole slip protection (78)

Features: Recording the pole wheel movements from 0.2 Hz to 8 Hz Differentiation of the pendulum center inside or outside of the generator-transformer block zone by two independent tripping stages Adjustable warning angle for pole wheel movements Number of slips adjustable before tripping
Fig. 11 Settings:
Characteristic of the function 0 to 5.0 UN/lN in steps of 0.001 -5.0 to 0 UN/lN in steps of 0.001 0 to 5.0 UN/lN in steps of 0.001 60 to 270 in steps of 1 0 to 180 in steps of 1
ZA (system impedance) ZB (generator impedance) ZC (impedance step 1) Phi warning angle
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 27
tripping angle n1 n2 t-reset
0 to 180 in steps of 1 0 to 20 in steps of 1 0 to 20 in steps of 1 0.5 s to 25 s in steps of 0.01 s

Measurement of real or apparent power Protection function based on either real or apparent power measurement Reverse power protection Over and underpower Single, two or three-phase measurement Suppression of DC components and harmonics in current and voltage Compensation of phase errors in main and input CTs and VTs Settings: Power pick-up Characteristic angle Delay Phase error compensation Rated power SN Reset ratio Accuracy of the pick-up setting -0.1 to 1.2 SN in steps of 0.005 SN -180 to +180 in steps of 5 0.05 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s -5 to +5 in steps of 0.1 0.5 to 2.5 UN IN in steps of 0.001 UN IN 30% to 170% in steps of 1% 10% of setting or 2% UN IN (for protection CTs) 3% of setting or 0.5% UN IN (for core-balance CTs) 70 ms

Features Individual phase current recognition Single or three-phase operation External blocking input Two independent time steps Remote tripping adjustable simultaneously with retripping or back-up tripping Possibility of segregated activating/deactivating each trip (Redundant trip, retrip, back-up trip and remote trip). Settings Current Delay t1 (repeated trip) Delay t2 (back-up trip) Delay tEFS (End fault protection) Reset time for retrip Reset time for back-up trip Pulse time for remote trip 0.2 to 5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 28
Number of phases Accuracy of pick-up current (at fN) Reset ratio of current measurement Reset time (for power system time constants up to 300 ms and short-circuit currents up to 40 IN)
1 or 3 15% >85% 28 ms (with main CTs TPX) 28 ms (with main CTs TPY and current setting 1,2 IN) 38 ms (with main CTs TPY and current setting 0,4 IN)

Max. 9 CT/VT channels Max. 16 binary channels Max. 12 analog channels of internal measurement values 12 samples per period (sampling frequency 600 or 720 Hz at a rated frequency of 50/60 Hz) Available recording time for 9 CT/VT- and 8 binary signals approximately 5 s Recording initiated by any binary signal, e.g. the general trip signal. Data format Dynamic range Resolution Settings: Recording periods Pre-event Event Post-event 40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms 100 to 3000 ms in steps of 50 ms 40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms EVE 70 x IN, 2.2 x UN 12 bits
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 29
Ancillary functions
Table 42: Logic


A plausibility check function is provided for each three-phase current and three-phase voltage input which performs the following: Determination of the sum and phase sequence of the three-phase currents or voltages Provision for comparison of the sum of the phase values with a corresponding current or voltage sum applied to an input Function blocks for currents exceeding 2 x IN, respectively voltages exceeding 1.2 UN Accuracy of the pick-up setting at rated frequency Reset ratio Current plausibility settings: Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation current or between internal and external summation currents Amplitude compensation for summation CT Delay Voltage plausibility settings: Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation voltage or between internal and external summation voltages Amplitude compensation for summation VT Delay 2% IN (at 0.2 to 1.2 IN 2% UN (at 0.2 to 1.2 UN >90% >95% (at U >0.1 UN or I >0.1 IN)
0.05 to 1.2 UN in steps of 0.05 UN - 2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s

The runtime supervision feature enables checking the opening and closing of all kinds of breakers (circuitbreakers, isolators, ground switches...). Failure of a breaker to open or close within an adjustable time results in the creation of a corresponding signal for further processing. Settings Setting time Accuracy of run time supervision 0 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 2 ms
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 30
Apparent power Power factor Frequency SN = 3 UN IN (dreiphasig)
0.5% SN 0.01 0.1% fN
3% SN 0.03 0.1% fN
SN = 1/3 3 UN IN (einphasig)
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 31
Wiring diagram
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE INPUTS (ACC. TO K-CODE)
SIGNALLING
OPTOCOUPLER INPUTS
TRIP
CD SUPPLY
Fig. 12
Typical wiring diagram of REG316*4 in size N1 casing with two input/output units 316DB62
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 32
Ordering
Specify: Quantity Ordering number (Basic version ordering number + stand-alone unit ordering number, or only stand alone unit ordering number) ADE code + key (see table below) The following basic versions can be ordered: Stand-alone units REG316*4 with built-in HMI (see table below) HESG448750M0004
Table 47: REG316*4 basic versions

VTDT(EFStat) OCDT (REF) VTDT(EFrot) EFStat100 X OC Inv Dir EFRot100 Basic-SW X X X X X X X X X X OCDT Dir
LossEx UZ
U/f(inv)
VTInst
Power
VTDT
Relay ID code
>I<U
A*B0C*D*U0K65E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR100 T*** A*B0C*D0U*K63E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR200 T*** A*B*C0D0U*K66E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR300 T*** A*B0C0D0U*K64E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR400 T*** A*B*C*D0U*K61E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR500 T*** A*B*C0D0U*K62E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR600 T*** A*B0C0D0U*K67E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR700 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X
X X
Legend * OCDT(REF) OCDT Dir OC Inv Dir VTDT VTDT (EFStat) VTDT (EFrot) VTinst >I<U Freq. df/dt U/f(inv) Vbal Power LossEx UZ Polsl DiffT DiffG EFStat100 EFRot100 required sub-codes in Table 48: definite time over current function for high-impedance differential protection Directional definite time overcurrent protection Directional inverse time overcurrent function definite time voltage function definite time voltage function for stator ground fault protection definite time voltage function for rotor ground fault protection instantaneous overvoltage function with peak value evaluation combined overcurrent undervoltage frequency protection (minimum, maximum) rate-of-change of frequency protection overexcitation protection with inverse time delay voltage balance protection power function minimum reactance protection minimum impedance protection pole slip protection transformer differential protection generator differential protection 100% stator ground fault protection 100% rotor ground fault protection
DiffG
Polsl
DiffT
Freq
Vbal
df/dt
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 33
Basic-SW OCDT OCInst IoInv TH OCInv Ucheck Icheck UlfPQ MeasMod Delay Count Logic NPSDT NPSInv OLStat OLRot CAP316 DRec BFP RTS
basic software including the following functions: definite time overcurrent overcurrent protection with peak value evaluation inverse time ground fault current thermal overload inverse time overcurrent protection voltage plausibility (only if 3-phase voltage is available) current plausibility metering (only if at least 1 voltage is available) three-phase measuring module delay/integrator counter logic interconnection negative phase sequence current protection inverse time negative phase sequence current protection stator overload rotor overload project-specific control logic disturbance recorder breaker failure protection runtime supervision
All the functions of the basic version can be applied in any combination providing the maximum capacity of the processor and the number of analog channels is not exceeded.
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 34
Ordering (contd)

Sub code AA0 A1 A2 A5 B0 B1 B2 B5 C0 C1 C2 C5 D0 D1 D2 D5 U0 U1 U2 K61 Significance none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 100 V AC 200 V AC 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 CTs (3ph Code C-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 VTs (3ph delta Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 CTs (3ph Code C-) 3 VTs (3ph delta Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 VTs (3ph delta Code U-) 3 VTs (3ph delta Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 CTs (3ph Code C-) 3 CTs (3ph Code D-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 MTs (3ph Code B-) 3 VTs (3ph delta Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 VTs (special for 100% EFP) 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LED's 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LED's 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays 8 LED's 1. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 see previous table Description rated current Remarks state
B-
rated current
state
C-
rated current
state
D-
rated current
state
U-
rated voltage
state
K-
see previous table
K62
K63
K64
K65
K66
K67
E-
E1
E2
E3
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 35
I-
I3 I4 I5 I9 F0 F1
82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LED's 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LED's 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays 8 LED's none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC no comm. protocol SPA IEC 60870-5-103 LON MVB (part of IEC 61375)
1. binary input/output unit optocoupler input voltage
state
F-
see previous table
F2
F3
J-
J0 J3 J4 J5 J9 Q0 Q1
Q-
3. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 3. binary input/output unit Type 316DB62 3. binary input/output unit Type 316DB63
see previous table
Q2
Q3 VV0 V3 V4 V5 V9 R0 R1
state 3. binary input/output unit optocoupler input voltage
R-
4. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 4. binary input/output unit Type 316DB62 4. binary input/output unit Type 316DB63 4. binary input/output unit optocoupler input voltage
see previous table
R2
R3 WW0 W3 W4 W5 W9 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y41)
state
Y-
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 36
Ordering (contd)
NM-
N1 N2 M1 M51) SR000 to SS990 T000 T001x to T999x
casing width 225.2 mm casing width 271 mm Semi-flush mounting Surface mounting, standard terminals basic versions REG316*4
S-
T-
none FUPLA logic
Customer-specific logic x = version of the FUPLA logic
Defined by ABB Switzerland Ltd
1)
The MVB interface (for interbay or process bus) is not applicable for the surface-mounted version
The order number has been defined for the basic version as above und the required accessories can be ordered according to the following Table.
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 37

Assembly kits Item Description 19"-mounting plate for hinged frames, light-beige for use with: 1REG316*4 (size 1 casing) 2 REG316*4 (size 1 casing) 1 REG316*4 (size 2 casing REG316*4 size 1 surface mounting kit REG316*4 size 2 surface mounting kit PCC card interface Type For interbay bus: PCCLON1 SET 500PCC02 For process bus: 500PCC02 Type 316BM61b 316BM61b 316BM61b Protocol LON MVB MVB Connector ST (bajonet) ST (bajonet) ST (bajonet) Optical fibre* G/G G/G G/G Gauge ** 62.5/125 62.5/125 62.5/125 Order No. HESG448614R0001 HESG448735R0231 HESG 448735R0232 Order No.
* receiver Rx / transmitter Tx, G = glass, P = plastic Human machine interface Type CAP2/316 * Optical fibre PC connecting cable Type 500OCC02 communication cable for device with LDU Disturbance recorder evaluation program Type, description REVAL English REVAL German E_wineve E_wineve E_wineve E_wineve 3-Disk 3-Disk English/German English/German English/German English/German Description
**optical fibre conductor gauge in m Order No. German/English 1MRB260030M0001
Installation CD
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 38
Mounting element
Rear view
219 1
Panel cutout
Fig. 13
254 1
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 39
Mounting element
Rear view
Panel cutout
= Instr. transformer inputs cross section = 4 mm2 A to H = Commands, input and output signals 2 cross section = 1.5 mm H1 = Auxiliary voltage T
Fig. 14
Semi-flush mounting, rear connections. Size N2 casing
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 40
Fig. 15
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 41
Fig. 16
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 42
Example of an order
Rated current 1 A, rated voltage 100 VAC 3-phase voltages, 6-phase currents 110 VDC aux. supply 4 heavy duty relays (3 tripping, 1 CB closing) 20 signalling relays 8 optocoupler inputs (110 VDC) 1 relay for 19" rack mounting Communication with the station control system (e.g. LON) Operator program on CD The corresponding order is as follows: 1 REG316*4, HESG448750M0004 110 V DC aux. supply Optocoupler input voltage 110 VDC Rated current 1 A Rated voltage 100 VDC 1 mounting kit HESG324310P1
1 PC card LON 1 CD, RE.216 / RE.316*4 1MRB260030M0001 1 PC connecting cable (if not already available) 1MRB380084-R1 Alternatively, the relay ID code may be given instead. In this case the order would be: 1 REG316*4, A1B0C1D0U1K63E2I3F2J3Q0V0R0W0Y1N1M1SR200T0 1 mounting kit HESG324310P1 1 CD, RE.216 / RE.316*4 1MRB260030M0001 1 PC card HESG448614R1 1 PC connecting cable (if not already available) 1MRB380084-R1 Relay ID codes are marked on all relays. The significance of the sub-codes can be seen from Table 48:
References
Operating instructions (printed) Operating instructions (CD) Reference list REG316/REG316*4 Data sheet CAP316 Data sheet REX010/011 Data sheet Test Set XS92b Data sheet SigTOOL Data sheet RIO580
1MRB520049-Uen 1MRB260030M0001 1MRB520210-Ren 1MRB520167-Ben 1MRB520123-Ben 1MRB520006-Ben 1MRB520158-Ben 1MRB520176-Ben
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 43
REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 44
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Auxiliary unit for REG216/316*4 for 100% stator and rotor earth fault protection
REX010/011
1MRB520123-Ben
Page 1 Issued: March 2003 Changed since: June 2002 Data subject to change without notice
Features
Compact design Perfectly matched for the REG216/ REG316*4 Provides protection of the whole stator winding including the neutral point Continuous supervision of the injection voltage and the primary earthing system Suitable for two separate earthing points within the protected zone Continuous self-supervision of the injection signal with respect to amplitude and frequency
Auxiliary DC power supply from station battery from 36 to 312 V DC Applicable for all commonly used earthingand excitation-systems for generators Continuous supervision of the insulation resistance and calculation of the earth fault resistance The principle is based on the well-known offset method, using injection of a low frequency signal Suitable for updating existing plants Insensitive to external disturbances
Application
The unit is applied for the protection of generators in block configuration for earth faults on the generator side. For the implementation of the 100% stator and rotor earth fault protection using a REG216/316*4, an injection unit REX010 and the injection trans-
former REX011 are required. This injection equipment can be applied to all common generator earthing- and excitation-systems. The protection is active during all states of the machine, standstill as well as run-up and run-down.
REX010/011
1MRB520123-Ben
Page 2
Design
General
The earth fault protection is based on the injection of a coded signal. The resulting offset voltage is utilized to calculate the earth resistance (Rf). The injection signal is produced in the injection unit REX010 and applied to the generator through the transformer unit REX011. For the coupling to the protected unit resistors (RE, RP) are used. For the rotor earth fault protection two capacitors are required in addition. The measurement signals for earth fault protection are processed by the REG216 or the REG316*4 respectively. The equipment described protects 100% of the generator stator winding. Two indepen-
dent protection functions are applied: one for 95% and one, using a different algorithm, for 100% of the stator winding. The 100% function is calculating the earth resistance and the 95% function is measuring the neutral voltage displacement of the generator. a) The 100% function protects 35% of the stator windings from the neutral point for Rf = 0 and I0max = 15 A b) The 95% function (U>) protects 95% of the generator stator winding from the terminals. This results in an overlap (redundancy) of the two protection functions as seen in Fig. 1. The 100% function increases in sensitivity with increasing earth fault resistance and decreasing earth fault current.
Overlap 95% Stator earth fault protection 100% Stator earth fault function Rf = 0 Winding Running machine Rf > 0
Neutral point
Fig. 1
Terminal
At standstill the full stator winding (100%) is protected by the 100% function as seen in Fig. 2. At the same time the entire excitation winding is protected for earth faults. Because of the excellent rejection of external interferences, the REX010/011 can be applied to all types of excitation systems including thyristor type.
100% Stator earth fault function
Fig. 2
Hardware
The protection equipment consists of the following units (Figures 4 8): REG216/316*4: Numerical generator protection REX010: Injection unit REX011: Injection transformer unit with auxiliary contactor In addition the following components are required: - Earthing resistors in the generator neutral point (REs, RPs) and in the excitation circuit (REr, RPr) - Coupling capacitors in the excitation circuit of the rotor
- Voltage transformers The injection unit (REX010) together with the injection transformer (REX011) produces three coded square wave signals (Uis, Uir, Ui) with a frequency fN/4. These square wave signals are injected into the protected object via the coupling components. The three square waves have different amplitudes: Uis (Injection signal for the stator), Uir (Injection signal for the rotor) and Ui (reference signal for the REG216/316*4). The injection unit REX010 is connected to the station battery and the injection signal voltage is generated either by the battery or by an internal DC/DC converter.
REX010/011
1MRB520123-Ben
Page 3
The coding is achieved by alternating the transmission of the square wave with a quiescent period, as seen in Fig. 3.
type P8. In the case that the earth fault current exceeds 5 A the contactor will open the input circuit to the injection unit to protect it against high voltages during earth faults near the generator terminals. The 95% function is always active and will detect any earth faults. The resistors RES, RPS are used to provide high-resistance earthing of the generator neutral point and for coupling the injection signal to RPS as well as the measurement signal to RES. A similar arrangement applies for the generator rotor where coupling is made with the resistors RER and RPR; however, two additional capacitors C1 and C2 are required. There are three connection variants for the stator and two for the rotor earth fault protection.
Fig. 3
The REG216/316*4 evaluates and compares the measured injected voltage with the reference voltage during the transmitting period. In the quiescent period the evaluation of possible interferences is active, ensuring the correct protection response. The injection transformer REX011 is equipped with a contactor,
Software
Three protection functions are available in the REG216/316*4 library: - 100% Stator earth fault protection - 95% Stator earth fault protection Stator EFP
the protected zone by including the monitoring of the generator circuit breaker status. The function is capable of measuring the effective value of RES and of the transformation ratio of the voltage transformer while the machine is at standstill. This allows optimizing the function with the actual parameters of the protected machine. Alarm and trip levels are entered and read out in k. Settings: Alarm level Delay Trip level Delay RES Number of neutral points RES-2. neutral point Reset ratio 100 to 20 k 0.2 s to 60s 100 to 20 k 0.2 s to 60 s 250 to 5 k 2 900 to 30 k 110% (with settings of <10 k) 120% (with settings of >10 k) 100 to 10 k: <10% 0 to 100 , 10 k to 20 k: <20% 1.5 s
- Rotor earth fault protection Rotor EFP Overvoltage U>
During the transmitting period, the digital filter algorithms are calculating the instantaneous earth fault resistance from the input signal pairs Uis, Ui and Uir, Ui respectively. During the quiescent period the filtered signals Uis and Uir are examined for interference from the protected object or the connected network. This examination is used to validate the previous calculation of the earth fault resistance. The reference signal Ui is continuously supervised with respect to amplitude and frequency. This ensures that the injection signal is correct and that it has the correct frequency. The primary earth connection of the protected machine is checked through evaluation of the capacitive component of the earth fault current during the transmitting period.
100% Stator earth fault protection function
Accuracy
Operating time
This function consists of an alarm level and a trip level with corresponding signalling and tripping outputs. It is possible to compensate for a second high-resistance earth to neutral point within
Machine and system parameters: - Max. earth fault current l0 <20 A (recommended l0 5 A) - Stator earth capacitance 0.5 F to 6 F
REX010/011
1MRB520123-Ben
Page 4
Software (contd)
- Stator earth resistance RPS - Stator earth - resistance RES - RPS // RES
75 to 500 250 to 5 k (4.5* RPS) >70
REr Coupling capacitance Reset ratio
The effective earth resistances RES, RPS and the transformation ratio of the voltage transformer must be calculated in accordance with the operating instructions. Further details about settings of the various functions can be obtained from the REG216/ 316*4 data sheet.
Rotor earth fault protection
Accuracy
Operating time
900 to 5 k 2 F to 10F 110% (with settings of <10 k) 120% (with settings of >10 k) 100 to 10 k: <10% 0 to 100 , 10 k to 25 k: <20% 1.5 s
This function incorporates an alarm as well as a trip level with separate tripping and signalling outputs. The function allows the measurement of the actual coupling capacitance while the machine is standing still. This measurement permits optimum settings with respect to the protected machine. Alarm and trip levels are entered and read out in k. Settings: Alarm level Delay Trip level Delay 100 to 25 k 0.2 s to 60 s 100 to 25 k 0.2 s to 60 s
Machine and system parameters: - Rotor earth capacitance 200 nF to 1 F - Rotor earth resistance RPr 100 to 500 - Rotor earth 900 to 5 k resistance REr - Coupling capacitance 4 F to 10 F - Time constant T = REr x C = 3 to 10 ms The effective earth resistances REr and RPr must be calculated in accordance with the operating instructions. Further details about settings of the various functions can be obtained from the REG216/ 316*4 data sheet.
Technical data
REX010 Injection unit
The injection unit REX010 is contained in a REG316*4 housing, therefore the specifications of the design details and the general data of the REG316*4 are applicable.
Supply voltage range: Power consumption Optocoupler inputs: Connection terminals: Control and signalling devices: green LED on: red LED on: yellow LED on: ENABLE switch: DISABLE switch: RESET push button: Optocoupler input: 36 to 312 V DC <180 VA 18 to 312 V DC (refer to table below) HDFK (type Phoenix) 4 mm2 Device ready Overload No injection Injection on Injection off Reset after interruption of injection Interruption of injection, reset after interruption of injection
REX010/011
1MRB520123-Ben
Page 5
REX011 Injection transformer

Type of auxiliary transformer Primary voltage Secondary voltage REX011 REX011-1 REX011-2 Auxiliary contactor HV test Dimensions REX011 REX011-1, -2 WU30Z 2 x 110 V 110 V / 50 V Terminals UK5 (Phoenix) 5 mm2 4 x 0.86 V / 50 V Terminals UHV50 (Phoenix) 50 mm2 4 x 6.4 V / 50 V Terminals UHV50 (Phoenix) 50 mm2 P8nax (8 normally open contacts) 2.5 kV common mode Mounting surface, 180 x 290 mm and 245 mm high Mounting surface, 180 x 290 mm and 275 mm high
Diagrams
Fig. 4
Stator earth fault protection, star point
Fig. 5
Stator earth fault protection with earthing transformer on generator terminals
Fig. 6
Stator earth fault protection with earthing transformer on star point
Fig. 7
Single pole rotor connection earthing with resistors
REX010/011
1MRB520123-Ben
Page 6
Diagrams (contd)
Fig. 8
Two pole rotor connection
Fig. 9
Connection diagram REX010/REX011
Dimensions
All dimensions in mm
Front view Fig. 10 REX010 T = Input and output voltages cross-section = 4 mm2 H = Auxiliary supply
Rear view
Front view Fig. 11 REX010
Panel cutout
REX010/011
1MRB520123-Ben
Page 7
Fig. 12
Dimensions REX011, -1, -2
Ordering
Order codes for REX010/REX011 REX011 Injection transformer unit

REX011 REX011-1 REX011-1 REX011-1 REX011-2 REX011-2 REX011-2 RPs >8 m RPs >32 m RPs >128 m RPs >0.45 RPs >1.8 RPs >7.2 HESG 323888 M1 HESG 323888 M11 HESG 323888 M12 HESG 323888 M13 HESG 323888 M21 HESG 323888 M22 HESG 323888 M23 Starpoint earthing with resistors Starpoint earthing with earthing transformer Starpoint earthing with earthing transformer Starpoint earthing with earthing transformer Earthing transformer on generator terminals Earthing transformer on generator terminals Earthing transformer on generator terminals
Fig. 4 Fig. 6 Fig. 6 Fig. 6 Fig. 5 Fig. 5 Fig. 5
If RPs is not yet known when ordering, please order M11 resp. M21. The version required later may be rewired.
REX010 Injection unit

Function Battery voltage Frequency Optocoupler voltage Value 36 to 312 V DC 50 Hz 60 Hz 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC Code U0 F5 F6 I3 I4 I5
Order-No. HESG324426M0001 + Code REX010 offers two options according to the available battery voltage.
REX010/011
1MRB520123-Ben
Page 8
Ordering (contd)
Generator with the earthing transformer at the neutral point (RPs >32 m), system frequency 50 Hz, battery voltage 110 V DC, which is also used for optocoupler inputs. Order description: 1 REX010 - HESG324426M0001 Code U0/ F5 /13 1 REX011- HESG323888M12
Ordering example
The associated earthing resistors as well as the coupling capacitors 2*2 F (Leclanche MIH 800-2) for the rotor earth fault protection may be ordered through ABB Switzerland Ltd. The associated protection package/system REG216/REG316*4 must be ordered separately, according to the appropriate Data Sheet. 1MRK502004-Ben 1MRB520049-Uen 1MRB260030M0001 1MRB520004-Ben 1MRU02005-EN 1MRB260030M0001
References
REG 316*4 Data Sheet REG316*4 Operating Instructions (printed) REG316*4 Operating Instructions (CD) REG216 Data Sheet REG216 Operating Instructions (printed) REG216 Operating Instructions (CD)
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Numerical Line Protection
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 1 Issued: May 2003 Changed: since February 2002 Data subject to change without notice
Features
Application MV and HV systems with distance or longitudinal differential protection as main protection as well as combined in a terminal Overhead lines, cables and transformer feeders. Distance protection Overcurrent or underimpedance starters with polygonal characteristic Five distance zones with polygonal impedance characteristic for forwards and reverse measurement Definite time-overcurrent back-up protection (short-zone protection) VT supervision Power swing blocking System logic - switch-onto-fault - overreach zone Teleprotection - The carrier-aided schemes include: - permissive underreaching transfer tripping - permissive overreaching transfer tripping - blocking scheme with echo and transient blocking functions Load-compensated measurement
- fixed reactance slope - reactance slope dependent on load value and direction (<ZHV) Parallel line compensation Phase-selective tripping for single and three-pole autoreclosure Four independent, user-selectable setting groups Suitable for application with CVTs acc. to IEC 60044. Longitudinal differential protection Independent measurement per phase Single-phase tripping (additional FUPLA logic available) Fast operation (typically 25 ms) Optical fiber data exchange between terminal equipment at 64 kBit/s Provision for transmitting 8 binary signals, e.g. for direct transfer tripping or blocking Continuous supervision of protection signal communication Provision for a power transformer in the zone of protection - phase compensation without interposing CTs - inrush restraint function.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 2
Features (contd)
Earth fault protection Sensitive earth fault protection for ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils Directional comparison function for detecting high-resistance faults in neutral earthing systems Inverse time overcurrent function with four characteristics according to B.S. 142. Current and voltage functions Definite time-overcurrent function with inrush detection Inverse time-overcurrent function with four characteristics according to B.S. 142 and one characteristic identical to the zerosequence relay type RXIDG Directional inverse and definite time overcurrent protection Definite time overvoltage and undervoltage function Thermal overload function. Control and monitoring functions Single and three-phase multi-shot autoreclosure Synchrocheck Breaker failure protection Metering Real and apparent power measurement 2 different measuring functions of voltage, current and frequency Fault location Sequence-of-events records Disturbance recorder Runtime supervision. Distance protection for high-voltage lines (<ZHV) (Identification code SN100 and SN300) Application 220 kV and 380 kV high-voltage lines in grids with grounded star-points Overhead lines and cables.
Distance protection All six fault loops are measured simultaneously (6 systems) allowing the fast detection of evolving faults also in the case of double-circuit lines Fast operation, minimum 21 ms and typically 25 ms, see isochrones below Suitable for application with CVTs according to IEC 60044 Polygonal underimpedance starter with stability against load encroachment Distance measurement with polygonal operating characteristic Two selectable criteria for the differentiation of short circuits with or without earth. Improved detection of the earth fault with application of I2 compared with I0 The three distance zones responsible for the protection of the line are measured simultaneously and oprate without delay - 1 underreaching zone - 1 overreaching zone for comparison schemes - 1 reverse measuring zone for comparison schemes (echo and tripping logic at weak infeed, stabilization for double lines, resp.transmission of the blocking order for blocking systems) Load compensation of the reach of the first underreaching distance zone in order to avoid a possible overreach on the load exporting line-side even for high-resistance faults and double-end infeed Two time-delayed overreaching back-up zones Delayed back-up operation by the underimpedance starter, directional or nondirectional VT supervision Back-up overcurrent function The phase selection can be set directional and limited to the effective range of the overreach zone providing improved phase selection for single-pole autoreclosing
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 3
Elimination of possible overreach in case of resistive phase-to-phase-to-earth faults Improved performance under high SIR Power swing blocking independent from the operating characteristic and from the place of installation of the distance relay System logic and carrier logic: - automatic switch-onto-fault protection - overreach zone, effective for all types of fault or for single-phase faults only, controlled by the autoreclosure function and current starter via external input or automatically in case of failure of the PLC channel - underreaching permissive transfer tripping with or without voltage criterion at weak infeed - overerreaching permissive transfer tripping with echo and tripping logic at weak infeed - overreaching system with blocking signal - stabilization of the overreaching systems at change of energy direction on parallel lines The distance protection function may be applied for capacitive voltage transformers. Back-up protection* Non-directional overcurrent protection with definite time delay and/or inverse time Directional earth fault protection with signal comparison for selective detection of very high-resistance earth faults Multi-activation facility of the available function. * also available in the distance protection function. Process supervision Sequence-of-events recorder (with fault indication) Disturbance recorder with analog and binary channels.
Functions for programming by the user Logic (AND, OR and S/R flip-flop) Timer/integrator. Application-specific ancillary functions (optional) Graphical engineering of a logic to user specifications (CAP316). An editor and code compiler are used to generate data, which is loaded into the equipment via the HMI. This software allows signals from all functions to be interconnected and the realization of new functionalities if necessary. Self-supervision Continuous self-supervision and diagnosis Test equipment for quantitative testing available Continuous supervision of the optical fiber link for the longitudinal differential function Plausibility check of the three-phase current and voltage inputs. Operational control Multi-lingual menu-based operator program CAP2/316 based on Windows Four independent, user-selectable parameter sets able to be activated via binary input can be stored in REL316*4 Multi-activation and allocation of functions. Serial interfaces Frontplate interface for local connection of a personal computer Back plane interface for remote communication with a station control system: LON, IEC 60870-5-103, MVB (part of IEC 61375), SPA Back plane interface for process bus: MVB (part of IEC 61375). Installation REL316*4 is suitable for semi-flush or surface mounting or installation in a rack.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 4
Application
The fully numerical protection terminal REL316*4 is a compact line terminal. It is designed to provide high-speed selective protection in distribution, MV and HV transmission systems. It can be applied at all power system voltages and in solidly earthed, lowimpedance grounded or ungrounded systems or in systems equipped with arc suppression (Petersen) coils. REL316*4 can be used on overhead lines and cables, long feeders, short feeders, parallel circuit lines, heavily loaded lines, lines with weak infeeds and on short zone lines. It detects all kinds of faults including close three-phase faults, cross-country faults, evolving faults and high-resistance ground faults. The distance function for high-voltage lines (<ZHV) essentially has identical starting and measuring characteristics. The differences refer to their speciality for these lines. With regard to their settings this is especially noticeable during phase selection and the adaption to source-to-line impedance conditions. The relay detects evolving faults and follow-up faults. Also at follow-up faults between parallel lines, the probability of successful single-phase autoreclosure on both systems increases significantly. The reason for this is the limited phase selection within the reach.
Distance and longitudinal differential protection combined in one terminal allows a better protection concept. For example, distance protection as a backup in addition to the traditional overcurrent backup in case of a communication failure. Another application may be longitudinal differential protection for transformer protection with distance protection as a backup. REL316*4 also takes account of power swings and changes of energy direction. A switch-onto-fault condition is tripped instantaneously. The demands on CT and VT performance are moderate and the relays response is uninfluenced by their characteristics. The distance protection function and the directional comparison function for high-resistance earth faults can communicate with the opposite end of the line by all the usual communication media as well as by the integrated direct optical connection used for the longitudinal differential protection. The communication between the terminals of the phase-segragated longitudinal differential protection can be performed using the integrated or separate optical fiber link.
Example
Autoreclosure for 1 breaker scheme
Three-pole tripping and autoreclosing
79 (AR) 25 (sync) RE.316*4
79 (AR) 25 (sync) RE.316*4
79 (AR) 25 (sync) RE.316*4
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
21 (dist.) REL316*4 SN100
87 (line diff.) REL316*4 SP100
21 (dist.) REL316*4 SN100
21 (dist.) REL316*4 SN100
Fig. 1
Autoreclosing for 1 breaker scheme (line-line diameter), three-pole application
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 5
The promoted solution for 1 breaker scheme with three-pole tripping and autoreclosing is shown in Fig. 1. - 21 - 87 - 79/25 Distance protection: Line differential protection: Autorecloser/synchrocheck: REL316*4 SN100 REL316*4 SP100 REL316*4 SD050 or REC316*4.
Single-pole tripping and autoreclosing
79 (AR) 25 (sync) RE.316*4 T142
79 (AR) 25 (sync) RE.316*4 T142
79 (AR) 25 (sync) RE.316*4 T142
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
21 (dist.) REL316*4 SN100,T141
87 (line diff.) REL316*4 SP100,T129
21 (dist.) REL316*4 SN100,T141
21 (dist.) REL316*4 SN100,T141
Fig. 2
Autoreclosing for 1 breaker scheme (line-line diameter), single-pole application
The promoted solution for 1 breaker scheme with single-pole tripping and autoreclosing is shown in Fig. 2. - 21 - 87 - 79/25 Distance protection: Line differential protection: Autorecloser/synchrocheck: REL316*4 SN100, T141 REL316*4 SP100, T129 REL316*4 SD050, T142 or REC316*4, T142. The autoreclosure functions used for the bus breakers A and C are set as Masters and the one for the centre breaker B as Follower. Coordination is required between the autoreclosure functions. A synchrocheck function is also loaded in each relay to permit 3-pole autoreclosing. Each line protection relay starts both bus and centre breakers for the concerned line. After a successful reclosure of the bus breaker, the centre breaker will be reclosed after a supplementary time delay. Should the bus CB autorecloser relay not be successful in its reclosing attempt, the centre CB autorecloser is blocked. If the bus CB is open or its autorecloser relay is not ready or out of service, the centre CB autorecloser will reclose the centre breaker after its own dead time without any supplementary time delay.
In these figures two lines are connected to one diameter. Each line is protected by two REL316*4 relays. For the line on the right, the main relay is a distance protection relay (SN100), while the back-up relay is a line differential relay (SP100). The line on the right is protected with two distance protection relays (SN100). The autoreclosure functionality is achieved by one RE.316*4 relay per breaker (e.g. REL316*4 SD050). For a single-pole application, the distance protection relay (SN100) is loaded with the supplementary FUPLA logic T141, the line differential relay (SP100) with the logic T129 and the autorecloser (e.g. SD050) with the logic T142.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 6
Design
The REL316*4 belongs to the generation of fully numerical line protection terminals, i.e. analog-to-digital conversion of the input variables takes place immediately after the input transformers and all further processing of the resulting numerical signals is performed by microprocessors and controlled by programs. Standard interfaces enable REL316*4 to communicate with other control systems. Provision is thus made for the exchange of data such as reactionless reporting of binary states, events, measurements and protection parameters or the activation of a different set of settings by higher level control systems. Because of its compact design, the very few hardware units it needs, its modular software and the integrated continuous self-diagnosis and supervision functions, REL316*4 ideally fulfils the users expectations of a modern protection terminal at a cost-effective price. The AVAILABILITY of a terminal, i.e. the ratio between its mean operating time in service without failure and its total life, is most
certainly the most important characteristic required of protection equipment. As a consequence of the continuous supervision of its functions, this quotient in the case of REL316*4 is typically always close to 1. The menu-based HMI (Human Machine Interface) and the REL316*4s small size makes the tasks of connection, configuration and setting simple. A maximum of FLEXIBILITY, i.e. the ability to adapt the protection for application in a particular power system or to coordinate with, or replace units in an existing protection scheme, is provided in REL316*4 by ancillary software functions and the assignment of input and output signals via the HMI. REL316*4s RELIABILITY, SELECTIVITY and STABILITY are backed by decades of experience in the protection of lines and feeders in transmission and distribution systems. Numerical processing ensures consistent ACCURACY and SENSITIVITY throughout its operational life. input transformer unit can accommodate a maximum of nine input transformers (voltage-, protection current- or measuring transformer). Every analog variable is passed through a first order R/C low-pass filter on the main CPU unit to eliminate what is referred to as the aliasing effect and to suppress HF interferences (Fig. 4). They are then sampled 12 times per period and converted to digital signals. The analog/digital conversion is performed by a 16 Bit converter. A powerful digital signal processor (DSP) carries out part of the digital filtering and makes sure that the data for the protection algorithms are available in the memory to the main processor.
Hardware
The hardware concept for the REL316*4 line protection equipment comprises four different plug-in units, a connecting mother PCB and housing (Fig. 3): analog input unit central processing unit 1 to 4 binary input/output units power supply unit connecting mother PCB housing with connection terminals. In the analog input unit an input transformer provides the electrical and static isolation between the analog input variables and the internal electronic circuits and adjusts the signals to a suitable level for processing. The
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 7
Fibre optical connections for line differential protection and binary signal transmission
RX
Tx
DC
+5V
A/D DSP
A/D DSP
Trip Outputs Trip Trip Outputs I/O Trip Sign. Outputs / Sign. I /IO O Outputs Outputs Ports Sign. Ports Outputs/ O I Sign. Outputs Ports Bin. Ports Outputs Bin. Inputs Bin. Inputs Bin. Inputs Inputs FLASH EPROM
DPM
CPU 486
SW-Key
+15V -15V +24V
Power Supply
Remote I/O Remote I/OTrip Outputs Trip Remote I/O Sign. Outputs Trip Outputs Sign. Outputs Bin. Outputs Sign.Inputs Bin. Outputs Inputs Bin. Inputs
DC
PCC IEC1375
a
Tranceiver
RAM
P C M C I A
Process bus
(MVB)
PCC
c
LON IEC1375
LED's
RS Serial 232 Controller RS Serial 232 Controller
SCS SMS
SPA / IEC870-5-103
HMI
Fig. 3
Hardware platform overview (RE.316*4)
The processor core essentially comprises the main microprocessor (Intel 80486) for the protection algorithms and dual-ported memories (DPMs) for communication between the A/D converters and the main processor. The main processor performs the protection algorithms and controls the local HMI and the interfaces to the station control system. Binary signals from the main processor are relayed to the corresponding inputs of the I/O unit and thus control the auxiliary output relays and the light emitting diode (LED) signals. The main processor unit is equipped with an RS232C serial interface via which among other things the protection settings are made, events are read and the data from the disturbance recorder memory are transferred to a local or remote PC. On this main processor unit there are two PCC slots and one RS232C interface. These serial interfaces provide remote communication to the station monitoring system (SMS) and station control system (SCS) as well as to the remote I/Os.
REL316*4 can have one to four binary I/O units each. These units are available in three versions: a) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty contacts, 8 optocoupler inputs and 6 signalling relays Type 316DB61. b) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty contacts, 4 optocoupler inputs and 10 signalling relays Type 316DB62. c) 14 optocoupler inputs and 8 signalling relays Type 316DB63. When ordering REL316*4 with more than 2 I/O units, casing size N2 must be selected. According to whether one or two I/O units are fitted, there are either 8 LEDs or 16 LEDs visible on the front of the REL316*4.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 8
Software
Both analog and binary input signals are conditioned before being processed by the main processor: As described under hardware above, the analog signals pass through the sequence input transformers, shunt, low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter), multiplexer and A/D converter stages and DSP. In their digital
form, they are then separated by numerical filters into real and apparent components before being applied to the main processor. Binary signals from the optocoupler inputs go straight to the main processor. The actual processing of the signals in relation to the protection algorithms and logic then takes place.
Fig. 4
Data flow
List of functions Binary functions: AND ASSB B23 B24 BINEXTIN BINEXOUT
COUNTX CNT CNTD OR RSFF SKIP TFF TMOC TMOCS, TMOCL TMOI TMOIS, TMOIL TOFF TOFFS, TOFFL TON TONS, TONL XOR Analog functions: ABS ADD ADDL
Shift register Counter Downwards counter OR gate RS flip-flop Skip segment T flip-flop with reset Monostable constant Monostable constant short, long Monostable constant with interrupt Monostable constant with interrupt short, long Off delay Off delay short, long On delay On delay short, long Exclusive OR gate Absolute value Adder/subtracter Long integer adder/subtractor
AND gate Assign binary 2-out-of-3 selector 2-out-of-4 selector External binary input External binary output
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 9
ADMUL CNVIL CNVLBCD CNVLI CNVLP CNVPL DIV DIVL FCTL FCTP FILT INTS, INTL KMUL
Adder/multiplier Integer to long integer converter Long integer to BC converter Long integer to integer converter Long integer to percent converter Percentage to long integer converter Divider Long integer divider Linear function Polynomial function Filter Integrator Factor multiplier
LIM LOADS MAX MIN MUL MULL NEGP PACW PDTS, PDTL PT1S, PT1L SQRT SWIP THRLL THRUL TMUL UPACW
Limiter Load shedding function Maximum value detector Minimum value detector Multiplier Long integer multiplier Percent negator Pack binary signals into integer Differentiator Delayed approximation Square root Percent switch Lower limit threshold Upper limit threshold Time multiplier Unpack binary signals from an integer.
Example:
Example:
B_DRIVE CL OP
CL OP POK
4 & 5 &
SEL RQON RQOF
1 &
2 >=1
SYNC RQEX 30 1
6 =1
Part of a FUPLA application (Q0: Control and interlocking logic for three objects Q0, Q1, Q2. B_DRIVE is a macro composed of binary function blocks)
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 10
Functions
The library of function modules for REL316*4 includes a variety of protection and ancillary functions from which the user can choose according to relay version (see Ordering data). Within the constraints of the available processing capacity, the same function may be included several times. Four parameter sets may be selected via binary inputs. The individual functions are described below.
Distance protection
A VT supervision function is also included which monitors the zero-sequence component (U0 I0) and/or the negative-sequence component (U2 I2), the latter being of advantage in ungrounded systems or systems with poor grounding. An independent overcurrent back-up measurement is provided which becomes a shortzone scheme as soon as the feeder isolator is opened. When the back-up overcurrent measurement picks up, the distance relay is enabled in spite of any blocking signals (e.g. VT supervision or power swing blocking) which may be active. The power swing blocking feature included in the distance function is based on the evaluation of the variation of U cos. This principle of detecting power swings is entirely independent of the operating characteristic and location of the distance relay. It covers the range 0.2 to 8 Hz.
The distance protection function can have either overcurrent or underimpedance starters. They are equally suitable for use in solidly grounded, ungrounded or impedance grounded systems. In the case of ungrounded and impedance grounded systems, all the relays in the system have to have identically set phase-preference logics to maintain selectivity for cross-country faults. The following phase-preference schemes are available: RTS RST TSR TRS SRT STR RTSR TRST acyclic (R before T before S) acyclic (R before S before T) acyclic (T before S before R) acyclic (T before R before S) acyclic (S before R before T) acyclic (S before T before R) cyclic (R bef. T, T bef. S, S bef. R) cyclic (T bef. R, R bef. S, S bef. T).
The relay detects ground faults on the basis of the neutral current and/or neutral voltage. Distance measurement is performed in the first, overreach and reverse zones simultaneously. Every zone has a wide, completely independent setting range and an independent setting for the direction of measurement. Four directional zones are provided, the last of which can also be configured to be non-directional. Overreach and reverse measuring zones are for use in transfer tripping schemes. The distance measuring characteristic is a polygon with a slightly inclined reactance line which has proved to be an optimum in practice. Where the voltage measured by the relay for a fault is too low, the inclusion of a healthy phase voltage as reference, respectively the use of a memory feature (close three-phase faults) ensures the integrity of the directional decision. The mutual impedance on parallel circuit lines can be compensated by correspondingly setting the zero-sequence compensation factor (k0) or by taking account of the neutral current of the parallel circuit. permissive overreaching transfer tripping (with echo tripping in the case of a weak-
Fig. 5
Distance function characteristic
The tripping logic can be configured for all the usual transfer tripping schemes such as: overreaching (for autoreclosure with or without communications channel) permissive underreaching transfer tripping (including weak infeed logic) infeed and blocking logic for change of energy direction)
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 11
blocking scheme (with blocking logic for change of energy direction). The tripping logic provides access for the user to disable or enable a variety of functions such as the type communications channel, the switch-onto-fault logic, the overreaching zone, the VT supervision logic and whether tripping by the function should be single or three-phase.
Distance protection for high-voltage lines
The setting parameters for not effectively earthed networks have been omitted and a few new ones added, especially in connection with an improved phase selection. The operating times for the "HV distance" function are shown in the form of isochrones. (see Section 'High-voltage distance protection function operating times'). All other functions remain unchanged.
Longitudinal differential protection
The distance protection function (<ZHV) is especially suited for 220 kV and 380 kV lines.
The longitudinal differential protection function included with REL316*4 is suitable for the protection of overhead lines cables transformer feeders. It operates according to the proven transformer protection algorithm used in RET316*4 and exhibits the same outstanding characteristics with respect to through-fault stability and minimum CT performance. The scheme is phase-selective and takes full advantage of the high data transfer rate of 64 kBit/s possible with an optical fiber link to sample the analog input variables at both ends of the line and transfers the corresponding values to the opposite station without almost any delay.
The "HV distance" function essentially has identical starting and measuring characteristics and the same setting parameters as the standard "distance" function.
I2
Fig. 6
Operating characteristic of the longitudinal differential function
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 12
Functions (contd)
OFL
Fig. 7 Longitudinal differential protection with a power transformer in the protected zone
Tripping takes place should the comparison of the values in the terminal stations result in a differential current I above a given level (see operating characteristic in Fig. 6). The self-supervision function of the optical fiber link operates at such a speed that an additional enabling signal is not necessary. Interposing CTs are not needed where the protected unit includes a power transformer (Fig. 7). The settings for the protection are made using a convenient control program running on a personal computer. Provision is made for transmitting other signals via the optical fiber link in addition to those of the longitudinal differential function. These might be intertripping signals to the remote station generated by other internal protection functions or applied to the terminals binary inputs by some other external terminal. A ground fault comparison scheme can thus operate via the same optical fiber link. When the terminal equipment in one station is being tested, the equipment in the other station can be remotely blocked. When the longitudinal protection function is in use, a maximum of six analog inputs is available, e.g. three current and three voltage measurements for main and back-up protections and for the disturbance recorder. Following analog-to-digital conversion, the signals branch in two directions. All six go to the main processor for evaluation for the local protection functions and the three corresponding to the local phase currents are additionally converted to light signals by an optical modem for transmission to the opposite sta-
tion where they are evaluated in relation to the local current signals. Similarly the currents measured and digitized in the remote station are transferred to the local station and evaluated. A digital signal processor (DSP) ensures that the sampling and coordination of the signals in the two stations and also the transmission between the stations is properly synchronized. Thus there are two current signals available for the longitudinal differential comparison of each phase in both stations. Comparison is performed in the main processor according to the proven algorithm mentioned above. As previously explained, the longitudinal differential function operates in conjunction with an optical fiber link between the stations at the ends of the transmission line. The signals are transmitted by a LED diode with a wavelength of 1300 nm and are coupled by a Type FC optical connector. Depending on the attenuation of the of the optical cable used, distances of up to 28 km can be covered. Repeaters have to be used for longer distances which in the case of FOX 6 Plus or Fox 20 enable transmission over distances up to 120 km (Fig. 8). In REL316*4 units for longitudinal differential applications, the standard distance protection function can also be activated. The operation for single-pole autoreclosure is foreseen with the T129 logic. The other standard software of the line protection terminal is uninfluenced. Other optional functions from the software library are also provided (see Table of codes).
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 13
Fig. 8
Optical fiber link (OFL) using communications system Type FOX with a data transfer rate of 2 MBit/s
Autoreclosure
The autoreclosure function included in REL316*4 permits up to four three-phase reclosure cycles to be carried out, each with an independently adjustable dead time for fast and slow autoreclosure. Where single-phase reclosure is being applied, the first reclosure is the single-phase one and the others are three-phase. The autoreclosure function can also be loaded several times in the same parameter set. This function also contains an integrated additional logic (FUPLA). This allows a customerspecific AR functionality. Both these possibilities have been used for the CH standard AR. Two AR functions are loaded for this: the first function with additional logic serves as fast autoreclosure and the second function as slow autoreclosure. The integrated autoreclosure function for high-voltage lines (REL316*4/SN300) is employed on lines without local protection redundancy. A separate autoreclosure unit is especially suitable for lines with redundant protection. This unit enables practically all conventional and all modern line protection relays suitable for single-phase tripping to be connected to one system.
Synchrocheck
The synchrocheck function determines the difference between the amplitudes, phase angles and frequencies of two voltage vectors. Checks are also included to detect a dead line or busbar.
Thermal overload
The thermal overload function can be used for either cables or overhead lines. It is equipped with alarm and tripping stages and has a wide setting range for adjusting the time constant to match that of the protected unit.
Definite time voltage function
The voltage function can be set to operate on overvoltage or undervoltage with a definite time delay. Either single or three-phase measurements can be performed.
Definite time current function
The current function can be set to operate on overcurrent or undercurrent with a definite time delay. Either single or three-phase measurements can be performed.
Inverse time overcurrent function
The operating time of the inverse time overcurrent function reduces as the fault current increases and it can therefore achieve shorter operating times for fault locations closer to the source. Four different characteristics according to British Standard 142 designated normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and long time inverse but with an extended setting range are provided. The function can be configured for single-phase mea-
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 14
Functions (contd)
surement or a combined three-phase measurement with detection of the highest phase current.
Frequency function
Inverse time ground fault overcurrent function
The inverse time ground fault overcurrent function monitors the neutral current of the system which is either measured via a neutral current input transformer or derived internally in the terminal from the three-phase currents. Four different characteristics according to British Standard 142 designated normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and long time inverse but with an extended setting range are provided.
Directional ground fault function for ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils
Measuring
Both measuring functions measure the singlephase rms values of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power for display on the local HMI or transfer to the station control system. A choice can be made between phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase voltages.
Ancillary functions
The sensitive ground fault protection function for ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils can be set for either forwards or reverse measurement. The characteristic angle is set to 90 (U0 I0 sin) in ungrounded systems and to 0 or 180 (U0 I0 cos) for systems with Petersen coils. The neutral current is always used for measurement in the case of systems with Petersen coils, but in ungrounded systems its use is determined by the value of the capacitive current and measurement is performed by a core-balance CT to achieve the required sensitivity.
Directional ground fault function for grounded systems
Ancillary functions such as a logic and a delay/integrator enable the user to create logical combinations of signals and pick-up and reset delays. A runtime supervision feature enables checking the opening and closing of all kinds of breakers (circuit-breakers, isolators, ground switches...). Failure of a breaker to open or close within an adjustable time results in the creation of a corresponding signal for further processing.
Plausibility check
A sensitive directional ground fault function based on the measurement of neutral current and voltage is provided for the detection of high-resistance ground faults in solidly or low-resistance grounded systems. The scheme operates either in a permissive or blocking mode and can be used in conjunction with an inverse time ground fault overcurrent function. In both cases the neutral current and voltage can be derived either externally or internally.
The event recorder function provides capacity for up to 256 binary signals including time marker with a resolution in the order of milliseconds and gives the distance to a fault expressed as a percentage of a specified reference reactance, e.g. the reactance of the protected line.
The disturbance recorder monitors up to 9 analog inputs, up to 16 binary inputs and internal results of protection functions. The capacity for recording disturbances depends on the duration of a disturbance as deter-
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 15
mined by its pre-disturbance history and the duration of the disturbance itself. The total recording time is approximately 5 s.
Human Machine Interface (HMI) - CAP2/316
For local communication with REL316*4, there is the setting software CAP2/316 available which is based on Windows. This software runs under the following operating systems: Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000. This optimal programming tool is available for engineering, testing, commissioning and operation. The software can be used either ON-LINE or OFF-LINE and furthermore contains a DEMO mode.
Built-in HMI
The front HMI unit serves primarily for the signalling of actual events, measurands and diagnostic data. Settings are not displayed. Features: Measurand display - Amplitude, angle, frequency of analog channels - Functional measurands - Binary signals Event list Operating instructions For each protection function a tripping characteristic is displayed. Apart from the basic understanding of the protection functions, the graphical display of these functions also makes the setting of the parameters clearer. Disturbance recorder information Distance to fault indication Diagnostic information Acknowledgment functions - Resetting LEDs - Resetting latched outputs - Event erasing - Warm start.
REL316*4 is able to communicate with a station monitoring and evaluation system (SMS) or a station control system (SCS) via an optical fiber link. The corresponding serial interface permits events, measurements, disturbance recorder data and protection settings to be read and sets of parameter settings to be switched.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 16
Functions (contd)
Using the LON bus permits in addition the exchange of binary information between the individual bay controllers, e.g. signals for station interlocking.
The program execution itself is monitored by a watchdog function for each processor. An important advantage of the extensive selfdiagnosis and supervision functions is that periodic routine maintenance and testing are reduced. The optical fiber link is also supervised on terminal equipped with the longitudinal differential function. For this purpose test data are transmitted in addition to the protection signals to test the integrity of the communications channel. The supervision function also detects the failure of the auxiliary supply in one terminal station. In the event that the optical fiber link should fail, the back-up protection functions remain operational.
Supporting software
Using the process bus type MVB remote inand output units (500RIO11) can be connected to the RE.316*4 terminals. The input and output channels can be extended to a large number by using the RIO580 remote input/ output system. Installing 500RIO11 I/O close to the process reduces the wiring dramatically, since they are accessible via fiberoptic link from the RE.316*4 terminals. Analog signals can also be connected to the system via the 500AXM11 from the RIO580 family: DC current 4...20 mA 0...20 mA -20...20 mA 0...10 V -10...10 V
DC voltage
The operator program facilitates configuration and setting of the protection, listing parameters, reading events and listing the various internal diagnostic data. The evaluation programs REVAL and E_wineve (Windows NT/Windows 2000) are available for viewing and evaluating the disturbances stored by the disturbance recorder. Where the disturbance data are transferred via the communications system to the disturbance recorder evaluation station, the file transfer program WinCom (Windows NT/ Windows 2000) is also used. The program XSCON is available for conversion of the RE.316*4 disturbance recorder data to ABBs test set XS92b format. This offers reproduction of electrical quantities recorded during a fault.

RE.316*4s self-diagnosis and supervision functions ensure maximum availability not only of the protection terminal itself, but also of the power system it is protecting. Hardware failures are immediately signalled by an alarm contact. In particular, the external and internal auxiliary supplies are continuously supervised. The correct function and tolerance of the A/D converter are tested by cyclically converting two reference voltages. Special algorithms regularly check the processors memories (background functions). A watchdog supervises the execution of the programs.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 17
Technical data hardware

Number of inputs according to version, max. 9 analog inputs (voltages and currents, 4 mm2 terminals) Rated frequency fN Rated current IN Thermal rating of current circuit continuous for 10 s for 1 s dynamic (half period) Rated voltage UN Thermal rating of voltage circuit continuous during 10 s Burden per phase current inputs at IN = 1 A at IN = 5 A voltage inputs at UN VT fuse characteristic 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A, 2 A or 5 A 4 x IN 30 x IN 100 x IN 250 x IN (peak) 100 V or 200 V 1.3 x UN 2 x UN

Tripping relays No. of contacts Max. operating voltage Continuous rating Make and carry for 0.5 s Surge for 30 ms Making power at 110 V DC Breaking capacity for L/R = 40 ms Breaking current with 1 contact at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC Breaking current with 2 contacts in series at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC Signalling contacts No. of contacts 6, 10 or 8 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63), 1 contact per sig. relay with 1.5 mm2 terminals Each interface unit equipped with 1 C/O contact and the all others N/O contacts 250 V AC or V DC 5A 15 A 100 A 550 W 0.5 A 0.1 A 0.04 A 2 relays per I/O unit 316DB61 or 316DB62 with 2 N/O contacts each, 1.5 mm2 terminals 300 V AC or V DC 5A 30 A 250 A 3300 W
1.5 A 0.3 A 0.1 A 5A 1A 0.3 A
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 18
Technical data hardware (contd)

No. of optocouplers Input voltage Threshold voltage Max. input current Operating time 8, 4 or 14 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63) 18 to 36 V DC / 36 to 75 V DC / 82 to 312 V DC /175 to 312 V DC 10 to 17 V DC / 20 to 34 V DC / 40 to 65 V DC / 140 to 175 V DC <12 mA 1 ms

Choice of display modes:
Accumulates each new disturbance Latching with reset by next pick-up Latching only if protection trips with reset by next pick-up Signalling without latching
Colors
1 green (standby) 1 red (trip) 6 or 14 yellow (all other signals)


RS232C interface Data transfer rate Protocol Electrical/optical converter (optional) PCC interface Number PCC (optional) Interbay bus protocol Process bus protocol (interbay and process bus can be used concurrently) LON bus Data transfer rate MVB bus Data transfer rate Event memory Capacity Time marker resolution Time deviation without remote synchronizing Engineering interface 9 pin Sub-D female 9600 Bit/s SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 316BM61b 2 plug-in sockets for type III cards LON or MVB (part of IEC 61375) MVB (part of IEC 61375) PCC with fiber-optical port, ST connectors 1.25 MBit/s PCC with redundant fiber-optical port, ST connectors 1.5 Mbit/s 256 events 1 ms <10 s per day integrated software interface for signal engineering with SigTOOL
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 19

Supply voltage Voltage range Voltage interruption bridging time Fuse rating Load on station battery at normal operation (1 relay energized) during a fault (all relays energized) with 1 I/O unit with 2 I/O units with 3 I/O units with 4 I/O units Additional load of the options line differential protection (code SPxxx) SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or LON interface MVB interface Buffer time of the event list and fault recorder data at loss of auxiliary supply 36 to 312 V DC
>50 ms 4 A
<20 W
<22 W <27 W <32 W <37 W 7.5 W 1.5 W 2.5 W >2 days (typ. 1 month)

Temperature range operation storage Humidity Seismic test Leakage resistance Insulation test -10C to +55C -40C to +85C 93%, 40C, 4 days 5 g, 30 s, 1 to 33 Hz (1 octave/min) >100 M, 500 V DC 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min 1 kV across open contacts 5 kV, 1.2/50 s 1.0/2.5 kV, Cl. 3; 1MHz, 400 Hz rep.freq. 2/4 kV, Cl. 4 6/8 kV (10 shots), Cl. 3 EN 60255-6 (1994), IEC 60255-6 (1988) IEC 60068-2-3 (1969) IEC 60255-21-3 (1995), IEEE 344 (1987) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000), EN 60950 (1995) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000) * IEC 60255-22-1 (1988), ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (1989) EN 61000-4-4 (1995), IEC 61000-4-4 (1995) EN 61000-4-2 (1996), IEC 61000-4-2 (2001) EN 61000-4-8 (1993), IEC 61000-4-8 (1993) EN 61000-4-6 (1996) EN 61000-4-6 (1996), EN 61000-4-3 (1996), IEC 61000-4-3 (1996), ENV 50204 (1995) EN 61000-6-2 (2001), EN 55011 (1998), CISPR 11 (1990)
Emission
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 20
Technical data hardware (contd)

Weight Size N1 casing Size N2 casing Methods of mounting approx. 10 kg approx. 12 kg semi-flush with terminals at rear surface with terminals at rear 19" rack mounting, height 6U, width N1: 225.2 mm (1/2 19" rack). Width N2: 271 mm. IP 50 (IP 20 if MVB PC cards are used) IPXXB for terminals.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 21
Technical data functions
Table 10: Distance and high-voltage distance protection (21)

All values of settings referred to the secondaries, every zone can be set independently of the others, 4 independent files for sets of settings. Impedance measurement Zero-sequence current compensation Mutual impedance for parallel circuit lines Time step setting range Underimpedance starters Overcurrent starters (not included in the highvoltage distance protection function <ZHV) Min. operating current Back-up overcurrent Neutral current criterion Neutral voltage criterion Low voltage criterion for detecting, for example, a weak infeed VT supervision NPS/neutral voltage criterion NPS/neutral current criterion Accuracy (applicable for current time constants between 40 and 150 ms) amplitude error phase error Supplementary error for - frequency fluctuations of +10% - 10% third harmonic - 10% fifth harmonic Operating times of the high-voltage distance protection function <ZHV (including tripping relay) minimum typical (see also isochrones) all permitted additional functions activated The operating times of the (standard-) distance functions are higher by 5 to 10 ms Typical reset time VT-MCB auxiliary contact requirements Operating time -300 to 300 /ph in steps of 0.01 /ph (IN = 1 A or 2 A) -30 to 30 /ph in steps of 0.001 /ph (IN = 5 A) 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01, -180 to +90 in steps of 1 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01, -90 to +90 in steps of 1 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01 s -999 to 999 /ph in steps of 0.1 /ph (IN = 1 A or 2 A) -99.9 to 99.9 /ph in steps of 0.01 /ph (IN = 5 A) 0.5 to 10 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.1 to 2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0 to 10 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.1 to 2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
0.01 to 0.5 UN in steps of 0.01UN 0.01 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
5% for U/UN >0.1 2 for U/UN >0.1 5% 10% 10%
21 ms 25 ms 4 ms in addition
30 ms <15 ms
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 22
Technical data functions (contd)
High-voltage distance protection function operating times (Versions SN 100 and SN 300)
Isochrones
Single phase fault (min)
1 0.8 ZF/ZL ZF/ZL 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0.1 1 10 SIR (ZS/ZL) 100 1000
22ms 25ms
Single phase fault (max)

1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0.1 1 10 SIR (ZS/ZL) 100 1000
27ms 30ms 35ms
Two phase fault (min)

1 0.8
ZF/ZL ZF/ZL
Two phase fault (max)

1 0.8 0.6
25ms 26ms 32ms
0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0.1 1 10

SIR (ZS/ZL)
22ms 23ms
0.4 0.2 0
100
1000
0.1
10
SIR (ZS/ZL)
100
1000
Three phase fault (min)

1 0.8
ZF/ZL
24ms 22ms
Three phase fault (max)

1
35ms
0.8 ZF/ZL 0.6 0.4 0.2 0
30ms
0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0.1 1 10

SIR (ZS/ZL)
25ms
100
1000
0.1
10 SIR (ZS/ZL)
100
1000
Abbreviations:
ZS = source impedance ZF = fault impedance ZL = zone 1 impedance setting
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 23
Table 11: Longitudinal differential protection function (87)

Three-phase measurement with current comparison per phase Adaptive current characteristic Provision for two-winding power transformer in protection zone - compensation of group of connection - compensation of differing CT ratios - 2nd harmonic inrush restraint
Settings: Basic setting Pick-up ratio Restraint criterion Typical operating time (incl. tripping relay) Pick-up accuracy of g Condition for resetting Communications link to the remote station Data transfer rate Optical fiber conductors Max. attenuation of link Optical connectors Operating wave length Max. permissible transmission time per direction Range MM SM Long distance range using FOX20 g = 0.1 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.1 IN v = 0.25 / 0.5 b = 1.25 to 5 in steps of 0.25 25 ms 5% IN (at fN)
I <0.8 setting for g
Two optical fiber connectors for transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) 64 kBit/s multi-mode MM (50/25 m) single-mode SM (9/125 m) MM 18 dB, SM 14 dB Type FC 1300 nm 11.5 ms at fN = 50 Hz 9.5 ms at fN = 60 Hz <18 km (1 dB/km incl. splice) <28 km (0.5 dB/km incl. splice) <87 km (0.5 dB/km incl. splice for SM, 1300 nm) <124 km (0.35 dB/km incl. splice for SM, 1550 nm)
Table 12: Binary signal transmission function

Transmission of binary signals via the optical fiber link of 316EA63 (link used for the longitudinal protection function) Max. 8 binary signals of which the first 4 are assignable to the tripping logic Typical transmission time for 1 binary signal 18 ms (13 to 25 ms)
Table 13: Autoreclosure (79)

Single and three-phase autoreclosure. Operation in conjunction with distance, longitudinal differential, overcurrent and synchrocheck functions and also with external protection and synchrocheck relays. Logic for 1st and 2nd main protections, duplex and master/follower schemes. Up to four fast or slow reclosure shots. The autoreclosure function may also be loaded several times in the same parameter set. Detection of evolving faults.
Settings: 1st reclosure none 1P fault - 1P reclosure 1P fault - 3P reclosure 1P/3P fault - 3P reclosure 1P/3P fault - 1P/3P reclosure
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 24
2nd to 4th reclosure
none two reclosure cycles three reclosure cycles four reclosure cycles 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.1 to 300 s All settings in steps of 0.01 s
Single-phase dead time Three-phase dead time Dead time extension by ext. signal Dead times for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reclosures Fault duration time Reclaim time Blocking time Single and three-phase discrimination times
Table 14: Synchrocheck function (25)

Determination of synchronism - Single-phase measurement. The differences between the amplitudes, phase angles and frequencies of two voltage vectors are determined. Voltage supervision - Single or three-phase measurement - Evaluation of instantaneous values and therefore wider frequency range - Determination of maximum and minimum values in the case of three-phase inputs Phase selection for voltage inputs Provision for switching to a different voltage input (double busbar systems) Remote selection of operating mode
Settings: Max. voltage difference Max. phase difference Max. frequency difference Min. voltage Max. voltage Supervision time Resetting time Accuracy Voltage difference Phase difference Frequency difference 0.05 to 0.4 UN in steps of 0.05 UN 5 to 80 in steps of 5 0.05 to 0.4 Hz in steps of 0.05 Hz 0.6 to 1 UN in steps of 0.05 UN 0.1 to 1 UN in steps of 0.05 UN 0.05 to 5 s in steps of 0.05 s 0 to 1 s in steps of 0.05 s for 0.9 to 1.1 fN 5% UN 5 0.05 Hz

Thermal image for the 1st order model. Single or three-phase measurement with detection of maximum phase value.
Settings: Base current IB Alarm stage Tripping stage Thermal time constant Accuracy of the thermal image 0.5 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N 2 to 500 min in steps of 0.1 min 5% N (at fN) with protection CTs 2% N (at fN) with metering CTs
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 25

Over and undercurrent detection. Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase current. 2nd harmonic restraint for high inrush currents.
Settings: Pick-up current Delay Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio overcurrent undercurrent Max. operating time without intentional delay Inrush restraint pick-up setting reset ratio 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% >94% (for max. function) <106% (for min. function) 60 ms optional 0.1 I2h/I1h 0.8

Over and undervoltage detection Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase voltage
Settings: Pick-up voltage Delay Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio (U 0.1 UN) overvoltage undervoltage Max. operating time without intentional delay 0.01 to 2.0 UN in steps of 0.002 UN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 2% or 0.005 UN >96% (for max. function) <104% (for min. function) 60 ms
Table 18: Inverse time overcurrent function (51)

Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest phase current Stable response to transients
Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long time inverse or RXIDG characteristic Settings: Number of phases Base current IB Pick-up current Istart Min. time setting tmin k1 setting Accuracy classes for the operating time according to British Standard 142 RXIDG characteristic Reset ratio
t = k1 / ((I/IB)C- 1) c = 0.02 c=1 c=2 c=1 t = 5.8 - 1.35 In (I/IB) 1 or 3 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 1 to 4 IB in steps of 0.01 IB 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s E 5.0 4% (1 - I/80 IB) >94%
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 26

Neutral current measurement (derived externally or internally) Stable response to transients
Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long time inverse or RXIDG characteristic Settings: Number of phases Base current IB Pick-up current Istart Min. time setting tmin k1 setting Accuracy classes for the operating time according to British Standard 142 RXIDG characteristic Reset ratio
t = k1 / ((I/IB)C - 1) c = 0.02 c=1 c=2 c=1 t = 5.8 - 1.35 In (I/IB) 1 or 3 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 1 to 4 IB in steps of 0.01 IB 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s E 5.0 4% (1 - I/80 IB) >94%

Directional overcurrent protection Three-phase measurement Suppression of DC- and high-frequency components Definite time characteristic Voltage memory feature for close faults
Settings: Current Angle Delay tWait Memory duration Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) Voltage input range Voltage memory range Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage memory Frequency dependence of angle measurement at voltage memory Max. Response time without delay 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN -180 to +180 in steps of 15 0.02 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 s to 20 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% or 0.02 IN >94% 5 0.005 to 2 UN <0.005 UN 20 0.5/Hz 60 ms
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 27

Directional overcurrent protection with detection of the power direction Back-up protection for distance protection scheme Three-phase measurement Suppression of DC- and high-frequency components Inverse time characteristic Voltage memory feature for close faults
Settings: Current I-Start Angle Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long-time earth fault k1-setting t-min IB-value tWait Memory duration Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) Accuracy class of the operating time acc. to British Standard 142 Voltage input range Voltage memory range Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage memory Frequency dependence of angle measurement at voltage memory Max. Response time without delay 14 IB in steps of 0.01 IB -180+180 in steps of 15 t = k1 / ((I/IB)C- 1) c = 0,02 c=1 c=2 c=1 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 s to 20 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% >94% 5 E 10 0.005 to 2 UN <0.005 UN 20 0.5/Hz 60 ms
Table 22: Directional ground fault function for ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils (32N)
Determination of real or apparent power from neutral current and voltage Settings: Pick-up power Reference value of the power SN Characteristic angle Phase error compensation of current input Delay Reset ratio Accuracy of the pick-up setting 0.005 to 0.1 SN in steps of 0.001 SN 0.5 to 2.5 UN IN in steps of 0.001 UN IN -180 to +180 in steps of 0.01 -5 to +5 in steps of 0.01 0.05 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 30 to 95% in steps of 1% 10% of setting or 2% UN IN (for protection CTs) 3% of setting or 0.5% UN IN (for core-balance CTs) 70 ms
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 28
Table 23: Directional ground fault function for grounded systems (67N)
Detection of high-resistance ground faults Current enabling setting 3I0 Direction determined on basis of neutral variables (derived externally or internally) Permissive or blocking directional comparison scheme Echo logic for weak infeeds Logic for change of energy direction
Settings: Current pick-up setting Voltage pick-up setting Characteristic angle Delay Accuracy of the current pick-up setting 0.1 to 1.0 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.003 to 1 UN in steps of 0.001 UN -90 to +90 in steps of 5 0 to 1 s in steps of 0.001 s 10% of setting

Single-phase measurement of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power Choice of measuring phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages Suppression of DC components and harmonics in current and voltage Compensation of phase errors in main and input CTs and VTs
Settings: Phase angle Reference value of the power SN Refer to Table 33 for accuracy. -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1 0.2 to 2.5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN

Three-phase measurement of voltage (star or delta), current, frequency, real and apparent power and power factor. Two independent impulse counter inputs for calculation of interval and accumulated energy. The threephase measurement and the impulse counters can be used independently and may also be disabled. This function may be configured four times.
Settings: Angle Reference value for power t1-Interval Scale factor of power Max. impulse frequency Min. impulse duration Accuracy of time interval See Table 33 for accuracy -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1 0.2 to 2.5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 60 min or 120 min 0.0001 to 1 25 Hz 10 ms 100 ms
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 29

Measurement of real or apparent power Protection function based on either real or apparent power measurement Reverse power protection Over and underpower Single, two or three-phase measurement Suppression of DC components and harmonics in current and voltage Compensation of phase errors in main and input CTs and VTs
Settings: Power pick-up Characteristic angle Delay Phase error compensation Rated power SN Reset ratio Accuracy of the pick-up setting -0.1 to 1.2 SN in steps of 0.005 SN -180 to +180 in steps of 5 0.05 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s -5 to +5 in steps of 0.1 0.5 to 2.5 UN IN in steps of 0.001 UN IN 30% to 170% in steps of 1% 10% of setting or 2% UN IN (for protection CTs) 3% of setting or 0.5% UN IN (for core-balance CTs) 70 ms

Features Individual phase current recognition Single or three-phase operation External blocking input Two independent time steps Remote tripping adjustable simultaneously with retripping or back-up tripping Possibility of segregated activating/deactivating each trip (Redundant trip, retrip, back-up trip and remote trip). Settings Current Delay t1 (repeated trip) Delay t2 (back-up trip) Delay tEFS (End fault protection) Reset time for retrip Reset time for back-up trip Pulse time for remote trip Number of phases Accuracy of current operating time (at fN) Reset ratio of current measurement Reset time (for power system time constants up to 300 ms and short-circuit currents up to 40 IN) 0.2 to 5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 1 or 3 15% >85%
28 ms (with main CTs TPX) 28 ms (with main CTs TPY and current setting 1,2 IN) 38 ms (with main CTs TPY and current setting 0,4 IN)
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 30

Max. 9 CT/VT channels Max. 16 binary channels Max. 12 analog channels of internal measurement values 12 samples per period (sampling frequency 600 or 720 Hz at a rated frequency of 50/60 Hz) Available recording time for 9 CT/VT- and 8 binary signals approximately 5 s Recording initiated by any binary signal, e.g. the general trip signal.
Data format Dynamic range Resolution Settings: Recording periods Pre-event Event Post-event
EVE 70 x IN, 1.3 x UN 12 bits
40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms 100 to 3000 ms in steps of 50 ms 40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms
Ancillary functions
Table 29: Logic

For delaying pick-up or reset or for integrating 1 binary signal Provision for inverting the input
Settings: Pick-up or reset time Integration 0 to 300 s in steps of 0.01 s yes/no

A plausibility check function is provided for each three-phase current and three-phase voltage input which performs the following: Determination of the sum and phase sequence of the three-phase currents or voltages Provision for comparison of the sum of the phase values with a corresponding current or voltage sum applied to an input Function blocks for currents exceeding 2 x IN, respectively voltages exceeding 1.2 UN Accuracy of the pick-up setting at rated frequency Reset ratio Current plausibility settings: Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation current or between internal and external summation currents Amplitude compensation for summation CT Delay 2% IN in the range 0.2 to 1.2 IN 2% UN in the range 0.2 to 1.2 UN
90% whole range >95% (at U >0.1 UN or I >0.1 IN)
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 31
Voltage plausibility settings: Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation voltage or between internal and external summation voltages Amplitude compensation for summation VT Delay
0.05 to 1.2 UN in steps of 0.05 UN -2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s

Input variable Accuracy Conditions
Core balance CTs with error compensation Voltage Current Real power 0.5% UN 0.5% IN 0.5% SN
Protection CTs without error compensation 1% UN 2% IN 3% SN 0.2 to 1.2 UN f = fN 0.2 to 1.2 IN f = fN 0.2 to 1.2 SN 0.2 to 1.2 UN 0.2 to 1.2 IN f = fN S = SN, f = fN 0.9 to 1,1 fN 0.8 to 1,2 UN
0.5% SN 0.01 0.1% fN
3% SN 0.03 0.1% fN
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 32
Connection diagram
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE INPUTS (VALID FOR CODE K03) SIGNALLING
OPTOCOUPLER INPUTS
TRIP
DC SUPPLY
Fig. 9
Typical wiring diagram of REL316*4 in size N1 casing with two input/output units 316DB62
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 33
Ordering
Please specify: Quantity Ordering number ADE code + key The following basic versions can be ordered: Stand-alone units REL316*4 with built-in HMI (see table below) HESG448750M0001
Table 34: REL316*4 basic versions

Basic-SW E/Fungnd Long. diff
Relay ID code
<ZHV
E/Fgnd
A*B0U*K01E*I*F0J0 Q0V0R0W0Y*N*M* A*B0U*K01E*I*F0J0 Q0V0R0W0Y*N*M* A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B*U*K04E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B*U*K04E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B*U*K09E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*
SA010 T*** SA100 T*** SE010 T*** SE100 T*** SG100 T*** SH100 T*** SH300 T*** SK100 T*** SK300 T*** SL100 T*** SM100 T*** SM300 T*** SA020 T*** SC020 T*** SC050 T*** SD020 T*** SD050 T*** SG020 T*** SH020 T*** SH050 T*** SP100 T*** SP200 T*** SP300 T*** SP400 T*** SP400 T*** SP400 T*** SP500 T*** SN100 T*** SN300 T*** SN300 T***
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K08E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K01E*I*F0J0 Q0V0R0W0Y*N*M* A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B*U*K04E*I*F0J0 Q0V0R0W0Y*N*M* A*B*U*K04E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B*U*K09E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* A*B0U*K16E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* A*B0U*K16E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* A*B*U*K17E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* A*B0U0K15E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* A*B0U*K16E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* A*B*U*K17E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* A*B0U*K16E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M* A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M* A*B0U*K08E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M*
T0129 is to be ordered additionally in case that single-pole autoreclosure for line differential protection is required.
BST
AR
SC
<Z
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 34
Ordering (contd)
Legend:
* <Z <ZHV E/Fungnd E/Fgnd AR SC Long. diff. BST Basic SW OCDT OCDT Dir OCDT Inv Dir VTDT TH Power OCInv Ucheck Icheck UlfPQ MeasMod Delay Logic FUPLA DRec l0inv BFP RTS required sub-code in Table 35 distance protection high-voltage distance protection direction ground fault function for ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils direction ground fault function for grounded systems autoreclosure synchrocheck longitudinal differential function binary signal transmission Basic software including the following functions: definite time overcurrent directional definite time overcurrent protection directional inverse time overcurrent protection definite time voltage function thermal overload power function inverse definite minimum time-overcurrent voltage plausibility current plausibility metering three-phase measuring module delay/integrator AND gate, OR gate or bistable flip-flop project-specific logic disturbance recorder inverse time ground fault overcurrent function breaker failure protection runtime supervision
All the functions of the basic versions can be applied in any combination providing the maximum capacity of the processor and the number of analog channels is not exceeded. The basic versions with the longitudinal differential function include the additional 316EA62 board and another back plate.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 35

Sub code Significance Description Remarks
A-
A0 A1 A2 A5 B0 B1 B2 B5 C0 C1 C2 C5 D0 D1 D2 D5 U0 U1 U2 K01
none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 100 V AC 200 V AC 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 CT (1ph Code A-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 not defined 3 remote CTs 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 remote CTs
rated current
state
B-
rated current
state
C-
rated current
state
D-
rated current
state
U-
rated voltage
state
K-
VT, CT and MT combination in input transformer unit type 316GW61 CT = current transformer VT = voltage transformer MT = metering transformer K01 to K14: without differential function K15 to K20: with differential function
see previous table
K03
K04
K05
K08
K09
K15
optical link to the remote station
K16
optical link to the remote station
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 36
Ordering (contd)
Sub code
Significance
Description
Remarks
K17
3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 3 remote CTs 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LEDs 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LEDs 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays 8 LEDs 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LEDs 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LEDs 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays 8 LEDs none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC
optical link to the remote station 1. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 see previous table
E-
E1
E2
1.binary input/output unit Type 316DB62
E3
1.binary input/output unit Type 316DB63 1. binary input/output unit optocoupler input voltage state
I-
I3 I4 I5 I9 F0 F1
F-
see previous table
F2
F3
J-
J0 J3 J4 J5 J9 Q0 Q1
Q-
see previous table
Q2
Q3 VV0 V3 V4 V5 V9
state
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 37
Sub code
Significance
Description
Remarks
R-
R0 R1
none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC no comm. protocol SPA IEC 60870-5-103 LON MVB (part of IEC 61375) casing width 225.2 mm casing width 271 mm Semi-flush mounting Surface mounting, standard terminals basic versions REL316*4 without differential function basic versions REL316*4 with differential function order not acc. to Data Sheet without FUPLA logic FUPLA logic Customer-specific logic x = version of the FUPLA logic Defined by ABB Switzerland Ltd Different versions of functions 4. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 4. binary input/output unit Type 316DB62 4. binary input/output unit Type 316DB63 4. binary input/output unit optocoupler input voltage state see previous table
R2
R3 WW0 W3 W4 W5 W9 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y41) N1 N2 M1 M51) SA000 to SO990 SP000 to SQ990 SZ990 TT000 T001x to T999x T129x
Y-
NM-
S-
T141x
T142x
Logic for single-phase autoreclosure for line differential protection Logic for single-phase autoreclosure for the distance protection with a 1-breaker scheme Logic for single-phase autoreclosure for a reclosure unit with a 1-breaker scheme
1)
MVB interface (for interbay or process bus) not applicable for surface-mounted version.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 38
Ordering (contd)
Assembly kits
Item Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 19"-mounting plate for hinged frames, light-beige for use with: 1 REL316*4 (size 1 casing) 2 REL316*4 (size 1 casing) 1 REL316*4 (size 2 casing) 1 REL316*4 and 1 test socket block XX93, Test adapter and accessories: Semi-flush test socket block for Item 4 Test kit including 19" mounting plate to fit 1 REL316*4 in a hinged frame Test kit1 for semi-flush panel mounting Test kit1 for surface mounting Test socket block for surface mounting Connecting cable XX93/XS92b for use with Items 5 and 9 Test plug with 4 mm terminals for use with test set 316TSS01 Connecting cable for XS92b with 4 mm terminals for use with test plug RTXH24 1 REL316*4 size 1, surface mounting kit 1 REL316*4 size 2, surface mounting kit
1A
Order No. HESG324310P1 HESG324310P2 HESG324351P1 HESG324310P3 XX93/HESG112823R1 316TSS01/HESG448342R1 316TSS01/HESG448342R3 316TSS01/HESG448342R11 XX93/HESG112823R2 YX91-4/HESG216587R4 RTXH24/RK926016-AA YX91-7/HESG216587R7 HESG448532R0001 HESG448532R0002
test kit Type 316TSS01 comprises: - casing for semi-flush or surface mounting - test socket block RTXP24. Protocol LON MVB MVB Connector ST (bajonet) ST (bajonet) ST (bajonet) Optical fiber* G/G G/G G/G Gauge ** 62,5/125 62,5/125 62,5/125 Order No. HESG 448614R0001 HESG 448735R0231 HESG 448735R0232
PCC card interface
Type For interbay bus: PCCLON1 SET 500PCC02 For process bus: 500PCC02 Type 316BM61b 316BM61b 316BM61b
RS232C interbay bus interface
Protocol SPA IEC 60870-5-103 SPA
Connector ST (bajonet) SMA (screw) Plug/plug
Optical fiber* G/G G/G P/P
Gauge ** 62,5/125 62,5/125
Order No. HESG448267R401 HESG448267R402 HESG448267R431
* receiver Rx / transmitter Tx, G = glass, P = plastic

Human machine interface
**optical fiber conductor gauge in m Order No. German/English 1MRB260030M0001
Type CAP2/316*
Description Installation CD
* Unless expressly specified the latest version is supplied.

Optical fiber PC connecting cable
Type 500OCC02 communication cable for device with LDU.

Disturbance recorder evaluation program
Order No. 1MRB380084-R1 Order No. 3-Disk 3-Disk English/German English/German English/German English/German (Professional) (Expert) (Professional) (Expert) Single-licence Single-licence Multy-licence Multy-licence 1MRK000078-A 1MRK000078-D 1MRB260034R0011 1MRB260034R0021 1MRB260034R0012 1MRB260034R0022
Type, description REVAL English REVAL German E_wineve E_wineve E_wineve E_wineve
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 39
Mounting element
Rear view
219 1
Panel cutout
Fig. 10
254 1
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 40
Mounting element
Rear view
Panel cutout
= Instr. transformer inputs cross section = 4 mm2 A to H = Commands, input and output signals cross section = 1.5 mm2 H1 = Auxiliary voltage T
Fig. 11
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 41
Fig. 12
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 42
Fig. 13
Surface mounting, casing able to swing to the left, rear connections. Size N2 casing.
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 43
Example of an order
Rated current 1 A, rated voltage 100 V AC 3-phase voltages, 3-phase currents, 1 neutral current 110 V DC aux. supply 4 heavy duty relays (3 tripping, 1 CB closing), 20 signalling relays 8 optocoupler inputs (110 V DC) 1 relay for 19" rack mounting Distance protection function (Z starters with provision for all transfer tripping schemes) Autoreclosure Communication with the station control system (e.g. LON) Operator program on CD. The corresponding order is as follows: 1 REL316*4, HESG448750M0001 110 V DC aux. supply Optocoupler input voltage 110 V DC Rated current 1 A
Rated voltage 100 V AC 1 mounting kit HESG324310P1 1 electro-optical converter HESG448267R401 1 CD RE.216 / RE.316*4 1MRB260030M0001 1 PC connecting cable (if not already available) 1MRB380084-R1. Alternatively, the relay ID code may be given instead. In this case the order would be: 1 REL316*4, A1B0U1K03E2I3F2 J3Y1N1M1SK100T0 1 mounting kit HESG324310P1 1 CD RE.216 / RE.316*4 1MRB260030M0001 1 electro-optical converter HESG448267R401 1 PC connecting cable (if not already available) 1MRB380084-R1. Relay ID codes are marked on all relays. The significance of the sub-codes can be seen from Table 35. be transmitted via the same communications channel. Provision shall be made for the combination with a distance protection scheme, a directional ground fault scheme and back-up functions. The protection functions shall be in the form of software such that additional or different functions, i.e. power swing blocking, sensitive ground fault, overcurrent, thermal overload, single or three-phase autoreclosure, application-specific logics etc., can be readily implemented without changes to the existing hardware. All configuration and setting operations shall be made using a menu-based operator program running on a PC connected locally to the terminal for the purpose. The assignment of input and output signals to the protection functions shall be possible largely without restrictions. An event recorder with fault locator function shall be provided. The data exchange between the control system and the station control system shall be ensured via a communication interface. The data connection itself shall be able to be designed with fiberoptic conductors.
Example of a specification
Numerical line protection terminal with extensive self-supervision of the internal functions and A/D conversion of all input variables. The terminal shall be suitable for the protection of single and double-circuit lines and cables in solidly or low-impedance grounded systems, ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils. It shall be capable of detecting all kinds of power system faults including close three-phase faults, cross-country faults (in ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils), evolving faults and high-resistance ground faults. Due account shall be taken of power swings and changes in the direction of energy flow. The distance protection terminal shall have at least three distance zones with independent settings and in addition zones of measurement for all the usual transfer tripping schemes. Provision shall be made for compensating the mutual impedance in the case of parallel circuit lines using the neutral current of the parallel circuit to obtain a correct setting. The integrity of the VT circuit shall be supervised. The longitudinal differential protection terminal shall measure the three phases independently and permit other protection signals to
REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 44
Other relevant documents
Operating Instructions REL316*4 (printed) Operating Instructions REL316*4 (CD) Operating Instructions Testing program using XS92b Data Sheet CAP316 Data Sheet Test Set XS92b Reference List REL316*4 Description Current transformer requirements Data Sheet SigTOOL Data Sheet RIO580
1MRB520050-Uen 1MRB260030M0001 CH-ES 86-11.52 E 1MRB520167-Ben 1MRB520006-Ben 1MRB520212-Ren CH-ES 45-12.30 E 1MRB520158-Ben 1MRB520176-Ben
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Utility Automation Systems Brown-Boveri-Strasse 6 CH-5400 Baden/Switzerland Tel. +41 58 585 77 44 Fax +41 58 585 55 77 E-mail: substation.automation@ch.abb.com
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Numerical Transformer Protection
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Features
One three-phase differential function for two- or three-winding transformers No interposing CTs Current compensation of ratio and phase Programmable facility on inputs and outputs to provide trip and/or indication of external protection features (Buchholz, temperature, etc.) Overcurrent stage in differential circuit Overcurrent functions on high- and lowvoltage side Directional inverse and definite time overcurrent protection Overvoltage function (by adequate hardware version) Thermal overload function Distance protection - Overcurrent and underimpedance starters - Five distance zones (polygon for forwards and reverse measurement) - VT supervision - Power swing blocking - Load-compensated measurement Overexcitation Frequency Rate-of-change of frequency
Breaker failure protection Standard wiring diagram regardless of power transformer group Compact design, few hardware units, part of the 316*4-family Modular software Continuous self-monitoring and diagnosis Fully numerical signal processing Menu-driven user interface program CAP2/316 based on Windows Additional project-specific logic functions can be programmed with CAP316 Event recording and measuring values Three serial interfaces: - Front port connector for local connection of a personal computer - Back plane interface for remote communication with a station control system: LON, IEC 60870-5-103, MVB, SPA - Back plane interface for process bus: MVB Available for 19" rack mounting in a panel, surface or flush mounting Four independent, user-selectable parameter sets able to be activated via binary input Multi-activation facility of the available functions.
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 2
Application
The numerical transformer protection unit RET316*4 is designed for the fast, selective protection of two- or three-winding transformers. In addition the application for the protection of autotransformers and block generator-transformer units is possible. The relay will detect different kinds of faults, such as: all-phase faults earth faults where the power transformer star-point is solidly or low-impedance earthed interturn faults. RET316*4 can be supplied with different protection functions. The differential protection function is one of the most important functions for the fast and selective protection of all transformers with ratings greater than a few MVA
The overcurrent protection function is recommendable as back-up protection In some cases the overvoltage function is desired The thermal overload function protects the insulation against thermal stress. This protection function is normally equipped with two independently set levels and is used when oil overtemperature detectors are not installed Other functions on request (e.g. frequency function) The distance protection scheme is also often used as a back-up protection and is included in the RET316*4. RET316*4 has low requirements with respect to the main CTs. No interposing CTs required.
Design
The RET316*4 belongs to the generation of fully numerical transformer protection terminals, i.e. analog to digital conversion of the input variables takes place immediately after the input transformers and all further processing of the resulting numerical signals is performed by microprocessors and controlled by programs. Standard interfaces enable RET316*4 to communicate with other control systems. Provision is thus made for the exchange of data such as reactionless reporting of binary states, events, measurements and protection parameters or the activation of a different set of settings by higher level control systems. Because of its compact design, the very few hardware units it needs, its modular software and the integrated continuous self-diagnosis and supervision functions, RET316*4 ideally fulfils the users expectations of a modern protection terminal at a cost-effective price. The AVAILABILITY of a device, i.e. the ratio between its mean time in service without failure and its total life, is most certainly
most important characteristic required of protection equipment. As a consequence of the continuous supervision of its functions, this quotient in the case of RET316*4 is typically always close to 1. The menu-based HMI (human machine interface) and the RET316*4 small size makes the tasks of connection, configuration and setting simple. A maximum of FLEXIBILITY, i.e. the ability to adapt the protection for application in a particular power system or to coordinate with, or replace units in an existing protection scheme, is provided in RET316*4 by ancillary software functions and the assignment of input and output signals via the HMI. RET316*4s reliability, SELECTIVITY and STABILITY are backed by decades of experience in the protection of transformers in transmission and distribution systems. Numerical processing ensures consistent ACCURACY and SENSITIVITY throughout its operational life.
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 3
Hardware
The hardware concept for the RET316*4 transformer protection equipment comprises four different plug-in units, a connecting mother PCB and housing (Fig. 1): analog input unit central processing unit 1 to 4 binary input/output units power supply unit connecting mother PCB housing with connection terminals. In the analog input unit an input transformer provides the electrical and static isolation between the analog input variables and the internal electronic circuits and adjusts the signals to a suitable level for processing. The input transformer unit can accommodate a
maximum of nine input transformers (voltage-, protection current- or measuring transformer). Every analog variable is passed through a first order R/C low-pass filter on the main CPU unit to eliminate what is referred to as the aliasing effect and to suppress HF interferences (Fig. 2). They are then sampled 12 times per period and converted to digital signals. The analog/digital conversion is performed by a 16 Bit converter. A DSP (Powerful Digital Signal Processor) carries out part of the digital filtering and makes sure that the data for the protection algorithms are available in the memory to the main processor.
DC
+5V
A/D DSP
Trip outputs Trip Trip Outputs I/O Trip Signal Outputs I /Ports O Sign. Outputs outputsI / O Sign. Outputs/ Ports I Sign.BinaryO Outputs Ports Outputs Ports Bin. inputs Bin. Inputs Bin. Inputs Inputs FLASH EPROM
DPM
CPU 486
SW-Key
+15V -15V +24V
Power supply
Remote I/O Remote I/O Trip Outputs Trip Remote I/O Sign. Outputs Trip Outputs Sign. outputs Bin. Outputs Signal Inputs Bin. outputs Inputs Binary inputs
DC
PCC
a
MVB Process bus
Tranceiver
RAM
P C M C I A
(MVB)
PCC
c
LON MVB
LED's
RS 232
Serial controller
SCS SMS
RS 232
Serial controller
SPA / IEC870-5-103
HMI
Fig. 1
The processor core essentially comprises the main microprocessor for the protection algorithms and dual-ported memories (DPMs) for communication between the A/D converters and the main processor. The main processor performs the protection algorithms and controls the local HMI and the interfaces to the station control system. Binary signals from the main processor are relayed to the corresponding inputs of the I/O unit and thus control the auxiliary output relays and the light emitting diode (LED) signals. The main processor unit is equipped with an RS232C serial interface via which among other things the protection settings are made, events are read
and the data from the disturbance recorder memory are transferred to a local or remote PC. On this main processor unit there are two PCC slots and one RS232C interface. These serial interfaces provide remote communication to the station monitoring system (SMS) and station control system (SCS) as well as to the remote I/Os. RET316*4 can have one to four binary I/O units each. These units are available in three versions:
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 4
Hardware (contd)
a) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty contacts, 8 optocoupler inputs and 6 signalling relays Type 316DB61 b) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty contacts, 4 optocoupler inputs and 10 signalling relays Type 316DB62
c) 14 optocoupler inputs and 8 signalling relays Type 316DB63. When ordering RET316*4 with more than 2 I/O units, casing size N2 must be selected. According to whether one or two I/O units are fitted, there are either 8 LED's or 16 LED's visible on the front of the RET316*4. form, they are then separated by numerical filters into real and apparent components before being applied to the main processor. Binary signals from the optocoupler inputs go straight to the main processor. The actual processing of the signals in relation to the protection algorithms and logic then takes place.
Software
Both analog and binary input signals are conditioned before being processed by the main processor. As described under hardware above, the analog signals pass through the sequence input transformers, shunt, low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter), multiplexer and A/D converter stages and DSP. In their digital
Fig. 2
Data Flow
List of functions
Binary functions: AND ASSB B23 B24 BINEXTIN BINEXOUT COUNTX CNT CNTD OR RSFF SKIP TFF TMOC TMOCS, TMOCL TMOI
AND gate Assign binary 2-out-of-3 selector 2-out-of-4 selector External binary input External binary output Shift register Counter Downwards counter OR gate RS flip-flop Skip segment T flip-flop with reset Monostable constant Monostable constant short, long Monostable constant with interrupt
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 5
TMOIS, TMOIL TOFF TOFFS, TOFFL TON TONS, TONL XOR Analog functions: ABS ADD ADDL ADMUL CNVIL CNVLBCD CNVLI CNVLP CNVPL DIV
Example:
Monostable constant with interrupt short, long Off delay Off delay short, long On delay On delay short, long Exclusive OR gate
Absolute value Adder/subtracter Long integer adder/subtracter Adder/multiplier Integer to long integer converter Long integer to BC converter Long integer to integer converter Long integer to percent converter Percentage to long integer converter Divider
DIVL FCTL FCTP FILT INTS, INTL KMUL LIM LOADS MAX MIN MUL MULL NEGP PACW PDTS, PDTL PT1S, PT1L SQRT SWIP THRLL THRUL TMUL UPACW
Long integer divider Linear function Polynomial function Filter Integrator Factor multiplier Limiter Load shedding function Maximum value detector Minimum value detector Multiplier Long integer multiplier Percent negator Pack BINARY signals into INTEGER Differentiator Delayed approximation Square root Percent switch Lower limit threshold Upper limit threshold Time multiplier Unpack BINARY signals from an INTEGER
B_DRIVE CL OP
CL OP POK
4 & 5 &
SEL RQON RQOF
1 &
2 >=1
SYNC RQEX 30 1
6 =1
Part of FUPLA application (Q0) : control and interlocking logic for three objects Q0, Q1, Q2. B_DRIVE is a macro based on binary function blocks.
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 6
Functions
The library of function modules for RET316*4 includes a variety of protection and ancillary functions from which the user can choose according to relay version (see Ordering data and Fig. 3 below). Within the
constraints of the available processing capacity, the same function may be included several times.
Variant Protection function Current biased differential 2-Winding Current biased differential 3-Winding Distance Earth fault inverse time Frequency df/dt Overcurrent definite time Overcurrent instantaneous Overcurrent inverse time Directional definite time overcurrent protection Directional inverse time overcurrent protection Overexcitation (V/Hz) Overvoltage Restricted earth fault Thermal overload Undervoltage Power Variant CTs protection characteristic CTs measuring characteristic VTs Fig. 3 1 6 2 6 3 6 2 1 3 3 3 3 3 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 6 12 6 13 6 2 1 3 14 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Overview of protection functions and analog inputs
High inrush stability
One major task associated with differential protection is to provide discrimination between internal fault currents and inrush in the event that a transformer is energized, another transformer switched in parallel or an external fault cleared or a voltage increase on the transformer terminals suddenly occurs. For all these phenomena functions are provided in the protection device.
Increased magnetizing stability
age at an internal fault due to the 5th harmonic restraint applied in other transformers differential protections.
Back-up functions
Different functions can be provided as backup functions: overcurrent, neutral current or neutral point voltage, underimpedance or distance function.
Distance protection
In case of increased magnetizing current due to overvoltages on the transformer terminals a higher "g" parameter setting of the differential function (e.g. to 2In) can be activated over one binary input. This input is activated by either an internal or external instantaneous overvoltage function. The advantage of this solution is the absence of any risk of block-
The RET316*4 versions with three voltage inputs are also provided with this function. The distance protection function can have either overcurrent or underimpedance starters. They are equally suitable for use in solidly grounded, ungrounded or impedance grounded systems.
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 7
Distance measurement is performed in the first, overreach and reverse zones simultaneously. Every zone has a wide completely independent setting range and an independent setting for the direction of measurement. Four directional zones are provided, the last can also be configured to be non-directional. Overreach and reverse measuring zones are for use in transfer tripping schemes. The distance measuring characteristic is a polygon with a slightly inclined reactance line which has proved to be an optimum in practice. Where the voltage measured by the relay for a fault is too low, the inclusion of a healthy phase voltage as reference, respectively the use of a memory feature (close three-phase faults) ensures the integrity of the directional decision. A VT supervision function is also included which monitors the zero-sequence component (U0 I0) and/or the negative-sequence component (U2 I2), the latter being of advantage in ungrounded systems or systems with poor grounding.
station control system. A choice can be made between phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase voltages.
Ancillary functions
Ancillary functions such as a logic and a delay/integrator enable the user to create logical combinations of signals and pick-up and reset delays. A run-time supervision feature enables checking the opening and closing of all kinds of breakers (circuit-breakers, isolators, ground switches...). Failure of a breaker to open or close within an adjustable time results in the creation of a corresponding signal for further processing.
Plausibility check
Frequency function
The event recorder function provides capacity for up to 256 binary signals including time marker with a resolution in the order of milliseconds.
The disturbance recorder monitors up to 9 analog inputs and up to 16 binary inputs. The capacity for recording disturbances depends on the duration of a disturbance as determined by its pre-disturbance history and the duration of the disturbance itself. The total recording time is approximately 5 s.
For local communication with RET316*4, there is the setting software CAP2/316 available which is based on Windows. This software runs under the following operating systems: Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000. This optimal programming tool is available for engineering, testing, commissioning and operation. The software can be used either ON-LINE or OFF-LINE and furthermore contains a DEMO mode.
Measuring
The measuring functions measure the singleor three-phase rms values of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power for display on the local HMI or transfer to the
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 8
Functions (contd)
- Binary signals Event list Operating instructions Disturbance recorder information Diagnostic information Acknowledgment functions - Resetting LEDs - Resetting latched outputs - Event erasing - Warmstart.
RET316*4 is able to communicate with a station monitoring and evaluation system (SMS) or a station control system (SCS) via an optical fibre link. The corresponding serial interface permits events, measurements, disturbance recorder data and protection settings to be read and sets of parameter settings to be switched. Using the LON bus permits in addition the exchange of binary information between the individual bay controllers, e.g. signals for station interlocking.
Using the process bus type MVB, remote inand output units 500RIO11 can be connected to the RE.316*4 terminals. The input and output channels can be extended to a large number by using RIO580 remote input/output system. Installing 500RIO11 I/O units close to the process reduces the wiring dramatically, since they are accessible via fibreoptic link from the RE.316*4 terminals. Analog signals can also be connected to the system via the 500AXM11 from the RIO580 family: DC current 4...20 mA 0...20 mA -20...20 mA 0...10 V -10...10 V
DC voltage
Built-in HMI
The front HMI unit serves primarily for the signalling of actual events, measurands and diagnostic data. Settings are not displayed. Features: Measurand display - Amplitude, angle, frequency of analog channels - Functional measurands

RE.316*4s self-diagnosis and supervision functions ensure maximum availability not only of the protection terminal itself, but also of the power system it is protecting. Hardware failures are immediately signalled by an alarm contact. In particular, the external and internal auxiliary supplies are continuously
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 9
supervised. The correct function and tolerance of the A/D converter are tested by cyclically converting two reference voltages. Special algorithms regularly check the processors memories (background functions). A watchdog supervises the execution of the programs. An important advantage of the extensive selfdiagnosis and supervision functions is that periodic routine maintenance and testing are reduced.
Supporting software
The evaluation programs REVAL and E_wineve (Windows NT/Windows 2000) are available for viewing and evaluating the disturbances stored by the disturbance recorder. Where the disturbance data are transferred via the communications system to the disturbance recorder evaluation station, the file transfer program WinCom (Windows NT/ Windows 2000) is also used. The program XSCON is available for conversion of the RE.316*4 disturbance recorder data to ABBs test set XS92b format. This offers reproduction of electrical quantities recorded during a fault.
The operator program facilitates configuration and setting of the protection, listing parameters, reading events and listing the various internal diagnostic data.
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 10

Number of inputs according to version, max. 9 analog inputs (voltages and currents, 4 mm2 terminals) Rated frequency fN Rated current IN Thermal rating of current circuit continuous for 10 s for 1 s dynamic (half period) Rated voltage UN Thermal rating of voltage circuit continuous Burden per phase current inputs at IN = 1 A at IN = 5 A voltage inputs at UN VT fuse characteristic 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A, 2 A or 5 A 4 x IN 30 x IN 100 x IN 250 x IN (peak) 100 V or 200 V 2.2 x UN

Tripping relays No. of contacts 2 relays per I/O unit 316DB61 or 316DB62 with 2 N/O contacts each 1.5 mm2 terminals 300 V AC or V DC 5A 30 A 250 A 3300 W
Max. operating voltage Continuous rating Make and carry for 0.5 s Surge for 30 ms Making power at 110 V DC Breaking capacity for L/R = 40 ms Breaking current with 1 contact at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC Breaking current with 2 contacts in series at U <50 V DC at U <120 V DC at U <250 V DC Signalling contacts No. of contacts
1.5 A 0.3 A 0.1 A 5A 1A 0.3 A 6, 10 or 8 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63), 1 contact per sig. relay with 1.5 mm2 terminals Each interface unit equipped with 1 C/O contact and all others N/O contacts 250 V AC or V DC 5A 15 A 100 A 550 W 0.5 A 0.1 A 0.04 A
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 11

No. of optocouplers Input voltage Threshold voltage Max. input current Operating time 8, 4 or 14 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63) 18 to 36 V DC / 36 to 75 V DC / 82 to 312 V DC / 175 to 312 V DC 10 to 17 V DC / 20 to 34 V DC / 40 to 65 V DC / 140 to 175 V DC <12 mA 1 ms

Choice of display modes: Accumulates each new disturbance Latching with reset by next pick-up Latching only if protection trips with reset by next pick-up Signalling without latching Colours 1 green (standby) 1 red (trip) 6 or 14 yellow (all other signals)


RS232C interface Data transfer rate Protocol Electrical/optical converter (optional) PCC interface Number PCC (optional) Interbay bus protocol Process bus protocol (interbay and process bus can be used concurrently) LON bus Data transfer rate MVB bus Data transfer rate Event memory Capacity Time marker resolution Time deviation without remote synchronizing Engineering interface 9 pin Sub-D female 9600 Bit/s SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 316BM61b 2 plug-in sockets for type III cards LON or MVB (part of IEC 61375) MVB (part of IEC 61375)
PCC with fibre-optical port, ST connectors 1.25 MBit/s PCC with redundant fibre-optical port, ST connectors 1.5 Mbit/s 256 events 1 ms <10 s per day integrated software interface for signal engineering with SigTOOL
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 12

Supply voltage Voltage ranges Voltage interruption bridging time Fuse rating Load on station battery at normal operation (1 relay energized) during a fault (all relays energized) with 1 I/O unit with 2 I/O units with 3 I/O units with 4 I/O units Additional load of the options SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or LON interface MVB interface Buffer time of the event list and fault recorder data at loss of auxiliary supply 36 to 312 V DC >50 ms 4 A <20 W
<22 W <27 W <32 W <37 W 1.5 W 2.5 W >2 days (typ. 1 month)

Temperature range operation storage Humidity Seismic test Leakage resistance Insulation test -10 C to +55 C -40 C to +85 C 93%, 40 C, 4 days 5 g, 30 s, 1 to 33 Hz (1 octave/min) >100 M, 500 V DC 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min 1 kV across open contacts 5 kV, 1.2/50 s 1.0/2.5 kV, Cl. 3; 1 MHz, 400 Hz rep.freq. 2/4 kV, Cl. 4 6/8 kV (10 shots), Cl. 3 EN 60255-6 (1994), IEC 60255-6 (1988) IEC 60068-2-3 (1969) IEC 60255-21-3 (1995), IEEE 344 (1987) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000), EN 60950 (1995) EN 60255-5 (2001), IEC 60255-5 (2000) * IEC 60255-22-1 (1988), ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (1989) EN 61000-4-4 (1995), IEC 61000-4-4 (1995) EN 61000-4-2 (1996), IEC 61000-4-2 (2001) EN 61000-4-8 (1993), IEC 61000-4-8 (1993) EN 61000-4-6 (1996) EN 61000-4-6 (1996), EN 61000-4-3 (1996), IEC 61000-4-3 (1996), ENV 50204 (1995) EN 61000-6-2 (2001), EN 55011 (1998), CISPR 11 (1990)
Emission
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 13

Weight Size N1 casing Size N2 casing Methods of mounting approx. 10 kg approx. 12 kg semi-flush with terminals at rear surface with terminals at rear 19" rack mounting, height 6U, width N1: 225.2 mm (1/2 19" rack). width N2: 271 mm. IP 50 (IP 20 if MVB PCC interface are used) IPXXB for terminals.
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 14
Technical data Functions

Thermal image for the 1st. order model. Single or three-phase measurement with detection of maximum phase value. Settings: Base current IB Alarm stage Tripping stage Thermal time constant Accuracy of the thermal image 0.5 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N 2 to 500 min in steps of 0.1 min 5% N (at fN) with protection CTs 2% N (at fN) with metering CTs

Over and undercurrent detection. Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase current. 2nd. harmonic restraint for high inrush currents. May also be used as restricted earth fault relay with additional external hardware (high-resistance and VDR in parallel). Special metering transformer. Settings: Pick-up current Delay Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio overcurrent undercurrent Max. operating time without intentional delay Inrush restraint pick-up setting reset ratio 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% or 0.02 IN >94% (for max. function) <106% (for min. function) 60 ms optional 0.1 I2h/I1h 0.8

Over and undervoltage detection Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase voltage Settings: Pick-up voltage Delay Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio (U 0.1 UN) overvoltage undervoltage Max. operating time without intentional delay 0.01 to 2.0 UN in steps of 0.002 UN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s +2% or 0.005 UN >96% (for max. function) <104% (for min. function) 60 ms
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 15

Single-phase measurement of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power Choice of measuring phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages Suppression of DC components and harmonics in current and voltage Compensation of phase errors in main and input CTs and VTs Settings: Phase-angle Reference value of the power SN See Table 34 for accuracy. -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1 0.2 to 2.5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN

Three-phase measurement of voltages (star or delta) and currents. Measurement of frequency, real and apparent power and power factor. Two independent impulse counter inputs for calculation of interval and accumulated energy. The threephase measurement and the impulse counters can be used independently and may also be disabled. This function may be configured four times. Settings: Angle Reference value for power t1-Interval Scale factor of power Max. impulse frequency Min. impulse duration Accuracy of time interval See Table 34 for accuracy -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1 0.2 to 5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN 1 min., 2 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 60 min. or 120 min. 0.0001 to 1 25 Hz 10 ms 100 ms
Table 15: Transformer differential (87T)

Features: For two- and three-winding transformers Three-phase function Current-adaptive characteristic High stability for external faults and current transformer saturation No auxiliary transformers necessary because of vector group and CT ratio compensation Inrush restraint using 2nd harmonic Settings: g-setting v-setting b-setting Max. trip time (protected transformer loaded) - for I >2 IN - for I 2 IN 0.1 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.05 IN 0.25 or 0.5 1.25 to 5 in steps of 0.25 IN 30 ms 50 ms
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 16
Accuracy of pick-up value Reset conditions Differential protection definitions:
5% IN (at fN) I <0.8 g-setting
I = I1+ I2 + I3 IH =
0 = arg (I1' - I2') 2-winding: 3-winding: I1' = I1, I2' = I2 I1' = MAX (I1, 2, 3) I2' = I1 + I2 + I3 - I1' Fig. 4 Differential protection characteristic
I 1 I 2 cos
for cos 0 for cos <0


Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest phase current Stable response to transients Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long time inverse or RXIDG characteristic Settings: Number of phases Base current IB Pick-up current Istart 1 or 3 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 1 to 4 IB in steps of 0.01 IB t = k1 / ((I/IB)C- 1) c = 0.02 c=1 c=2 c=1 t = 5.8 - 1.35 In (I/IB)
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 17
Min. time setting tmin k1 setting Accuracy classes for the operating time according to British Standard 142 RXIDG characteristic Reset ratio
0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s E 5.0 4% (1 - I/80 IB) >94 %

Three-phase measurement Suppression of DC- and high-frequency components Definite time characteristic Voltage memory feature for close faults Settings: Current Angle Delay tWait Memory duration Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) Voltage input range Voltage memory range Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage memory Frequency dependence of angle measurement at voltage memory Max. response time without delay 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN -180 to +180 in steps of 15 0.02 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 s to 20 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% or 0.02 IN >94% 5 0.005 to 2 UN <0.005 UN 20 0.5/Hz 60 ms

Three-phase measurement Suppression of DC- and high-frequency components Inverse time characteristic Voltage memory feature for close faults Settings: Current I-Start Angle Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long-time earth fault k1-setting t-min IB-value tWait 14 IB in steps of 0.01 IB -180+180 in steps of 15 t = k1 / ((I/IB)C- 1) c = 0,02 c=1 c=2 c=1 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 s to 20 s in steps of 0.01 s
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 18
Memory duration Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) Reset ratio Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) Accuracy class of the operating time acc. to British Standard 142 Voltage input range Voltage memory range Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage memory Frequency dependence of angle measurement at voltage memory Max. response time without delay
0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 5% >94% 5 E 10 0.005 to 2 UN <0.005 UN 20 0.5/Hz 60 ms

Neutral current measurement (derived externally or internally) Stable response to transients Inverse time characteristic (acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range) normal inverse very inverse extremely inverse long time inverse or RXIDG characteristic Settings: Number of phases Base current IB Pick-up current Istart Min. time setting tmin k1 setting Accuracy classes for the operating time according to British Standard 142 RXIDG characteristic Reset ratio 1 or 3 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 1 to 4 IB in steps of 0.01 IB 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s E 5.0 4% (1 - I/80 IB) >94% t = k1 / ((I/IB)C - 1) c = 0.02 c=1 c=2 c=1 t = 5.8 - 1.35 In (I/IB)
Table 21: Instantaneous overvoltage protection function (59, 27) with peak value evaluation
Features: evaluation of instantaneous values, therefore extremely fast and frequency-independent on a wide scale storing of the highest instantaneous value after start no suppression of DC components no suppression of harmonics 1- or 3phase maximum value detection for multi-phase functions variable lower limiting frequency fmin Settings: Voltage Delay Limiting fmin Accuracy of pick-up value (at 0.08 to 1.1 fN) Reset ratio Max. trip time at no delay (at fN) 0.01 to 2.0 UN in steps of 0.01 UN 0.00 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 25 to 50 Hz in steps of 1 Hz 3% or 0.005 UN >90% (for max. function) <110% (for min. function) <30 ms (for max. function) <50 ms (for min. function)
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 19

Features: Maximum or minimum function (over-, underfrequency) Minimum voltage blocking Settings: Frequency Delay Minimum voltage Accuracy of pick-up value Reset ratio Starting time 40 to 65 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 to 0.8 UN in steps of 0.1 UN 30 mHz at UN and fN 100% <130 ms

Features: combined pick-up with frequency criterion possible blocking by undervoltage Settings: df/dt Frequency Delay Minimum voltage Accuracy of df/dt (at 0.9 to 1.05 fN) Accuracy of frequency (at 0.9 to 1.05 fN) Reset ratio df/dt -10 to +10 Hz/s in steps of 0.1 Hz/s 40 to 55 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz at fN = 50 Hz 50 to 65 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz at fN = 60 Hz 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.2 to 0.8 UN in steps of 0.1 UN 0.1 Hz/s 30 mHz 95% for max. function 105% for min. function
Table 24: Overexcitation (24)

Features: U/f measurement Minimum voltage blocking Settings: Pick-up value Delay Frequency range Accuracy (at fN) Reset ratio Starting time 0.2 to 2 UN/fN in steps of 0.01 UN/fN 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.5 to 1.2 fN 3% or 0.01 UN/fN >98% (max.), <102% (min.) 120 ms
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 20
Table 25: Overexcitation function with inverse time delay (24)

Features: Single-phase measurement Inverse time delay according to IEEE Guide C37.91-1985 Setting made by help of table settings Settings: Table settings Start value U/f tmin tmax Reset time Reference voltage Accuracy of pick-up value Frequency range Reset ratio Starting time U/f values: (1.05; 1.10 to 1.50) UN/fN 1.05 to 1.20 UN/fN in steps of 0.01 UN/fN 0.01 to 2 min in steps of 0.01 min 5 to 100 min in steps of 0.1 min 0.2 to 100 min in steps of 0.01 min 0.8 to 1.2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN 3% UN/fN (at fN) 0.5 to 1.2 fN 100% <120 ms

Measurement of real or apparent power Protection function based on real or apparent power measurement Reverse power protection Over and underpower Single, two or three-phase measurement Suppression of DC components and harmonics in current and voltage Compensation of phase errors in main and input CTs and VTs Settings: Power pick-up Characteristic angle Delay Phase error compensation Rated power SN Reset ratio Accuracy of the pick-up setting -0.1 to 1.2 SN in steps of 0.005 SN -180 to +180 in steps of 5 0.05 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s -5 to +5 in steps of 0.1 0.5 to 2.5 UN IN in steps of 0.001 UN IN 30 % to 170 % in steps of 1 % of power pick-up 10% of setting or 2% UN IN (for protection CTs) 3% of setting or 0.5% UN IN (for core-balance CTs) 70 ms
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 21

Features Individual phase current recognition Single or three-phase operation External blocking input Two independent time steps Remote tripping adjustable simultaneously with retripping or back-up tripping Possibility of segregated activating/deactivating each trip (Redundant trip, retrip, back-up trip and remote trip). Settings Current Delay t1 (repeated trip) Delay t2 (backup trip) Delay tEFS (End fault protection) Reset time for retrip Reset time for back-up trip Pulse time for remote trip Number of phases Accuracy of pick-up current (at fN) Reset ratio of current measurement Reset time (for power system time constants up to 300 ms and short-circuit currents up to 40 IN) 0.2 to 5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s 1 or 3 15% >85% 28 ms (with main CTs TPX) 28 ms (with main CTs TPY and current setting 1.2 IN) 38 ms (with main CTs TPY and current setting 0.4 IN)
Table 28: Distance protection (21)

All values of settings referred to the secondaries, every zone can be set independently of the others, 4 independent files for sets of settings. Impedance measurement Zero-sequence current compensation Mutual impedance for parallel circuit lines Time step setting range Underimpedance starters Overcurrent starters Min. operating current Back-up overcurrent Neutral current criterion Neutral voltage criterion Low-voltage criterion for detecting, for example, a weak infeed VT supervision NPS/neutral voltage criterion NPS/neutral current criterion -300 to 300 /ph in steps of 0.01 /ph (IN = 1 A or 2 A) -30 to 30 /ph in steps of 0.001 /ph (IN = 5 A) 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01, -180 to +90 in steps of 1 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01, -90 to +90 in steps of 1 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01 s -999 to 999 /ph in steps of 0.1 /ph (IN = 1 A or 2 A) -99.9 to 99.9 /ph in steps of 0.01 /ph (IN = 5 A) 0.5 to 10 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.1 to 2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0 to 10 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0.1 to 2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
0.01 to 0.5 UN in steps of 0.01 UN 0.01 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 22
Accuracy (applicable for current time constants between 40 and 150 ms) amplitude error phase error Supplementary error for - frequency fluctuations of 10% - 10% third harmonic - 10% fifth harmonic Minimum operating time (incl. tripping relay): Typical operating time (incl. tripping relay): Basic distance protection function With ancillary functions activated Typical reset time
5% for U/UN >0.1 2 for U/UN >0.1 5% 10% 10% 21 ms 30 ms +8 ms 45 ms

Max. 9 CT/VT channels Max. 16 binary channels Max. 12 analog channels of internal measurement values 12 samples per period (sampling frequency 600 or 720 Hz at a rated frequency of 50/60 Hz) Available recording time for 9 CT/VT and 8 binary signals approximately 5 s Recording initiated by any binary signal, e.g. the general trip signal. Data format Dynamic range Resolution Settings: Recording periods Pre-event Event Post-event 40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms 100 to 3000 ms in steps of 50 ms 40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms EVE 70 x IN, 2.2 x UN 12 bits
Ancillary functions
Table 30: Logic

RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 23

A plausibility check function is provided for each three-phase current and three-phase voltage input which performs the following: Determination of the sum and phase sequence of the 3 phase currents or voltages Provision for comparison of the sum of the phase values with a corresponding current or voltage sum applied to an input Function blocks for currents exceeding 2 x IN, respectively voltages exceeding 1.2 UN Accuracy of the pick-up setting at rated frequency Reset ratio Current plausibility settings: Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation current or between internal and external summation currents Amplitude compensation for summation CT Delay Voltage plausibility settings: Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation voltage or between internal and external summation voltages Amplitude compensation for summation VT Delay 2% IN in the range 0.2 to 1.2 IN 2% UN in the range 0.2 to 1.2 UN >90% whole range >95% (at U >0.1 UN or I >0.1 IN)
0.05 to 1.2 UN in steps of 0.05 UN -2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s

0.5% SN 0.01 0.1% fN
3% SN 0.03 0.1% fN
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 24
Wiring diagram
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE INPUTS (ACC. TO K-CODE)
SIGNALLING
OPTOCOUPLER INPUTS
TRIP
DC SUPPLY
Fig. 5
Typical wiring diagram of RET316*4 in size N1 casing with two input/output units 316DB62
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 25
Ordering
Please specify: Quantity Ordering number (basic version ordering number + stand-alone unit ordering number, or only stand alone ordering number) ADE code + key The following basic versions can be ordered: Stand-alone units RET316*4 with built-in HMI (see table below) HESG448750M0002
Table 35: RET316*4 basic versions

OCDT Inv Dir OCDT(REF) Code Diff(2w) Diff(3w) <Z TH Power Freq U/f(inv) OCInv OCDT OCDT Dir Basic-SW X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
OCInst
A*B0C*D0U0K21E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST210 T*** X A*B*C*D0U*K24E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M*ST220 T*** Order No. HESG448750M0002 A*B*C*D0U*K24E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST230 T*** A*B0C*D*U0K22E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST310 T*** A*B0C*D*U0K22E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST320 T*** A*B0C*D*U0K22E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST330 T*** A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST410 T*** X A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST420 T*** X A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST430 T*** X A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST440 T*** X A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST450 T*** A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST460 T*** Legend * <Z Diff(2W) Diff(3W) TH Power Freq df/dt U/f(inv) OCInv OCDT OCDT(REF) OCInst OCDT Dir OCDT Inv Dir VTDT VTinst X X A*B0C*D0U0K21E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST220 T*** X A*B0C*D0U0K21E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST230 T*** X
required sub-codes in Table 36 distance two-winding transformer differential protection three-winding transformer differential protection thermal overload power function frequency function (min, max) rate-of-change of frequency overexcitation protection with inverse time delay inverse time overcurrent protection definite time overcurrent definite time overcurrent function for high-impedance differential protection overcurrent protection with peak value evaluation directional definite time overcurrent protection directional inverse time overcurrent protection definite time voltage function instantaneous overvoltage function with peak value evaluation
VTDT VTInst
df/dt
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 26
Ordering (contd)
Basic-SW Ucheck Icheck UlfPQ MeasMod Delay Count Logic FUPLA DRec IoInv BFP RTS
basic software including the following functions: voltage plausibility (only if 3-phase voltage available) current plausibility metering (only if at least 1 voltage available) three-phase measuring module delay/integrator counter logic interconnection project-specific control logic disturbance recorder inverse time ground fault overcurrent breaker failure protection runtime supervision
All the functions of the basic version can be applied in any combination providing the maximum capacity of the processor and the number of analog channels is not exceeded
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 27

Sub code AA0 A1 A2 A5 B0 B1 B2 B5 C0 C1 C2 C5 D0 D1 D2 D5 U0 U1 U2 K21 K22 Significance none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 1A 2A 5A none 100 V AC 200 V AC 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 CTs (3ph Code C-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 CTs (3ph Code C-) 3 CTs (3ph Code D-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 CTs (3ph Code C-) 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) 3 CTs (3ph Code C-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 1 MT (1ph Code B-) 1 VT (1ph Code U-) 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LEDs 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LEDs 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays 8 LEDs 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LEDs 2. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 see previous table 1. binary input/output unit Type 316DB61 see previous table Description rated current Remarks state
B-
rated current
state
C-
rated current
state
D-
rated current
state
U-
rated voltage
state
K-
see previous table
K23
K24
E-
E1
E2
E3
I-
I3 I4 I5 I9 F0 F1
F-
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 28
Ordering (contd)
F2
4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 8 LEDs 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays 8 LEDs none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC none 8 optocoupler 6 signal. relays 2 command relays 4 optocoupler 10 signal. relays 2 command relays 14 optocoupler 8 signal. relays none 82 to 312 V DC 36 to 75 V DC 18 to 36 V DC 175 to 312 V DC no comm. protocol SPA IEC 60870-5-103 LON MVB (part of IEC 61375) casing width 225.2 mm casing width 271 mm Semi-flush mounting Surface mounting, standard terminals
F3
J-
J0 J3 J4 J5 J9 Q0 Q1
2. binary input/output unit optocoupler input voltage
state
Q-
see previous table
Q2
Q3 VV0 V3 V4 V5 V9 R0 R1
state
R-
see previous table
R2
R3 WW0 W3 W4 W5 W9 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y41) N1 N2
state
Y-
NM-
see previous table Order M1 and separate assembly kit for 19" rack mounting
M51)
M1
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 29
S-
ST000 to SU990 SZ990 T000 T001x to T999x
basic versions RET316*4
Protection function versions
see previous table
order not acc. to Data Sheet none FUPLA logic Customer-specific logic x = version of the FUPLA logic Defined by ABB Switzerland Ltd
T-
1)
MVB interface (for interbay or process bus) not applicable for surface-mounted version
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 30
Ordering (contd)
Assembly kits Item Description 19"-mounting plate for hinged frames, light-beige for use with: 1 RET316*4 (size 1 casing) 2 RET316*4 (size 1 casing) 1 RET316*4 (size 2 casing RET316*4 size 1 surface mounting kit RET316*4 size 2 surface mounting kit PCC card interface Type For interbay bus: PCCLON1 SET 500PCC02 For process bus: 500PCC02 Type 316BM61b 316BM61b 316BM61b Protocol LON MVB MVB Connector ST (bajonet) ST (bajonet) ST (bajonet) Optical fibre* G/G G/G G/G Gauge ** 62.5/125 62.5/125 62.5/125 Order No. HESG448614R0001 HESG448735R0231 HESG 448735R0232 Order No.
* receiver Rx / transmitter Tx, G = glass, P = plastic Human machine interface Type CAP2/316* Optical fibre PC connecting cable Type 500OCC02 communication cable for device with LDU Disturbance recorder evaluation program Type, description REVAL English REVAL German E_wineve E_wineve E_wineve E_wineve 3-Disk 3-Disk English/German English/German English/German English/German Description
**optical fibre conductor gauge in m Order No. German/English 1MRB260030M0001
Installation CD
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 31
Mounting element
Rear view
219 1
Panel cutout
Fig. 6
254 1
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 32
Mounting element
Rear view
Panel cutout
= Instr. transformer inputs 2 cross section = 4 mm A to H = Commands, input and output signals cross section = 1.5 mm2 H1 = Auxiliary voltage T
Fig. 7
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 33
Fig. 8
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 34
Fig. 9
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 35
Example of an order
Rated current 1 A, rated voltage 100 V AC 3 phase voltages, 6 phase currents 110 V DC aux. supply 4 heavy duty relays (3 tripping, 1 CB closing 20 signalling relays 8 opto-coupler inputs (110 V DC) 1 relay for 19" rack mounting Communication with the station control system (e.g. LON) Operator program in English on CD The corresponding order is as follows: 1 RET316*4, HESG448750M0002 110 V DC aux. supply Opto-coupler input voltage 110 V DC Rated current 1 A Rated voltage 100 V DC 1 mounting kit HESG324310P1
1 PC card LON 1 CD RE.216 / RE316*4 1MRB260030M0001 1 PC connecting cable (if not already available) 1MRB380084-R1 Alternatively, the relay ID code may be given instead. In this case the order would be: 1 RET316*4, A1B0C1D0U1K23E2I3F 2J3Q0V0R0W0Y1N1M1ST410T0 1 mounting kit HESG324310P1 1 CD RE.216 / RE316*4 1MRB260030M0001 1 PC card HESG448614R1 1 PC connecting cable (if not already available) 1MRB380084-R1 Relay ID codes are marked on all relays. The significance of the sub-codes can be seen from Table 36.
Sample specification
Numerical transformer protection with extensive self-monitoring and analog/digital conversion of all input quantities. It shall be suitable for the protection of twoor three-winding transformers, autotransformers, reactors and block-generator transformer units. No interposing current transformers for matching transformer group and main CTs ratio shall be required. Total immunity to magnetizing inrush current due to 2nd harmonic blocking with possibility of indicating this shall be provided. Highset overcurrent function in differential circuit (2nd harmonic independent) shall be available. The protection shall be stable in the case of high through-faults.
Different types of protection functions shall be implemented by adding software only. The power source shall be either a dc or ac supply voltage for the standard voltage ranges. The design shall enable all types of mounting. Communication with the relay shall be performed using a menu-driven user interface program. This communication shall be performed locally via personal computer. The relay shall be designed such that the neccessary hardware for fault recording or coupling to a station control system can be installed at any time. A high flexibility of input and output signal allocation shall be provided. Event recording and disturbance recording shall be included.
RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 36
References
Operating Instructions (printed) Operating Instructions (CD) Reference List RET316/RET316*4 Data Sheet CAP316 Data Sheet Test Set XS92b Data Sheet SigTOOL Data Sheet RIO580
1MRB520051-Uen 1MRB260030M0001 1MRB520211-Ren 1MRB520167-Ben 1MRB520006-Ben 1MRB520158-Ben 1MRB520176-Ben
ABB Switzerland Ltd

CH-ES 45-12.30 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

DEMANDS ON MEASURING TRANSFORMERS FOR REL316 and REL316*4
04-11-24 Version 3.10 and higher
Introduction The operation of any distance protection is influenced by distortion in the measuring quantities. The current to the protection will be heavily distorted when the current transformer is saturated. In most cases it is not possible to avoid current transformer saturation for all fault conditions, therefore measures are taken in the distance protections to allow for current transformer saturation with maintained proper operation. REL316 / REL316*4 can allow for relatively heavy current transformer saturation but not an unlimited one. Requirements on current transformers Choice of current transformers The current transformer should be of the type TPS, TPX or TPY with accuracy according IEC 44-6 or better. The use of the linearized current transformer type TPZ results only in a turn (anti clock wise) of the relay characteristic of some degrees. The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to the protection is larger than the minimum operating value for all faults that shall be detected. Minimum operating current for the distance protection in REL316 / REL316*4 is 10 % of nominal current. Conditions for the CT requirements The requirements for REL316 / REL316*4 are a result of investigations performed in our network simulation program. The tests have been performed with a digital current transformer model. The setting of the current transformer model was representative for current transformers type TPX and TPY. The performance of the distance protection was checked for both symmetrical and fully asymmetrical fault currents. A source with a time constant from 40 up to 120 milliseconds was used at the tests. The current requirements below are thus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. Both phase to ground, phase to phase and three phase faults were tested.
Released: Department: UTAST Rev.: C
1/4
CH-ES 45-12.30 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

The protection was checked with regard to directionality, security to trip and overreach. All testing was made with and without remanence flux in the current transformer core. It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence flux. It depends on the demands of reliability and economy. When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additional margin is needed due to the anti remanence air gap. For current transformer of Type TPX, the small probability of a fully asymmetrical fault together with maximum remanence flux in the same direction as the flux generated by the fault has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0). Investigations have proved that 95% of the faults in the network will occur when the voltage is between 40 and 90. Fault current The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three phase faults or single phase to ground faults. The current for a single phase to ground fault will exceed the current for a three phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance. When calculating the current transformer requirements, the maximum fault current should be used and therefore both fault types have to be considered. Cable resistance and additional load The current transformer saturation is directly affected by the voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals. This voltage, for a ground fault, is developed in a loop containing the phase and neutral conductor and additional load in this loop. For three phase faults, the neutral current is zero, and only the phase conductor and additional phase load have to be considered.
In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase to ground faults and the phase resistance for three phase faults.
REL316 / REL316*4 current transformer requirements The current transformer secondary limiting emf (E2max) should meet the two requirements below. The requirements assume 20 to 120 ms maximum dc time constant for the network and 100 % DC offset.
2/4
CH-ES 45-12.30 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

1. Faults close to the relay location
E 2 max > Ik max Isn 0 .2 a R CT + RL + 2 Ipn Ir
Ikmax Ipn Isn Ir RCT RL a
bw fw
: maximum primary fundamental frequency component for forward and reverse fault : primary nominal ct current : secondary nominal ct current : REL316 / REL316*4 rated current : ct secondary winding resistance : ct secondary cable resistance and additional load : the factor is a function of the frequency and the time constant for the dc component in the fault current for forward or reverse faults according to the diagram in Figure 1 below. : backward resp. reverse : forward
6 5 4 a3 2 1 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 DC Time Constant ms 50 Hz bw 60 Hz bw 50 Hz fw 60 Hz fw
Figure 1:
Factor a as a function of the frequency and the time constant Values valid for memory direction mode = block
3/4
CH-ES 45-12.30 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

2. Faults at zone 1 reach
Emax > Ikzone1 Isn 0. 2 k R CT + RL + 2 Ipn Ir
Ikzone1 Ipn Isn Ir RCT RL k=
: maximum primary fundamental frequency current component for a fault at zone 1 reach : primary nominal ct current : secondary nominal ct current : REL316 / REL316*4 rated current : ct secondary winding resistance : ct secondary cable resistance and additional load the factor is a function of the frequency and the time constant for the dc component in the fault current for faults at the set reach of zone 1, according to the diagram in Figure 2 below. The time constant is normally less than 50 ms.
14 12 10
8 6 4 2 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
50 Hz 60 Hz
DC Time Constant ms
Figure 2:
Factor k as a function of the frequency and the time constant
4/4
REL316*4: Line differential protection, for applications without transformer in the protected zone. Setting instructions and requirements to current transformers.
ESP 9.201E
The recommendations below are the result of extensive measurements on our transient network simulator and take into account the requirement of stability and tripping time of the protection.
1.
Definitions
As reference current for all recommendations below, a current Ibase has to be defined. Ibase is chosen to be equal or greater than the maximal load current of the line, normally Ibase is made equal to the rated CT primary current. The settings g, b and I-Inst are per unit values referred to Ibase.
2.
2.1.
Settings
Choice of current input To simplify the setting of a1, a2, s1 and s2, reversing the selection of the channels on master and slave is recommended irrespective of whether the protected unit includes a power transformer or not. This procedure enables a1 and a2 as well as s1 and s2 to have identical settings in both master and slave. Settings: Master: Current Inp. Ch. 1 to channel No.1 Current Inp. Ch. 2 to channel No.7 Slave: Current Inp. Ch. 1 to channel No.7 Current Inp. Ch. 2 to channel No.1 a1 and a2- settings (CT-ratio adaptation) Range 0.05 ... 2.20, Steps 0.01. These settings allow adaptation of Ibase, when the rated CT primary current differs from the maximal load current. Case 1 CTs in the line feeder with equal CT ratios Lines in substations with single or multiple bus arrangement and 112 CB stations with CTs in the line feeder. The CT ratio is matched to the maximal load current, i.e. rated CT primary current = max. Iload a1 = 1; a2 = 1
2.2.
2.2.1.
2.2.2.
Case 2 CTs in the line feeder with unequal CT ratios Lines in substations with single or multiple bus arrangement and 112 CB stations with CTs in the line feeder. CTs of unequal ratio at the two line ends. Adaptation to the lower rated CT primary current: a = ICT / Ibase
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Page 1
13. October 2004
Master Slave Slave
ESP 9.201E
Master
1000/1 A a1 = 1000/800 = 1.25 a2 = 1
800/5 A a1= 1.25 a2 = 1
1000/1 A a1 = 1 a2 = 1000/800 = 1.25
800/5 A a1 = 1 a2 = 1.25
Ibase = 800 A 2.2.3.
Ibase = 800 A
Case 3 CTs in the diameter Lines in substations with 112 - or 2 - CB arrangement. 2 CTs of a diameter connected in parallel, high CT-ratio. The CT ratio of the current transformers located in the diameter of 112 CB stations are usually matched to the through current from one bus to the other and not to the rated line current. a = ICT / Ibase
2.3.
s- setting (Connection/Vector group correction) For a line alone, no phase group compensation necessary and the following is selected: s1=D, s2=d0 With this setting the zero sequence component of the currents is included in the measurement, and the best sensitivity and correct phase selection is achieved. No other s- setting shall be selected, unless there is a transformer in the protected zone.
2.4.
v- setting (bias at small currents, below Ibase b) 0.25 or 0.50 v= 0.50 is chosen as a standard setting
2.5. 2.5.1.
Minimum operating current Two ranges can be set: g and g-High g- setting (lower range) Range 0.1 ... 0.5, Step 0.1 Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always FALSE The g setting defines the minimum operating current. The protection will pick up for a fault current of > Ibase g. In most line protection applications the range 0.1 ... 0.5 is too low. Settings as given in Section 2.5.2. are preferred
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Page 2
13. October 2004
2.5.2. g-High setting (upper range) Range 0.50 ... 2.5, Step 0.25 Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always TRUE
ESP 9.201E
With this setting the g-setting is not active any more, the g-High setting determines the pick-up current. The protection will pick up at a fault current of > Ibase g-High. 2.5.3. Minimum allowed setting
g or g High 2.5 capacitive ch arg ing current of the protected Line Ibase
This setting ensures full stability in an effectively grounded network. In noneffectively grounded networks apply a factor 3.0 instead of 2.5. With this setting transient capacitive inrush currents will not endanger the stability. It may be an advantage to set g-High b, thereby minimising the requirements imposed on the CTs. See examples in Section 3. The pick-up current shall be set lower than the minimum fault current and shall allow for sufficient ground-fault resistance. Justification of factors 2.5 and 3.0 (used above) The capacitive charging currents are measured by the protection as differential currents. The minimum operating current therefore has to be set higher then the maximum capacitive charging current occurring for a fault outside the line. Since the measurement is made on a per phase basis, the capacitive current to be taken into account is the highest possible charging current per phase. This current arises in the healthy phases during a single phase-ground fault (voltage rises). The 'capacitive charging current of the protected line' is the phase-current measured at single ended infeed, i.e. current measured with the circuit open at the remote end. f = 2.5 = f1 f2' f3 In solidly grounded systems f = 3.0 = f1 f2" f3 In systems with isolated neutral or Petersen coil compensation (non-effectively ground networks) f1 = 1.2 Max. system voltage f2' = 0.8 3 Max. phase to ground voltage in solidly grounded systems (Z0 / Z1 < 4) f2" = 3 Max. phase to ground voltage in non-effectively grounded systems (4 < Z0 / Z1 < ) f3 = 1.5 Safety factor The pick-up current 'g-High' may be used in most applications and may be set relatively high, since the operating current is referred to the actual short circuit current flowing through the fault (= differential current) rather than to the individual infeed currents.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Page 3
13. October 2004
ESP 9.201E
A fast supervision logic blocks the differential function in the case of a communication failure in the fibre optic link, no second release criterion is therefore required. For this reason the differential protection trips both ends of the line and is not dependent on the individual infeed currents nor faces a problem in case of weak infeed from one end. Max. fault resistance The max. ground fault resistance, which can be detected is approximately (source impedances neglected): Urated RF = 3 Ibase g high 2.6. Inrush restraint Parameter 'InrushInp' = Always TRUE This setting allows optimal stability also in case of heavy through flowing transformer inrush currents with long DC time constants. Pick-up value for the directional comparison feature (v = ) b- setting Switching over to v = , the 2nd harmonic inrush restraint remains active Range 1.25 ... 2.50, Steps 0.25 (b Ibase) has to be set above ILoad_max. Recommended setting: b = 1.5. 2.7.2. I-Inst setting v = , the 2nd harmonic inrush restraint is not active above this current level. Range 5 ... 15, Steps 1.0 Range 3 ... 15, Steps 1.0 for SW-Versions < V4.0 for SW-Versions V4.0
2.7. 2.7.1.
I-Inst = 3 is chosen as a standard setting I-Inst = 5 is recommended for a line with single end infeed, feeding a transformer with high MVA rating. With this setting the protection tolerates high inrush currents flowing over the line. Such currents might produce unequal saturation phenomena in the CTs at the two line ends. The peak value of the inrush current may reach up to 15 Ibase.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Page 4
13. October 2004
ESP 9.201E
3.
Current transformers requirements:

The requirement depend on the a, g- and b- setting.
3.1. 3.1.1. 3.1.2.
g-High setting b setting For through faults (faults on opposite bus): For faults on the line: n2' > I-Inst 10 / a n1' > 20
A symmetrical current with 10 times the amplitude of (Ibase I-Inst) shall not produce any saturation phenomena. In the case where this requirement cannot be met, the tripping time might increase. The effective accuracy limiting factor n' shall fulfill 2 conditions: n' > n2' and n' > 20 3.2. 3.2.1. g- or g-High setting < b setting For through faults (faults on opposite bus): n1' > X/R b / a Taking the effects of DC offset in consideration, no saturation shall occur up to a current value of (Ibase b). For faults on the line: n2' > I-Inst 10 / a A symmetrical current with 10 times the amplitude of (Ibase I-Inst) shall not produce any saturation phenomena. In the case where this requirement cannot be met, the tripping time might increase. The effective accuracy limiting factor n' shall fulfil 3 conditions: n' > n1', n' > n2' and n' > 20 The effective accuracy limiting factor is calculated as follows: Vk Pn + Pw n' = or n' = n P + Pw Ins [Rw + 2 RL + RB] where: n Pn Pw P n' Vk Ins RL RB Rw rated accuracy limiting factor (ALF) E.g. 20 for 5P20 rated VA's VA E.g. 30 secondary winding losses in VA at rated current effective burden = (2 RL + RB) Ins2 effective ALF (at effectively connected burden) or Kssc according IEC 44-6 Knee point voltage Rated secondary current Resistance of secondary leads (single length) Total resistance of effective burden Resistance of CT secondary winding. Page 5 13. October 2004
3.2.2.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Example 1 Ipssc = CT Burden = 2 RL+RB = a1=a2 = g-High = TRUE b= I-Inst = n' = n1' required = n2' required = This CT is suitable. Example 2 Ipssc = Tp = CT Burden = 2 RL+RB = a1=a2 = g-High = TRUE b= I-Inst = n' = n1' required = n2' required = This CT is suitable. Example 3 Ipssc = Tp = Load current = CT Burden = 2 a1=a2 = g-High = TRUE b= I-Inst = n' = n1' required = n2' required = This CT is suitable. (g = b)
ESP 9.201E
25 kA for close-in faults on the line 500/1 A 20 VA, 5P20, Rw = 4 1 = 1 VA 1 1.5 1.5 4 20 (20 + 4 ) / (1 + 4 ) = 96 20 4 / 1 10 = 40 (g < b) 40 kA for close-in faults on the line 100 ms X / R = 31 Primary system DC time constant at min. generation 500/1A 20 VA, 5P20, Rw = 4 1 1 0.75 1.5 4 20 (20 + 4 ) / (1 + 4 ) = 96 31 1.5 / 1 = 46 4 / 1 10 = 40 (Generator line in 112 CB substation) 40 kA for close-in faults on the line 180 ms X/R = 57 Primary system DC time constant at min. generation (contribution of power plant) 600 A 1200/1A 20VA, 5P20, R2 = 8 1 2 1.0 1.5 10 20 (20+8 ) / (1+8 ) = 62 57 1.5 / 2 = 42 10 / 2 10 = 50 Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Page 6
13. October 2004
ESP 9.201E
If a check shows, that the following effective ALF factors are met, a more detailed check is not required for normal applications. n' = 75 for applications in HV and EHV networks n' = 50 for applications in sub transmission and distribution networks.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Page 7
13. October 2004
CH-ES 30-32.10 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

DEMANDS ON MEASURING TRANSFORMERS FOR RET316 / RET316*4
24.11.2004
Version 3.10
Introduction The operation of any transformer protection is influenced by distortion in the measuring quantities. The current to the protection will be heavily distorted when the current transformer is saturated.In most cases it is not possible to avoid current transformer saturation for all fault conditions, therefore measures are taken in the transformer protections to allow for current transformer saturation with maintained proper operation. RET316 / RET316*4 can allow for heavy current transformer saturation but not an unlimited one. Requirements on current transformers Choice of current transformers The current transformer should be to type TPS,TPX or TPY with accuracy class 5P20 or better. The use of the linearized current transformer type TPZ leads only to a small phase angle shift and they can be used without problems, if the same type is on both sides of the transformer. Possibly ABB Switzerland Ltd, Utility Automation can be contacted for confirmation that the actual type can be used. The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to the protection is larger than the minimum operating value for all faults that shall be detected. Minimum operating current for the transformer protection in RET316 / RET316*4 is 10 % of nominal current. Conditions for the CT requirements The requirements for RET316 / RET316*4 are a result of investigations performed in our network simulation program. The tests have been performed with a digital current transformer model. The setting of the current transformer model was representative for current transformers type TPX and TPY. The performance of the transformer protection was checked for internal and external both symmetrical and fully asymmetrical fault currents. A source with a time constant from 40 up to 300 milliseconds was used at the tests. The current requirements below are thus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. Both phase to ground, and three phase faults were tested.
Released: Department: UTAST Rev.: E
and higher
1/3
CH-ES 30-32.10 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

The protection was checked with regard to security to block. All testing was made with and without remanence flux in the current transformer core. It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence flux. It depends on the demands of reliability and economy. When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additional margin is needed due to the anti remanence air gap. For current transformer of Type TPX, the small probability of a fully asymmetrical fault together with maximum remanence flux in the same direction as the flux generated by the fault has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0). Investigations have proved that 95 % of the faults in the network will occur when the voltage is between 40 and 90. Fault current The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three phase faults or single phase to ground faults. The current for a single phase to ground fault will exceed the current for a three phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance. When calculating the current transformer requirements, the maximum fault current should be used and therefore both fault types have to be considered. Cable resistance and additional load The current transformer saturation is directly affected by the voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals. This voltage, for a ground fault, is developed in a loop containing the phase and neutral conductor and additional load in this loop. For three phase faults, the neutral current is zero, and only the phase conductor and additional phase load have to be considered. In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase to ground faults and the phase resistance for three phase faults. RET316 / RET316*4 current transformer requirements The current transformer effective overcurrent factor should meet the two requirement below. The requirement assume 40 to 300 msec maximum dc time constant for the network. 1.
n' n
Pr + PE IN of ct. PB + PE IN
2/3
CH-ES 30-32.10-E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

n n' PB PE Pr IN : rated overcurrent factor (ALF = accuracy limit factor) : necessary effective overcurrent factor, as a function of fault current IK, (at nominal frequency and time constant of the network) : connected burden at rated current : ct losses of secondary windings : rated ct burden : nominal current related to the protected object
and 2. the dependence of the curves of Figure 1 and 2, where: for fault currents 3 * IN the CT's should not saturate
n'
16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
with 50% remanence
without remanence
IK/IN
Figure 1:
Transformer with 2 windings
n'
35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
IK/IN
with 50% remanence
without remanence
Figure 2:
Transformer with 3 windings
3/3
CH-ES 30-32.20 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

DEMANDS ON MEASURING TRANSFORMERS FOR GENERATORDIFFERENTIAL-PROTECTION FOR REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216
Version 3.01 and higher
24.11.2004
Introduction The operation of any generator differential protection is influenced by distortion in the measuring quantities. The current to the protection will be heavily distorted when the current transformer is saturated.In most cases it is not possible to avoid current transformer saturation for all fault conditions, therefore measures are taken in the generator differential protections to allow for current transformer saturation with maintained proper operation. REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216 can allow for heavy current transformer saturation but not an unlimited one. For transformer differential protection see document CH-ES 30-32.10 E for RET316 / RET316*4. Requirements on current transformers Choice of current transformers The current transformer should be to type TPS,TPX or TPY with accuracy class 5P20 or better. The use of the linearized current transformer type TPZ leads only to a small phase angle shift and they can be used without problems, if the same type is on both sides of the generator. Possibly ABB Switzerland Ltd, Utility Automation can be contacted for confirmation that the actual type can be used. The current transformer ratio should be selected so, that the current to the protection is larger than the minimum operating value for all faults that shall be detected. Minimum operating current for the generator differential protection in REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216 is 10 % of nominal current. Conditions for the CT requirements The requirements for REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216 are a result of investigations performed in our network simulation program. The tests have been performed with a digital current transformer model. The setting of the current transformer model was representative for current transformers type TPX and TPY. The performance of the generator differential protection was checked for internal and external both symmetrical and fully asymmetrical fault currents. A source with a time constant from 40 up to 300 milliseconds was used at the tests. The current requirements below are thus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. Both phase to ground, and three phase faults were tested.
Released: Department: UTAST Rev.: B
1/3
CH-ES 30-32.20 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

The protection was checked with regard to security to block. All testing was made with and without remanence flux in the current transformer core. It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence flux. It depends on the demands of reliability and economy. When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additional margin is needed due to the anti remanence air gap. For current transformer of Type TPX, the small probability of a fully asymmetrical fault together with maximum remanence flux in the same direction as the flux generated by the fault has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0). Investigations have proved that 95 % of the faults in the network will occur when the voltage is between 40 and 90. Fault current The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three phase faults or single phase to ground faults. The current for a single phase to ground fault will exceed the current for a three phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance. When calculating the current transformer requirements, the maximum fault current should be used and therefore both fault types have to be considered. Cable resistance and additional load The current transformer saturation is directly affected by the voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals. This voltage, for a ground fault, is developed in a loop containing the phase and neutral conductor and additional load in this loop. For three phase faults, the neutral current is zero, and only the phase conductor and additional phase load have to be considered. In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase to ground faults and the phase resistance for three phase faults. REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216 current transformer requirements The current transformer effective overcurrent factor should meet the two requirement below. The requirement assume 40 to 300 msec maximum dc time constant for the network.
2/3
CH-ES 30-32.20 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

1.
n' n
Pr + PE IN of CT PB + PE IN
n n' PB PE Pr IN
: rated overcurrent factor (ALF = accuracy limit factor) : necessary effective overcurrent factor, as a function of fault current IK, (at nominal frequency and time constant of the network) : connected burden at rated current : ct losses of secondary windings : rated ct burden : nominal current related to the protected object
and 2. the dependence of the curves of Figure 1, where: for fault currents 3 * IN the CT's should not saturate, respectively the exact boundary is at b*3 (b = setting value of the characteristic).
n'
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 IK/ IN
with 50% remanence
without remanence
Figure 1:
Overcurrent factors
3/3
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 2004
9.
9.1. 9.2. 9.2.1. 9.2.2. 9.2.3. 9.3. 9.4. 9.5. 9.5.1. 9.6. 9.6.1. 9.6.2. 9.6.3. 9.6.4. 9.6.5. 9.6.6. 9.6.7. 9.6.8. 9.6.9. 9.6.10. 9.6.11. 9.6.12. 9.6.13. 9.6.14. 9.6.15. 9.6.16. 9.6.17. 9.6.18. 9.6.19. 9.6.20. 9.6.21. 9.6.22. 9.6.23. 9.6.24. 9.6.25. 9.6.26. 9.6.27. 9.6.28. 9.6.29. 9.6.30. 9.6.31.
INTERBAY BUS (IBB) INTERFACE

Connection to a station control system ..............................................9-3 Configuration with the HMI.................................................................9-4 General Parameters...........................................................................9-4 SPA/IEC103 Parameters ...................................................................9-5 IBB MW Parameters ..........................................................................9-6 Transferring disturbance recorder data via the IBB ...........................9-7 Synchronization .................................................................................9-9 SPA bus address format ....................................................................9-9 Masking events ................................................................................9-10 SPA address list...............................................................................9-11 Channel 0.........................................................................................9-11 Channel 0 event list .........................................................................9-12 Channel 1 event list .........................................................................9-12 Channel 3 event list .........................................................................9-12 Channel 4 event list .........................................................................9-13 Channel 4 analog input ....................................................................9-13 Binary input signals..........................................................................9-13 IBB input signals ..............................................................................9-14 Binary output signals........................................................................9-15 Tripping signals................................................................................9-15 LED signals......................................................................................9-15 IBB output signals ............................................................................9-16 IBB output signal event masks.........................................................9-17 Binary input event masks.................................................................9-19 Hardware ....................................... 35 .............................................9-20 Channel 8 system I/Os................... 34 .............................................9-21 IBB I/O ........................................... 43 .............................................9-23 Current-DT ....................................... 2 .............................................9-24 Current ............................................. 3 .............................................9-25 Diff-Transf ........................................ 4 .............................................9-26 Underimped ..................................... 5 .............................................9-29 MinReactance .................................. 6 .............................................9-30 NPS-DT............................................ 7 .............................................9-31 NPS-Inv.......................................... 11 .............................................9-32 Voltage........................................... 12 .............................................9-33 Current-Inv ..................................... 13 .............................................9-34 OLoad-Stator ................................. 14 .............................................9-35 OLoad-Rotor .................................. 15 .............................................9-36 Power............................................. 18 .............................................9-37 Imax-Umin...................................... 20 .............................................9-38 Delay.............................................. 22 .............................................9-39
9-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.32. 9.6.33. 9.6.34. 9.6.35. 9.6.36. 9.6.37. 9.6.38. 9.6.39. 9.6.40. 9.6.41. 9.6.42. 9.6.43. 9.6.44. 9.6.45. 9.6.46. 9.6.47. 9.6.48. 9.6.49. 9.6.50. 9.6.51. 9.6.52. 9.6.53. 9.6.54. 9.6.55. 9.6.56. 9.6.57. 9.6.58. 9.6.59. 9.6.60. 9.6.61. 9.6.62. 9.6.63. 9.6.64.
Diff-Gen.......................................... 23 .............................................9-40 Distance ......................................... 24 .............................................9-41 Frequency ...................................... 25 .............................................9-51 Overexcitat..................................... 26 .............................................9-52 Count ............................................. 27 .............................................9-53 Check-I3ph..................................... 29 .............................................9-55 Check-U3ph ................................... 30 .............................................9-56 Logic .............................................. 31 .............................................9-57 Disturbance Rec ............................ 32 .............................................9-58 Voltage-Inst.................................... 36 .............................................9-61 Autoreclosure................................. 38 .............................................9-62 EarthFaultIsol................................. 40 .............................................9-66 Voltage-Bal .................................... 41 .............................................9-67 U/f-Inv ............................................ 47 .............................................9-68 Measurands ................................... 48 .............................................9-70 SynchroCheck................................ 49 .............................................9-71 Rotor-EFP ...................................... 51 .............................................9-74 Stator-EFP ..................................... 52 .............................................9-76 I0-Invers ......................................... 53 .............................................9-78 Pole-Slip......................................... 55 .............................................9-79 Diff-Line.......................................... 56 .............................................9-81 RemoteBin ..................................... 57 .............................................9-84 EarthFltGnd2.................................. 58 .............................................9-85 FUPLA ........................................... 59 .............................................9-87 FlutterRecog .................................. 60 .............................................9-88 HV distance.................................... 63 .............................................9-89 LDU events .................................... 67 .............................................9-99 Debounce....................................... 68 ...........................................9-100 df/dt ................................................ 69 ...........................................9-101 DirCurrentDT.................................. 70 ...........................................9-102 DirCurrentInv.................................. 71 ...........................................9-104 BreakerFailure ............................... 72 ...........................................9-106 MeasureModule ............................. 74 ...........................................9-109
9-2
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.
9.1.
INTERBAY BUS (IBB) INTERFACE

Connection to a station control system An electrical-to-optical converter Type 316BM61b is plugged onto the rear of the protection to convert the electrical RS232 signals from the 316VC61a or 316VC61b into optical signals.
Fig. 9.1
Electrical-to-optical converter Type 316BM61b RS232 interface: Pin 2: Pin 3: Pin 4: Pin 5: Pin 9: Rx Tx +12 V 0V -12 V
9-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Optical cable connections: Optical fiber cables with bayonet connectors (ST) are used for the SPA bus (62.5 m fibers for 316BM61b). Screw connectors (SMA plugs) are used instead of the bayonet connectors for the IEC60870-5-103 bus.
9.2.
Configuration with the HMI The settings for the IBB/RIO are made via the following HMI menus: Configuration / IBB/PB Configuration / SPA/IEC870-5-103/LON/MVB/PB The sub-menus for the IBB / PB are shown in the Fig. 9.1
Fig. 9.2
Opening the 'IBB configuration' window
NOTICE: The settings for the LON interbay bus are to be found in the publication 1MRB520225-Uen, for the MVB interbay bus in 1MRB520270-Uen, for the IEC60870-5-103 Interbaybus in 1MRB520226-Uen to 1MRB520229-Uen for the MVB process bus in 1MRB520192-Uen.
9.2.1. General Parameters Slave/NodeAddr Range 2- 255. Must be set to the correct SPA bus address. IBB Runs on CPU This parameter has no influence for the RE.316*4 versions with the SPA and IEC60870-5-103 Bus. RBIO Runs on CPU This parameter has no influence for the RE.316*4 versions with the SPA and IEC60870-5-103 Bus.
9-4
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
TouchScreen/SMS Setting determines whether the touch screen or an SMS has to be controlled: Inactive Connection not in operation (default) Active Connection in operation
Note that this parameter has no influence for the RE.316*4 versions with the SPA and IEC60870-5-103 Bus. The versions for the LON or (either / or) MVB bus has a fully functional SPA interface in parallel with the LON / MVB interbay bus for connecting either a touch screen or an SMS. The parameter 'TouchScreen/SMS' should only be set to 'active', when the second interface is in use, while in this case the response time of the LON or MVB bus is more. Read Distr. Data This parameter defines which IBB can be used for upload of disturbance recorder data: Via LON/MVB Via SPA The disturbance recorder data can be uploaded via interbay bus (SCS). The disturbance recorder data can be uploaded via the SPA bus.
Disturbance recorder data can always be read by the HMI regardless of the setting. Note that this parameter has no relevance in the versions with the SPA or IEC60870-5-103 bus protocol (Ordering codes Y1 and Y2). Timesynchr. Defines the time for synchronization via the IBB when the summer time bit is set: Standard time Only the summer time bit is set and standard time is used for synchronization (preferred setting). Summer time is used for synchronization in spite of the fact that the summer time bit is also set.
Summer time
'Standard time' has to be selected when the summer time bit is not set (e.g. as in the case of the SPA bus). 9.2.2. SPA/IEC103 Parameters The parameters must be set as follows: Baud rate Default 9600 for SPA bus. Do not change.
9-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Master mask Bit mask The bit masks set for every function via the SPA bus apply for all binary events. No masks are used for analog events. Q events off As above, but all analog events are blocked. This is the default setting and must always be used when the device is connected to an SCS. Event off All events are masked (not recorded). This setting is intended for testing and during commissioning when it is not wanted that events be transmitted to the control room.
Receiving Indicates that valid SPA telegrams have been received. Initiating Indicates that the device is being initialised. The following parameters determine the access rights of the remote HMI and can only be configured on the local HMI: Remote MMI On / Off Enables or disables the remote HMI. TestFunctions On/Off Enables or disables the test function on the remote HMI. TimeSynchronization On / Off Enables or disables synchronization by the remote HMI. Downloading On / Off Enables or disables the downloading of a 'setfile' from the remote HMI.
9.2.3.
IBB MW Parameters Upto 32 IBB measurands can be selected on the following source signals: The measurand output from a protection function The measurand output from an SCS Input measurand values from a distributed analog input / output module (RIO580)
9-6
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.3.
Transferring disturbance recorder data via the IBB Disturbance recorder data (records) can be read and transferred via the SPA bus with the aid of the EVECOM program. Further details are contained in the Operating Instructions for EVECOM. The disturbance recorder data are available in the EVE format when transfer is requested. Data transfer is controlled using the SPA BUS variables V20, M28, M30, M31, V16 and V17 controlled via Channel 0. V20: Write: Read: V17: Write: Read: WV17:1...5 determines the compression factor, i.e. 1 %...5 %. RV17 returns the compression factor. WV20:1 starts the transmission of a telegram. RV20 returns the number of disturbance recorder records available.
Compression reduces the number of periods that have to be transferred per channel. Assuming the 12 points of a period deviate by less than the specified compression factor from the corresponding points of the preceding period, the points themselves are not transferred, but simply the number of repeats in relation to the preceding period. For example, if a record consists of 100 periods all the same, then only the 12 points of one period and the number of repeats are transferred. Compression is applied independently for each individual channel. M28: Write: WM28:n selects a disturbance recorder record for transfer. n has a value between 1 and the number of records that that can be read using RV20. The conversion of the record to the EVE format starts and the first response is NAK. WM28:n has to be repeated until the response is ACK. (From firmware V4.0.) RM28 returns the directory information, time stamp and record number. 1995-05-10 12.34;23.423 RE001.001
Read:
9-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
M29: Write: Read: NAK returns the number of lines in a record (0...1023). A line contains 26 Byte of data. 0 is returned if a record has not been selected (M28).
M30: Write: WM30:n moves the pointer to the line to be transferred. The pointer is automatically incremented by one every time a line is transferred until there are no lines left. The pointer is set to 1 at the commencement of data transfer (WM28:n). RM30 returns the number of the line that was transferred last.
Read: M31: Write: Read: V16: Write: Read:
NAK RM31 transfers the line indicated by the pointer.
WV16:1, WV16:0, deletes the oldest record. RV16 returns the status of the disturbance recorder. 0: Disturbance recorder not full. 1: Disturbance recorder full.
V20: Write: WV20:0 terminates data transfer.
9-8
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.4.
Synchronization The internal clock is synchronised either by the station control system (SCS 100) or a radio clock (DCF77). Synchronization via the IBB takes priority over synchronization by the HMI. After the device is switched off and on again, the clock continues at the time before it was switched off until the next time telegram is received
9.5.
SPA bus address format The structure of the SPA bus telegram is as follows:
<slave address><operation><channel No.><data type><data/event No.>
The slave address identifies the device. The default address is 2. The slave address can be changed using the operator program (HMI). The HMI has to be used to assign an address to the device as defined in the station control system. The device also responds to data with the address 900 which is used to synchronise all the devices in an SPA bus loop simultaneously. Possible operations are: Read data from the device (R) and write data in the device (W). The channel number identifies the active functions. All channel numbers from 0 to 13 are reserved for system functions. Channel numbers from 14 to 60 are used for numbering the protection and control functions configured for the device. Data type enables the different kinds of data in a device to be addressed specifically. The following types of data are used: S I O E V Q T D L B settings binary or analog inputs binary or analog outputs single events measurements, system variables and event masking measurements stored at the instant of tripping time date event memory back-up event memory
Data and event numbers are needed to designate individual items of data and events in data channels.
9-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
The table below shows the channel number mapping for a typical configuration:
Function Current Voltage Delay Funct. No. Chan. No. Comment 1 2 3 14 15 16 First protection function Second protection function Third protection function
The function numbers in the above table correspond to the HMI numbers. The measured variable of the first function (current) in a device with the slave address 2 is read as follows: 2R14V1 The SPA bus syntax is defined in SPA BUS COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL V2.x, 34 SPACOM EN1C. 9.5.1. Masking events Once all those binary inputs, IBB output signals and system and protection function events which are not to be recorded as events (masked) have been loaded into the device (e.g. using W14V155), they have to be copied to the non-volatile memory using the save command W255V255:1 so that they are not lost should the auxiliary supply fail.
9-10
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6. 9.6.1.
SPA address list Channel 0 Summary of parameters:

Address Access Text V102 V104 V110 V115 V116 V120 V200 V201 F S0 S1 S100 T D L B R R R, W R R R R, W R, W R R R R, W R, W R, W R R VC type identification VC software version Master event mask Time telegram counter Date telegram counter Restart counter SPA address Baud rate Module Type Number of functions Function type number Parameter set switch Time Date and time Read event Read event again 1 0 2 9600 REC316 0 2...255 4800, 9600, 19200 REG316, REL316, RET316 1...60 S1...S60 1...4 1 Q events 0 Bit mask active masked 2 All events masked Default 316VC61 Step
Date format: YY-MM-DD hh.mm;ss.sss
9-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.2.
Channel 0 event list

Event No. 0E1 0E2 0E4 0E8 0E47 0E48 0E49 0E50 0E51 Cause No error Minor error Major error Fatal error Protection stopped Protection restarted Warm protection start Cold protection start Event buffer overflow Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256
9.6.3.

Event No. 1E11 1E31 1E41 Cause AD error Bus failure Supply failure Event mask V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 256 4096
9.6.4.

Event No. 3E1 3E2 3E3 3E4 3E11 3E12 3E13 3E14 3E21 3E22 3E23 3E24 Cause CPU OK CPU failure CPU RAM failure CPU ROM failure EA62 OK EA62 failure EA62 RAM failure EA62 ROM failure Internal AD OK Internal AD failure Internal AD RAM failure Internal AD ROM failure Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048
9-12
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.5.

Event No 4E21 4E22 4E23 4E24 Cause PC-Card No failure PC-Card Fatal error PC-Card Non-urgent error PC-Card Not ready Event mask V156 V156 V156 V156 Enable code 16 32 64 128
9.6.6.
Channel 4 analog input Channel 4 provides 64 data points which are available either for analog FUPLA inputs or analog outputs via the distributed input/output unit 500AXM11. The numerical range is -32768...+32767 (16 Bit integers). The data can be entered in decimal or 4-digit hexadecimal format. The data remains intact in the event of a supply failure. Real values are converted to integers, integer = real 100. Input format: nnn.mm. FFFFH Data point number: O1...O64
9.6.7.
Binary input signals The significance of the events, for standard as well as for double signals, is explained in Section 9.6.14.
Channel 101 102 103 104 Inputs I1 - I16 I1 - I16 I1 - I16 I1 - I16 Events E1 - E32 E1 - E32 E1 - E32 E1 - E32 Slot 1 2 3 4
9-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.8.
IBB input signals

Channel 121 122 123 124 125 126 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 Inputs I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 I32 I1 - I32 I1 - I32 I1 - I32 I1 - I32 I1 - I32 I1 - I32 I1 - I32 I1 - I32 Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 No. 1-32 33-64 65-96 97-128 129-160 161-192 193-224 225-256 257-288 289-320 321-352 353-384 385-416 417-448 449-480 481-512 513-544 545-576 577-608 609-640 641-672 673-704 705-736 737-768
9-14
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.9.
Binary output signals

Channel 101 102 103 104 Outputs O1 - O16 O1 - O16 O1 - O16 O1 - O16 Events None None None None Slot 1 2 3 4
9.6.10.
Tripping signals
Channel 101 102 103 104 Outputs M1 - M16 M1 - M16 M1 - M16 M1 - M16 Events None None None None Slot 1 2 3 4
9.6.11.
LED signals
Channel 120 Outputs O1 - O16 Events None
9-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.12.
IBB output signals

Channel 121 122 123 124 125 126 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 Outputs O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 O1 - O32 Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Event No. 121E1...E64 122E1...E64 123E1...E64 124E1...E64 125E1...E64 126E1...E64 71E1...E64 72E1...E64 73E1...E64 74E1...E64 75E1...E64 76E1...E64 77E1...E64 78E1...E64 79E1...E64 80E1...E64 81E1...E64 82E1...E64 83E1...E64 84E1...E64 85E1...E64 86E1...E64 87E1...E64 88E1...E64
9-16
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.13.
IBB output signal event masks

Output O1 Event On Off O2 On Off O3 On Off O4 On Off O5 On Off O6 On Off O7 On Off O8 On Off O9 On Off O10 On Off O11 On Off O12 On Off O13 On Off O14 On Off O15 On Off Event No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192
9-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd Output O16 Event On Off O17 On Off O18 On Off O19 On Off O20 On Off O21 On Off O22 On Off O23 On Off O24 On Off O25 On Off O26 On Off O27 On Off O28 On Off O29 On Off O30 On Off O31 On Off O32 On Off Event No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Mask V156 V156 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158
Enable code 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16348 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16348 327680
9-18
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.14.
Binary input event masks

Channel I1 Event On Off I2 On Off I3 On Off I4 On Off I5 On Off I6 On Off I7 On Off I8 On Off I9 On Off I10 On Off I11 On Off I12 On Off I13 On Off I14 On Off I15 On Off I16 On Off Event No. E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 Mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768
In the case of a double signal the significance of the events changes as shown in the following example where the inputs 2 and 3 are configured as double signal.
9-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd Input I2 Event No. E3 E4 I3 E5 E6 Significance on off on off
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Significance at double signal 1-0 0-1 0-0 1-1
9.6.15.
Hardware Summary of parameters:

Unit
35
Default X Min. 1 Max. 25 Step 1
Address Access Text 1S1 R SWVers SX... A B C
<Select> 1 2 3
9-20
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.16.
Channel 8 system I/Os Summary of parameters:

Unit
34
Default AccumSigAll Min. 1 Max. 4 Step 1
Address Access Text 8S1 R LEDSigMode AccumSigAll ResetOnStart ResetOnTrip NoLatching 8S2 R Confirm Pars off on 8S3 R TimeFromPC off on
<Select> 1 2 3 4 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1
on
on
Event list
Event No. 8E1 8E2 8E3 8E4 8E5 8E6 8E7 8E8 8E9 8E10 8E11 8E12 8E13 8E14 Cause GenTrip dito GenStart dito Test active dito InjTstOP dito Relay Ready dito ParSet1 dito ParSet2 dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask Enable code V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192
9-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Event No. 8E15 8E16 8E17 8E18 8E19 8E20 8E21 8E22 8E23 8E24 8E25 8E26 8E27 8E28 8E29 8E30 8E31 8E32 8E33 8E34 8E35 8E36 8E37 8E38 8E39 8E40
Cause ParSet3 dito ParSet4 dito HMI is on dito Modem error dito QuitStatus dito MVB_PB_Warn dito MVB_PB_Crash dito PB_BA1Ready dito PB_BA2Ready dito PB_BA3Ready dito PB_BA4Ready dito PB LA faulty dito PB LB faulty dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset
Event mask Enable code V155 V155 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
9-22
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.17.
IBB I/O Event list

Event No. 9E1 9E2 9E3 9E4 9E5 9E6 Cause Receive dito Initialisation dito PrDatBlckSig dito
43
Event mask Enable code Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 1 2 4 8 16 32
Measured variables Function 9 (IBB I/O) makes measured variables available the number and significance of which depend on the FUPLA configuration. The number of measured variables is limited to 64.
Address 9V1 9Vn 9V64
Access Text R R R IBBMW 1 IBBMW n IBBMW 64
Format Longinteger Longinteger Longinteger
9-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.18.
Current-DT Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Delay I-Setting f-min MaxMin MIN MAX 14S13 R NrOfPhases
Unit <Select>
Default P1 00000000B
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
S IN Hz <Select> -1 1
00.01 04.00 040.0 MAX
0.00 0.1 2 -1
60.00 20 50 1
0.01 0.1 1 2
001
Measured variables
Address 14V1 Access R Text IN Dec. 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text IN Dec. 2
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 Cause Trip dito Start dito Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 14I2 Status 14I1
9-24
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.19.
Current Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Delay I-Setting MaxMin MIN (3ph) MIN (1ph) MAX (1ph) MAX (3ph) Max-Inrush 14S12 R NrOfPhases
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s IN <Select> -3 -1 1 3 5
01.00 02.00 MAX (1ph)
0.02 0.02 -3
60.00 20.00 5
0.01 0.01 2
001
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
9-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.20.
Diff-Transf Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
Address Access 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 R R R R R R R R R
Text
Unit
Min.
Max.
Step
ParSet4..1 <Select> TRIP g v b g-High I-Inst a1 s1 Y D <Select> 0 1 1 IN IN IN
00000010B 00011110B
0.20 0.50 1.50 2.00 10 1.00 Y
0.10 0.25 1.25 0.50 3 0.05 0
0.50 0.50 5.00 2.50 15 2.20 1
0.10 0.25 0.25 0.25 1 0.01 1
14S16 14S17
R R
a2 s2 y0 y1 y5 y6 y7 y11 d0 d1 d5 d6 d7 d11 z0 z1 z2 <Select> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1.00 y0
0.05 00
2.20 21
0.01 1
9-26
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Address Access Text z4 z5 z6 z7 z8 z10 z11 14S18 14S19 R R a3 s3 y0 y1 y5 y6 y7 y11 d0 d1 d5 d6 d7 d11 z0 z1 z2 z4 z5 z6 z7 z8 z10 z11 14S20 14S21 R R InrushRatio InrushTime
Unit 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Default
Min.
Max.
Step
1.00 <Select> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 % s 10 5 y0
0.05 00
2.20 21
0.01 1
6 0
20 90
1 1
9-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 Access Text R R R IN (Id-R) IN (Id-S) IN (Id-T) Dec. Address Access Text 2 2 2 14V4 14V5 14V6 R R R IN (IhR) IN (IhR) IN (IhR) Dec. 2 2 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 Access Text R R R IN (Id-R) IN (Id-S) IN (Id-T) Dec. 2 2 2
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 Cause Trip dito Trip-R dito Trip-S dito Trip-T dito Inrush dito Stabil dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-28
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.21.
Underimped Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Delay Z-Setting NrOfPhases
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s UN/IN
00.50 0.250 001
0.20 0.025 1
60.00 2.500 3
0.01 0.001 1
Measured variables
Address 14V1 Access R Text UN/IN Dec. 3
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text UN/IN Dec. 3
Event list
9-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.22.
MinReactance Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Delay XA-Setting XB-Setting NrOfPhases Angle MaxMin MIN MAX
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s UN/IN UN/IN
00.50 -2.00 -0.50 001
0.20 -5.00 -2.50 1 -180 -1
60.00 00.00 +2.50 3 180 1
0.01 0.01 0.01 1 005 2
deg <Select> -1 1
000 MIN
Measured variables
Address 14V1 Access R Text UN/IN Dec. 3
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text UN/IN Dec. 3
Event list
9-30
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.23.
NPS-DT Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Delay I2-Setting
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s IN
01.00 00.20
0.50 0.02
60.0 0.50
0.01 0.01
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
9-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.24.
NPS-Inv Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
11
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP k1-Setting k2-Setting t-min t-max t-Reset IB-Setting
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s I2/IB s s s IN
10.00 0.05 010.0 1000 0030 1.00
5.00 0.02 1.0 500 5 0.50
60.00 0.20 120.0 2000 2000 2.50
0.10 0.01 0.1 1 1 0.01
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
9-32
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.25.
Voltage Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
12
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Delay U-Setting MaxMin MIN (3ph) MIN (1ph) MAX (1ph) MAX (3ph) 14S12 R NrOfPhases
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s UN <Select> -3 -1 1 3
02.00 1.200 MAX (1ph)
0.02 0.010 -3
60.00 2.000 3
0.01 0.002 2
001
Measured variables
Address 14V1 Access R Text UN Dec. 3
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text UN Dec. 3
Event list
9-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.26.
Current-Inv Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
13
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP c-Setting 0.02 1.00 2.00 RXIDG 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 R R R R R k1-Setting I-Start NrOfPhases IB-Setting t-min
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
<Select> 0 1 2 3 s IB
1.00
013.50 1.10 1
0.01 1.00 1 0.20 00.00
200.00 2.00 3 2.50 10.00
0.01 0.01 2 0.01 00.10
IN s
1.00 00.00
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
9-34
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.27.
OLoad-Stator Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
14
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 14S16 R R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP k1-Setting I-Start t-min tg t-max t-Reset IB-Setting NrOfPhases
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s IB s s s s IN
041.4 1.10 0010.0 0120.0 0300.0 0120.0 1.00 3
1.0 1.00 1.0 10.0 100.0 10.0 0.50 1
120.0 1.60 120.0 2000.0 2000.0 2000.0 2.50 3
0.1 0.01 0.1 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.01 2
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
9-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.28.
OLoad-Rotor Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
15
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP k1-Setting I-Start t-min tg t-max t-Reset IB-Setting
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s IB s s s s IN
033.8 1.10 0010.0 0120.0 0300.0 0120.0 1.00
1.0 1.00 1.0 10.0 100.0 10.0 0.50
50.0 1.60 120.0 2000.0 2000.0 2000.0 2.50
0.1 0.01 0.1 10.0 10.0 10.0 0.01
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
9-36
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.29.
Power Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
18
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP P-Setting Angle Drop-Ratio Delay MaxMin MIN MAX 14S14 14S15 14S16 R R R Phi-Comp. NrOfPhases PN
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
PN deg % s <Select> -1 1 deg
-0.050 000.0 60 00.50 MIN
-0.100 -180.0 30 0.05 -1
1.200 180.0 170 60.00 +1
0.005 5.0 1 0.01 2
0.0 001
-5.0 1 0.500
5.0 3 2.500
0.1 1 0.001
UN*IN
1.000
Measured variables
Address 14V1 Access R Text PN Dec. 3
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text PN Dec. 3
Event list
9-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.30.
Imax-Umin Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
20
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Delay Strom
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s IN
01.00 02.00 00.70 01.00 001
0.5 0.5 0.4 0.1 1
60.00 20 1.1 10 3
0.01 0.1 0.01 0.02 2
Hold-Voltage UN Hold-Time NrOfPhases s
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 Access R R Text IN UN Dec. 3 3
Tripping levels
Event list
9-38
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.31.
Delay Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
22
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Trip-Delay Reset-Delay Integration
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s s 0/1
01.00 00.01 0
0.00 0.00 0
300.00 300.00 1
0.01 0.01 1
Measured variables
Address 14V1 Access R Text s Dec. 3
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text s Dec. 3
Event list
9-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.32.
Diff-Gen Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
23
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP g-Setting v-Setting
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
IN
0.10 0.25
0.10 0.25
0.50 0.50
0.05 0.25
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 Access R R R Text IN (Id-R) IN (Id-S) IN (Id-T) Dec. 2 2 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 Access R R R Text IN (Id-R) IN (Id-S) IN (Id-T) Dec. 2 2 2
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 Cause Trip-R dito Trip-S dito Trip-T dito Trip dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 14I4 14I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-40
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.33.
Distance Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
24
The starter and measurement settings (in columns Min., Max. and Step) with the unit 'ohms/phase' have to be divided by 10 for relays with a rated current of 5 A.
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S6 14S7 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 14S16 14S17 14S18 14S19 14S20 14S21 14S22 14S23 14S24 14S25 14S26 14S27 14S28 14S29 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP CB R TRIP CB S TRIP CB T X (1) R (1) RR (1) RRE (1) k0 (1) k0Ang(1) Delay(1) X (2) R (2) RR (2) RRE (2) k0 (2) k0Ang(2) Delay(2) X (3) R (3) RR (3) RRE (3) k0 (3) k0Ang(3) Delay(3) /ph /ph /ph /ph 1 deg s /ph /ph /ph /ph 1 deg s /ph /ph /ph /ph 1 deg s Unit <Select> Default P1 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 001.00 000.00 000.000 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 001.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 001.00 000.00 000.00 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Min. Max. Step
00000010B 00011110B
9-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Address Access Text 14S30 14S31 14S32 14S33 14S34 14S35 14S36 14S37 14S38 14S39 14S40 14S41 R R R R R R R R R R R R X (4/OR) R (4/OR) RR (4/OR) RRE (4/OR) k0 (4/OR)
k0Ang(4/OR)
Unit /ph /ph /ph /ph 1 deg /ph /ph /ph
Default 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 001.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 I>
Min. -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 2
Max. 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 0 0 0 0 6
Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 2
Delay(4/OR) s X (BACK) R (BACK) RR (BACK)
RRE (BACK) /ph StartMode UZ OC <Select> 4 6 <Select>
14S42
PhasSelMode
solid ground
Solid ground 0 RTS(R) cycl TRS(T) cycl RTS acycl RST acycl TSR acycl TRS acycl SRT acycl STR acycl 14S43 R ComMode off
PUTT Nondir
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 <Select> 0 1 off 0 5 1
PUTT Fward 2 PUTT OR2 POTT BLOCK OR 3 4 5
9-42
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Address Access Text 14S44 R
Unit
Default off
Min. 0
Max. 4
Step 1
VTSupMode <Select> off I0 I2 I0*I2 Special 0 1 2 3 4 /ph <Select> -1 1 1 deg IN IN UN IN UN IN IN /ph /ph /ph /ph /ph deg s UN <Select> 0 1 2
14S45 14S46
R R
Ref Length CT Neutral Busside Lineside
01.000 Busside
0.01 -1
30.000 1
0.001 2
14S47 14S48 14S49 14S50 14S51 14S52 14S53 14S54 14S55 14S56 14S57 14S58 14S59 14S60 14S61 14S62 14S63 14S64
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
k0m k0mAng Imin 3I0min U0 VTSup I0 VTSup U2 VTSup I2 VTSup Istart XA XB RA RB RLoad AngleLoad Delay(Def) UminFault
MemDirMode
000.00 000.00 000.20 000.20 000.20 000.07 000.20 000.07 004.00 000.0 000.0 000.0 000.0 000.0 045.0 002.00 000.05 Trip
0 -90 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.5 0 -999 0 -999 0 0 0 0.01 0
8 90 2 2 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 10 999 0 999 0 999 90 10 2 2
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 1
Block Trip Cond Trip
9-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Address Access Text 15S1 R SOFT off Non-dir
Unit <Select> 0 1
Default off
Min. 0
Max. 2
Step 1
Fwards OR2 2 15S2 R

EventRecFull
<Select> 0 1 UN UN IN s <Select> 0 1 2 3 <Select> 1 2 <Select> 1 2
off
off on 15S3 15S4 15S5 15S6 15S7 R R R R R 3U0min U Weak I OC BU Del OC BU

GndFaultMode
000.00 000.00 000.00 005.00 I0
0 0 0 0 0
2 2 10 10 3
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1
I0 I0 OR U0 I0 AND U0 Blocked 15S9 R Dir Def Non-dir Fwards 15S10 R TripMode 1PhTrip 3PhTrip
Non-dir
1PhTrip
3PhTripDel3 3 15S11 R SOFT10sec off on 15S12 15S13 R R t1EvolFaults ZExtension off on 15S14 R Weak off on <Select> 0 1 s <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 off 0 1 1 003.00 off 0 0 10 1 0.01 1 off 0 1 1
9-44
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Address Access Text 15S15 R Unblock off on 15S16 R Block Z1 off on 15S17 R Echo off on 15S18 R TransBl off on 15S19 15S20 15S21 15S22 15S23 R R R R R t1TransBl t2TransBl t1Block tPSblock
VTSupBlkDel
Unit <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 s s s s <Select> 0 1
Default off
Min. 0
Max. 1
Step 1
off
off
off
000.05 003.00 000.04 000.00 off
0 0 0 0 0
0.25 10 0.25 10 1
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1
off on 15S24 R
VTSupDebDel <Select>
off
off on 15S25 15S26 15S27 15S28 15S29 15S30 15S31 15S32 R R R R R R R R TIMER_1 TIMER_2 TIMER_3 TIMER_4 TIMER_5 TIMER_6 TIMER_7 TIMER_8
0 1 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9-45
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2-14V3 14V4-14V5 14V6-14V7 14V8-14V9 Access R R R R R Text Dec.
[Ref Length] 2 Z (RE) Z (SE) Z (TE) Z (RS) Z (ST) Z (TR) 2 2 2 2 2 2
14V10-14V11 R 14V12-14V13 R
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2-14Q3 14Q4-14Q5 14Q6-14Q7 14Q8-14Q9 Access R R R R R Text Dec.
14Q10-14Q11 R 14Q12-14Q13 R
Note: A tripping value will only be overwritten (e.g. Z(RS)) if the same loop (RS) trips again. The Real and Imaginary values of the loop impedance are transmitted on successive addresses. The 'distance to the fault' is as derived from the last trip signal. The correct distance to fault value is furnished only if the parameter 'Ref Length' is correctly configured.
9-46
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 14E15 14E16 14E17 14E18 14E19 14E20 14E21 14E22 14E23 14E24 14E25 14E26 14E27 14E28 14E29 14E30 Cause Start I0 dito Start U0 dito Meas Oreach dito Trip O/C dito Power Swing dito Trip CB R dito Trip CB S dito Trip CB T dito Trip SOFT dito Start O/C dito Meas Main dito Trip CB dito Start R+S+T dito Com Send dito Dist Blocked dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 14I15 14I14 14I13 14I12 14I11 14I10 14I9 14I8 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Event No. 14E31 14E32 14E33 14E34 14E35 14E36 14E37 14E38 14E39 14E40 14E41 14E42 14E43 14E44 14E45 14E46 14E47 14E48 14E49 14E50 14E51 14E52 14E53 14E54 14E55 14E56 14E57 14E58 14E59 14E60 14E61 14E62
Cause FreqDev dito Start R dito Start S dito Start T dito Start E dito Start I> dito Start Z< dito Delay 2 dito Delay 3 dito Delay 4 dito Delay Def dito Start RST dito Weak infeed dito Meas Bward dito Trip CB 3P dito Trip CB 1P dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset
Event mask V156 V156 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158 V158
Enable code 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192
Status 14I16
14I17
14I18
14I19
14I20
14I21
14I22
14I23
14I24
14I25
14I26
14I27
14I28
14I29
14I30
14I31
9-48
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Event No. 15E1 15E2 15E3 15E4 15E5 15E6 15E7 15E8 15E9 15E10 15E11 15E12 15E13 15E14 15E15 15E16 15E17 15E18 15E19 15E20 15E21 15E22 15E23 15E24 15E25 15E26 15E27 15E28 15E29 15E30
Cause Trip RST dito Trip Com dito Delay 1 dito Com Boost dito Trip Stub dito VTSup dito VTSup Delay dito Start R Aux dito Start S Aux dito Start T Aux dito Start E Aux dito Start RST Aux dito Trip RST Aux dito Start SOFT dito Delay >= 2 dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset
Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156
Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192
Status 15I1
15I2
15I3
15I4
15I5
15I6
15I7
15I8
15I9
15I10
15I11
15I12
15I13
15I14
15I15
9-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Event No. 15E31 15E32 15E33 15E34 15E35 15E36 15E37 15E38 15E39 15E40 15E41 15E42 15E43 15E44 15E45 15E46 15E47 15E48 15E49 15E50 15E51 15E52
Cause Meas Fward dito BOOL_OUT1 dito BOOL_OUT2 dito BOOL_OUT3 dito BOOL_OUT4 dito BOOL_OUT5 dito BOOL_OUT6 dito BOOL_OUT7 dito BOOL_OUT8 dito Start 1ph dito DelDistBlock dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset
Event mask V156 V156 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V158 V158 V158 V158
Enable code 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4095 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8
Status 15I16
15I17
15I18
15I19
15I20
15I21
15I22
15I23
15I24
15I25
15I26
9-50
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.34.
Frequency Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
25
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Frequency U-Block Delay MaxMin MIN MAX
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
Hz UN s <Select> -1 1
48.00 0.20 01.00 MIN
40.00 0.20 0.10 -1
65.00 0.80 60.00 1
0.01 0.10 0.01 2
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 Access R R Text Hz UN Dec. 3 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text Hz Dec. 3
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 Cause Block.(U<) dito Trip dito Start dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 1I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-51
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.35.
Overexcitat Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
26
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Delay U/f-Setting MaxMin MIN MAX
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s UN/fN <Select> -1 1
01.00 01.20 MAX
0.10 0.20 -1
60.00 2.00 1
0.01 0.01 2
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 Access R R Text UN/fN Hz Dec. 2 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text UN/fN Dec. 2
Event list
9-52
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.36.
Count Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
27
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP CountThresh Drop time Reset-Delay
Unit <Select>
Default P1 00000000B 1
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
1 00.01 000.1
100 30.00 300.0
1 00.01 000.1
s s
00.04 010.0
Measured variables
Address 14V1 Access R Text Dec. 0
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text Dec. 0
Event list
9-53
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Overtemp. (RE.316*4) Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:

Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP
Theta-Beginn
28
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
% % %
100 105 110 1
000 050 050 1 002.0 0.50
100 200 200 3 500.0 2.50
001 001 001 2 000.1 0.01
Theta-Warn Theta-Trip NrOfPhases

TimeConstant
min IN
005.0 1.00
IB-Setting
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 Access R R R Text Theta-Nom Pv-Nom IN Dec. 3 3 3
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 Access R R R Text Theta-Nom Pv-Nom IN Dec. 3 3 3
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 Cause Alarm dito Trip dito Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 14I2 Status 14I1
9-54
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.37.
Check-I3ph Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
29
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP I-Setting Delay
CT-Compens
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
IN s
0.20 10.0 +1.00
0.05 0.1 -2.00
1.00 60.0 +2.00
0.05 0.1 0.01
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 Cause Trip dito Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 Status 14I1
9-55
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.38.
Check-U3ph Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
30
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP U-Setting Delay
VT-Compens
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
UN s
0.20 10.0 +1.00
0.05 0.1 -2.00
1.20 60.0 +2.00
0.05 0.1 0.01
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 Cause Trip dito Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 Status 14I1
9-56
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.39.
Logic Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
31
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Logic Mode OR AND RS-Flipflop
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
<Select> 0 1 2
OR
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 Cause BinOutput dito Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 Status 14I1
9-57
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.40.
Disturbance Rec Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
32
Address Access Text 14S4 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 R R R R R R ParSet4..1 StationNr preEvent Event postEvent recMode A B 14S14 R TrigMode TrigOnStart TrigOnTrip TrigOnBin TrigAnyBi TrigStart&Bi
Unit <Select> No. ms ms ms <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 2 3 4
Default P1 01 40 100 40 A
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B 00 40 100 40 0 99 400 3000 400 1 01 20 50 20 1
TrigOnStart 0
TrigTrip&Bin 5 14S15 R BinInp 1 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S16 R BinInp 2 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S17 R BinInp 3 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 No trig 0 2 1 No trig 0 2 1 No trig 0 2 1
9-58
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Address Access Text 14S18 R BinInp 4 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S19 R BinInp 5 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S20 R BinInp 6 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S21 R BinInp 7 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S22 R BinInp 8 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S23 R BinInp 9 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S24 R BinInp 10 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S25 R BinInp 11 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger
Unit <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2
Default No trig
Min. 0
Max. 2
Step 1
No trig
No trig
No trig
No trig
No trig
No trig
No trig
9-59
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Address Access Text 14S26 R BinInp 12 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S27 R BinInp 13 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S28 R BinInp 14 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S29 R BinInp 15 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S30 R BinInp 16 No trig Trigger Inv. Trigger 14S31 R
StorageMode
Unit <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1
Default No trig
Min. 0
Max. 2
Step 1
No trig
No trig
No trig
No trig
StopOnFull 0
StopOnFull Overwrite
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 Cause BinOutput dito Mem full dito Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 14I2 Status 14I1
9-60
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.41.
Voltage-Inst Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
36
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Delay U-Setting f-min MaxMin MIN MAX 14S13 R NrOfPhases
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s UN Hz <Select> -1 1
00.01 1.40 040.0 MAX
0.00 0.01 25 -1
60.00 2.00 50 1
0.01 0.01 1 2
001
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
9-61
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.42.
Autoreclosure Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
38
Address Access Text 1S4 14S5 14S6 14S9 R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP CB2 close 1. AR Mode 1. 1P-1P 1. 1P-3P 1. 1P3P-3P
Unit <Select>
Default P1 00000000B 00000000B
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
<Select> 1 2 3
1. 1P3P-1P3P
1. 1P3P-1P3P 4
ExtSelection 5 14S10 R
2..4AR Mode
<Select> 0 1 2 3 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1
off
off 2 AR 3 AR 4 AR 14S11 R
Master Mode
off
off on 14S12 R ZE Prefault off on 14S13 R ZE 1. AR off on 14S14 R ZE 2. AR off on 14S15 R ZE 3. AR off on
on
off
off
off
9-62
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Address Access Text 14S16 R ZE 4. AR off on 14S17 R SCBypass 1P off on 14S18 R SCBypass1P3P off on 14S19 14S20 14S21 14S22 14S23 14S24 14S25 14S26 14S27 14S28 14S29 14S30 14S31 14S32 14S33 14S34 14S35 14S36 14S37 14S38 14S39 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R t Dead1 1P t Dead1 3P t Dead1 Ext t Dead2 t Dead3 t Dead4 t Oper. t Inhibit t Close t Discrim.1P t Discrim.3P t Timeout t AR Block. TMSEC_Timer1 TMSEC_Timer2 TMSEC_Timer3 TMSEC_Timer4 TMSEC_Timer5 TMSEC_Timer6 TMSEC_Timer7 TMSEC_Timer8
Unit <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 s s s s s s s s s s s s s ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms
Default off
Min. 0
Max. 1
Step 1
off
off
001.20 000.60 001.00 001.20 005.00 060.00 000.50 005.00 000.25 000.60 000.30 001.00 005.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.05 0.05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9-63
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 14E15 14E16 14E17 14E18 14E19 14E20 14E21 14E22 14E23 14E24 14E25 14E26 14E27 14E28 14E29 14E30 Cause CB Close dito CB2 Close dito Trip 3-Pol dito ZExtension dito Def. Trip dito Delay Flwr. dito Blk. to Flwr dito Inhibit Outp dito AR Ready dito AR Blocked dito AR in Prog dito First AR 1P dito First AR 3P dito Second AR dito Third AR dito Event mask Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 14I15 14I14 14I13 14I12 14I11 14I10 14I9 14I8 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-64
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Event No. 14E31 14E32 14E33 14E34 14E35 14E36 14E37 14E38 14E39 14E40 14E41 14E42 14E43 14E44 14E45 14E46 14E47 14E48
Cause Fourth AR dito P_OUTPUT1 dito P_OUTPUT2 dito P_OUTPUT3 dito P_OUTPUT4 dito P_OUTPUT5 dito P_OUTPUT6 dito P_OUTPUT7 dito P_OUTPUT8 dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset
Event mask V156 V156 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157
Enable code Status 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 14I24 1423 1422 1421 14I20 14I19 14I18 14I17 14I16
9-65
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.43.
EarthFaultIsol Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
40
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 149 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP P-Setting Angle Drop-Ratio Delay Phi-Comp. PN
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
PN deg % s deg UN*IN
0.050 000.00 60 00.50 0.00 1.000
0.005 -180.00 30 0.05 -5.00 0.500
0.100 180.00 95 60.00 5.00 2.500
0.001 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.001
Measured variables
Address 14V1 Access R Text PN Dec. 3
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text PN Dec. 3
Event list
9-66
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.44.
Voltage-Bal Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
41
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP
Unit <Select>
Default P1 00000000B 0.20 0.04 1.50 003
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
V-Unbalance UN Delay t-Reset NrOfPhases s s
0.10 0.00 0.10 1
0.50 1.00 2.00 3
0.05 0.01 0.01 2
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 Access R R R Text UN (Ud-1) UN (Ud-2) UN (Ud-3) Dec. 2 2 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 Access R R R Text UN (Ud-1) UN (Ud-2) UN (Ud-3) Dec. 2 2 2
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 Cause Trip dito Start dito Trip-Line1 dito Trip-Line2 dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 28 14I4 14I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-67
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.45.
U/f-Inv Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
47
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 14S16 14S17 14S18 14S19 14S20 14S21 14S22 14S23 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP V/f-Setting t-min t-max t-Reset t[V/f=1.05] t[V/f=1.10] t[V/f=1.15] t[V/f=1.20] t[V/f=1.25] t[V/f=1.30] t[V/f=1.35] t[V/f=1.40] t[V/f=1.45] t[V/f=1.50] UB-Setting
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
UN/fN min min min min min min min min min min min min min UN
01.10 0.20 60.0 60.0 70.00 70.00 06.00 01.000 00.480 00.300 00.220 00.170 00.140 00.140 01.00
1.05 0.01 5.0 0.2 00.01 00.01 00.01 00.001 00.001 00.001 00.001 00.001 00.001 00.001 0.80
1.20 2.00 100.0 100.0 100.00 100.00 100.00 30.000 30.000 30.000 30.000 30.000 30.000 30.000 1.20
0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 Access R R Text UN/fN Hz Dec. 2 2
9-68
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 Access R Text UN/fN Dec. 2
Event list
9-69
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.46.
Measurands Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
48
Address Access Text 14S4 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R ParSet4..1 Angle PN

Voltage mode
Unit <Select> deg UN*IN <Select> 1 2
Default P1 000.0 1.000 direct
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B -180.0 0.200 1 180.0 2.500 2 0.1 0.001 1
direct ph-to-ph
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 14V4 14V5 Access R R R R R Text UN IN P (PN) Q (PN) Hz Dec. 3 3 3 3 3
9-70
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.47.
SynchroCheck Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
49
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP maxVoltDif
Unit
Default
Min.
Max.
Step
<Select> P1 00000000B UN 0.20 10.0 0.20 0.70 0.30
00000010B 00011110B
0.05 05.0 0.05 0.60 0.10
0.40 80.0 0.40 1.00 1.00 4
0.05 05.0 0.05 0.05 0.05 1
maxPhaseDif deg maxFreqDif minVoltage maxVoltage Hz UN UN
Operat.-Mode <Select> SynChck only 0 SynChck only 0 DBus + LLine 1 LBus + DLine 2 DBus DLine 3 DBus + DLine 4
14S15 14S16 14S17
R R R
SupervisTime s t-Reset LiveBus 1ph R-S 1ph S-T 1ph T-R 1ph R-E 1ph S-E 1ph T-E 3ph-delta 3ph-Y s
0.20 0.05
0.05 0.00 0
5.00 1.00 7
0.05 0.05 1
<Select> 1ph R-S 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
9-71
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Address Access Text 14S18 R LiveLine 1ph R-S 1ph S-T 1ph T-R 1ph R-E 1ph S-E 1ph T-E 3ph-delta 3ph-Y
Unit <Select> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Default 3ph-Y
Min. 0
Max. 7
Step 1
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 14V4 14V5 14V6 14V7 Access R R R R R R R Text UN (dU) deg (dPhi) Hz (|df|) UN (max. bus V) UN (min. bus V) UN (max. line V) UN (min. line V) Dec. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 Access R R R Text UN (dU) deg (dPhi) Hz (|df|) Dec. 2 2 2
9-72
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Event list
Event No. 4E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 14E15 14E16 14E17 14E18 14E19 14E20 14E21 14E22 14E23 14E24 Cause PermitToClos dito Start dito SyncBlockd dito TrigBlockd dito SyncOverrid dito AmplDifOK dito PhaseDifOK dito FreqDifOK dito LiveBus dito DeadBus dito LiveLine dito DeadLine dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 14I12 14I11 14I10 14I9 14I8 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-73
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.48.
Rotor-EFP Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
51
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Alarm-Delay Trip-Delay
RFr-AlarmVal
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s s kOhm kOhm kOhm <Select> 1 2 3 kOhm uF
0.50 0.50 10.0 01.0 1.00 50 Volt
0.20 0.20 0.1 0.1 0.90 1
60.00 60.00 25.0 25.0 5.00 3
0.05 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.01 1
RFr-TripVal REr Uir 20 Volt 30 Volt 50 Volt
14S15 14S16
R R
RFr-Adjust
CoupC-Adjust
10.00 4.00
8.00 2.00
12.00 10.00
0.01 0.01
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 Access R R R Text Rfr (kOhm) Ck" (uF) REr" (kOhm) Dec. 1 2 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 Access R R R Text Rfr (kOhm) Ck" (uF) REr" (kOhm) Dec. 1 2 2
9-74
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Event list for Rotor-EFP

Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 14E15 14E16 14E17 14E18 Cause Trip dito Start Trip dito Alarm dito Start Alarm dito InterruptInt dito InterruptExt dito Rer-Adjust dito CoupC-Adjust dito Extern-Block dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask Enable code Status V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V156 V156 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 14I9 14I8 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 14I1
9-75
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.49.
Stator-EFP Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
52
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 14S16 14S17 R R R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP Alarm-Delay Trip-Delay
RFs-AlarmVal
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
s s kOhm kOhm kOhm
0.50 0.50 10.0 01.0 1.00 1.00 10.00 10.0 1
0.20 0.20 0.1 0.1 0.70 0.90 8.00 200.0 1
60.00 60.00 20.0 20.0 5.00 30.00 12.00 0.1 2
0.05 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01
RFs-TripVal REs
REs-2.Starpt kOhm RFs-Adjust kOhm
MTransRatio 100.0 NrOfStarpt
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 Access R R R Text Rfs (kOhm) Dec. 1
Inst. trans. ratio 1
REs" (kOhm)
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 Access R R R Text Rfs (kOhm) Dec. 1
Inst. trans. ratio 1
REs" (kOhm)
9-76
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 14E15 14E16 14E17 14E18 14E19 14E20 Cause Trip dito Start Trip dito Alarm dito Start Alarm dito InterruptInt dito InterruptExt dito 2.Starpt dito MTR-Adjust dito Res-Adjust dito Extern-Block dito Event mask Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Enable code Status 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 14I10 14I9 14I8 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 14I1
9-77
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.50.
I0-Invers Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
53
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP c-Setting 0.02 1.00 2.00 RXIDG 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 R R R R R k1-Setting I-Start NrOfPhases IB-Setting t-min
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
<Select> 0 1 2 3 s IB
013.50 1.10 1
0.01 1.00 1 0.20 00.00
200.00 2.00 3 2.50 10.00
0.01 0.01 2 0.01 00.10
IN s
1.00 00.00
Measured variables
Tripping levels
Event list
9-78
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.51.
Pole-Slip Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
55
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 14S16 14S17 R R R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP1 ZA ZB ZC Phi WarnAngle TripAngle n1 n2 t-Reset
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
UN/IN UN/IN UN/IN deg deg deg
0.00 0.00 0.00 090 000 090 01 01
0.000 -5.000 0.000 60 0 0 0 0 0.500
5.000 0.000 5.000 270 180 180 20 20 25.000
0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 0.010
5.000
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 Access R R Text UN/IN Hz Dec. 3 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 Access R R Text UN/IN Hz Dec. 3 2
9-79
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 Cause Warning dito Generator dito Motor dito Zone1 dito Zone2 dito Trip1 dito Trip2 dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code Status 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 14I1
9-80
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.52.
Diff-Line Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
56
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP g v b g-High I-Inst a1 s1 Y D 14S16 14S17 R R a2 s2 y0 y1 y5 y6 y7 y11 d0 d1 d5 d6 d7 d11
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
IN
0.20 0.50
0.10 0.25 1.25 0.50 3 0.05 0
0.50 0.50 5.00 2.50 15 2.20 1
0.10 0.25 0.25 0.25 1 0.01 1
1 IN IN
1.50 2.00 10 1.00
<Select> 0 1
1.00 <Select> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 d0
0.05 00
2.20 21
0.01 1
9-81
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Address Access Text z0 z1 z2 z4 z5 z6 z7 z8 z10 z11 14S18 14S19 R R InrushRatio InrushTime
Unit 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 % s
Default
Min.
Max.
Step
10 0
6 0
20 90
1 1
Measured variables
Address Access Text 14V1 14V2 14V3 R R R IN (Id-R) IN (Id-S) IN (Id-T) Dec. 2 2 2 Address 14V4 14V5 14V6 Access Text R R R IN (IhR) IN (IhS) IN (IhT) Dec. 2 2 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 Access R R R Text IN (Id-R) IN (Id-S) IN (Id-T) Dec. 2 2 2
9-82
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 Cause Trip dito Trip-R dito Trip-S dito Trip-T dito Inrush dito Stabil dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-83
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.53.
RemoteBin Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
57
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S6 14S7 14S8 R R R R R ParSet4..1 RemTRIP 1 RemTRIP 2 RemTRIP 3 RemTRIP 4
Unit <Select>
Default P1 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 14E15 14E16 14E17 14E18 Cause RemChan 1 dito RemChan 2 dito RemChan 3 dito RemChan 4 dito RemChan 5 dito RemChan 6 dito RemChan 7 dito RemChan 8 dito RemBinError dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V156 V156 Enable code Status 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 14I9 14I8 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 14I1
9-84
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.54.
EarthFltGnd2 Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
58
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP V-Setting I-Setting Angle tBasic tWait tTransBl CT Neutral Lineside Busside 14S16 R ComMode Permissive Blocking 14S17 R SendMode Non-dir MeasBwd 14S18 R 1 Channel off on 14S19 R Echo off Weak Bkr Weak & Bkr
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
UN IN deg s s s <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 2 3
0.200 0.10 60.0 0.050 0.050 0.100 Lineside
0.003 0.10 0.0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
0.100 1.00 90.0 1.000 0.500 0.500 1
0.001 0.01 5.0 0.001 0.001 0.001 1
Permissive
MeasBwd
off
off
9-85
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 Access R R R Text UN IN Dec. 2 2
Forwards 0
Note: This function does not provide tripping levels (Q). Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 Cause Trip dito Start dito MeasFwd dito MeasBwd dito Senden dito Recve Inh dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code Status 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 14I1
9-86
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.55.
FUPLA Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
59
Address Access Text 14S4 14S8 14S9 14S10 R R R R ParSet4..1 NoFUPMV RepRate CycleTime
Unit <Select> x x x
Default P1 0 low (2) 20
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B 0 low (2) 0 high (0) 1000 1 1 1
Measured variables The number of FUPLA measured variables depends on the configuration. Within this total configured, the order of the FUPLA measured variables measured variable numbers can be determined by assigning numbers to them.
Address 14V1 14V2 14Vn Access R R R Text FUPMV 1 FUPMV 2 FUPMV n Dec. 2 2 2
Events FUPLA events can only be configured as IBB events. Events are not recorded under the FUPLA function number. Because of the variable number of signals/events, FUPLA would require a variable number of channels. IBB events FUPLA 'Extout' to IBB channel and ER: Events are recorded under their SPA address, IBB group and event number, Addr 121 E1 . Binary signals are assigned to IBB channels using the HMI. It is not possible to mask IBB events.
9-87
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.56.
FlutterRecog Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
60
Address Access Text 14S4 14S9 14S10 R R R ParSet4..1

SupervisTime NoOfChanges
Unit <Select> s
Default P1 1.0 2
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B 0.1 2 60.0 100 0.1 1
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 14E15 14E16 Cause InputStatus1 dito InputStatus2 dito InputStatus3 dito InputStatus4 dito FlatterSig1 dito FlatterSig2 dito FlatterSig3 dito FlatterSig4 dito Event mask Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Enable code Status 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 1024 512 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 14I8 14I6 14I4 14I2 14I7 14I5 14I3 14I1
9-88
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.57.
HV distance Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
63
The starter and measurement settings (in columns Min., Max. and Step) with the unit 'ohms/phase' have to be divided by 10 for relays with a rated current of 5 A.
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S6 14S7 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 14S16 14S17 14S18 14S19 14S20 14S21 14S22 14S23 14S24 14S25 14S26 14S27 14S28 14S29 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP CB R TRIP CB S TRIP CB T X (1) R (1) RR (1) RRE (1) k0 (1) k0Ang(1) Delay(1) X (2) R (2) RR (2) RRE (2) k0 (2) k0Ang(2) Delay(2) X (3) R (3) RR (3) RRE (3) k0 (3) k0Ang(3) Delay(3) /ph /ph /ph /ph 1 deg s /ph /ph /ph /ph 1 deg s /ph /ph /ph /ph 1 deg s Unit <Select> Default P1 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 001.00 000.00 000.000 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 001.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 001.00 000.00 000.00 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Min. Max. Step
00000010B 00011110B
9-89
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Address Access Text 14S30 14S31 14S32 14S33 14S34 14S35 14S36 14S37 14S38 14S39 14S40 14S41 R R R R R R R R R R R R X (4/OR) R (4/OR) RR (4/OR) RRE (4/OR) k0 (4/OR)
k0Ang(4/OR)
Unit /ph /ph /ph /ph 1 deg /ph /ph /ph
Default 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 001.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 000.00 Non-dir
Min. -300 -300 -300 -300 0 -180 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 9
Max. 300 300 300 300 8 90 10 0 0 0 0 10
Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1
Delay(4/OR) s X (BACK) R (BACK) RR (BACK)
RRE (BACK) /ph

PhasSelMode
<Select> 9 10 <Select> 0 1
Non-dir Fward OR 14S42 R ComMode off

PUTT Nondir
off
PUTT Fward 2 PUTT OR2 POTT BLOCK OR 14S43 R 3 4 5 off 0 4 1
VTSupMode <Select> off I0 I2 I0*I2 Special 0 1 2 3 4 /ph <Select> -1 1
14S44 14S45
R R
Ref Length CT Neutral Busside Lineside
01.000 Busside
0.01 -1
30.000 1
0.001 2
9-90
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Address Access Text 14S46 14S47 14S48 14S49 14S50 14S51 14S52 14S53 14S54 14S55 14S56 14S57 14S58 14S59 14S60 14S61 14S62 14S63 14S64 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R k0m k0mAng Imin 3I0min U0 VTSup I0 VTSup U2 VTSup I2 VTSup XA XB RA RB RLoad AngleLoad SR error TR error Delay(Def) UminFault
MemDirMode
Unit 1 deg IN IN UN IN UN IN /ph /ph /ph /ph /ph deg deg deg s UN <Select> 0 1 2 <Select> 0 1
Default 000.00 000.00 000.20 000.20 000.20 000.07 000.20 000.07 000.0 000.0 000.0 000.0 000.0 045.0 0.00 0.00 002.00 000.05 Trip
Min. 0 -90 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0 -999 0 -999 0 0 -2.00 -2.00 0 0.01 0
Max. 8 90 2 2 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 999 0 999 0 999 90 2.00 2.00 10 2 2
Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1
Block Trip Cond Trip 15S1 R SOFT off Non-dir
off
Fwards OR2 2 15S2 R

EventRecFull
<Select> 0 1 UN UN
off
off on 15S3 15S4 R R 3U0min U Weak
000.00 000.00
0 0
2 2
0.01 0.01
9-91
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Address Access Text 15S5 15S6 15S7 R R R I OC BU Del OC BU

GndFaultMode
Unit IN s <Select> 4 5 6
Default 000.00 005.00 I0
Min. 0 0 4
Max. 10 10 7
Step 0.01 0.01 1
I0 I0 OR U0 I0(I2)
I0(I2) OR U0 7 15S9 R Dir Def Non-dir Fwards 15S10 R TripMode 1PhTrip 3PhTrip <Select> 1 2 <Select> 1 2 1PhTrip 1 3 1 Non-dir 1 2 1
3PhTripDel3 3 15S11 R SOFT 10sec <Select> off on 15S12 15S14 R R t1EvolFaults Weak off on 15S15 R Unblock off on 15S16 R Echo off on 15S17 R TransBl off on 15S18 R t1TransBl 0 1 s <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 s 000.05 0 0.25 0.01 off 0 1 1 off 0 1 1 off 0 1 1 003.00 off 0 0 10 1 0.01 1 off 0 1 1
9-92
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Address Access Text 15S19 15S20 15S21 15S22 R R R R t2TransBl t1Block tPSblock
VTSupBlkDel
Unit s s s <Select> 0 1
Default 003.00 000.04 000.00 off
Min. 0 0 0 0
Max. 10 0.25 10 1
Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 1
off on 15S23 R
VTSupDebDel <Select>
off
off on 15S24 15S25 15S26 15S27 15S28 15S29 15S30 15S31 15S32 R R R R R R R R R TIMER_1 TIMER_2 TIMER_3 TIMER_4 TIMER_5 TIMER_6 TIMER_7 TIMER_8 I Load
0 1 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms IN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1
9-93
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2-14V3 14V4-14V5 14V6-14V7 14V8-14V9 Access R R R R R Text Dec.
14V10-14V11 R 14V12-14V13 R
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2-14Q3 14Q4-14Q5 14Q6-14Q7 14Q8-14Q9 Access R R R R R Text Dec.
14Q10-14Q11 R 14Q12-14Q13 R
Note: A tripping value will only be overwritten (e.g. Z(RS)) if the same loop (RS) trips again. The real and imaginary values of the loop impedance are transmitted on successive addresses. The 'distance to the fault' is as derived from the last trip signal. The correct distance to fault value is furnished only if the parameter 'Ref Length' is correctly configured.
9-94
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 14E15 14E16 14E17 14E18 14E19 14E20 14E21 14E22 14E23 14E24 14E25 14E26 14E27 14E28 14E29 14E30 Cause Start I0 dito Start U0 dito Meas Oreach dito Trip O/C dito Power Swing dito Trip CB R dito Trip CB S dito Trip CB T dito Trip SOFT dito Start O/C dito Meas Main dito Trip CB dito Start R+S+T dito Com Send dito Dist Blocked dito Event mask Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V155 Reset V155 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Set V156 Reset V156 Enable code Status 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 14I15 14I14 14I13 14I12 14I11 14I10 14I9 14I8 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 14I1
9-95
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Cause FreqDev dito Start R dito Start S dito Start T dito Start E dito Delay 2 dito Delay 3 dito Delay 4 dito Delay Def dito Start RST dito Weak dito Meas Bward dito Trip CB 3P dito Trip CB 1P dito Trip RST dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset
Enable code Status 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 14I30 14I29 14I28 14I27 14I26 14I25 14I24 14I23 14I22 14I21 14I20 14I19 14I18 14I17 14I16
9-96
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Cause Trip Com dito Delay 1 dito Com Boost dito Trip Stub dito VTSup dito VTSup Delay dito Start R Aux dito Start S Aux dito Start T Aux dito Start E Aux dito Start RST Aux dito Trip RST Aux dito Start SOFT dito Delay >= 2 dito Meas Fward dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset
Enable code Status 4096 8192 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 15I14 15I13 15I12 15I11 15I10 15I9 15I8 15I7 15I6 15I5 15I4 15I3 15I2 15I1 14I31
9-97
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Event No. 15E29 15E30 15E31 15E32 15E33 15E34 15E35 15E36 15E37 15E38 15E39 15E40 15E41 15E42 15E43 15E44 15E45 15E46 15E47 15E48
Cause BOOL_OUT1 dito BOOL_OUT2 dito BOOL_OUT3 dito BOOL_OUT4 dito BOOL_OUT5 dito BOOL_OUT6 dito BOOL_OUT7 dito BOOL_OUT8 dito Start 1ph dito DelDistBlock dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset
Event mask V156 V156 V156 V156 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157 V157
Enable code Status 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 15I24 15I23 15I22 15I21 15I20 15I19 15I18 15I17 15I16 15I15
9-98
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.58.
LDU events Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
67
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 R R ParSet4..1 TRIP
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 Cause BinOutput1 dito BinOutput2 dito BinOutput3 dito BinOutput4 dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code Status 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 14I4 14I3 14I2 14I1
9-99
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.59.
Debounce Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
68
Address Access Text 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 14S16 14S17 14S18 14S19 14S20 14S21 14S22 14S23 14S24 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R SupervisTime1 SupervisTime2 SupervisTime3 SupervisTime4 SupervisTime5 SupervisTime6 SupervisTime7 SupervisTime8 SupervisTime9 SupervisTime10 SupervisTime11 SupervisTime12 SupervisTime13 SupervisTime14 SupervisTime15 SupervisTime16
Unit ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms
Default 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Min. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Max. 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9-100
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.60.
df/dt Basic channel No.: 14 Summary of parameters:
69
Address 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12
Access Text R R R R R R ParSet4..1 TRIP df/dt Frequency BlockVoltage Delay
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
Hz/s Hz UN s
-1.0 48.00 0.2 00.10
-10.0 00.00 0.2 0.10
10.0 65.00 0.8 60.00
0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 Access R R R Text Hz/s Hz UN Dec. 2 3 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 4Q2 Access R R Text Hz/s Hz Dec. 2 3
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 Cause Blocked(U<) Set dito TRIP dito Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 14I2 Status 14I1
9-101
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.61.
DirCurrentDT Basisc channel No.: 14 Summery of parameters:
70
Address 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 14S12 14S13
Access Text R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 Trip I-Setting Angle Delay tWait MemDirMode Trip Block
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
IN deg s s <Select> 0 1 s
2.00 45 01.00 0.20 Trip
0.20 -180 0.02 0.02 0
20.00 +180 60.00 20.00 1
0.01 15 0.01 0.01 1
14S14
MemDuration
2.00
0.20
60.00
0.01
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 14V4 14V5 14V6 14V7 14V8 14V9 Access R R R R R R R R R Text IN (R) IN (S) IN (T) PN (IR, UST) PN (IS, UTR) PN (IT, URS) UN (ST) UN (TR) UN (RS) Dec. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9-102
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 14Q4 14Q5 14Q6 14Q7 14Q8 14Q9 Access R R R R R R R R R Text IN (R) IN (S) IN (T) PN (IR, UST) PN (IS, UTR) PN (IT, URS) UN (ST) UN (TR) UN (RS) Dec. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 Cause Trip dito Start dito Start R dito Start S dito Start T dito MeasFwd dito MeasBwd dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-103
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.62.
DirCurrentInv Basisc channel No.: 14 Summery of parameters:
71
Address Access Text 14S4 14S5 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R R ParSet4..1 Trip I-Start Angle c-Setting 0.02 1.00 2.00 14S12 14S13 14S14 14S15 14S16 R R R R R k1-Setting t-min IB-Setting tWait MemDirMode Trip Block 14S17 R MemDuration
Unit <Select>
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
IB deg <Select> 0 1 2 s s IN s <Select> 0 1 s
1.10 45 1.00
1.00 -180 0
4.00 +180 2
0.01 15 1
13.50 0.00 1.00 0.20 Trip
0.01 0.00 0.04 0.02 0
200.00 10.00 2.50 20.00 1
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1
2.00
0.20
60.00
0.01
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 14V4 14V5 14V6 14V7 14V8 14V9 Access R R R R R R R R R Text IN (R) IN (S) IN (T) PN (IR, UST) PN (IS, UTR) PN (IT, URS) UN (ST) UN (TR) UN (RS) Dec. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9-104
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 14Q4 14Q5 14Q6 14Q7 14Q8 14Q9 Access R R R R R R R R R Text IN (R) IN (S) IN (T) PN (IR, UST) PN (IS, UTR) PN (IT, URS) UN (ST) UN (TR) UN (RS) Dec. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 Cause Trip dito Start dito Start R dito Start S dito Start T dito MeasFwd dito MeasBwd dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 14I7 14I6 14I5 14I4 14I3 14I2 Status 14I1
9-105
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
9.6.63.
BreakerFailure Basisc channel No.: 14 Summery of parameters:
72
Address Access Text

14S4 14S5 14S9 14S13 14S17 14S21 14S25 14S29 14S33 14S37 14S41 14S45 14S49 14S50 14S51 14S52 14S53 14S54 14S55 14S56 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R ParSet4..1 23105 TRIP t1 23110 TRIP t1 L1 23115 TRIP t1 L2 23120 TRIP t1 L3 23125 TRIP t2 23130 REMOTE TRIP 23135 RED TRIP L1 23140 RED TRIP L2 23145 RED TRIP L3 23150 EFS REM TRIP 23155 EFS BUS TRIP
Unit
<Select>
Default
P1 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B 00000000B
Min.
Max.
Step
00000010B 00011110B
I Setting Delay t1 Delay t2 Delay tEFP

t Drop Retrip t Drop BuTrip t Pulse RemTrip t1 active off on
IN s s s s s s <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1
1.20 0.15 0.15 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05 on
0.2 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0
5 60 60 60 60 60 60 1
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1
14S57
t2 active off on
on
14S58
RemTrip active
off
<Select>
0
on
on
9-106
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Address Access Text 14S59 R EFP active off on 14S60 R Red active off on 14S61 R Start Ext act. off on 14S62 R RemTrip after t2 t1 14S63 R NrOfPhases
Unit <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select> 0 1 <Select>
Default on
Min. 0
Max. 1
Step 1
on
on
t1 0 1 001
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 Access R R R Text IN (L1) IN (L2) IN (L3) Dec. 2 2 2
Tripping levels
Address 14Q1 14Q2 14Q3 Access R R R Text IN (L1) IN (L2) IN (L3) Dec. 2 2 2
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 Cause 23305 Trip t1 dito Event mask Set V155 Reset V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 14I2 Status 14I1
23315 Trip t1 L1 Set V155 dito Reset V155
9-107
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Event No. 14E5 14E6 14E7 14E8 14E9 14E10 14E11 14E12 14E13 14E14 14E15 14E16 14E17 14E18 14E19 14E20 14E21 14E22 14E23 14E24 14E25 14E26 14E27 14E28 14E29 14E30 14E31 14E32
Cause 23320 Trip t1 L2 dito 23325 Trip t1 L3 dito 23310 Trip t2 dito 23340 Remote trip dito 23345 Red Trip L1 dito 23350 Red Trip L2 dito 23355 Red Trip L3 dito 23375 EFP Rem Trip dito 23370 EFP Bus Trip dito 23330 Retrip t1 dito 23360 Uncon Trip t1 dito 23380 Ext Trip t1 dito 23335 Backup Trip t2 dito 23365 Uncon Trip t2 dito Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set Reset
Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V155 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156 V156
Enable code 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768
Status 14I3
14I4
14I5
14I6
14I7
14I8
14I9
14I10
14I11
14I12
14I13
14I14
14I15
14I16
9-108
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6.64.
MeasureModule
74
Basic channel number: 14 Parameter summary:

Address Access Text 14S4 14S9 14S10 14S11 R R R R ParSet4..1 PN AngleComp t1-Interval 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 60 min 120 min 14S12 14S13 R R ScaleFact1 t2-Interval 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 60 min 120 min 14S14 R ScaleFact2 Unit Select Default P1 Min. Max. Step
00000010B 000111110B 0.200 -180.0 0 2.500 180.0 8 0.001 0.1
UN*IN*3 1.000 Deg Select 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Select 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1.0000 1.0000 4 0.000
0.0001 0
1.0000 8
0.0001
0.0001
1.0000
0.0001
9-109
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Measured variables
Address 14V1 14V2 14V3 14V4 14V5 14V6 14V7 14V8 14V9 14V10 14V11 14V12 14V13 14V14 14V15 14V16 14V17 14V18 14V19 14V20 14V21 Access R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Text URS(UN) UST(UN) UTR(UN) UR(UN) US(UN) UT(UN) IR(IN) IS(IN) IT(IN) P (PN) Q (PN) cos phi Hz E1Int P1Int E1Acc P1Acc E2Int P2Int E2Acc P2Acc Dec. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0
Tripping levels
Address 14Q16 14Q17 14Q20 14Q21 Access R R R R Text E1Acc P1Acc E2Acc P2Acc Dec. 3 0 3 0
9-110
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Event list
Event No. 14E1 14E2 14E3 14E4 Cause Cnt1New dito Cnt2New dito Set Reset Set Reset Event mask V155 V155 V155 V155 Enable code 1 2 4 8 14I2 Status 14I1
9-111
RE. 316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 2004
10.
10.1. 10.1.1. 10.1.2. 10.1.3. 10.2. 10.2.1. 10.2.2. 10.3. 10.3.1. 10.3.2. 10.3.3. 10.4. 10.4.1. 10.5. 10.5.1. 10.6. 10.6.1. 10.7. 10.7.1. 10.7.2. 10.8. 10.8.1. 10.9. 10.9.1. 10.9.2. 10.9.3. 10.9.4. 10.10. 10.10.1. 10.10.2. 10.10.3. 10.10.4. 10.11. 10.11.1. 10.11.2.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION
Changes in Version 5.0 in relation to Version 4.5............................10-3 Local display unit (LDU)...................................................................10-3 New 'LDU events' function ...............................................................10-3 New processor unit 316VC61a ........................................................10-3 Known software weaknesses in V5.0 ..............................................10-3 Year 2000 conformity.......................................................................10-3 'LDU events' function .......................................................................10-3 Changes in Version 5.1 in relation to Version 5.0............................10-3 Distributed input/output system RIO580 ..........................................10-3 Year 2000 conformity.......................................................................10-4 'LDU events' function .......................................................................10-4 Changes in Version 5.1a in relation to Version 5.1..........................10-4 'I0-Invers' function ............................................................................10-4 Changes in Version 5.1b in relation to Version 5.1a........................10-4 'Min-Reactance' function..................................................................10-4 Changes in Version 5.1c in relation to Version 5.1b ........................10-4 Year 2000 conformity.......................................................................10-4 Changes in Version 5.2 in relation to Version 5.1c ..........................10-4 Frequency rate of change protection ...............................................10-4 Touch screen or SMS in parallel with the SCS connection..............10-4 Changes in Version 5.2a in relation to Version 5.2..........................10-5 Frequency rate of change protection 'df/dt'......................................10-5 Changes in Version 6.0 in relation to Version 5.2(a) .......................10-5 Directional overcurrent functions 'DirCurrentDT' and 'DirCurrentInv' ..................................................................................10-5 Breaker failure protection 'BreakerFailure'.......................................10-5 Runtime supervision ........................................................................10-5 New processor unit 316VC61b ........................................................10-5 Changes in Version Version 6.2 in relation to Version 6.0...............10-5 Analogue input/output unit 500AXM11 ............................................10-5 'Analogue RIO Trigger' function .......................................................10-5 Measurement module ......................................................................10-6 Commands via a Stage 2 LON bus .................................................10-6 Changes in Version 6.3 in relation to Version 6.2............................10-6 A/D converter unit 316EA63 ............................................................10-6 Updating the 316EA63 firmware ......................................................10-6
10-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE. 316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
10.12. 10.12.1. 10.12.2.
Changes in Version 6.4 in relation to Version 6.3............................10-7 Autoreclose Function .......................................................................10-7 Resetting of the LEDs on the LDU...................................................10-7
10-2
RE. 316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
10.
10.1. 10.1.1.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION
Changes in Version 5.0 in relation to Version 4.5 Local display unit (LDU) From Version V5.0, the software supports the local display unit (see Section 5.10.).
10.1.2.
New 'LDU events' function The LDU events list only includes tripping levels. The new function 'LDU events' enables additional events to be selected for listing (see Section 3.6.5.).
10.1.3.
New processor unit 316VC61a All devices equipped with the local display unit (LDU) also have the new processor unit 316VC61a; devices not equipped with the LDU can have either the 316VC61 or 316VC61a. Whether there is a 316VC61a in a device not equipped with a local control and display unit can be determined using the HMI diagnostic function. Upon selecting 'Show diagnostic data', one of the lines displayed is 'HW No.', which in the case of 316VC61a includes the code '0434': HW-Nr.: xxxx/0434/xx
The computing capacity of the 316VC61a is 250 % (compared with 200 % in the case of 316VC61). 10.2. 10.2.1. Known software weaknesses in V5.0 Year 2000 conformity Version V5.0 is influenced to a minor extent by the year 2000 problem, but the correct operation of the devices during and after the change of the century is assured. The only shortcoming concerns the time stamp, which retains '19' in the year instead of changing to '20'. All other data is correct and the events are listed in the correct chronological order. 10.2.2. 'LDU events' function The 'LDU events' function is not available when the HMI is operating off-line. 10.3. 10.3.1. Changes in Version 5.1 in relation to Version 5.0 Distributed input/output system RIO580 From Version V5.1, the software supports the distributed input/output system RIO580. The latter comprises a number of distributed input/output units that are connected to an RE.316*4 device via an MVB (multipurpose vehicle bus) and an MVB PC board. Refer to Data
10-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE. 316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Sheet 1MRB520176-Ben and Operating Instructions 1MRB520192Ben for further details. 10.3.2. Year 2000 conformity With the exception of the VDEW version, for which the synchronisation of the time will not function via the VDEW bus in the year 2000, all Version V5.1 devices are fully immune to the year 2000 problem. 10.3.3. 'LDU events' function The 'LDU events' function is also now available when the HMI is operating off-line. 10.4. 10.4.1. Changes in Version 5.1a in relation to Version 5.1 'I0-Invers' function The 'I0-Invers' is always enabled regardless of the software key in use. 10.5. 10.5.1. Changes in Version 5.1b in relation to Version 5.1a 'Min-Reactance' function The underreactance function can now also be connected to Y-connected VTs. 10.6. 10.6.1. Changes in Version 5.1c in relation to Version 5.1b Year 2000 conformity All devices are immune to the year 2000 problem from Version V5.1c onwards. 10.7. 10.7.1. Changes in Version 5.2 in relation to Version 5.1c Frequency rate of change protection A df/dt function has been added to the function block library. Because of an error, however, it is not displayed for all the software keys there are (see Section 10.8.1.). 10.7.2. Touch screen or SMS in parallel with the SCS connection Where a station control system (SCS) is connected via a LON or MVB bus, there is a second fully functional SPA interface available in parallel which can be used for connecting a touch screen an SMS.
10-4
RE. 316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
10.8. 10.8.1.
Changes in Version 5.2a in relation to Version 5.2 Frequency rate of change protection 'df/dt' V5.2a of the HMI shows the 'df/dt' function for all software keys, for which the 'Frequency' function has been enabled.
10.9. 10.9.1.
Changes in Version 6.0 in relation to Version 5.2(a) Directional overcurrent functions 'DirCurrentDT' and 'DirCurrentInv' Two directional overcurrent functions 'DirCurrentDT' with definite time and 'DirCurrentInv' with inverse time characteristic have been added to the function block library. They are accessible for all software keys for which the current and voltage functions are enabled.
10.9.2.
Breaker failure protection 'BreakerFailure' A 'BreakerFailure' function has been added to the function block library which is accessible to all software keys.
10.9.3.
Runtime supervision A runtime supervision function can be specified for pairs of inputs that have been configured as double indications (see Section 5.4.2.2.).
10.9.4.
New processor unit 316VC61b Version 6.0 supports the new 316VC61b processor unit. To determine whether a device contains a 316VC61b processor unit or not, open 'List diagnostic information' in the HMI diagnostic function and check the code '04Ax' on line 'HW No.': HW No.: xxxx/04Ax/xx
10.10. 10.10.1.
Changes in Version Version 6.2 in relation to Version 6.0 Analogue input/output unit 500AXM11 Versions from V6.2 onwards support the analogue input/output unit 500AXM11 of the distributed input/output system RIO580.
10.10.2.
'Analogue RIO Trigger' function An 'Analogue RIO Trigger' function has been added to the function block library which is available for all software keys and facilitates the supervision of the input signals of the analogue input/output unit 500AXM11. Refer to the Operating Instructions for the distributed input/output system RIO580, Publication 1MRB520192-Uen, for further details.
10-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE. 316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
10.10.3.
Measurement module The 'MeasureModule' function has been added to the function block library. It is available for all software keys and facilitates the threephase measurement of voltage, current, active and reactive power, power factor and frequency. Two counter impulse inputs are also provided for metering energy.
10.10.4.
Commands via a Stage 2 LON bus In automation systems equipped with a Stage 2 LON interbay bus, commands can be transferred from the automation system to the bay units.
10.11. 10.11.1.
Changes in Version 6.3 in relation to Version 6.2 A/D converter unit 316EA63 From Version V6.3, the software supports the new A/D converter unit 316EA63 which supersedes the previous plug-in unit 316EA62.
10.11.2.
Updating the 316EA63 firmware The new A/D converter unit 316EA63 allows the firmware to be downloaded without opening the unit. If updating is necessary, this is done in a similar fashion as updating the main processor firmware (see Section 7.5.). After each update of the main processor firmware, the 316EA63 firmware must also be updated. When applying the DOS HMI, updating is made by calling up the batch file 'loadEA63.bat', which is listed in the HMI directory. When applying the Windows HMC CAP2/316, the item 'EA63 download' in the menu 'Options' must be selected.
10-6
RE. 316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
10.12. 10.12.1.
Changes in Version 6.4 in relation to Version 6.3 Autoreclose Function The Autoreclose function provides two new events First AR completed 2. ...4 AR completed
These can be transmitted on the IEC60870-5-103 bus with the information numbers 128 and 129. 10.12.2. Resetting of the LEDs on the LDU From V6.4 the resetting of the LEDSon the LDU is handled in the same way as that of the LEDs on the front plate. The resetting occurs: With the external resetting input signal The resetting key behind the front plate The common reset menu on the LED
10-7
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Oktober 04
12.
12.1 Fig. 12.2 Fig. 12.3
APPENDICES
List of abbreviations and symbols ....................................................12-2 Numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4 (front view) ...........12-3 Numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4, View from the rear showing the location of units in the narrow N1 case (top) and wide N2 case (bottom). .................12-4 Example of the input transformer connections for a directional protection function (DirCurrentDT, DirCurrentInv, MinReactance, Power, Pole-Slip, UIfPQ and MeasureModule) .............................12-5 Example of the input transformer connections for the differential protection functions (Diff-Transf, and Diff-Gen) ............................12-6 Dimensioned drawings for semi-flush and surface mounting of the test socket cases Types 316TSS01 (top) and XX93 (bottom) ..12-7 Test socket case type XX93 A C Connectors for test plug YX91-4 D Ancillary test connector YX93, where fitted .....................12-8 Set-up for testing: with the test set Type XS92b and the test socket case Type XX93................................................12-9 Set-up for testing: with the test set Type XS92b and the test socket case Type 316TSS01 .......................................12-9 Wiring diagram for the test socket case Type XX93 (corresponds to HESG 324 171)....................................................12-10 Wiring diagram for the test socket case Type 316TSS01 (corresponds to HESG 324 348)....................................................12-11
Fig. 12.4
Fig. 12.5
Fig. 12.6
Fig. 12.7
Fig. 12.8
Fig. 12.9
Fig. 12.10
Fig. 12.11
Check list for replacing hardware units Report for replacing hardware units TEST REPORT Typical wiring diagram for the numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4 Notification
12-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
12.1
List of abbreviations and symbols IA IB IN IK k0 KI KU KZ UN Zi ZL = RL + jXL Z0L ZLp ZLs ZOR Index i : balancing current : load current : rated current : fault current : zero-sequence compensation or residual current coefficient : main CT ratio : main VT ratio : impedance ratio : rated voltage : impedance reach of zone i : positive-sequence line impedance : zero-sequence line impedance : primary positive-sequence line impedance : secondary positive-sequence line impedance : impedance setting of the overreach zone : zone No.
12-2
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 12.2
Numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4 (front view)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Green LED (stand-by) LEDs for 1st I/O unit LEDs for 2nd.. I/O unit Reset button behind frontplate Local display unit (LDU) with optical serial interface Text space
12-3
Fig. 12.3
12-4
316GW61
316GW61 316EA62/316EA63 316DB61/316DB62/316DB63 316VC61a/316VC61b 316DB61/316DB62/316DB63
316EA62/316EA63 316VC61a/316VC61b 316DB61/316DB62/316DB63 316DB61/316DB62/316DB63 316DB61/316DB62/316DB63 316DB61/316DB62/316DB63

316NG65
ABB Switzerland Ltd
HEST 965023 C
Numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4, View from the rear showing the location of units in the narrow N1 case (top) and wide N2 case (bottom).
316NG65
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 12.4
Example of the input transformer connections for a directional protection function (DirCurrentDT, DirCurrentInv, MinReactance, Power, Pole-Slip, UIfPQ and MeasureModule)
Providing the c.ts, v.ts and input transformers are connected as shown in Fig. 12.4, the details concerning direction given in Chapter 3 apply, i.e. when active power is flowing from the generator to the power system, the power measured by the power function is positive. The star-point c.ts may also be used (dotted connections).
12-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 12.5
Example of the input transformer connections for the differential protection functions (Diff-Transf, and Diff-Gen)
Providing the c.ts, and input transformers are connected as shown in Fig. 12.5, the details given in Sections 3.5.2.1. (Diff-Transf) and 3.5.2.2. (Diff-Gen) apply, i.e. the differential current becomes zero for a through-fault.
12-6
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Panel cutout
Panel cutout
Fig. 12.6
Dimensioned drawings for semi-flush and surface mounting of the test socket cases Types 316TSS01 (top) and XX93 (bottom)
12-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 12.7
Test socket case type XX93 AC D Connectors for test plug YX91-4 Ancillary test connector YX93, where fitted
12-8
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Test socket case XX93
Numerical line protection REL 316*4
Ancillary test connector YX93
Test plug and cable YX91-4
Test set XS92b Printer
PC
HEST 985 004 FL
Fig. 12.8
Set-up for testing: with the test set Type XS92b and the test socket case Type XX93
Test socket case 316TSS01
Numerical line protection REL 316*4
Test set XS92b
Test connector RTXH24 and cable YX91-7
Printer
PC
HEST 985 005 FL
Fig. 12.9
Set-up for testing: with the test set Type XS92b and the test socket case Type 316TSS01
12-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 12.10
Wiring diagram for the test socket case Type XX93 (corresponds to HESG 324 171)
12-10
Checklist for replacing hardware modules in RE.316*4 units

99-06
Not applicable Not fitted Read out and save the existing unit settings (always necessary when replacing the 316VC61). Read out or print the diagnostic and event lists (for defects) Switch off the auxiliary supply. Short-circuit the external CT leads and then disconnect them. Disconnect the external VT leads. Disconnect the current and voltage circuits from the unit. Unscrew the electrical-to-optical converter Type 316BM61 (OBI) or withdraw the PC card. If necessary, fit a coupling device to loop the optical fiber cable so that the rest of the system can continue to operate. Remove the covers from the unit. Mark the slot of the module to be replaced and withdraw it. Make a note of the modules technical data. Compare the ordering code and software of old and new modules. Make a note of the technical data of the new module. Insert the new module in the slot previously marked. Refit the covers on the unit. Refit the electrical-to-optical converter Type 316BM61 (OBI) or reinsert the PC card. Reconnect the ground to the unit if it was removed. Reconnect CT and VT circuits. Switch on the auxiliary supply. Download to the unit the settings previously saved (always necessary when replacing the 316VC61) and also any FUPLA logic on the disc. Check the operation of the unit (e.g. check the voltages and currents in the Display analog channels menu. Depending on the type of module that has been replaced, other checks may be necessary such as for a 316DB61/62/63 the alarms, tripping signals and binary inputs).
Completed
1) 1) 1)
2) 3)
1) Only necessary when replacing the input transformer module 316GW61. 2) Flush-mounted version: Remove the auxiliary supply plug, unscrew the backplate (4 large and 4 small screws around the edge, 2 screws holding the power supply unit and 2 screws holding the RS232 interface; the connectors do not have to be removed). Surface-mounted version: Swing the relay out on its hinges and remove the backplate as for the flush-mounted version. 3) Refer to the respective Operating Instructions for the locations of the modules (slots).
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 12.11
Wiring diagram for the test socket case Type 316TSS01 (corresponds to HESG 324 348)
12-11
Report to be filled in after replacing hardware modules in RE.316*4 units

02-05
To enable a record of the modules to be kept (traceability), please forward the following information to ABB Switzerland Ltd (by fax or mail) whenever modules are replaced: Address ABB Switzerland Ltd Utility Automation Systems Repair Center Warenannahme PT EG Bruggerstrasse 72 CH-5401 Baden Switzerland Fax ++ 41 58 585 31 30
General data Client .............................................. Station ......................................... Feeder .................................... RE.316*4 data (sticker on unit) Type of unit Unit ID Serial No. Drawing No. / Revision index Ordering code Software version (sticker below reset button) Module data Old module Type of module / Revision Module ID Serial No. Drawing No. / Revision index Barcode No. Software version of ICs (if any) ........................................ ........................................ ........................................ ........................................ ........................................ New module ........................................ ........................................ ........................................ ........................................ ........................................ A .......... Vers. .......... A .......... Vers. .......... A .......... Vers. .......... A .......... Vers. .......... .................................................................. .................................................................. .................................................................. Item .......... .................................................................. .................................................................. FW: .................... HMI: ....................
Date when hardware replaced .................... Remarks: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................
Name:
Signature:
Date:
TEST SHEET
STATION: Control and Protection Unit Type REC316*4
Checklist Kind of check Remarks
FEEDER:
04-11
Relay number Visual check for transport damage Visual check of external wiring Check of relay grounding Check of supply voltage (DC/AC) Check of settings Check of C.T. circuits Check of P.T. circuits Secondary injection with test set type ...... Check of input signals Check of control and interlocking Check of signalisation/alarms Point to point test to the SCS Check of starting breaker failure protection Check of tripping Final check refer to the SCS test sheets
Checked by Date: Signature:
Client Date: Signature:
TEST SHEET
Settings According to separate print out Software version of the relay ....................
FEEDER:
04-11
Secondary injection Channel number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * 100/200 V or 1/2/5 A respectively Remark: If the AD channel reference value is not 1.0 it is advisable to inject rated value ref. value to get on the display 1.00 UN/IN. Example: Rated current generator = 540 A, C.T. ratio = 600/5 ---> Ref. value = 0.9 Injected current = 5 0.9 A = 4.5 A ---> Display = 1.00 [4.50 A] Main C.T./P.T. ratio [A/A], [kV/V] AD channel rated value * [A], [V] AD channel ref. value [-] Injected value [A], [V] Display AD Channels calculated displayed [UN], [IN] [UN], [IN]
Special checks/ functions ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................
Result .............. .............. ..............
TEST SHEET
Activation/Deactivation of Binary Inputs
FEEDER:
04-11
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
Function/Remarks OC 101 OC 102 OC 103 OC 104 OC 105 OC 106 OC 107 OC 108 OC 109 OC 110 OC 111 OC 112 OC 113 OC 114 ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ............................................
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
TEST SHEET
STATION: Control and Protection Unit Type REC316*4 FEEDER:
04-11
Activation/Deactivation of Alarm Relays Function/Remarks DB61 S 101 ............................................................................................................ DB62 S 102 ............................................................................................................ DB63 S 103 ............................................................................................................ S 104 ............................................................................................................ S 105 ............................................................................................................ S 106 ............................................................................................................ S 107 ............................................................................................................ S 108 ............................................................................................................ S 109 ............................................................................................................ S 110 ............................................................................................................ DB61 DB62 DB63 S 201 S 202 S 203 S 204 S 205 S 206 S 207 S 208 S 209 S 210 S 301 S 302 S 303 S 304 S 305 S 306 S 307 S 308 S 309 S 310 S 401 S 402 S 403 S 404 S 405 S 406 S 407 S 408 S 409 S 410 ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Client Signature: Date: Signature:
Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61 DB62 DB63
DB61 DB62 DB63
Checked by Date:
TEST SHEET
Activation of Tripping Relays Function/Remarks DB61 DB62 C 101 Contact 1 C 101 Contact 2 C 102 Contact 1 C 102 Contact 2 C 201 Contact 1 C 201 Contact 2 C 202 Contact 1 C 202 Contact 2 C 301 Contact 1 C 301 Contact 2 C 302 Contact 1 C 302 Contact 2 C 401 Contact 1 C 401 Contact 2 C 402 Contact 1 C 402 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
FEEDER:
04-11
DB61 DB62
DB61 DB62
DB61 DB62
TEST SHEET
STATION: Generator Protection Type REG316*4
UNIT:
04-11
Relay number Visual check for transport damage Visual check of external wiring Check of relay grounding Check of supply voltage (DC/AC) Check of settings Check of C.T. circuits Check of P.T. circuits Secondary injection with test set type ...... Check of input signals Check of signalisation/alarms Point to point test to the SCS Check of starting breaker failure protection Check of tripping Primary tests Final check refer to the SCS test sheets
TEST SHEET
Generator datas Manufacturer Type .............................. .............................. Type of turbine .............................. (Steam, hydro etc.) Synchronous reactance Xd .................... p.u. Transient reactance Xd' .................... p.u.
UNIT:
04-11
Rated power .............................. MVA Rated voltage .............................. kV Rated current .............................. A
Settings According to separate print out Software version of the relay ....................
Secondary injection Channel number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * 100/200 V or 1/2/5 A respectively Remark: If the AD channel reference value is not 1.0 it is advisable to inject rated value ref. value to get on the display 1.00 UN/IN. Example: Rated current generator = 540 A, C.T. ratio = 600/5 ---> Ref. value = 0.9 Injected current = 5 0.9 A = 4.5 A ---> Display = 1.00 [4.50 A] Main C.T./P.T. ratio [A/A], [kV/V] AD channel rated value * [A], [V] AD channel ref. value [-] Injected value [A], [V] Display AD Channels calculated displayed [UN], [IN] [UN], [IN]
TEST SHEET
UNIT:
04-11
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
TEST SHEET
STATION: Generator Protection Type REG316*4 UNIT:
04-11
Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61 DB62 DB63
DB61 DB62 DB63
Checked by Date:
TEST SHEET
UNIT:
04-11
DB61 DB62
DB61 DB62
DB61 DB62
TEST SHEET
STATION: Line Protection Type REL316*4
FEEDER:
04-11
Relay number Visual check for transport damage Visual check of external wiring Check of relay grounding Check of supply voltage (DC/AC) Check of settings Check of C.T. circuits Check of P.T. circuits Secondary injection with test set type ...... Check of input signals Check of signalisation/alarms Point to point test to the SCS Check of starting breaker failure protection Check of HF circuits HF - End to End test Check of tripping Check of reclosing Directional check Stability check (longitudinal diff. function) Final check refer to the SCS test sheets
TEST SHEET
Primary line datas Length ..................... km Settings According to separate print out Software version of the relay ........
FEEDER:
04-11
Pos. seq. impedance ..................... /ph angle .................... Zero seq. impedance ..................... /ph angle .................... Main C.T./P.T. ratio Analogue inputs 1 - 3 ..................... / ................... Analogue inputs 7 - 9 ..................... A / ................... A Secondary injection Impedance function "Distance" Nom. val. [/ph] X (1) X (2) X (3) X (4/OR) XA XB --------------------Measured value [/ph] R S T Forward Backward
Analogue input 4 .................... / ............ Analogue input 5 .................... / ............ Analogue input 6 .................... / ............
Directional earth fault function "EarthFaultIsol" Nom. val. [VA] Measured value [V A = VA]
Directional earth fault function "EarthFltGnd2" I-Setting [A] Nom. val. Meas. val. V-Setting [V] Nom. val. Meas. val.
Longitudinal differential function "Diff-Line Measuring of the basic setting g Phase R S T Nominal val. [A] Measured value [A] If the fibre optic link or the relay at the opposite station is not ready, the Diff-Line function is blocked and the analogue inputs can only be checked using the menue Display AD Channels.
Synchrocheck function "SynchroCheck" Parallel injection (1phase) of "uLineInput" and "uBusInput1" or "uBusInput2" respectively Injected "uLineInput" parallel "uBusInput1" Differential voltage voltage [V] Unom. [UN] Umeas. * [UN] Differential angle nom. [deg] meas. * [deg] "uLineInput" parallel "uBusInput2" Differential voltage Unom. [UN] Umeas. * [UN] Differential angle nom. [deg] meas. * [deg]
* To be read in the menu "Display Function Measurements" ---> "SynchroCheck" Synchrocheck function must be released Additional functions ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ Checked by Date: Signature: Client Date: Signature: Result .............. .............. ..............
TEST SHEET
FEEDER:
04-11
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
TEST SHEET
STATION: Line Protection Type REL316*4 FEEDER:
04-11
Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61 DB62 DB63
DB61 DB62 DB63
Checked by Date:
TEST SHEET
FEEDER:
04-11
DB61 DB62
DB61 DB62
DB61 DB62
TEST SHEET
STATION: Transformer Protection Type RET316*4
FEEDER:
04-11
Relay number Visual check for transport damage Visual check of external wiring Check of relay grounding Check of supply voltage (DC/AC) Check of settings Check of C.T. circuits Check of P.T. circuits Secondary injection with test set type ...... Check of input signals Check of signalisation/alarms Point to point test to the SCS Check of starting breaker failure protection Stability test of differential function Check of tripping Final check
TEST SHEET
Transformer data Manufacturer Type Rated power SN ............................................... ............................................... .............../.............../............... MVA Primary side HV Rated voltage Rated current Positive-sequence impedance .................... kV .................... kV .................... A HV-LV LV-TV HV-TV Type of cooling .................... (ONAN, ONAF etc.) Vector group .................... Secondary side LV .................... kV .................... A Tertiary side TV .................... kV .................... A
FEEDER:
04-11
.................... % at .................... MVA .................... % at .................... MVA .................... % at .................... MVA Settings According to separate print out Software version of the relay ..........
Main C.T./P.T. ratio Analogue inputs 1 - 3 Analogue inputs 4 - 6 Analogue inputs 7 - 8 Analogue input 9 Secondary injection
...................../................... A/A ...................../................... A/A ...................../................... ...../..... ...................../................... ...../.....
Differential function "Diff-Transf" Measuring of the basic setting g Primary side HV Phase R S T * Nominal value with single phase injection = g (1/a) IN * k k = 3 for star connection; k = 1 for delta connection; k = 1.5 for zigzag connection Nom. val. [A]* Secondary side LV Meas. val. [A] Tertiary side TV Nom. val. [A]* Meas. val. [A]
Meas. val. [A] Nom. val. [A]*
Overvoltage function "Voltage-DT" P.T. location on ............... kV side
Phase R S T
Nom. val. [V]
Meas. val. [V]
Additional functions ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ Checked by Date: Signature: Client Date: Signature:
Result .............. ..............
TEST SHEET
FEEDER:
04-11
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61
DB62
DB63 Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
TEST SHEET
STATION: Transformer Protection Type RET316*4 FEEDER:
04-11
Result .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............
DB61 DB62 DB63
DB61 DB62 DB63
Checked by Date:
TEST SHEET
FEEDER:
04-11
DB61 DB62
DB61 DB62
DB61 DB62
Delete data
Notification Form for Errors in this Document Dear User, We constantly endeavour to improve the quality of our technical publications and would like to hear your suggestions and comments. Would you therefore please fill in this questionnaire and return it to the address given below. ABB Switzerland Ltd Utility Automation Systems Betreuung Dokumentation, PTU-BD1 Bruggerstrasse 72 CH-5401 Baden Telefax +41 58 585 35 82 Concerns publication: 1KHA000835-UEN (RE-316*4 V6.4 to V7.0) Have you discovered any mistakes in this publication? If so, please note here the pages, sections etc.
Do you find the publication readily understandable and logically structured? Can you make any suggestions to improve it?
Is the information sufficient for the purpose of the publication? If not, what is missing and where should it be included?
Name Company Postal code Town
Date
Country
Notification Form for Equipment Faults and Problems Dear User, Should you be obliged to call on our repair service, please attach a note to the unit describing the fault as precisely as possible. This will help us to carry out the repair swiftly and reliably, which after all is to your own advantage. Please attach a completed form to every unit and forward them to the address below. Place of delivery Baden/Switzerland: ABB Switzerland Ltd Utility Automation Systems Repair Center Warenannahme Terminal PT-EG Bruggerstrasse 72 CH-5401 Baden
Equipment data: Unit type: Serial No.: ..................................... In operation since: Reason for return: (tick where applicable) Overfunction No function Outside tolerance Abnormal operating temperature Sporadic error Unit for checking Remarks/Description of fault:
Customer: Address: Please contact: Phone:
Date:
Fax:
Notification Form for Software Errors and Problems Dear User, As we all know from practice, software does not always function as expected for all applications. A precise description of the problem and your observations will help us to improve and maintain the software. Please complete this form and send it together with any supporting information or documents to the address below. ABB Power Technologies AB Substation Automation Product Support, Supportline SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telefax +46 21 14 69 18 E-mail: sa-t.supportline@se.abb.com
Unit/ System:
REC316*4 REG316*4 REL316*4 RET316*4 XS92a / XS92b
SW Version: SW Version: SW Version: SW Version: SW Version:
REC216 REG216 HMI other:
SW Version: SW Version: SW Version: SW Version:
Problem:
Program error (unit/system) Error in manual other:
Program error (HMI /PC) Suggestion for improvement
Can the error be reproduced at will?
yes
no
Particulars of hardware and software (unit/system configuration including jumper positions, type of PC etc.):
Problem located? Suggested changes enclosed?
yes yes
no no
The following are enclosed (floppy with settings etc.): Floppy other: Description of problem: Unit/system settings, file name:
Customer: Address: Please contact: Phone:
Date:
Fax:
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM: (continuation)
ACTION (internal use of ABB Sweden only) Received by: Answered by: Problem solved? Week: Name: yes Position: Date: Date: no Consequence:
IMPORTANT NOTICE!
Experience has shown that reliable operation of our products is assured, providing the information and recommendations contained in these Operating Instructions are adhered to. It is scarcely possible for the instructions to cover every eventuality that can occur when using technical devices and systems. We would therefore request the user to notify us directly or our agent of any unusual observations or of instances, in which these instructions provide no or insufficient information. In addition to these instructions, any applicable local regulations and safety procedures must always be strictly observed both when connecting up and commissioning this equipment. Any work such as insertion or removal of soldered jumpers or setting resistors, which may be necessary, may only be performed by appropriately qualified personnel. We expressly accept no responsibility for any direct damage, which may result from incorrect operation of this equipment, even if no reference is made to the particular situation in the Operating Instructions.
ABB Switzerland Ltd Utility Automation Systems Bruggerstrasse 72 CH-5400 Baden / Switzerland Telefon +41 58 585 77 44 Telefax +41 58 585 55 77 E-mail substation.automation@ch.abb.com www.abb.com/substationautomation

1KHA000835-UEN en RE.316 4 Numerical Protection and Control Unit - Operating Instructions (Edition Oct 2004)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1KHA000835-UEN en RE.316 4 Numerical Protection and Control Unit - Operating Instructions (Edition Oct 2004)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RE.

Version 6.4 and higher

1. Introduction 2. Description of hardware

3. Setting the functions

4. Description of function and application

6. Self-testing and diagnostics

7. Installation and maintenance

9. Interbay bus (IBB) interface

10. Supplementary information

Look in the following Chapter (C) / Sections (S):

How to install and connect it

Checks upon receipt Location Process connections Control system connections

How to set and configure it

How to check, test and commission it

How to view and transfer data

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

NOTICE: An important instruction that must be observed.

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

blocking scheme (also for reversal of fault energy direction)

REL316*4 includes the following communication channel functions:

REL316*4 includes the following logic functions:

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

(Overexcitat) (U/f-Inv) (Voltage-Bal) (Overtemp) (Stator-EFP) (Rotor-EFP) (Pole-Slip) (I0-Invers) (BreakerFailure)

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Measurement and monitoring functions:

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Auxiliary supply unit Connection unit

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Battery voltage U1: 110 or 125 V DC U3: 48; 60; 110 V DC

Tolerance +10 % / -20 % 36...140 V DC

Output 110 V or 125 V, 1.1 A 96 V, 1 A 96 V, 1 A

U2: 110; 125; 220; 250 V DC 88...312 V DC

Only the green LED is lit during normal operation.

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Injection unit REX010 (front view) (corresponds to HESG 448 574)

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

R'Ps [m] >8 > 32 > 128

Uis [V] 0.85 1.7 3.4

Version M11 M12 M13

R'Ps [] > 0.45 > 1.8 > 7.2

Uis [V] 6.4 12.8 25.6

Version M21 M22 M23

ABB Switzerland Ltd